Skip to main content

Full text of "The American monthly microscopical journal"

See other formats 


» Cin tlapsretanest hy Tei +n . vhs Me. Le (lanes } bh: us 
Eat op ne : ate ai ba ce. 
‘i Nise Fes cart ait aanaled a) ot) 
Lhe theta rant ate uaa at Mh 
ae 


i ti 
< 7 


ont 
fora nana eS 


Hie 

Set aaa fy 

Ba 
ast 
a4 Tat 


i Tauiht minis host iy 
any ; 


Siena 


* ss 


tate i . f tire 
aceite MR ett tenet na UMAR 
eee 
ie Cale A i eee 
af} ey Weta’ Ht 
4 ne ay # eet 


‘ ne 
si aiiioetata atte bate st as 
aes 8 


ae 3 


ne 
¥) 
Py 
is 
++ 


a 
H 
| - : 


Ava 


Vy 
iT 4 ee 
HIRO Mihs PRT MLN RLREE NL (ER gt nae at ay 
rer ehhh rs ii > si i? 4 ek bi ie + wi Ui ti +t) 
i Ht ascii tay ve ated Prt ha ah 5a Fuga 3 ‘i birth iiets (eeu yh vel Ae we Sy 
Hepa URE Me tne etter Be BS et Ra et 
HT bh ; ; hs ict Falrsshc Stange ; 
PA peti atari ana To tem in Ey Pept tet a ir eenee hema a a 
, ity! dima) teint ps ars 


H | ad 
yohe hse eve chy 4 
nt ety! tis bit felgh ee} 


( a _ 
5 Le ‘SS 


a - a - 


mew 


a ae a a a 


a 
oe _ a = se 


Oe oo ee ee 


= 
; ¢ 
a - > 
' 
= 7 
: 
= 
- 


(THE) AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL: 


Ssh | CONTAINING 


PeRePeISUTIONS TO BIOLOGY. | 


VOLUME X 


FOUNDED IN 1880, BY ROMYN HITCHCOCK, F. R. M. S. 
PUBLISHED, SINCE 1887, BY CHAS. W. SMILEY, 
WASHINGTON D. C. 


611514 
Jeieap ss 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Common Mould (plate) 

Eye of the Cray-fish (plate) 

Zeiss Microscope Stand B, medium size (pk ite) 

Zeiss Achromatic Condenser (figure) , 

Zeiss Heating Oven (figure) ; : 

Zeiss Sliding Objective Changer (figure) A 

Zentmayer’s Abbe Condenser our 

Desmids (plate) : 

King Microtome (figure) 

Bacteria (plate) 

Zeiss Photo- -micrographic Apparatus (plate) : 

Zeiss Photo-micrographic Apparatus for Vertical Microscope (figure) 
Tentacle-bearing Animalcule (plate) Eg SONG 4 aca 
Spores of Plant Rusts (plate) 

Inferior Side of Barberry Leaf (figure) . 

Section of A®cidium Fruit of 42cidium hep: aticarum (figure) 
Section of Liver Containing Eggs of a Worm (plate) 
Apparatus for Examining Blood “(plate) ae: 
Apparatus for Examining Blood (plate) 

Frog-plate and Irrigatine Apparatus (figure). . 

Thoma’s Apparatus for Studying Circulation of the Blood (figure) 
Lighton’s Dark-field Illumination (plate) AG Bh 
Griffith’s Fine Adjustment (figures) 


PAGE. 


mune te 
NH ROW H 


e) 


AL wv Wo COnT D 


WOn bv HNTW OD 


HHH eH 


A COMMON MOULD, 


(PENCILLIUM GLAUCUM.) 


THE AMERICAN 
MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


Vou. X. JANUARY, 1889. IN On sl 


AM communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial - 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Amert- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Fostal Order for $7.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Fill, London, accompanied by the yearly price of 
five shillings. 


Examination of Mould, (Pencillium glaucum.) 
By Pror. H. L. OSBORN. 


HAMLINE, MINN. 


Every one is familiar with mould, such as accumulates on bread, jelly 
or old boots after they have been left in damp places. Not every one, 
however, knows that mould is a v egetable and few understand its real 
nature. With a microscope of good power (250 dia.) one can see 
most of what is herein described; with 350 diameters everything will 
be made clear to the careful observer. 

There are many kinds of mould. Some are not Pexc7l/éum at all; 
others are quite like it, varying only in minute particulars. Thats; 
not all mould is Penccllium men not all Pencéilium is P. glaucum. 
But this description will nearly fit any Pezc7llcam and aid the student 
in examining whatever species he happens to find. To be sure of get- 
ting a specimen of Peczll/cwm, put a moist cracker in a damp place 
for 48 hours and then examine it for a sage-green spot which will prob- 
ably appear. Pexczllium is recognized with the naked eye by its 
color, by the low film it forms ie it is attached, and by the fine dust 
“hich can be blown from its surface. Other moulds common to such 
places are either of a diflerent color or they form a fuzzy, thicker 
aneks reaching from 4 to 3 inch over the ‘* moulding” surface. 

. Gross Anatomy. SOhtive with naked eye the velv ety appear- 
ance of the surface of Penczl/ium. Let fall a drop of water upon it 
from a dropping tube, and notice (1) the powdery dust which the drop 
has disturbed and which forms a fine cloud, soon dissipated, and (2) 
that the water does not spread and moisten the surface of the film, but 
remains in droplets which can be shaken off the film. Butalcohol and 
some other fluids so dropped upon it spread and moisten it. 

A few instructive experiments may be named :—First, arrange six 
vessels (tumblers are good) in pairs—two of distilled water, two of 
distilled and sweetened water (using sugar enough to make a weak 
syrup), and two containing moistened cracker or cake. Holding over 
each vessel a piece of oui shake off upon | the water and moist 


Copyright: 1889, by C. W. See 


2 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ January, 


cracker some of the dust. Cover each tumbler with paper to keep out 

dust but to let in air Put them away, a set of three ina moist dark - 
place, a set of three ina moist Z4gh¢ place. In the pure water, whether 

in the dark or the light place, two or three days will have produced no 

change. In the syrup or the cake, from both places, spots of green 

will have appeared upon the surface. Therefore, mould grows in the 

dark as well as in the light, and will not grow in water containing no 

organic matter. 

In similar ways it may be shown that mould grows well on meat 
broth and other watery media ; that it grows faster in warm places and 
slower in cold places. 

2. Examination with Low Power.—Upon the tip of a needle 
catch the smallest possible speck of mould, add a drop of water, cover 
‘it and place under the low power. There will perhaps appear some 
very fine threads, but mainly a great dimness with some very dark 
curved lines. This mount is a failure, proving that water is not a uni- 
versal mounting medium. That might have been suspected from the 
water not moistening the film when first tried. Begin again with the 
needle, and now use alcohol upon the slide. When viewed under the 
microscope it will appear that the mould is made up of fibres matted 
together. These will show still better under the high powers. Before 
using them, mount a new slide in alcohol, carefully teasing the speck 
of mould before covering it. To ‘‘ tease” it, take a needle in each 
hand, hold down the speck with one needle and pull the mould away 
with the other one. This separates the fibres for easier inspection. 
As the alcohol evaporates rapidly meanwhile, some more must be 
added from time to time, getting it under the cover with a pipette. _ 

3. Under High Power.—The teased speck now appears to be a 
great complex of fine wavy threads. They make up the large part of 
the mould, and are called 7yphe@e (webs) because of their being matted 
and woven together. These are of two kinds :—(1) which run indefi- 
nitely, many havi ing no cross partitions ;(2) which are broken by trans- 
verse joints ‘and which terminate in branches tipped with small spheres. 
Besides these two kinds of hyphe numerous small spheres called coxzdza 
will be found in the mount. The hyphe and conidia together consti- 
tute the mould. The next question is, how are they put together? If 
a mould growing on a fluid-like broth be carefully examined one can 
see that it consists of a coat or scum which floats on the fluid, and that 
from this, called the mycelzum, hyphe carrying the dust before noticed 
are borne aloft into the air. These are invisible to the naked eye. but 
careful examination of bits caught with the needle from such a film 
convinces you that there are two kinds of hyphe, those of the mycelium 
and others arising from them into the air. 

4. The Mycelial Hyphez.—A single thread from the complex, 
under medium power, is illustrated in figure 1 of the plate. Observe 
the long and narrow. flexuous, and parallel-sided thread or hypha: 
that it branches frequently ; that these branches are of equal diameter 
with the main stem ; that the stem is not empty but contains something, 
and that the stem is one continuous tube through all its length and not 
broken by subdividing cross-walls. The older mycelial hyphe are not 
one single tube, but. like the aerial hyphz, are transversely divided. 
In newly raised mycelium many of the undivided ones will be found, 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 3 


which, when older, will become broken up by partitions. It is well 
to draw one or more of the hyphe with all the branches. While doing 
this it may be necessary to move the slide about. If so, care should be 
taken not to draw different parts of the hyphe on different scales. A 
camera lucida will help in drawing. 

Having noted carefully and drawn the outline of one hypha of the 
mycelium, next, with the highest magnifying powers and best illumi- 
nation, examine in greater demail some single portion of one of these 
hyphae. Its eetion will show patches ae lighter and darker color. 
Very skilful staining would help in demonstrating these, but it is rather 
difficult. To stain, irrigate with hematoxylin, which, when afterward 
cleared with alcohol, w ill make the light and dark patches more conspic- 
uous. Careful study of the lighter patches will show that they are vacant 
spaces in the centre of yee hypha surrounded by a darker exterior 
substance. The former are vacuoles; the latter, the protoplasm, of the 
hypha. Along the tube in the protoplasm may be seen dark spots, 
the nuclei of the protoplasm. The hypha is not green colored, and 
contains no trace of green bodies such as are foul in protecoccus. 
The mycelial hyphe being left for a day or two in pure water the con- 
tents of the hyphz will disappear, and the clear, empty hyphe will be 
seen like the dead cell-walls of yeast. They have no power to.retain 
life except they be fed. See figure 2. 

5. The Aerial Hyphe.—T hese are derived by branching from the 
my celial hyphe. They are short and cut across by transverse parti- 
tions, as are some of the mycelial hyphz near where they arise. These 
hyphe are peculiar because of the very complicated grow vth to be found 
at their tips. The plan of arrangement at the tips of the erect hyphe 
is not easy to discover. It is helpful to mount the specimen in dilute 
caustic potash (5%), but it can be made out in an alcoholic mount. It 
will be seen that the small spheres or conidia are arranged in rows like 
a string of beads, and at the base of each row a single large piece can 
be seen (fig. 4). This is the éas¢dzum. One of these basidia is at 
the base of each row of conidia. Several basidia are carried in turn by 
one joint and a similar joint bearing a similar lot of basidia and conidia, 
or perhaps several others may be borne upon the end of one erect 
hypha. All these parts form a sort of broom-shaped expansion on the 
hypha, far more complicated in fact than is shown in the figure. Closer 
examination of the basidium will show that it is pointed above; that 
the conidium grows from this cone, and that the other conidia are held to- 
gether by a fine connective piece not shown in the figure. When these 
ueeaeatians have all been made and recorded by Ekeiches: the chief 
- facts in the structure of the mould will have been made out. 

6. Physiology.—The uses of the various parts of this organism 
may be noted briefly. The mycelium, spread out over the parce of 
the nutrient host, absorbs from it the substances which as food promote 
the growth of the parasite. The aerial hyphe, on the other hand, have 
nothing to do with absorption of food from the host, and are wholly 
paneeeed 3 in producing certain buds—the conidia—which are especially 
well adapted to a wide distribution from their minute size. The conidia 
themselves are spores from which may grow an entire new mycelium. 
Any hypha could grow and produce a mycelium, but the conidia are 
far more favorable Bok for preservation and distribution than ordinary 


4 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ January, 


hyphe. Here, then, isa simple division of labor, one set of hyphe 
being nutritive organs, the other reproductive. 

the ~ Mould a Plant.—That Pexcz/izum is a living organism has now 
been shown by its power of growth, the forming from spores or conidia 
of new my celia. 

Its presence on damp and warm nutrient substance is also readily 
understood when we yecall how light the conidia are and how they 
float off asa cloud of dust. Experiments on the vitality of conidia 
would show that their power of growth is not at all impaired by drying 
up, and that examination of ihe air of closets and rooms would how 
them to be present. We have then, in the moulding of bread, a very 
simple condition of aflairs, as intelligible as any gardening process. 

Following the course of events fom the conidia it fick sends out 
a small fae. which growing longer and longer, branching and re- 
branching, becomes a ‘hy pha. then a mycelium. Later still you would 
find this mycelium shooting up aerial hy phe, and these in turn produc- 
ing conidia like the one we start from. Here, then, is a somewhat 
more complicated course of life from that observed in yeast, for we 
have the yeast buds made directly from the body of yeast ; but the 
conidia buds arise not from the body which grows from the conidia 
(viz., the mycelial hypha). but from the body which grows from it (viz., 
the aerial hypha). This introduces us to a degree ot complication sur- 
passing any thing found in yeast or in protococcus. The branching 
and division of the threads, the new members remaining attached = 
the mass, make possible the building up of a complex str Senne like the 
mycelium. Here, as in all the fungi or moulds, the cells are never 
formed by longitudinal division but “only by transverse division. If 
mould is an organic being or a living thing, is it animal or plant? We 
find that the protococcus, which can live and thrive in rain-water by 
the power it has, through the presence of chlorophyll, can do what no 
animal can do. It would shortly die in rain-water. Hence we can 
separate the two by this Pow er through chlorophyll. But is yeast or 
the mould an animal also? There are reasons based ona study of plants 
as a whole which make it imperative to consider the mould a plant, 
but a parasitic plant, one living upon food ready-made, and not elab- 
orating, from simple mineral sources, the complex chemical constit- 
uents of its own protoplasmic substance. 

Conclusion.—This is hardly the place for any discussion of the nu- 
merous biological speculations which are suggested by Pencéllium., 
but it may be fad that we are here in that realm of the organic world 
to which the bacteria are believed to belong, and that here started the 
theory of spontaneous generation from the seemingly spontaneous 
growth of mould, the conidia being then entirely overlooked. 


Oo—_— 


The Hoagland Laboratory, of Brooklyn, N. Y., is now open for 
work. The director is Dr. Geo. M. Sternberg. Dr. G. T. Kemp, of 
Johns Hopkins University, who is associate in bacteriology and phys- 
iology, will conduct practical courses in bacteriology and physiology 
during the spring. The medical schools are realizing the importance 
of thorough scientific work in the medicine of to-day, and providing 
for it more and more extensively. 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 5 


The Character of Bacteria.* 
By B. M. BOLTON, M. D., 


PROFESSOR OF PHYSIOLOGY, HYGIENE AND BACTERIOLOGY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH CAROLINA. 


A great many phenomena which occur around us every day are due 
to the activity of microscopic beings. The subject has aroused very 
great interest, not only among strictly scientific men, but in persons 
engaged in other callings as Ww Salles for it has been shown that many of 
the most important processes in nature are caused by bacteria. The sub- 
jects which are of most interest to us at present are the decomposition 
of vegetable and animal matter, and infectious diseases. Strictly speak- 
ing, fermentation is not due to bacteria. 

Bacteria are very minute plants. They are the smallest living things 
that we know. Many millions of them together do not weigh as men 
as a grain of sand. The individual bacterium can only be seen with a 
microscope of high power. But most of them grow so rapidly that 
even starting eae an invisible amount, they form a mass readily observ- 
able with the naked eye in a few days. They form, for the most part. 
very characteristic masses upon potatoes or nutrient gelatine, so that, 
even without the microscope, we see marked differences. Their cul- 
tures are of various colors, and they differ also in other respects. So 
we can study bacteria at the present day largely without the microscope. 

There are other minute plants w hich Alga cause diseases. Certain 
mould fungi belonging to the same class as the mould every one has 
seen upon old bread and cheese also cause disease, but bacteria cause 
such diseases as typhoid fever, cholera, anthrax, etc., and so they are 
of more interest at present. 

Fermentation is caused by the yeast fungi, which are larger than 
bacteria, and are ovoid in shape. They multiply by budding. A little 
knob appears on one side of one of the oval bodies and grows and sends 
out another knob or bud. The bacteria multiply by Sane A bac- 
terium divides into two, which again divide, etc. Bacteria are divided 
into (1) cocci or round bacteria, (2) bacilli or rod-shaped bacteria, and 
(3) spirilla or cork-screw shaped bacteria. But how are we able to 
assert so confidently at the present day that decomposition and disease 
are caused by bacteria? The proof is perfectly conclusive. Take a 
piece of meat, or vegetables, or fruits of any sort, and free them from 
bacteria, and then prevent the access of bacteria afterwards; the sub- 
stances so treated do not spoil. Cut out a piece of flesh from a freshly 
killed animal and merely stop it up in a tube plugged with raw cotton, 
and if you succeed in doing this without getting any bacteria on it, it 
can be preserved indefinitely. Or take a creo piece of flesh or other 
perishable article, and stop it up in this way, and then kill out the bac- 
teria by heat. Articles treated in this way are also prevented from 
spoiling. It is not necessary to exclude the air, for of course the raw 
cotton does not exclude it. All that the cotton does is to filter out the 
bacteria, so that the air which comes in contact with the substance to 
be preserved is purified from the things which cause decomposition. 
In every case where there is decomposition there are always bacteria, 
and where there is no decomposition there are no bacteria. 

The proof in the case of certain infectious diseases of animals and 


*From a report of the Department of Ae ricuiture of South Carolina, October, 1388. 


6 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [January, 


plants is equally convincing. Several observers noticed that the blood 
and other tissues of animals. suffering from the disease known as anthrax 
or malignant pustule contained small rod-like bodies, and it was sup- 
posed that these were in some way the cause of the disease. Inocu- 
lation of traces of blood or tissues from affected animals was always 
followed by the disease, but how was it possible to separate out the 
little rods from the other things contained in the blood? If this could 
be accomplished, they could be tried upon animals, and if they produced 
the disease the proof would be conclusive. This is just what Koch 
accomplished. He found that the little rod-like bodies grew very well 
outside of the body, and by cultivating them through many generations 
he freed them from anything which might have peas clinging to them 
in the blood. The only thing which his cultures contamed were the 
little rods which had descended from those inthe blood. Now he found 
his cultures to be just as virulent as the blood, etc., from an animal 
suffering from anthrax, which proves conclusively that it is these little 
rod-shaped bacteria w hich cause the disease. 

I have cultures obtained from Koch’s laboratory, and can produce an- 
thrax in mice, guinea pigs, rabbits, etc., by inoculating the smallest 
trace. Not only’ has this been proved for anthrax, but for many other 
diseases as well. But if I inoculate with such a small amount, how is 
it that bacteria are found in all the organs and tissues? The answer is 
evidently that the bacteria have multiplied enormously in the animal. 

Fermentation has been proven to be due toa yeast fungus as con- 
clusively as infectious diseases and decomposition have been shown to 
be due to bacteria. 

Although we are so positive at the present time that we know the 
cause of many infectious diseases, of decomposition, and of fermentation, 
it has not been many years since the whole subject was looked upon 
with skepticism by men whose opinion was of weight. Still, for at 
least 230 years the idea that infectious diseases are caused by a living 
contagion has been entertained by men of learning. But the deductions 
of the advocates of the theorv were more philosophical speculations 
than facts proven by exper iment, and the whole subject fell into disrepute. 
There was about it so much that appeared vague and intangible, and 
even ludicrous, to medical men of 150 years ago, that in 1726 a comic 
poem appeared, placing the germ theory and its advocates in such a 
ridiculous light that it was well into the present century before any~ 
thing like general interest was again aroused. The German anatomist, 
Jacob Henle, in 1840 expressed “the conv iction that contagious diseases 
must be caused by a living microscopic organism, and the w eight of 
his opinion did much to give a new impetus to investigation in this 
line of research. The reasons why Henle was led to his conclusions 
are the following : 

In infectious diseases there is something which is directly or indi- 
rectly communicated from a sick animal to a well one and causes dis- 

ease in the latter. It is very probable that the thing which causes the 
sickness does so in very small quantities, because one sick animal can 
infect a whole herd. It is also invisible to the naked eye. If it were 
an invisible gas, it would begin to affect the animal at once, whereas 
we all know that a certain time alw ays elapses between the exposure 
and the breaking out of the disease. If you bring a sick animal into a 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 7 


herd the well animals are not affected for a day or more, if at all. If 
the sick animal gave off an injurious gas, the chemist will tell you that 
it would begin to show itself at once. ‘here are no chemical sub- 
stances which take such a long time to operate. It seems, therefore, 
that it must be a very small amount of an invisible substance. But if 
the substance is too small in amount to cause the disease at once, why 
does it cause it after several days? The answer is that the substance, 
whatever it is, must have increased ; it must have the power‘of growing 
at the expense of the animal. If it does so increase and multiply, it 
must be a living being of some sort—either an animal or a plant. And 
it is now known to be plants of a different sort in each disease. 

These, of course, are purely theoretical reasons, but they are so logi- 
cal that they have rapidly won conviction. About the same time that 
Henle, in Germany, arrived at these conclusions, an American, Dr. 
K. Mitchell, also came to the same opinion, independently. From this 
time to 1876 a great deal of work was done to prove the connection 
between bacteria and disease. It had already been proven in 1837 by 
Cagniard, Latour, and Schwann, independently, that fermentation is 
due to yeast fungi, and Pasteur and others had also done valuable work, 
but it was reserved for Robert Koch to establish in the manner already 
described that for malignant pustule and other diseases bacteria are the 
cause. 

Since 1876 bacteriology has developed into a science of itself, in 
which are engaged anibers of specialists. The laboratories in Europe 
and in America give evidence of the interest and zeal with which the 


co) 


subject is being studied. Not only have the physicians and veterina- 
rians found it of great benefit in their branches, but agriculturists and 


chemists as well. 


Report upon the Postal Club Boxes—II. 
By QUEEN MAB. 


Box cd.—The charm and value of the Cole Studies consists in their 
being real studies, and not superficialities. The text accompanying the 
slides gives the etymology, their megascopic and microscopic character- 
istics, together with illustrations of the objects, their mode of prepara- 
tion, and the bibliography of the subject. 

Slide No. 1 contains a transverse vertical section of the blade ofa 
foliage leaf of Rhododendron ponticum, selected because of the excel- 
lent type it affords of leaf structure. The leaf was decolorized in al- 
cohol previous to cutting, was stained with logwood, and mounted in 
Canada balsam. 

Slide No. 2 is a vertical section of cluster cup, -#cédium compost- 
tarum var. tussilaginis, in situ on leaf of Zusstlago farfara. It 
shows two Wi eiilia on the lower surface of the leaf, and one spermogo- 
nium, which, as usual, is on the upper surface and directly above the 
<Eicidium cup. The method of preparation should be as follows :— 
The freshly gathered leaf with its parasitic growth should be sliced be- 
fore it has time to decay, or be preserved in a 50% solution of alcohol. 
The sections may be mounted in glycerine, glycerine jelly, or Farrant’s 
liquid. If allowed to dry, the spores may nie wet in turpentine and 


8 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (January, 


mounted in Canada balsam. The appearance of these slides is some- 
what marred by the fallibility of the cement used. A good jet black 
and permant cement, workingas easily and drying as readily as asphalt. 
is a great desideratum a mong preparers. As the tags only of the Club 
boxes contain addresses, members will greatly eee the work of 
the club by securely attaching these tags. 

Box y?.—Mr. John Kruttschnitt contributes slides illustrative of the 
anatomy of Véctoréa r egta, which he regards as somewhat anomalous. 
The specimens are (1) Transy erse section of petiole. (2) Perpendicular 
section of a main rib. (3) Longitudinal section of same: (4) Fibro- 

vascular tissue of same. (5) Tissue from main rib near its juncture 
with the petiole, showing stellate structure. (6) Tissue from lamina, 
and perpendicular section of same showing stellate structure. 

The contributor calls attention to the almost total absence of fibro- 
vascular tissue in this plant, suggesting that the sparing manner in 
which this tissue is represented in the common white lily (Vymphea 
odorata) may have its compensation in the abundance of its stellar 
structure. In V¢ctoréa regéa he finds stellate structure in the leaf only, 
bnt as showing that some isolated vascular fibres do occur he refers to 
slide No. 4. All are mounted in a saturated solution of camphor and 
chloroform, about a teaspoonful to a pint of water. Unfortunately the 
white zine cement of these slides has yielded and is encroaching upon 
the field. 

The increasing fullness of the notes which accompany the Club boxes 
shows that the members realize the truth of the saying, ‘* Knowledge 
is not given us to keep, but to impart ; its worth is lost in concealment.” 
Minute details of methods of preparation are of value, not only foi the 
amount of actual information conveyed, but for the suggestiv eness of 
that information also. 

Box W*.—Slide No. 1, contributed by Prof. C. H. Kain, of Phil- 
adelphia, is a group of 22 arranged diatoms. fossil and recent, from 
Nottingha am, Md., Isle of Mors, Jutland, and Hammonton, N. J. The 
following species are included: Actznocyclus ehrenbergii, Pinnularia 
nobilis, Navicula firma, Heliopelta chrenbergii, and 7rinacria re- 
gina. ‘The diatoms are arranged with mechanical finger on the slide. 
mounted in balsam, and the cement used is Brown’s rubber. Forgetting 
the caution as to care in the use of higher powers, somebody has 
brought an objective down upon the cover, to its detriment and that of 
two of the valves of 7yzzacréa. 

No 2 by Prof. C. H. Kain has marine diatoms from mouth of Squan 
River, N. J., prepared by boiling in nitric acid, adding bichromate of 
potash, and mounted in balsam. The point of interest show n in this siide 
is the exceedingly variable nature of the diatom Navécula lyra. 
Three photographic reproductions of the Schmidt’s plates are appended 
showing under how many names have been figured what are clearly 

varieties of Navicula lyra. Prof. Kain says itis not difficult to ar- 
range these diatoms in a series which shows scarcely any difference be- 
tween the two consecutive forms, and yet between the first and last of the 
series a wide difference will be manifest. It is not strange that the 
student of the diatomacee often becomes puzzled in such a labyrinth, 
where a single line more or less, or some slight difference in curvature, 
is deemed sufficient to warrant the constitution of a new species. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 9 


Notice of New Methods—VI. 
By GEORGE C. FREEBORN, M. D.. 


INSTRUCTORIN NORMAL HISTOLOGY, COLLEGE OF PHYSCIANS AND SURGEONS, NEW YORK 


Application of Methyl Green for Demonstrating the Chemi- 
cal Reaction and Death of Cells.—Mosso.-Virchow’s Arch., cxiii, 
1888, p. 397. 

The author uses a 0.2% solution of methyl green in a 1% aqueous 
solution of sodium chloride. A drop of this solution is placed on a 
slide; the finger is pricked with a needle, and the resulting drop of 
blood is brought in slight contact with the drop of methyl green solu- 
tion on the slide and a cover-glass put on. On observing such a prepa- 
ration under the mciroscope, at first the leucocytes seem to resist 
the action of the fluid. After a few minutes they become stained a 
light violet color, which gradually darkens. The red cells change ; 
some become becher formed: others appear to become irregularly ex- 
cavated in their interior, and figures, resembling those fescrined by 
Marchiafava and Cellias being characteristic of malarial infection, ap- 

‘pear. 

For studying these changes in the cells, the preparation is placed in 
a moist chamber, or the cover-glass is painted round with a ring of vase- 
line, and then observed for several hours. At the end of three hours, 
some of the leucocytes become stained bluish, others green, while 
others, the greater number, stain an intense violet. The plasmodian 
figures in the red cells entirely disappear and most of the cells become 
clear. At the end of twenty-four hours, the so-called nuclei of the 
leucocytes become stained an intense green ; the remaining parts undergo 
a degeneration and a granular violet colored detritus remains. The 
violet colored leucocytes, on the contrary, retain the green stained nuclei 
and hyaline drops appear in their bodies. Some of the red cells lose 
their hemoglobin, become colorless, and form the so-called phantoms. 
Others, resisting cells, show differences. Some become granular and 
stain blue-violet; others stain a blue-violet without becoming granular ; 
while others remain homogeneous in their centres, stain greenish- blue, 
and surround themselves w vith a fine granular zone. 

If, while a drop of fresh blood from a fish is under observation, a 
drop of the above methyl green solution is allowed to run under the 
cover-glass, rapid changes in the cells take place. The active leucocytes 
immediately draw in their processes, become round, and numerous small 
globules appear in their interior. The white cells stain a pale violet 
color. The vacuoles remain colorless, while the so-called nuclei stain 
an intense violet. Some cells change, in a few moments, into a hya- 
line globule with thick granules and nuclei like fragments on one side, 
while on the other side and in the interior fine granules, in active mo- 
tion, are seen. 

The present author has also used this methyl green solution for 
the study of ciliated epithelium. Ifa piece of the ‘mucous membrane 
from the mouth of a frog is piaced in a drop of the solution, one notices 
the following changes :—The cell bodies stain a violet color while the 
cilia are still in motion; those in which the motion of the cilia have 
ceased staingreen. While the cilia are in motion no signs ofa nucleus 
is to be seen; after half an hour the cilia cease to move and one or two 


10 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (January, 


nuclei, stained blue, appear. Their outlines are indistinct and the color 
gradually changes to green. The cilia remain colorless. After four to 
five hours all the nuclei become stained emerald-green and only a very 
few cells remain colored violet. 

The author has also found that methyl green prevents the coagulation 
of blood. A 4%% solution in a 2% aqueous solution of sodium chloride 
retards the coagulation, when used in the proportion of 2 c.c. to 40 c.c. 
of blood. In the proportion of 3 to 4 c.c. to 40 c.c. of blooa it en- 
tirely prevents the coagulation. 

Method of Making Sections of Teeth and Bone with the 
Preservation of the Delicate Parts.— Weil. Zeitsch. f. Wiss. 
Mikros. v, 1888, p. 300. 

The fresh tooth is broken in half and placed in a concentrated solu- 
tion of mercuric chloride for one hour; then in 30% alcohol. After 
24 hours this is replaced with 50% alcohol, and at the end of another 24 
hours by 70%. After 12 hours the tocth is placed in a mixture of 
100 c.c. of strong alcohol and 2 c.c. of the tincture of iodine, for the 
removal of the black precipitate of mercury. This requires about 12 
hours, The iodine is then removed by washing in strong alcohol, 
which is renewed as long as it becomes colored. 

The specimen is now to be stained. For this purpose, the author 
recommends either an aqueous or alcoholic solution of borax carmine. 
The specimen is removed from the alcohol, washed in water, frequently 
changed, for half an hour, and then placed in the staining fluid. The 
aqueous fluid requires 1 to 2 days; the alcoholic fluid 2 to 3 days for 
staining. When the staining is complete, place the specimen in acidu- 
lated alcohol [70% alcohol 100 c.c., Hel. 1 c.c.] for 12 hours if the aque- 
ous solution has been used, and for 24 to 36 hours if the alcoholic stain- 
ing fluid has been used. Then in 97% alcohol for 15 minutes, double 
this time in absolute alcohol, and finally in an etherial oil for 24 hours 
or more. 

On removing the specimen from the oil, wash quickly in xylol and 
place in chloroform for 24 hours; then in a solution of chloroform 
and hard Canada balsam for 24 hours; then add to this solution as much 
of hard balsam as it will take up, and pour the specimen with as much 
of the balsam as will cover it into a porcelain dish. Place the dish on 
a water-bath and heat gradually to go° C.; keep at this temperature 
until a sample of the balsam becomes hard like glass upon cooling. 

Thin slices are now cut off with a fine saw, wet with cold water. 
These are ground and polished in the usual manner, and finally mounted 
in hard balsam dissolved in chloroform. 

An Easy Method of Reproducing. Photographically, Histo- 
logical Sections.—-Tambusti, Zeitsch. f. Wiss. Mikros. v, 1888, p. 

The author covers a piece of board with several layers of black cloth 
and stretches on this a small strip of albumen paper, sensitized with 
silver nitrate. The slide containing the specimen to be reproduced is 
placed upon this paper, cover side down, firmly clamped to the board, 
and the whole exposed to direct sunlight until the paper becomes 
sufficiently blackened. The print is then developed in the usual way. 
In place of the sensitized albumen paper the ferrocyanide of iron paper 
used for making blue prints may be used. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 11 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


Color of Flowers and Fruits.—In the December number of the 
Am. Jour. Scz. Prof. Goodale reviews the work of Courchet, Schim- 
per, and previous observers upon the origin of color granules in flowers 
and fruits. To the granular proteid bodies found in the living proto- 
plasm the name plasts or plastids has been given, and they are termed 
leucoplasts, chloroplasts, or chromoplasts, as they contain no color, are 
colored with chlorophyll, or have some other coloring matter. The 
chromoplasts always originate from either leucoplasts or chloroplasts. 
Blue, violet, and rose tints are generally due to colored cell sap while 
yellow and orange tints are chiefly due. to crystals or solid masses which 


originate from the chromoplasts. 


To Remove the Gelatinous Covering of Amphibian Eggs.— 
Prof. C. O. Whitman (Am. WVat., vol. xxii, p. 857) recommends the use 
of a 10% solution of sodium hypochlorite diluted by five or six times its 
volume of water. The eggs are immersed, after hardening, only long 
enough to dissolve the covering. Necturus eggs required about five 
minutes. 


Clover Rust.—Prof. L. M. Underwood reports (ot. Gaz., vol. 
Xlil, p. 302) the appearance of this rust, Uromyces tréfoléz, upon Tr?- 
folium pratense in the vicinity of Syracuse the Bes summer. The 
damage done to the clover crop he estimates from 5 5 to 20 per cent. of 
the value of the crop. As this is its first reported attack upon the red 
clover in this country, it is a question of special interest to agricultur- 
ists as well as botanists. 


Pores of Libriform Tissue.— Dr. Emily L. Gregory, in the Bul- 
letin of the Torrey Botanical Club (vol. xiii, p. 197), “has an elaborate 
discussion of the relation of the bordered pores in the cells of libriform 
tissue to the flow of the sap of plants. The tissues of representatives 
of 64 families of plants were examined, and the author finds the arrange- 
ment of these pores such as to lead to the conclusion that they are ‘ie 
most important means of sap flow, especially i in that portion ‘of tissue 
lying next the cambium layer. The pores in a large number of cases 
are on the tangential side of these cells, thus facilitating the supply of 
sap to the newly forming tissues of early summer. 


Poison Organs of the Mosquito.—Prof. Geo. Macloskie describes 
(Am. Nat., vol. xxii, p. 885) the poison glands and duct of the mos- 
_quito (Culex). He has been able, by staining and dissection, to show 
that the poison gland is one of three minute ‘glands (the others being 
ordinary salivary glands) on each side of the head, and connected with a 
minute duct which traverses the length of the long pointed piercer w hich 
forms an A impor tant portion of the ‘mouth parts ‘of the mosquito. ashe 


* This department i is conducted by Prof. i H. Pillsbury. 


12 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (January, 


writer maintains that this fluid is intended mainly to prevent the coagu- 
lation of the proteids of plants which the animal sucks from the tissues, 
and that its poisonous effect upon other animals is only secondary. 

If so, it would perhaps follow that it is not introduced into the human 
flesh as a poison. It is difficult to see what purpose the irritating 
effect of the bite upon other animals can serve the mosquito, since it 
must make the chances of its getting nourishment from the blood of 
other animals many times less than it otherwise would be. It may be 
worthy of inquiry whether the irritating effect is not incidental and per- 
haps only occasional, and due to other causes than the fluid which 
seems, by analogy, to have another distinct purpose. The bite of the 
mosquito is ordinarily extremely irritating to the writer, but under 
many circumstances this effect is entirely wanting. My house is on the 
border of a wood, through which flows a sluggish stream, and the re- 
gion is infested with mosquitoes, the bite of which is exceedingly poison- 
ous. During the cold evenings of summer these pests enter the cellar 
windows through the course netting with which they are stopped, and 
occasionally fn their way into the “living rooms. I have noticed that 
these rarely give me any trouble from ee bites. I am not able to 
offer any explanation, but cannot see why these should have less power 
‘to use their poison glands, if such they are, than those which attack me 
upon the piazza. 


Haplodiscus piger, Weldon.—Mr. W.F. R. Weldon, of St. John’s 
College, Cambridge, describes in Quar. Jour. Mic. Scz. (vol. xxix, p. 
1) a new organism, to which he gives the above name, found by him 
occasionally - in a tow-net near New Providence, Bahamas. It is 1.3 
mm. long by 1.1 mm. broad, having a general resemblance to a proto- 
zoan, but possessing a structure w hich indicates its relationship to the 
worms. Mr. Weldon is uncertain as to its systematic position, but 
seems inclined to place it among the Cestodes. 


Blastopore of Rana temporaria.—Mr. Harold Sidebotham, in the 
same journal (vol. xxix, p. 49), gives the result of his studies upon the 
embryo of the frog (axa temporarza), in which he shows that the 
anus does not rise from the persistance of the blastopore, but from a sepa- 
rate invagination, and that the neural folds do not enclose the blastopore, 
as fatieamed respectively by Spencer and Balfour. ® 


Mesozoic Mammalia.—H. F. Osborn, of Princeton College, gives 
(Jour. Acad. N. Sci., Phila., vol. ix, No. 2) a very valuable review 
of the characters and relations of the mesozoic mammals of America, 
Great Britain, and other countries, with figures illustrating the subject, 
and new facts and figures relating to the ‘American species. The an- 
imals were all small, the length varying from half an inch to an inch 
and a half. Prof. Osborn sustains the view that they are not all mar- 
supial, but that placental mammals are included, probably the insecti- 
vora or their predecessors, and that marsupial and placental mammals 
have not successional but parallel genetic relations. —Am. Jour. Sc?. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 13 


MEDICAL MICROSCOPY.* 


Trichinosis.—A mechanic, aged 37, died of this disease in the Bos- 

ton City Hospital, March 9g, 1888, after a month’s confinement. The 
history of the case, its symptoms, and treatment are given in the Boston 
Medical and Surgical Journal of Sept. 13. 1888. Trichine w ere 
not found until after his death, and hence the real cause of his intense 
suffering was not discovered in time to treat it intelligently. On Feb. 
24 microscopic examination of muscle from the the right forearm failed 
to reveal the parasite. Feb. 29 a second examination of muscle from 
the right thigh resulted similarly. The specimens were procured in 
each instance “by injecting a few minims of 4 °% solution of cocaine sub- 
cutaneously and intramuscularly and cutting down upon the muscle. 
The operation was painless, and the w ounds healed readily. After 
death some intercostal muscle was removed from the right ‘side, and 
upon microscopical examination a few encapsulated baie biniee were 
found. Permission for an autopsy was refused by his relatives. 

The patient had stated, Feb. 21, that pork was his favorite dish, and 
that he had last eaten it as fried bacon about Feb. 1, one week before 
entrance to the hospital. He had for years lived a migratory life, often 
stopping at low-priced boarding-houses. 


O 


The Bacillus Pyocyaneus.—At a meeting of the Chicago Medi- 
cal Society, Sept. 3, Dr. Bayard Holmes read a paper and_ presented 
some tubes containing cultures of this pyogenic microbe. An abstract 
of the paper is given in the Western Medical Reporter. 

The presence of the Baczllus pyocyaneus is to be inferred from the 
green or blue color of secretions—pus, sweat, etc., and from a peculiar 
odor emanating therefrom. The odor is more significant than the color. 
It is probable that the green coloring matter. pyocyanin, is a by-pro- 
duct of the growth of the bacillus, and it is neither constant nor patho- 
logically significant. 

The specimens presented by Dr. Holmes were derived by tube and 
plate culture, from the pus of a sub-mental abscess. The bacilli were 
associated with streptococci. They are small, often found in twos, and 
very motile in solutions. On gelatin plates it grows as a greenish white 
spot surrounded by green gelatin. The gelatin is liquified conically 
below the colony. The growth is slow. In tubes with needle cultures 
it grows as a greenish-white pelicle on the surface of the gelatin, and 
as small colonies below along the back of the needle. After two or 
three days the gelatin begins to be liquified at the top, and the whole 
tube becomes liquified in a few days. On the potato it grows slowly, 
as a reddish or greenish-white mass, which turns bright green on the 
application of fumes of ammonia, and bright red by the fumes of hy- 
drochloric acid. 

Subcutaneous injections of the pure culture in rabbits and guinea 
pigs produce sero-fibrinous or phlegmonous inflammations, and, at 
times, abscess. The progressive phlegmonous inflammation resulted 
fatally to the animals in some cases. The bacillus is capable of pro- 


<2 Conducted by F. Blenciera M. D. 


14 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ January, 


. 
ducing suppuration in man also. Full reference to the literature of the 
subject is appended to Dr. Holmes’ paper. 

o—-—- 

The Emperor’s Cancer. —Sir Morell Mackenzie has given to the 
public his ver sion of the Emperor Frederick’s case. The microscopy 
of it is interesting. A small tumour develops upon a vocal cord. A 
most eminent laryngologist excises a section of the tumour and submits 
the specimen to microscopic analysis by the most eminent pathologist 
in the world. He (Virchow) opines that the tumour is not a cancer, but 
a wart. The progress of the case proves that the tumour was a cancer. 
) 

Bacillus of Diphtheria.—D’Espine of Geneva confirms Léffler’s 
claim that a certain bacillus discovered by him in diphtheritic false 
membranes is the causal agent of diphtheria. He never failed to find 
Léfler’s bacillus in cases of true diphtheria or diphtheritic croup; and 
he has often reproduced the disease in hares and guinea pigs by inocu- 
lating the products of a series of pure cultures ; bacilli from a 25th cul- 
ture were proved to have the same pathogenic properties, and specail 
produced the disease.—Z von Médzcal. 

oO 

Transmission of Tuberculosis.—It is coming to be believed that 
tuberculosis in man is caused largely by eating the meat and drinking 
the milk of animals so infected. The bacilli are believed to be trans- 
mitted from animal to animal by the habit of licking each others noses, 
the discharges being doubtless heavily loaded with the germs. This 
suggests a useful field for microscopists in examining the excretions from 
the nostrils of animals. It is also thought that vaccine virus may con- 
tain the bacilli. The Belgium government has ordered that calves from 
which virus is taken shall. be killed and carefully examined for bacilli. 
Oo 

A Prize Essay.—The American Association for the Study and 
Cure of Inebriety offers the sum of one hundred dollars to be paid by 
Dr. L. D. Mason, Vice-President of the Society, for the best original 
essay on ‘‘ The Pathological Lesions of Chronic Alcoholism Capable 
of Microscopic Demonstration.” The object of the essay will be to 
demonstrate :—(1) Are there pathological lesions due to chronic alcohol- 
ism? (2) Are these lesions peculiar or not to chronic alcoholism? The 
essay is to be accompanied by carefully prepared microscopic slides, 
which are to demonstrate clearly and satisfactorily the pathological con- 
ditions which the essay considers. Accurate drawings or micro-pho- 
tographs of the slides are desired. The microscopic specimens should 
be accompanied by an authentic alcoholic history, and other complica- 
tions, as syphilis, should be excluded. 

Conclusions resulting from experiments on animals will be admissible. 
The essay, microscopic : slides, drawi ings, or micro-photographs are to be 
marked with a private motto or legend,and sent to the Chairman of the 
Committee on or before October 1. 1890. The successful author will 
be asked to read and demonstrate his essay before the ‘* Medical Micro- 
scopical Society ” of Brooklyn. The essay will then be published. 

The following gentlemen have consented to act asa Committee :— 
Chairman, W.H. Bates, M. D., F. R. M. S., Lond., Eng. (Presi- 
dent of the Medical Microscopical Society of Brooklyn), 175 Remsen 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. LS 


St., Brooklyn, N. Y.; John E. Weeks, M. D.,43 West 18th street, 
New York; Richmond Lennox, M. D., 164 Montague St., Brook- 
lyn, IN: Y. 


oO 

Micrococcus Tetragonusina Tubercular Ulcer.—Dr. B. Van- 
gel of Buda-Pesth, on the microscopical examination of an ulcerated 
nose in a phthisical subject, found, besides tubercle bacilli, some cocci, 
which he cultivated, inoculating a white mouse with the culture. The 
organs and blood, after being treated with Gram’s stain, were found to 
contain cocci grouped in fours and enclosed in a capsule—micrococcus 
tetragonus, in fact—which Koch and Gattky found in phthisical lung 
cavities, but which, as far as Dr. Vangel is aware, had not hitherto been 
found in other organs. What part this micrococcus plays in phthisis is 
unknown. It would appear, however, that tissue in the process of break- 
ing down forms a soil suitable for its development. The ulcer in which 
the micrococcus tetragonus was found healed with suitable treatment, 
but the swelling and redness of the nose remained for a long time.— 


Lancet, October 6, 1888. 


The Eggs of an Eel. 
By FOR De MAT ABR, 
COLD SPRING HARBOR, N. Y. 

Scientists have known that the eel is an egg-producing fish for a 
dozen years or more, the Russian naturalist, Syrski, having first figured 
the ovaries of the female and the spermaries of the male, but how and 
where these minutes eggs are laid is still unknown. In October the eels 
run down to salt water to breed, and in the spring the young eels ascend 
the brooks and rivers in swarms. As they are then some two inches 
long and of the size of a darning needle, it is evident that they must 
have been hatched several weeks before, perhaps in February, to have 

rown so much from so small an egg. 

The number of eggs in a six-pound eel in November (in what is 
known to fisherman as ‘ eel fat,’ but which are really the ovaries) is 
fully 9,000,000. Under the microscope they measure So to the linear 
inch, and taking one ovary and dividing it by means of the most deli- 
cate scales known to science, I halved, “quartered, and further divided 
the mass seventeen times, until I had a section small enough to count 
the eggs in it. This section represented 1—131,072 of the total num- 
ber, and three sections were laboriously counted under the microscope. 
One of the sections contained 68 eggs, making the total 8, 912 896 eggs. 
The second held 77 eggs, or 10,092,544 in the whole. The third sec- 
tion consisted of 71, from which it would appear that there were 9,306,- 
112 eggs in the eel. 

There have been many theories about the reproduction of the eel, 
some of them being wildly absurd, such as their being hatched by 
fresh-water muscles, or that the lamprey was the female and the so- 

called silver eel the male, etc. The fact is that the lamprey, miscalled 
‘‘Jamper eel,” is a form of life lower than that of the true fishes, to 
which the cel belongs, and is a vertebrate with a cartilaginous skeleton 
instead of a bony one, has its skull imperfectly dev eloped. and has no 
lower jaw. Superficially it appears like an eel. but is not nearly related 


to it. 


- 


16 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (January, 


EDITORIAL. 
By CHAS. W. SMILEY. 

Prologue to 1889.—With the coming of the new year the editorial 
office of this periodical returns to W ashington, it havi ing proved very 
inconvenient for our increasing business to have that w ae done so far 
away. Besides, Professor Ocnordn is engaged upon some other impor- 
tant matters that take up much of his time. While he will not here- 
after be responsible for each issue editorially, his connection will con- 
tinue. He will contribute. render advice, and assist in every way 
practicable. 

The occasion is utilized for establishing several departments, each in 
charge of a competent specialist. Thus, Siboeh losing our genial and 
lez saned friend, Osborn, we add several gentlemen to he ae. each of 
whom is skilled in his field of work. 

In addition to the departments represented in this number, there will 
commence in February a serial entitled, ‘* Loiterings in a Microscopist’ s 
Laboratory,” in which one of the very foremost microscopists of this 
country will give valuable information and incidentally express some 
opinions quite freely. As he writes in a very pleasing sty le, his chap- 
ters will doubtless attract the attention of many who are not familiar 
with the subject. We only regret that he has sworn us to secrecy as to 
the location of his busy laboratory. He will write under a xom de 


plume. 


O 
Biological Notes.—In this department of the Journal, to be conducted 
by Prof. J. H. Pillsbury, of Smith College, Northampton, Mass., we en- 
deavor to give, in such plain English aha all may understand, the most 
important and interesting facts in natural history developed by a score 
or more of the periodicals, transactions, and other publications of the 
day. It is for those who are unwilling to be ignorant of biological 
progress and unable to read the many prints now Seeted In all cases 
we cite the source of information so as to enable readers to look up de- 

tails when they desire so to do. 
i 

Bacteriology.—This new science or branch of science requires for 
its study the higher power of lenses magnifying from 500 to 1200 di- 
ameters, as ell as certain special apparatus, aeinode! and cultures. 
It is proposed hereafter to devote more attention to it in this periodical, 
and to present not only its technique but its bibliography, and _ partic- 
ularly to state in plain language what progress is constantly being 
made by those professionally engaged in its study. In this ‘number 
there is room for but a short sige of the character of bacteria. 
This is from an address by Dr. Bolton, of the South Carolina Univer- 
sity, and lately from Johns Hopkins University. It will be followed by 
his description of the practical and economic value of the study, and 
by other articles. We are especially fortunate in having the friendship 
of Dr. Smith, of the Bureau of Animal Industry, and his able corps of 
workers, from whom contributions will be expected i in due time. 

Our Medical and Biological readers as well as the microscopists will 
be glad to know the latest discoveries relative to infectious diseases, 
from tuberculosis to swine plague. A large part of the literature is in 
German, and of the workers Germans. Our own Bureau of Animal 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 17 


Industry, under Dr. Salmon’s direction, is doing as much good work 
as can be found in this country. 
LN A. 

Medical Microscopy.—This department, conducted by F. Blanch- 
ard, M. D., of Peacham, Vt., seeks to present the most important applica- 
tions of the microscope in the study and practice of medicine. No 
physician can properly claim to be competent to-day unless he uses a 
microscope, and knows how to prepare material for mounting as well 
as to mount it properly. 


Oo eewerernened 

Technique.—Dr. Geo. C. Freeborn, instructor in normal histology in 
the College of Physicians and Surgeons, New York City, has kindly 
consented: to continue his ‘* Notices of New Methods,” of which No. 
VI will be found in this issue. Under this heading comes also the re- 
ports on the Postal Club Boxes by Queen Mab, one of the most skil- 
ful preparers of material in the country. These will be continued reg- 
ularly. Some excellent matter by Dr. F. L. James, of St. Louis, is 
crowded over to a future issue. 


oO 
Bibliography.—It is proposed to insert such bibliographical matter as 
will enable readers to see at a glance what literature is being published 
from time to time bearing upon Microscopy and upon cer tain phases of 
Biology. This will fmelade lists of books and pamphlets published. 
with such information, when available, as will show the reader how 
and where to buy them, as well as titles of articles in periodicals, both 
foreign and domestic. It is also thought desirable to present quite 
complete bibliographies of past and present literature relating to the 
special topics in which our readers are interested. There are facilities 
for this work in Washington not equalled elsewhere in the United States. 
A copy of every copyrighted book has to be deposited in the Library of 
Congress. The Surgeon-General’s library contains the greatest ‘col- 
lection of medical Books and periodicals in the world. The National 
Museum and Smithsonian Institution collect biological and other mat- 
ter from all sources. The Microscopical Society, the Patent Office. 
and this Journal all make special collections of microscopical literature. 
oO 
Subscriptions.—All paid subscriptions expired with the December 
number. Please enclose your dollar for 1889, and a card (postal or 
other) to blind the contents of the envelope. If not convenient to en- 
close the money now, please notify us. This will greatly assist in 
writing up the lists for 1889. It isa /¢¢/e courtesy greatly appreci- 
ated. If you want any other periodicals we can club them to you at 
special rates. Our club list published in the advertising columns 
contains only a few of the more common periodicals. We can order 
any you want and save you some money. Your orders need not come 
all at once. Any subscriber to this Journ: al can have the allowance if 
ordering a second or third periodical at any time during the year. 
fe) 
Binding.—Look up your sets to see what you lack, and if you want 
them bound we will put on our neat cloth covers for 35 cents each, or 
four years in separate covers for $1.20. This is too low a price, but 
we want the sets to be preserved. Ifyou will present them to any public li- 
brary we will present the binding of them. 


18 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (January, 
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


Essex Country, my esi -F. VANDERPOEL, Secy. 


October 4, 1888.—A ek. was held at the office of Dr. Brown. 

Two new members were elected. The subject for the meeting was 

‘Pus,’ and was illustrated by slides prepared by Drs. Ayres and Brown. 

Pus from asuppurating wound on the hand was examined under differ- 
ent microscopes and with different powers. A case of acute Nephritis 
furnished material for one of the slides. There was an animated dis- 
cussion as to the true nature of pus, authorities ae on this subject. 
The following were Dr. M. W. Ayres’ remarks :— 

The question of the orégzz of pus will be one to engage the atten- 
tion of pathologists for some years to come, judging the coming experi- 
ence by the past. 

The thraldom of authority is shown in the acceptance of the view 
brought prominently forward by Cohnheim, in effect that the migration 
and deg eneration of leucocytes is the sole element in the formation os pus. 

Granting that leucocytes are present, what will account for the im- 
mense majority of whzte over red, in pus, when in the zz¢terzor of the 
vessels the case is reversed, the ratio being 1 to 500? 

What special reason can be found for the diapedesis of a large cell in 
such immense quantities, when a relatively smaller and much more 
numerous cell must remain within the capillary walls? 

In the inflammatory process there is a purpose to be accomplished, 
viz., the removal of something from the individual, whatever may have 
been the cause of the initial ierieationt 

To best subserve the interest of the past, and the individual in gen- 
eral, the efforts of the tissues are to isolate the infected district by cut- 
ting off communication with the surrounding territory, and gradually 
exfoliating or throwing off the now dying mass. Cut off from the cir- 
culation, the cellular elements break down into pus, or a degenerated 
mass of proliferated tissue-cells, the debris of blood, ly mph, water, 
salts, and gases. 

What, then, is the origin of this mass of exuded material? 

Without necessarily any blood supply of sufficiently large character 
to warrant the assertion that nothing but leucocytes are present, the for- 
mation of pus continues and will go on indefinitely, through the lique- 
faction of material adjacent to the ‘centre of irritation. 

Hence it will be found that the connective tissue corpuscle is the 
prime seat of origin of the puriform mass, the corpuscles swelling, di- 
viding, and throwing out rounded granulations and pus cells. 

October 18.—The meeting was held at the office of Dr. Brown. 
The subject for the evening was ‘‘ Blood,” and the members brought a 
variety of slides and specimens. 

Dr. Ayres brought some of the blood of a bitch which was reported 
to have died of rabies. When mounted, the specimen was a very in- 
teresting one. 

Other slides were shown, containing, respectively, blood from am- 
phiuma, catfish, beaver, mouse, me: 1dow- lark, horse, frog, and man. 

Mr. Carter had a slide containing some blood corpuscles, uncovered, 
eleven years old. They were ina “remarkable state of preservation. 

Mr. Woolman exhibited a photograph of blood plaques made by 


. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 19 


some one not a member of the Society. This gentleman also referred 
to a statement recently made by a member of the Royal Society to the 
etfect that the normal blood corpuscle of man was not bi-concave, but 
that this form was given to it by mechanical action, chemical re-agents, 
and the like. No proof of this was offered in the statement, however, 
and the latter did not meet with the endorsement of those of the mem- 
bers who had examined blood under all conditions. Until proof is given 
there seems to be no reason for giving up the hitherto accepted belief in 
the bi-concavity of the normal human blood disc. 

November 1, 1888.—The attendance constituted about two-thirds of 
the membership. Rev. F. B. Carter gave an account of some obser- 
vations which he had made upon vegetable protoplasm. The results 
were very remarkable, and seemed to point to a common starting point 
for animals and vegetables. 

Some of the protoplasm which he had seen emerge from an un- 
doubted vegetable cell assumed, aftera time, the well-known ameeboid 
motion, and he had watched the slide for several hours while this pro- 
cess of change or development was going on. This seems to go further 
than Schultze, who states that there is, chemically, no difference be- 
tween animal and vegetable protoplasm; this latter, however, cannot 
be considered as conclusive proof of their identity since there are various 
chemical substances among the carbon compounds which are similar 
in chemical constitution, Bat differ widely in their physical properties. 
The ever beautiful movement of pr otoplasm called Cyclosis in the cells 
of plants was also shown in a specimen of JVe¢e//a. Though strictly 
vegetable in every sense of the term, this circulation is always ; suggest- 
ive of the movement of blood corpuscles through the capillaries ae the 
animal. = 

November 13, 1888. held at the residence of Rev. Mr. 
Carter, Montclair, who gave a paper upon the ‘* Desmids: their life 
history and classification.” After the reading of the paper, a variety 
of the forms were illustrated by means of the Giattee n. Among them 
were seen Vampzrella, Pr otococcus pluc veatus, Cosmarium. iio 
tertas,and Hurastrum. The conjugation of two Closterza was shown. 
Bi-iateral symmetry was also well illustrated by many of the specimens. 
Filamentous forms were also shown, with the caution not to mistake 
for one desmid a group or colony of these plants joined together. 


Iron City MicroscoPpicaL SociETy, PITTSBURGH, PA. 


October 22.—The annual meeting for election of officers and trans- 
action of business was held at headquarters i in the Pittsburgh Library 
rooms. There was a large attendance of active one many of 
whom came laden with cases of instruments or carefully prepared 
specimens for inspection. Before and after the business session these 
specimens were examined and discussed in an informal manner. 

Among the objects shown was a rare and beautiful animal, Stepha- 
moceros ‘eichhornit, and also a polyzoa or coral-like animal, @cyo- 
nella, both from a pond near Edgewood. Also cyclosis, or flow of 
protoplasm in the cells of a Chara, a submerged water plant from New 
Brighton, stained section of human scalp, blood corpuscles, with a 
number of zoophytes and other similar objects. 

Mr. Mellor, the President for the last three years, announced the busi- 


20 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY igang 


ness before the Society to be the election of officers, stating that he thought 
he had served his full time in an executive capacity, and that he ee 
be released from further duty. He therefore declined another term in 
his present office, but assured the members that his interest would be 
even greater than heretofore, and that he would give all the assistance 


possible to the new officers. He then reviewed the history and condi- 
tion of the organization, and gave expression to some hopeful ideas as" 


to the future scope and extent of its work. 

The following were Gieree for the ensuing year :—President, Rev. 
W. J. Holland. D. D.; First Vice- Peedens Prof. James M. Logan ; 
Second Vice-Pre aise C. C. Mellor; Recording Secretary, Dr. H. 
DePuy; Corresponding Secretary, George M. Clapp ; Treasurer, C. 
G. Milner; Curator, Herbert W alker. 

In taking the chair, Rev. Mr. Holland said :—Nothing but the as- 
surance that we shall continue to have the help and co- operation of the 
retiring President has influenced me to consent to my nomination. In 
taking “the chair I desire to emphasize a point which he has touched 
upon; that is, the desirability of enlarging the scope and purposes 
of our body—in fact, making it the initial point for a grander enterprise. 
Pittsburgh and Allegheny are rich in brain and Pleat as well as in 
wealth. Why rene we not have an academy of sciences which should 
unite in that fellowship and co-operation which we have found so pleas- 
ant not only those who are devoted to the art of microscopy, but those 
who are cultivating the great sciences to which the use of the micro- 
scope is simply subsidiary 2 > We have chemists, electricians, astrono- 
mers, botanists, ornithologists, and geologists in the present ranks of 


oD D> 
the Society. Why not through these, our brethren, reach forth. and 


oD 

draw into the larger society, of which ours shall form a section, the 
great body of thinking men among us, many of whom have a more than 
local reputation. It Philadelphia, when half the size of this com- 
munity, laid the foundations of an academy of sciences, the fame and 
power of which is world-wide, why should not we? ‘ If Buffalo, Cleve- 
land, and Cincinnati support such institutions, why should not Pitts- 
burgh and Allegheny?” 

Die Nc Lippincott and Prof. J. G. Ogden were elected members, 
making the total enrollment 88. The regular meeting night was 
changed to the second Tuesday of each sorta in order to accommo- 
date Sie members who belong to the Allegheny County Medical So- 
ciety. It was also decided to give a public soirée next month, with the 
object of securing funds for scientific equipments. 

November 13.—Mr. C. C. Mellor read a paper on ‘* Stephanoceros 
etchhorni?,” a rotifer rarely met with, and which was discovered in 
1761 by Ejichorn, of Dantzic. The paper was illustrated with draw- 
ings. 

Prof. Logan exhibited by polarized light a fine specimen of basalt 
from Bridgeport, Conn. Rev. W. 12 Fieliand exhibited a parasite, 
presumably a species of Anobium, which he had found feeding upon 
the tissues of a Goliath beetle. The animal was remarkably tenacious 
of life, having lived 48 hours in an atmosphere of hy drocy anic acid. 
Other exhibits were :—crystals of Guanadine and acetanalide ; section 
of lower jaw of pup, Asfergellus niger, or mould fungus from diseased 
human ear, and sponge spicules from Indian Ocean, The Society has 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 21 


increased in attendance considerably of late and preparations are being 
made for a soirée in January next. 


Torry BoTanical. CLus, NEw York City. 


November 12, 1888.—Professor Schrenk read a paper on the inflor- 
escence of Callitriche, illustrated by microscopical preparations, speci- 
mens, and drawings. He held that ‘the two bracts or sepals at the base 
of the flower are in reality floats, as he had found them in C. hetero- 
phylla to be hollow and filled with air. 


MicroscopicaL SociETY, WASHINGTON, D. C. 


doth Meeting, Tuesday, September 25, 1888.—Prot. Seaman gave 
an account of the meeting of the American Society of Microscopists and 
donated a copy of the ** Proceedings.’ > He called especial attention to 
the papers of Prof. Smith and Miss Detmers. He presented a resumé 
of his work as curator. Three lines of acquisition are desirable—books, 
apparatus, and slides. He had procured catalogues of all European 
makers except two; also the Abbé Condenser recently ordered by the 
Society 

Dr. J. M. Lamb showed and described a paraftine bath made by the 
Boston Educational Supply Co. Dr. Taylor showed some colored 
lantern slides made for him by Queen & Co., and described the man- 
ner of preparing them. 


8ist Meeting, Oct. 9, 1888.—The annual election of officers resulted 
thus :—President, Dr. Geo. N. Acker; Vice-Pres., Dr. I. W. Black- 
bouueeeor sec, Dr. |. M. Lamb; Rec. Sec., Dr. E: A. Balloch; 
iPreas.. Mic, FT. Chapman ; Curator, Dr. Wm. H. Seaman. 

Mr. C. W. Smiley was elected an active member. 

Dr. Reyburn made a few remarks on the use of photography in mi- 
croscopic work, saying that photography is comparatively a simple 
thing if ordinary powers from 75 to roo diameters are used. All that 
is necessary is a microscope, a lamp, and a small camera; a con- 
densing lens may be substituted for the mirror. The focus is easily ob- 
tained ana a dry plate slipped in. An exposure of from 20 to 40 sec- 
onds will give the desired result. By the contact process, pictures can 
be taken without camera or microscope. Covera plate with black 
cloth, make an opening in it the size of the cover-glass, apply the slide 
to this opening, and expose to light. The copy is, of course, the exact 
size of the original. Dr. Reyburn also explained the process of de- 
veloping. 

Dr. Taylor thought the exposure should be longer than usually stated. 
Mr. Chapman said that some photographers used orange or yellow in- 
stead of red light when daylight was used. 

Mr. Skinner gave a description of stellar photography. Prof. Sea- 
man thought that photography was of great advantage in class dem- 
onstration. 

ae Balloch gave an account of some work in photography done by 

r. J. M. Lamb and himself during the summer. 


22 ‘ THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ January, 


NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


Dissection of the Dog as a Basis for the Study of Phystology. 
By W. H. Howell. Henry Holt & Co. New York, 1888. 


There have appeared during the year several books containing guides 
for mammalian dissection, and there were in existence previously a host 
of others. And yet one cannot say that most of them are not a decided 
gain. For the requirements of different courses are not often exactly 
alike. In fact, what teacher does not feel that no text-book yet written 
fully meets his special needs. But Dr. Howell has produced a book 
whose counterpart will not be easy to find. Nearly all the guides to 
mammalian dissection are the production of morphologists, and there- 
fore dwell most upon topics of interest in comparative anatomy. The 
one we are now reviewing is written by a physiologist expressly to 
prepare students for a practical or theoretical course in physiology. It 
does not follow the dissection with exhaustive thoroughness, but. | taking 
out of the vast detail the parts of most use in an elementary physiology 
course, tells the seeker how to discover them with his own scalpel. 
From practical experience in conducting college courses in animal 
physiology we can testify to the value to the Snident of a clear, even 
though not exhaustive, knowledge of anatomy and histology before he 
attempts to proceed far in pure ‘phy siological study. It has a twofold 
use :—it not only shows him the elaborate complexity of the animal 
body and helps him to realize how very much more needs to be taken 
into account in studying physiological problems, but it also makes it 
possible for him to closely follow steps in the processes. For instance, 
the absorption of carbohy drate and its storage in the liver or secretion 
by the salivary gland become real processes to him in proportion as he 
understands the » morphological factors involved. Dr. Howell has un- 
dertaken to provide a practical treatise for such a purpose. and not an 
exhaustive work on mammalian anatomy. It is decidedly convenient 
to have in a brief and inexpensive form a book which can be put into 
the students’ hands as a guide to elementary dissection of a mammal prior 
to the study of animal phy siology. The subjects taken up cover most 
of the anatomy of muscles, the principal nerve and blood vessels. the 
glandular, excretory, and reproductive systems, the dissection of the 
brain and eye. It would seem as if any one without assistance could 
use this work ‘to guide him in the dissection of a dog or cat. Since it 
was written for use where abundant material w ould be at hand for 
dissection, it is not as economical of material as one would perhaps be 
compelled to be in many places. 


O 


The Home of Shakespeare. L. Prang & Co. Boston, Mass., 1888. 


Nature was very kind to William Shakespeare and Anne Hathaway 
in adorning their homes with picturesque surroundings to entice the eye 
and cheer the heart. All the interesting and now familiar scenes of 
Shakespeare’s birthplace and early life are here depicted by full-page il- 
lustrations from water-color sketches taken on the spot by Louis K. Har- 
low, with.such extracts from the great poet’s writings as fitly describe 
the spot or appear to have been themselves suggested by it. The con- 
tents include the Poet’s Home, the Grammar School, the West Gate, 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 23 


Guy’s Mill, Warwick Castle, Kenilworth Castle, the West Tower, the 
Old Mill, the Bridge, Anne Hathaway’s Cottage, the Weir’s Walk. 
Holy Trinity G@uncch: the Avenue, the Tomb. Aad other beautiful scenes 
of the village and its surroundings. To any true lover of Shakespeare 
or of art fis book is a most fitting holiday gift. It is bound in full 
cloth, beveled edges, with rich gilt. stamping in white and gold relief. 
Everything about this book is neat and worthy of the publishers. whose 
reputation is unexcelled. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY—RECENT WRITINGS OF INTEREST. 


[This list will report books and articles.of interest to microscopists and biologists. It will enable 
specialists to find literature of real value to them which space does not permit to . be noticed more at 
length. It is prepared solely in the interest of readers and not of advertisers. Put in ordering from 
publishers, always cite this page and date for convenience of identification. Requests from subscribers 
will be entertained, in special cases, for fuller information than is here given. } 


ADAMS, FRANK ID., and LAwson, ANDREW C.—On some Canadian rocks con- 
taining scapolite, with a few notes on some rocks associated with the apatite 
deposits. (Contains allusions to microscopical examinations of rock.) Canadztan 
Record of Science, Oct., 1888, pp. 185-201. 

Anon.—How to make lantern slides on gelatino-bromide and gelatino-chloride 
plates. Axthony’s Photographic Bulletin, Nov. and Dec., 1888. Reprint from 
Photographic News. 

BoweEN, JoHN T.—Two forms of skin tuberculosis. Boston Medical and Sur- 
gical Fournal, Aug. 16, 1888. Vol. cxix, No. 7, pp. 151, 152. 

Bowyer, R. W.—Some methods of moth-collecting. Paper read at Hertford, 
England, Feb. 28, 1888. (Adapted to beginners and very practical.) Trans. 
Hert. Nat. Hist. Soc., Aug., 1888, pp. 23-29. 

BRYANT, W. S.—Valves in the veins of human intestines. (8 figures, photo- 
micrographs.) Boston Med. and Surg. Fournal, Oct. 25, 1888. 

CAMPBELL, F. MAuLE.—The means of protection possessed by plants. An- 
niversary Address, Hertford, Feb. 21. 1888. (A valuable contribution to the 
doctrine of evolution.) Trans..Hert. Nat. Hist. Soc., Aug., 1888, pp. 5-17. 

CoLiins, FRANK S.—Alge from Atlantic City, N. J. (An annotated list of 
species found.) Torrey Bulletin, Dec., 1888, pp. 309-314. 

Davis, J. R. AtnsworTH.— A text-book of biology, comprising vegetable and 
animal morphology and physiology. London: Chas. Griffin & Co., 1888. 462 
pp-, 158 iliustrations. 

Dawson, Sir Wm.—Eozoon Canadense. (Among the photo-micrographic il- 
lustrations are coral system of eozoon injected with serpentine ; very fine canals 
and tubuli filled with dolomite. ) Canadian Record of Sctence, Oct., 1888. Vol. 
ili, No. 4, pp. 201-226. 11 figures. 

DEXTER, RANSomM.—The kingdoms of nature, or life and organization from 
the elements to man; being a following of matter and force into vitality, vitality 
into organization, and organization into the various types of being, culminating 
in man. Chicago: C. H. Kerr & Co., 1888. 8°, cloth, $3.50. 

Dutcken, H. W. (Editor.)—Men, Animals, and Plants of all quarters of the 
globe. (For schools.) 500 illustrations. N. Y.: Ward, Lock & Co., 1888. 
30 pp., folio. Cloth, $2.00. 

FEWKES, J. WALTER.—On a new parasite of Amfphzura. Proc. Boston Soc. 
Natural History, xxiv, pp. 31-33. 

FewkKeEs, J. WALTER.—A new marine larva and its affinities. pp. 1-4, plate 
Reprint from The Microscope, June, 1888. 

Forses, S. A.—The lake as a microcosm. Bulletin Scientific Association, 
Peoria, Ill., pp. 77-87. 

GARMAN, S.—On the lateral canal system of the Selachia and Holocephala. 
(Morphology only.) Bull. Mus. Comp. Zo6l.,xvii, No. 2, pp. 57-119. 53 plates. 

HEnstLow, Rev. G.—The origin of floral structures through insect and other 
agencies. N. Y.: Appleton, 1888. (International Science Series No 63.) 16-+- 
349 pages. 12°, cloth, $1.75 

HoweEL , W. H.—Dissection of the dog as a basis for the study of physiology. 
Noy... Menry Holt.& Co. 8°, $1:00. 


24 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY.  [January. 


Hoivanp, J. W.—The urine and the common poisons. Memoranda; chemi- 
cal and microscopical for laboratory use. P. Blakiston, Son & Co, Phila., 1888. 

Ippincs, Jos. P. (Transiator.)— Microscopical physiography of the rock- 
making minerals. Anaid to the microscopical study of rocks. Vol.i. Minerals 
by H. Rosenbusch. (Review next month.) N. Y.: John Wiley & Sons. 8°, 
pp- 333- Illustrated; plates. $5.00. 

James, Frank L.— Elementary Microscopical Technology. Part 1: The Tech- 
nical history of a slide from the crude materials to a finished mount. (A fine 
book for students, giving the reasons for what it advises. Review hereafter.) 
St. Louis, Mo., Medical and Surgical Journal Co. 8°, pp. 107. Illustrated. 

Jerrries, JoHN A.—The bacteria of the alimentary canal, especially in the 
diarrhceas of infancy. Boston Med. and Surg. Fournal, Sept. 6. 1888. pp. 
217-223; 

Manton, W. P.—Primary methods in zoédlogy-teaching, for teachers in com- 
mon schools. Boston: Lee & Shepard. 1888. 61pp. Cloth, 5oc. 

Newman, L. G.—Traité des Maladies parasitaires non microbiennes des 
animaux domestiques. Paris, 1888. 16 et 675pp. 306 figures. 

Pirkrn, Lucius.—Disease germs and how to combat them. The Century, 
July, 1888. pp. 375-378, with 12 figures of bacteria. 

Putnam, J. J.—A case of Hereditary Muscular Distrophy with Microscopical 
Demonstrations Boston Med. and Surg. Fournal, Nov., 1888. 

VAUGHAN, VicTor C., and Novy, F. G.-—Ptomaines and Leucomaines; or, the 
putrefactive and physiological alkaloids. Phila. : Lea Bros. & Co., 1888. 316pp. 
12° cloth, $1.75 

West, Wm.—Desmids of Maine. (List of species collected by Prof. A. B. 
Aubert, at Orono, Me.) ‘fournal of Botany, xxvi, 339-340. 


Exchanges. 


[Exchanges are inserted in this column without charge. They will be strictly limited to mounted 
objects, and material for mounting. ] 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous earth from Thibet, various localities (12,000 feet); also, material and 
slides of diatoms from Scottish Highlands, and continental foraminifere. WANTED.—Slides of 


American diatoms, insects, or botany. 7 
W. D. STEWART, 2 Gilmore Terrace, Edinburgh, Scotland. 


OFFERED.—Sections of vegetable ivory and slides of crystalized maple sugar. _ Good mounts 
taken in exchange. WM. LIGHTON, 106 Fitth Avenue, Leavenworth, Kansas. 
WANTED.—Parasites and books on Parasites and other micro. subjects. Will give Anatomical, 


Pathological, Botanical, Micro-fungi, Zoophytes, Polycistine, Foraminifera, Parasites, and other slides 
in return. FRED. LEE CARTER, Gosforth, near Newcastle-on-Tyne, England. 


Wanted, Diatomaceous earth from Mégillanes, Bolivia, South America. Can give in exchange 


either Diatomaceous earth from New Zealand or cash. 
E. MICHALEK, I. Fleischemarkt, No. 1, Vienna, Austria. 
Mounted sections of Foetal Lung (5 months), sections across entire lobe, sgy5 in. thick, beautifully 
stained, in exchange for first-class pathological slides. 
W. C. BORDEN, M. D., U.S. A., Fort Douglas, Utah. 


Wanted, earths, recent diatoms, and miscellaneous objects for mounting. Only first-class material 
offered or desired. MARY A. BOOTH, Longmeadow, Mass. 


Fossil Diatomaceous deposits (marine) wanted from Bermuda, Virginia, Maryland, California, etc. 
I. ELLIOTT, Ardwyn Villa, Aberystwith, Wales, England. 


Labels for slides. EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, IIl. 


Correspondence relative to exchange in microscopical material or prepared mounts. 
HENRY L. OSBORN, Hamline, Minn. 
First-class Histological Slides for other good mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 
shares. S. G. SHANKS, M. D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N. Y. 
FOR EXCHANGE.—Strichnia Chromate (Strichnia 5}, gr.) and Strichnia Ferri-Cyanide (Strichnia 
tio gr.) Will exchange for other slides, Botanical preferred. Only first-class slides offered or desired. 
L. A. HARDING, Fergus Falls, Minn. 
FOR EXCHANGE.—Mounted slides of Gold Sand, Gold Washings, Wire Silver, Pyrites of Iron, 
Petrified Wood, etc., for Pathological slides and cut material or other desirable mounted specimens. 
W.N. SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Ariz. 
FOR EXCHANGE.—Diatomaceous earth from Richmond, Va., Nottingham, & Calvert Co., Md., 
Los Angeles and Santa Monica, Cal., for other diatomaceous material, crude or cleaned, recent or fossil 
(marine forms preferred), or for diatom or miscellaneous slides (only good mounts wanted). 
F. W. DUNNING, 37 Garrison Ave., Battle Creek, Mich. 
WANTED.—A set of Proceedings of the American Society of Microscopists. State price of set or 


of single volumes, kind of binding, etc. Also, any other microscopical periodicals. 
. P. O. BOX 630, Washington, D.C. 


< 


THH EYE OF THE CRAY-FISH 


THE AMERICAN 
MONTHLY 


fee VOCAL - JOURNAL. 


Vex. x. FEBRUARY, 1889, No. 2. 


A a ee en ve ae nal, Toye ther r ie By to Cusiness or to € ey: 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc. , should be addressed to Ameri- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box “630, UV ashington, DAC, 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Tribner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London, accompanie d by the yearly price of 
five shillings. 


Elementary Histological Studies of the Cray-fish—XII. 
By HENRY LESLIE OSBORN. 


HAMLINE, MINN. . 


CHAPTER V.—THE EYE. 


It will be remembered, by those who have followed through from 
the first this course in the Cray-fish Histology, that the design has been 
rather to teach how to study histology than to fully elucidate the his- 
tology of Cambarus. What has been said in describing the green- 
gland, the liver, etc., has all of it been true so far as I am aware, “but it 
has in no case been the entire exhaustive truth. So m: iny details enter 
into the mechanism of even the simplest animal, and many are so mi- 
nute, or for other reasons so difficult of demonstration, that they are 
passed over by all elementary treatises. Many of them have been only 
very recently discovered. It has been the aim throughout this series to 
treat of such appearances in an ordinarily well- made section as can be 
observed by any one, and of the interpretation of these appearances to 
form a true mental picture of the real object. Since the articles are 
written primarily to show microscopists how to become histologists, 
much is included which does not interest the professional histologist. 
This didactic style will characterize this chapter upon the eye, and sub- 
sequent chapters on teasing and isolation in the study of muscle and 
nerve. 

1. Preparation of the Slide.—The eye of the Arthropod is a far 
more difficult subject to prepare well than anything we have as yet at- 
tempted. In fact, so difficult is it that the best authorities upon its struc- 
ture are at variance as to the finer points. Much of its more easily 
learned anatomy is within the reach of any one, and will furnish, by 
reason of its greater complexity than that of any organ thus far studied, 
an admirable theme for one of the ‘‘ elementary studies.” If you examine 
a live cray-fish you will see on either side of the long beak-like projection 
at the front end of the body a sort of socket bearing a short stump, 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


26 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [February, 


rounded and dark colored at the free end and movable. This is the 
eye, mounted upon a stalk controlled by muscles so as to be movable 
ina variety of directions. If you. leave the cray-fish ‘*to his own de- 
vices’ you will see that he moves the eye about to suit his own con- 
venience. After killing in chloroform (see vol. viii, p. $2), remove 
both eyes with a scalpel by cutting carefully at the joint between the 
eye and the body. In doing this mae not pull or tear anything, as it 
might i injure the. parts within the stalk; cut straight across them with 
sharp scalpel or fine sharp scizzors. Gre unused to cells can hardly re- 
alize their extreme delicacy and how little crushing, tearing and push- 
ing they can stand. Preserve the eyes, after roo in some hard- 
ening reagent. The reagent can reach the tissue within the stalk by 
the opening at the base. Any of many methods may be used. Here 
are two actual records, either of which imitated perfectly will give a 
fair result. (My sections of the eye, not being the result of special ex- 
periments, are by no means ideally perfect. They are, however, as 
good as or better than a beginner can expect to make, and will there- 
fone be better for this purpose than sections which he could not expect 
to imitate.) 

First Method.—I\mmerse the eye in 1% chromic acid 5 days, then in 

50% alcohol one hour, then in 70% one day, then in Abeoleee ‘alcohol or 
stain, and then imbed in paraffin by the usual method. 

Second Method.—The rods shown in figure 4 were drawn from a 
section prepared by first method in 1884. WwW hen I began this series of 
articles in 1886, I prepared an eye in a different manner and with bet- 
ter success so far as regards some features. Its exact history was as 
follows: 

(1) Saturated watery solution of corrosive sublimate, 45 min. (2) 
Running water, 75 min. (3) 50% alcohol, 30min. (4) 70% alcohol, 
27 hours. (5) Picronitric acid, full strength, 604 hours. (6) 70% al- 
cohol, 11 days 24 hours. (7) Kleinenberg’s hematoxylin, 2 days. 
(8) Washed in 7o% alcohol, 10 min. (9) Absolute alcohol, 1,1, days. 
(ie) Chloroform, 21 hours. (11) Chloroform and Cone solution, 
5,4; hours. (12) Pure paraffin at 56° C., 1 hour. (13) Blocked for 
section cutting. (14) Sliced in microtome ‘oneal * “G@5) See 
tions cemented to slide with collodion and oil of P cloves. (16) Warmed 
gently over lamp and washed with turpentine. (17) Turpentine wiped 
away and replaced by chloroform balsam and covered. 

For the sake of any who have begun using this periodical since the 
beginning of this series of articles, Baee eoamdeut may be added upon 
the different steps of this somewhat complicated process, showing the 
reasons for some of them. 

The purpose of the second method was chiefly to secure good prep- 
arations of the parts in the lower part of the stalk of the eye. The 
corrosive sublimate was used for them and to reach the ter minal por- 
tion if possible. This latter itaccomplished, but poorly in places, though 
it did succeed here and there. The running water is to remove the cor- 
rosive so that it will not crystallize in the celts! When alcohol is used it is 
followed at once by dilute and this by strong alcohol. The water and 
weak alcohol should not be continued longer than here practised, but 
the specimen once in 70% alcohol can remain there for any time longer 
than 24 hours. Picronitric acid (made by adding 2 parts strong nitric 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 27 


acid to 98 parts saturated watery picric acid solution) was used to de- 
calcify the outer shell. In the first method, this decalcifying was done 
by the chromic acid at the same time with the hardening. ‘The result- 
ant sections by the first method are not as good as those by the second, 
except with regard to the crystalline cones. These are some of them 
shown by the second method, but are badly confused with other retinal 
elements. The alcohol next used removed the picric acid from the 
specimen and permitted the access of borax carmine, which stained beauti- 
fully the ganglionic nerve cells and also demonstrated very clearly the 
cells of the corneal hypodermis in many places. The remaining treat- 
ment was the ordinary treatment for imbedding and mounting and does not 
require special comment. One who follows this method carefully will 
have no difficulty in finding all the structures pointed out by Professor 
Huxley in ‘* The Cray-fish” (page 119), and many more which he there 
passes ‘by without remark. A section prepared in this way and exam- 
ined with the low power is represented in figure 1 of the accompanying 
plate. To its examination let us now proceed. It must be noticed that 
since the eye is in reality hemi-spherical, not every longitudinal section 
will give the appearance seen in figure 1, but only the few which pass 
through the centre of the stalk or near it. Those which pass to one side 
of the centre will of course cut diagonally through the radially disposed 
parts, and such sections will be very much harder to interpret. I have 
chosen the most favorable section for description. In securing such a 
section, it will be necessary to mount every section when you think you 
are near the centre of the stalk, and examine each one until you reach 
the one passing in the plane of a radius. Several successive sections will 
now be good, and then the remainder of the eye will be of little use. 

2. Minute Anatomy with the low power.—Since the entire sec- 
tion cannot be seen at once with a $-inch objective it will be well first to 
examine it witha hand lens or w the an inch or lower objective to identify 
its chief parts, and then place these under a $-inch objective for low power 
study. You will at once observe (1) the semi-circular corzea bounded 
by a band which suddenly on the side becomes thicker, and bounds the 
stalk as the ordinary efzdermiés or cuticle (cu); (2) the area within 
the cornea occupied by rod-shaped bodies which radiate toward the 
cornea from the central part of the semi-circular area and form collec- 
tively the re¢zza@ or terminal portion of the optic nerve; (3) the area 
within the stalk which is occupied by several different structures, being 
shut off in front from the retinal chamber by a sharp line which is 
the edge of the basilar membrane (B. m.), and on the sides by a 
second sharp line parallel with the epidermis, the Aypodermzs (h), 
which may be interrupted in places or pulled away from the cuticle in 
the process of preparation of the section; (4) the central part of the 
stalk occupied by the optic nerve (o.n.) a optic ganglion (g.n.) ; 
(5) the bands between the nerve stalk and the hy podermis running ler 1e¢th- 
wise of the stalk, the eye-weuscles im). These various parts of the eye 
once located, we can apply the high power to a study of the various 
positions in detail. 

3. Histological study with the high power. 

1. The epiderm?s of the stalk, which should be examined before that 
of the retinal chamber of the eye, is found to be of very considerable thick- 
ness and deeply stained in its outer portion, but only faintly within. 


28 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [Febrnary, 


It is not obviously cellular in character but banded with alternate stripes 
of material denser or more open. It is not a tissue of cells, but a con- 
densed secretion poured out from the cells of the layer next below and 
hardened by contact with the air or water 

2. The cornea, which is directly pnuanans with the cuticle of the 
stalk, is plainly seen at the point of junction of the two to be of the 
same composition, viz., layers of non-cellular matter, but it is unlike 
the cuticle in two respects,—it is thinner and more compact, not being 
made of alternate denser and more open layers, and it is seen in the 

section to be divided up into blocks (see fig. 6, £), which fall oppo- 
site the retinal elements. These blocks or Baers can be seen best in a 
surface view, which may be made with the low power without any 
special preparation. They are thus seen as four-sided areas into which 
the entire corneal cuticle is subdivided. Each is further seen to be 
slightly convex outward. In life it acts as a lens, and this peculiarity 
of Fe eye, so common in all the crustacians and insects, has given origin 
to the name ‘* compound eye,” by which such eyes are commonly desig- 
nated. If desired, a small portion of the cornea of an eye can be sliced 
off parallel with the surface, the inside removed by short maceration in 
5° potash solution and mounted in glycerine jelly. It will show these 
eae facets as a very beautifully regular tessellated pavement. A 
comparison of the cornea will show that both its peculiarities cease at 
the basilar membrane, no facets being present over the stalk and the 
cuticle being there less uniform and dense, but thicker. Such a modi- 
fication of the skin, to serve a particular purpose instead of the intro- 
duction of a new sort of substance for a new purpose, is very character- 
istic of the mode of building found in organisms. The transparent 
cornea of our own eyes is no wise different in general character from the 
skin of our faces, though the one is utterly opaque and the other very 
transparent. 

3. The hypodermis in the living eye and over the entire body as well 
is a thin tissue of living cells from which the outer cuticle is produced 
as an excretion. The ‘hypoder mis forms a sort of cone, upon which 
the outer skin is formed as an entirely lifeless product. In the stalk the 
cellular character of the hypodermis can be very readily seen from the 
number and position of the nuclei as well as from the position of occa- 
sional cell-walls to be an ordinary columnar epithelium, In the retinal 
chamber of the eye, however, the character of the hypodermis is not 
at all plainly cellular (in any of my sections), but it can be seen as a 
structureless thin strip (see fig. 6 between f and c and ec, also fig. 1 ¢ 
h), which usually tears away Tea the cuticle and follows the sefiual 
ee or crystalline cone, though usually quite distinct from it. It is 
really cellular as well as that bE the stalk. Within the hypodermis the 
eye structures fall into two distinct sorts—those of the anterior cham- 
ber of the eye or the ve¢zza, and those of the stalk. Let us study first 
the section of the retina. 

4. The Visual Rod (taking the name used by Professor Huxley to 
designate the entire structure shown in figure 4 of the plate) is a trans- 
parent body consisting of three dipeeen unlike parts. Outwardly, 
near the hypodermis, it is broadest, and from this it tapers, at first 
slowly then more rapidly, as it runs inward. At its inner end it en- 
larges to a spindle-shaped swelling, which contracts again as it reaches 


1889.|} . , MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 29 


the basilar membrane. The single rods are illustrated in fig. 4, and 
the different parts are called in Huxley’ s account, the (1) cr eine 
cone, (2) the filament, and (3) the striated spindle. Careful examin- 
ation of the rod will show at its outer end, in many places, a deeper 
coloration, and perhaps demonstrate a couple of nuclei there (see fig. 
6, from sections by second method). Running down the centre of the 
crystalline cone in places can be faintly seen a very fine line. It can 
rarely be traced the length of the cone. It indicates that the cone may 
be composed of two halves. The striated spindle or pedécle cannot be 
clearly seen in the section by the second method, for it is entirely sur- 
rounded by certain investing matters. But the chromic acid method 
displayed them in a very perfect manner with their connection with the 
rest of the rod. In the corrosive sublimate preparations they can be 
seen, though less distinctly. 
Se Pigment Cells.—On the sides of the crystalline cone can be seen 
very plainly masses of dark, coarsely granular pigment, which more 
careful study in various places will prob: ibly show disposed in long 
narrow cells between the cones, cells which seem shorter than the cones. 
In some slides these are plainly cells because their nuclei can be ob- 
served. They together form (in good sections) a distinct zone, the 
‘* outer dark zone,” as it is Called by Huxley. The individual cell 
shapes are but poorly preserved in most sections, those by the second 
method being compacted, as if by pressure, with the crystalline cones. 
6. Retinule.—Surrounding the striated spindles, in the same way 
as the pigment cells surround the crystalline cones, may be seen a 
second set of greatly pigmented bodies for ming a second ** inner dark 
zone.” Carefully analyzed, this is found to he made by a second set 
of pigment cells embracing the spindle at this lower level. In the 
chromic acid specimens these cells seem to be much contracted and 
drawn down toward the basilar membrane, thereby displaying, in a 
. clear manner, the outlines of the spindles, and also, to a certain extent, 
theirown form. In the specimens by the second method the cells are 
so compressed with the visual rods that neither can be clearly observed. 
. Basilar Membrane.—At the back of the anterior chamber of 
the eye the better sections will show a sharp line limiting this chamber 
from the cavity of the stalk (see B. m., fig. 1 and fig. 5.) This is a 
connective tissue membrane which shuts off the fetal chamber from 
the remainder of the organ. There is reason to suppose that it does 
not shut off communication between these places in fact, for, though 
it may not be observable upon your sections, it is believed to be a fact 
that nerves pass through this membrane and into the visual rods. The 
parts behind this membrane and a consideration of the proper interpre- 
tation of these appearances will form the next number of this series of 


articles. : 


(0 


‘ 


Section Staining by Fluids Mixed with Turpentine.—Prof. 
C. O. Whitman (Am. Wat., v. 22, p. 1140) describes a process of 
mixing staining substances dissolved in absolute alcohol with turpen- 
tine, thus allowing the staining of serial sections after they have been 
fixed to the slides and before being mounted in balsam. This method, 
if it proves practicable, will be a great convenience in the preparation 
of serial sections. 


30 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (February, 


Notice of New Methods—VII. 
By GEORGE C. FREEBORN, M. D., 


INSTRUCTOR IN NORMAL HISTOLOGY, COLLEGE OF PHYSICIANS AND SURGEONS, NEW YORK. 


Microscopical Staining. Greisbach, H.—At the meeting of the 
Anatomical Society held at Wirzburgh in May, 1888, the author 
demonstrated several methods of double, triple and quadruple staining. 
The dyes used were in part anilines of the azo group, and part those 
of other groups. They were all used in concentrated aqueous solu- 
tions, either in combination or as single successive stains. The dyes 
all bear careful washing in water and eleohol. The stained specimens 
were cleared in anis oil and mounted in balsam. 

The combinations employed were as follows : 


DOUBLE STAINS. 

Metanil Yellow [Phenylamidobenzolmetasulphonate of soda] and 
Azo Blue [Tetraazoditolylbetanaptholdisulphonate of soda ].—Prep- 
aration: ala nasi of a child, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained in a mixture of equal parts of the two stain- 
ing fluids for 10 minutes, or for ten minutes in the yellow fluid and 
then for 4 minutes in the blue. 

The epidermis, hair shaft, inner root-sheath, striated and smooth 
muscle stain yellow ; the rete Malpighi, the outer root-sheaf, sebaceous 
and sweat glands stain brownish-yellow ; connective tissue, elastic 
fibres, and maemiorane of fat cells stain violet-blue; hyaline cartilage 
and nuclei do not stain. 

Metanil Yellow and Methyl Green.—Preparation: ala nasi of a 
child, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained in a mixture of 5 c.c. of the yellow staining 
fluid and 3 c.c. of the green. A crystaline precipitate forms which 
does not interfere with the staining. The sections are allowed to re- 
main in this fluid for 8 minutes or longer [4 of an hour], or they are 
stained for 8 minutes in the yellow fluid and then for 1 minute in the 
green. 

Epidermis, hair-shaft, inner root-sheath, striated and smooth muscle 
stain yellow; the rete Malpighi, outer root-sheath hair-follicle, sweat 
and sebaceous glands, and nuclei stain green; hyaline cartilage and 
cells stain green. 

Metanil Yellow and Crystal Violet [Hydrochloride of hexame- 
thylpararoaniline ].—Preparation: ala nasi of child, alcohol hardening. 

Mix 7 c.c. of the yellow fluid with 2 c.c. of the violet. An amorphous 
precipitate results which does not interfere with the staining. The 
sections are stained in this mixture for 6 minutes, or they are stained for 
10 minutes in the yellow fluid and then for 30 seconds in the violet. 

Epidermis, hair-shaft, inner root-sheath, connective tissue, and elastic 
fibres, the membrane of fat cells, and striated muscle stain yellow ; the 
rete Malpighi, the outer root-sheath, all glands, smooth muscle, and 
cartilage with its cell nuclei stain violet. 

Metanil Yellow and Safranin.— Preparation: human lip, alcohol 
hardening. 

Mix 6 c.c. of the yellow fluid with 1 c.c. of satranin. An amorphous 
precipitate forms. This mixture gives either with a long or short stain 
more sharp pictures than the successive single staining. 


1889.] / MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 31 


Connective tissue stains yellow; epidermis, the rete Malpighi and 
the analogous layer in the mucous tissue, muscle, and labial glands 
«stain light red, the nuclei standing out sharply. 

Metanil Yellow and Crystal Ponceau [Alphaazonaphthallin- 
disulfobetanaphthol of soda].—Preparation: spinal cord of calf, alco- 
ho] hardening. 

For the single as well as the combined stain, twenty-four hours are 
required. * ¢ 

The gray matter stains yellow, the white reddish. Under strong 
magnification the neurolgia and connective tissue are found to be ened 
yellow : the axis cylinders dark bluish red; the myelin light vellowish 
red; one sort of ganglion cells dark purple, another bluish red; nuclei 
do not stand out sharp. 

Metanil Yellow and Congo Red [ Tetraazodiphenyldinaphthyla- 
mindisulphonate of soda].—Preparation: spinal cord of calf, alcohol 
hardening. 

The sections are stained in a mixture of the staining fluids for 8 min- 
utes, or they are stained for 10 minutes in the yellow stain and then for 
5 minutes in the red. 

Ganglion cells [ without clear nuclei st uining | and axis cylinders stain 
dark violet-red ; ee medullary sheath light citron- yellow ; ; neurolgia 
and all connective tissue light v iolet-red ; epithelium of the central canal 
brownish-red. 

Carminate of Soda and Metanil Yellow.—The central nervous 
system is hardened in Miiller’s fluid. then stained zz toto with the car- 
mine fluid. Sections are then stained for ten minutes in the yellow 
stain. 

All nervous elements are stained red, all connective tissue elements 
yellow. 

Crystal Ponceau and Crystal Violet.—Preparation : transverse 
section of the carotid of the calf, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained for 5 minutes in the red ponceau fluid and 
then for 1 minute in the violet. 

Nuclei of the endothelium and smooth muscle stain violet; all the 
other tissues red. 

Congo Red and Anisol Red [Bisulfoxylnatronbetaoxynapthalina- 
zoorthometoxylbenzol ]|.—Preparation : spinal cord of the calf, alcohol 
hardening. 

The sections are stained for 5 minutes in the combined stains, or for 
5 minutes in the Congo red solution and then for 5 minutes in the anisol 
red. 

Axis cylinders and cell bodies stain purple; all other tissues stain 
light red. Nuclei do not stain. 

Metanil Yellow and Athylin Blue.—Preparation: ala nasi of a 
child, alcohol hardening. 

When the two staining solutions are combined a black precipitate is 
formed, which re- Miccoly es in an excess of the metanil yellow solution. 
This solution stains yellowish-green, the cartilage only being stained 
blue. If the sections are first Sane for 5 minutes ina mixture of 5 
c.c. of the yellow and 4 c.c. of the blue stains, or if the sections ae 
stained for ten minutes in the yellow and then for 2 minutes in the blue, 
the pictures will be sharp. 


32 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [February, 


The epidermis, hair-shaft, outer root-sheath, connective tissue, elas- 
tic fibres, smooth and striated muscle stain yellow; all glands, mem- 
brane of fat cells, cartilage and nuclei stain blue. 2 

TRIPLE STAINING. 

Metanil Yellow, Methyl Green and Safranin.—Preparation: 
ala nasi of a child, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained for 8 minutes in the yellow solution, then for 
30 seconds in the safranin solution, then for 20 seconds in the methyl] 
green solution, and finally passed through the metanil yellow solution. 

The different elements are differentiated as in the double stain with 
metanil yellow and methyl green, except the color is of a darker shade 
and all muscular elements are stained red. 

Metanil Yellow, Crystal Ponceau and Crystal Violet.—Prep- 
aration: ala nasi of a child, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained for 2 to 16 minutes in a mixture of 5 c.c. of 
the yellow solution, 5 c.c. of the ponceau solution, and 3 c.c. of the 
violet solution, or they are stained for 8 minutes in the yellow solution, 
then for 6 minutes in the ponceau solution, and finally for 15 seconds in 
the violet solution. 

Cartilage and nuclei of cartilage cells, the superficial layer of the 
epidermis stain blueish-violet; connective tissue, elastic fibres and 
glands stain light red; the deep layer of the epidermis, the rete Mal- 
pighi, hair-shaft, the root-sheaths, membrane of fat cells and muscle 
stain yellow. 

Metanil Yellow, Azo Blue, and Methyl Green.—Preparation : 
ala nasi of a child, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained for 10 nee in the yellow solution, then 
for 6 minutes in the blue solution, and then for 2 minutes in the green 
solution ; finally the sections are passed through the yellow solutions 

The epidermis, hair-shaft, inner root-sheath, ‘Goeth and striated mus- 
cle stain yellow ; membrane of cells, the rete Malpighi, membrana pro- 
pia of glands, elastic fibres and connective tissue stain violet; nuclei 
of gland cells and nuclei of the cells of the Malpighian layer, outer root- 
sheath, smooth muscle and connective tissue stain green. 

Crystal Ponceau, Methyl Green and Crystal Violet.—Prepar- 
ation: ala nasi of a child, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained for 8 minutes in a mixture of 10 c.c. of the 
ponceau solution, 4 c.c. of the green, and 2 c.c. of the violet, or they 
are stained for 8 minutes in the ponceau solution, then for 3 minutes in 
the methyl green solution, and then for 5 seconds in the violet solution. 

The epidermis, hair-shaft and outer root-sheath stain violet; smooth 
and striated muscle, elastic fibres and connective tissue stain rose-red : 
the stratum mocosum stains green; the inner root-sheath, all glands and 

membrane of fat cells, cartilage and nuclei of its cells stain green. 
QUADRUPLE STAINING. 

Metanil Yellow. Safranin, Methyl Green and Crystal Violet. 
—Preparation: ala nasi of a child, alcohol hardening. 

The sections are stained for 20 minutes in the yellow solution, then 
for I minute in the safranin solution, then again for 5 seconds in the 
‘yellow solution, then for 2 minutes in the methyl green solution, then 
again for 5 seconds in the safranin, then again for 5 “seconds in the yel- 


> 
ioe solution, and finally for 10 seconds in the violet solution. 


1889. ] ‘ MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 33 


The epidermis, hair-shaft, inner root-sheath, and all nuclei stain yel- 
low; the. rete Malpighi, outer root-sheath, sweat glands, sebaceous 
*glands, the nuclei of cells and smooth muscle stain green ; nuclei of con- 
nective tissue, elastic fibres, lobes of the sebaceous glands with the nu- 
clei of their cells, membrane of fat cells, stain red; cartilage and the 
nuclei of its cells stain violet. 


Report upon the Postal Club Boxes—III. 


By QUEEN MAB. 
(Continued from page 8.) 

Box W?.-—No. 3 contains crystals of sulphur by Prof. C. H. Kain. 

No. 4 is by E. E. Read, Jr., Camden, N. J., and contains the trans- 
verse section of a seed of Collomia. It wascut with a common razor 
while held between the thumb and finger, mounted in balsam, and 
ringed with Brunswick black, which is unfortunately showing its 
fallibility by ‘ running in.’ Objectives recommended ; t for cell struc- 
ture, and }to } for protoplasm. 

No. 5 is a section of Nelwmbcum lutewm, mounted in balsam, and 
is by A. P. Brown, of Camden. To a querist asking whether there is 
any probable difference in the chemical composition of those portions 
which stain with carmine and those taking iodine green, Rev. A. B. 
Hervey replies :—‘Some of the cell-walls colored green in this specimen 
are those which are usually lignified, viz., those of the vessels and 
sheath of the vascular bundles. The presence of lignin in these cut 
walls could easily be detected by the use of proper re-agents, as set 
forth on page 330 of the translation of Dr. Behren’s ‘Guide to the 
Microscopical Investigation of Vegetable Substances.’ 

Slide No. 6 isa desmid, by John M. Betts, of Camden, and though 

_a difficult object to preserve, retains its form perfectly, having been 
mounted in weak camphor water for over two years. 

The irregular arrival of boxes in January emphasizes anew the im- 
portance of each member strictly conforming to the rules by forwarding 
boxes at the expiration of the three days during which each is entitled 
to keep them. Only thus can the greatest efficiency be attained. <A 
new departure has been instituted this year by circulating a larger 
number of the Cole Studies,'and calling for fewer contributions from 
the circuits, thus raising the standard of the preparations circulated. 
There is one serious drawback to the enjoyment of the Cole Studies as 
now circulated. A pamphlet of text and box of slides enclosed ina 
pasteboard roll being unable to withstand the rough usage encountered 
in the mails, it has become necessary to have the boxes enclosed in tin 
and leather cases, while the pages of the text have been cut in halves 
to fit a letter envelope. This prevents consecutive paging of the re- 
modeled text, and to some whose time is too valuable to be applied to 
the solution it constitutes a serious annoyance. Probably the present 
form is the least of two evils, but it is to be hoped that Mr. Cole 
will consider this defect. His studies are otherwise incomparable and 
present excellent examples of that happy medium—a popular style with- 
out sacrifice of scientific accuracy—while many of the slides are ideal 
preparations. 

Box be.—The description of this box is a model of minuteness and 


34 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (February, 


completeness. It contains one preparation each of vegetable and ani- 
mal anatomy. The vegetable section is a transverse one of the stem of 
maize, selected as presenting a typical Monocotyledon, is mounted 
balsam, and is to be viewed with polariscope and paraboloid. Roots 
in general are first described. Beyond their primary function of fixing 
pl: ae to the ground and absorbing nutriment therefrom, roots are often 
reservoirs of nutritious matter and become greatly enlarged, e. o., the 
turnip, carrot, etc. Aerial roots formed by tree ferns ad orchids are 
modifications meeting special needs: in orchids both fibrous and bul- 
bous roots are devoloped, the one as organs of absorption, and the other 
storing up nutriment. The microscopic characteristics of root are then 
described. The stem of a plant is the organ which develops leaves, 
flowers and fruits; the part of the plant which grows in an opposite 
direction from the roots, shooting upwards through and above the 
ground. The popular application ‘of the term “stem” to that portion 
only which grows above the earth is incorrect, for many plants possess 
under-ground stems. For further descriptions of stems, the student is 
refered to text-books of botany. The forms ofstems are then consid- 
ered, the typical form, approaching the cylindrical. and its variations. 
The special functions of the stem are the support of the leaves, flowers, 
and fruits, and the conveyance, through channels, throughout the plant 
of the nutritious compounds Spee anea from the soil. The nature and 
texture of stems vary according to the duration of the life of plants ; 
annuals, and biennials having as a rule soft stems, while perennials and 
trees have stems more or lesa woody. 

Numerous bundles of fibro-vascular tissue are scattered throughout the 
stems of monocotyledonous plants, the whole structure being invested 
with an epidermis. A plate represents an isolated fibro-vascular bun- 
dle, surrounded by the ground tissue of the stem. The two large ovoid 
orifices lying side by ede in the centre of the fibro-vascular sane are 
very wide v eeccie. havi ing pitted markings and comparatively thin walls. 
The circular orifice between these is a spiral vessel; the oval space 
under this is a vessel with annular markings or thickenings, and below 
it is an air space. Between the two large central vessels lie trachezdes, 
which convey water. Above and peeeen the pair of central vessels is 
a patch of soft dast formed of sieve tubes, whose function is the con- 
veyance throughout the plant body of nitrogenous food supplies. A 
sheath of narrow, elongated, thick-walled cells (sclerenchyma) com- 
pletely surrounds and protects each fibro-vascular bundle. Ifa tran- 
verse section of stem of maize be examined, there will be seen — 

ist. The efédermzs, formed of flattened cells (protected by a czfz- 
cle), with openings (stomata) here and there through it. 

2d. A layer of cells with thick walls (sclerenchyma) developed in 
order to strengthen the stem. 

Bal he 209 “ound tissue, made up of thin- walled parenchymatous 
cells, with inter-cellular spaces. 

4th. The j6r0-vascular bundles, distributed through, and_ sur- 
rounded by, the ground tissue, as already described. 

The remaining slide of this box is a section of normal human kidney, 
hardened in Miiller’s fluid and spirit, cut with the freezing microtome, 
stained with logwood and eosine, and mounted in Canada balsam, and it 
is described with the minuteness, completeness, and lucidity of the first 
preparation. 


1889.] ‘MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 35 


Desmids: Their Life History and Their Classification.* 
By Rev. FRED’K B. CARTER, 
MONTCLAIR, N. J. 

Hardly any attention has been bestowed upon the desmids by the 
microscopists of this country, if we are to judge by the pages of the 
Vicroscopical Fournal for the past seven years. There are but two 
or three articles which deal with this subject in all those volumes. Note 
the multitude of pages on the diatoms and be struck by the contrast. 
Microscopists seem almost to have gone diatom-mad. The amount that 
has been written on the peeolitions of fine lines and dots would alone 
fill a yolume. Now, while the attempt to resolve the more difficult 
diatoms has been vastly beneficial to the makers of objectives, it has 
not proved of much solid benefit to the amateur. Had he spent a quar- 
ter of the time he has given to this task in the observation of any one 
of half a dozen interesting members of the animal or vegetable world, 
biologically and systematically considered, he would have gotten far 
more use out of his tube and been able to help others as w ell. These 
neglected desmids, for example, are equally worthy of study with the 
diatoms- ahead of them in interest if the examination of the latter 
is Seahined, to the resolution of delicate markings. 

The desmids are to be found everywhere Velmete interposing no bar- 
rier to their distribution, from the north pole to the equator. Wolle 
says :—‘ They are nearly equal in number of species to that of all the 
other orders of fresh-water alge.’ They occur in immense quantities. 
Last spring a good sized pond i in Orange, N. J., was so coated with a 
single species of Clostertum along the border that the mud beneath was 
almost concealed. The mind wearies as it tries to conceive of the 
billions upon billions of this single species in that one pond alone. 
They are of wonderful diversity, ‘ no other family in the whole range 
of the plant world presenting such a boundless variety of forms.’+ 
They are strikingly beautiful in shape and color and markings. 

They are almost at the bottom of the vegetable kingdom, among the 
lowest of all green things upon the earth, in this respect rivalling the 
rhizopods in the animal scale. Furthermore, they give us the key 
to the whole biological problem, the typical cell ; surely here is enough 
to attract any one. I confess I feel strongly on age neglect. Nor is it 
strange, since it was a desmid which, by its exquisite symmetry, first 
really started me on my microscopical w ork twelve years and more ago. 
I can see the little beauty as plainly as if it were yesterday. All the 
surroundings of the room and the persons who were present are pho- 
tographed on my memory, and I can feel again the thrill of delight that 
came with the discov ery of that AZécr Be zas. That little plant gave 
me the first impetus ; created an enthusiasm which has not died out 
yet, but rather has increased as the years have gone on. No wonder 
then that the desmids are favorites of mine. 

The desmids are alge which, in the matter of reproduction, resem- 
ble Palmogloea. Nowe. Palmogloea is a‘ humble Protophyte which 
presents the phenomena of cell division conjugation, and gonidial mul- 
tiplication, under their simplest and most instructive aspect.’ A marked 
feature of all plants is the cells of which they are composed, | and as the 


* Read before the Essex County Microscopical Society, Nov. 15, 1888. 
+ Nave’s Handy Book of Alge. 


36 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [February, 


desmids are one-celled plants of the lowest type, we have here the vege- 
table kingdom as it were in a nutshell, reduced to the last analysis. 
The life- history of the individual cell forming, according to Schleiden,* 

the true basis of the study of vegetable life in general, ‘the desmids af- 
ford admirable examples ‘for just such study and furnish the key to the 
whole problem. 

In the typical plant cell we have the cell-wall and the cell contents. 
Now, this cell-wall is double, and the two layers are different ; the inner 
is the more important of the two and it is practically identical with the 
protoplasm which fills it, being albuminous in character and having 
little to distinguish it but its thicker consistence and the absence of 
granules. But the outer layer is made up of cellulose which, says Car- 
penter, seems to be excreted from the surface of the inner layer. Now, 
the sarcode of animals and the protoplasm of plants are identical. We 
may say then that the azma/ cell is free protoplasm, the plant cell 
protoplasm enclosed and limited by a ce//ulose layer or covering. For 
J chlorophyll is not a necesssity to the vegetable cell; it is ascent in the 
fungi and in lichens; so close is the vegetable to the animal kingdom 
at this point. Indeed, as Carpenter says, ‘ it is impossible to draw a 
definite line of division between fungi and protozoa in some cases.’ 
The plant protoplasm excretes cellulose, the animal sarcode or proto- 
plasm excretes chitin, and as the outer layer (of cellulose) is not essen- 
tialf to the existence of the plant, nor the shell or test to the rhizopod, 
we may say that the plant and the animal are identical so far as sub- 
stance is concerned. Protoplasm and the primordial utricle—whether 
ectosare or ectoplasm—these are what really constitute protophytes and 
protozoa alike. We may represent it by a circle of which the inner 
portion is protoplasm and the boundary primordial utricle. Here are 
the essentials of plant and animal, and they are the same in both cases. 
The protoplasm is the same in each, the primordial utricle is the 

same in each, 22¢+o0genous, albuminous in plant as well as in animal. 

A marvellous fact this and well worth remembering carefully. Addon 
now a cellulose wall (represented by an outer boundary line to the cir- 
cle) and you have the typical plant cell with its protoplasm limited by 
the primordial utricle and enclosed in a layer of cellulose; and the test 
is carmine, which stains dead protoplasm but leaves the cellulose un- 
stained. 

Under the contents of the plant cell we have chiefly to consider the 
nucleus and the chlorophyll corpuscles. Note, again, that the former 
is albuménous in both plant and animal, another striking bond of union, 
as it is the very centre of vital activity. The zzztzal for ce, therefore, 
is of the same character in both kingdoms. Within the nucleus there 
are frequently smaller bodies, the nucleoli. Others go still further and 
speak of nucleo-nucleoli, and a recent writer, Gonn: tells us that we 
must, on this account, as well as for other reasons, entirely change our 
ideas regarding the typical cell. But it is hardly necessary to do more 
here and now than refer you to his striking article in the August num- 
ber of the JZcroscopical Fournal (1888), and to Prof. Whitman’s ab- 
stract in the same Youwrnal for November. The chlorophyll corpuscles 


* Carpenter, The Microscope. 
$+ Max Schultze, quoted by Carpenter. 
t Encyclopedia Britannica, Article on Biology. 


1889. ] ‘MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 37 


are also bits of protoplasm which are largely aléumznous (note that 
again), distinguished by their green color. These ‘ decompose CO?, 
and fix its carbon, by union with the oxygen and hydrogen of water, 
‘into starch.’* They are of the utmost importance, therefore laying the 
foundations on which the various vegetable substances are built; but 
there is nothing more to say about them from an optical stand-point 
than has been said. 

But even these few parts, we are reminded, are not always distin- 
guishable in the lowest forms. The cellulose wall and the nucleus are 
sometimes apparently absent, and the inner layer hardly differs from 
the substance it encloses. This would correspond almost exactly toa 
naked rhizopod, an ameeba, so far as structure is concerned. And here 
let me quote some striking words of Huxley on this point. ‘It is not 
necessary,’ he says, ‘ to the mor phological unit of the piant that it should 
be provided with a cell-wall. Certain plants, such as Protococcus, 
spend longer or shorter periods of their existence in the condition of a 
mere spheroid of protoplasm. . . . Therefore, just as the nucleus, 
the primordial utricle, and the central fluid are no essential constituents 
of the morphological unit of the plant, but represent results of the met- 
amorphosis, so the cell-wall is equally unessential. . . . The his- 
tological analysis of animal tissues has led to results .°. . of pre- 
cisely the same character. , . . It is certain that in the animal, as 
in the plant, neither cell-wall nor nucleus are essential constituents of 
the cell. . . . For the whole living world, then, it results :—that 
the morphological units—the primary and fundamental form of life—is 
merely an individual mass of protoplasm, in which no further structure 
is discernible.’+ Another striking point of resemblance between the 
two kingdoms Carpenter brings to our notice, that certain Protophytes 
‘not only move like animalcules by cilia or flagella, but exhibit the 
rythmically contracting vacuoles which are specially characteristic of 
Protozotc organisms.’ 

Now the desmids have the outer coat, primordial utricle, and proto- 
plasm with its chlorophyll corpuscles which are found in the typical 
cell as commonly understood. They afford a splendid opportunity, 
therefore, for the study of cell life. It is evident, also, that their struc- 
ture is almost as simple and easily mastered as that of the rhizopods. 
There is little to describe. They have no differential parts, I mean, 
such as root, stem, branches, leaves, organs of reproduction; there is 
no nucleus visible in the majority of cases. In Cosmarium, Euastrum, 
and other genera, however, there are often large circular masses of 
granules which Wolle in some cases calls chlorophyll nuclez, in others 
tnflations or protuberances ; and some regard the whole endochrome 
as a diffused nucleus, the scattered granules of which they term nucleoli. 
But we may disregard this as still a matter of dispute. Outside and 
inside, cell-wall and endochrome, these are all we have to study usually. 
The inside is much the same in general appearance in the different genera ; 
the outside gives us great var iety of shapes, markings, and processes, and 
sometimes, as in Closterium, seems to be of a siliceous character. Oc- 
casionally crystals are met with in the interior, and at the period of 
reproduction the endochrome Presents an altered arrangement. In 


i Carpenter. ne 
+ Encyclopedia Britannica, Article on Biology. 


38 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [February, 


common with other families of alge, some of the desmids (Awastrum 
for example) present the phenomena of polarization to some extent. 
But as far as structure is concerned, from an optical point of view, it is 
a very simple study in biology. We are at our A, B, C’s. This is 
primer work inthe v egetable ikingdom. You can hardly get any lower 
down. The lichens and fungi are the only things beneath. Of all the 
green things upon the earth, let me say again, the desmids are among 
the very simplest. 

But when you pass from their structure to their motion a difficult 
problem presents itself. This motion is of three kinds. There is the 
flow of the protoplasm ; the twisting or swarming of little granules in 
the vacuoles of some genera and in the body of the cell or semi-cell 
in others, at certain stages; and the motion of the plant, as a whole, 
resulting in change of place. And of neither of these can any satis- 
factory explanation be given; all that can be done is to state the facts 
and describe the several movements respectively. The flow of the pro- 
toplasm seems to be a true cyclosis or circulation extending over the 
whole cell or semi-cell; the dancing of the granules in the caengles of 
Clostertum is local, aiid is apparently produced by the general flow ; 
the swarming of the little bodies in Cosmarium and other genera is also 
local, but not connected with the circulation, as it is not alway Ss present. 
It appears when the plant is at its fullest life, and would seem to be re- 
lated to reproduction. The external motion is a slow sailing, and is 
not characterized by the definiteness of direction so marked in diatoms, 
the desmid frequently turning half-way or completely around as it moves 
across the field. The dancing granules at the ends are confined. so far 
as I know, to Clostertum, Pentum, and Docidium, and the swarming 
is most pronounced in Cosmartum and Feuastrum. In Micrastertas 
and Fuastrum you will sometimes find black bodies of considerable 
size scattered over the interior of the cell. In a gathering of large 
specimens of these genera made during the past summer fa that of 
the previous year they were very ahaa. What their purport is no 
one appears to know. 

Reproduction is by both subdivision and conjugation. In the first 
process each semi-cell forms the counterpart of itself. These may re- 
main attached for a time and up to a certain number, as in Docidzum 

Micrasterias, where we may have from two to twenty cells in a row, 
or ane may keep together until the period of conjugation, forming the 
filamentous desmids. In conjugation, which is a true generative | pro- 
cess, two cells separate each into two valves, and the contents of both 
fuse and form a zygospore. In the filamentous species a connecting 
tube unites the cells, and the contents of one pass entirely over into the 
other and form the spore. Wolle says that the germination of the spore 
is very rarely detected. I, for one, have never Serie it, although 
the desmids have been constantly under my eye for years. Germina- 
tion is said to occur in the spr ing and the result is a copy “of the parent ; 
in Cosmartum the spore is said to produce a number of such like 
forms. There isa chance here for the student to add to our knowledge, 
but it would appear to be slight. So much for the life-history of the 
desmids ; next we come to the classification. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 39 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


Typhoid Fever and Water Supply.—One of the most timely and 
sensible papers recently reported is that of Dr. Chas. Smart, Surgeon 
U.S. A., given before the American Public Health Association at its 
recent meeting. The paper itself has not come to our notice, but if 
the reports are in any fair degree accurate the paper treats the question 
of water supply as connected with typhoid fever in a way that reflects 
credit upon the author. The enormous number of deaths from this 
disease throughout the country is a sad reflection upon the carelessness 
with which this matter of water supply is considered. When the 
authorities of our cities and larger towns take a more intelligent view 
of the question, private supplies in the smaller towns will be more 
scrupulously attended to. Wells in thickly-settled towns are hardly 
better than death pots. If ever used to supply drinking water they 
should be frequently examined by an expert with the. microscope. 
Chemical examination often fails to detect the worst dangers. A case 
examined by us a few years ago in which several members of a family 
had been prostrated by the disease afforded little chemical warning, 
but a careful microscopic examination revealed the source of danger. 


O 


Yellow Fever.—The adverse report of Surgeon General Hamilton 
regarding the bill offering a reward of $100,000 for the discovery of 
ihe true germ of yellow ores is wise. More liberal reward for work 
done and results obtained by accurate and patient research cannot fail 
to meet the approval of all scientists, but such a biil as the one proposed 
would hardly fail to lead to contention and would be far from certain 
to place the reward where it would be most deserved. The spirit of 
research will give the facts to the world without the offer of inducements 
in the form of prizes, if only the means of carrying on the research can 
be provided. Meanwhile, however, much may Be done to render in- 
vestigations more fruitful of results by the encouragement of investigators 
in connection with the National Bureau of leiealisae and the enforcement 
of more rigid laws of sanitation in the sections subject to the scourge 
will accomplish much more for the immunity of the people. The con- 
dition of Jacksonville as regards sanitary provisions, according to the 
report of General Hamilton, is a crying demand for more strict regula- 
tions. Self-interest will not induce certain members of society to guard 
themselves against sources of danger which are not of the most el: ring 
nature, and for the protection of others these recreant members should 
be forced to abide by such rules as the common interest demands. 


——o 


Black Rot of the Grape.—To all who are interested in the culture 
of the grape, Bulletin No. 7 of the Botanical Section of the Department of 
Agriculture is specially important. It is the report of Mr. F. Lamson 
Scribner, Chief of the Section of Vegetable Pathology, upon the rav ages 
and mode of treatment of the parasitic fungus, Lestadia bidwellii, 
which causes the disease known as the Black rot of the grape. The 
very wide distribution of the disease and the small nmaber! of 1 varieties 


* This department is conducted by Prof. J. H. Pillsbury. 


40 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ February, 


of the grape that are even ina slight degree exempt from its attacks 
renders the investigations, the eerie of w neal are given in this report, 
of great practical value: The regions in which a moist and warm at- 
mosphere prevails while the grape is maturing and ripening are found 
to be most favorable for the “development of “the disease. Nearly all 
the most popular varieties are very susceptible to the disease, and those 
especially which have a rich juicy pulp. A few varieties that have 
been much cultivated, notably the Concord, are nearly free from the 
attacks. The most important part of the report, however, is that which 
treats of the remedy. The report claims that treatment with a mix- 
ture of copper -sulphate and lime in solution sprayed upon the vines 
completely protects them from the attacks of the fungus. Six pounds of 
copper- sulphate 1 is dissolved in 16 gallons of water, and 6 pounds of 
lime slaked in 6 gallons of water. TAfter the latter is cool the two are 
mixed and the solution sprayed upon the vines. It was found that 
there are two periods of attack, one about June 22 and another about 
July 18 or rg. Another bulletin is promised, giving a more detailed 
account of the experiments, and it.is to be hoped that it will contain 
definite instructions concerning the mode of treatment likely to be most 
effectual and universally applicable. Mr. Scribner deserves great credit 
for the efficient service he has rendered grape cultivators. Prof. Pierre 
Viola, who was appointed by the French government to visit this 
country in the interest of v iticulture, worked wih Mr. Scribner during 
the summer of 1887, and the report is issued by them jointly. 
re) 
New Staining Fluid.—Dr. Gustav Platner has used a new stain, 
which he calls ‘* nucleus black,” for staining nuclei. It is found to 
work much more generally than safranin, and is capable of giving any 
degree of intensity.—(Zert. f. Wiss. Mic.) 


Oo 
PCaNDE of Wounds.—Prof. Leon Le Fort is reported (Scvence, 
vol. 12, p. 211) as believing that the impurity of the air has no injurious 


effect upon the healing of wounds. This opinion seems remarkable in 
view of the various tests that have been applied by various investigators, 
both to determine the presence of disease germs in the air and pect of 
purified air upon the healing of eoinice Something more than an 
opinion will be needed to convince the intelligent public that the Pro- 
fessor is correct. 


oO 


Killing the Yellow Fever Germs.—At Jacksonville, Fla., steam- 
ing and drying rooms are building to be used for disinfecting bedding, 
carpets. and clothing. The rooms are tight compartments, 10 x 12 6h 
feet in dimensions Bie are closed by trap-doors which are raised by 
means of pulleys. There is one steaming room and two drying rooms. 
The floors of the rooms are covered with steam pipes, those in the 
steaming room being perforated every six inches to allow of the escape 
of fine jets of steam. It was expected to begin operations on Dec. 4. 
For blankets and such other articles of bedding as can be saved, three 
large cylindrical vats have been prepared, where ‘they will be thoroughly 
purified with boiling water, after which they will be put through a 
steam wringer Ww hich revolves with great rapidity, forcing the water “out. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 41 
BACTERIOLOGY~ 


Method of Preparing Nutritive Gelatine.— The following 
method is one of the best. Tubes to be used for the storing and subse- 
quent inoculation of the gelatine must be thoroughly Glemecdt dried. 
plugged with cotton- seal or fine cotton, and Sierilizedt This is done 
by heating them for one hour in a hot-air sterilizer or oven at a temper- 
ature of 150° SP Geo" F:) 

Care should be taken that the plugs fit firmly, but not too tight. 
When the tubes are ready the following method is recommended : 

Take, for example, 250 grams (about one-half pound) of good beef 
after all fat has been removed. Chopor grind this to a fine pulpy mass. 
Transfer it to a beaker, and add 500 c.cm. of distilled water—. e., 
2 c.cm. of water for every gram of chopped beef. Thoroughly stir up 
the beef in the water, and then place it in an ice-box, or, if in winter. 
in a cold room until the next day. 

On the following morning the meat infusion should be thoroughly 
stirred, and the liquid portion separated by filtering and squeezing through 
a linen cloth. The red liquid thus obtained must be brought up to fie 
amount of water taken on the previous day by adding distilled Ww ater. 
To this is now added 1% of peptone, 4% sodium chioride: and 10% of 
the best gelatine. This would be in the case taken, 5 grams of peptone, 
2.5 grams of salt, and 50 grams of gelatine. The beaker containing 
this mixture is now placed ina es bath and heated to 45° C. and 
allowed to stand for some minutes, until the gelatine is completely dis- 
solved. 

The next process requires the greatest care and attention. Most 
micro-organisms grow best in a slightly alkaline medium. This is ob- 
tained by adding, drop by drop, a nearly saturated solution of sodium 
carbonate to the beef-infusion-peptone gelatine mass until the reaction 
is slightly alkaline, which is determined by its turning red litmus paper 
to a faint blue. If by accident it should be made too alkaline it can be 
neutralized by the addition of lactic acid. In order to clarify it the 
white of two eggs is now added and thoroughly stirred into the gelatine 
mixture. 

It is now boiled for one-half hour by placing the beaker or flask con- 
taining it in a large water bath or covered kettle. After boiling it is 
allowed to cool and set, after which it is again heated to the boiling 
point, and filtered while hot. A hot filtering apparatus is necessary for 
this. It may, however, be filtered with the ‘ordinary filter in a hot-air 
chamber at a temperature of 60° C. The funnel should be kept covered 
while filtering to avoid evaporation. 

The process of filtration must be repeated if necessary until the fil- 
trate is perfectly clear. It is of a pale amber color generally, varying 
in tint according to the amount of blood in the meat =e It is deste 
able to filter it into a sterilized narrow-necked flask to avoid evapora- 
tion. It is now ready to be distributed in tubes. The sterilized test- 
tubes are filled for about one-third of their depth (7 to 8 c.cm. in each) 
by pouring in the gelatine carefully and steadily to prevent the mixture 
from touching the part of the tube with which the plug comes in con- 


* This department is conducted by V. A. Moore, assistant in the laboratory of the Bureau of Animal 
Industry. 


42 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [February, 


tact, otherwise when the gelatine sets the cotton-wool adheres to the 
tube and becomes a source Ee embarrassment in subsequent procedures. 
Care also should be taken not*to contaminate by touching or otherwise 
that part of the plug that belongs within the tube during ‘the process of 
pouring the gelatine into them. 

After the tubes are filled they should be placed in a wire basket and 
suspended in a steam sterilizer for ten minutes after the thermometer 
indicates a temperature of too° C. This is repeated each day for three 
successive days. This has been found sufficient to sterilize the gelatine. 
If one has not a sterilizer the tubes may be placed in a water ein and 
be boiled for five minutes each day for three successive days. If the 
gelatine is boiled too much it will not set upon cooling and is therefore 
worthless. After the gelatine is sterilized it should be kept in a cool 
place until used. 


16) 


Cultivation of Bacillus Tuberculosis on Potato.*—Dr. A. D. 
Pawlowsky cultivates the bacillus of tubercle on potato as follows :— 
Into narrow test-tubes of the shape devised by Roux are placed slips 
of potato. These are then sterilized for half an hour at a temperature 
of 115° C. When withdrawn from the steamer, the tubes are placed 
at an angle of 30° in order to get cool, and also to drain. The potato 
is then Tapenade the tubes plugged, and kept at a temperature of 39° C. 

After twelve days’ incubation the culture appears. It is whitish and 
ZL) , and shows up distinctly against the yellow color of the potato. 
In 5 to 6 weeks the surface is cov ered with greyish white granulations. 
If glycerinated potato be used, the bacdine seems to ee elop with 
greater rapidity. The pathogenic properties of the bacillus are quite 
maintained ; rabbits inoculated therewith die in 18 days. 

The author is of opinion that the reason why other experimenters 
have failed to propagate the bacillus on potato is that they have failed 
to recognize that humidity is an essential condition of the life of this 
microbe. 


oO 


Spore formation in the Bacillus of Glanders.+—Prof. P. Baum- 
garten states that Dr. Rosenthal has made numerous experiments to 
pe emnine the question, previously unsolved, of endogenous spore for- 
mation in glanders bacillus. Numerous experiments Sait cover glass 
preparations from somewhat old potato cultivations of this microbe 
have shown the presence of spores, the appearances resembling those 
obtained with anthrax bacillus. Neisser’s method for staining spores 
(one hour's staining in Ehrlich’s fuchsin solution in a steam sterilizer 
at 100° C., or 150° C. with dry heat, decolorizing in hydrochloric 
acid and alcohol, and after staining with methylin blue) was adopted. 
The spores were colored a deep meds and the rest of the rodlet blue. 
The spores were for the most part free, but sometimes within the bacilli. 
It must therefore be considered as settled that glanders bacillus forms 
spores, but whether always or only under certain conditions remains to 
be determined. 


* Ann. Instit. Pasteur, ii. 1888, 303. 
t Centralb f. Bak. u. Parasit., 1888, iii, 397. 


1889. ] MICROSC COPICAL JOURNAL. 43 
EDITORIAL. 


The Scientific Publications of the Government.—A word upon 
the increasing importance of these issues and especially how to obtazn 
them will be welcomed by every scientific worker. Numerous pam- 
phlets, and at times very costly ‘books, are being printed by order of 
Congress. A given number (between 1,500 and 2,000) are always 
printed, and of important volumes ‘* extra copies ” are ordered. These 
are placed at the disposal of Senators, Representatives, and heads of Bu- 
reaux, for gratuitous distribution. Frequently copies are also printed 
to be sold merely at a fro rata cost price of the mechanical work 
involved. 

Senators and Representatives who feel sure of retaining their places 
distribute their quotas largely to public libraries in their States and dis- 
tricts. Those who feel the need of friends often place their books 
‘¢ where they will do the most good.” Those who have lost their 
places and their friends are said at times to sell their books to dealers. 

Dealers have three sources for obtaining books: (1) They buy at 
the Government Printing Office or Departments. (2) They buy out 
retiring Congressmen. “(3) They buy at library en ‘and from 
other private sources. 

How to get the books.—First. You must know definitely what to 
ask for. A general request to send you something on Meteorology or 
on Yellow Fever will usually fail: (1) because your correspondent 
sees that you have nothing definitely in mind; (2) because he has not 
time to hunt out a title for you. 

Second. Prefer a polite request to the Represcueiage from your dis- 
trict, especially if he is of your party. If that fails, and your name is 
well known in the State, try one and then the other Senator from your 
State. If you can enclose a letter of introduction from a citizen in flu- 
ential in politics do so. 

Third. If you yourself have published something—anything—enclose 
a copy to the head ofa Department or Bureau, requesting in exchange 
a publication of theirs, which you specify. This will work in most 
cases, unless you ask for too much, and they will usually give you far 
more than you give them. 

Fourth. When all else fails, money will do the deed. There are 
dealers in Washington who make a business of getting and mailing this 
class of literature. 

The key to the situation is a list of all scientific prints as they appear. 
We have a ‘“‘ Monthly Catalogue of all Government Publications,” but 
it costs $5.00 per annum. You can perhaps consult that ina large 
public library. Some of the Bureaux print lists of their publications 
for gratuitous distribution. This is especially true of the Smithsonian 
Institution and Geological Survey, to whom application can be made. 
But so far as biological topics are concerned, with perhaps some other 
scientific titles, we will try to keep you posted, and will add the deal- 
ers’ prices. All orders sent to our care will be handed to a responsi- 
ble dealer, and we will guarantee our subscribers right treatment. We 
cannot take this trouble except for subscribers. 

Librarians should give this subject their earnest attention. Scores 
of most valuable publications are lost to them simply because they are 


44 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ February, 


not on the alert for them. Leidy’s Rhizopods now sells for $5 here 
and $10 in London. Soon it will bring more. When first issued li- 
braries should have obtained it free. The beautifully illustrated ‘+ Fish- 
ing Industries of the United States” cost over $50,000, and would be 
put on the market by New York publishers at $10 a volume. This 
could at first be bought for $2.45, but the Government Printer’s stock 
is about exhausted. Dealers ask $4.50. A few public libraries have 
it. Others neither asked their Senators for it nor bought it at cost. 
Many do not to this day know that there is such a valuable work. Each 
Congressman had but a few copies, which were early exhausted. 

If librarians would ascertain what valuable books and pamphlets are 
being issued and at once secure copies they would find their scientific 
eollecnene greatly enriched and at very trivial cost. Our bibliograph- 
ical lists wil help them to hundreds of dollars’ worth if they will 
promptly use the means above indicated. College professors who cannot 
obtain the publications for their private libraries should remember that 
the college libraries may succeed where they fail if the librarian’s at- 
tention is promptly called to the matter. 


—_—O-———_ 


Professor Hitchcock at Home.—lIt is a pleasure to announce the 
safe return from Japan, after an absence of nearly three years, of the 
founder of this Journal. Prof. and Mrs. Hitchcock arrived in New 
York by the German line of steamers on January 12th, and came im- 
mediately to Washington, where they are at present making their 
arrangements for iSsinitas work. Before leaving home he was the epee 
of Textile Fabrics in the United States National Museum, the director 
of which kindly granted him a furlough. On the way homeward he 
has paid some very s satisfactory visits 6 the optical establishments in 
Germany and promises some contributions descriptive of what he saw 
there. In behalf of many friends whose names are still on our mailing 
list we welcome Prof. and Mrs. Hitchcock home again, and congratulate 


them upon having enjoyed what comes to but few of us—a trip around 
the world. 


O 


Kissing the Bible.—The lips are most sensitive to the reception of 
disease germs, and from the motley throng of dirty and diseased persons 
who appear in court and kiss the ‘book, what infectious germs may not 
be obtained through this medium of distribution? It w eait be interest- 
ing for microscopists to examine such greasy and worn backs of court 
Bibles as they can have access to and to report the kinds and amounts 
of bacteria found thereon. 

Certainly it is a wise precaution to keep court bibles off the lips. 
Swearing with uplifted hand is not only safer, but more dignified. 

In a Massachusetts school where scarlet ines and measles had pre- 

vailed some text-books fell into disuse, were put away for a time, and, 
when wanted, gotten out and _ re-distributed, sev eral months having 
elapsed. In but a few days after the re-issue of the books the children 
began to come down with measles. There can be little doubt that 
scarlet fever is transmitted in the same way. Co We Ss 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 45 
MICROSCOPICAL SOCTETIES. 


San Francisco MicroscoPIcaAL SOCIETY. 


W ‘ednesday, Oct. 24, 1888.—The subject of anthrax in meat, which 
is at present receiving much attention from the California Board of 
Health, provided a subject for deliberation and research among the mi- 
croscopists. A section of cow’s liver containing a large number of anthrax 
bacilli was presented by Dr. Stallard. Though not very distinct, the 
germs were easily discernible, and were by no means calculated to 
increase the observer’s appetite for liver puddings. 

Mr. Norris exhibited one of Bourgoyne’s slides, containing a speci- 
men of diatomaceous earth, found some years ago by an officer ofthe Coast 
Signal Service on the honeh at Santa itonieas The specimen is es- 
pecially interesting, as one like it has never yet been found. Some of 
the members thought that it had been w ashed from the shores of Santa 
Catalina Island, w while others inclined to the opinion that it had’ come 
from the bottom of the sea, though how it could have detached itself 
from the parent mass and risen to the surface of the water was ap- 
parently a rather knotty question. 

Among those present at the meeting was Dr. Thomas Porter, of Aus- 
tralia, mn presented the society with a fine collection of Australian 
polyzoa, for which he received a unanimous vote of thanks. 


Oo 
Essex County, N. J.—F. VANDERPOEL, Secy. 


Dec. 6, 7888.—Met at the office of Dr. Brown i Montclair. The 
subject announced was a discussion of Mr. Carter’s paper, but there 
was really a continuation of his paper. Mr. Cane had a number of 
fine forms of desmids which were examined through the tube by all 
present. Mr. C. H. Loomis also exhibited a mien of mounted speci- 
mens. The desmids exhibited by Mr. Carter w ere mounted in carbol- 
ized water. Euwastrum was observed through a 1” objective of 85° and 
later through another (1”) of 12 re. both being used with the binocular 
with very good stereoscopic ebect. By his homogenous i immersion 1” 
and the double tube a good stereoscopic effect was obtained even with 
this high magnification. Other forms exhibited were: Naxthzdium, 
Penium digitus, Closterium intermedium, Closterium acuminatum, 
Cosmartum botrytis. 

One of Zeiss’ high-class stands was exhibited with a number of ac- 
cessories, and was “critically examined. Opinions varied with regard 
to its appearance, working qualities, etc., but it certainly did not com- 
pare as favorably with tHe stands made in this country as one might 
think who had read the late attacks upon American stands. 

December 20, 1888.—This evening was devoted to the comparison 
of objectives in the possession of the: different members. Mr. Carter 
opened the tests by resolving the markings on Amphiple ura pellucida 
(in Smith’s medium) with “his hom. imm. 1”, the illumination being 
obtained through an Abbé condenser provided with a diaphragm, the 
opening of Saich was quite small, and placed at the extreme left of the 
centre. The resolution wasvery fine. A Tolles amplifier did not im- 
prove it; in fact, the latter seemed to operate disadvantageously. 

Mr. J. Lee Smith showed one of the same diatoms (in balsam) upon 


46 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ February, 


his large Powell and Lealand stand. The objective was a hom. imm. 
the companion lens to Mr. Carter’s, and the illumination was by 
means of a Wenham Reflex. The test in balsam being much more 
difficult than that in Smith’s medium, the details of form and mark- 
ings were not seen with the same clearness, but the result was highly 
satisfactory and was Dae: as fine as esnid be accomplished wh 
that particular diatom. G. S. Allan exhibited a Podura scale 
with his Apochromatic > 1 and satisfied the Society that for central 
light at least this glass has, as yet, no equal. A comparison was then 
made between this lens and a fine Water imm. 5%" upon the same 
scale, showing the superiority of the former in the matter of achrom- 
atism. Dr. ian had also a dry 4 ”“ of Powell and Lealand’s make. 
One characteristic of this glass is a ‘long working distance. It turned 
out to be avery valuable objective, as was proven by trying it upon 
some histological slides. 


O—— 


MicroscoPicAL SOCIETY, WASHINGTON, D. C. 


82d Meeting, Tuesday, Oct. 23, 1888.—Dr. Taylor exhibited a 


large number of photographs of microscopical objects, the most of them 


by Dr. G. W. Rafter, of Rochester, N. Y. He also spoke of his ex- 
amination of spices with reference to adulteration. Beautifully drawn 
and colored sections were shown. As in pepper the cellular structure 
varies, many sections should be made. Sulphuric acid will bring out 
the oil cells. He also made sections of cloves. The principal adul- 
terants of pepper are ground cocoa, nut-shells, and ground olive stones. 


White pepper is more adulterated than black. 


O 


83d Meeting, Nov. 73, 1888.—Mr. Chapman reported experiments 
with crystallized carbolic acid. Having poured some water on it, then 
poured off the water and added 95% alcohol, then poured this off and 
added water to the remainder of the acid, the two aqueous solutions 
had become discolored while the alcoholic solution remained clear. 
He found that insects clear up well in the alcoholic solution. Dr. 
Taylor said that his experience had been that alcohol and carbolic acid 
contracted the limbs of insects, but the addition of chloroform would 
relax them. 

Dr. Taylor read a paper ona freezing microtome invented by him. 
It will be printed in full in the microscopical journals. 


O 
LEAVENWORTH.—W. D. BIDWELL, Secy. 


Jan. 7, 1889.—A regular meeting was held at Dr. Bidwell’s office. 
The subject was the optical principles involved in determining angular 
aperture, and the value of a large angular aperture. Prof. Lighton ex- 
hibited a diagram showing the points under discussion very lucidly. 
He also spoke of some experiments he is making to obtain a material 
which will supplant the Nickels prism, the idea occurring to him as a 
slide of selenite mounted in styrax lay upon his hand in the sunlight. 

Dr. Bidwell described and showed the advantages of his new'c cabinet 
for slides. Drs. Van Eman and Carpenter discussed some of the dif- 
ficulties of section cutting. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 4 
NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


Proceedings of the American Soctety of Microscopists. Tenth An- 
nual Meeting held at Pittsburgh, Pa., Aug. 30-Sept. 2, 1887. 
8°, pp- 359. Peoria, 1888. 

No single volume published in this country contains a greater amount 
of matter “designed to show the progress which microscopy is making 
year by -year than these proceedings. The committee, Messrs. Burrill, 
Kellicott, and Mosgrove, have published the volume in an entirely sat- 
isfactory manner, if the unavoidable delay be pardoned. Most of those 
who receive the book will forget to thank this committee as they de- 
serve for doing gratuitously a job worth from $500 to $1000. As to 
the contents of the papers, which are mostly very valuable, we will refer 
the reader to our Bibliography where all the titles are cited. Those 
desiring copies should address Dr. S. M. Mosgrove, the treasurer, 


Urbana, Chio. 


“I 


—— () ———_- 


Proceedings of the American Society of Microscopists. Eleventh 
Annual Meeting held at Columbus, Ohio, August 21-24, 1888. 
8°, pp. 204. Hartford, 1889. 

Our ‘remarks upon the 1887 volume apply also to this, except that 
we wish to commend more highly the prompt publication. The vol- 
ume is smaller, contains some papers read at the meeting only by titles, 
the ponetinion! list of members, and an index. Dr. Lewis seems to 
have had quite an influence in getting out this volume in fine style, as 
well as promptly. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY—RECENT WRITINGS OF INTEREST. 


[This list will report books and articles of interest to microscopists and biologists. It will enable 
specialists to find literature of real value to them which space does not permit to be noticed more at 
length. Itis prepared solely in the interest of readers and not of advertisers. Put in ordering from 
publishers, always cite this page and date for convenience of identification. Requests from subscribers 
will be entertained, in special cases, for fuller information than is here given. } 


I.—IN PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MICROSCOPIsTs, 1887. 


BurriLL, T. J.—Disease Germs: Another illustration of the fact that bacteria 
causes disease. pp. 193-206. 

BurkIL_, T. J.—The Erysipheze of Illinois. (List of species given. Illus- 
trated.) pp. 301-10. 

DerMe_ers, FreEDA.—The Comparative Size of Blood Corpuscles of Man and 
Domestic Animals. (Large plate, tables of measurements, etc.) pp. 216-32. 

EwetL, M. D.—Comparison of Centimeter Scale ‘‘ Fasoldt Il” with Centi- 
meter Scale ‘‘ A.” pp. 299-300. 

FELLows, CHARLES S.—A Description of Ergasilus Chautauquaensis: A new 
species of Copepoda and a list of other Entramostraca found at Lake Chautau- 
qua, in August, 1886. (Illustrated.) pp. 246-9. 

Francis, MArK.—The Bacillus of Foot-Rot in Sheep. pp. 209-13. 

Gace, Stmon H.—Microscopical Tube Length and the parts included in it by 
various opticians of the world. II. The thickness of cover-glass for which un- 
adjustable objectives are corrected. pp. 168-172. 

GaGe, Simon H.—Determination of the Number of Trichine or other Animal 
Parasites in a given Quantity of Meat. pp. 1 

GaGer, SUSANNA S. PHeLps.—Ending and Relation of the Muscular Fibers in 


48 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [February. 


the Muscles of Sean Animals (Mouse, Mole, Bat, and English Sparrow). Ab- 
stract. pp. 207-8 

HENRICI, Jaco F.—Note ona Microscope presented by Linnzus to Bernard 
Jussieii in 1738. Clllustrated.) pp. 214-15. 

James, Frank L.—Shrinkage of Cement-Cells the Cause of Leakage and 
Creeping in glycerine Mounts. pp. 173-180. 

Keriicorr, D. S.—Additional Notes on a Certain Species of Rotifera. pp. 
181-86. 

Ketxiicotr, D. S.—Some New and Rare Infusoria. pp. 187-190. 

Lewis, GzeorGE W.—The Fallacies of Popular Bacterial Research. pp. 254-62. 

OviatT, BorpDMAN L.—Cardiac Muscle Cells in Man and certain other Mam- 
mals. (Illustrated.) pp. 283-98. 

RAFTER, GEORGE W.—On the Use of the Amplifier, with Observations on the 
Theory and Practice of Photo-Micrography, suggested by the Design of a New 
Photo-Micro-Camera. (Illustrated.) pp. 263- 82. 

RoGers, Wm. A.—The Microscope as a Factor in the Study of the Behavior 
of Metals under Variations of Temperature. (The presidential address.) pp. 
5-125. 

SmitH; HAmiI_ton L.—A contribution to the Life History of the Diatomacee. 
Part II. (Six colored plates and several figures. Important paper.) pp. 126-167. 

STEDMAN, J. M.—The ape: NG Methods of Preparation for the Museum 
and the Microscope. pp. 

TayLor, THOMAS. thes Crystallography of Butter and other Fats. (Illus- 
trated. Same as published in this Journal in 1887.) _ pp. 315-17 

Voice, C. M.—Note on a new Rotifier—Gomphogaster inion ieee (Illustrated. ) 
pp- 250-3. 

Warp, R. H.—Ona Microscopical Slide-Catalogue. pp. 233-41. 

Warp, R. H.—Note on Microscopical Exhibitions. pp. 311-314. 

Il.—IN PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MicROSCOPISTS, I888. 

Burritt, T. J.—The Ustilaginee, or Smuts; with a list of Illinois Species. 
PP: 45757- 

Dermers, H. J.—American and European Microscopes. pp. 149-154. 

Dernme_rs, H. J.—Photographing with High Power by Lamp-light. (1 figure ) 
pp- 143-8. 

GaGE, S. H.—The Form and Size of the Red Blood-Corpuscles of the Adult 
and Larval Lamprey Eels of Cayuga Lake (with bibliography and illustrations). 
pp. 77-83. 

on E. H.—A new Fine Adjustment. (Illustrated.) pp. 161-2. 

Henricl, J. F., and MeLtor, C. C.—An Old Microscope of the Culpeper 
Type. (Illustrated.) pp. 140-2. 

Jackson, C. Q.—The Bacillus of Leprosy. A Microscopical Study of its Mor- 
phological Characteristics. (4 figures.) pp. 119-127. 

KeLLicotr, D. S.—The Nature of Protozoa, and Lessons of these Simplest 
Animals. (Presidential address. See, also, this JouRNAL for September, 1888. ) 
PP. 5—32- 

KeLLicotT, D. S.—Partial List of Rotifera of Shiawassee River at Corunna, 
Michigan. (3 cuts.) pp. 84-96. 

Kexiicotr, D. S.—Observations on Fresh-Water Infusoria. (5 figures.) pp. 
97-106. 

McInrosu, L. D.—A Microscope Attachment, for use with Solar or Artificial 
Light for Projecting or Photographing Microscopie Objects with Oblique Illumi- 
nation or Projecting Opaque Objects. (Illustrated.) pp. 155-8. 

PEARSON, LEONARD.—The Muscular Coats of the CEsophagus of the Domestic 
Animals (with Bibliography). pp. 128-139. 

RoGers, W. A.—On the Radiation of Heat between Metals, with Numerical 
Results for Brass and for Steel. pp. 33-44. 

STEDMAN, JoHN M.—On the Development and a Supposed New Method of 
Reproduction in the Sun-Amimalcule - Acténospharium eichhornit. (1 plate.) 
pp. 107-118. 

SToweLL, T. B.—The Soft Palate in the Domestic Cat (with Bibliography). 
(Illustrated.) pp. 58-76. 

TayLor, THos..—A New Pocket Polariscope. (Oleomargariscope.) (lIllus- 
trated.) pp. 158-6. 


C. ZEISS) JENA. 


ZEISS MICROSCOPE STAND B, MEDIUM SIZE 


THE AMERICAN 
MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


icone Se "MARCH, 1889. No.3: 


All os Ve We aaa. whe ae Ale to Pee or to Se 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc. “should b be addressed to Amert- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent direc “ly to the above address acc ompanied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, ‘London, accompanie ad by the yea Y ee ice of ies shillings. 


The Making of Apochromaties. 
By ROMYN HITCHCOCK. 


Jena is situated about three hours by rail from Leipzig, but to get 
there one must change cars twice. We arrived there at 8 o’clock on 
the 13th of December, and were most cordially welcomed by Professor 
Dr. Abbe, whom we found awaiting us at the station. Ina few min- 
utes we were in very comfortable quarters at the Hotel zum schwartzen 
Baren, on Luther Place, where Luther was several times a guest We 
visited many places of interest in the old town with Dr. and Mrs. Abbe, 
among others the houses once occupied by Schiller and Géthe. In the 

garden of the Schiller house, until lately Dr. Abbe’s home, a stone slab 
Beagles the spot where stood a summer-house in which the poet wrote 
his Wallenstein, and near by a stone table over which he and Gothe en- 
joyed many a talk. The town has many old monuments of the past, 
but it has lost much of its former importance. It dates from the twelfth 
century. The University was founded in the time of the Reformation, 
and during the last century it had a large number of students. The 
average number now is about six hundred. 

Oat Monday morning I went to Mr. Zeiss’ establishment, and Dr. R. 
Zeiss, who succeeds his father in the business, conducted me through 
‘the works. Although some of the methods in use at this place differ 
from those employed elsewhere, and although the excellence and accu- 
racy of the work is rendered possible only by the application of such 
methods, nothing is concealed from the v isitor. As Dr. Zeiss si ays, they 
have no secrets. The brass work is done by machinery of the best kind, 
much of it specially made for the purpose, as, for instance, the ingenious 
device for cutting the diagonal rack-work for moving the body -tube. 
The rack is of brass, but the pinion wheel is steel. Brass polishing is 
done, as usual, with French emery, but I was much interested to learn 
that the dead black portions, such as the stages and other parts, are 
made black by grinding with emery powder. This may be the usual, 

or, at least, a very common method, but I have always been under the 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


50 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY - [March, 


impression that the brass was blackened by chemical methods. When 
the parts are put together they require to be adjusted by the most skil- 
ful workmen, and no stand is passed until it is as perfect as skill can 
make it. The machinery is run by two engines, of respectively 16 and 
S-horse power. 

By far the most interesting part of the work is the glass grinding. 
The glass is cut by means oft a disk of metal revolving like a circular 
saw, ie edge charged with diamond dust, and turning. in a well of pe- 
troleum. It is astonishing to see how quickly a thick block of glass 
can be cut in this way. Even rock crystal does not seem to be very 
hard when put against the wheel. The glass being cut into slices of 


— 
suitable bhicleneees the larger lenses are roughly rounded on a grind- 


stone, and the curvature of the surfaces made to correspond with metal 
patterns or matrixes. Then follows more careful grinding by boys. 
Each boy sits at a table and grinds with a lathe anda brass matrix 
with emery, testing the curves as he goes on. Five grades of emery are 
used in this work. The final polish is given with rouge, in a matrix of 
pitch and shellac mixed together.* Every lens is inspected by an ex- 
perienced foreman before it leaves the room. 

Such, in brief, is the method of grinding all lenses, but for achro- 
matics and for microscope objectives, more practiced workmen are em- 
ployed and more rigid tests applied. Frauenhofer. many years ago, 
proposed the use of quartz patterns to test the curvature of telescope 
lenses, but this method was independently invented by a workman in 
the employ of Mr. Zeiss about the year 1860, and by him first applied 
in the grinding of microscope lenses. It is now used throughout the 
establishment for all achromatic lenses. Each workman has his quartz 
pattern, which he keeps under a glass shade on his table. As the pol- 
ishing goes on he cleans off the rouge from time to time, and tries the 
lens in the pattern, being extremely careful lest the smallest particle of 
dust or grit should get between them. The lens must fit the pattern 
pertectly? 1 aibtait does not, the workman can detect the error at once by 
the feeling. or by the appearance of the colored rings, known as New- 
ton’s rings, where the contact is not perfect. These quartz test-patterns 
have enabled the workmen to do the most perfect work—f: 
fect than is possible by the old method of grinding—and it will be seen 
as we go on, that some such accurate method for testing is required in 
order to work strictly to the formule calculated by Dr. Abbe for each 
objective. 

There is another feature of the grinding that is also of great impor- 
tance, for, when the curves are right, it is also necessary that the lens 
should be of the exact thickness required. The workman has an in- 
strument for accurately measuring the thickness of the lenses as he 
grinds them. This is quickly done, for the device is very simple. 
Each lens is finally measured and examined by the foreman of the 
grinding-room, and when the lenses leave his hands they are ready to 
be cemented together and put into the brass mountings. 

In these operations we see the results of the perfect methods of grind- 
ing, for, although each single lens is ground by itself, when the different 
lenses of an objective are brought together, and once set in their mounting, 


* There i isa special polishing composition used for the finest glasses, which gives a more perfect 
polish than rouge. 


/ 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 51 


the objective is perfect. The mounter has on his table, for example, the 
lenses of anapochromatic. The lenses of several apochromatics may be 
indiscriminately mixed before him, but as they are all ground exactly to 
measure, it is of no consequence which ones he puts together. He 
picks up the separate lenses, which have never before been brought 
together, puts on a drop of balsam, examines it with a hand-lens to see 
that there is no dust, then presses on the other lens, and the work is 
sure to be right. The lenses are then accurately set in their brass 
mounting. The distances between their surfaces are measured with 


i 


Fic. 1.—Zeiss Achromatic Condenser. 


Fic. 2.—Zciss Heating Oven 


great care and made to conform exactly to the calculations. It is in- 
teresting to know that when the first apochromatic, a 3 mm., was put 
together it was perfect, proving that the calculations were right. The 
second was not perfect, but it was found that the workman had made 
a slight error in putting in the lenses. I believe he put one lens in 
wrong side up. When this error was corrected the objective was right. 
The instrument for measuring is graduated to o.or mm., but half of that 
can be estimated by the eye. 


t 
5 


52 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [March, 


When we consider that an apochromatic objective consists of ten 
separately ground lenses; that the first lens being more than a hemi- 
sphere in form is consequently very difficult to grind; that each lens 
has to be ground strictly to measure in curvature and thickness; and 
that these lenses have all to be put together in a brass mounting so ea 
their distances apart must be adjusted to within half a hundreth of < 
millimeter, and that when all this is done the objectives are as per fet 
as it is possible to make them, we may appreciate in some degree 
the value of mathematical formule coupled with the finest mathemat- 
ical skill in perfecting the microscope. 

There is another form of apochromatic objective w hich has only nine 
lenses and the front is not more than a hemisphere. This will be 
easier to make, but so far as I know it is not yet on the market. 


i N 
it ©) 


Fic. 3.—Zeiss Sliding Objective Changer. 


The perfection of these new lenses is largely due to the use of the new 
glass, but I cannot now enter into a description of what is to be seen at 
the glass-works, nor refer more particularly to the uses of the new glass. 

A few words concerning new apparatus may be of interest. The 
latest form of stand, which will be described in the new illustrated cata- 
logue soon to be issued, is shown in the frontispiece. It is a compact 
and convenient stand, well made, carrying an Abbe condenser of the 
latest construction with iris diaphr agm ; price 290 marks. 

An achromatic condenser which is especially recommended for photo- 
graphing is shown in fig. 1. This condenser is constructed to give 
a sharp image of the source of light in the plane of the object, for pro- 
jecting purposes. It has a numerical aperture of 1.0, iris diaphragm 
and centering adjustments. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 53 


Fig. 2 represents an arrangement for heating microscopic objects 
during observation, according to Pfeiffer’s design. It will be seen that 
the microscope stage is within the apparatus, the body-tube projecting 
from the top. By this construction the temperature of the object is 
known to a certainty, as the object, stand and surrounding air are all 
at the same temperature, and can be maintained so for any length o1 
time: <A temperature of 40° ee may be maintained without injury to 
the stand or objective. This apparatus is made of two sizes, costing, 
respectively, 60 and 70 marks. 

A new objective carrier and changing device is illustrated in fig. 3. 
Each objective can be accurately centered by means of an ordinary 
watch-key. As the objective slides in, on an inclined plane, the change 
can be made without danger of injuring the mounting of the specimen. 


5D 
The construction can readily be understood from es figures. 


American and European Microscopes. 
m By H. J. DETMERS, 


COLUMBUS, OHIO. 


[The following, extracted from the Proceedings of the American Society of Microscopists, 1888, 
represents che substance of Dr. Detmers’ remarks, and is republished here as a substitute for the report 
given on pages 187 and 188 of last year’s JOURNAL, Dr. Zeiss having stated that that report was quite 
untrue, and Dr, Detmers having confirmed that statement.—Eb11or.] 


At the meeting in Pittsburgh (1887) I had occasion to make some re- 
marks concerning an examination of a new Zeiss apochromatic ;5-inch 
homogeneous immersion objective, N. A. 1.40, and its workings with 
its compensating and projecting eye-pieces. [I compared its per formance 
by central and oblique light on test objects and on bacteria, etc., with 
that of some of our best Ameri ican objectives, but particularly with a ;5- 
inch homogeneous immersion objective of TRolless NwA-jn.305 147 Dhe 
conclusions arrived at I expressed in the following words: ‘*I am 
convinced that the apochromatic objective examined in no way sur- 
passes the best work (objectives) of our best American makers.” This 
sentence evoked considerable discussion. I therefore Gnered to back 
my statement with facts; to photograph Amphipleura pellucida with 
oblique, and bacteria with central light, with American objectives and 
American accessories, and challenged my opponents to produce as good 
or better work with European apochromatic objectives, if they Goulel 
I made this offer because photo-micrography, it must be admitted, con- 
stitutes the crucial test for perfect achromatism, and hence for the very 
quality in which the new apochromatic objectives are claimed to be 
superior to all others. I have done what I promised, have made the 
photo-micrographs of Amphipleura pellucida and of several bacteria 
—amplification 1120 and 692 diameters, respectively—and hand them to 
the members of the Society for inspection. 

Since the Pittsburgh meeting, I have made a trip to Germany, from 
whence I returned only last w eek. In Germany I visited three of the 
principal optical establishments of that country, namely, those of Ernst 
Leitz, in Wetzler, of Seibert & Seibert, in Wetzler, and of Dr. Carl 
Zeiss, in Jena. _ I stopped one day in Wetzler and one day in Jena. 
The proprietors of all three establishments received me with great kind- 


54 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ March, 


ness, and very courteously showed me their fine work. I had some 
test objects with me, some balsam-mounted Amphipleuras from Lake 
Nippersink and om Lake piste objects which my American homo- 
geneous immersion objectives, a ;!;-inch Spencer, N. ot te 38, and a 54,- 
inch (in reality a 74;) Tolles, N. A.t. 30, will resolve with and without 
sub-stage accessories with comparative ease by lamp-light. These test 
objects I showed to Mr. Ernst Leitz, to Mr. Seibert, and to Dr. Rod- 
erick Zeiss. I also showed bromide prints and Jantern slides (trans- 
parencies) of my photographs of Amphipleura pellucida i magnified 
1120 and 692 diameters) and of Baczllus anthracis, Bacillus tuber- 
culosts, Dr. Koch’s Comma bacillus, my Baczllus sauzds, and several 
others (taken from the same negatives as those now in your hands for 
inspection), and all three opticians admitted that they were good, and 
that my photographs of Amphipleura were the best they had ever seen. 
Dr. Roderick Zeiss was kind enough to exchange some of his photo- 
eraphs of Amphipleura for mine, Fie! as I have “them here with me, I 
lay them before you that you may judge for yourselves. For further 
comparison I will also show you some photographs of Amphipleura 
made in Dr. Koch’s laboratory, and one made by Dr. Neuhaus, an eX- - 
pert in photo-micrography. TI only have to remark that mine have been 
made by lamp-light, and the others by sunlight, and with the aid of a 
heliostat. Dr. Zeiss Ss photographs have been made with his apochro- 
matic 55-inch homogeneous immersion objectives, N. A. 1.30, his No. 2 
projection eye-piece, a very ingenious, complicated, and costly camera, 
and an illuminating apparatus ‘composed of an Abbe homogeneous im- 
mersion condenser, N. A. 1.40, and several condensing lenses. A light- 
filter was also used. In Dr. Koch’s laboratory the same appliances : are 
inuse. My photographs, on the other hand, have been made in a very 
simple way. ‘The appliances used by me consist of a Spencer. j,-inch 
homogeneous i immersion objective, N.A.1 35, a common Huyghenian 
eye-piece (a No. 2 for the higher, and a No. 1 for the lower amplifica- 
tion), a Bulloch ‘ Professional? microscope stand, a common Blair 
camera, a coal-oil lamp worth fifty cents, and a condensing apparatus 
composed of a medium-sized bull’s-eve condenser, made by Bausch & 
Lomb, and an Abbe condenser, made by Bulloch. The frustules pho- 
tographed by Dr. Zeiss, and in Dr. Koch’s laboratory, were mounted in 
a maecdinn of a refractive index of 2.40 (Stannic chloride), and those 
photographed by me in a medium of which I do not know the compo- 
sition and the refractive index, but which probably is not higher than 2 
or thereabout. 

In at least one respect our first-class American homogeneous immer- 
sion objectives are preferable. They have collar correction, which is 
not found in any of the apochromatic homogeneous i immersion objectives 
of German opticians. Our American chjectives, therefore, are adapted 
to a larger range of work, and can be used with any tube-length. while 
the German apochromatics can not. Still, the latter, it seems to me, 
are-not quite so sensitive to tube-length as is claimed. Further, the 
German apochromatic homogeneous immersion objectives are more ex- 
pensive than our American “objectiv es of corresponding quality. So, 
for instance, apochromatic homogeneous immersion objectives of Zeiss 
are offered in Jena—a 4-inch, N. Ne 1.30, for 450 marks, or about $110; 
a 4-inch, N. A. 1.40, for 550 marks, or about $135 ; a 14-inch, N. A. 


/ 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


wt 
Ss 


1.30, for 400 marks, or a little less than $100; and a ;',-inch, N. A. 
1.40, for 500 marks, or almost $125; while Bausch & Lomb Optical 
Co. and H. R. Spencer offer their homogeneous immersion objectives, 
N. A. 1.40 and 1.38, respectively, at from 40 to 80 per cent. less, as 
their catalogues will show. 

[Referring to the reports of his address which appeared last Sep- 
tember, Dr. Detmers says, in contradiction, that he did not take mi- 
croscopes, objectives, or accessories to Europe; that he did not make a 
test of skill with the Germans ; that he did not photograph objects in 
competition with them ; and, in short, that no such fighting of objec- 
tives as was described occurred. | 


Notes on the Substage Condenser, with Special Reference to that 
of Professor Abbe. 


By THE LOITERER IN A MICROSCOPIST’S LABORATORY. 


This piece of illuminating apparatus is one of the most important and 
valuable that the microscopist can possess. It may be used to increase 
the illumination until the eye refuses to endure it, or the light by its 
means may be reduced to the faintest glimmer. With it the whole 

aperture of the objective may be filled by a solid cone of light, and by 
the use of the proper diaphragms or by moving the entire condenser 
laterally, illumination of the greatest obliquity may be obtained for the 
resolution of tests, or for dae study of obscure structures of a certain 
character ; and with the best of the modern substage condensers, black- 
ground illumination of the most exquisite beauty may be accomplished. 
The defining and resolving power of the objective are improved by its 
use. Indeed, the best high power homogeneous immersions will not 
do themselves entire justice without the use of the wide angled con- 
densers now so common. 

In what is called black-ground illumination the abject appears to be 
self-luminous, gleaming ch the vivid radiance of molten silver, seem- 
ing to rest softly on a back ground of the blackest velvet. Living ani- 
mals appear like moving creatures fashioned from moonbeams ; minute 
particles shimmer and flash like silver stars; a little heap of colored 
sand grains seems a little heap of rubies and diamonds from Sinbad the 
Sailor’s Valley of Gems. And to obtain such exquisite pictures it is 
only necessary to obstruct the central beams of light by a circular 
opaque disk, allowing the object to be illuminated ‘by the light that 
comes to it from the periphery. No rays reach the objective directly. 
All must first enter the object and there be properly refracted or inflected. 
or after passing through the object, they must be thrown back on it by 
reflection trom the cover glass, so that under the beating of those waves 
of light it shall appear to glow with a soft intensity indescribable. This 
effect may be obtained, sometimes better and more easily, by substage 
apparatus especially intended for the purpose, rather than by any sub- 
stage condenser. 

The accessory just mentioned is a collection of two or three lenses 
forming an instrument somewhat similar to an objective. It is fitted to 


56 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY { March, 


the substage ring so that it may be accurately centred, which is essential 
to its best ‘performance, and so that it may be aieeea upward to bring 
the light from the mirror to a focus on the object, or removed from the 
latter toward the mirror to reduce the intensity of the illumination. 
Some method, therefore, for changing its postition vertically, either by 
rack and pinion or by direct finger movements, is absolutely essential. 

It is always accompanied by. diaphragms to reduce the size of the 
illuminating cone, to obtain light of great obliquity, or black-ground 
illumination. In the best condensers these are applied below the lenses, 
while in the cheaper and less desirable forms they are placed above the 
uppermost lens. 

Low power objectives, those, for instance, up to the one-four or 
one-fifth inch, and those of small angular aperture, do not call for 
the use of the condenser. ‘Sufficient illumination, generally more than 
is needed, may be had from the concave mirror alone. For small-angled 
lenses, if a condenser is desired, the one-inch objective, or an eye-piece 
of the proper construction, is useful. The objective, when used for 
this purpose, is screwed into an adapter fitting the substage ring with 
the front lens upward, the light being reflected from the plane mirror. 
If the Acme or other microscopical lamp be used, or if a bull’s-eye 
condensing lens be interposed between the light and the mirror, the 
objective is then to be raised or lowered until the proper illumination is 
obtained. With this, however, only central light may be used. 

Messrs. J. W. Queen and Co. make a simple and useful form, with 
an adapter for the substage ring, centring adjustments, and three dia- 
phragms, which are placed above the lenses. The diaphragm with the 
smallest opening is used here, as elsewhere, for centring the condenser 
to the objective, the former being moved from side to Side and forward 
or backward, while the eye is at the top of the body tube, the ocular 
having been removed. This small opening can be easily seen through 
the objective as a bright spot of light which must be brought accurately 
to the centre. For low powers w There a larger field is to be illuminated 
with less intensity than with high powers, the upper lens of this con- 
denser is removed, and the lower one focussed on the object in the usual 
way after the diaphragm with the largest opening has been applied. 
This is a commendable, inexpensive condenser for use with small an- 
gled, dry objectives, but for the best wide-angled objectives there are 
other forms better adapted to the purpose. 

Several English and American opticians have produced substage 
condensers which are praiseworthy in some respects, but it was for 
Prof. Abbe to devise the best ever offered by any optician. This is the 
popular Abbe condenser, as supplied by Zeiss, of Jena, and so fre- 
quently referred to in microscopical literature. 

The condenser as made by Zeiss for his own stands is very large and 
heavy, and is not intended to be used on those of any other maker. 
He says that since this is the case ‘‘ adaptation to stands of other make, 
therefore, is nearly always impracticable and will not be undertaken.” 
The contrivance is too useful, however, to be abandoned by English 
and American microscopists, so that the majority of our opticians ane 
modified forms, which preserve the essential features and are adapted 
to American Bad English stands. Mr. Zentmayer, Mr. Grunow, 
Messrs. J. W. Queen ‘& Co., and Messrs. Bausch & Lomb all offer 


; 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 57 


the device with minor points of difference from Prof. Abbe’s and from 
each other’s. 

The condenser, as made by Mr. Zentmayer, is in two forms, one for 
use with objectives having a numerical aperture of not more than 1.20, 
the other for the widest angled glasses, itself having a numerical aper- 
ture of 1.40. The purchaser should, before final selection, consider 
which form he needs, his objectives deciding the question. 

It is not achromatic. As to the desirability of seeking achromatism 
for it, microscopists differ. Mr. James Sw ift states that ‘* the superi- 
ority of light from an achromatic ‘condenser over that of any non-achro- 
matic arrangement is due to the fact that rays, in their passage through 
a simple lens or combination of simple lenses, are decomposed into 
their elementary colors, which seriously impair the beauty of uncolored 
objects, such as the Podura scale, etc., whereas, in the achromatic 
condenser this defect is obviated, and all objects are seen with natural 
colors ; moreover, confused pencils of light are produced by the spheri- 

cal aberration of the single lenses w hich fogs the image of fine struc- 
ture, whilst the achromatic condenser, being thoroughly corrected for 
spherical aberration, provides illumination of the greatest purity, and 
the most delicate objects are seen with a clearness and sharpness of de- 
tail quite unknown to those microscopists whose experience has been 
confined to the use of non-achromatic condensers.” | Prof. Abbe, how- 
ever, says, ‘* the condenser is not made achromatic for the reason that, 
for the effect contemplated, it would be altogether useless to seek to ob- 
tain a sharp 1 image of the cloud or other source of light, as it is in like 
manner quite immaterial whether the image is formed precisely on a 
level with the object, or somewhat above” or below it.” Mr. E. M. 
Nelson also takes issue with Prof. Abbe’s opinion. But no optician 
in America, so far as 1am aware, has offered microscopists an achro- 
matic wide-angled condenser. The only one made, I believe, is the 
oil-immersion of Messrs. Powell and Lealand, of London. 

The modification of the Abbe condenser with 1.20 N. A. has but 
two component lenses, a large bi-convex posterior one, with surfaces 
of unequal curvature, and an anterior which is more than a hemisphere 
in form. The other, with 1.40 numerical aperture, consists of three 
lenses, the posterior being similar to that of the smaller angled form, 
while the middle lens is concavo-convex, and the anterior a smaller 
hemisphere. 

When used with wide-angled objectives, to avoid loss of light and to 
obtain the best results, the space between the lower surface of the slide 
and the top of the condenser should be filled with water or homogene- 
ous immersion fluid. and in all cases, except when oblique illumina- 
tion is desired by a lateral movement of the condenser, it must be ac- 
curately centred. This is essential to its best performance. For ordi- 
nary purposes, however, with dry objectives it may be used dry. 

Its focus is only a short distance below the object, or the upper sur- 
face of the slide. This distance varies with the aperture of the special 
form used, and is to be ascertained by experiment, but I think the 
condenser can seldom be employed w hen accurately focused, except, 
perhaps, while studying the striz of diatoms with high power objectives 
and high power eye-pieces. With medium powers the exact focus of 
the condenser produces a little spot of light of terrible intensity. It is, 


5S THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ March, 


at least, my own custom with the form having 1.40 N. A., to use it out 
of focus, except on special occasions ; what others may do I have no means 
of knowing. The thickness of the slide is, however, to be considered, 
particularly when using it as an immersion with wide angled glasses. 

When employing Be powers with central light or black-ground il- 
lumination, the concave mirror may be needed Ww illuminate the entire 
field ; in other cases the plane mirror is always used, especially with the 
bull’s-eye lens. 

Several diaphragms, which are used below the posterior lens, for 
central, oblique and black-ground illumination, accompany both forms. 
Those for central light have a central opening, the size of the cone of 
light and the obliquity of its lateral rays varying with the size of the 
diaphragm opening employed. For oblique illumination usually two 
lune-shaped diaphragms are supplied. ‘These are placed in the carrier, 
one at a time, of course, in any position that may be needed to produce 
the effects desired. For black- ground illumination those with the cen- 
tral disk supported by radiating arms are used, but to obtain the effect 
with wide-angled glasses something more is needed than the use of 
these special disks. A circular diaphragm must also be placed at the 
back of the objective. 

The diaphragm carrier in the American forms of the condenser is 
usually a sliding plate into whose aperture the various diaphragms are 
placed, when it is pushed below the lenses until a spring catch indicates 
that it is properly centered to the condenser, but this has nothing to do 
with the centring of the condenser to the objective. The spring catch 
is usually a delicate one, and the microscopist is in danger of forcing 
the carrier beyond the centre. 

The light may be readily modified by the use of the circular diaphrgams, 
OF, sat the change i is inconvenient, by lowering or raising the condenser. 

For oblique illumination, the ners disks are used, the larger when 
the greater portion of the cone of light is to be intercepted, the smaller 
when more of the rays nearer the centre are desired. With either sized 
concavity the condenser will give light of greater obliquity than many 
objectives will receive. The. object, however, may be obliquely illu- 
minated with rays from any direction, either by withdrawing the car- 
rier and inserting the moon-shaped diaphragm in another position, or 
by rotating the nate condenser, so that the light shall sweep around 
a circular course. This requires delicate manipulation, an objective 
of the proper angular aperture to receive light of that obliquity, and 
very accurate centr ing of all the parts. It may be done, however, with 
fine effect in the resolution of lined objects, diatoms for instance, but if 
the microscopist owns the condenser of 1.40 numerical aperture, and 
this form of oblique light is to be employed, the front hemispherical lens 
of the condenser should be removed and the remainder of the combina- 
tion focused on the object without any diaphragm. Then insert the lu- 
nate disk, and, if all is well, a glance down the body tube, without the 
ocular, will show a small donnie: -convex spot of light near one border 
of the back lens of the objective, with the diffraction spectra also, if 
they are specially looked for, particularly if Plewrostgma angulatum 
be the object on the stage. With the condenser of 1.40 N. A., the : 
front lens being remov ed, and the lunate diaphragm in the carrier, Mr. 
Gundlach’s dry one-fifth inch objective, 135°, resolves balsam mounted 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 59 


Pleurostgma into beads, bearing the half-inch solid eye-piece to per- 
fection, and with this objective, “under these conditions, the bright spot 
may be seen, when the eye-piece is removed, to sweep around the edge 
of the back lens like a drop of fire. To accomplish this with the 
condenser of 1.40. N. A., it and the objective must be in immersion 
contact with the slide, while the objective itself should be a wide- 
angled homogeneous immersion. 

If the substage has lateral movements, as it has on some first-class 
stands, oblique illumination with the circular diaphragm openings may 
be obtained, but somewhat less effectually. by moving the entire con- 
denser from side to side. 

For black-ground illumination, the central disk diaphragm must be 
used, and iit the one-inch objective brilliant effects may be produced, 
under this illumination, with the proper objects. -To do this with the 
one-inch of 33° and the condenser of 1.40 N. A., it is necessary to re- 
move the front lens of the condenser, when the: effect will be exceed- 
ingly fine. Here again if the bull’s-eye lens is placed between the 
mirror and the source of light, the plane mirror is to be used; if the 
light is taken directly from Mh lamp flame, the concave mirror is the 
proper one to be employed. Black-ground illumination may be ob- 
tained with powers of from five nemdeed to six hundred diameters, but 
according to my experience it is not praiseworthy. The field is not 
brilliant, the object does not glow with that peculiar and attractive 
silvery fire that seems to come eam an internal source, but the picture 
is foggy with a bluish mist, and the silvery gleams are dull and lifeless. 

With his form of the condenser, Dr. Weigs supplies diaphragms to be 
applied to the back lens of the wide-angled objectives when black-ground 
illumination is desired with them. The proper disk-bearing pl: ite is 
placed in the diaphragm carrier, and immersion contact is meade with 
the lower surface of the slide. The difficulty with any but Zeiss’s 
objectives is to prepare the diaphragms for the back lens. With his 
they may be made of metal, to properly fit when dropped into the 
mounting, and the opening will then be central. But if the micros- 
copist must cut them from paper, he need not expect to obtain the best 
results. The directions are to drop diaphragms into the back of the 
wide-angled objectives, and then the microscopist is left, by all except 
Zeiss, to take care of himself. Yet it is, of course, impossible for any 
one optician to supply these little parts, since no two objectives of even 
the same magnifying power have the same sized mounting. ‘he micros- 
copist mst depend upon himself, and he will speedily observe that 
when the aperture is reduced by a diaphragm at the back lens, the de- 
fining aud resolving powers of the objective suffer an injurious diminu- 
tion. The experiment is worth making though no other result than 
this be obtained. 

While black-ground illumination is beautiful, it has little scientific 
value." I do a3 know that any discovery, or even any observation of 
importance, has ever been made by its use. It will at times exhibit 
certain structural features in a conspicuous way, but only, I think, after 
they have been previously observed, for in most cases this peculiar 
lighting appears to make the structure obscure. It may render the 
contour lines more distinct, and env elop the whole object in a glamour 
of brilliant beauty, but the microscopist, while he never ticdanne beauty, 
never makes it the object of his pursuit. 


60 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ March, 


That the black-ground illumination obtainable by means of the Abbe 
condenser is not entirely satisfactory 
with high power, or wide-angled ob- 
jectives, need give the prospective 
purchaser no uneasiness. The con- 
denser is the best in existence, ex- 
cept perhaps the oil-immersion of 
Messrs. Powell and Lealand, of Lon- 
don. And all of the special adap- 
tations made in this country are equally 
good. Theydo not differ in their opti- 
cal portions, except so far as the aper- 
ture is concerned, but in the manner 
of introducing the diaphragms, which 
affects only ‘lie price of the appliance, 
and that in all the forms, seems unnec- 
essarily high. 
Mr. Zentmay er’s modification of 
the Abbe condenser is shown in the accompanying figure. 


SLUTTTTAETTTTT HT TTT 


eee 


Zentmayer’s Abbe Condenser. 


A Land Title Settled by The Microscope. 
By W. D. BIDWELL, M. D., 


LEAVENWORTH, KANSAS. 


Yesterday a microscope decided the title to So acres of land. There 
was verbal testimony on both sides of the case, but one party intro- 
duced in evidence some lead pencil memoranda alleged to be of different 
dates, but which his opponent claimed might have been prepared at 
the same time. The microscope showed that there was a decided dif- 
ference in the marks on each paper,—the one being made on a soft or 
yielding surface, the other upon a hard and smooth Senne ; one mark 
was clear and square cut, the other irregular and uneven. An experi- 
ment made yesterday Shoped that aati made with the same pencil 
under similar circumstances to those existing when the memoranda 
were made produced results opposite to those present in the papers, 
thus making it extremely probable that the two were written with dif- 
ferent pencils as well as at different dates. Then again, on one mem- 
orandum a figure 2 was made overa figure 0, and the close resemblance 
of the two marks in point of evenness and shading made it very prob- 
able that the ‘+ 2” was made on the same day as the *‘ o” as an after- 
thought. and was not a correction made some months later as suggested 
by opponent’s counsel. Upon these appearances alone, confirming 
each other as thev did, rested the decision in this case. Personally, I 
should not like to rest my title to property on so slight a basis ; ‘but 
other testimony being equally balanced, and these two appearances 
being confirmatory of och other and of the testimony of the witness of- 
fering tnem, the judge decided in his favor, and, as I think, rightly. 

This case would probably not have come to me for an opinion but 


for a very interesting murder case a year ago in which I testified as to 


the character of certain stains on clothing. 
FEBRUARY 14, 1889. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 61 


The Philosophy of Mounting Objects.* 
By FRANK L. JAMES, M. D. 


In order that the student may understand the ra¢zonzale of the pro- 
cesses through which an object smust be carried in its transition from 
crude material to the finished slide, we will briefly describe the making 
of asupposititious mount. Suppose the object to bea pathological speci- 
men, a tumor for instance, recently removed. It is plain that the direct 
examination of such an object can ‘only be made with very low magni- 
fying powers, such, for instance, as may be obtained by the use GE a 
pocket magnifier or Coddington lens. In order to reach the histolog- 
ical elements we must use high powers, and these can only be used by 
transmitted light—that is, light sent through the object to be examined. 
We must therefore contrive a method by which the object, or a repre- 

sentative portion of it, may be made tr ‘anslucent. This may be done 
by taking a small portion of the material and mashing it out very thin 
between two pieces of glass. In former times this method was fre- 
quently resorted to, but as it could manifestly yield but very distorted 
results it has long since been abandoned by those who use the micro- 
scope as an instrument of precision. The other alternative at our dis- 
posal is the cutting of a section from the object with a very keen knife ; 
and here we meet with another difficulty, viz., the object is (usually) 
too soft to offer such resistance to the passage OE the blade as will en- 
able us to cut a section of sufficient and uniform thinness. Itis true 
that formerly such sections were cut with a Valentine’s knife and which 
were supposed to be thin enough to yield practical results, but the de- 
vice is now very rarely resorted to. The object must therefore be sub- 
mitted to a process which will harden it and at the same time preserve 
it. If we are in a great hurry to arrive at results we may attain the de- 
sired end by freezing our object, but we will suppose that in the pres- 
ent instance resort is “had to one of the hardening and presery ing fluids. 
Having hardened the material our next step is “to cut it into thin sec- 
tions. Formerly this was accomplished by holding the hardened ob- 
ject in the hand and slicing off a section with a razor. This process is 
no longer used in exact and scientific work. Free-hand cutting has 
given place to the microtome or section cutter—just as in exact work free- 
hand drawing has yielded to photography. The object is therefore 
transferred to a section cutter to be sliced into sections, and as these 
sections must be made extremely thin and uniform, it must be securely 
held in the microtome. It must be arranged so that it can be fed to 
the knife and at the same time have no lost lateral motion. This ne- 
cessitates embedding it in some liquid material that will harden around 
it and hold it firmly in place. This done, the section-knife is brought 
into play and the object is sliced to the requisite degree of thinness. 
Here we must digress a little in order to explain subsequent operations. 

If we take any very thin substance—say a piece of paper—and place 
it under the microscope in a dry state, we will find on examination that 
we get a very insufficient idea of its intimate structure If we moisten 
the object with water we find that m: ny details of ‘the structure are 
brought out and shown us which were invisible under the former ex- 
amination. If, instead of water, we use glycerine or Canada balsam, 


* From Elementary Microscopical T echnology 


v 


62 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY { March, 


the structure is rendered still more distinct, and if the specimen be only 
thin enough the minutest detail is thus finally brought into view. + 

Let us suppose, further, that this bit of paper consists of two or 
three, or more kinds of fibres—say silk, cotton, and linen—all of the 
same color and so interwoven with each other that it is impossible for the 
eye to follow the ramifications of either material. It is plain that if we 
can find a dye or stain which will attack the cotton and not the silk or 
linen, or vzce versa, or that stains cotton one shade or hue, silk an- 
other, and linen another, the problem of diflerentiating the elements 
which enter into the structure is a very simple one. 

With these two hints as to the reason why the sections are put 
through the next two processes, and leaving the philosophy of the same, 
we will resume the progress of our slide toward completion. 

The sections as they fall from the knife are received in a vessel filled 
with fluid—water, glycerine, or alcohol, according to circumstances, 
and when a sufficient number has been cut we pick out one of the © 
thinnest and best and place it in the staining fluid, where we will leave 
it while we prepare the glass slip upon Ww niet it is to be mounted. 

We take for this purpose a piece of clear glass 3 inches long and 1 
inch wide, the edges of which have been ground and polished, and 
placing it on an instrument called a turn-table with a pencil dipped in 
cement (the nature of which depends upon the fluid which we shall use 
as a mounting medium), we spin a ring in the centre of it. This ring 
is large enough and deep enough to receive the object to be mounted, 
and Senta be allowed to get quite dry before the slip is used. The 
object, in the meantime Bee been removed from the staining fluid and 
put through a number oF little details to fix the stain, clear aw ay the 
embedding material, etc., and is now soaking in the fluid which is to 
serve as a mounting medium, the functions of which are to render the 
object transparent and preserve it against decay. In this instance we 
will suppose that glycerine has been ‘Chosen as a medium. The ringed 
slip, thoroughly Lie: ined, is now placed on the mounting box (a frame 
with a class top and provided with a mirror so arranged as to throw 
light upwards through the top and object laid on it) and a drop of pure 
ely cerine is allowed to fall in the centre of the ring; the object is quickly 
transferred from the glycerine bath in which it has been laying, placed 
on the drop of elycerine already on the slip, and arranged in ‘the posi- 
tion it is hencerorth to occupy. Air bubbles are gotten are of, the cover 
glass is applied and clamped in position ; surplus glycerine is washed 
away and the slip and cover glass carefully and thoroughly dried with 
prepared blotting-paper. The clamp holding the cover glass in place 
is now removed and the slip transferred back to the turn-table, where a 
ring of cement is spun around the edges of the cover glass. This ring 
is pillars ed to dry, and the slip is again washed and carefully dried bee 
fore a second lay er of cement is applied. The final touches. which 
vary according to the taste, skill. etc., of operator, are then given to the 
slide; it is labelled, and, if the job is properly done, is good for an in- 
definite number of years. 

Such, in brief. is the ordinary routine of processes usually employ ed 
in making a mount of a_ pz athologic: il or histological specimen of the 
soft tissues. “There are many minor operations. matters of detail. en- 
tirely omitted or barelv alluded to in the foregoing sketch, while many 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 63 


of the manipulations there described are varied according to the nature 
of the mounting medium finally chosen ; but an analysis of the processes 
enables us to divide them into three principal groups as follows, viz: 
1. Those pertaining to the preparation of the material. 
2. The preparation. of the slide to receive the object. 


3. The mounting of the object on the slide, including finishing. 


Report upon the Postal Club Boxes—IV. 
By QUEEN MAB. 


Box V*.—The itinerancy of the Postal Club slides tells sever ely upon 
their durability, as this box illustrates. It would be interesting to have 
with each box the date when placed in circulation, thus affording, to 
some extent, a test of the comparative durability of the various modes 
of preparation. It would seem that a far more desirable method of 
forming the reference collection of slides to be kept at headquarters, 
which the Club Managers have for some time contemplated, than by 
the accumulation of Sach slides as have survived the vicissitudes of mail 
transportation to be retired from the circuits, would be to procure from 
experienced preparers their perfect work. Such, in their respective 
specialties, they would no doubt willingly contribute for this purpose. 
Box V2, is contributed from Jamestow n, NY... and represents *six 
contributors and three preparers. 

Slide No. 1. prepared by Dr. A. Waterman, shows transverse section 
of leaves of four species of Pine,—bleached, stained with aniline green, 
and mounted in glycerine jelly. These sections ** show (1) fibro- -vas- 
cular patch of matter in centre, (2) Mesophyll surrounding this tissue, 
with a number of openings (resin ducts) in it, (3) Narrow cortical 
area,” and the accompanying note-book contains photo-micrographs ot 
the slides,—an excellent idea, and one worthy of more frequent imita- 
tion. Slides 2, 3, 5, and 6 are prepared by S. Winsor Baker, and are, 
respectively, Stained Pinnule of Fern, Diatoms from Mobile Bay. 
Transverse Section of Skin of Banana, Striated Muscle from Leg of 
Dytiscus. This last is stained with carmine and mounted in glycerine 
jelly,—a very interesting object to those not familiar with it. A critic 
suggests in the note-book that these are all common objects. The rapid 
improvement in microscopical methods should certainly spur members 
to do their best work and to offer only a choice selection. 

Ohe of the slides of this box is contributed by a lady who is not the 
preparer. Comparatively few preparations by ladies find their way 
into the Club boxes. We cannot too warmly urge upon the attention 
of ladies the fascination and instruction to be found in the use of the 
microscope, a branch of science for which nature has especially 
adapted them both mentally and manually. If, as some would have 
us believe, the limit of perfection in the construction of the microscope 
has been reached, the field for its use is absolutely illimitable, and though 
but few will make brilliant, or even im yortant, discoveries in micro- 
scopical science. a general advance all eee the line will result from 
the multitude of workers. That more ladies dev ote their surplus 
leisure and brain power to the faithful, persistent usé of the microscope 
is our earnest wish. 


64 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [March, 


Box F comes from New Britain, Conn., and vicinity, is,evidently not 
yet a veteran in the Club service, and represents the work of five pre- 
parers. 

Slide No. 1 is a remarkably clean specimen of head of Wasp, by Dr. 
I. F. Stidham. Nos. 2 and 6 are the work of Mr. M. S. Wiard, and 
bear testimony alike to the skill of the preparer and the excellence of 
the cement used. The slides are: five species of pollen, unstained, 
mounted in castor oil on one slide, and Young of Horse-shoe Crab, 
Limulus polyphemus, stained with carmine and mounted in balsam. 
The cements used are those so well known of Rev. J. D. King. No. 
3, by Chas. N. Burgess, picrotoxin crystals, a bitter intoxicating poison 
sometimes used as a narcotic in medicine, from the seeds of fe climb- 
ing plant Cocculus Indicus. No.4, Skin of Sole, opaque, by J. R. 
Stoddacde No. 5, by H. C. Deane, Section of Human Bronchial Tube. 
stained with hematoxylin, and mounted in balsam. 

Box 45. This extra box of diatom slides was prepared and contrib- 
uted by M. A. Booth, of Longmeadow, Mass. The diatoms are from 
the following Teealitiec: Anjino, Russia, newly discovered and differ- 
ing somew hat from the famous Simbirsk deposit ; Brunn, Bohemia; 
Necoue Spain; Szent Peters, Hungary; Pudasjocai, eS Sel and 
Bay of Bengal. The special point of interest for which these slides are 
contributed is their rarity. All, save that from Bay of Bengal, are 
fossil. These forms from Bay Si Bengal are so peculiar that it would 
be hard to convince the novice, Seen ee to the regular outline of 
diatoms, that these are really members of the diatom family, but the 
fact that besides the usual treatment they have been exposed to a glow- 
ing heat until all the organic matter has been burned out indisputably 
proves their silicious SARE! They consist largely of species of Cheto- 
cerous and Bacteriastrum (figured on Nos. 50 and 51 of the Greville 
Plates). Carpenter on page 353 says, of Bacteriastrum, ‘‘ there are 
sometimes as many as 12 of these awns radiating from each frustule like 
the spokes of a wheel, in some instances regularly bifurcating.” 

A caution is uttered in the note-book which accompanies this box 
as to the too common careless handling of slides by piling them upon 
each other, a usage which no slide capable of injury can bear unharmed. 
An expression of the experience of the members of the Club with regard 
to dry mounts is sought (the Bay of Bengal slide being a dry mount), 
and the opinion of Mr. A. C. Cole, as set forth in his ‘+ Studies in Mi- 
croscopical Science,” vol. ii, is quoted: ‘* All dry mounts of diatoms, 
whether strewed or selected, are liable to destruction or deterioration 
from an accumulation of moisture upon the under side of the cover, 
which moisture, sooner or later, and in defiance of all precautions, 
pee makes its appearance. Dry mounts are therefore always more 

less unsatisfactory and unreliable and to be avoided as much as 
eeehie The best method of mounting diatoms dry, whether for test 
or as arranged slides, is to make a cell of the dest asphalt.” 

It is possible that climate may exert an important influence on the 
reliability of a cement. Obviously i in this country our climate or our 
asphalt is at fault. 


W. C. Walker, F. R. M.S., of Utica, N. Y., gave an illustrated lec- 
ture on the microscope in that city January 16th, under the auspices of 
St. Andrew’s Brotherhood. 


/ 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 65 


Microscopical Laboratory Notes. 
By Pror. H. M. WHELPLEY, 


ST, LOUIS, MO. 
Read before the St. Louis Club of Microscopists at the January meeting. 


Cold Weather.—Do not permit the mounts to be reduced to the 
freezing temperature. Even those preparations in liquids that do not 
congeal at 32° F. will be injured by sudden or great changes in temper- 
ature. 

Benzol is not Benzin, and microscopists should remember it, even 
if some wholesale druggists do endeavor to sell benzin for benzol. I 
have seen work spoiled and time and patience lost by those who tried 
to use benzin for benzol. 

Handling Thin Animal Sections.—Those who are accustomed 
to handling vegetable sections must remember when they come to work 
with animal specimens that the latter are much more liable to break 
or tear than vegetable sections. If this is not borne in mind valuable 
specimens will be ruined while handling them. 

Another Wse for Benzol.—This liquid is a great solvent of oils 
and grease. It will clean off the old grease that has been used to lubri- 

cate a joint, and leave the surface bright and clean fora fresh applica- 
tion of the lubricant. Benzol is very convenient for cleaning the spindle 
to a turn-table when the table does not run smoothly. 

Spoiled Mounts are of no value, but the slides and cover glasses 
are. Whena mount spoils beyond repair place it in a wide- mouthed 
bottle containing equal parts of alcohol, oil of turpentine, coal oil and 
benzol. After a few days’ maceration in this liquid, the slides and 
cover glasses may be w iped clean, and are then just as good as new. 

Cover Glasses, as sold now a days, are quite clean. I wash them in 
distilled water and keep them in a wide-mouthed bottle filled with al- 
cohol acidulated with hydrochloric acid. They are readily cleaned with 
tissue or Japanese napkin paper between the thumb and fore efinger. 
The patent devices for cleaning cover glasses are only serv iceable to 
make a show of those who use them. 

Hair-pin Clips.—Those who make many balsam mounts at a time 
soon find that a number of clips are required to hold the cover glasses 
in position until the balsam hardens. ‘The clips in the market cost from 
seventy-five cents per dozen upwards. I find it much cheaper and 
just as convenient to make my ownclips from ordinary hair-pins, as 
proposed by Professor Wall. Such clips will cost about five cents per 
dozen. 7 

To Handle Small Thin Sections.—A very convenient trowel for 
this purpose is made by inserting the head of a large needle in a pen- 
holder or other suitable handle; then filing the needle flat on two op- 
posite sides and breaking off the point. Such an instrument does not 
take up as much fluid with a small specimen as the ordinary trowel 
does. It also has other advantages over the customary methods of hand- 
ling small thin sections of either animal or vegetable tissue. 

Glycerin Mounts that will Keep. Gly cerin is a very desirable 
mounting medium for many purposes, and has but one drawback, and 
that is its tendency to creep out of the cell. When mounting such sub- 
stances as will admit of such a procedure, I overcome this difficulty by 
using less glycerin than is required to fill the cell. This should be placed 


66 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [March, 


in the centreof thecell, so that a circle of air will surround it in the 
finished mount. A coating of cement can be run on the cover glass 
over the circle of air, so that it does not show, but gives the mount the 
appearance of one with the cell full of glycerin. 


Notices of New Methods — VIII. 
By GEORGE C. FREEBORN, M.D. 


INSTRUCTORIN NORMAL HISTOLOGY, COLLEGE OF PHYSCIANS AND SURGEONS, NEW YORK. 


Carmine Stains for Nerve Tissue.—Upson, H. S.—Neurol. Cen- 
tralb., vii, 1SS8, p. 391. 

I. One gramme of carmine is boiled for 20 minutes with too c.c. of 
a5%S eolution of alum; this solution is allowed to cool and is then fil- 
tered. To 5 c.c. of this solution add 10 to 20.drops of hydric acetate, 1 
to 2 drops of phosphomolybdic acid and filter. Stain sections in this 
fluid for 2 to 10 minutes, then wash well in water, dehydrate, clear and 
mount in balsam. Axis cylinders, ganglionic cells and connective tis- 
sue stain deeply ; nuclei stain faintly. 

Il. To: 5¢.c: of Grenachers alum carmine add zinc sulphate to sat- 
uration and then filter. Stain sections in this fluid for one-half to twelve 
hours ; then wash well in water, dehydrate, clear and mount in balsam. 
Axis cylinders, the medullary sheath and Schwan’s sheath are sharply 
differentiated. 

III. To amixture of 4.c.c. of water andi c.c. of alcohol add 0.06 gm. 
of carminic acid. Stain sections in this fluid for 3 to 10 minutes, then 
wash in water and place in one of the decolorizing fluids given below. 
The sections are to remain in the decolorizing fluid for I fame they are 
then removed, washed well in water and maoumtedii in the usual manner 
in balsam. The tint of the section depends upon the decolorizing fluid 
used. Dilute hydric acetate gives a yellowish-red tint; saturated solu- 
tion of lead acetate, blue; ferrous sulphate, black ; manganese sulphate, 
red: nickel sulphate or barium chloride, violet. ane cylinders, gan- 
glionic cells and connective tissue are stained. Nuclei do not stain 

sharply. 

Nucina, a New Stain for Histological Work.—Leon, Zool. 
ANZ 5, X15 1888, p- 624. 

The author employs a coloring matter extracted from the green wal- 
nut. It stains nuclei black; also bacteria. He prepares the stain in 
one of the following ways: 

a. Aqueous Extract.—The green walnuts are placed in a vessel and 
covered with alcohol; when the alcohol has become green, from the 
dissolving out of the chlorophyl, they are removed and washed well in 
water. Tw enty-five walnuts are then placed in a porcelain dish with 
500 c.c of water and boiled until the amount of water is reduced to one 
half. This extract is then filtered several times through paper and the 
filtrate boiled with 10° of alum. This fluid is used for staining. Its 
action is less active than the alcoholic but the staining is more ‘sharp. 
_ 6. Alcoholic Extract.—After the green walnuts have been boiled for 
a long time in water, the fluid is allowed to stand, when the Nucina 
will be deposited. The water is poured off and 100 c.c of So% alcohol 
for each 3 gms. of nuclei are added. The color of this solution is black 
and is to be used for staining after adding a few drops of hydric chloride. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 67 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


Is Hydrophobia a Disease ?—!In a paper recently read before the 
Medical Society of the State of Pennsylvania, Dr. Charles W. Dulles 
presents what he considers abundant procf that hydrophobia is not a 
specific disease that can be communicated by the bite of an animal, but 

rather a physical condition, and that the word should be used to de- 
scribe this physical conditionin thesame way thatthe word convulsions 
is used. In substantiation of this he maintains that hy drophobia is 
practically unknown except where a superstitious fear of it is common ; 
that in most cases there is no evidence that the animal which did the 
biting was rabid, and that the tests for hydrophobia, which have not 
generally been sufficiently accurate to be of any scientific value, have 
in many cases been so applied as to aid in producing the symptoms 
usually expected to make their appearance. He maintains that Pas- 
teur’s methods of treatment have had no effect in reducing the mortality 
from so-called hy drophobia i in Paris, but that the rani ber of deaths in 
1887 was greater than in 18So, 1883, 1884, or 1886. He claims also 
that the interest in Pasteur’s methods of treatment has greatly decreased, 
and urges that the banishment of the superstitious feay of hydrophobia 
will render it a thing unknown. On the other hand, the report of the 
Pasteur Institute held in Paris Nov. 14th, as given by the New York 
Medical Record, shows that the rate of mortality for the year 1886 was 
1.24 per cent. of those treated ; for 1887, 1.12 per cent. ; .and for 1888, 
0.77 per cent., while the estimated mortality previous to the introduc- 
tion of inoculation for rabies in 1885 was 15.90 per cent. This would 
go to show that much has been accomplished toward decreasing the 
number of deaths from hydrophobia, whether we are to consider it as 
a specific disease or not. 

Respiration of a Fish by the Caudal Fin.—Mr. Alfred e& 
Haddon in a letter to Wature (vol. xxxix, p. 285) reports that he cov- 
ered the caudal fin of a species of Berio pirtelantte with’ gold size and 
the fish lived on an average only twelve to eighteen hours, although 
the gills were in a normal “condition. If the fish were placed in sea 

water so that the tail was completely covered but the gills left exposed, 
it lived a day and a half. The microscopic examination of the caudal 
fin showed that the circulation of the blood was very vigorous in it. 
The fish is ina habit of resting with its tail immersed in water when the 
rest of the body is out of the water. 

Consumption.—It is now not quite seven years since Dr. Koch an- 
nounced to the Physiological Society of Berlin the result of his inves- 
tigations upon the causes of consumption and his discovery of the uni- 
versal presence of a particular microbe, which he named Bacillus tuber- 
culosis, in the diseased organs of both men and lower animals who 
were suffering from the disease called tuberculosis or tuberculous con- 
sumption, ane yet the acceptance of the theory that this organism is 
the cause of the disease has become so general that it must soon be 
practically universal. With this acceptance of the conclusions of Dr. 
Koch has gone a rapid progress in our knowledge of the circumstances 
that tend to propagate it, and the extent to which the most important 
domestic animals are ae to the disease, and may therefore be 


* This Been none: is conducted by Prof. J. H. Pillsbury. 


68 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ March, 


the means of spreading it. That the disease is contagious there can be 
little doubt, and that certain conditions of the general health and he- 
reditary physical weakness are likely to render the introduction of the 
germs of the disease more probable is equally well established. Prof. 
C. H. Fernald has recently published. in Bulletin No. 3 of the Hatch 
Experiment Station of Massachusetts Agricultural College, an inter- 
esting account of the growth of our know ledge of the ieee and many 
important points bearing upon its prevalence among domestic animals. 
Dr. C. V. Chapin, of Providence, R. I., has published an essay upon 
the relation of the germ theory to the prevention and treatment of con- 
sumption. Dr. Chapin admits that little advantage has yet been taken 
of the rapid progress that has been made in our knowledge of the cause 
of the disease, but hopes for better results and urges physicians to edu- 
cate the public to a higher appreciation of the Tar ge extent to which 
the disease may be controlled by proper care Considering the still too 
large class of practitioners who do not yet heartily accept “the idea that 
consumption is a contagious germ disease the hope of this being accom- 
plished at an early day i is very small. It is certainly high Pate that 
this discovery of biology should be made familiar to the intelligent cit- 
izen in order that such measures as may be available may be tater to 
lessen the enormous number of victims which annually fall beneath the 
stroke of this grim destroyer. A few of the well- established facts re- 
lating to the subject can be easily promulgated, and thereby thousands 
sav ie from untimely death. These are among the most important : 

. Tuberculosis in man and domestic Tale is caused by a minute 
organi called Baczllus tuberculosis. 

. The bacillus may be transmitted from animal to animal by many 
means, so that whole ‘herds are liable to become infected when once it 
enters. Cattle, swine, hens, rabbits, and. gujnea-pigs are very sus- 
ceptible to the disease. Prof. Fernald reports.a diseased chicken sent 
to him for examination as completely infected with tuberculosis. 

3. The bacillus may be transmitted to man through the flesh of in- 
fected animals used as food, the milk of diseased cows, and probably 
through the eggs of diseased fowls. Hence, public safety demands 
that more stringent measures be adopted for the suppression of every 
manifestation of the disease by the destruction of all infected animals, 
even if it be at a considerable pecuniary loss. Long continued heating 
to the boiling point probably destroys the vitality of the bacillus, but 
it is not certain that the spores are thus destroyed. 

4. The bacillus may be transmitted from persons suffering with the 
disease by the air of the sick room, by handkerchiefs used by them, or 
by exposed sputum which is usually laden with germs. All sputum 
should be treated with a solution of bichloride OF mercury, the most 
powerful germicide known, and cloths used in place of handkerchiefs 
should be burned; or if handkerchiefs are used they should be soaked 
in the bichloride solution. 

5. The-bacillus seems not able to establish itself in persons who are 
in vigorous health. Hence the need of great care of the general health, 
especially when there is any danger ‘from exposure to the disease. 
Plenty of exercise, abundant and w tholesome food, and pure air taken 
by deep and full respiration are doubtless the best safeguards against 
contracting the disease. 


HS89]-. . MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 69 
MEDICAL MICROSCOPY.* 


The Menstrual Organ.—A most interesting paper with this title 
and by Dr. A. W. Johnstone i is published in the Annals of Gynecol- 
ogy, October, 1888. It gives some results of microscopic study of the 
endometrium, tending to the following conclusions: That the endome- 
trium is a cytogenic organ analogous in function to the spleen, thymus 
gland, etc.; that the product of its cytogenesis is the placenta; that 
Fosters ied is the washing away of corpuscles too old to make a pla- 
centa, and that the reason why lower animals do not menstruate is be- 
cause in them the uterine lymphatic net-work is much more abundant, 
and through these lymph canals the ripe but unused _ placental material 
is gies away into the general circulation. 


oO 


Influence of Microbes.—Ina paper read before the Virginia Med- 
ical Society Dr. W. E. McGuire enumerates ways in\which the baneful 
influence of microbes upon living organisms may be explained: (1) 
As cell-food destroyers; (2) As obstructionists interfering with the 
action of excreting organs; (3) By leaving poisonous excretions; (4) 
By tissue-deoxygenization wherefrom ptomaines result. 


O 


Trachoma.—Dr Kiikarsky, of Tiflis, has been studying the bacteri- 
ology of trachoma. He formulates the differential, morphological, 
and biological characteristics of the microbes which he invariably found 
in trachomatous follicles; but the results of inoculative experiments 
upon rabbits, cats, dogs, pigeons, and men, either with pure cultures 
or with the fluids from diseased eyes, were inconclusive.—Ph7/. Jed. 


Times, Dec. 15, ’88. 


?—— 


Dying of Trichinosis.—It w as discovered December 28, 1888, by 
examination with the mzcroscofe, that the mysterious disease with which 
Mr. Crumbaugh, of Leroy, has ae a year been a sufferer, is trichinosis. 
He has suffered indescribable tortures since he was first attacked with the 
mysterious malady. He had no recollection of eating raw or imper- 
fectly cooked pork. He died in January, 1889. 


—_O —— 


News.—*: Pork affected with trichina when used for food produces 
the Zenza solium, or common tape-worm.”—Bulletin Tenn. State 


Board of Health. 


geet 


A case of alcoholic multiple neuritis occurring at the Philadelphia 
Hospital was reported to the Philadelphia Neurological Society by Dr. 
J. H. Lloyd. The microscopical specimens from this case ‘* became 
decomposed in some unaccountable way. and were unfit for microscopic 
study.” This may be worth noting by competitors for Dr. Mason’s 


prize. 


* This department is conducted by F. Blanchard, M. D. 


70 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (March, 


. 


The Influence of Bacteria upon the Digestion of Children.* 


Baginsky, in a paper before the Berlin Medical Society, states that 
the bacteri ium of the lactic fermentation causes the production of acetic 
acid and acetone, as well as lactic acid. This formation goes on with- 
out oxygen, and is not hindered by the bile. 

The neutral lactates are changed. to butyric acid; starch is not changed 
to sugar, nor is casein or albumin decomposed. The gases formed 
when acetic acid is produced are carbonic acid, hydrogen, and methane. 

He proposes to name this bacterium the ‘acetic bacterium.” He 
further found that this bacterium is destroyed by acetic acid. 

In examining the stools of children suffering from cholera infantum, 
he isolated a bacterium which produced green stools (the germ of 
Hayem and Lesage), and also a bacterium growing in white colonies. 
Both of these liquefy gelatine, and both are inhibited in their develop- 
ment by the acetic hacen ; this germ has the property of prevent- 
ing the growth of pathogenic germs in the intestine. 

Baginsky considers that only the primary manifestations of cholera 
infantum are caused by bacteria, and that the secondary, severer phases 
result from the extensive anatomical lesions which have occurred in 
the intestine. It is evident that the treatment of a given case will de- 
pend upon the stage of the disease. He found that calomel, boric acid, 
and resorcin prev vent the growth of the acetic bacteria; naphthaline 
and iodoform are inert. If the case is seen early, when acetic fermen- 
tation is excessive, these remedies and the withdrawal of milk are indi- 
cated. If pathogenic bacteria have accumulated in the stomach or 
intestines, irrigation with anti-septic fluids is advised. Each case 
must be studied separately, and interference with the conservative pro- 
cess, as shown in the inhibitory action of certain bacteria, should only 
be undertaken intelligently. 


EDITORIAL. 


International Competition in Microscopy.—This term does not 
well express what we wish to say, but will perhaps do for lack of a bet- 
ter. In the present number Prof. Hitchcock gives us an interesting 
account of work abroad upon microscopical apparatus, and Dr. Det- 
mers tells of his excellent success with home-made apparatus. The 
former is perhaps one of the most appreciative writers upon German 
goods and the latter upon American. What we particularly want to 
say is that itis the business of this periodical to give all sides a hearing. 
But in so doing there is sometimes danger of writers getting antago- 
nistic to each other and of their wishing to say sharp things. Before 
the occasion arises, therefore, we announce that while giving the utmost 
liberty to each to praise his favorite apparatus, no matter where made, 
we shall draw a firm line at the point where personalities might occur ; 
and, if we know it, we shall not admit untrue or questionable state- 
ments even when authors do assume the responsibility. If such creep 
in, the gravity of the case will determine whether to correct the same. 
W hae er is said or not said must be with due regard to the rights and 


Rmertin: Risnisch,. Woe ene. No. a5 1888 ; ae Jour. Med Sciences, Oct. 1888 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 71 


feelings of all our friends and correspondents at home and abroad. We 
want to do all we can to advance this science, but especially to promote 
friendship among the workers—to destroy rather than to awaken an- 
tagonisms. 

‘Some of our German friends have felt annoyed by a brief quotation 
which occurred in this periodical last year and which was rather de- 
rogatory to their goods. We assure them that no injustice was intended, 
and if any occurred we are very sorry. Circumstances have been such, 
however, that we could not uytil now allude to it, and it is not wise to 
recall and to discuss it in detail. Let it pass, and the Germans or the 
friends of their goods shall have all the space they require in which to 
describe and praise their apparatus. Cnly let it be fraternal and for 
the promotion of the cause in general. Error easily dies a natural 
death. It is not necessary that we all stop in the y ursuit of truth to 
take cudgels and pursue every little error that is born of inadvertence, 
of ignorance, or even of malice. Criticism 1s good and necessary, but 
in this critical age it often goes so far as to wound feelings unneces- 
sarily. Why should not the critic temper his words with kindness and 
reserve them for great occasions? The microscopist should magnify 
the good but not the bad in life. 


MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES 


Tue Iron City MicroscopicaL SOCIETY. 


: Tuesday, January &, 788g.—There was a full attendance and an in- 
teresting meeting. The most important exhibits were: Specimens of 
zoophytes from deep- sea soundings in the southern Pacific, rare diatoms, 
and many pathological exhibits. 

The paper of the evening, on Demodex follicorum, or the flesh-worm 
parasite in the human face, was by Dr. Chevalier Q. Jackson, and was 
illustrated by several photographs taken by Mr. W. 5S. Bell; also bv 
‘ several well prepared slides. Discussion followed. 

Preparations are being made for the annual soiree. 


San Francisco, CAL. 

Wednesday, January 9, 7889.—President Ferrer made his annual 
report, as he is about to leave for Europe. He said that the Society 
now counts thirty-three regular, eight honorary, and eight life mem- 
bers. Dr. F. Riehl read a paper on ** Bacterialogical ean of 
Water.” He exhibited specimens of surface water taken from a well 
situated near sewers, Spring Valley water, and Alameda well water. 
He found these so very full of bacteria that he concluded all were unfit 
to drink. Artesian water had proved to be the purest. 


MANCHESTER MIcROSCOPICAL SociETY, ENGLAND. 
Thursday, January 10, 7889.—At this meeting Mr. Thomas E. 
Hoyle presented a paper on the construction and use of the micro- 
spectroscope. 
January 17, 1389.—In the mounting section there were demonstra- 
tions: Mounting in glycerine by Mr. James Fleming, reflection and 
refraction by Mr. T. E. Hoyle, also a practical demonstration course 


72 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [March. 


upon organs of digestion (tongue, teeth, salivary glands, cesophagus). 
For this each member attending brings microscope, $” or 4” objectives. 
and a few slips and cover-glasses. (Fee for the session ending June. 
188g, 2s. 6d.) 

January 26, 1889.—Annual soiree and lecture. Subject: Electrical 
phenomena in animals. By Prof. W. Stirling, M. D., of Owens Col- 
lege. (Admission, Is.) 

January 31, 1889.—Annual election of officers. President, Prof. A. 
Milnes Marshall, M. D.; Vice-Presidents, Alex. Hay, E. W. Napper, 
and Thos. E. Hoyle; ice Treasurer, James Fleming ; Hon. Secre- 
tary, Geo. W ilks; Hon. abranian, JEG: Stump: a standing com- 
mittee of ten members. 

Thursday, February 7, 1589.—Program: Devitrification, by Percy 
F. Kendall, with lantern illuminations and polarized light, under direc- 
tion of Wm. Leach. Distribution of specimens of dog-fish skin from 
Robert Thornton Brain, of Great Yarmouth. Conversazione. 

Thursday, February 21, 1889.—Mounting section. This section 
has its own Chairman, “Vice-Chairman, Hon. “Secretary and Treasurer, 
and committee of seven members. Demonstrations : Dry mounting by 
Mr. A. Flatters; properties and arrangement of lenses" by Mr..7- E. 
Hoyle. Practical demonstration course: Organs of digestion, con- 
tinued (stomach, small intestines, large intestines). 


Exchanges. 


[Exchanges are inserted in this column without charge. They will be strictly limited to mounted 
objects, and material for mounting. ] 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous earth from Thibet, various localities (12,000 feet); also, material and 
slides of diatoms from Scottish Highlands, and continental foraminifere. WANTED.—Slides of 


American diatoms, insects, or botany. 
W. D. STEWART, 2 Gilmore Terrace, Edinburgh, Scotland. 


OFFERED.—Sections of vegetable ivory and slides of crystalized maple sugar. Good mounts 
paken in exchange. WM. LIGHTON, 106 Fitth Avenue, Leavenworth, Kansas. 
WANTED.—Parasites and books on Parasites and other micro. subjects. Will give Anatomical, 


Pathologicai, Botanical, Micro-fungi, Zoophytes, Polycistinz, Foraminifera, Parasites, and other slides 
in return. FRED. LEE CARTER, Gosforth, near Newcastle-on- Tyne, England. 


Wanted, Diatomaceous earth from Mégillanes, Bolivia, South America. Can give in exchange 
either Diatomaceous earth from New Zealand or cash. 
E. MICHALEK, I. Fleischemarkt, No. 1, Vienna, Austria. 


Mounted sections of Foetal Lung (5 months), sections across entire lobe, s¢4, in. thick, beautifully 


stained, in exchange for first-class pathological slides: 
W. C. BORDEN, M. D., U.S. A., Fort Douglas, Utah. 


Wanted, earths, recent diatoms, and miscellaneous objegts for mounting. Only first-class material 
offered or desired. MARY A. BOOTH, Longmeadow, Mass. 


Fossil Diatomaceous deposits (marine) wanted from Bermuda, Virginia, Maryland, California, etc. 
I. ELLIOTT, Ardwyn Villa, Aberystwith, Wales, England. 


Labels for slides. EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, Ill. 


Correspondence relative to exchange in microscopical material or prepared mounts. 
HENRY L. OSBORN, Hamline, Minn. 


First-class Histological Slides for other good mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 
shares. . G. SHANKS, M. D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N. Y. 


FOR EXCHANGE.—Strichnia ee (Strichnia 3}, gr.) and Strichnia Ferri-Cyanide (Strichnia 
gr.) Will exchange for other slides, Botanical preferred. Only first-class slides offered or desired. 
. A. HARDING, Fergus Falls, Minn. 


FOR EXCHANGE.—Mounted slides of Gold Sand, Gold Washings, Wire Silver, Pyrites of Iron, 
Petrified Wood, etc., for Pathological slides and cut material or other desirable mounted specimens. 
W.N. SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Ariz. 

FOR EXCHANGE.—Diatomaceous earth from Richmond, Va., Nottingham, & Calvert Co., Md., 

Los Angeles and Santa Monica, Cal., for other diatomaceous material, crude or cleaned, recent or fossil 


(marine forms preferred), or for diatom or miscellaneous slides (only good mounts wanted). 
F. W. DUNNING, 37 Garrison Ave., Battle Creek, Mich. 


WANTED.—A set of Proceedings of the American Society of Microscopists. State price of set or 
of single volumes, kind of binding, etc. Also, any other microscopical periodicals. 


P. O. BOX 630, Washington, D. C. 


1 
100 


DESMIDS. 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL 


Vou. X. APRIL, 1889. No. 4. 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc. , should be addressed to Amert- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, W ‘ashin pion, D.C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address act companied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Fill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Coltins, 157 Great 
Portland street, ile accompanied by the yearly price of five shillings. 


Desmids: Their Life History and Their Classification.—L1. 
By Rev. FRED’K B. CARTER, 


MONTCLAIR, N. J. 
(Continued from page 38.) 

For a long time the desmids were held to be animals: Ehrenberg so 
considered them, and it is only within the last thirty years that the ques- 
tion has been definitely settled in regard to their vegetable nature. We 
separate, then, first the mineral andi animal kingdoms and confine our- 
selves to that which lies between. Now this vegetable kingdom has 
two grand divisions, the Phanerogamia and the Cryptogamia, “the flow- 
ering and the non-flowering plants ; ; or more correctly, according to the 
latest definition, the plants “which reproduce by seeds and those which 
are propagated by spores. The Cryptogamia again comprise two dis- 
tinct sub-divisions, plants with woody matter and those without. The 
Horse-tails, Ferns, and Club-mosses belong to the first : the other mosses, 
Sea- “ase es eens: and Fungi belong to the second; and this is the 
section which concerns us. Mosses, Sea- weeds, Lichens, and Fungi, 
then, the four lowest classes of the lowest grand division of the vegeta- 
ble kinedom—among these our favorites find their true place. ‘Sea- 
weeds or alge, that is the name of the class or group, and they are at 
the very bottom of the list, the lowest of all green things upon the 


List oF FIGURES IN THE FRONTISPIECE. 


Fic. 1. Gonatozygon asperum. Filaments and | Fic. 10. Docidium baculum. 
zygospore. 11. Calucylindrus pseudoconnatus. 
2. Hyalotheca dissiliens. 12. Cosmarium margaritiferum. 
3. Bambusina brebissonii. 13. Tetmemoris brebissonit. Longer form. 
4. Desmidium swartzti. Yilaments in vege- 14. Xanthidium fasciculatum. 
tative condition. 15. Arthrodesmus fragile. ®ront view. 
5. Mesotenium endlicherianum. A group 16. Euastrum didelta. 
of four cells. 17. Micrasterias denticulata. Semi cell ot 
6. Spirotenia condensata. a smaller form. 
7. Spherozosma filiforme. 18. Staurastrum arctiscon. 
8. Penium navicula. A larger sized cell. 19. Phymatodocis nordstedtianum. 
9. Clostertum striolatum. 


Ali of these figures are copied from Wolle’s Desmids of the United States. 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


74 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ April, 


earth, remember, nothing ranking below them but the Lichens and 
Fungi. 

But the sea-weeds bear an unfortunate name, for many of them are 
fresh-water plants. Let us say a/g@ therefore, which, though meaning 
the same, does not strike the English ear so unpleasantly ; and then we 
have salt-water alge and fresh-water alge, and among the latter we 
come upon the desmids. Remembering then that no desmids are ever 
found in salt-water, we can ignore that whole division and confine our- 
selves to the fresh-water plants. 

The fresh-water alge include some twenty families, viz: 1, Leman- 
eacee ; 2, Porphyracee; 3, Batrachospermacee ; 4, Hildibrandtia- 
cee; 5, Coleochetacee ; 6, Gidogoniacee ; 7, Spheropleacee ; 8, 
Confervacee ; 9, Pithophoracee ; to, Vaucheriace@ ; 11, Botrydia- 
cee; 12, Volvocacee ; 13, Protococcacee ; 14, Palmellacee ; 15, Chy- 
tridice ; 16, Conjugate; 17, Desmidiee ; 18, Diatomacee ; 19, Nos- 
tochacee ; 20, Chroococcacee. That is to say, the desmids and the 
diatoms are in the same general group with all the rest of these families. 
These fall again into two divisions; the filamentous and the cella form 
alge, and bos happen to be the same characteristics in the family of 
desmids. This may cause the student some trouble. He may mistake 
some other filamentous or cell-shaped species of alge for a desmid. 
What is the distinction? This: that the filamentous desmuds are zotched 
zx the middle of each cell, giving a wavy or toothed appearance to the 
outline; the other lament ons Gmronched algz never so. There is but 
one exception. Gonatozygon might be taken for one of the brown Os- 
cillarzee, of the family Wostochacee. But the cells in Osc¢llar¢a and 
allies are never much longer than wide, while in Goxatozygon they are 
10-20 times longer than wide. Of the cell-shaped forms, again, two 
other families will bother him, the Pal/mellacew and the Diatomacee, 
which are also free one-celled alge. But the symmetry or bilaterality 


oO 
of the cell will distinguish the desmids from the former, and their mo- 


fos) 
tion and color in addition from the latter. The desmids are remarka- 
ble for their symmetry. The human form is symmetrical, but the desmid 
still more so. Given the outline of half the man, on a line drawn from 
head to foot, and one can draw the man entire; but we need only to 
see a guarter of the desmid to complete the figure in almost every case, 
Clostertum being the single exception. The quarter reversed gives the 
half, and the half reversed gives the whole figure. As illustrations take 
Micrastertas, Cosmartum, Doctdtum, Xanthidium, Staurastrum. 
The only exceptions are Clostertwm (whose shape makes it known at 
once), and some others 7z the early stages of multiplication, as, for 
example, Micrastertias. Now it is true that in the Palmellacee each 
quarter is like every other quarter, but there is no bilaterality, no fissure 
which divides the cell into two halves, each the exact counterpart of 
the other. And this distinction will separate the diatoms also, for though 
there is here symmetry—bilaterality—it is differently produced. In the 
diatoms it is effected by a band or hoop which runs across the long di- 
ameter; in the desmids by a division across the short diameter. "The 
bilaterality of the diatom may be represented by a pill-box standing on 
edge with a narrow strip pasted on the middle of the circumference ; 
that of the desmid by a tube with a groove running round the middle 


between the two ends. But we celacea eet this view of the diatom any 
> P, 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 75 


way. It is the side view of the diatom that is almost always uppermost, 
but the front view of the desmid. It is true the side view of the diatom 
also often exhibits symmetry, owing to the midrib, but this is on account 
of an internal, not external, fissure, and it also runs /engthwrse, and not 
across the shorter erictcr. In the discoidal forms even this median 
line is wanting. The fissure in the diatoms, I repeat, is zz¢terma/, not 
external. This is a better distinction than the color it seems to me, for 
the diatoms in the young state are also green. Finally, the diatoms 
move quickly, the desmids slowly, the former reminding one of little 
tug-boats by their rapid, jerky motions. Let me add right here that in 
studying the filamentous desmids one should remember that the real 
desmid is not the filament but the szzg7Ze ce//, by repetition of which 
the filament is produced, and confine his attention entirely to that, en- 
larging it if possible until it fills the whole field. If he will do this with 
two or three species he will be rewarded by a far clearer idea of those 
forms. Zhe filaments are not real filaments ; the connection of the 
cells is only by chance as it were. Zhe desmid in each case ts the sin- 
gle cell, not the chain of cells, as in many other alge. Furthermore it 
should be noted that the two original semi-cells are at the ezds of the 
filament, the growth taking place in the middle and not at the apex of 
the filament, as is the case in other families of alge. 

Assuming now that we can tell the desmids at sight, and confining 
ourselves to them, we take up their special classification. The micro- 
graphic makes five large groups, namely: 1, Closterz@é ; 2, Cosmarie ; 
3, Desmidice ; 4, Ankistrodesmia; 5, Pediastree. But the two lat- 
ter are now referred by the latest authority (Wolle) to other families of 
alge and may be struck out of the list. We have then nineteen genera 
arranged in three divisions, wen for convenience, let us place thus: 
1, Desmidia; 2, Closierte@; 3, Cosmarte. Now there is a striking 
difference EE the first of oe groups and the others. Intle » first 
the cells are zz filaments. In the second and third the cells are xo¢ zx 
filaments. Six genera then may be recognized at once and they are: 1, 
Desmidium ; 2, Bambusina ; 3, Spher ozosma; 4, Phymatodocts ; 5, 
Hyalotheca ; 6, "Gonatozygon. In all these the cells are united end to 
end, and the following points will serve to distinguish them: if the cells 
are toothed and angular it is Desmidium ; if barrel-shaped, Bam- 

‘bdusina; if deeply notched it is either SpAherozosma or Phymatodocis, 
and the square shape will make it the latter, while the scalloped edge 
will assign it to the former. If there is hardly any notch it is A7y alo- 
theca; if none at all, and the cells are much longer than wide, it is 
Gonatozygon. 

And so the labor narrows down to only thirteen genera, to wit: 7, 
Closterium ; 8, Pentium; 9, Mesotenium ; 10, Spirotenta; 11, Doct- 
dium; 12, Tetmemorus ; 13, Micrastertas; 14, Huastrum; 15, Calo-— 
cylindrus ; 16,Cosmartum ; 17, Arthrodesmus ; 18, Nanthidium ; 19, 
Stanrastrum. 

But here another marked feature comes to our aid. for we can divide 
these again by the relative length and breadth of the cell. In the 
Closterie the length is much greater than the ér eadth. Inthe Cos- 
marie the length i is zot is greater than the dreadth. The Clos- 
terz@ are all long forms, resembling in this respect the type from which 

_ they are named. 


76 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ April, 


Note now the shape and ends. If the cell is curved it is Clostertum ; 
if the ends are round and notched it is Tetmemorus ; if the semi-cells 
are swollen at the dase it is Doctdium. If there is zo xotch in end or 
side it is Mesotentum, Pentium, or Spirotenta. The spiral bands 
will make it the last. the regular arrangement of the chlorophyll will 
point to Pexzum rather than Wace The first three and the last 
genera are easily recognized. Pentum and Mesotentum alone will oc- 
casion any difficulty. Pentum is the more regular, however, in form 
and arrangement of chlorophyll, and is generally much the larger. 

So far then the road is still comparatively easy, and we have only 
seven genera left to bother us. In these Cosmarie the cell is xot much 
longer than broad, they are short in comparison with most of the 
former group, and as a rule highly ornamental. Of these seven again 
three can be separated on account of their spines, of which Aes 
desmus has four, two on each end, Xaxthidium many, while Stauras- 
trum has veritable horns, the end view is always very angular, and the 
shape is exceedingly irregular, the most so of all the ‘desmids; the wid- 
est diversity existing peoween the different species. 

Thus we have only four left, all of which have zo spzves or horns. 
And of these, W/crasterzas can be told by its flat and slztted surface 
(as if it had been snipped all round by the scissors) ; Awastrum by its 
wavy outline and inflated surface ; Cosmartum by its beaded or warty 
markings. Calocylindrus resembles some of the plain species of 
Cosmartum, but is less deeply notched on the sides ; in fact the depres- 
sion is so rounded as hardly to amount to a notch at all. Besides, the 
number of species of Ca/ocyléndrus is small, only 12 being figured by 
Wolle as against 127 Cosmarte#—that is to say it will riot te seen so 
frequently. : 

And this leads me to say that there is a great difference, between the 
various genera, in the number of species, which makes some much 
harder to study than others in the last analysis (excluding varieties). 
Here is the list, approximately, according to the number of species : 
Staurastrum, 130; Cosmarium, 125; Clostertum, 50; Micrasterias 
and Euastrum, each, 40; Docidium, 25; Pentum, 18; Arthrodes- 
mus, 13; Calocylindrus, 12; Xanthidium, 10; Spherozosma, See 
Desmidium, 7; Tetmemorus, 5; Flyalotheca and Mesotenium, each, 
4; Spzrotenia, Gonatozygon, and Bambusina, each, 3; Phymato- 
docts, 1. It will be observed that the genus which is most noted for 
the diversity of its forms has also the gr reatest number of species. 

But when the student gets thus far he needs Wolle’s help, and with 
his splendid volume he can go bravely on. Stokes’ Key to the Species 
will also prove exceedingly valuable. However, it is not easy work, 
this distinguishing of species ; no easier than any other botanical analy- 
sis. It is true the signs are all before you without any need of dissec- 
tion, but the most careful discrimination is required, ‘all the more be- 
cause of the close similarity of many of the forms in the same genus. 

And here let me advise you to make constant use of the binocular ; 
which will often prove of great assistance in identifying specimens, 
bringing to view elevations and contours of which the monocular would 
give ‘slight, if any, impression. In many cases the difference is striking, 
the apparently flat surface rising right up before you as the little prism 
is interposed and both eyes take a peep. You must use considerable. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. (ae 


power, however, for the desmids are mostly small objects, ranging in 
diameter from ,/;th inch in the larger forms of M/¢crasterzas to z5\yth 
inch in the smaller species of Closterzum. The length varies between 
ggth inch (Docédium) and 731th inch (Staurastrum). The average 
diameter is not more than 31,th inch, probably less. A 4th, 4th, or 
even dth objective will be needed at times. And to use these with the 
binocular you must have fairly wide-angled objectives, and the Abbe 
condenser, the binocular diaphragm, and the flat-wick lamp turned 
broadside to the condenser wethout the mtrror. It is well to use the 
Hopkins’ light modifier also—the pale blue tint. By these means I 
get both fields perfectly lighted with the 4th of 85° Crouch, and the 
4th of 125° Bausch & Lomb, and well enough lighted with evex the 
ith homogeneous immersion of same make to view any object in the 
centre. The dark bands appear on the sides of the field, but occasion 
no real difficulty. 

To those who have never used the binocular with such powers on the 
desmids, the very first trial will be a revelation, and I am confident they 
will employ it ever after in their examination of these forms. Ata meet- 
ing of the Roy. Mic. Soc. of London some years ago, Mr. Beck said 
he *‘ remembered that when his brother Richard showed Awlacodzscus 
to Mr. Tuffen West for the first time under the binocular, that distin- 
guished draughtsman looked at it for some time in silence and then 
jumping up exclaimed: ‘all the drawings of Déatomacee which I have 
done will have to be done over again!’”* And that is the feeling one 
will have after applying the double tube to Euwastrum or Staurastrum, 
for example,—all his slides of desmids will have to be examined over 
again. 

COLLECTING. 


But here I am reminded of the old recipe for rabbit stew, ‘* First catch 
your hare.” Before one can examine the desmids he must first gather 
and mount them. A few words, therefore, about their collection and 
preservation are necessary in such a paperas this. The best places for 
desmids, from my experience, are small, shallow pools and ditches, 
and the best outfit is the simplest possible, —a wide-necked bottle anda 
coffee strainer some 3 inches in diameter, with a fine mesh, ;/;th inch or 
less. These, with a cane or a jointed rod (a Japanese fishing pole cost- 
ing a trifle will do), are positively all you need. For the small pools 
the strainer alone is sufficient; for the larger it can be fastened by its 
handle and two pieces of string or tape to the cane or rod. ‘The advan- 
tage of this simple outfit is that you will often take it when tomato cans, 
etc., which are recommended, wowld be left behind. The desmids 
are said to be free floating, but I have had far better success with the 
superficial ooze on the bottom than with the water at the surface. Skim 
the ooze gently with the coffee strainer and pour into the bottle, repeat- 
ing till it is full. After the stuff has settled pour off most of the water 
and refill. If there are any desmids in the pool, pond, or ditch, you 
will be sure to have a good gathering by this means. Don’t slight any 
pool or ditch because it is small or shallow. The best gathering of 
Euastrum 1 ever made was from a pool not more than four feet in di- 
ameter and six inches deep, while one about twelve feet across and a 


* Amer, Mon, Mic. Jour., June, 1883. 


78 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ April, 


foot deep has yielded a large variety of forms, and the ditch which was 
next richest was about two feet wide and had barely three inches of 
water in it, almost nothing but ooze. Each of these spots was by the 
side of and quite close to a small creek, formed by springs a mile or so 
further inland, which runs toward the sea-coast at Westhampton, Long 
Island, and they were all within the radius of a mile. A fourth spot 
was the outlet of a mill-pond, to the side of the wheel where the water 
backed up and was quite still, and was not more than a foot or two 
deep. The light brown ooze is almost sure to contain desmids. From 
those four spots alone I have taken species of all the genera except Phy- 
matodocts, Gonatozygon, Mesotentum, and Calocylindrus ; in other 
words, of 15 out of the 19 genera given by Wolle. This may serve to 
show how little trouble is ‘often required to secure a large variety for 
study. Sphagnum has also furnished a number of specimens, but it is 
rather an uncertain habitat, some sphagnum yielding few or none; at 
least that has been my experience. The rain-pools alongside the rail- 
road tracks are also good collecting grounds. A fine gathering was 
made by one of our Society from such a spot at Montclair Heights. 


PRESERVING AND MOUNTING. 


After gathering, if you want to keep the desmids alive, the material 
should be put in wide beakers or flat-bottomed glass dishes about three 
inches high filled with fresh water, and the amount of ooze in each dish 
ought not to be more than a quarter of an inch in depth. If given suf- 
ficient light without being exposed to the direct rays of the sun they will 
thrive for some time. And here let me give you a hint about getting 
clean specimens for mounting. Wolle says, ‘‘ it is so difficult to separate 
specimens from their accompanying foreign matter that it is seldom 
amateurs can mount them satisfactorily on tides! and, therefore, this 
method is not open to recommendation.” I cannot agree with him in 
the latter statement and am sorry he made it, for it has probably deterred 
some from trying to preserve their gatherings. I should feel much 
poorer if I had follow ed his advice myself, for | have a number of slides 
and prize them highly in spite of the foreign matter mixed with them, 
which really iutenienes very little with the view of most of them. But, 
besides, it is possible at times Zo get them quite clean. The desmids 
make their way to the light and form films or tufts on the surface of the 
ooze in the glass after it thee stood a day or two, and by careful manip- 
ulation of Ae pipette they can often ‘be drawn out with hardly any 
foreign material at all. I remember I made a gathering from a little 
pool at Westhampton a few summers since, and after it had stood ina 
glass jar a day or two I was plese to find regular little green tufts 
scattered over the ooze at the bottom, and on using the pipette was re- 
warded by an almost perfectly clean gathering of ae strum, a score or 
more ata dip. Let the student then “allow his gathering to settle for a 
day or two before he transfers his desmids to the smaller bottle with 

carbolic acid or to Stokes’ fluid. Ifthe beaker is of good size, as the 
desmids will gather mostly at the side nearest the light, he will be able 
to exclude a great deal of the ooze or light brown ara It is true you 
can t separate them from it; but ¢ey can and will separate themselves 
if you will only give them the chance. But in any case the student 
need not be deterred from mounting because of the extraneous matter. 


If he puts only a small amount of material i in his little phial, and shakes 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 79 


it up well before applying the pipette, the stuff in mounting will be so 
separated on the slide that he will be sure to have a number of desmids 
freely exposed to view. For the purposes of study it doesn’t matter how 
much dirt there is on the slide so long as the desmids are free from it. 

Either carbolic acid or Stokes’ fluid preserves them well. The lat- 
ter comes already prepared, or it may be made up by the druggist ac- 
cording to the formula, and the desmids are to be transferred to it, or 
the small phial containing them is to have almost all the water poured 
off and then to be refilled with the fluid. But if the carbolic acid is 
used two or three drops of the strongest solution is enough for a four or 
six ounce bottle, which ought to be well shaken after it is added, and 
the material ought not to be more than half an inch deep, otherwise 
it may not keep. I do not find much difference between the two pre- 
servative media. Stokes’ fluid gives a brighter field and keeps the. 
chlorophyll perhaps a trifle greener, but it causes it to shrink rather 
more. However, both are excellent, and the student may consider him- 
self fortunate in having two such good fluids to choose between. For 
years it was a serious question to get anything that would do at all. 

As to the mounting a shallow ring is necessary, and shellac answers 
admirably. Brown’s cement may also be used for this purpose, but it 
takes longer to make the cell. When the ring is thoroughly dry, brush 
- it over lightly on the turn-table with the rubber cement. Wait a sec- 
ond till it has partially set. Then with the pipette take up a few drops 
of the material from the carbolized water or Stokes’ fluid and fill the 
cell, tilting the slide so that the fludd touches the shellac ring all 
round and rises above tt in the centre. Now apply the cover, in- 
clining it a little to one side and letting it fall gradually so as not to en- 
close any air-bubbles. Take up the superfluous fluid, which will be 
forced out, with a bit of blotting paper, press down the cover evenly all 
round by the needle or end of the holder, and apply a thin coat of the 
cement right at the junction of cell and cover. After a minute or so 
another coat, this time wider, taking in more of the cell ring and a little 
of the cover. When this has had time to stiffen give it a third and 
thicker coat. And the next day go over it as much as you like and 
finish off smoothly, without any fear that the cement will run in, and 
you have a mount which will last and be well adapted for study. 


By GEORGE C. FREEBORN, M.D. 


INSTRUCTORIN NORMAL HISTOLOGY, COLLEGE OF PHYSCIANS AND SURGEONS, NEW YORK. 


Some New Dyes for Histological Work. Zachokke. Zeitschr. 
f. Wiss. Mikros, v., 1888, p. 446. 

Benzopurpurin B.—This dye comes in the form of an amorphous 
brownish powder, freely soluble in water. The solution is a cinnabar- 
red color and gives a corresponding colored stain. The solution stains 
in a few moments, giving a diffuse stain, like acid fuchsin. The cel- 
loidin stains first, then the connective tissue, and finally the nuclei. 
The color is not changed by water, glycerine, acidulated alcohol, dilute 
solutions of hydric acetate or potassa solutions ; acids darken the color. 
Alcohol extracts the color from the celloidin, also slightly from the 
protoplasm and nuclei, while the connective tissue remains intensely 


80 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ April, 


stained. The color is entirely and quickly removed by alkaline alcohol. 
The author uses this dye in combination with hematoxylin in the place 
of eosin. It has the advantage over the latter that it is not withdrawn 
from the sections by alcohol or any of the clearing media, while it is 
withdrawn from the celloidin. He uses it in dilute aqueous solutions 
and does not stain the sections too deeply, and then withdraws the color 
from the celloidin with alcohol. 

Benzopurpurin 4b.—An orange red dye, freely soluble in alcohol. 
It stains diffusely. Sections are placed in the staining solution from 
alcohol and stain for a few moments only. Connective tissue stains 
orange, the nuclei of a slightly darker shade; the celloidin stains lilac. 
The stain is altered slightly by acids and alkalies. Alcohol extracts a 
part of the color, especially from the celloidin. This dye is best used 
in combination with hematoxylin, but the sections must be washed in 
water before placing in the hematoxylin because of the acidity of the 
benzopurpurin. 

Deltapurpurin.—A brownish-red powder, freely soluble in water. 
The aqueous solution stains sections, in two minutes, a diffuse purple- 
red color. The color is not withdrawn from the tissues by alcohol, 
acids, or potassa. Alcohol withdraws the color from the celloidin after 
an half hour. Acids change the color in the celloidin to a bluish tint. 
This dye is to be used in combination with hematoxylin, the latter be- 
ing used first and then a faint stain with the deltapurpurin. Then wash 
well in water and withdraw the color from the celloidin with alcohol. 
Connective tissue stains red, somewhat ona violettint ; nucleistain bluish. 

Benzo-Azurin.—A brownish powder that dissolves easily in water 
with a blue-violet color. Concentrated solutions stain quickly, weak 
solutions slowly. A weak solution is to be preferred. All tissue ele- 
ments as well as the celloidin stain; nuclei of a darker shade than the 
protoplasm. Sometimes the connective tissue elements stain of a reddish 
tint, the nuclei of a hematoxylin color. This may be due to the reac- 
tion of the tissues. Alkalies change the color of the solution to red ; 
they also completely decolorize stained sections. Alcohol withdraws 
the color slightly from the tissues and the celloidin. Clearing and 
mounting media do alter the color. Acids do not change the color, 
consequently decolorization must be done in alkaline solutions. 

This dye stains quickly and intensely, resembling hematoxylin some- 
what in the results, although the nuclei do not stain as sharply as with 
the former. Beautiful pictures are obtained in the skin and kidney. 
In sections of the central nervous system, the neurolgia and the branches 
of Purkinje’s cells are especially sharp. 

Chrysophenin.—A sulphur-yellow dye, slightly soluble in water, 
easily so in alcohol, in which sections are to be stained. The staining 
is quick and diffuse, the color bright yellow. Alcohol extracts the color 
from the celloidin, but the color in the tissues is not affected by either 
alkalies or acids. 4 

Rhodanin-red and Rhodanin-violet.—Two basic dyes soluble 
in both alcohol and water with a strength of color equal to that of fuch- 
sin. Solutions of these dyes stain, diffusely, a carmin-red and reddish- 
violet. Water and alcohol extract the color from the sections, so they are 
of no use for histological work. Bacteria stain, but as yet no method of 
fixing the dye has been found. Further experiments are being carried on. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 81 


Motions of Certain Diatoms and Oscillaria. 
By WM. A. TERRY, 


BRISTOL, CONN 

Ina previous article published in this periodical I stated that vigorous 
specimens of certain diatoms would travel a distance equal fo their 
length in about two seconds; this is maximum speed, and _ is not 
common except in small forms, the average rate being about five seconds. 
The Pleurosigma, although as active as most varieties, requires about 
seven seconds to travel its length, as it is much longer than most other 
kinds. 

I sometimes see published statements from other observers that are 
not in accordance with my observations. One writer states that diatoms 
always travel with one valve uppermost; others say that the valves are 
in a vertical position, showing the hoop. Stauronezs acuta travels 
with the valves vertical, showing the broad hoop or band and the edges 
of the valves or shells. So, also, do several varieties of Prxnularia 
and Surzrella. Stauronets phenicenteron travels with the shells hor- 
izontal, showing one uppermost ; as also several Pixnularia, Surtrella, 
etc: including all the Pleurosigma. In studying the motions of such 
diatoms as ae Pleurosigma from Dike creek, it is difficult to avoid 
crediting them with some amount of volition. Although blindly 
running against obstructions without attempting to av oid them, yet 
when stopped by such obstructions, the impulse is not continued in 
that directiongas long as would be the case were the organism free 
to move. It soon Boeke out and travels in the opposite direction. When 
stopped by an obstruction this diatom comes nearer to showing currents 
in the water than any other I have observed, small particles passing 
rapidly along its side apparently without being in contact with it. Pieces 
of sediment resting upon it near the median line may sometimes be seen 
moving in an opposite direction to those in contact ‘with the side. 

This uniformity of position in all the different individuals of the same 
variety during motion seems to me very suggestive, as indicating a line 
of investigation by which their means ‘of crea may be getectedt and 
also showing that their motions are not so purely automatic as is gen- 
erally supposed. 

The motions of the Oscz//arza seem to me to require a different ex- 
planation from those usually given. Mr. Wolle, in his ‘ Fresh-water 
Algz of the United States,’ quotes Dr. Hansgirg as advancing the sup- 
position that the movements are of the same nature as those of the 
sarcode in the pseudopodia of rhizopods. <As the protoplasm is enclosed 
in a rigid sheath, it is difficult to see how its movements can cause the 
motion of the entire filament, as Dr. Hansgirg states it does not pro- 
trude. Mr. Wolle believes the motion to be rises by the rapid di- 
vision of cells. If an active filament short enough to be ‘entirely within 
the field of the microscope be carefully Speer it will be seen that 
the entire filament is in uniform motion in the direction of its length, 
and if the variety is one in which the ends are bent or curved it will 
also be seen that the onward movement is accompanied by a revolution 
upon its axis, so that a point on the outside of the sheath describes a 
spiral path through the water. After the filament has travelled a cer- 
tain time in one direction, the motion stops and is then reversed. The 
filament retraces its path in the opposite direction, the axial revolution 


wa 


2 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ April, 


being also reversed at the same time. The same thing occurs in all fil- 
aments of whatever length, the whole filament travelling .a certain time 
in one direction and then reversing its motion ; the rear end apparently 
travelling as fast in the same direction as the front end, though of course 
there must be a slight difference due to cell division or growth, but it 
is so small as to be unnoticeable. The rapidity of axial revolution 
varies greatly in different varieties, some moving onward a consider able 
distance before completing a revolution, in others the revolving motion 
is the most rapid; some of the minute varieties found in the brackish 
water of salt marshes revolving with great rapidity, while the onward 
motion is comparatively slow. Spzrulina tenutssima makes one or 
two complete revolutions per second. 

When the end of a long-moving filament strikes an obstruction the 
moving impulse is sufficiently powerful to cause the filament to bend 
or double up, and the revolving motion may cause it to twist upon itself 
or others so as to resemble the strands of a rope, but it generally works 
itself free and resumes its natural position. In all cases under my obser- 
vation the waving or nodding movements of which so much has been 
written are caused simply by the elasticity of the filament springing out 
to regain its normal position while working itself free from obstructions. 
The proper motion is an onward spiral eect ant forward and back- 
ward in the direction of its length, thus showing a striking resemblance 
to the motion of diatoms and probably produced ina Sen manner. 

When a tuft of active Osc¢//aréa is placed in water ina shallow dish 
and exposed to light the filaments are free to move in all directions 
away from the central mass. Returning, they meet obstructions ; con- 
sequently they move a little further in ane direction than in the other. 
Thus their rate of speed over the dish, instead of showing their true 
rate of motion, only shows the excess produced by free motion over 
that retarded. To detect the axial revolution of some varieties requires 
very close observation. I do not at present propose to advance any 
theory as to the cause of motion, but simply record my observ vations 
and my conviction that the movements of Oscz/laria, like those of. 
diatoms, are entirely distinct and separate from those due to growth. 

The Osczl/arva are very plentiful in the salt marshes. The filamentous 
erowth, mentioned in a former article as covering the active groups of 
TONER ta paradoxa, appears to have been Leptothri x tenctorza. I 
found a class of many varieties, from the minute SAzruliza tenutssima 
up to those as large as the filamentous desmids, which I do not recog- 
nize in Mr. Wolle’s illustrations, with the exception of the SAz7 ulina. 
They were colorless, and I should have supposed them in advanced 
stages of growth, but their very active movements seemed to preclude 
the idea of old age; one of them was as large as //yalotheca dissiliens 
and somewhat resembled it in outline, excepting that the cells were 
rounded and not notched, and appeared to have a division in the centre. 
They were hyaline with the exception of small, irregular, opaque patches. 
Opposite ends of some of these filaments were Tests moving in 
opposite directions, so as to bend or double up the filament into a sig- 
moid form, and as the ends approached each other the motion w pole 
reverse. 

When the end of one of these filaments suddenly obtrudes itself into 
the field of the microscope it bears a most startling resemblance to an 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 3 


os) 


animal. These forms were not found among the floating mats of Os- 
czllarza on the surface, but were at the bottom of several feet of water 
among the Plewrosigma and other diatoms and in detached filaments. 


NOTES ON APPARATUS. 


The King Microtome.—This microtome, by J. D. King, Edgar- 
town, Mass., will cut anything that can be cut with any microtome, and 
do its work as well as the best, but it is designed especially for botan- 
ical work, or for cutting any hard substance that requires the greatest 
possible rigidity in the instr ument. 

The iow is attached to a heavy nickel- -plated iron carriage, A, by a 
steel clamp and shoe, 4 and c, with milled head-screws, a. The car- 
riage runs on a solid iron track, # and 4, which is held to a table by a 
clamp- screw, &. 

For cutting very hard objects, like the wiry stems of plants, or the 
chitinous skeletons of insects, there is an attachment with a very stout 
blade, on the principle of a carpenter’s plane, @, which screws on to the 
carriage in place of the knife, and like the knife it can be used straight 
across or obliquely. 

Diameter of well, 7, of an inch; depth of well, 14 inches; depth 
of well with chuck, Z. 1 inch. 

For cutting soft material, paraffine may be cast directly into the well, 
or into a chuck, not shown, which is held firmly by being screwed into 
the bottom of the well. The adjustible chuck, Z. is intended for harder 
material. 

Microtome No. 1 gauges to 1-i0,000 of an inch by turning the ratchet. 


(Cut about one-third actual size.) 


84 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (April, 


g, one click, but can be set to any desirable thickness less, by the ad- 
justable arc, V. No. 2 gauges to 1-2,000 inch, adjustable like No. 1. 

The King Microtome should not be confounded with ‘+ King’s Provi- 
dence Microtome,” which is not now in the market; the principle is 
the same, but the mechanism is very much simplified and improved. 
It is made by Charles X. Dalton, of Boston, who did R. B. Tolles’ 
brass work for twenty years, and whose name is a guarantee for the 
best of workmanship. 

The following table gives thickness of sections by clicks, on No. 1 
Microtome, omitting fractions of ten-thousandths of an inch: 1 click, 
1-10,000 inch; 2 clicks, 1-5,000 inch; 6 clicks, 1-1,500 inch; 7 clicks, 
1-1,400 inch; 8 clicks, 1-1,200 inch; g clicks, 1-1,100 inch; 10 clicks, 
1-1,000 inch; 11 clicks, 1-900 inch; 12 clicks, 1-800 inch; 14 clicks, 
1-700 inch; 16 clicks, 1-600 inch; 20 clicks, 1-500 inch; 25 clicks, 
1-400 inch; 33 clicks, 1-300 inch; 50 clicks, 1-200 inch. 


—-— +) ——— 


Zeiss’ Catalogue.—Messrs. F. J. Emmerich & Son announce that 
a new edition of Mr. Zeiss’ Catalogue (No. 28) in German has just 
been received, and will be forwarded to applicants for 10 cents in post- 
age stamps. It contains many new apparatus and improvements of 
importance. 


Oo-— 


Queen’s Catalogue.—James W. Queen & Company, of Philadel- 
phia, have recently issued a clearance sale catalogue of microscopes and 
sundries. It comprises (besides other goods in this line) a large num- 
ber of accessories from their regular list greatly reduced in price. A 
commendable feature is the fact that Queen & Co. guarantee the condi- 


tion and proper working of every article. 


New Method for Staining Fibrin and Micro-organisms.*— 
Prof. C. Weigert has devised a modification of Gram’s method in which 
the alcohol and oil of cloves are replaced by anilin oil. The proceed- 
ure is as follows:—The section (hardening in spirit) is stained with 
the anilin-gentian violet solution. The staining may be done either on 
the slide or in a watch-glass. In the latter case the section must be 
washed with water or with Na Cl solution to remove excess of dye be- 
fore it is placed on the slide. The section is then nearly dried with 
bibulous paper and the iodine solution dropped on; when the latter 
has acted sufficiently the section is again blotted and then covered with 
a drop of anilin oil, which must be renewed several times as it quickly 
takes up the stain. The section becomes gradually transparent and 
the analin oil is removed with xylol and the section mounted in balsam. 

If a double stain be desired the additional color must be imparted 
before the violet. In this method there is no need to remove the celloi- 
din. By this procedure fungi and pneumonia cocci are more easily 
demonstrated than by Gram’s method, but its principal recommenda- 
tion is the sharp stain it imparts to threads of fibrin. Bacteria and fungi 
appear quite dark, almost black, the fibrin threads a beautiful blue. 


* Fortschr. d. Med , v. (1887) p. 228. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 85 


Report upon the Postal Club Boxes—Y. 
By QUEEN MAB. 


Box FE. The last three boxes of slides have been of unusual interest, 
either from the exceptional character of the slides, or from the especially 
interesting notes which have accompanied them. And in this connec- 
tion the words of the late Dr. M. N. Miller, as given in the Annual 
Report of the Club, are appropriate: ‘* I cannot but feel that the mem- 
bers are depriving themselves of much of the value which they might 
gain from membership by neglecting the pages of the note- -books.” 
And again: ** Would it not be pettent to have more extended descrip- 
tions of our slides? Persons contribute things very familiar to themselves 
and seem to think they ought to be self-evident to others.” The man- 
agers of the Club also say: ‘* Not only are the notes by our profes- 
sional teachers and experts models of instructive demonstration, but the 
less experienced members are often able to present most interesting 
things which they have had exceptional opportunities for observing. 
Such notes, if really good of their kind, are sure to be useful.” 

Slide No. 1 is by Louis H. Noe, Elizabeth, N. J., and the infor- 
mation imparted concerning the nature of the object, the methods of its 
preparation and preservation, is summed up in these three words, 
‘¢ HypRoOIDEA, Pennaria tiarella.” This is a very interesting slide, 
the tentacles being well expanded. 

No. 2, T. D. Hodges, So. Orange, N. J., has an even more chary 
description, Paxdans odoratus ; all the rest is left to conjecture. 

Slide No. 3, prepared by J. D. Hyatt, and contributed by Dr. 
Samuel Lockwood, of Freehold, N. J., the president of the Club, is 
accompanied by a model description. This slide shows the ‘* Fossil 
Rhizopod, Hozoon canadense, from Laurentian Rocks of Canada.” 
Objectives recommended from # to 4. ** This fossil is regarded by Dr. 
Dawson, of Montreal, as a Rhizopod, which would extend life down to 
Archean time. This has been the subject of very warm discussion. 
The late Dr. W. B. Carpenter advocated the Rhizopod view, and per- 
formed great labor in the investigation. At his visit to this country he 
made it the subject of an address to the N. Y. Microscopical Society, 
at which time he exhibited a large number of his own preparations of 
the fossil. This specimen of Mr. Hyatt’s preparation is very beautiful. 
It is not a show slide, but will interest those who care to put a little 
thought on the earliest possible records of animal life. See Dana’s 
Manual of Geology. Consult index on word Eozoon.” 

Slide No. 4, Edward Field, preparer and contributor, Red Bank, 
N. J. ‘* Portion of sac containing periwinkle spawn. Balsam.” 

Slide No. 5. W. C. Gorman, Randdlph, N. Y., Suckers on Leg of 
Dytiscus marginalis. Mounted in Canada paisa and cement used, 
Zinc White. For description, members are referred to Carpenter. 

Slide No. 6. H. S. Housekeeper, So. Bethlehem, Pa. ‘‘ Pollen of 
Erythronum americanum. Dry.” 

money = No. i, by S: G. Shanks, M. D. Albany, N. Y., Vertical 
Section of Sealp of Man. Section cut in fr eezing microtome, stained 
with borax carmine. Medium, balsam in Peneoles cement, shellac. 
Objectives recommended 1 inchand}. There isa figure of this prepara- 
tion in the note-book, and the following description : ‘* The hair rises 


86 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (April, 


from a papilla at the bottom of the follicle. A sebaceous gland near 
the top of the follicle secretes a sort of an oily substance which keeps the 
hair glossy. A sweat gland is seen to the left of the -hair—the gland 
is simply a coil; the duct ascends spirally to the surface of the skin. 
Fat cells and fibrous tissue surround the hair roots. 

Slide No. 2, the work of Dr. G. A. Marietta, of Clarion, Iowa, is 
a section of Epithelioma, frozen and cut with razor, stained with 
hematoxylin, and mounted in balsam. No. 3, is by Frank French of 
Lawrence, Kansas. Head of Gyrzxus natator. 

Slide No. 4, by A. G. Field, M. D., Des Moines, Iowa, is transverse 
section of 4 months’ feetus. Cleaned in acetic acid and mounted un- 
stained, in ebcerige: ‘*M.N. M.” comments: rt, Harden your tissue 
in alcohol. Imbed in paraffine. 3. Cut with razor flooded with 
alcohol. Don’ t bother about getting a section of the whole alimentary 
tract, teeth and all, ina single section at first. 4. Stain with hema- 
toxylin. 5. Dehydrate with 95% alcohol. 6. Clarify with oil of cloves. 

Mount in dammar. 

Slide No. 5, by J. J. Davis, Racine, Wis., Section of Sarcomata, 
hardened in 40, 60, 80, and 95 26 alcohol, imbedded in paraffine and cut 
in a well microtome. ‘* The Sarcomata are tumors composed of em- 
bryonic tissue, connective tissue, classified according to size and shape 
of cells. This specimen is of small round-celled sarcomata, the 
special point of interest being presence of giant cells, which are rare in 
tumors of this kind, though common in ANGE that spring from bone 
medulla.’ 

No. 6, prepared by W. H. Walmsley, and contributed by G. M. 
Houston, of Harrisonville, Mo. Transverse Sections of leaf and midrib 
of Ficus elastica. Double stained and mounted in balsam. Artificial 
light, and 1 inch and ¢ inch objectives recommended. 


Some Habits of the Crayfish. 
By Prof. L. W. CHANEY, Ir. 


NORTHFIELD, MINN. 

To those who have followed the series of articles in this periodical 
by Prof. Osborn on the histology of the crayfish, some memoranda of 
my own concerning this handy arthropod may be of interest. In the 
small river which runs by our town, and to w hich attention often turns 
for biological material, the crayfish much abounds. The annual raids 
to meet our demands do not seem in the least to decrease the supply. 
It is a delight to the soul, whether esthetically or biologically inclined, to 
float Sow over the shallows and study through the clear water ae 
quaint lives of the aquatic animals and plants. 

The crayfish chooses the shady side of a rock and lies in wait. The 
stalked eyes peer about with a comical twist, and if some savory morsel 
comes floating along the claws begin to sway and reach with sluggish alert- 
ness. The cray Bla is by no means dainty and will consume any bit of 

garbage which may come in his way. Like the sea-shore cogeners it 
may Be enticed and taken by a bit of meat tied to a string, and the en- 
ticement is specially strong if the meat is tainted. It seems that an an- 
imal provided with such a formidable armature would sometimes seize 
living prey, but many observation have failed to show that it ever does 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 87 


so, although the contents of the stomach seem at times to indicate 
something of the kind. How bits of mussel shell find their way into 
the maw of these little scavengers it is not easy to understand. It is 
interesting to watch the munching and grinding which form a part of the 
eating process. If the crayfish be kept for some time in an aquarium 
it “ects to a certain extent domesticated, and its habits may be studied. 
If the aquarium has a transparent bottom the motions of the mouth parts 
may be well observed. The animal balances itself skilfully on three 
pairs of legs, while the great claws and the next pair are used to press 
up to the mouth the desimed morsel. The foot jaws work with a 
combination of a crushing and sawing motion, while the strong man- 
dibles at each side of the mouth take sharp nips from pieces torn away 
by the foot jaws. When we remember that in the stomach there is 
another masticatory apparatus it certainly seems as though these animals 
were somewhat redundantly supplied. 

I had supposed the cray fish to be principally a nocturnal animal, ee 
its actions in the aquarium are not in accord with that idea. It seems 
to have no special time for activity, but to be very irregular in its habits. 
This may be due to the artificial conditions of life. 

The mode of locomotion has passed into a proverb, and every one 
knows what it means to ‘‘ crawfish.” The idea that progression is ex- 
clusively retrograde is not true. Four pairs of legs are generally used 
in locomotion, and they are moved in a definite order, whether the 
animal moves forward or sideways. Observations on this point have 
not been close enough to warrant positive statements, but usually 
the first and third upon one side are moved and immediately after the 
second and fourth on the other side. I have never observed that they 
have more than two feet raised at the same time. This of course does 
not include the large claws, which are not used in locomotion. 

The working of the little pump by which water is made to flow over 
the gills may be readily observed by cutting away a little notch from the 
carapace at the point where the cervical suture runs down to the edge 
of the gill-cover. This causes no apparent inconvenience to the cray- 
fish, and is certainly not painful. The gill plate is as hard and insen- 
sitive as the finger nail. The pump is a little scoop-shaped apparatus 
which is attached to one of the appendages near the mouth, and its 
working, which may be plainly seen, is a good lesson in animal me- 
chanics. The gills which this pump supplies with fresh water are objects 
of much ieee to the microscopist, as they exhibit in simple form the 
essential points of all respiratory structures. 

The egg-laying process is not without its points of interest. The re- 
productive orifices are double and placed upon the bases of the thora- 
cic legs. The eggs when extruded are covered with a substance 
which attaches them very firmly to the fine hairs which fringe the 
abdominal feet. When the eggs are to be deposited the female curves 
the tip of the abdomen forwar d Randies the thorax. As the eggs pass into 
the space between the thorax and the under-folded AbuOmen they are 
moved about by the motions of the abdominal feet and finally become 
attached as stated above. The crayfish is very careful of the mass of 
eggs, guarding it and carefully keeping it out of harm. Thus far no 
young have hatched in confinement. Strangest of all habits which 
these lowly animals have is that of changing their clothes. This 


88 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [April, 


they share with other animals, such as the toad and the snakes. But 
the method of change in unique. Any one who has noticed the claws 
of the crayfish or lobster would be likely to say that it was impossible 
that the mass of tissue contained within them should be drawn though 
the slender joints which unite the claw with the body as one might with- 
draw the hand from a glove. This is exactly what they do, however. 
It is not often that one may see the process, and it was I presume an 
unusually good fortune which enabled me to see the last part of this 
curious disrobing. The integument of the crustacez and their relatives 
is so hard and unyielding that increase in size is impossible in the or- 
dinary way. It is provided for either by all growth occurring before 
the adult form is assumed or by this periodical change. When the 
old skin is to be cast off some secluded place is chosen if such 
can be found. The animal goes through a series of strange contor- 
tions, wringing the claws about like the hands of one stricken with 
great agony. Head and tail are drawn violently together which 
would in a more flexible animal hump the back with force. Some- 
times several of these paroxysms occur before a long slit appears down 
the middle of the back. Through the slit appears the lighter brown of 
the new integument. Atthis point I surprised my captive and stayed 
with him until the change of raiment was completed. 

The change is usually made in the night. Happening to approach 
with a lamp the aquarium where I had a number of crayfish confined 
I looked in upon them and found one in the condition stated. I was 
obliged to wait nearly an hour before it went on with the process. The 
next step seemed to be the release of the great claws. It was comical and 
painful to see the poor creature tug and strain. Suddenly, while atten- 
tion was turned tothe claws, the antennz and other adjacent parts slipped 
neatly out and the head of the animal popped up through the slit in his 
back. He then took another rest. The animal next worked to release 
the claws, leaning back upon the tail and pulling steadily. The claws 
stuck hard, but with a final twist they were released. After a short 
rest the animal easily released the remaining legs and then seemed to 
walk forward, withdrawing the abdomen from its old casing with 
scarcely an effort. 

Beside the habits above noted there are several others of much interest 


to the patient observer. 
BroLoGIcAL LABORATORIES, CARLETON COLLEGE, Mar. 11, 1889. 


Genuine and Manufactured Honey.—Worthington G. Smith, of 
Pittsburg, announces that genuine honey can be readily distinguished 
from manufactured honey by the microscope. ‘The former has few or 
no sugar crystals and abounds with pollen grains, while the imitations 
have little else than these crystals, with rarely a trace of pollen grains. 
The honeyed taste of the manufactured article, he thinks, may come 
from honey-comb or beeswax being mashed up with the article used in 
the manufacture. Each class of plants has its own specific form of 
pollen grain. Any one conversant with this branch of botany could tell 
from what part of the world the honey came by studying the pollen 
grains that it might contain. 


Henry Mills, of Buffalo, N. Y., died February 7, in Chattanooga, 
Tenn., of pneumonia. He was a member of the American Society of 
Microscopists. 


188".] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 89 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


Ventilating Bene correspondent of Vazure from Mauritius 
writes (vol. XXXix, p. 224) that in that as well as in other tropical coun- 
tries certain bees are delegated to stand at the entrance of the hive, and by 
the incessant motion of their w ings ‘* fan the interior” of the hive, these 
being relieved at intervals by fresh bees, and all kept at their duty by a 
guard. We venture to question the logic of this statement. The fact 
being acceded, it is more reasonable to : suppose that the fanning bees 
are luxurating in the current of air the motion of their wings produces 
rather than working for the good of the community without the possi- 
bility of knowing ‘that there is such a good. We would suggest the 
importance of observing more e accurately with this question in mind. 

Oo 


Botanical Laboratories.—The Botanical Gazette for January, 


in continuation of its articles upon this topic, has an illustrated article 
upon the Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. 


oO 


Newly Discovered Organ in the Cockroach.—Mr. Bivard Jee 
Mierchin, in the Quar. Jour. of Mic. Science (vol. xxix, p. 229), de- 
scribes a new organ under the fifth tergite on the back of the We ee 
Pertplanita orientalis. Tt consists ofa pair of small glands, which are 
considered by him as odor producing glands. 


oe 


Finger Prints.—Mr. Francis Galton, F. R. S., in an address be- 
fore the Anthropological Institute, describes an interesting method of 
identifying individuals when other means are iennicicnt by impres- 
sions made by the ridges on the ends of the fingers and thumbs. These 
are made either by pressing the thumb or finger upon a copperpl. ite 
upon which is a very thin film of printer’s ink, ied then pressing the 
finger upon white paper, or using a piece of metal or glass with a coat- 
ing of smoke upon it, and making the impression upon a moistened 
gummed paper. The impression is said to be very characteristic, and 
the form to remain constant through life. 


10) 


The Common Dodder.—Dr. Henrietta E. Hooker contributes to 
the Botanical Gazette (vol. xiv, p. 31) a valuable article on the growth 
and structure of this interesting parasite, which is abundant in many 
parts of the United States. For the microscopic structure fresh speci- 
mens were preserved in alcohol and afterwards imbedded in celloidin, 
and sections made so as to reveal the structure of the plant and its con- 
nection with its host. 


O 


Cestodes in Marine Fishes.—An abstract of the report of Prof. 
Edwin Linton on subject in connection with the report of the U. S. 
Fish Commission for 1886, given in Am. Journ. Scz., gives the num- 
ber of those parasites found in marine fishes at forty -two. The full re- 
port will be of interest to biologists inasmuch as it relates to a group of 
worms presenting many erratic features. 


* This department is conducted by Prof. J. H. Pillsbury. 


90 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [April, 


Diseases of Swine.—The Commissioner of Agriculture has ap- 
pointed a commission, consisting of Professor William H. Welch, of 
Johns Hopkins University, Dr. E. O. Shakespere, of Philadelphia, 
and Professor T. J: Burrill, of the University of Illinois, to investigate 
the subject of swine diseases in the United States, and the methods 
of their treatment and prevention. 


Oo 
Water Supplies Again.—The North American Review for Feb- 


ruary, in its ‘‘ notes and comments,” gives some crisp points upon 
this subject, some of which are, to say the least, overstated, but many 
of which deserve consideration. 


o-— 


A New Moss.—Prof. C. R. Barnes publishes in the Bot. Gaz. (vol. 
xiv, p- 44) a list of mosses from the Mingan Islands on the southern 
shore of Labrador, among which is a new species which he names 
Bryum Knowltont. 


Oo 


Certain Relations of the Cell-wall.—Dr. Kohl (Bot. Cextral.vol. 
xxxvii, p. 1) demonstrates that the growth in thickness of the hairs of 
many plants is not strictly by intersception nor by opposition, but by 
periodic deposition of layers of cellulose, and he notes the fact that, be- 
tween these successive layers, there is generally a trace of protoplasmic 
matter not easily detected by Millon’s reagent. Kravon has already 
shown that the growth of vast fibres is substantially of the same char- 
acter: 


oO 


Lichens and Their Hosts.—No subject perhaps affords the ama- 
teur worker with the microscope a better illustration of what the instru- 
ment has aided the scientist in doing than does the progress w hich has 
been made in the study of the pene and the microscopic alge upon 
which some species of lichens feed. The Am. JVat. for May presents. 
an interesting sketch of progress of investigation in this direction ee 
the pen of Thos. A. Williams. The green bodies which are found 1 
great abundance in the tissues of many lichens were supposed to Pe a 
part of the lichen and were named gonidia. Long continued observa- 
tion and experiment showed, however, that this was not the case, and 
after many patient and oft repeated cultures of the so-called gonidia it 
has been found that they have a life history entirely independent of the 
lichen, and are therefore to be classed among other plants. It is found 
moreover that these so-called gonidia represent certain groups of chloro- 
phyll bearing plants among the Protophyta and Zygophyta, and many 
are easily eniaed with well-known species of these alge or chloro- 
phylt bearing plants. The nature of the relation of the gonidia to the 
lichen is show n by the culture of the spores of those chen in which 
the gonidia are found. If the spores of these lichens are subjected to 
the proper conditions of warmth and moisture they will germinate in 
the course of a few days and growth will continue for a time, after 
which it will cease unless the germinating hy phea of the lichen comes 
in contact with alge upon w hich it can feed. i in which case the growth 
continues. 


Je} 
—_ 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


BACTERIOLOGY.* 


Staining Tubercle-Bacilli.—The Koch-Ehrlich’st method is 
probably the most trustworthy of any in use. According to this method, 
specimens to be SSN for tubercle-bacilli are prepared and stained 
in the following manner 

The cover-glasses must be thoroughly cleansed in some cleaning mix- , 
ture to free Phe from any adherent particles of grease or dirt hae might 
prevent the substance to ‘be examined from sticking to the glass. The 
suspected material must then be spread on a cover “glass i in the thinnest 
possible layer. Ifa hard tubercular nodule is to be examined it must 
be crushed and completely broken up before spreading it on the cover- 
glass. In case of sputum the more solid, yellowish masses should 
be taken, excluding as much as possible the accompanying mucus. The 
film thus prepared must now be allowed to dry in the air of the room 
without extra heat. As soon as it is th oroughly dry the cover-glass 
with the film uppermost is passed three times moderately quickly thr ough 
the flame of a spirit-lamp or Bunsen burner, in order to fix the film so 
that it may not be washed away during the staining process. 

After heating, the cover- -glass must Be floated flan downwards on the 
surface of the staining fluid, care being taken that no air-bubbles lie be- 
neath it, which would protect the specimen from exposurre to the stain- 
ing fluid at this point. The cover-glass should remain in the stain for 
from 12 to 24 hours at the temperature of the room. 

The stain consists of a solution composed of too c.cm. of aniline 
water, II c.cm. of a saturated alcoholic solution of methyl violet (or 
fuchsin), and 10 c.cm. of absolute alcohol. The aniline water is made 
by adding about 5 c.cm. of aniline oil to 100 c.cm. of distilled water, 
and shaking the two thoroughly together. From 3 to 4 per cent. oi 
aniline is taken up by the water ; he remainder adheres to the bottom 
of the vessel in the form of thick drops. This saturated solution of an- 
iline is obtained in about one-half hour, when it is filtered. The filtrate 
should be as transparent and colorless as water. It is better to prepare 
afresh a few c.cm. of the stain each time that it is required, for owing 
to the aniline water it will not keep for any length of time. The satu- 
rated alcoholic solution of methyl violet (or fuchsin) is obtained by 
pouring about 100 c.cm. of absolute alcohol upon about 20 grms. of dry 
methyl violet (or fuchsin) in a well-stoppered glass vessel and shaking 
frequently. 

Aiter the necessary time has elapsed the cover-glass is removed from the 
stain by means of fine for ceps. The preparation is now stained very dark, 
almost black. It is immediately placed in nitric acid diluted w ith three 
to four parts of water; in this it is freely moved about for some seconds 
until it becomes of a greenish-blue color, when it is transferred to a ves- 
sel containing 60 per cent. alcohol. It is left in the alcohol for several 
~minutes until no more of the staining fluid is washed out, when it is 
ready for the next staining process. 

In preparations treated with nitric acid and alcohol the tissue elements 
are quite colorless, or of a very light blue tint, while the tubercle-bacilli 


* Conducted by V. A. Moore, assistant in the laboratory of the Bureau of Animal Industry. 
+ Volume xcv of the New Sydenham Society. Microparasites in Disease. London, 1886. 


92 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ April, 


present an intense blue color, if methyl violet was used. It is almost 
impossible to determine the position of the bacilli in relation to their 
surroundings in specimens so prepared. In order to get the strongest 
possible contrast between the staining of the bacilli and the cell-nuclei, 
a yellow or light brown stain is chosen when the bacilli are blue, and 
when they are red, green or blue is preferred for the tissue; in the first 
case vesuvin or Bismark brown is best suited, in the second methyline 
blue. Both of these dyes must be used in weak solutions and their time 
of action limited. The cover-glass preparation stained in methyl violet 
and decolorized in nitric acid and alcohol is then placed, film down- 
wards, in a vessel containing the vesuvin solution. 

From the vesuvin solution the cover-glass is rinsed in water and then 
allowed to dry in the atmosphere of the room. When it is thoroughly 
dried it is mounted in Canada balsam diluted with oil of turpentine or 
xylol. Very thick balsam, which has to be used warm, cannot be em- 
ploy ed, as the heating would quickly decolorize the tubercle-bacilli. 

Contrast staining, as a rule, is not required in examining sputum for 
tubercle-bacilli, so that preparations of sputum may be examined im- 
mediately after treatment with the nitric acid and alcohol. They can 
be examined at once in water, or allowed to dry and then mounted in 
Canada balsam. 

Sections of tissues that have been hardened in alcohol can be stained 
_ for tubercle-bacilli in the same manner as cover-glass preparations. Af- 
ter staining in the contrast stain, they must, however, be passed through 
first 70%, “then 95%, and finally absolute alcohol, and then cleared in 
oil of turpentine or cedar oil before mounting them in the Canada bal- 
sam. 

The Koch-Ehrlich-Rindfleisch rapid method of staining tubercle-ba- 
cilli is reported by Dr. E. O. Shakespeare* as giving constantly satis- 
factory results, both as to reliability and rapidity. With it the examin- 
ation of sputum or other fluid or semi-fluid material for the presence 
of the tubercle-bacilli requires no more time and trouble than the ex- 
amination of urine for tube casts, and often not so much of either. 

The method is Ehrlich’s, modified by heating the staining fluid con- 
taining the specimen over a spirit or gas flame until] bubbles begin to 
appear. Remove the heat at once and allow the cover-glass to remain 
in the hot fluid from two to four minutes. Then remove it, immerse it 
in acid, then alcohol, and so on as described above 


Philip Henry Gosse was born at Worcester, England, in 1810, 
and died at Marychurch, April 23, 1888. Among his early works 
were ‘* The Canadian Naturalist” (1840) and ‘+ The Birds of Jamaica” 
(1851), ‘*A Naturalist’s Rambles on the Devonshire Coast” and 
The Aquarium (1853— —4). Of greater importance was his ** Manual 
of Marine Zodélogy ” (1855-6), and ‘* Actinologia Britannica.”” The 
latter is still an authority on sea-anemones and corals of the British 
Isles. To microscopists his work on the Rotifera in connection with 
Dr. C. T. Hudson is invaluable. All his works were finely illustrated, 
he being an ingenious artist. 


* Journal of Comparative Medicine and Surgery, 1887, p. 241. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 93 


MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


Essex County, N. J.—F. VANDERPOEL, Secy. 


Jan. 17, 1889.—The subject was bacteria, and the members brought 
a large number of valuable and interesting slides, representing work in 
bacterial pathology by Pasteur, Koch, and others. Mr. Loomis brought 
a modified Zentmayer histological stand, and upon the stage he placed 
a slide of bacillus anthrax, the microbe of splenic fever. This exhibit 
was interesting for two reasons: First, because of the microbe itself, 
by the study of which Pasteur has made his name famous, and second, 
because of the objective used, which was an apochromatic ;';” made by 
Swift of London. Mr. J. ince Smith exhibited a slide of Eine tuber- 
culosis, which the members examined and compared with a slide of the 
same bacillus under the microscope of the secretary. Dr. Ayres showed 
upon his stand what is known as the pneumonia bacillus, and Dr. Brown 
had a number of pathological slides, among which he selected the mi- 
crobe of malignant edema. This was Fallaer ed by an exhibit, by Mr. 
Smith, of Pee iias typhi. One of the finest exhibits of the ev ening was 
a bine of the comma bacillus, prepared by Dr. Koch and shown by Mr. 
Loomis. The field was literally full of ‘the bacilli, and the members 
expressed their admiration of the slide. 

Feb. 7. Meeting held at Montclair. The subject was mould. There 
were a variety of slides, some being the work of professional preparers 
outside of the Society, and others had been prepared for this particular 
meeting by members. Mr. Carter exhibited a specimen of mould which 
he had found on a piece of decayed parsnip and said that it was peni- 
cilium glaucum. He then proceeded to explain the growth of this mould ; 
the formation of mycelium, then of the reproductive cells, termed conida, 
which are simply masses of protoplasm enclosed in walls of cellulose. 
The formation of mucor mucedo was also explained, and a very fine 
specimen was shown by Mr. Loomis. He also showed the Society 
some Aspergillus glaucus (cheese mould), and Asterosporium hoff- 
manni (spores of the star mnould—a very beautiful object indeed, and 
one which from its peculiar shape might be recognized whenever seen). 
Another slide of Mr. Loomis’ was that of mucor mucedo, containing 
one spore case full of spores and another one very close to it, but empty. 
The president, Dr. Ayres, exhibited some mould which had formed 
upon a piece of paper used to cover a cup of jelly (2. e., placed upon 
the top of the jelly itself). This was a very interesting object, showing 
a beautiful network of mycelium with the spores peaeeesed all over ts 
This gentleman also exhibited a slide of potato mould (perenospora 
infestans) . Several other slides were exhibited. 


OQ —— 
New York MicroscopicaL Socrety—G. E. Asnsy, Secy. 

Fanuary 4, 1889.—The following were elected officers for 1889: 
Rev. J. L. Zabriskie, President; Geo. M. Mather, Vice-President ; 
Geo. E. Ashby, Secretary; Edw. C. Chapman, Treasurer; A. A. 
Hopkins, Curator. 

Fanuary 78.—Dr. Samuel Lockwood read a paper on ** The Hy- 
giene of the Atmosphere : a comparative study in relation to Hay-fever.” 


94 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ April, 


Dr: A. A. Julien read a paper entitled, ‘* Notes on a new Ochraceoiis 


Thallophyte.” The regular meetings occur on the first and third Fri- 
days of each month at No. 64 Wiaaecon avenue. 
fe) 


ItLinois STATE SOCIETY. 


Tuesday, January 22, 1889.—On the occasion of its annual conver- 
sazione, the Calumet Club put its elegant club-house at the disposal of 
the Society. A fashionable audience of about 350 ladies and gentlemen 
responded to the invitations. On the first and second floors were ar- 
ranged seventy microscopes, and, as the slides were all changed at g 
fo) ccloeks there were 135 slides on exhibition. Among those vitae at- 
tracted most attention were specimens of unfiltered drinking water taken 
from a large building in the centre of the city, and mounted by Prof. J. 
H. Long arid Mr. Mark Powers. Mr. W. H. Bullock exhibited a large 
number of slides, one containing the eye of a beetle. On the third floor 
a beautiful and elaborate stereopticon exhibition was given. 


oO 
Troy ScientTiFic AsSsocriaATION, N. Y. 


Monday, February 4, 1589.—The microscopical section met at the 
residence of Joseph McKay. An exhibition of objects was made by C. 
E. Hanaman. 


NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


Merck’s Index of Fine Chemicals and Drugs for the Materta 
Medica and the Arts. By E.Merck. 8°,pp.168. New York, 
1889. 


This purports to be a catalogue of all drugs and chemical products 
used by the physician or druggist. Over 4,000 different articles are 
specified. The alphabetical arrangement is excellent. Blank columns 
are given in which to insert prices, memoranda, etc. Synonyms are 
freely given, melting points, chemical composition, and miscellaneous 
notes of value. There is a useful table of abbreviations at the close. 
The reader is exhorted at the bottom of each of 154 pages thus: ‘* When 
ordering, specify Merck’s!”” This indicates an advertising purpose in 
the volume, and seems to us an unnecessary blemish. 


——— 


A Manual of the Vertebrate Animals of the Northern United 
States, inclusive of Marine Species. By David Starr pp 
Chicago. A.C. McClurg & Co. 1888. 12°; pp. 375. 2. 


Few treatises on systematic zodlogy or botany have the good rue 
to run through sever ral editions and Geeane indispensable, but President 
Jordan’s Manial seems likely to. Fifteen years ago a little pamphlet 
key to our birds was published by him. Twelve years ago the first 
edition of the present Manual was issued to give collectors ae students 
who are not specialists a ready means of identifyi ing the families, genera, 
and species of our vertebrate animals. Two years later a second edi- 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 95 


tion was issued in which the account of the fishes was completely recast. 
A third and fourth edition followed (in 1880 and 1884), and now a fifth 
edition wholly rewritten and rearranged. 

A complete key to the vertebrates ice n to inhabit northern and east- 
ern United States means the definition of II145 species, 607 genera, 
213 families, 54 orders, and 7 classes. The vertebrates may now be 
studied by college classes with the Manual as a key as readily as hith- 
erto the flowering plants could be identified with Gray’s Manual. 

The range of the work has been widened, so that it now embraces all 
known vertebrates of Missouri, lowa, Minnesota, Canada, Nova Scotia, 
and the Atlantic coast as far south as Cape Hatteras. This is a great 
gain in completeness, for it adds numerous large mammals, such as the 
coyote, grizzly bear, harbor seal (among carnivores), the white-tailed 
deer, mule-deer, carabou, prong-horn, big-horn, and buffalo (among 
ruminants), the order Cefe (among mammals), some birds, as the 
auks, and a very large number of fishes. 

The revision has included the nomenclature, bringing the names up 
to the present agreement among the specialists. The omission through- 
out the work Ae all synonymy is doubtless of advantage for brevity, but 
the addition of a brief and judicious condensed synonymy would be a 
great gain. Such a change in nomenclature as that of the generic name 
of the loon from Colymbus to Urinator, and the use of Colyméus for 
the grebe formerly known as Podzceps, is in the interest of good nomen- 
clature and should be followed, although it would be confusing to the 
tyro, for whose benefit a clue could be “easily given. 

The greatest improvement observed in the new edition is the change 
in the order of description, beginning now with the lowest and pro- 
ceeding to the highest, and ending with man, who in the earlier editions 
was entirely ignored. With this improved order of treatment is also an 
improved method, the withdrawal of artificial keys based on characters 
of easy recognition, but of slight or often no morphologic significance, 
and the substitution of natural keys based on characters of true genetic 
value. In the former work the intention was to name the specimen as 
quickly and as easily as possible; now is added to this chief aim the 
purpose to exhibit classificatory facts with their proper value so as 
to draw attention to natural affinities among the vertebrates. This 
is in the direction of sounder learning. A key built upon the natural 
system is not always the shortest, but it is the surest, and hence in 
science the best. The new edition thus steps out into a somewhat larger 
place than its predecessors and is no longer merely a key to the names of 
vetebrates. It isan introduction to a more scientific study of vertebrate 
zoology. It is well fitted to be used asa college text-book, and will 
find a place in many laboratories for that purpose. 

Besides the matter of most purely systematic importance the author 
has made space for the etymology of all the names and items of histor- 
ical interest, and he occasionally hints at some economic feature or 
curious habit, or even at times indulges in a touch of guarded humor. 

Though the new edition contains perhaps twice as much matter as 
the second edition it is shortened 32 pages by the more economical use 
of space and the employment of smaller type. So good, however, is 
the press-work that the new page is more attractive to the eye than the 
page of the old editions.—H. L. OssBorn. 


96 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [ April, 


The EHducator. ButalosN. Y. “Vol. i, No. tr. 


This is a monthly devoted to the education of young men and women 
in the current events of the day. It is also intended as a repository of 
what is of most importance in periodical literature. It has three depart- 
ments devoted, respectively, to current history, current literature, and 
current science. Under current history is given proceedings of Con- 
egress, State legislatures, and of foreign legislative bodies, an explanation 
of the most important political and Saeal events, biographical sketches. 
Current literature is devoted principally to reviewing such works as 
are of importance to the younger portion of society, especially to teachers 
and to students in high schools and colleges. In the pages devoted to 
current science is found a description of the new and important inven- 
tions, likewise an account and explanation of new discoveries in the 
sciences—chemistry, physics, astronomy, etc. 


ee 


Ultimate Finance; A True Theory of Wealth. By William Nelson 
Black. Humboldt Publishing Company. New York. 


This is part second of an economic work begun in the September 
number of the Hamboldt Library of Science. ‘The first two chapters 
treat of the origin of property and the evolution of wealth, the third and 
fourth discuss the principles and possibilities of banking and insurance, 
and the fifth, sixth, and seventh are devoted to a correction of the many 
misconceptions that abound on the nature of accumulation and the ad- 
ministration of property. The second chapter seems to be intended to 
show the reactionary character of theories of land confiscation. But 
the main purpose isan exposition of the theory of bonded insurance. 
The book defines a system which, if found organically practicable, will 
enable men to carry insurance always without sacrifice of personal re- 
sources, and sometimes with considerable gain. This is promised by 
giving to the person contributing to an insurance fund the increase to 
be drawn from investment and profits. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


[These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof. ] 


FOR EXCHANGE. —Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 
WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 
WANTED.—A clean copy of Rev. William Smith’ s British Diatoms, and Scamidl s Atlas of the 
Diatomacez. JAMES B SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 
WANTED.—To give diatom slides and cash, or either, for copy of Van Heurck’s work on diatoms, 
bound or unbound. ALBERT MANN, Jr., Newark, N. J. 
CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 


WANTED.—Specimens of rocks for slicing and grinding into sections; also bones and teeth of differ- 
ent animals, diatoms 7 s7¢w on alge, diatomaceous and polycistinous earths, ocean soundings, etc., etc. 
Liberal exchange in microscopic slides or cash. 

ARTHUR J. a) Y, 63 Burlington St., Manchester, Eng. 


TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, head, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of p. trified wood—Chalcedony—and native turquois-, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand *‘ Burt’s Solar Compass’”’ complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second- hand, econ condensers, polarizers, stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. . SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 


- ae 5 
Le 7 a oe 2 Py 
> 
ny, i = ‘o be . 
5 
= 
ri 
- 
L 
I 
~ 
! 
. . 
. 
Fe 
: : 
« . 
. 
4 
~ * 
. 
» 
. 
* 
< - 
. mill a= 
\ F : 
. + = | & * 
' 
a % 
G-. 
: ; i 
mp P 
n ' 
6 
= 
’ 
i 
4 3 
ter *% : 


Fig2 Fig Fig @ 
“o, 8 50.0 oer 
e 8 foo 990 
oo" O° g 9 
“C00000° ; 
Fig 7 Fig 8 fig 9 
VE: oe 
o\ {oO aN ee 
) Ht C@ 
ro) ; ex ORE 
© & Ges 
oO 
figl2 


Figh3 Fig l4 / S 


BACTERIA. 


THE AMERICAN 
MONTHLY 


a OP ICAL JOURNAL 


Wotek “MAY, ee No. 5. 


All communications for this ee, nal, whether ieee to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Ameri- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box “63 o, W ashington, DNC: 

European subscriptions may be sent direc “ly to the above address accompanied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Tribner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, ‘London, ac mm a a by the ye fk Be ice ges his shillin LoS. 


Contagious Diseases in Animals.* 
By Proressor JAMES LAW, 
ITHACA, N. Y. 

The study of contagion to-day is essentially the study of the work of 
parasites, or minute living beings that subsist on other living beings. 
The contagious, fevers of man arava animals are now nearly all lemons 
strated to be the result of the propagation in the system of the most 
minute of these living beings, the bacteria. These, as found in the 
body, are the simplest of all vital organisms, being in the form of sim- 
ple cells or filaments, straight, bent, or spiral, though they do grow into 
other forms in different cases when removed from Ane animal economy. 
To give an idea of their extreme minuteness, I may say that if 15,000 of 
the Bactertum termo were placed end to end they would form a chain 


DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATE. 


Fig. 1. Micrococcus vaccine (cow-pox). | Fig. 12. Micrococcus of rinderpest (Russian cattle 
«« 2. Streptococcus (spherical bacteria in a | plague) and blood globules. 
chain). ‘© 13. Diplococcus of swine plague. 
«« 3. Diplococcus (spherical pene in pairs). “© 44. Bacillus of swine plague. 
eee oceees ec pucrical bacteria, in ss 15. Bacillus anthracis (from blood of infected 


groups or clusters) 


¢« 5. Macrococcus monas (large spherical bac- guinea pig) and blood globules. 


terfum). *« 16. Bacillus anthracis (after three hours cul- 
*€ 6. Micrococcus uree (infecting inflammation tivation in broth) and blood globules. 
of bladder). “© ya Bacillus anthracis formi 
; é 9 7- acillus anthracis orming spores. 
‘ 7. Pneumococcus(bacteriaoflobularinflam- |  ,, TMP aciomec ses miniin mouseitwo 


mation of the lungs). 


«© 8. Micrococcus pasteuri (septicemia in rab- species, large and small) and blood 


bit from inoculation with saliva of man). globules: 
«© 9. Micrococcus of fowl cholera and oval ** 1g. Bacillus tuberculosis and blood globules. 
blood glubules. P «« 20. Bacillus tuberculosis, in sigmoid colony, 
*« xo. Bacterium termo (of ordinary putrefac- from kidney. 
tion). i 
21. Vibrio. 


«11. Micrococcus of lung plague of cattle (con- we f . 
tagious pleuro-pneumonia) and blood 22. Spirillum of ‘‘ surra’’ (equine relapsing 
globules. fever) and blood globules. 


This plate has been kindly loaned by Mr. J. S. Woodward, Secretary of the Society. 


* From Tyansactions of the N. Y. State Agricultural Society. 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


98 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [May, 


extending about exactly one inch. On the table they are mainly shown 
in company with the red blood globules so that their relative ale may 
be appreciated. The blood globules are individually about z5'5, of an 
inch in diameter. 

Bacteria, like other living beings, perform all the functions of organic 
life; they feed, excrete, multiply then numbers, and produce elaborate 
chemical products, i in many cases of a highly poisonous nature. ‘Those 
living in free air, and feeding upon carbo-hydrates, produce, as a rule, 
little or no elaborately poisonous products; those living in confined 
spaces apart from air, and feeding upon flesh-forming or nitrogenous 
compounds, tend to produce poisons more or less deadly. These are 
the bacteria that are fitted to live in the animal body, to poison it and to 
create diseases of a contagious nature. Then, again, difterent bacteria 
require for their active life different amounts of air, heat, light, and 
electricity, and if these are widely different from those found in the 
animal body, they cannot live in ‘that body and become a contagion. 
Others require special chemical conditions of their food, and if they c can- 
not find these in the animal body, they cannot fix themselves upon it as 
parasites. As an example, most of animal juices are alkaline or neu- 
tral, and can only maintain bacteria that normally live in alkaline or 
neutral solutions. If a germ requiring an acid liquid is introduced, it 
can only survive in the acid contents of the stomach or large intestines, 
or in the acid secretions of the skin or open sores. For the same reason 
the alkaline-feeding bacteria, if taken with food, are, to a large extent, 
destroyed in passing through the acid stomach, which ‘hus acts asa 
protective sentinel, keeping “euard over the intestinal canal. It is only 
during disease’ of the SConriche or in the absence of its acid contents, 
that these bacteria pass in scatheless. When, however, the bacteria 
have formed spores, these, like dried seeds, may safely pass through the 
acid stomach and germinate in the intestine. 

Again, bacteria are the common scavengers of the universe. We 
have long known that plants and animals reciprocate with each other 
in producing each the food required by the other. Plants take up sim- 
ple soluble and gaseous materials and build them up into complex com- 
pounds fit for the food of animals. Animals, on their part, break down 
these complex compounds, and furnish them again to the plants in the 
simple forms available for their food. In the case of carbon dioxide, 
ammonia, and some other forms this is true, but after this there is still 
a large body of animal products that are not soluble in water and not 
available for plant food. Those it is the function of the bacteria to 
transform and prepare. They are the cooks of the vegetable creation. 
Every fermenting manure heap, every rotting vegetable and animal, is 
a gr eat kitchen in which this preparation of vegetable food is going on. 
But for the constant beneficent work of the bacteria the w orld would 
soon be choked up with the undecomposed remains of plantsand animals, 
and vegetable and animal life must alike perish. They are at once the 
scavengers, caterers, and cooks of nature, then, and as no living beings 
are so widely distributed, so no living beings are more Rencncenta in 
their work. When covered or preserv red foods fail to keep it is because 
we have failed to kill all the bacteria ; when we make bread, beer, wine, 
sauerkraut, and other common products, we harness these infinitesimal 
beings and employ them for our uses. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 99 


This much it is only fair to say for these most minute but much 
dreaded beings—taking ‘them all in all, they do far more good than harm. 
It is only a ion that can enter the animal body, feed upon its elements, 
and produce disease. On these I would make one or two remarks. 

Bacteria that grow apart from free air, in nitrogenous material, hav- 
ing an alkaline ae iont can in some cases attack the animal system and 
live on it. They seem to do this mainly by virtue of two of their 
products: First, a poisonous vegetable alkaloid ; and, second, a solu- 
ble ferment or solvent of the mae ena making up ‘the animal tissues. 

The primary attack comes from the poisonous alkaloid, which lowers 
or destroys the vitality of the cells of the lymph, blood, or tissues, so 
that they can no longer resist the chemical action of the ferment. The 
second assault is made by the ferment in dissolving the animal cells and 
tissues, and rendering them up in this condition as food for the living 
bacterium. 

It should be noted here that the living corpuscles of the blood and the 
living cells of the animal tissues are also endowed with power to pro- 
duce a ferment or digesting principle, which is also deodorizing and 
disinfectant, and which can safely dispose of any very small amount 
of bacteria poison introduced. When the virus is introduced there is 
at once set up a contest between the bacteria and their products on the 
one hand, and the animal cells and their products on the other, and, as 
in other contests, the stronger or the most advantageously situated pre- 
vails. 

But the animal cells can acquire a power of resistance to alkaloid and 
other poisons, and thereafter resist any moderate dose. Thus many of 
you have acquired a comparative immunity from the poisonous action 
of nicotine, the deadly alkaloid of tobacco ; and other men have acquired 
immunity as regar ds alcohol, opium, ether, chloral, arsenic, or other 
poison. This immunity is acquired by accustoming the animal cells to 
bear the poison in question, and this is the explanation of the fact that 
many contagious diseases will not readily occur a second time in the 
same individual. 

As regards the reproduction of bacteria, many of them can double 
their numbers every hour when placed in the best conditions for their 
activity. In such circumstances, then, a single bacterium would in 
twenty-four hours produce no less than 16,777,220. At the end of 
forty-eight hours the offspring would amount to 281,500,000,000, and 
would fill a pale pint measure —all produced in two days from a single 
germ measuring <3h00 Of an inch in length. The figures are easily 
tested. It is the old story of selling the Pane at a cent toe the first nail 
in his shoe, two cents for the Seconds and so on, doubling the value each 
time to the thirty-second nail. Whoever has worked out this problem 
will not be surprised at this marvellous increase in the bacteria. 

Fortunately, however, bacteria can rarely so propagate themselves ; 
they meet with all sorts of drawbacks, and thus, in spite of their enor- 
mous fertility, the survivors are, in a general way, only enough to keep 
up a fair balance in nature. The disease- -producing bacteria, however, 
have no such claim upon our forbearance, and in these the enormous 
fecundity is a fact that we cannot too closely contemplate. Some, like 
the bacillus of tuberculosis and glanders , propagate themselves slow oh : 
but the great majority of the bacteria causing animal plagues will, 


100 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [May, 


favorable circumstances, double their numbers hourly, so that you can 
judge for yourselves whether it is best to preserve infected animals, the 
systems of which are the spheres of this extraordinary fecundity of 
poison, or to obliterate the system, the poison, and the rapidly g growing 
danger at one blow. It is manifest that the limits naturally set to the 
propagation and increase of one of these plague-bacteria are only set 
by the number of animals that are susceptible to its attacks and within 
its reach. The greater, therefore, our live-stock possessions of a genus 
receptive of a given poison, and the more the material wealth of this 
kind at stake, the more rapid is the spread of the aes and the 
greater the aational loss. 

It also follows, without saying it, that a specific plaice bactaniaat 
unknown on this continent for the centuries since its discovery, and 
finally imported from abroad, should be stamped out remor selessly .and 
at once, whatever the temporary inconvenience and outlay. We have 
heard that the only way to root out thistles is to draw off the coat and 
eradicate them one by one by sheer manual labor. But no amount of 
labor nor effort which the individual man can apply can root out these 
bacteridean weeds that average only ;545) of an inch in length, that 
can only be seen under the highest available powers of the microscope, 
and then only after they have been deeply dyed with some bright pig- 
ment. 

Following is a partial list of the disease-producing bacteria of the farm 
animals, which give some idea of the extent of this great subject. This 
is, however, only the beginning of the animal plagues caused by para- 
sites. The fungi and animal “parasites are responsible for a long list 
beside. 

DISEASE-PRODUCING BACTERIA. 


ist. Micrococcus.—Round or ovoid cell. 
M. of cow-pox and horse-pox. 
M. of sheep-pox. 
M. of cystitis. 
M. of erysipelas. 
M. of ulcerative endocarditis. 
M. of osteo-myelitis. 
M. of lobular pneumonia (horse). 
M. of lung plague (cattle). 
M. of influenza. 
M. of suppuration. 
M. of septic wounds. 
M. of gangrenous wounds. 
M. of fowl! cholera. 
M. of diphtheria. 
Diplococcus of swine plague. 
Sarcina of the stomach. 
Sarcina of the urine. 
2d. Bactertum.—-Short rod. 
B. of blue cream. 
B. of yellow cream. 
B. of red cream. 
gd. Leptothrix.—Chain of very fine cells. 
L. of mouth and carious teeth. 
L. of abortion (cattle). 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 101 


4th. Bactltlus.—Fine filament, straight or bent. 
. of anthrax. 
. of malignant cedema (horse). 
. of glanders. 
. of tuberculosis. 
. of septicaemia. , 
. of swine plague. 
. of carious teeth. 
. of leprosy. 
5th. Vibrio. —Wavy, flexible filament. 
V. of emphysematous anthrax (black-leg). 
V. of septicemia. 
V. of cholera (comma bacillus). 
6th. Spirillum.—Spiral, rigid filament. 
S. of relapsing fever (horse). 
S. of milk-sickness. 
S. of gums and teeth (spirocheete cohni). 


acchoohecieoheokeresies) 


Actinomycosis.* 
By C. T. CALDWELL, M. D., 


WASHINGTON, D. C 


It is only within a few years that attention has been called to the dis- 
ease which bears this name, or more correctly speaking to its true char- 
acter, as distinct from osteo-sarcoma, with which it was confounded, 
until Bollinger in 1877 studied the disease in cattle, and for the first 
time described the fungus and made known the nature and cause of the 
malady. 

The disease appears to be far more common in cattle than in other 
animals, and begins usually in the alveolar processes of the jaw, where 
it may first be detected by ‘the presence of small nodular growths from 
the size of a pea to that of a walnut. These growths may be few or 
many in number. They have a tendency to spread or increase in size 
until they coalesce and form large hard tumors attached to the bone. 
This appearance led to the supposition that the disease was a form of 
osteo-sarcoma and was supposed to affect no other part than the jaw 
and no other than the bovine species. Its presence in other parts of the 
body and in other animals has since been frequently shown, although 
cattle and pigs seem to suffer most, and the jaw is the starting-point in 
a great majority of cases. Its appearance in man israre. The number 
of recorded cases from 1878, when the first case was reported, up to 
1885 had not exceeded 20 in all, most of these happening in Europe, 
no case having been reported in the United States up to that time. 
During the past three years, however, a larger number of cases have 
been found, until now the recorded cases number about 100 all told, of 
which a few have occurred in this country. 

With this brief sketch of its history let us look a little deeper into the 
subject and study more closely by the aid of our microscope the para- 
site which is the cause of this disease, ascertain if possible its nature, 


* Read at the 86th meeting of the Waskingeon Microscopical Society. 


102 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ May, 


mode of introduction into the system, and growth, and the pathological 
changes resulting from its presence. 

If we take a part of the tumor we have mentioned or a piece of tissue 
adjacent thereto, we find on examination small round bodies lying 
either singly or in groups or clusters. 

One of these bodies we will proceed to examine with the microscope 
and describe. Occupying the centre of the mass we find a thready fun- 
gus, the filaments being similar to the ordinary mycelium. ‘These 
threads have a single bulb: like termination or may branch in various 
directions, each branch being tipped with a similar enlargement at its 
extremity. Some filaments present bead-like enlargements. 

These filaments appear to be attached to the centre of the growth, 
from which they radiate, as shown in the complete fungus, giving the 
entire mass the appearance which has led to the name of actinomyces 
or ray-fungus. 

Surrounding some of these masses of fungus, and in fact all the larger 
and older ones, we find evidences of inflammation set up by the pres- 
ence of this foreign body. We have a dense layer of granulation tissue 
with some epithelioid cells and bands of fibrous finan but the giant 
cells and capsule described by some observers I have not seen. In some 
of the smallest deposits this appearance is wanting, the deposit being 
seemingly a recent event, and the inflammatory process not yet begun. 

From this last observation we are led to conclude (and this corre- 
sponds to the facts observed in the history ofrecorded cases) that this fungus 
causes inflammation and the deposit of granulation tissue, which mass 
is prone to undergo degeneration, giving rise to suppuration in the 
surrounding Gennes the small seeds ‘like masses of the fungus being 
found in the pus escaping from abscesses thus formed. These small 
particles may be seen with the unaided eye and felt with the fingers, be- 
ing of a yellowish color, about the size of millet seed, and of a cheesy 
or greasy feel. 

The questions now arise, Where does this fungus come from, and 
how does it gain admission into the system? Of the first it is sufficient 
to say that the source of supply is not known. The fungus so far has 
not been found outside the body of animals. It is proba ble, however, 
that it does exist attached to vegetable matter which is used for food by 
man and herbivorous animals, as the carnivorous animals are said to be 
exempt from its unfriendly visitations. From the fact that it usually 
attacks the jaw and finds an entrance into the system through abrasions 
of the auch carious teeth or the extraction of teeth, it has been sup- 
posed that when taken into the stomach the fungus is destroyed by the 
action of gastric juice, but if arrested in the buccal cavity and finding 
an entrance to and lodgment in the teeth or jaw, it rapidly grows and 
spreads by burrowing into neighboring tissues or by embolism to dis- 
tant pz arts of the body. There are, however, cases which cannot be ac- 
counted for in this way. Where the fungus has appeared as a primary 
deposit in kidneys, lungs, and even the brain, in such cases it is sup- 
posed that a minute particle of the fungus was taken into the lungs 
during inspiration, and gaining an entrance into the blood was carried 
to a distant organ, where it grew and developed, and caused the patho- 
logical changes which brought about its discovery in these unusual lo- 
cations. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 103 


Once implanted in the tissues there seems to be no means of arresting 
its ravages, for although much of it is carried off in pus, there is always 
an increase, as the invasion of new tissue by the fungus is constantly 
going on in advance of the suppuration, which seems to be the only 
means of getting rid of it, and this through caries of bones and multiple 
abscesses ends only in the death of fhe unfortunate victim. I will 
quote from the Annual of the Universal Medical Sciences, 1888, vol. i, 
a report of one case of primary actinomycosis of the brain : 

‘¢ Bollinger, of Munich, reports the case, which he considers unique 
(the only one out of 59 cases of actinomycosis in man): Female, age 
26 years, complained of headache one year before death. A month 
later temporary paralysis of the left abducens. Eight months later, at- 
tacks of headache, diplopia, difficult speech, choked disks ; occasionally 
loss of consciousness. ‘Temporary amelioration. Death after head- 
ache, vomiting and coma. Autopsy showed a tumor, size of a walnut, 
in the third Mentricle. apparently developed from its choroid plexus. 
The surface was smooth, and its color pale yellowish-gray. There was 
internal hydrocephalus. Microscopic examination rev ealed the usual 
appearances of actinomycotic masses. The author thinks it probable 
that the germs were absorbed with raw goats’ and cows’ milk, which the 
patient was in the habit of drinking largely ; from the intestinal tract it 
had reached the brain by screens through unknown channels. Only 
three cases of actinomycosis have been (has far observed in Bavaria.’ 

The disease is infectious, as not only will inoculations with pieces of 
the tissue or pus containing the fungus cause the disease, but cultiva- 
tions have produced the same result 

The disease has been found in the cavities of carious teeth, in the 
tonsils, and as a secondary deposit even in the cavities of the heart. 
The exact nature and botanical position of the fungus are in doubt; it 
may be the conidia form of some known species. aan the slides con- 
taining the fungus that I have here to-night I am indebted to Dr. I. 
W. Blackburn, special pathologist of the Government Hospital for the 
Insane in this city, and vice-president of this Society. The sections 
are four in number, and in reply to my inquiries as to when and where 
the case occurred, the tissue used in making the sections, and how pre- 
pared, he informs me as follows 

‘¢ The specimen of actinomycosis was found by our house steward 
on inspecting some beef bought of one of the great ‘‘ dressed beef” 
companies of our city for the use of the hospital. He rejected the 
piece and brought it to me for examination. I found it to be the so- 
called ‘*‘ knee-joint” of the fore-quarter, which was pretty extensively 
diseased. The butcher had removed some of the diseased tissue, but 
quite a mass yet remained. I recognized it by the naked eye, by the 
presence of the minute masses of fungus scattered through ‘the tissue, 
and confirmed the diagnosis by the hastily prepared specimens I was 
obliged to give you. 

‘* This is Pall the history I can give you of the case, I am sorry to say. 
It shows the care with which all dressed meats should be examined, 
though probably if wel? cooked actinomyces would be palatable and 
nutritious, and possibly perfectly safe.” 

These slides were not prepared with any special process for bringing 
out their structure, but the following note may serve to show how this 
may be done: 


104 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (May, 


A. Baranski uses picro-carmine for staining fresh preparations of acti- 
nomyces bovis. A small amount of the contents ofa yellow nodule or 
pus from the part is spread in a thin layer ona cover-glass, and dried 
in the air. The cover is then passed three times through the flame, 
care being taken not to overheat the preparation. It is then floated in 
the picro-carmine solution, or a few drops of the stain are placed on 
the cover. In two or three minutes the staining is finished. The 
cover is then carefully washed by agitating it in water or alcohol, and 
examined in water or glycerine. The actinomyces takes a yellow color, 
while the remaining structure appearsred. In this way not only the acti- 
nomyces tufts are easily distinguished, but single nodes. which are found 
scattered about in the preparation are shar ply defined from the sur- 
rounding redmass. For permanent preparations, the cover-glass should 
be dried before mounting in balsam. Sections of tissue are handled as 
usual, and are mounted either in glycerine or balsam.* 


Leferences (none prior to 1880). 


Green’s Pathology and Medical Anatomy, pp. 293-95. 

Reference Hand-book of the Medical Sciences, vol. 1, pp. 70-71. 

Annual of the Universal Medical Sciences, 1888, vol. i, p. 71; vol. 
WP 77s 

Pe by Dr. A. J. Ochsner: Chicago Med. Journal, oe vol. 
liii, No. 6, pp. 1-3; Journal Amer. Med. Assn., 1886, No. 7, pp. 
608-1o. Dr. Skerrit: Am. Journal Med. Science, Phil., 1887, & Des 
93> PP: 75-88. Dr. T. Bilroth: Ala. Med. and Surg. Journal, 1887. 
vol. ii, pp. 321-29 ; and a paper on Primary Abdominal Actinomycosis, 
N. Y. Med. Journal, vol. xlv, p. 297. 


Examining a Shellbark Hickory Bud. 
By Dr. HENRY, SHIMER, 
MOUNT CARROLL, ILL. 

Cut a longitudinal section near the middle. (A somewhat thick sec- 
tion, ;4, to 51, in., is easily cut.) Transfer it to a slide, apply glyce- 
rine with a brush; after it has pretty well soaked, drain off the super- 
fluous fluid, warm the slide, apply glycerine-jelly, or better, my new 
mounting formula: glycerine-jelly, 1 part, Farrant’s medium, 1 part, 
glycerine, 1 part. thoroughly mixed. Apply a heavy cover-glass, press 
it down a little, at length seal the edges with cement, and the result is 
_a very beautiful specimen permanently mounted. 

Examine it with a 1-inch objective, the stand being in the sunshine 
with a piece of sky-blue blotting paper over the mirror for a back- 
ground, and we have a more beautiful and instructive specimen than a 
ido Inch section made in celloidin. The arrangement of the leaves 
and the hairs are all that could be desired. Even the cellular structure 
can be studied. This process is given, not to supersede other fine 
methods, but only as an easy method to aid in the study of a beautiful 
bud. If it is a side bud it will show the origin of the bud in the side 
of the limb and its Epes to the surface. 


* The discusssion upon this paper w vill be found in the report of the Washington Microscopical Society 
page 119. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 105 


Economic Value of Bacteriology.* 
By B. M. BOLTON, M. D. 


PROFESSOR OF PHYSIOLOGY, HYGIENE AND BACTERIOLOGY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH CAROLINA, 


In what way have the results of bacteriological investigations been 
applied to matters of every-day life, and what can we expect from 
them in the future? Of course it is interesting, scientifically, to know 
that infectious diseases, decomposition and fermentation are caused by 
minute plants, and even if we could make no application of our know i- 
edge, the satisfaction of studying these facts amply rewards the student. 
But ride from purely scientific interest, it is evidently of great use in 
matters of common every-day life. In the first place, the ieeneat that 
has been derived to the husbandman has been very great. After 
Cagniard, Latour and Schwann established the fact that fermentation 
is due to micro-organisms, Pasteur devoted himself to the study of 
this phenomenon, end his results have saved the French people many 
thousands of dollars. He found that the so-called diseases of wine are 
due to bacteria. The souring of wine and the bitter taste which for- 
merly caused great loss to the wine-growers of France are no longer 
met with, for by heating the wine so as to kill the bacteria and then 
sealing it up it does et sour or turn bitter. The silk industry of 
France is equally indebted to Pasteur. He discovered the remedy for 
an infectious disease which threatened to break up silk growing. 
Pasteur also found that by the use of pure yeast the fermentation of been P 
the success of which was largely a matter of chance, renders it possible 
for the brewers to rely upon ‘their results. Although Pasteur’s method 
is a great improvement upon the old method of “brewing, it has not 
found as universal application as that introduced by Hansen. In Hol- 
land and Germany the brewers all use Hansen’s yeast, which means 
that they use pnre cultures of yeast fungus, w hich Hansen and others 
found to make the best sort of beer. Tetead of the uncertainty attend- 
ing the manufacture of beer, which was formerly a source of great loss 
to the brewers, they have no uneasiness upon this score at the present 
day. Impure yeast causes beer to have a disagreeable taste. 

Bacteriological investigation has therefore been of advantage to the 
wine, beer and silk industries, but the benefit in the prevention of in- 
fectious diseases is still greater. It is not so much in the treatment of 
each individual case, though even here much good has resulted, but in 
the prevention of the spread of disease that the advantage is incalculable. 
If an animal becomes sick, the bacteriologist can say, in many cases, 
positively whether it is an infectious ioeaee or not, and can isolate the 
sick animal, so preventing the spread of the disease. It is of great im- 
portance to diagnose the first case. Some of you, doubtless, remember 
reading of several cases of cholera which occurred on board a vessel in 
the port of New York about a year ago. A bacteriologist was im- 
mediately sent for and declared the disease to be genuine Asiatic cholera, 
and thus prevented the patients from being allowed to infect other per- 
sons. The German government recognize > the i importance of diagnosing 
the first case to Shei an extent that they required a number cf marine 
and army surgeons to go to Berlin and receive instruction from Koch 
in his pets for studying the cholera bacterium. 


* From a report of the Department of Agriautare of South Carolina. 


106 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [May, 


The greatest benefit which has been derived from bacteriology is prob- 
ably in the prevention and treatment of boils, abscesses and wounds. 
All boils and suppurating wounds which are ordinarily met with are 

caused by certain sorts of bacteria. It seems to be true that certain 
chemical substances under peculiar circumstances also cause suppuration 
but in every-day life the pus which the surgeon or physician meets with is 
caused by bacteria. If now a substance is known which kills these 
bacteria and at the same time does no injury itself, then there will be 
very little trouble in avoiding suppuration, as it is called. In the old 
days of surgery, it used to be “thought necessary to have a lot of matter 
come from a wound, but now-a- -days if ista disgrace to any surgeon to 
have suppuration under ordinary circumstances. All sorts San opera- 
tions, from cutting off a toe or finger up to cutting out the breast or a 
hole in the abdomen, are now perfor med, and in no case well managed 
isthere more than afew dropsof pus. Sir Joseph Lister was the first to ) at- 
tempt what is called aseptic or antiseptic surgery. He used very suc- 
cessfully carbolic acid to wash out the wounds he made and then ban- 
daged them with many layers of carbolized gauze and cotton batting. 
But Koch found out that corrosive sublimate, even in very weak solu- 
tions, is much better for killing bacteria, or in other words, is a better 
antiseptic than carbolic acid. S65 at the present day corrosive sublimate 
plays the main part in the treatment of all sorts of wounds and abscesses. 
If a boil is just started, it can be aborted by injecting corrosive sublimate 
into it. If an abscess is fully formed, it can be rapidly cured by using 
solutions of corrosive sublimate. 

Where surgeons have kept up with the advances in medicine in this 
respect there is a great deal less suffering and fewer deaths. In the best 


fon) 
hospitals there are no longer such scourges as blood poisoning, lock-jaw, 


etc. So the study of bacteriology has Been of incalculable benefit if we 
consider this point alone. Since the introduction of antiseptic surgery 
lock-jaw never occurs from an operation in the hands of those surgeons 
who keep abreast with the times. Lock-jaw of new-born infants has 
been banished where the proper use of aseptics is resorted to. If a new- 
born infant dies of lock-jaw at the present day, the attending physician 
is entirely to blame. These precautions are much more easily carried 
out in a hospital, and it would be much better to have hospitals in 
America as they have in Europe, so that our dwelling-houses would no 
longer be infected with disease and where the surgeon could do his 
saan properly. 

Although many important processes and many terrible diseases are 
caused by bacteria, still weare able to control their action to a large 
extent, making them do useful work on the one hand, and prev enting 
their injurious Nefieets onthe other. I have stated that by the introduc- 
tion of corrosive sublimate solution in the treatment of wounds the 
surgeon is enabled to perform the most serious operations with abso- 
lute certainty that he will not produce gangrene, blood poisoning or 
even suppuration. But the use of disinfectants, as they are called, i 
not only beneficial in surgery but in other cases as well. And al- 
though corrosive sublimate is the best disinfectant known, it cannot al- 
ways be applied. In some cases it is better to use steam. 

In many cities in Germany they have large steamers constructed so 
as to subject clothing, bedding, etc., which have been used by persons 
suffering from small- -pox or other infections diseases, to steaming. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 107 


This use of steam as a disinfectant is of great use, and in most cases 
does no damage whatever to clothes, etc. As soon as the articles are 
removed from the steamer they are spread out and dry of themselves al- 
most immediately. Such articles as feather beds are dried in an oven 
built for the purpose. Leather is ruined by steaming, but shoes and 
other articles made of leather are not injured by corrosive sublimate. 
In the hospitals in Berlin, in Germany, the clothing and everything else 
used by a person suffering from an infectious disease are either Sion 
ized by steam or with corrosive sublimate ; and the expensive process 
of burning up infected clothing, etc., is no longer resorted to. 

Many Banee applications of bacteriology to ats of every-day life 
might be enumerated, but these eden are enough to show that this 
study has already assumed very great importance. It is not going too 
far to say that the benefit which “has been derived and the possible ad- 
vantages in the future can scarcely be over-estimated. Men of all 
nationalities are flocking to Germany every year for the purpose of 
studying bacteria, so gr eat has the importance of this branch become. 
It was predicted at HEL that this noise about bacteria would soon die 
out; that it would be found out that their importance was greatly ex- 
aggerated. Just the opposite is the case. Instead of interest lagging, 
the more bacteria are studied the more important they appear. 

Although we are indebted to Pasteur for much valuable work, and 
his opinion is of the greatest worth, he has probably gone a step too 
far in his preventive Secnintons. He has pstabliened the fact that 
it is possible to vaccinate for certain diseases and render the animal so 

vaccinated immune, but the methods are not perfect enough as yet to 
allow of introduction into general use. It is to be hoped that such will 
finally be the case. but at present it is a matter of purely scientific value. 
The time may come when we shall be able to vaccinate for malignant 
pustule, chicken cholera, swine plague, etc., just as we vaccinate for 
small-pox now-a-days, but in some cases, at least, it is questionable 
whether this will ever be accomplished. Of course much the best way 
to guard against infectious diseases is to get rid of the cause of infection, 
and the study of bacteria has given us valuable means with which to 
accomplish this end. It has already been stated that Koch has found 
corrosive sublimate a very potent disinfectant. Now, how would we 
apply this in case of an epidemic? Suppose an epidemic of chicken 
cholera were to break out. As we know of no trustworthy means of 
curing the disease, we should try to limit it as much as possible. In 
the eet place, the fowls should be confined in the chicken house where 
this is feasible, and every few days the walls and floor should be scoured 
with lye and then wiped out with a solution of corrosive sublimate. 
The sublimate should be allowed to remain several hours, and the walls 
and floor again scoured with lye or soz ap. Thecorrosive sublimate solu- 
tion need not be stronger than 60 grains or § dram to the gallon of water 
This is a very weak pation, put DoE course it must not Be left carelessly 
around so that any one would be likely to drink any of it, as it isa 
deadly poison. It has been recommended to color the solution with a 
small quantity of some cheap dye stuff, so that it would not be mistaken 
for water. It would be better to have two hen houses. to disinfect 
them with the corrosive sublimate solution and transfer the fowls every 
few days from one to the other, disinfecting every time as soon as the 


108 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [May, 


fowls are removed in the manner already described. Our hen houses 
and stables should be so constructed that they could be wiped over 
with a solution of corrosive sublimate and leave no corners unwiped. 
There should be no sharp corners where dust can accumulate and 
which are difficult to reach. If, in spite of disinfection, the fowls all 
die, the house should be thoroughly scoured with soap and water and 
corrosive sublimate solution applied liberally and allowed to remain a 
day or so, and again scoured and again disinfected several times before 
other fowls are Bilow edto goin. Ifthe yard is also infected, it should 
be liberally doused with freshly slaked lime. It would be more effectual 
to use corrosive sublimate even for disinfecting the yard, but that weuld 
hardly be advisable. Freshly slaked lime is a good disinfectant, but it 
must be applied to every part of the yard. The fences and ground i in 
every nook and corner should receive a thorough drenching. Not only 
in chicken cholera, but in other infectious diseases the same means 
should be used. 

The fact has been mentioned that lock-jaw does not occur any more 
after surgical operations. If the wounds in animals are treated at once 
with corrosive sublimate or strong carbolic acid. there need be no fear 
of lock-jaw. Ifa horse has runa nail in his foot, the wound should be 
thoroughly washed out with a strong solution of corrosive sublimate 
and stopped up with a plug of cotton soaked in corrosive sublimate 
solution. The bacteria of lock-jaw are very wide-spread. They have 
been found in garden earth, upon splinters of dirty wood, in old rags 
and in the dust of rooms. 

Consider now the part played by bacteria in decomposition. As you 
already know, the chief supply of food for the higher plants is furnished 
by decomposed animal and vegetable matter. The higher plants can- 
not make use of elaborate food —they can only assimilate such simple 
bodies as the nitrates, etc. Complicated substances, such as animal 
and vegetable matter, must be broken up before they can serve as food. 
Now these complicated substances are just the things which form the 
best food for bacteria, and bacteria decompose them so that the higher 
plants can use them as food. It is, therefore, evident that bacteria are 
necessary to the higher plants. and without them there would soon be 
no life upon the earth, for animals are all ultimately dependent for food 
upon plants. So bacteria prepare the food for the higher plants, the 
higher plants supply food to animals, and animals and plants supply 
food to the bacteria. For the sake of illustration, take the nitrogen 
found in various albuminous substances. It amounts to 16 or 18 per 
cent. in different cases, but as long as it is contained in the albumen it 
is useless to the higher plants. The bacteria feed upon these albuminous 
substances and liberate the nitrogen in the form of ammonia and nitric 
acid, the only compounds of nitrogen which the higher plants are capa- 
ble of using. The higher plants require nitrogen in the form of these 
two compounds. Now here is a formula: eas reps No,, showing that 
this substance called cere4rzz contains nitr ogen, but the nitrogen is 
held so closely by the C, H and O that the higher plant could not use 
it at-all if it were not liberated. Nitrogen is used merely as an ex- 
ample. What is said applies equally well to other substances be- 
sides. Thus the mineral salts are also liberated from complicated 
compounds by bacteria. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 109 


Now, if decomposition is caused by bacteria it is important to find out 
whether all bacteria cause it or whether there are only certain kinds 
which do so. Also, whether they do so under all circumstances. It 
has been discovered that all sorts of bacteria do not produce decomposi- 
tion, at least, not entire decomposition, and those which do require 
certain conditions. Prof. Wollny states that those bacteria which are 
concerned in the process of decomposition require abundance of air and 
moisture, andalso warmth. Applying this knowledge to every-day life, 
we see it is necessary to keep vegetable and animal matter moist and 
warm and allow abundance of air to prepare it asa fertilizer. It fol- 
fows that if your compost heap is too dry it will not decompose, and if 
it is too cold it decomposes very slowly. If the compost heap is too 
wet it will not thoroughly decompose for reasons to be given presently. 
For the same reason, crops which are turned under have to be kept 
moist and warm and allowed to have plenty of air. Of course the 
exact preparation of the compost of the soils which are turned under 
must be varied to suit each case. If soil is sandy, the crop should be 
turned thoroughly under and the earth above it rolled so as to retain as 
much moisture and heat as possible. With clay land of course the 
opposite course is indicated. Again, if a compost pile is too much 
packed to allow access of air, it should be opened up; at the same time 
it must not be too loose, otherwise it will dry out too much and loose 
heat. 

So we have to bear in mind that the bacteria which prepare the food 
for our crops will only do so when they have the conditions favorable 
to their growth. If the conditions are unfavorable they either do their 
work imperfectly, or they are supplanted by other bacteria which split 
up vegetable and animal matter into substances which are for the most 
part of no use to plants as food. This takes place when the air is par- 
tially or wholly cut off. Ifa crop is turned under and the air is not al- 
lowed free access there will be very little benefit derived, and in some 
cases even injury to the soil may result. It can readily happen ina clay 
soil that the earth may become so packed that the air is excluded. 
Even in a sandy soil the pores may become so clogged with water that 
the air is kept out. 

Pasteur first called attention to the fact that there are two kinds of 
bacteria, one not requiring free access of air, and the other unable to 
grow in full oxygen. To repeat: those which require the presence of 
free oxygen cause decomposition, and those growing without oxygen 
cause only partial decomposition. 

But besides the influence exerted by the presence or absence of oxygen 
there are other things which influence the growth of bacteria. Certain 
metallic salts peice w ith it. The concentrated solutions of common 
salt act in this way. Corrosive sublimate, which is a salt of mercury, 
even in very dilute solutions kills bacteria. The same is true, to a 
greater or less extent, of mineral acids or other substances. 

So a soil must not only have abundance of moisture, warmth, and 
air, but it must also be free from substances injurious to bacteria. This 
can be tested even without a chemical analysis, by simply taking cul- 
tures derived from the soil, and seeing w hether the bacteria mom them 
grow in the soil to be examined. This is a more direct test than a 
chemical examination. 

Not only do these principles underlie the process of decomposition, 


110 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [May, 


but they also find application in the opposite direction, namely, in 
preserving perishable articles from becoming decomposed. Meats, 
vegetz ables, and fruits are kept from spoiling in various ways. 

. They can be heated up to a temperature which kills the the bacteria, 
er then sealed up so as to prevent any bacteria from getting in. 
This method is employed in the ordinary process of canning. The 
meats, vegetables, or fruits are put into cans, which are then heated up 
to the boiling point of water or higher, and then sealed up. In actual 
practice the cans containing the meats or other contents are nearly 
sealed before they are heated, all except a small opening in one end, 
which is closed with a drop of solder after the cans have been heated 
long enough to kill the bacteria. But instead of sealing the substances 
up in cans they can be preserved by stopping up the vessel containing 
them with cotton, as with a tube of rutrient agar. Most bacteria are 
killed by a temperature much below the boiling point of water. Still, 
certain sorts of bacteria have the power of forming so-called spores 
which are very resistent. It has been recently discovered that there are 
several kinds of bacteria in the ground which form spores so resistent 
that they can be boiled several hours without being killed. 

2. Meats, vegetables, etc., are also preserved by ‘dr ying. This needs 
no further explanation, for moisture is essential to the growth of micro- 
organisms. 

3. The addition of certain substances which are injurious to bacteria 
is also often employed. Concentrated solutions of salt, that is to say, 
brine, prevents the growth of bacteria. Other substances, such as 
salicylic acid, copperas and a great number of other things either kill 
bacteria or prevent their growth, and consequently may be used as 
preservatives. The most effectual of all is corrosive sublimate. The 
great objection to this method of preserving substances for food is that 
most of the germicides, as they are called, are injurious to health, and 
many of them are very poisonous. Of course this objection does not 
hold in the case of brine. 

4. Articles are preserved on ice, but generally for a short time only, 
as this is an expensive method. It is hardly worth while to explain the 
principle of this method, that bacteria require warmth in order to grow. 
The study of bacteria has thus led to a clearer understanding of the 
way in which the food is prepared for the higher plants on the one 
hand, and the preservation of perishable articles on the other. It has 
led to the prevention of many infectious diseases of animals and plants 
and an improvement in wine making and brewing. 


The Botanical Preparations of Walter White. 
By CHAS. W. SMILEY. 

Though not pretending to take the place of objects mounted in the 
usual way, yet, being enclosed in a transparent envelope, they are 
available for immediate examination, either without or with magnifica- 
tion—in many cases even with the higher powers of the microscope. 

Many of these preparations will he found figured in Strasburger’s 

‘ Hand-book of Practical Botany,” as wellas in ‘+ Thome’s Text- Book A 
and ** Sach’s Hand-book.”’ 

Strasburger says: ‘* The study of vegetable structure is especially 
favorable as an initiation into the use of the microscope; and any one 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. Lila 


whose future career will require command over this instrument should 
commence with the study under the microscope of vegetable anatomy.’ 

The following items from the catalogue will give some idea of the 
objects prepared : 

Orchid leaf. Fibro spiral cells. 
4. Elder pith. Pitted parenchyma. 

19. Yew. Isolated wood cells. 

21. Cinchona bark. Thickened bast cells fusiform. 

27. Brake fern. Scalariform vessels. 

53. Pampas grass. Closed vescular bundles. 

59. Ivy. Resin cells. 

73. Horse chestnut. Petiole. Sphcraphides. 

75. Mistletoe. Thickened cuticle cells. 

99. Eucalyptus. Oil glands in leaf. 

134. Begonia. Axile placentation. 
161. Wheat. Starch. 

In many cases the objects have been stained, either singly or doubly, 
and some stained three years ago have not faded: Their very low cost 
commends them to every erident of biology or collector of microscopic 
objects. The polariscope assists in bringing out the details of struc- 
ture. 

They may be mounted in either resinous media (damar, benzol- 
balsam), or glycerine, or glycerine jelly, the former being the easier 
for a beginner to manage, while the latter, though more trouble, shows 
structure better. It is Well to have the same object mounted in both 
ways. 

Mr. White’s instructions for mounting are as follows: 

es Carefully separate the enclosing films, and remove the object. If 
for resinous media, soak in spirit of turpentine till clear, rinse in a fresh 
portion of the same, then drain, transfer to the coveror slide, and finish 
in the usual way. For glycerine: If the object be oily, first wash out 
the oil with strong methylated spirit till clear, transfer toa mixture of 
glycerine and water, equal parts, in which let it remain an hour or two, 
then mount. 

‘¢ Minute objects, such as isolated cells, should be transferred on the 
point of a scalpel to a slide (or cov er), and separated with a needle in 
a drop of spirit; then, if for glycerine, mount while still moist ; but if 
for resinous media, allow to dry, then moisten with a drop of turpen- 
tine before applying the medium. Spiral and other vessels, and long 
fibre cells, which mat together, should be soaked in a drop of weak 
spirit, and a few of the most perfect picked out under a simple lens.” 

Professor Seaman was the first in this country to import samples of 
White’s preparations. He tells us that he can recommend them without 
qualification. A Boston friend who sent for 10 as specimens immedi- 
ately wrote back: ‘* The preparations received are exceptionally good. 
I enclose $5, for which select and send me a large assortment.” 

Another writer says: ‘‘ The sections are much better than I looked 
for at the price. They are very good. Please send me zo more.’ 

The orders sent in during March and April twice exhausted our sup- 
ply, but all have now been. “supplied. If any have failed to receive their 
quota they should make it known. Mr. White has been extremely 
gratified with the more than cordial reception his work has met with 
in America. 


112 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [May, 


MEDICAL MICROSCOPY.* 


The Etiology of Diphtheria.—A valuable paper with the above 
title, by Dr. Samuel N. Nelson, of Boston, appears in the jour. Am. 
Med. ‘Ass’n for April 6. The paper consists partly of citations of au- 
thorities and partly of records of experiments, both tending to prove 
the bacterial nature of diphtheritic contagion. There are still many 
who deny the contagiousness of diphtheria, and who would, of course, 
deny that its bacterium was discoverable. To such we commend a 
perusal of Dr. Nelson’s paper, and particularly the part which records 
the following experiment : 

Sterilized beef-bouillon was inoculated with pseudo-membrane from 
a child who died of diphtheria. The culture was carried to the sixth 
generation; guinea pigs were inoculated with the sixth culture, and the 
pigs developed diphtheria. Further, on the third day after dissecting 
the diseased pigs, the doctor himself was attacked with diphtheria. 

The Structure of Dentine.—Mr. F. J. Bennett read a paper 
recently at the Odontological Society on ‘* Certain Points con- 
nected with the Structure of Dentine.” Mr. Bennett employed 
a new. and what may in future prove a valuable, method of de- 
calcification, namely, by glycerine. The idea was suggested by 
some papers by Dr. Crd, in which it was shown that glass, mother of 
pearl, ivory, and other substances became slowly etched by immersing 
them in a solution of subcarbonate of potash in glycerine. Mr. Bennett 
applied this solution to the dental tissues, and in the course of experi- 
mentation was surprised to find that precisely the same results could be 
obtained by using glycerine alone, and thenceforward confined himself 
to the use of this reagent. His method of procedure was as follows: 
1. Freshly-extracted teeth were ground and polished sufficiently thin to 
allow of microscopical examination ; these were suspended in glycerine 
for periods of from one to six months, washed, and mounted in glycer- 
ine for examination. 2. Freshly-ground teeth were immersed whole in 
pure glycerine for similar periods, then ground, polished, and mounted 
as before. 3. Whole teeth were placed in extremely dilute solutions of 
glycerine, the strength of which was daily increased until pure glycer- 
ine was used ; the specimens were then kept in this for one or two months. 
It is interesting to note that cementum which is poorest in inorganic mat- 
ter is most readily acted on by glycerine. Thus treated, dentine, espec- 
ially that portion nearest the pulp and that newly formed, shows very 
distinctly the outlines of the dentinal tubules, and the matrix, which is 
generally stated to be absolutely structureless, is apparently made up of 
superimposed layers of membranes, with a number of stellate cells. The 
tubules perforate these layers, and can be seen in some sections to com- 
municate with or arise from the cells. In the discussion which ensued, 
Dr. Ord, referring to the cells, said he could not express an opinion un- 
til the specimens had been examined by polarized light to see whether 
the cells were organic spheroids or inorganic matter, suggesting that 
the appearances might be due to a rearrangement of the earthy matter. 
—Lancet, Jan.,’S9. 


* This department is conducted by F. Blanchard, M. D. 


1589.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 113 


BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


Development of Macrospores of Isoetis lacustris L.—Prof. 
Vines, in a communication to the Royal Society of London, January 
31, concer ning Isoetes macrospores, says that the protoplasm contains 
large quantities of oil and starch, and is provided with a large nucleus, 
in which are imbedded certain bodies, which appear yellow i in prepa- 
rations stained with hematoxylin, but as to whose nature it is not at 
present possible to speak definitely. During germination hematoxylin 
fails to reveal the presence of a nucleus, and the cytoplasm at this period 
stains so uniformly and deeply that it is possible that the nuclear substance 
may be diffused through it. It is when stained thus deeply that the first 
indications of cell formation appear. The mass of protoplasm seems to 
be traversed by ‘‘ cracks,’ which divide it into a few large and isolated 
parts, and it is in the direction of these cracks that the wall of the new 
cells first appears. Prof. Vines infers that the cracking of the proto- 
plasm is due to changes which have already occurred in the protoplasm 
preparatory to the formation of cell-walls. After the formation of the 
cell-walls the nucleus again appears distinctly in each cell. 

hee fiect of eirdling a tree.—The American Fournal of Sctence 
(vol. xxxvii, p- 79) cites from the Caxadian Record of Sctence the ac- 
count of a pine tree that has lived a number of years (probably 15) after 
having been completely girdled. The circu mference of the tree above the 
girdling is 26.5 inches, while below it is only 19.5. While the cambium 
layer above the ring is in a perfectly normal condition, below it is dead 
for some inches. The foli: age shows signs of decaying health. 

Assimilation of chlorophyll- bearing cells.— Th. Bokomy of 
Erlangen is also reported (same citation) as having found that the as- 
similating cells of spirogyra are capable of assimilating methyl-alde- 
hyde, methyl- -alcohol, and glycerin. Formic aldehyde killed the proto- 
plasm. This is of interest since, according to Baeyer’s hypothesis, car- 
bon dioxide, under the influence of chlorophyll acted on by sunlight, is 
converted into carbon monoxide, which takes up a molecue of water, 
converting it thereby into formic aldehyde, which, in the presence of 
free alkalies, can be changed at once to sugar. 

Peripatus.—Mr. Arthur Dendy reports (Wature, v. xxxix, p. 366) 
a new species of peripatus found in Victoria. Mr. Adam Sedgwick, 
however, in a subsequent issue (p. 412) doubts the distinctness of this 
species on account of the great variation in the known species of this 
exceedingly interesting genus. Mr. S. reports peripatus also from Car- 
silis, New South aaled 

Deteriorated air.—M. Th. Schloesing, in a communication to the 
Paris Academy of Sciences, claims that the injurious effects of breathing 
exhaled air are not due to the presence of carbon dioxide, but to 
other substances given off by the lungs during respiration, and espe- 
cially in the cases ‘of person suffering from pulmonary diseases. Tests 
made by Brown Sequerd and d’ Arsenval proved that air containing 20 
per cent. of carbon dioxide can be breathed for one or two hours with- 
out any marked inconvenience or lasting consequences, whereas air ex- 
haled from tuberculous lungs may oe fatal even in very small doses 


* This department is conducted by Prof. fj. H. Pillsbury. 


114 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ May, 


to lower animals, in most cases producing death within twenty-four 
hours. 


Cholera and drinking water.—F. G. McKean, chief engineer in 
the United States Navy, states that during ten days in 1885 nine hun- 
dred persons died of cholera on the island Takashima, in Japan, and 
that the disease often appears on the island. Suspicion was drawn to 
the drinking water, which was brought from the mainland. During 
1888 the use of this water for drinking purposes was abandoned, and 
distilled water was used instead. Although cholera prevailed on the 
neighboring islands, Takashima was entirely exempt. This exemption 
may have een a coincidence ; still, it is more than probable, from our 
knowledge of this disease, that the purity of the drinking water is to be 
credited with the immunity which the population of the island enjoyed. 
To be absolutely certain of this will, however, require more extended 
observation.—Sczence. 


Rhizopods.—Dr. Max Werworn, of Berlin, gives in the Zeitscrhrift 
fiir wissen. Zodlogie (vol. xlvi, p. 455) a very valuable paper on the 
certain biological investigations upon several species of rhizopods. 
The first of these was to determine whether those forms which incor- 
porate grains of sand into the ectosare to form a shell-like covering are 
able to repair this covering when once it is injured. He became satisfied 
that they were not. Seeking to ascertain the origin of the cell revealed 
the fact that before the lini ion! of an individual particles of sand are 
taken into the protoplasm of the original individual to form the shell of 
the new individual. These tests were made upon difflugia. 

Rhizopods that secrete a true shell he found able to repair the shell 
to a limited extent. When the protoplasm as well as the shell was 
divided into two portions, only one portion, and that the one containing 
the nucleus, was able to rebuild its shell, although the other portion 
seemed capaple of performing all the other functions of life. 


Agricultural Experiment Stations.—We are happy to note that 
valuable experiments are being undertaken by many of the stations 
established under the Hatch bill. We have already cited from at least 
one of them, and shall be glad to do so frequently if valuable biological 
facts are reported. 


Diseases of Swine.—The Commissioner of Agriculture has ap- 
pointed a commission, consisting of Professor W liam H. Welch, of 
Johns Hopkins University, Dr. aero. Shakespere, of Philadelphia, 
and Professor T. J: Burrill, of the Univ ersity of Illinois, to investigate 
the subject of swine diseases in the United States, and the methods 
of their treatment and prev ention. 


Water Supplies Again.—The North American Review for Feb- 
ruary, in its ‘‘notes and comments,” gives some crisp points upon 
this subject, some of which are, to say the least, overstated, but many 
of which deserve consideration. 


Botanical Laboratories.—The Botanical Gazette for January, 
in continuation of its articles upon this topic, has an illustrated article 
upon the Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 115 


Report upon the Postal Club Boxes—VI. 
By QUEEN MAB. 

Box bd. One takes up the Cole Studies with a feeling of regret that 
their publication should have been suspended. ‘The text of this box, 
‘¢ Lung of Duck” has no plate, and but a few words of written descrip- 
tion. Speaking of the structure of birds it says that the bronchii do not 
subdivide with the minuteness seen in the mammals: ‘* The lungs of 
birds are covered on their ventral surface only by the peritoneal mem- 
brane, many of the principal branches run right through the lungs and 
open into large delicate walled sacs in various positions among the 
viscera, and send tubular prolongations into many of the bones ; thus 
reduciny the specific gravity of the bird and facilitating flight.” 

No. 2 is the most interesting of the Cole Studies ayien have been 
circulated for a long time, and is a transverse section, between the suckers 
of the Liver Fluke, Hasctola hepaticum. ‘This object has been selected 
because, for its size and low type of organization, it possesses a remarkably 
well developed and complex reproductive system, and enormous repro- 
ductive activity, and to practical agriculture especially as to its disper- 
sion it has an important bearing. ‘This fluke belongs to a class of tre- 
matode worms which are parasitic, have flat unsegmented bodies, and 
none of them exceed an inch or two in length. Its economic import- 
ance is derived from its casual relation to the liver rot in sheep, which 
has to so great an extent proved fatal. This same species has been 
found in man. Other species infest various animals, as oxen, horses, 
dogs, deer, etc. Apart from its reproductive system, which occupies 
nearly the whole of the body, the organization of this Fasciola is very 
simple. The lateral margins of the body and whole posterior portion 
are occupied by a pair of very ramified vitellaria or yelk glands. A 
smaller organ, the shell gland. secretes the yellow horny reece with 
which the: eggs are inv aise The developmental cy cle through which 
the embryo passes before it attains maturity is strange. T he fluke 
presents the phenomena of alternate generation and epee cicth ina 
very complete form. Between the free egg and the vertebrate inhabit- 
ing adult fluke, a number of inter mediate “and dissimilar forms occur, 
and for the support of some of these an invertebrate host is essential. 
At least three generations are necessary to produce the original 
form. Something of this life historv is as follows : 

GENERATION A. 1. Zhe egg is laid in an oval yellow horny case, 
by the egg gland. At one end a sinuous line marks out a portion which 
serves as an operculum, and is later cut off for the liberation of the 
embryo. A hundred or two flukes inhabit the bile ducts, distending 
them enormously, hundreds of thousands of eggs are laid by a single 
fluke, and as they are discharged they pass out of the bile duct into the 
intestine and thence with the fees out of the body. The development 
of the embryo with the proper temperature requires two or three months. 
When ready to emerge, the embryo among other investments is provided 
with cilia, which however do not move until the shell is burst. 

pop Pvbe embryo. By a vigorous extension of its body the embryo 
throws off the operculum, and on contact with water on the d: amp grass 
the cilia begin to move and the embryo swims about actively. ae in- 
termediate ihost now becomes necessary, else the embryo soon dies. 
A small semi-aquatic snail, Lymmius truncatulus, has been found to be 


116 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [May, 


the intermediate host. If the embryo encounters one of these snails it 
presses its sharp head papilla against some part of the snail’s body, and 
then spinning rapidly on its axis bores into the tissues of the snail and 
finally forces its passage into the interior. 

2; “The Sporocyst. Having entered the snail the embryo loses its 
cilia etc. and grows into an elongated inert sac, called the sporocyst. 

GENERATION B. Dez velopment of Redia. Certain cells in the interior 
of the sporocyst become converted by division and differentiation into 
elongated motile bodies with collar near anterior end, and a pair of 
pedal processes near the posterior end, etc. When the redia attain a 
length of about 51, of an inch they burst through the wall of the sporocyst 
and emerge, and the wound heals up. 

free redia. The free redia passes from the part of the snail at 
Ww hich it is liberated to the other parts, especially the Leap eating its 
Way as it goes, and at last grows to the length of about 51, OE an aoe 
The snail eeliomn survives free weeks after five entrance oe the embryo. 
Germinal cells in the interior of the redia then divide as in the sporo- 
cyst and give rise to embryos, which may either develop into a second 
generation for redia, or into a form called cercaria, which is devoid of 
collar and pedal processes, but possesses a stumpy tail attached to a 
broad oval body. 

GENERATION C. 1. Development of Cercaria. The embryo, if it is 
to develop into a cercaria, comes to acquire besides a tail a bifurcated ali- 
mentary canal, etc., the tail increases in length, but no reproductive or- 

gans appear. At the sides of the body an accumulation of cells appears 
Bic gives the body a milky-white appearance when viewed by reflected 
light. 

. Free Cercarta. The cercaria escapes from the body of the redia 
by a special ‘** birth opening” at the base of the collar, and not by per- 
foration. Then by the help of its suckers and tail it crawls out of its 
host, the snail. on ‘to the wet grass. It can now swim very actively by 
lashing its tail, which is now Ener twice as long as its body , and can 
crawl by means of its suckers. 

3. The Cyst. The cercaria soon attaches itself to a leaf or some 
other object and in a few minutes much mucus is poured out from the 
whole body, together with granules from the cells just spoken of. 
During this process the tail is rapidly lashed and at last broken off. 
Then the mucus hardensand forms a cyst, in which the tailless cercaria re- 
mains inert until liberated by the solution of its cyst by the digestive 
juices of the alimentary canal of the mammalian host into which it has 
passed with the grass to which it was attached. 

4. Mature Sexual Fluke. The liberated tailless cercaria crawls by 
means of its suckers into the bile duct of the mammalian host, where 
it grows rapidly. The body elongates, the alimentary canal becomes 
sacculated. reproductive organs are developed, and the creature attains 
the condition first descrip The first eggs are produced about six 
months after the fluke’s entrance into the sheep, and it is usually sup- 
posed to live only about nine months, and to pass out of the sheep at 
the beginning of summer, but it may live beyond a year. 

Henry Mills, of Buffalo, N. Y., died February 7, in Chattanooga, 
Tenn., of pneumonia. He was a member of the American Society of 
Microscopists. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 117 
EDITORIAL. 


Agricultural Experiment Stations.—These institutions are be- 
ginning to make themselves heard in reports, some of which are of 
practical value to agriculturists and others will delight the specialists 
who clamor for ‘* original research.” Some of the matter published is 
not entirely new and some that is new will interest only specialists. 
Now all this is well enough. We have seen no bulletins that were 
worthless nor deserving of ridicule, since it is to be remembered that 
the agriculturists themselves are the ones to be most benefited. It is 
entirely proper to refresh their minds or to teach them anew some 
things that have been long known to a few scholars or experts. 

The constituency in one state will need more rudimentary instruction 
than that in some other state. We must therefore not pronqunce too 
hastily upon the reports issued. 

Although it is entirely fair to expect abstract research at each station, 
it is not to be regretted if the werkers keep the practical and economic 
questions to the aot and endeavor first of all to supply the agricultur- 
ists’ needs, be it in a way that interests specialists or be it disgusting to 
them. The people’s money is being used and the people (not the 
scientists) are the ones to be most Beneneeds 

These stations were established not with the pr7mary view of ad- 
vancing biology, botany, chemistry, or other sciences. Incidentally 
they will sooner or later. make acceptable contributions to our knowl- 
edge there is no doubt, but their primary function is economic. They 
are to be serviceable to farmers first of all in their task of coining money 
out of the soil. They must economically prove their right to exist, and 
to do this must meet first of all the demands of agricultur ists. Now, 
if people who are not in contact with economic questions but who are 
absorbed in botany, biology, and chemistry, as taught in the schools, 
undertake to criticise fee ‘work of these stations on their personal 
horizon, they will be in danger of saying some very unjust and unkind 
things. Furthermore, as they have access to the columns of scientific 
periodicals, they can create an amount of feeling entirely injurious to 
the cause. One such man, skilled in the Pethods of the press, may 
accomplish more than the thousand farmers might accomplish if they 
felt that ¢Aezr interests were neglected. Which, then, would the station 
people listen to,—the scientific specialists clamoring for abstract re- 
search, who can do much harm if they do not get it, or the multitude 
of agriculturists who are not so able to assert eae rights? We sin- 
cerely trust that it may not come squarely tosuch an alternativ e and that 
our scientific friends will give the stations a fair chance to carry out the 
purposes of the Hatch law, and that they will avoid every suspicion of 
there being a feeling of jealousy or lack of confidence on the part of 
those outside the stations against those who are inside. 


The Relation of Bacteria to Puerperal Fever.—A very inter- 
esting paper with the above title, by Dr. F. S. Johnson, is published 
in the Western Medical Reporter for March, 1889. From it we 
gather that the phenomena of puerperal fever may be produced by the 
ravages of either the streptococcus erysipelatosus, or streptococcus 
pyogenes aureus. 


118 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ May, 
BOYS’ DEPARTMENT. 


Jack’s Visit to the Natural History Society.* 
By Dr. J. E. TAYLOR. 


One wet evening Willie Ranson got Jack to go to the Society just be- 
cause there was nothing else to do. There was a short paper being 
read on ‘* Fish Scales,” and a number of them were mounted for 
microscopical examination, of course with a low power, say inch 
and half-inch. Anything relating to fish or fishing was certain to gain 
Jack’s attention, therefore a better subject could not have been selected 
to engage his notice. Besides, Jack had never yet even looked through 
a microscope ! He felt. abit pehanned of this now; but there were a 
couple of microscopes present, and Jack deter Pmeal to have a good 
look through them. The scales of different sorts of British fishes were 
on view. Of course, fish-scales are common enough; but who would 
think that each kind has its own pattern of scale, and that you could 
tell a species of fish by its scales? 

The paper showed that the scales of fishes were composed of the 
same material, chztzme, as the feathers of birds, or the hair and nails 
of animals—a kind of substance only found in the animal kingdom, 
and never in the vegetable; that these scales are developed in little 
pockets in the fish’s skin, which you can plainly see for yourself when 
a herring is scaled. They are arranged all over the fish’s body like the 
tiles covering a roof, partly overlapping each other, as is seen by one 
part of the scale being often different from the other. 

Jack looked through the microscope and was delighted. He was 
always a reverent-minded boy, and the sight broke on his mind like 
a new revelation. How exquisitely chased and beautiful were the 
markings, lines, dots, and other peculiarities! Then the scales which 
run along the middle line of the fish were shown him,and the ducts 
perforating them, out of which the mucus flows to anoint the fish’s 
body, and thus reduce the friction of its rapid movement through the 
water. The lad was half bewildered at the possibility of the new 
knowledge. ‘* Could anybody get to know about these things?” he 
asked Willie, who told him of course he could, if he would only take 
a little enn 


QUERIES. 


Does photomicrography constitute a crucial test for perfect achro- 
matism? If so, please explain why and how. 
Is a collar correction for an apochromatic with a compensating 
ocular of any benefit? If so, how and why? 
3. Are apochromatics sensitive to tube length? If not, why not? If so, 
explain how. 
4. What is the process of obtaining dead black parts of the microscope 
through the use of emery? 


* From “ Beginnings in Science at Mugby School,’’ in the Popular Science Monthly for May. 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 119 


MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


WasuinctTon, D. C.—E. A. BaLtocu, Secy. 

February, 1889. 86th meeting. The paper of the evening was by 
Dr. C. T. Caldwell upon Actinomycosis and will be found upon pages 
ro1—4 of this Journal. The discussion of Dr. Caldwell’s paper was as 
follows : 

Dr. Acker said that it was his impression that Dr. Taylor, of the 
Society, had described a case of this disease occurring in the domestic 
fowl. Dr. Gibbs called attention to a note in a late number of the 
Medical News in which the details of a case of this disease, under the 
care of Dr. Bodamer, in the human subject were given. 

Dr. Blackburn said: My first acquaintance with this disease was 
about four years ago, when I made the drawings for an essay on this 
subject which Dr. Bodamer presented to the faculty of the University 
of Pennsylvania and which took the Clark or the Henry C. Lea prize, 
I forget which. The disease is easily recognized by ‘the naked eye. 
I think we sometimes undervalue descriptions of disease as contrasted 
with microscopical examinations. [I do not know whether the growth 
was sub-periosteal or not. ‘The bone cavity was extensively excavated. 
Sometimes the fungus will stain as well as the surrounding tissue. I 
call attention to the large epitheloid cells surrounding the masses of 
fungus. These I think are inflammation products and show the efforts 
of nature to limit the disease. 

Dr. Seaman said: The Americans, as a rule. are remarkably free 
from diseases caused by intestinal parasites and fungi, and I attribute 
this to the fact that they eat their meat well cooked and not to the fact 
that the parasites and fungi are destroyed by the gastric juice. 

Dr. Caldwell said: This may be true as regards intestinal parasites, 
but it is not the fact as regards this fungus. "As I have shown in my 
preceding remarks, the carnivora are free from actinomycosis, and as 
carnivora eat flesh in a raw state their immunity from the disease 
must be attributed to the action of the gastric juice on the fungi. 

Dr. Acker showed preparations of Psammoma, a- rare form of 
brain tumor. ‘The brain containing the tumor was from a dissipated 
man, and was brought him by the attending physician who had observed 
anomalous cerebral symptoms during the patient’s last illness. The 
brain was normal with the exception of the cerebellum. It was deeply 
injected and the arteries were extensively calcified. The fourth ven- 
tricle was filled with a villous growth springing from the lining mem- 
brane. On microscopical examination this was found to be Psam- 
moma, a tumor of a villo-sarcomatous nature. The tumor contains 
chalky concretions, which have the same structure as normal brain-sand 
and are made up of concentric strata. 

Dr. Acker also showed a female specimen of 77échocephalus dispar, 
containing ova similar in all respects to those shown in the liver of a 
rat by Dr. Balloch at the last meeting. 

Miss M. A. Booth, of Longmeadow, Mass., presented to the Society 
six beautiful mounted slides of diatoms, all foreign, and one fossil, for 
which the Society desires to return its grateful thanks. 


120 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [ May. 
NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


Homer’s Odyssey, Books I-IV. Edited by Prof. B. Perrin, of Adel- 
bert College. 8°, 230pp. Ginn & Co., Boston. (Price $1.40). 
This voluniee constitutes one of the college series of Greek authors 
edited under the supervision of Prof. White of Harvard and Prof. Sey- 
mour of Yale. A dozen volumes are now ready, and include writings 
of Homer, Plato, Thucydides, Xenophon, Sophocles, Euripides, and 
Aristophanes. 

This volume has a number of attractions to the student. Each page 
is from one-third to one-half text (clear and beautiful type) and half or 
more is foot-notes. These are claimed to be sufficient to enable any 
good teacher to introduce the pupil to the study of Homer,—not an ex- 
travagant claim. The presence of notes with text is to be commended 
asa ere saving arrangement. The absence of a vocabulary will cause 
a loss of time (to be put on a large lexicon) and will prevent the stu- 
dent getting his lesson in the class-room (a still further loss of time, he 
will probably s say). There are two good indexes. 

The German edition has been freely changed to adapt it to the needs 
of American college classes, but record is made in the appendix of all 
important deviations from the opinions of the German editors. Refer- 
ences are rather liberally given to the American grammars, and also to 
Monro’s Hlomertic Grammar. As the gist of matter referred to is al- 
ways given in the current note, such fier ences are usually meant for 
those uno desire to collect further illustrative material. Much attention 
has been paid to the indication or citation of zteratz7, conventional 
phrases, and metrical formule. The student should realize in some 
measure both the bulk of this material and its bearing on the critical 
analysis of the poem. The latest accepted views in Homeric Archzol- 
ogy are presented. The Appendix gives not only strictly critical data, 
but also material which should enable a student with limited apparatus 
to understand the historical and literary status of controverted views. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


[These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof.] 
FOR EXCHANGE.—Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 


WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 

WANTED.—A clean copy of Rev. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atias of the 
Diatomacee. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous Earth from Utah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD), Salt Lake City, Utah. 
CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 


WANTED.—Specimens of rocks forslicing and grinding into sections; also bones and teeth of differ- 
ent animals, diatoms 7x si#« on alge, diatomaceous and polycistinous earths, ocean soundings, etc., etc. 
Liberal exchange i in microscopic slides or cash. 

ARTHUR J. DOHERTY, 63 Burlington St., Manchester, Eng. 


TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of p=trified wood— Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand ‘* Burt’s Solar Compass’ : complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second-hand, objectives, condensers, polarizers, stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. W.N.SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 


uy” - ra eee al ia yee al ea i > eae 


‘ 


=, _ 


. 


a . 
eee 


ZRISS| PHOTOMICROGRAPHIC APPARATUS 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL 


Wow, ake JUNE, 1889. No. 6. 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Amert- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, London, accompanied | by the yearly price of five shillings. 


Zeiss’s Large Photomicrographie Apparatus.* 


Dr. Zeiss supplies for photomicrographic purposes a special stand, 
which is generally similar in form and size to the other large stands of 
the poker There is, however, in addition, an unusually ‘large stage, 
with mechanical movements, rotating by rack and pinion, and having 
a wide opening for use with a low-power objective, giving a very large 
field of view. The Abbe illuminating apparatus is so arranged that it 
can be easily removed and replaced by special spectral, polarization, 
etc., apparatus. The body-tube is also of an unusually large diameter 
partly for avoiding internal reflection, and partly to render possible the 
use of the low-power objective 

The microscope is not attached to the same support as the camera, 
but both parts are on separate stands, which it is claimed is more con- 
venient for working. The stand, screwed to a metal support which is 
provided with three levelling screws, is set up at one end of the plat- 
form A (see frontispiece), w hich is adjustable for height. At the other 
end of the platform is an angle-plate, C, which supports an electric 
lamp; while the space between the lamp and the microscope M is oc- 
cupied by an optical arrangement consisting of two stout metal rails 
carrying the illuminating apparatus for use with sunlight; two vertical 
screens, E and F, movable by rack and pinion, w hich € can be quickly 
turned on one side, and again brought back exactly to their old posi- 
tion; a plane mirror, G, adjustable i in height, with coarse and fine ad- 
justment in the vertical as well as in the “horizontal axis, in order to 
correct slight irregularities in the course of the heliostat; and a stand, 
H, for the reception of glasses for yellow and blue absorption liquids. 
For the use of the arc-lamp, as shown in frontispiece, there is a water- 
chamber, T, with plate-glass ends for the absorption of the heat-rays, 
anda lens, i for projecting the image of the carbon points on the gr ound- 


* From Journal of a8) al Microscopical Society, April, 1889, pp. 278-283. 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


122 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [J une, 


glass plate. On the end of the metal support B is an arrangement, a, 
by which the movement of a Hooke’s joint 6 with rod 6’ can be trans- 
ferred to the micrometer screw. This is effected by means of a toothed 
wheel, which can be brought into gear with the toothed wheel of the 
micrometer screw. The tube carries a double socket, Z, into which, by 
turning the camera, slides a corresponding socket-piece attached to the 
end of the camera, so that a very perfect light-proof connection between 
microscope and camera is effected without disturbing the former. The 
socket-piece can be easily removed and replaced by a macroscopic ob- 
jective for ordinary photographic work. The camera K is mounted on 
a separate light but solid cast-iron stand, SS, provided with iron rails 
on which it can slide smoothly by means of rollers. The total length 
of the camera when fully extended is one 1.5 m. 

In order to fit the apparatus for taking fluid preparations, the camera 
is divided into two halves, of which the one nearest the microscope can 
be turned up vertically, as in fig. 1, or inclined at any angle. 


=] ee errr 


Fic. 1.—Zeiss’ Photo-Micrographic Apparatus for Vertical Microscope. 


Movement of the plane of the image, and also of the microscope end 
of the camera, is effected by pinions acting ona strong rack. Both 
halves of the camera are arranged for plate- -holders of 24 by 24 cm. 
which, however, by the addition of frames can be used for plates of any 
smaller size. Two adjusting plates, one of ground glass and the other 
transparent, and provided with a cross on the microscope side, serve 
for the coarse and fine adjustment of the image. A third plate-holder 
can be added, which, for the purpose of ascertaining the best time of 
exposure, permits a great number of proofs to be taken one after an- 
other on the same plate. To this end the holder is movable in a guide, 
and is made to pass in front of a slit which allows only a small strip of 
the image to fall on the sensitive plate. The bellows of the camera can 
be drawn a little away from the plate-holder so as to permit the image 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 123 


to be viewed from the front, it being thrown on a piece of white paper, 
as in Nachet’s method. 

With regard to the choice of a room to serve asa laboratory for pho- 
tomicrographic work, and the setting up and adjustment of the ap- 
paratus, Dr. Zeiss’s very elaborate ‘catalogue of photomicrographic 
apparatus, to be obtained from F. R. Pmecich & Son, New York, 
should be consulted, in which valuable information is also given on the 
nature of different sources of light and the manner of their use for pho- 
tomicrography, and on the special precautions required in the chemical 
part of photomicrography. 

In photomicrographic work an objective of 75 mm. focal length has 
been constructed which serves to take large oe (2 to 4 cm. y under 
a magnification of ten to fifteen times. It. possesses all the advantages 
of the other apochromatic objectives. 

As illuminating apparatus, either an Abbe condenser of 1.20 to 1.40 
mm. aperture or a specially constructed achromatic condenser of 1.0 
mm. aperture can be used. To obtain a successful photomicrograph 
it is necessary that the illumination should be limited to that part of the 
object which it is desired to photograph, because otherwise the light 
coming from the surrounding parts has the effect of fogging the picture 
A sharp image of the source of light must therefore be projected upon 
the object, ed to this end the condenser is provided with an arrange- 
ment for cross-centering and for fine-adjustment. The limitation of the 
illuminating cone is effected by an iris-diaphragm. 

For the 75 mm. objective a specially small lens of great focal length 
is used as condenser, since it is here necessary to project an image eon 
the source of light within the objective. The condenser for use with 
the electric are light consists of two plano-convex and one concavo-con- 
vex lens. The part of the system near the lamp is fixed once for all at 
the proper distance for producing a parallel beam, and to diminish 
spherical aberration the concave face is turned to the lamp. The part 
turned. to the microscope, which brings the parallel rays again toa 
focus, is movable in a sliding socket w hich permits the “displacement 
of the image on the optic axis within pretty wide limits. 

Note by Professor Hitchcock.—As soon as time permits him to 
write up some notes a few words may be anticipated, especially with 
reference to the use of plates prepared with coloring matters. The 
Zeiss apparatus for photography is unquestionably the most perfect and 
complete arrangement yet devised. It is expensive to be sure, but it is 
always ready i use. About 600 marks would cover the cost of the 
essential parts. 

If larger pictures are desired a dark room may be used and the image 
projected through the long camera upon a screen. 


A New Apochromatic Test.—The new test just discovered is the 
butterfly Colzas c@sonta (foreign). Those scales distinguished by fine 
ribs widely separated are remarkable for closely-packed molecules, 
lying in curvilinear rouleaux generally about 1-120000th of an inch, 
and with the best glasses throw up brilliant focal discs.— G. W. PRoys- 
ton- Pigott in English Mechanic, Apr. 19, 1889. 


124 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ June, 


Investigation of Bacteria by Means of Cultivation.* 
By R. A. FOSTER, M. D. 


WASHINGTON, D. C. 


The materials employed in cultivating the different species of bac- 
terium are of two classes, namely, fluids and solids; the former being 
commonly designated as ‘+ wet quienes” > and the latter as ‘* dry cate 
tures.” . 

Before commencing the cultures, the fluid or solid medium employed 
must be sterilized—that is, rendered free from all bacteria and bacterial 
germs. This may be accomplished by raising it to a high temperature. 
All bacteria and their spores are killed by steam or boiling hot water, after 
exposure for a short time. A jet of steam will kill all kinds of germs 
in from ten to fifteen minutes; besides, it is more potent than sear in 
a closed chamber. 

Of the many fluid media, an infusion of meat is the one most fre- 
quently used at the present time. It is made by putting a pound of 
lean beef, previously cut up into small pieces, in a vessel containing a 
litre [quart] of water. The vessel is then placed in an ice safe, \ where 
it is allowed to remain not less than twenty-four hours. At the end of 
the twenty-four hours it is taken out and all the juice of the meat 
squeezed out by means of a press. If an ice safe and press are not at 
hand, it is sufficient to keep the material simmering for two or three 
hours. In either case, the resulting fluid must be well boiled—that i iS, 
long enough to precipitate the albumen. After filtration it may be at 
once introduced into suitable vessels. As the meat is acid in this con- 
dition, and as an acid medium is a poor soil for many forms of bacteria, 
it can be neutralized with carbonate of soda; but this should be done 
before it is boiled. To make the infusion still more serviceable. about 
one per cent. of peptone anda little chloride of sodium should be added 
to it. 

An infusion of cucumber is a very good medium for cultiv Bane micro- 
cocci. Cow’s milk, blood and urine are also good cultivating fluids. 

Artificial cultivating materials are seldom if ever used now. The 
two solutions that have been most frequently employed are Pasteur’s 
and Cohn’s. 

Pasteur’s solution is composed of candy sugar, lo grammes; tar- 
trate of ammonia, 1 gramme; ashes of yeast, 1 gramme; distilled 
water, IoO c.cm. 

Cohn’s solution is a modification of Mayer's ; it contains phosphate 
of potash, 0.5 gramme; crystallized sulphate of magnesia, 0.5 gramme ; 
tribasic phosphate of lime, 0.05 gramme; tartrate of ammonia, 1 
gramme; distilled water, 100 c.cm. 

Gelatinized materials and potato are the chief solid cultivating media. 
The former may be made by adding from five to ten per cent. OF gela- 
tine to the different fluid media mentioned above. 

‘* For potato cultivations,” Cheyne says, ‘‘ ripe potatoes are best, the 
small new potato not being nearly such a good medium. As the earth 
on the outside of the potato is full of bacteria and spores, it must be 
washed off as much as possible, and the eyes of the potato cleaned out. 


* Read at the Washington Microscopical Society at its 88th Regular Meeting, Feb. 26, 1889. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 125 


The potato is then laid in a 1 to 1000 watery solution of corrosive 
sublimate for about an hour. Afterward it is washed in water and 
placed in the steaming apparatus, and kept at the temperature of 100 ¢ 
for a half to three-quarters of an hour. It is then allowed to cool under 
cover from dust. In the meantime a couple of glass dishes, one larger 
than the other so as to form a cover, are washed out with 1.1000 subli- 
mate solution, and a piece of filter paper moistened with the same solu- 
tion is placed on the bottom of each, so that when the one is inverted 
over the other there is a moist surface at the upper and jower part of 
the chamber. This is to keep the air moist so that the surface of the 
potato does not dry. The potato after heing cooked and cooled is cut 
into halves in the following manner: a long flat knife is heated in 
the flame and allowed to cool. The left hand is then dipped into 1.1000 
sublimate solution, and the potato is taken up with it. With the knife 
held in the right hand a single sweep is made through the potato, and 
the cover of the moist chamber being lifted, the two halves are sepa- 
rated and laid down with the cut surface uppermost. The cover is then 
replaced and the potato is ready for inoculation. In some cases, where 
the potato is to be placed at the body temperature and kept for some 
time, tall narrow vessels similar to those used by Koch for testing air, 
plugged with cotton-wool and sterilized, and large enough to hold half 
a potato, are employed. 

‘¢ The surface of the potato may be inoculated by platinum wire, or by 
a thin, flat knife, by means of which the material is rubbed over the 
eininee of the potato. The knife or needle is dipped in the cultivation 
to be inoculated and drawn rapidly over the surface of the newly pre- 
pared potato.” 

Fluid cultivations have given place to solid culture media. There are 
two serious drawbacks to them. One is, that if they should in any way 
become contaminated the cultivation will be entirely spoiled, the new- 
comers mixing thoroughly with the original bacteria. Further inocu- 
lations, therefore, from flasks thus contaminated simply carry over the 
two kinds. The second disadvantage is, that the original culture must 
be started from a material containing only one eine of bacterium, it 
being almost impossible to separate one form from another with fluid 
media.® 

In special cases, however, fluid cultivation materials have certain 
advantages, one being that they can be placed in an incubator at the 
temperature of the body without the result being spoiled. With gela- 
tinized media, however, this cannot be done, all melting at the tem- 
perature of the body. Agar-agar (a material derived from the plant 
Gracilaria lichenoides) is ; sometimes used in place of gelatine ; mostly, 
however, to maintain pure cultivations of bacteria which grow at the 
temperature of the body. Agar jelly is difficult to prepare ; moreover, 
it is not as satisfactory as the other. 

Fluid media are also more serviceable than solids in experiments on 
the growth of micro-organisms in different gases. 

Test-tube cultivations, plate cultivations, and glass slide cultivations 
are the three principal modes of using pntriont jelly for cultivations. 
The best temperature for growth and for solidity is said to be from 20° 
C. to 22°C. At 25° C. 10 per cent. gelatine is just solid. 

Test-tube cultivations are employed when it is desired to keep up a 


126 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [June, 


series of cultivations. The jelly is allowed to solidify in tubes placed 
perpendicularly. 

For separating bacteria from one another in a mixture, or for study- 
ing the peculiarities of certain forms, plate cultivations are preferable. 

For glass slide cultivations the ordinary microscopic slides may be 
employed. After sterilization in the usual manner, they are kept, after 
inoculation, on glass trays in glass vessels. When using the jelly in 
these cultivations, it is first liquified and then poured out on the glass 
slides. When it has solidified, a platinum wire, bent at the end,. and 
dipped in the material to be tested, is lightly and rapidly drawn over 
the surface. As the wire passes over the surface of the jelly it leaves 
the bacteria along its track. 

Blood serum as a cultivating medium is mainly limited to tubercle 
and glanders bacilli. 

Pastes are very useful, especially for fungi. They may be made of 
crushed potato, bread, various fruits, etc. 

Cultivations of the various micro- organisms may be obtained pure 
from mixtures of various kinds—such as are commonly found in decom- 
posing materials, etc. It is best, however, to get pathogenic organisms 
from the body of the animal affected. 

In examining earth for bacteria, it should not be forgotten that they 
are close to the surface, and that only spores and anaérobes are deep 
down. 

In testing water both the numbers and the kinds of bacteria present 
must be taken into consideration. The vessels in which the water to 
be tested is received must, of course, be sterilized before the water is 
introduced. 

For testing air, Hueppe’s method is one of the best. ‘* He aspirates 
a definite quantity of air through a certain amount of culture fluid, and 
then, shaking the flask well to distribute the bacteria equally through 
the fluid, he makes plate cultivations with known quantities of the 
fluid in nutrient jelly and agar, testing the mixture of air and culture 
fluid in the same way that water is tested.” 


Detecting Alterations in Manuscripts.—As accessory toethe use 
of the microscope, the use of photography is recommended by Mr. 
Geo. G. Rockwood, of 17 Union Square, New York. He has for 
years been in the habit of photographing manuscripts, models, books 
of account, checks, and drafts, whenever their genuineness was ques- 
tioned. The process sometimes makes legible “figures, amendments, 
and alterations which even the microscope does not fully bring out. 
This is due to the extreme sensitiveness of photographic plates to 
shades of color. With the new ‘‘ Autho-chromatic” or color-sensitive 
plates almost imperceptible stains on old yellow paper have been made 
clear and legible. 

(Our Utah friend, whose signature to a will was tampered with, may 
like to consult Mr. Rockwood.) 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 127 


Carbolic Acid in Mounting.* 
By F. T. CHAPMAN. 


Phenol, carbolic acid, coal tar, creosote, phenic acid, and phenylic 
alcohol are various names, according to Ure, for a substance more com- 
monly known by the second name, carbolic acid. At ordinary tem- 
peratures, according to the same authority, it crystallized in long color- 
less needles, which easily deliquesce to an oil taking up a mere trace 
of water, but which may be made to immediately solidify by the addi- 
tion of chleride of lime. It dissolves sparingly in water but well in 
alcohol, ether, and strong acetic acid. 

I became interested in the use of carbolic acid for preparing insects 
for mounting, as the usual methods were open to objection. With liq. 
potassa, none but the harder, chitinous parts remained, and the 
‘¢ skeleton”? was usually distorted by being mashed. Turpentine is a 
good clearing agent, but takes too long a time to act, being, however, 
in most other respects unobjectionable. 

According to all the information I could gather; the strongest un- 
colored acid must be used, and small insects could be cleaned in a few 
seconds, and immediately mounted in balsam without further treatment. 

To liquefy the crystallized acid I find that the addition of a few drops 
of water is amply sufficient, say about 5 or 10 drops to the ounce of 
acid. Or if it can be used warm, and its action is hastened by heat, it 
may be temporarily liquefied at a comparatively low temperature, and 
does not again solidify until quite cold. No set time for treatment of 
the insect can be given, as it will vary from a few minutes to several 
days. For instance, the head of the common house fly, which is an 
unusually difficult object to clear, takes about a week, but well repays 
one for the labor when finished. 

I have not succeeded in any instance in mounting an object in ben- 
zole balsam directly from the acid, as a permanent, opaque cloudiness 
invariably appeared, whether the acid was liquefied by water or 95% 
alcohol. To prevent this clouding, which was probably due to the 
presence of water in the carbolic acid, the object was first passed through 
clove oil, that is, the object was allowed to remain in the oil until all 
surface agitation disappeared, and was then mounted in benzole balsam 
in the usual manner. 

It may be well to mention that the object is mounted without pressure, 
in a cell of suitable depth, and that flattening, and consequently distort- 
ing, the object is to be condemned, as it is then misleading and does 
not present its well rounded and beautiful natural proportions. When 
strong carbolic acid is used to clear insects it causes all the exterior 
retractile organs to protrude as they do naturally. 

It was suggested in the A/croscope for January, 1889, that the ana- 
line dies could be dissolved in creosote, and the object stained as well 
as cleared. Although creasote (C!* H'!* O#) differs from carbolic 
acid (C6 H® O) when both are pure, it is quite probable that the latter 
will prove a good vehicle for stains. The analines will probably dis- 
solve freely, as will also picric acid and carmine, and double staining 
can likely be successfully performed. The strength of the stains will 
have to be graded according to the object, or it may be cleared and then 


* Read at the Washington Mic. Soc. 87th Regular Meeting, Feby. 12, 1889. 


128 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ June, 


stained. Other stains can probably be used with success, but whatever 
stain is used, it must usually be very weak if the clearing action is to be 
simultaneous with the staining ; for instance, a solution of one-tenth 
of one per cent. would be Sei ont for a fly’s head, while a one per 
cent. solution would probably not be too strong for a leg or other like 
part. 

Carbolic acid has the disadvantage of coloring on exposure to light. 
The crystals of the acid color very slowly, more than a year having 
elapsed i in one instance before they changed to a light amber, and even 
then some portions of the mass (an ounce bottle full) remained clear. 
The acid dissolved in a very small portion of water turned dark very 
quickly, that is in a few days. That dissolved in 95%% alcohol has re- 
mained a light amber color ‘after three months’ exposure to daylight and 
direct sunlight, being clear and transparent, while the aqueous solution 
is dark and ilnioct fnelnceat 

A solution of red analine in carbolic acid liquefied with alcohol has 
remained brilliant and clear for a like period. Carbolic acid liquefied 
by benzole has changed but very little, much less than the alcohol so- 
lution, after a ian exposure to daylight and direct sunlight. In 
each instance the bottles holding the acid were corked. A combined 
solution of picric acid and carmine in carbolic acid dissolved in acetic 
acid has shown no perceptible change for several days. Pure creosote 
does not color on exposure to the air, and may possibly present all the 
advantages of carbolic acid with none of its disadvantages, but having 
had no ‘opportunity to investigate I cannot give any jniocmation on the 
matter. 

If for any reason any part of an insect has been removed so that the 
acid can readily enter the interior of the body it will, after clearing the 
soft parts, begin to dissolve or destroy them, and if an object be left i in 
the acid for some weeks nothing but the chitine will remain. 

Although the properties of carbolic acid and creosote have been 
known for years, little appears to have been done with them, and an 
interesting, fascinating field of study and experiment is open to any one 
who can devote the necessary time and labor. 


The Reddening of Codfish. 
By CHAS. W. SMILEY, 


WASHINGTON, D. C. 


As early as 1838 it was noticed that salted codfish sometimes turned 
red. In France, at that time, it was considered not injurious, but even 
preferable. Within a few years the allegation that red cod was poi- 
sonous has led to a careful examination of the ipa 
found to show 
themselves upon the abe and to eireka aptly , So as to cover it quickly 
and give it a thoroughly reddish appearance. This redness is fre- 
quently to be found only on the surface, and then may easily be scraped 
oft; but sometimes it penetrates into the fissures of the flesh, and even 
into the muscles and tissues of the fish. Entire cargoes sometimes 
become more or less reddened before the termination of the voyage, 
where there is heat and moisture. But this redness, which springs up 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 129 


so quickly, is usually only on the surface,and may be removed by 
brushing and washing. This reddening has sometimes been accom- 
panied by a tendency to decomposition, which of itself would entirely 
unfit the fish for market. 

Alleged Poisoning.—In regard to the actual poisonous nature of 
this substance, while there are several well-authenticated cases of poi- 
soning occurring after eating reddened fish, yet it seems to be shown 
that cases of thes same symptoms, which resemble those of cholera, have 
occurred from eating codfish which had undergone putrefactive changes, 
but in which iecei was no trace of this eagead There have been 
seven instances carefully recorded where poisoning has resulted from 
eating spoiled codfish, in which a total of 700 persons were affected ; 
but the poisoning was rather annoying than dangerous, as only one 
person out of the whole 700 died from the effects. In four of the seven 
recorded instances—and it should be observed that many of them were 
among troops or sailors, where the food was not of the best quality, 
and was prepared and served by wholesale methods—no specially red- 
dish color was observed ; and the poisoning from eating in the other in- 
stances was not so severe, nor were so many persons affected, while 
there was some putridity of the flesh in the fish causing ail the cases 

Especially in all the cases of poisoning attributed to pedkeaed codael. 
mention is made of a putrid odor of the flesh, of its softening and tend- 
ency to crumble to pieces. These are marks of decomposition, and are 
usually attended by the formation of a poisonous alkaloid in the sub- 
stance used as food. This poisonous alkaloid is not attributed nec- 
essarily to the action or presence of the red parasitic growth, and it is 
even found that in a number of cases where the awaee was apparent, 
yet where there was no decomposition, the fish had been eaten with 
perfect impunity. This reddening of the flesh seems to be simply a 
coincidence of the poisoning in some cases, but not in all or the most 
severe—the only case reported where death resulted was from eating a 
codfish that had not this redness—while it appeared in a vast number 
of cases where no injurious results can be traced. In some of the 
cities of France large quantities of red codfish from the suburban drying 
establishments eae been consumed by the people with no resulting 
cases of sickness. Enormous amounts of reddened cod are eaten in 
some of the French colonies and in other hot countries with impunity ; 
and in some regions, especially in the Antilles and the island of 
Reunion, consumers at present give the preference to codfish having a 
rosy tinge. 

Microscopic Examination.—The French researches seem to show 
that this redness is produced by a cryptogamous vegetable growth, 
frequently found in masses, and particularly dense about the salt 
crystals. The nature of this growth they did not fully determine ; 
some considering it a fungus, others an alga; but by most it was re- 
garded as a_ parasitic alga. The germs of this growth seem to be 
specially found in the Nicditeansani salts. 

As early as the summer of 1878 the U. 8. Fish Commissioner called 
the attention of Prof. Wm. G. Furies to the peculiar condition to which 
salt codfish is liable during the moist summer weather, and observations 
were made, particularly at Gloucester, Mass., by Prof. Farlow during 
that summer and fall. During his inv estigations at Gloucester, Prof. 


130 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [June, 


Farlow ascertained that the redness was present in troublesome amounts 
only during the hot season, and disappeared with the return of cold 
weather; also that it was rarely to be found until after the fish had 
been landed from the vessel, though occasionally it began on board. 
Considerable moisture as well as heat seemed necessary for its best 
development. A careful microscopic examination convinced the pro- 
fessor that the redness was due toa very minute plant, the Clathrocystzs 
roseo-perstcina. This plant consists merely of minute cells, tinged 
with red coloring-matter, and imbedded in a mass of slime. The epi 
as usually seen seem to be arranged without order, but under more 
favorable conditions for observation they are found grouped in spher oidal 
masses. This plant is closely related to Clathrocystés @ruginosa, a 
common species occurring in “fresh-water ponds, and which exhales a 
peculiarly unpleasant odor when decaying. The Clathrocyst¢s tound 
on codfish is very widely diffused both in Europe and America, being 
abundant enough i in the marshes near Gloucester. It does not feos 
however, ata temperature below 65° Fahr. At Gloucester this minute 
plant was found in large quantities on the woodwork, from which it 
could easily be communicated to the fish. Also, Prof. Farlow’s in- 
vestigations led him to conclude that the same microscopic alga was 
found on the Cadiz salt used by the fishermen for preserving their md 
The presence of the alga in the salt is accounted for, doubtless, by it 

being derived from the ae or evaporating places along the coast — 
the salt is made. (Prof. Farlow at the same time discovered a second 
parasite, which he called Sarczxa morrhue, occurring along with the 
alga above mentioned.) Curiously enough, also, the same peculiar 
redness has been found on salt pork in the region of Gloucester, but it is 
not at all certain that it is the same microscopic growth which causes it. 

Economic Effects.—Early in 1886 the ipeenes Ministry of Com- 
merce prohibited the sale of this reddened fish throughout all French 
territory, but this prohibition has since been suspended until the matter 
could be thoroughly investigated. 

That this parasite tends to cause decomposition by breaking up the 
tissues and giving occasion for the formation of other compounds may 
be true, but that it is itself neither poisonous nor the direct cause of 
the poisonous matter has been demonstrated over and over again by 
experiments in eating this reddened flesh where it was free from de- 
composition, and no harm has ever thus occurred. Careful exper- 
iments made on the reddish parts of codfish have failed to find any 
poisonous alkaloids there ; while these ptomaines were found in the fish 
that had begun to decay. 

The reddening seems, then, rather to be an occasional attendant upon 
the cause of poisoning than directly connected with the cause itself, 
which is the more or less advanced stage of the putrid decomposition 
of the flesh of the codfish. This decomposition can always be detected 
by examination of both the outside and the inside of the flesh by feeling 
and smell. Whence it results that codfish may be eaten with impunity 
when it has its normal odor and a firm consistence of the flesh; but it 
should be carefully avoided when there is any putrid smell about it, and 
its flesh has become soft and crumbling, no matter whether redness is 
present or not in either case. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 131 


Report upon the Postal Club Boxes—VII. 
By QUEEN MAB. 

Box ah A prominent member of the Club over his initials characterizes 
slide No. £ as an example of how zo¢ to do a thing. The information 
imparted be the preparer concerning this slide is cas concisely given 
under the head of ‘*How prepared : 2 ‘*Pretty poorly, I fear.” No. 
is prepared by F. T. Ascham, of Sharon, Pa., in order to staal 
the characteristic structure of the tobacco leaf, with a view to detecting 
the alleged adulterations in commercial tobacco, being a eigeverse 
section Ga tobacco leaf showing midrib, veins, etc. Mr. Ascham finds, 
at most, an undue proportion of powdered stems, and seeks the experi- 
ence of his brother members as to finding cabbage leaves, paper, etc., 
which are said to be among the achuleerants ased: F. F. Colwell, M. 
D., Urbana, Ohio, in No. 3, contributes epidermal layer from foot of 
puree: ian cocci were numerous in the pus from the abscess. No. 
4 is contributed by C. K. Wells, Marietta, Ohio. S.M. Mosgrove, 
M. D., contributes No. 5% 7rzchina sper alzs in biceps muscle, stating 
that while the subject is old, the slide is of interest because of the pro- 
fuseness of the occurrence of this parasite. E. L. Cheesman, of 
Knowlesville, N. Y., sends out in No. 6 pollen of evening primrose, 
@nothera, Sthited with one of the aniline dyes and aro unted in 
benzole balsam. 

Box C. No. 1, prepared and contributed by W. C. Weymouth, of 
Renovo, Pa., is a transverse section of stem of potato, stained with 
carmine and aniline green, mounted in balsam, and ringed with shellac, 
which is followed by white zinc. No. 2 is by E. L. Hewitt, of Bur- 
lington, N. J., the sting of wasp, Vespa vulgarz¢s, showing ** sting 
drawn out of sheath for better display, and the palpi and poison ¢ glands.’ 
No. 3 is contributed by Edward Pennock, of Philadelphia, and is a 
section of rock, ground down to show horizontal sections of fossil dia- 
toms in their matrix, being a section of the famous ‘* Cementstein,”’ of 
Jutland, Isle of Mors, Denmark. Objectives recommended, ;4,; to 4 in. 
No. 4 is the work of Dr. Geo. A. Rex, of Philadelphia, and the subject 
one to which he has given much study, the Myxomycetes. This par- 
ticular slide is a mount of ‘lattice fungus,” Stemoniti’s morgani 
Pk., showing the thready frame or net-work of two sporangia. 
Glycerine jelly cell, gold size with lead oxides, cover fixed with 
shellac and ringed with asphalt. Objectives, } to tin. The object of 
this mount—for it is not one of the desultory class too freely represented 
in the Club boxes—is to show an unusual amount of variation within 
specific limits, even for the very variable group of Myxomycetes. But 
for careful watching of these plants during two seasons, which proved 
the development of intermediate stages between the two extreme forms, 
a new species would have been added to the list, so great is the vari- 
ation between these two forms. To appreciate the description the 
slide must be seen. Of Slide No. 5, L. Brewer Hall, M. D., is the 
preparer and contributor. It is the prothallus and young frond of a 
maiden-hair fern, a species of Adzantum, stained with aniline green 
and mounted in thick glycerine, ringed with gold size and lead oxides: 
These prothallia, Dr. “Hall says, he finds abundant on the tops and 
sides of pots in green-houses in early spring, a fact which those who 
would like to study prothallia will do well to note. 


132 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ June, 


No. 6 is transverse section of mucus membrane of stomach, con- 
tributed by R. M. Luther, of Philadelphia, Pa. It is stained with car- 
mine and mounted in balsam. Attention is called to the arrangement 
of the blood vessels and columnar epithelium. 

Pox T?. Recalls two members who have, since the issue of this 
box, passed on to fuller light and knowledge, Dr. L. M. Kenyon and 
Henry L. Mills, Esq. An excellent feature of some of the tate note- 
books is the date of the preparation of the slides. Slide No. 1 is by 
Dr. Geo. E. Fell, of Buffalo, prepared in 1886, and, perhaps owing to 
the nature of the medium, is faring badly. It is hunian renal tube 
casts, in natural medium. The casts on the slide are chiefly blood 
casts and from a case of renal hyperemia. Some one queries whether 
it would not have been better to have stained these casts in the urinary 
fluid before mounting. 

Slide No. 2 is a fresh-water sponge, by the late Henry Mills, Jye- 
nia fluviateles, cleared in carbolic acid and mounted in Canada balsam. 
The preparation shows skeleton spicula, several statoblasts or winter 
eggs, with their birotulate spicules. No. 3 was contributed for the 
eee Dr. Kenyon by Mr. Mills, a section of yellow water-lily, Vaphar 
lutea. No. 4 is the work of Dr. Geo. E. Fell, of Buffalo. “** Tumor, 
human.” Section of growth from inside of knee joint. ‘+ Many of 
these growths, a little larger than the size of a pea, were removed from 
the joint with quite satisfactory results by Dr. Hartwig, of Buffalo.” 
This is the comment which this slide has received: ‘‘ The word 
tumor seems to court a diagnosis. It would be better to diagnose 
this Lees sending out, as it would be more interesting.” 

No. 5, prepared by B. W. Thomas, of Chicago, is contributed by 
Miss A M. Kenyon, of Buffalo, and is a slide of ‘spicula of the sponge 
shown on Slide No. 2, Myenta fluviatilis, boiled in acid, washed cut 
like diatoms, and mounted in balsam. A member asks, What acid? 
To which query another member replies, Probably treated with nitric 
acid. This destroys the statoblasts or winter eggs, but leaves clean 
the birotulate spicules, which are seen in great numbers on the slide. 
Slide No. 6, contributed by Prof. D. S. Kellicott, of Columbus, Ohio, 
was unfortunately broken and withdrawn, but the notes and comments 
remain. Flea of woodchuck. It was mounted by passing from alco- 
hol into oil of cloves and balsam. This flea is stated to be very odd. 
One of the best American microscopists says of this slide: ** Beautifully 
prepared. Carbolic acid gives much the same result.””, This comment 
is of interest as coming fom such an authority, and yet much in con- 
tradiction of another Seaman attr recently quoted in these reports. 
Indeed, so often do authorities disagree as to details that it is impossible 
for the individual worker implicitly to follow any set of rules. There 
is ample room for the development of the individuality and_ skill of 
every worker. 


Tobacco Smoke and Bacteria.—It would seem that a powerful 
poison, like nicotine, ought to be destructive to bacteria, and therefore 
that smoking should exert some protective action against those bacteria 
that gain access to the system through the nasal and buccal mucous 
membranes. Some observations by Hajeck, of Vienna, and Tassinari, 
of Pisa, seem to confirm this idea. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 133 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


British Fungi.—M. C. Cooke reports in Grev7d/ea for March four 
new species of British fungi, three of them belonging to the genus 
Phoma and one to the genus Physarum. This number has also a review 
of Mr. Plowright’s ** Monograph of the British Uridine and Ustilagi- 
nee” and many interesting notes on fungi. 

Pollen Mother Cells.—Bryon D. Halstead, in the Bofazzcal 
Gazette for April (p. 109), describes a method of obtaining from the 
partly grown anthers of Megawndo acerotdes, Moench. the pollen 
mother cells. Transverse sections are made through the staminate 
flower and a weak solution of azorubin is recommended for bringing 
out the young grains more prominently. 

North American Umbelliferz.—The revision of this group of 
plants, so difficult for beginners in botany, by Profs. J. M. Coulter and 
J. N. Rose, is announced. This will be welcomed by botanists if it 
sustains as high a character as the ability of the authors promises. 

Yellow Fever. —Jerome Cochran, M.D., of Alabama, in the Sani- 
tartan for Feburary, discusses the ‘problems in regard to yellow fever’ 
under the three following heads, viz: 

1. To prevent the are ode ton among us of yellow fever across the 
sea from foreign countries. 

2. To prevent the transmission of yellow fever from one part of our 
own country to another by land. 

To prevent the spread of yellow fever in our towns and cities after 
the outburst of a few cases. 

The doctor says that the sea quarantine is much less difficult to man- 
age than that on the land. While disinfectants are valuable, non-inter- 
course with infected persons, localities, and things is the only reliable safe- 
guard. Depopulation ofa large city is impossible and of a small village is 
unnecessary, and this method OF non-intercourse is not therefore of great 
value. Prompt and rigid quarantine of infected localities is not an easy 
thing to accomplish in the midst of a densely, populated city, and it 
would seem that Dr. Cochran does not overstate the gravity of the prob- 
lems which arise in the treatment of this dreaded disease: 

Microbes in the Human Stomach.—M. Abelons is reported to 
have discovered sixteen species of microbes in the human stomach in 
normal health, nine of which are new species. He maintains that these 
play an important part in the processes of digestion, as he finds that 
some of them attack albumen and other various Shoes which figure 
as ingredients of food. 

Rotifera.—Dr. C. T. Hudson, president of the Royal Microscopical 
Society, i in his inaugural address, feieaed February 13, 1889, discusses 
in a very interesting manner fhe. distribution of the rotifera. After al- 
luding to the fact that certain species seem to find a limited locality in 
regions very widely apart and citing records to show how remarkably 
is this true, he attempts to show in what way they may have been 
transported to these widely separated areas. Among the methods men- 
tioned are the following: 

1. Many rotifera live in temporary pools, the drying up of which en- 
ables the wind to carry in the form of dust the eggs of the rotifera, es- 
pecially the more imperishable or thickly- ycoated eggs. These, when 


* Conducted by J. H. Pillsbury. 


134 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ June, 


borne to the upper regions of air by whirlwinds or otherwise, may be 
transported to great ieee 

Ze Whe entanglement of these eggs, many of which have hooks upon 
them, in the plumage of birds or the hair of animals while bathing, is 
another means of transportation. In the former case they may escape 
in ane air, and so be carried by aerial currents for long distances. 

. The transportation of these eggs as dust with the cargoes of vessels, 
Ase to foreign countries, may een for appearance of the same species 
in countries “intimately connected in commercial relations. 

Marine Laboratory.—The circular announcing the second season 
of the new Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods Holl, Mass., is out. 
The laboratory is under the direction of Prof. C. O. Whitman, as last 
year, and will consist of two departments, one for investigators and an- 
other for students. That for investigators will be open from June 3 to 
August 31,and Howard Ayers, Ph. D. ,and E. G. Gardiner will be as- 
ene Aquaria, g elassware, reagents, &c., willbe supplied, but micro- 
scopes and microtomes must we fiuniched by the investigators. Eight pr ie 

vate rooms are offered for the use of investigators who ‘do not require in- 
struction. Others desiring special aid by way of suggestions and criti- 
cism or instruction in technique will occupy ‘tables in a general labora- 
tory on the second floor of the building. For the privileges of this 
laboratory a fee of $50 will be charged. The laboratory for students 
will occupy the first floor and the ‘regular courses of instruction will 
begin July ro, and continue seven eae under the following wee 
ors: J. S. Kingsley, Se: Dein zoology, jases Humphrey, LE SiRBe 
botany, and Playfair McMurrich in microscopical technique. ovat 
sional lectures are promised by Prof. E. B. Wilson, of Bryn Mawr, 
Prof. S. C. Minot, of Harvard Medical School, and others. The fee for 
the privileges of this laboratory will be $25. The success of this enter- 
prise has thus far been very encouraging to those interested, and it is 
expected that this season will afford a still larger number of workers the 
privileges of a well-equipped sea-side laboratory, the need of which has 
been greatly felt for several years. Correspondence relative to the 
eee y should be addressed to Miss A. D. Phillips, 23 Marlborough 

ts Boston, Mass. 

Microbes in Snow.—Recent investigations regarding the presence 
of bacteria in snow and the possibility of some species retaining their 
vitality, or even increasing when subjected to a very low temperature 
have led to the following sconclueronst ViZ: 

1. Snow always contains bacteria, some forms of which are capable 
of lap ines in gelatin cultures. 

These are more numerous in the first snow that-falls than after it 
ae Wess falling for some time, indicating that a portion of these at least 
are derived fran the air. The opines may come from the vapor 
that arises from water containing bacteria in considerable numbers. 

3. Snow that has been lying upon the ground for some time contains 
a smaller number of those oe which liquefy g gelatin than when freshly 
fallen and a larger number of those forms which do not liquify gelatin, 
showing that these forms are capable of multiplying at low temperatures. 

The Rabbit Pest of Australia.—The experiment of trying to 
rid Australia of its rabbit pest by introducing the chicken cholera, to arti- 
ficial innoculation of which the rabbit is extremely susceptible, is re- 
ported to be a failure. 


1889.] MICROSC OPICAL JOURNAL. 135 
BACTERIOLOGY. 


.The Bacillus of Leprosy.*—The bacillus of leprosy is met with 
as a fine rod-shaped bacillus, rounded or slightly pointed at the ex- 
tremities, and averaging about 5 micromillimeters i in length by a little 
less than I fier omnil imieter in diameter. Some meade bacilli may 
be observed with bright oval spores, and many, though not all, present 
an active to-and-fro motion. In quite a number of specimens studied 
there was a beaded appearance, owing to the local centralization of pro- 
toplasmic masses. 

The bacilli are found most abundantly in the leprous nodules of the 
skin, in which they literally swarm, appearing in some portions almost 
as plentiful as the ‘cells of the tissue itself. T hey are also very plentiful 
in the leprous lesions of the buccal, laryngial, and other cavities of the 
body. Some bacilli are found in the REL organs, as the kidneys, 
liver, spleen, and lymphatic system. 

There are several good methods of staining Baczll/us leprae, but that 
which was found to Be the most satisfactory for the cover-glass prepar- 
ations is the acid solution of eosin- -hematoxylin of Bleich. Sections 
also may be stained in this manner; but the method of Babes is more 
satisfactory. It consists in first staining with a solution of rosaniline 
hydrochlorate i in aniline water. Then bleach with a solution of hydro- 
chloric acid in water (1 to 4), afterwards re-staining with methylene 
blue. 

Observations of the Mode of Growth of Bacillus Lepre.—A 
cover-glass in the centre of which had been deposited a drop of steril- 
ized blood serum inoculated with the bacilli was placed, culture down- 
ward, on a cell slide. The latter was made by cementing a glass ring 
to the centre of a glass slip, making, with the cover- -glass, : a elgsed calle 
in the bottom of Sach was placed a drop of water to maintain the 
moisture of the culture. The cover-glass was sealed in its position on 
the top of the glass ring with olive reall as it is not necessary to admit 
air, the spores germinating freely independent of its admission. The 
whole, prepared in this manner, was placed on the stage and all of that 
portion of the microscope below the focusing apparatus was enclosed 
in a box kept.at a temperature of about 100° F. This arrangement af- 
forded the means of observing everything taking place in the culture 
thus placed immediately beneath the cover- -glass, which latter, being of 
the ordinary thickness, permitted of the same facility of observation as 
an ordinary slide preparation. 

From among several preparations a sufficient number were success- 
ful to show the formation and growth from spore to mature bacillus. 
The spores would swell, then the sharp outline would fade and become 
transparent at a certain portion of its circumference. From this spot 
would appear a faint, pale projection, which would grow in length until 
it reached the size of the mature organism—the Raines of the “original 
spore entirely disappearing. The new bacillus would divide by fission 
into two, these into four, and so on ad zxfinitum. 

The microscopical character and general morphology of Baczllus 
lepre greatly resemble Baczllus tuberculosis. The giant-cells in which 


* Proceedings of the American Society of Microscopists, 1888. Paper of Chevalier QO. pias, M. D. 


136 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ June, 


the latter is found display great similarity to the large leprosy cells of 
Virchow, in which Baczllus lepre occurs. One point of difference is, 
the motility of the bacillus leprae and the non-motility of the tubercle 
bacillus. Another point of difference is, that tuberculosis may be pro- 
duced in animals by inoculation; while the bacillus of leprosy is only 
with difficulty inoculable in the lower animals, and in man probably 
requires a certain predisposing condition, just as a phthisical tendency 
is usually necessary for the developmen: of consumption. The bacillus 
of leprosy is stained much more readily than that of tuberculosis. 

The material was procured in Vienna from which the bacillus leprae 
was obtained. . 


A New Wax Cell. 


Dr. S. E. Stiles, of Brooklyn, N. Y., has invented a new wax cell and 
demonstrated before the Microscopical Section of the Brooklyn Institute 
the method of constructing the cell and mounting of objects therein. 
The cell is both simple and effective. Sheet wax, such as is used by the 
makers of artificial flowers, is the material employed. Three or four 
sheets of different colors are pressed together by the thumb and finger 
to cause them to adhere, and a square of the combined sheet thus formed 
of sufficient size for a cell is cut out and pressed upon a glass slide. The 
slide is then placed upon a turn-table, when, by the use of an ordinary 
penknife, the wax is cut into a circular form, and the centre is cut out 
to the required depth. If the cell is to contain a transparent or translu- 
cent object, the entire central portion of the wax is removed; but if a 
ground is required for the object, one or more layers of wax are allowed 
to remain. A portion of the upper layer of wax is removed to form a 
rim for the reception of the cover glass. Where a black ground is re- 
quired, a small disk of black paper is pressed upon the lower layer of 
wax. The final finish is given to the cell by a coating of shellac varnish, 
applied while the slide is on the turn-table. These cells are very quickly 
made and have the finished appearance of cells formed of different col- 
ored cements. 


Bud Sectioning—The Shell-bark Hickory. 
By Dr. HENRY SHIMER, 
MT. CARROLL, ILL. 

Continuing the remarks published on page 104, it may be stated that 
the cross section, though not so beautiful, is as important as the longi- 
tudinal section. 

This bud is prepared by soaking it several days in water. The one 
we now section has been in cold water over two months, in a cold 
room, changing it twice a week. Now cut a section above the centre 
toward the apex ; the razor is well flooded with water and held horizon- 
tal. As the cut is being made the water flows into the segments of the 
bud leaves and holds them zz sz¢#. We now float the section off care- 
fully on the slide, and mount as before. Then cut away a portion of 
the bud and make another section near its middle, and so on down, 
making several sections at intervals until the base is reached. These 
several mounts give us a good understanding of the plan and arrange- 
ment of the bud leaves. In the long section the hairs are in place, but 
in the cross sections they are cut off and lying around like mown grass. 


1589.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 137 
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


PaTHoLocicaL MicroscoricaL CLius.—GEo. W. Lipsy, Secy. 


Worcester, Mass., jaz. 7, 7889.—Dr. Trowbridge read a paper 
on ‘* Ovarian Tumors.” The histological structure and ‘derivation of the 
cysts and contents were especially discussed. Fibro- -cyst of the uterus 
is very apt to be confounded with the ovarian, and the structure of this 
also was described. A recent specimen of the latter was shown, to- 
gether with slides showing structure and contents, and slides of the 
ordinary and papillomatous cystoma were presented. 

Jan. 15.—Dr. Jordan read an interesting paper on ‘‘ The Brain,” 
illustrating the subject by 30 or 4o slides, prepared by himself from 
various parts of both normal and pathologieal brains. 

Jan. 22.—Several gross specimens were presented; among them a 
cystic tumor, an enlarged prepatellar bursa, an anencephalous monster, 
and a papillomatous cancer of the cecum. The subject of the evening 
was ‘* Peritonitis.” 

Jan. 29.—Gross specimens were bones of a leg showing exastoses 
and a small bony cyst of the jaw containing hard rice-like Boe Sec- 
tions of a blood-clot, cysto-sarcoma of the uterus, and tumor of the 
kidney were shown. Dr. Miller then read his third paper on ‘+ Entozoa,” 
the topic this evening being ‘‘ Nematoda,” illustrated by specimens. 

Feb. 5.-- Sections from a set of organs, lung, liver, kidney, and in- 
testine, characterized by granular deceneration of the epithelium, es- 
pecially marked in the Fntecuines were exhibited by Dr. Libby. The 
lung showed purulent and fibrinous infiltration. The cause was pneu- 
monia, going on to suppuration and death. The ‘‘ Pathology of the 
Placenta ” was the subject of the evening’s discourse by Dr. Greene: 

Feb. 12.—A five-months’ foetus and a battle-door placenta were the 
specimens, and the subject ‘* Hydrocele.” The chemical and micros- 
copic characters of the fluid were a prominent feature of the evening’s 
study. 

Feb. 19.—Dr. Miller exhibited his new freezing microtome, explain- 
ing and illustrating its use. By this method we are able to get fresh 
microtome sections only a few hours after autopsy. The only prepar- 
ation needed is soaking the blocks for a few hours in a thick gum solu- 
tion. The histological structure is.well preserved. The sections stain 
well with carmine and the aniline dyes, but not with haematoxylon. 
The subject of ‘* Cystitis ” was then presented by Dr. W elch, 

Feb: 26.—Dr. Clark spoke on the subject of ** Epilepsy.” No uni- 
form lesions occur, but areas of occipital softening and capillary dila- 
tations in the medulla are sometimes found. A ‘spicule of bone near 
the second frontal convolution was the cause in a recent case. 

Mar. 5.—Dr. Getchell gave the anatomy of ‘** Tubercle.” He doubted 
that in all cases the ae Inne is the exciting cause. Cases occur where 
no bacilli can be found. In devoting our attention exclusively to the 
bacillus we had forgotten the importance of shreds of lung tissue in di- 
agnosis. These can always be found and are sure proof of phthisis. 
Cheesy degeneration is now thought to be caused by the chemical action 
of the microbe! It is not characteristic of tubercle alone. Numerous 
slides illustrating the subject were shown, besides slides of normal in- 


138 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ June, 


jected spleen, epithelioma of the lip, abscess of the kidney, and cervix 
uteri in anteflexion. 

Mar. 72.—Dr. Trowbridge presented the subject of ** Addison’s Dis- 
ease,” illustrating it by sections taken from a recent case, including skin, 
supra renal capsule, and kidney. Brown pigment occupying fie cells 
of the rete malpighii, and the usual appearance of tubercular matter in 
the supra renal capsule were very beautifully demonstrated. The kid- 
ney showed a small pus cavity (tubercular?) in one of the pyramids, 
and numerous small points of round-cell infiltration in the adjacent kid- 
ney substance. 


oO 


San Francisco, Cat.—C. P. Batszs, Secy. 


April 10, 1889.-—The announcement of a paper by A. B. Leckenby 
on the preparation and mounting of insects resulted in a large attend- 
ance. Mr. Leckenby spoke briefly of the difficulties experienced in 
manipulating the numerous forms of insect life for slide- mounting and 
lantern-projection. The method pursued by him embodies the result 
of many years’ labor. 

Starting with the Coleoptera, or beetle family, the first step is to de- 
vitalize ‘en quickly and while they are in flight, which he accom- 
plishes by dropping them through a long glass tube into boiling water. 
The ely tra and wings are by fp means immovably fixed in the extended 
position, and remain unaltered duri ing the subsequent operations. The 
body of the insect is then injected hy podermically with a strong solu- 
tion of caustic potash and allowed to remain three or four hours, then 
transferred to a glass slip and gentle pressure applied, when the viscera 
and other tissues for ming the interior of the body will be expelled. To 
dehydrate or remove ‘ine watery portion absolute alcohol is generally 
recommended, but the lecturer contended that it was expensive and not 
always at hand, while equally good results would follow by placing an 
ounce or two of refined gelatine i in a vessel, pouring on alcohol of 95 
per cent., and immersing the object for a short time—the gelatine, from 
its affinity for water, absorbing that fluid from both the object and al- 
cohol. The insect is then placed i in oil of cloves to clear or render it 
transparent, and is ready for mounting permanently in balsam. By this 
method the insect is rendered entirely 1 transparent, ‘the peculiar g seomet- 
rical markings of the wings, the abdominal and thoracic rings, Bae the 
various parts forming the ‘head and limbs are beautifully displayed. 

In preparing the Lepidoptera a somewhat different course is pur- 
sued, as the wings of all butterflies and moths, being covered with 

easily detached Realee. must be protected. The butterfly or moth is 
placed on a square of glass and liquid paraftine flowed carefully over 
the entire insect. After cooling, a small aperture is made, exposing a 
portion of the body, and caustic potash injected ; the subsequent oper- 
ations being the same as for beetles, excepting that sulphuric ether must 
be used to aiscoly. e off the paraftine, leaving the soft velvety covering of the 
wings unimpaired. In this manner are prepared the beetles, dr agon- 
flies. bees, wasps, caterpillars, etc., and when mounted in balsam they 
form some of the most beautiful and instructive objects imaginable, 
whether viewed through the microscope or projected on the screen. 


Mr. Leckenby Sone” many fine specimens, noticeable among which 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 139 


were a gigantic tarantula spider, several gorgeous members of the Pa- 
pilio genus, fierce-looking dragon-flies, beetles, wasps, and a large col- 
lection of small objects. 

The advisability of holding an annual reception was discussed, anda 
motion favorable to the proposition carried, the details to be arranged i in 
the near future. Dr. Harkness made some excellent remarks bearing 
on the subject of microscopical receptions here and in Europe, which 
were listened to with pleasure, and will probably be stored away in 
the memory of the prospective committee of arrangements. 

The acquisition to the library consisted of the asuall miscoscopical mis- 
cellany, while the cabinet was increased by a fine slide of Mentzelia 
from Colorado, donated by Mr. Leckenby. 

April 24, 1880. he regular meeting was held at the rooms, 120 
Sutter street, President Payz zant pr esiding. A fine series of photographs 
was exhibited, containing some graphic enlargements on the new East- 
man bromide paper. This process of enlarging on bromide paper, 
though quite recent, is very popular and produces excellent results, the 
effect, when exposure and negatives are properly manipulated, being 
almost equal to steel engraving. The bromide process commends itself 
to those interested in photo-micrography by its simplicity compared with 
the tedious work of printing from silver paper. 

Mr. Lickenby occupied most of the evening in concluding his prac- 
tical demonstration of preparing and mounting insects in halen. It 
is quite difficult in preparing many of the Sailer forms of insects to 
remove the debris from the surface of the specimen without injuring the 
delicate portions. This the gentleman accomplishes by the aid of albu- 
men, flowing the white of an egg over the object and immersing the 
slide in hot water till the albumen is coagulated, when it will generally 
crack open, and may be removed in ee portions, carrying with it all 
the foreign matter and leaving the surface of the specimen perfectly 
clean. Another thing strongly advocated is thorough washing of the 
objects in running w ater : ade a final rinsing in either ‘Filtered or distilled 
water before placing in alcohol. In mounting , the insect is placed under 
the cover-glass arranged in proper shape, the clearing solution applied, 
and when sufficiently transparent the oil of cloves is fcrained away and 
Canada balsam introduced at one edge of the cover-glass, the slide be- 
ing held over the flame of a lamp to gently warm the: balsam and allow 
it to flow in and displace the remaining oil of cloves. No annoyance 
need be felt at the presence of bubbles ai air, as they will gradually, dis- 
appear. The mount when filled with balsam is placed i in a warm oven 
or incubator and kept at a temperature of from 120° to 130° Fahrenheit 
for twenty-four hours, when the balsam will be thoroughly hardened 
and all the air bubbles driven out. Mr. Lickenby does not advocate the 
use of volatile solvents with balsam, he being convinced that a certain 
amount of gas is always retained in the mioune in a latent state, requir- 
ing only a slight amount of heat to produce bubbles and disfigure the 
specimen. The outer skeleton of insects is composed of a substance 
called chitine, which is quite unique in its chemical composition. It 
appears to be, within certain limits, very resistant to acids and alkalies, 
and it is owing to this fact that caustic potash can beused in such varying 
proportions in treating them for microscopicai study. It is said, how- 
ever, that chitine succumbs to the action of chlorine compounds, which 


140 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ June, 


would render that substance unfit for use in bleaching many of the del- 
icate forms. The Society tendered Mr. Lickenby a hearty vote of thanks 
for his skilful and instructive demonstrations. 

The members are strongly in favor of practical demonstrations and 
quite a discussion of the matter was indulged in, the result of which 
may be the inauguration of a movement that will tend greatly to arouse 
the zeal and add to the effectiveness of future microscopic work. 

Examples were shown of Pleurosigma angulatum, the negatives of 
which were taken at a magnification of sixteen hundred diameters. 

The donations to the library included a very satisfactory részmeé of 
the progress of microscopical investigation both at home and abroad. 


NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


The Etiology of Diphtheria: An experimental study by T. Mitchell 

Prudden. (Reprint from Am. Jour. Med. Sct.) pp. 50. 
This is the best American contribution thus far to the bacteriology of 
diphtheria. Dr. Prudden first reviews the work done in this field by 
Leffler, Klebs, Emmerich, Babes, Penzoldt, Frankel, D’Espine, V. 
Hoffmann. Roux, and Yersin. He then records his own observations 
on twenty-four fatal cases of diphtheria, giving in each case a brief 
clinical history, the results of the autopsy, and of microscopic examin- 
ation of affected organs. Then, in each case, careful cultures were 
made of the various bacteria present. 

In nearly every case immense numbers of streptococci were present. 
Bacilli were few. To such an extent did one form of streptococcus 
predominate over all other forms of bacterial life that Dr. Prudden is 
inclined to consider it the cause of diphtheria, at least in this series of 
cases. He also suspects it to be identical with the streptococcus of 
erysipelas and phlegmon. However, inoculations with pure cultures 
failed to produce anything that could fairly be called diphtheria in ani- 
mals. 

Not least in practical value are the experiments testing the power 
of various germicides. The accompanying colored plates are well ex- 
ecuted. The tone of the essay is philosophical and modest. When 
hundreds of series of such observations shall have been made, and 
when a medical Daniel shall arise competent to interpret their results, 
then shall we learn the nature and cause of diphtheria. 

oO 
Traité de Microscopie Médicale et Pharmaceutiqgue. By Aug. Zune. 
Bruxelles. 1889. pp. 136. 

This is prepared as a hand-book for druggists and doctors wishing to 
practise microscopy. It omits theoretical and historical matters, and 
presuming the reader ignorant of the microscope and its accessories, 
proceeds to instruct him in the most direct manner. It seems to have 
covered the essentials of the subject in good style. Naturally, it speaks 
only of European apparatus, and would not be useful to Americans. 
There are 41 illustrations. including all the principal European stands. 
The same author will follow with treatises upon various uses of the 
microscope in medicine and pharmacy. We shall look with much in- 
terest for these publications. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 141 


The Preferable Climate for Phthisis. By Charles Denison, M. D. 
(Reprint from the ‘* Transactions of the Ninth International Medi- 
cal Congress.”) Pp. 15. 

This is, practically, a plea for the climate of Colorado for cases of 
phthisis in the first stages, and the plea is a good one. The author ac- 
cepts with confidence the bacillus theory of Koch, and argues that the 
bacillus of phthisis works worse ravage in a moist, warm, dense, cloudy 
atmosphere with equable temperature than in one dry, cool, rare, and 
sunny with variable temperature. Further, that a clear atmosphere is 
better for the phthisical patient than the smoke of cities; a rocky or 
sandy soil better than wet clay ; mountains better than plains; frequent 
electrical changes better than continual stillness of the air; inland better 
than sea-shore. The argument is well sustained, and we believe that 
statistics thoroughly back the author’s statements. At the close are 
some contraindications for change to a high altitude, dictated by com- 
mon sense. 


o—— 
A Vocabulary to the First Six Books of Homer's Hliad. By Profes- 
sor Thomas D. Seymour. 120 pp. Ginn & Co., Boston. (75 cents.) 

Within a hundred pages (12 mo, nearly square) are given ‘al words 
that one needs. Not only the usual words, but mz any irregular forms 
are included and explained, as they should be. The two eeen illus- 
trations are picture definitions of words. This most admirable idea 
should be more fully carried out. Getting up several hundred such 
illustrations for the next vocabulary w ould be expensive, but would be 
advisable. This is the only improvement worth suggesting in the 
book, which pleases us very much indeed. 

) 

A Bee send of Rhetorical Analysis. By John F. Genung, Profes- 
sor of Rhetoric in Amherst College. 12°, 306 pp. Ginn & Co., 
Boston, —(Erice, $1.25.) 

The present Hand-book enables the student of rhetoric to study the 
principles of style and invention which characterize the writings of the 
great English prose masters without a long search through dusty volumes. 
One cannot become a writer, it is justly urged, by learning rules and read- 
ing ready-made opinions on style and invention ; he must have examples 
of many different styles before him in order that he may cultivate indi- 
viduality in his own writings. The aim of this book is to give a prac- 
tical answer to the question how to study literary models. 

Under the two heads of Studies in Style and Studies in Invention is 
given a series of selections from the best prose writers, including the 
well-known names of Bunyan, Ruskin, Carlyle, Huxley, Haw thorne, 
Arnold, De Quincy, Lowell, Addison, Scott, John Stuart Mill, Lord 
Macaulay , Curtis, and others. At the foot of each page are given com- 
plete notes, questions, and references, bringing out whatever is theoret- 
ically instructive therein; the whole is so arranged as to illustrate in 
progressive and cumulative order the various procedures of discourse, 
from simple choice of words up to the delicate inventive problems 
of narration and oratory. The lines are numbered for easy reference, 
and a Directory of Selections is also included. 

The clear type, skilful press-work, and neat binding of this volume 
reflect great credit on the publishers.—R. W. 8S. 


142 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [June, 


College Botany, including Organography, Vegetable Fiistology, 
Vege table Physiology, and Vegetable Taxonomy. By Edson S. 
Bastin. G. P. Englehard & Co. Chicago, 1889. Bes pp- 451. 
(Price $3.00.) 

From the above title it will be seen that the teaching of botany may 
now be revolutionized. Just as the first botanists, herpetologists, ich- 
thyologists, ornithologists, and mammalogists amused themselves with 

collecting, describing ‘by superficial ehanaceers: classifying, and identify- 

ing specimens, so fave we been too much in hie habit of rearing students 
to as the same. Our text-book makers have prepared books eat the 
above object in view and admitted that they had little better to offer. 

But such will be the case no longer. 

Here is a botany that actually gives us the science of plant life and 
how to study it in all its forms and phases. It introduces us to their 
minute structure, their organs, and the functions of all these organs. 
One may now study biology, the science of life, while dealing ee 
plants as effectively as if dealing with animals. One need no Jonger 
confine his botanical studies to collecting and identifying plants. This 
book of Prof. Bastin’s ought at once to super sede Gray’: s Botany in all 
the schools and colleges, bid even if Gray’s is to be used it should be 
only in connection with or after Bastin’s. This is saying that the student 
should now devote himself to acquiring a knowledge aa vegetable struc- 
ture as illustrated not only in flowering plants but in cry ptogams, ferns, 
‘alge, fungi, lichens, leaving the identification of genera and species to 
spare moments. The new method will lay for him the foundations of 
horticulture, agriculture, etc., as the old method never could do. 

You Have already suspected truly that to be a botanist of Bastin’s 
school one must be a microscopist to some extent. To provide for this 
he has included a chapter on the use of the microscope and its acces- 
sories. The 18 pages of small type devoted thereto are judiciously 
used. 

The whole volume is profusely illustrated, there being no less than 
579 figures. Let every teacher procure a specimen copy at once and 
put the new method into immediate use. 


—_—O0——_ 


Force and Energy; a Theory of Dynamics. By Grant Allen. 
Humboldt Publishing Co. New York, 18So. 

This octavo of 55 pages is the January number of a monthly period- 
ical which has now reached Number 106. It is offered at 15 cents per 
copy and should reach the hands of every physicist. Some of the 
earlier numbers relating to biological topics would prove valuable to 
our readers. A catalogue will be found in the April number. 

—— 

Essays on God and Man, or a Philosophical Inquiry tnto the Prin- 
ciples of Religion. By Rev. Henry Truro Bray, LL.D. St. 
Louis, 1888. 12°, pp. 270. 

This book is both radical and conservative in the best sense of these 
words. It goes to the root of matters, but only to find it, not to pull 
it up or from it away. On the themes of which it treats it presents 
the best that has been thought and written in every age. The style of 
the author is clear and strong, his temper judicial, his spirit reverent. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 143 


He has read widely, thought profoundly, and reasoned closely. The 
book is one that should be on the table of every religious student. It 
is simply invaluable as a book of reference. —A. KENT. 


NOTES. 


Albino Bees.—Mr. J. C. Robinson, of Richford, Ul., states in the 
Bee-Keeper’s Guide for Febyrary that a well-established breed of albino 
bees, originating in 1§72, is now recognized. 

Nervous Influence on Cell Life.—Dr. T. Wesley Mills, of Mc- 
Gill University, contributes to the Caxadzan Feecord of Sczencean able 
paper upon ‘‘The influence of the nervous system on cell life,’ in which 
he shows by a large array of facts that there is probably a very import- 
ant connection between the nerve influence upon the cells which make 
up the body and the proper development of those cells. The brief re- 
view of the article which our space would allow is entirely inadequate to 
give a clear idea of the reasoning of Dr, Mills. but we are constrained 
to say that his theory would explain many phenomena on the develop- 
ment of organs of the human body not now explained. The article is 
worthy a wide reading. 

The Discovery of the Microscope.—M. Govyi, an Italian savant, 
has presented a paper to the French Academy of Sciences, in which he 
claims for Galileo the distinction of having discovered the microscope 
as well as the telescope. He has found a book, printed in 1610, ac- 
cording to which Galileo had already directed his tube fitted with lenses 
to the observation of small near subjects. The philosopher himself 
stated shortly after this date that he had been able to observe through 
the lens the movements of minute animals and their organs of sense. 
In a letter written in 1614 to a Signor Tarde he states that he has with 
his microscope ‘‘ seen and observed flies as large as sheep, and how 
their bodies were covered with hairs, and they had sharp claws.” The 
date usually assigned to the discovery of the microscope is 1621, and 
the invention is attributed to Cornelius Drebbel, a Dutchman; but ac- 
cording to M. Govi the date must be thrown back eleven years, and the 
credit of the first construction awarded to Galileo. 


The Microscopical Diagnosis of Cancer.—Dr. Schaeffer, in a 
paper in the Jour. Am. Med. Ass'n for March 23, claims for the mi- 
¢roscope an important place in the diagnosis of cancer in its various 
forms. 

Ginn & Co. announce that the sixth volume of their Library of 
Anglo-Saxon Poetry, Cynewulf’s Elene, edited by Charles W. Kent, 
will be ready in May. The introduction will contain an account of the 
manuscript, author, sources, theme of poem, and versification, particu- 
larly of rhyme. The text is accompanied by the Latin original. The 
notes, intended as aids to the student, will be full. The glossary will 
be on the plan of Heyne’s Se ae 


Slides Received. 


We return thanks to the donors for the following interesting slides 
Chromate of Strichnia.—;z\, gr. strichnia Gon stomach of frog 
mounted in Damar. From L. A. Harding, Fergus Falls, Minn. 


144 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [June? 


Star- Fish.—l)orsal and ventral mounts. Prepared by J. D. King, 
Edgartown, Mass. 
Amphipleura pelluctda.—Dr. John Sloan, New Albany, Ind. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


[These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof.) 
FOR EXCHANGE. -—Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 


WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 

WANTED.—A clean copy of Rev. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atlas of the 
Diatomacez. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.— Diatomaceous Earth from Utah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD, Salt Lake City, Utah. 


CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 


WANTED.—Specimens of rocks for slicing and grinding into sections; also bones and teeth of differ- 
ent animals, diatons 7z s7tu on alge, diatomaceous and polycistinous earths, ocean soundings, etc., etc. 
Liberal exchange in microscopic slides or cash. 

ARTHUR J. DOHERTY, 63 Burlington St., Manchester, Eng. 

TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of p-trified wood—Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand ‘‘ Burt’s Solar Compass’’ complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second-hand, objectives, condensers, polarizers. stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. W.N.SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 

OFFERED.—Zeiss’ New Catalogue (in German) forwarded for 10 cents in stamps. 
F. J. EMMERICH & SONS, 43 Barclay St., New York City. 
FOR SALE.—Preparations of Diatoms, the work of I. D. Moller, at 10 cents per slide. 
E. A. SCHULTZE, Box 56, New York City. 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous earth from Thibet, various localities (12,000 feet); also, material and 
slides of diatoms from Scottish Highlands, and continental foraminifere. WANTED.—Slides of 
American diatoms, insects, or botany. 

W. D. STEWART, 2 Gilmore Terrace, Edinburgh, Scotland. 

OFFERED.—Sections of vegetable ivory and slides of crystalized maple sugar. _ Good mounts 
aken in exchange. WM. LIGHTON, 106 Fitth Avenue, Leavenworth, Kansas. 


WANTED.—Parasites and books on Parasites and other micro. subjects. Will give Anatomical, 
Pathologicai, Botanical, Micro-fungi, Zoophytes, Polycistine, Foraminitera, Parasites, and other slides 
in return. FRED. LEE CARTER, Gosforth, near Newcastle-on-Tyne, England. 


Wanted, Diatomaceous earth from Mégillanes, Bolivia, South America. Can give in exchange 
either Diatomaceous earth from New Zealand or cash. 
E. MICHALEK, I. Fleischemarkt, No. 1, Vienna, Austria. 
Mounted sections of Foetal Lung (5 months), sections across entire lobe. 5,55 in. thick, beautifully 
stained, in exchange for first-class pathological slides. 
W. C. BORDEN, M. D., U.S. A., Fort Douglas, Utah. 
Wanted, earths, recent diatoms, and miscellaneous objects for mounting. Only first-class material 
offered or desired. MARY A. BOOTH, Longmeadow, Mass. 


Fossil Diatamaceous deposits (marine) wanted from Bermuda, Virginia, Maryland, California, etc. 
I. ELLIOTT, Ardwyn Villa, Aberystwith, Wales, England. 


Labels for slides. EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, Ill. 


Correspondence relative to exchange in microscopical material or prepared mounts. 
HENRY L. OSBORN, Hamline, Minn. 


First-class Histological Slides for other good mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 
shares. S. G. SHANKS, M.D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N. Y. 
FOR EXCHANGE.—Diatomaceous earth from Richmond, Va., Nottingham, & Calvert Co., Md., 
Los Angeles and Santa Monica, Cal., for other diatomaceous material, crude or cleaned, recent or fossil 
(marine forms preferred), or for diatom or miscellaneous slides (only good mounts wanted). 
F. W. DUNNING, 37 Garrison Ave., Battle Creek, Mich. 
WANTED.—A set of Proceedings of the American Society of Microscopists. State price of set or 
of single volumes, kind of binding, etc. Also, any other microscopical periodicals. 
— P. O. BOX 630, Washington, D. C. 
WANTED.—Any works on Microscopy not already in my Library. 
. H. M. WHELPLEY, EF: R. M.’S:, St. Louis, Mo, 


a) 


i: ; 
GV. cogtractile vesicle. 


A TENTACLE-BEARING ANIMALCULE. 
MAGNIFIED 700 DIAMETERS. 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


Vou. X. JULY, 1889. No. 7. 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Amert- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Tribner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, London, accompanied by the yearly price of five shillings. 


Note on a Species of Podophrya found in Calceutta.* 
By W. J. SIMMONS, 


CALCUTTA, INDIA. 

All of us who have searched the Calcutta tank waters are familiar 
with numerous forms of ciliated and flagellate infusoria, but you will 
agree with me when I say that we less frequently meet with the tentacle- 
bearing animalcules. The organism I am about to describe belongs 
to the ‘Tentaculifera, and was found by me in a phial of water taken 
from the ‘* Teexcooniah (or triangular) Tank” at the head of Wood 
street. Our President sent me the bottle, which he had received from 
the Rev. Father Lafont, about the roth January. At that time the 
tank was covered with a red scum of / ugle ne, the organism which is 
referred to in Dr. D. D. Cunningham’s valu: ible memoir on ** The Re- 
lation. of Cholera to Schizomycete Organisms,” p. 10. The rain we 
had two or three weeks ago broke up this red scum, and when I visited 
the tank on Sunday w eek, the 3d instant, there was very little left 
(along the southern side of the tank), and in this scum a species of 
cyclops preponderated, while the Huwg7ex@ were less numerous and 
less active. To return, however, to the phial above referred to. On 
the 16th January I found the dusty debris, composed of decaying 
Fiuglene, etc., which lay at the bottom of the bottle, contained sever ral 
Podophrya, which I at once placed under observation and sketched. 
They bear a superficial resemblance to the Sun-animalcule, Acténophrys 
sol, but differ from it in that Ac¢énophrys is a free swimmer, while 
Podophrya i is fixed to a single, and, in the case of the species found 
by me, a slender stem. The hyaline rays or tenacles are numerous 
in this species, and are rather longer than the diameter of the body. 
The length of the body varies from about <4 ath to ;,3,,;th of an inch ; its 


breadth is about ;,/,,th, and the posteriorly attached stem averages 


* Read before the Microscopics al Society of Calcutta, on the r4th February, 1889. 


‘Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


146 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 


from about ;;4,;th to ,,/5,;th of an inch in length. The form of the 
body in some oF these infusiorians as observed by me was ovate, in others 
pear shaped, or pyriform; both forms are delineated in the plate. 
The color was whitish, the tentacles and pedicel being hyaline. At 
the point of junction with the body the pedicel i in some cases expanded 
abruptly, but not in the manner shown in Kent's illustration of P. 
Stezniz. Inone case only the tentacles presented a knobbed appearance, 
and in this instance one of them was curved over, as shown in frontis- 
piece fig. 1. Ehrenberg says it is interesting to see this animalcule 
seize its prey with its tentacula. I noticed several sfAzrzl/@ (with 
which the water abounded) and other minute particles adhere for a 
short time to a tentacle ; but as they always freed themselves without 
any apparent injury I did not regard this as the function observed by 
Ehrenberg, although the curved tentacle was eminently suggestive of 
the curving tentacles of Drosera; and, therefore, of the act of prehen- 
sion. The bodies of these infusoriansare filled with granular protoplasm, 
similar to that observable in many other animalculz, and each contains 
near its upper and free end an active contractile vesicle. In one the 
granular matter was centrally massed, as shown in one of my sketches. 
There are two or three points of general interest to w hich I may, 
perhaps, usefully refer in closing. The tentacles of Podophrya difler 
from those of the various species of Hydra, one of which Mr. Miles 
has given us an opportunity of observing to-night. In f/ydra the 
tentacles are studded with minute capsules Swiich ou a filament at 
the base of which there are four minute spines or barbs, employed by 
the animal to wound its. prey. There are also indications of formic 
acid in the capsules. In the Aczzete the tentacles bear no such cap- 
sules as occur in AZydra, but they possess a remarkable suctorial char- 
acter, which, however, has not been proved to exist in all the species. 
‘* When an infusorium touches the button-like end of the tentacle, it 
usually remains adherent to it; the end becoming still more dilated, so 
as to constitute a sucking disk, and the ray becomes thicker and shorter, 
the other rays at the same time making grasping movements and en- 
deavoring to attach their extremities to the captured prey. A current 
of chyme-particles is then seen running from the captured Infusorium 
into the body of the Aczzeta. The “chyme- -particles form at first a 
slender row, but afterwards collect ina drop. The body of the Aczzeta 
ta becomes opaque from the collection of the drops.” (Mic. Dict., 
. 11.) Next, as to the contractile vesicle, I would refer those who 
ae wish to study this important subject to Pritchard’s Infusoria, p. 
312, 4th edition; the Micrographic Dictionary, p. 418, and, necessarily, 
to Kent’s Infusoria, p- 69. Lastly, as to the place to be assigned to 
Lodophrya in classificatory systems, chapter vi, of Kent’s w aie and 
his remarks in chapter ix (on the Class Tentaculifera: Huxley), will 
be found useful ; though I would also suggest a reference to the articles 
in the Microgr aphic Dictionary on Rhkzzopoda, Radiolaria, Acinetina, 
Actinophryina, and Podophrya. 


Dr. Lustig, an Italian physiologist, has found in the liver of mus- 
sels two kinds of micro-organisms—one harmless, the other v ery deadly. 
In the stomach of small pauls the latter caused death in 24 ‘hours. 


1889.] * MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 147 


Elementary Histological Studies of the Cray-fish—XIII. 
By HENRY LESLIE OSBORN, 


HAMLINE, MINN. 


CHAPTER V.—THE EYE.—( Concluded.) 

4. The Stalk. 

1. The Epidermis.—A little in front of the basilar membrane a 
great thickening of the epidermis may be seen suddenly to take place. 
Here the ordinary calcareous shelly matter of the general surface com- 
mences and it forms the coating of the stalk. It, with the cornea, is 
shed when the peculiar process of moulting or shedding takes place 
and a new epidermis takes its place, secreted from the layer next be- 
neath. 

2. Lhe Hypodermzs.—This is the living tissue of the skin, that from 
which the efédermzs is produced. It presents no features which re- 
quire our attention. 

3. The Optic Nerve.—The centre of the stalk is occupied by two 
kinds of tissue—connective tissue, an inert body used here and every- 
where as a skeleton or framework to support the delicate active tissue, 
the nerve-bundle. This in the lower portion of the stall is composed 
of fine parallel fibres, the nerve-fibres, extremely fine bodies traversing 
the body from the anterior chamber of the eye to the brain. These 
threads are too delicate and easily injured to show very well in prep- 
arations. 

4. The ganglion cells —Along the nerve trunk, at various places, 
and particularly the border, pear- “shaped bodies may be discovered. If 
these are carefully examined under a high power they are seen to be 
very granular and well stained and to contain a round body or nucleus, 
less stained but containing numerous very deeply stained particles. 
These masses of cells may eho cell outlines only indistinctly or may 
show them more clearly as in Fig. 3. (Plate in February number.) 
In Fig. 2 one of these cells is shown and bits of nerve fibres. 

5. Near the basilar membrane nerve-fibre matter, as at 1 and 4, seems 
to be interrupted by finely granular matter not arranged as through 
most of the length of the nerve. 

6. Muscles.—Outside the optic nerve, between it and the hypo- 
dermis, may be seen ribbands of striped muscular tissue. 

5. The Interpretation of the observations.—The physiologist 
is always upon dangerous ground when he undertakes to interpret 
from the appearances of sections to the anatomy of organs and then to 
their mode of working. Some of the facts in the structure of the eye 
we can readily reconstruct from our sections; the cylindrical stalk and 
hemispherical anterior chamber, the central nerve and the muscles, the 
uses of these parts to the muscles for producing the motions of the eye, 
which we notice so quickly on observing the living creature. But the 
nervous parts are more puzzling. The basilar membrane is probably 
a connective tissue substance of somewhat more compact nature than 
that below, to help keep in place the rods; the ganglion cells of the 
nerve are connected with the work of transmitting nerve impulses when 
once they are started in the nerves. 

The diagram, Fig. 5, gives from Patten* a view of the eye as under- 


* American Journal of Morphology, vol. i, p. gz. 


148 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY > [July, 


stood by him, and we can read from our Figures 4 and 6 as is done by 
the referencing in the plate. “According to the results of his studies a 
single nerve fibre passes up through the centre of the crystalline rod, 

which is composed of four bodies or rods placed together so as to sur- 
round the axial nerve. The outer end of the rod comes close against 
the corneal facet, which, like the rod, is square across. The lower part 
of the rod is composed of parts of varying density, and these give the 
peculiar appearance to the pedicle. The rod is surrounded by two sets 
of pigment bearing cells, one of which surrounds the base or pedicle, 
and the other the crystalline cone, The former are called retinule. In 
Figure 4 they appear to be very considerably shrunken. According to 
Patten the pigment is collected in only part of a cell which runs up a 
thin thread to the corneal hypodermis. In a row outside the eight retin- 
ulz stand four pigment cell embracing the corneal hypodermis. These 
are shown in Figure 6. These, according to Patten, are collocations of 
pigment in the outer portion of very fine threads which run the entire 
distance from the corneal hy podermis to the basilar membrane. In 
Huxley’s account (Vide Cray-fish, p. 119) the parts seem to compare 
with Fig. 1, as follows: 

Outer dark zone=pigment cells ; outer white zone=space between 
pigment cells and retinule; middle dark zone = retinule ; striated 
spindles=pedicles ; crystalline cones=crystalline cones. 

While it is possible in a vague and general way to assign uses for 
some of the parts of this very complex apparatus, it is not easy to be 
specific. We may say that the corneal facets by their convexity act as 
lenses and intensify the action of the rays of light by causing more of 
them to act at once. The crystalline cone by some means comes be- 
tween the light stimuli and the nerve, which latter without it would not 
be roused to activity by so weak a stimulation; but how does the rod 
do that? Perhaps the outer pigment cells prevent the passage of light 
from cone to cone, an event which we can easily see would greatly in- 
terfere with the localization necessary to distinct vision, but there is no 
evidence that the cray-fish has distinct vision. Perhaps the inner pig- 
ment cells are the seat of chemical changes which act as stimuli to the 
crystalline rods. If so, why do the nerves run to the summits of the 
cones as they seem to do from the most careful studies? It is not pos- 
sible to positively say exactly what part each of these structures plays 
in the cray-fish vision. 

We may, however, notice in general that this complicated system of 
parts connected with the end of the sensor y nerve is correl: ated with 
other structures of various nature which have the common quality of 
being apparatuses for the treatment of excitations as of light or sound, 
which if left to operate upon a bare nerve would be too feeble to affect 
it. Such are known as sensory end organs; ears and touch organs, 
and taste organs, as well as eyes, are constructed so as to utilize this 
principle. 

Conclusion. aper will conclude the series on the cray- 
fish, it is proper that before leaving the subject a few closing remarks 
be made. The method of treatment in the series has been 1 rambling 
but not incoherent, for, as stated in the outset, the intention has been 
to illustrate the method of histological study rather than to make a 
systematic course in histology. The comparative simplicity of some 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 149 


of the organs chosen for the early studies make them especially 
valuable and convenient for the beginner in histology. Our normal 
vision unites so much acquired perception with the direct sensation that 
we do not realize how much more we think than we really see. The 
microscope requires the beginner to enter a realm where a new series 
of acquired perceptions must be learned, and hence the value of as sim- 
ple objects as possible at the outset. 

We have examined cells like the green gland, liver, and intestine 
cells which were secretive in function; the intestinal muscle, motor in 
function; have studied the ovary with the peculiar egg-cell, the eye 
with the peculiarities of a sense organ. Muscle and nerve histology 
are, however, virtually not entered upon by the course. A systematic 
course ought to include them. The original plan included studies upon 
material by means of teasing from fresh material, but these studies must 
be deferred. In place of them we hope soon to present a new course 
of systematic studies upon mammalian histology. The studies will all 
of them be as simple as possible, and within the grasp of elementary 
workers. 

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATE IN FEBRUARY NUMBER. 


Fic. 1. Longitudinal section of the entireeye and cu. Cuticle. 


stalk of a small cray-fish. G. c. Ganglion cell. 
Fic. 2. Ganglionic matter from optic ganglion. Gn. Optic nerve ganglion. 
Fic. 3. Polar nerve cells from the optic ganglion. h. Hypodermis. 
Fie. 4. Crystalline cone (from Fig. 1). n. Nucleus of polar ganglion cell. 
Fic. 5. Ideal plan of end organ of optic nerve with n. f. Optic nerve fibres. 
accessories (from Patten). n. 1. Nucleolus of polar ganglion cell. 
Fic. 6. Actual section from end of optic nerve. nn. Naked (?) nucleus. 
References by letters, etc., as follows : o. Optic nerve. 
Ax. n. Axial nerve fibre of cry stalline rod. Ped. Pedicle. \ 
Bac. Bacillus. Pig. Pigment cell. 
B. m. Basilar membrane. Ret. Retinula. 
c. c. Corneal cuticle. Sp. Narrowed spindle of cone. 
c. h. Corneal hypodermis. I, 2,3, 4. Portions of Optic nerve ganglion. 


Cr. c. Crystalline cone. 


Hints on Mounting Objects in Farrant’s Medium. 
By C. M. VORCE, 


CLEVELAND, OHIO. 


Attention is being turned again to this old but too much neglected 
medium, the preparation of which on all the published formule is at- 
tended with much trouble and vexation. The chief difficulty is in fil- 
tering the viscous mass, for, notwithstanding the caution always given 
against stirring the mass to mix it thoro ughly, in my own experience 
the bubbles formed in stirr ing have unifor mly disappeared on long stand- 
ing ina warm room. Air bubbles in the completed mount, however, 
exhibit all the obstinacy with which they have been credited when the 
mass is prepared on the formula commonly given, viz: two parts each 
by weight of gum acacia and distilled water, and one part of glycerin. 
The gum is dissolved in the water, the glycerin added, the mass fil- 
tered and a little camphor added to prevent mould. This makes a quite 
viscous mass which quickly dries around the edge of the cover, but 
from which air bubbles cannot be driven out nor poked out if once 
imprisoned under the cover. 

For such objects as are usually mounted in pure glycerin a much 
thinner preparation of Farrant’s medium is very convenient, and is 
made by simply increasing the proportion of glycerin to gum. An- 


150 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 


other useful medium, which dries readily but shrinks more than the 
others, is made by taking by weight 6 parts gum, 4 parts white sugar, 
16 parts water, and 6 parts glycerin, prepared as described. A still 
further modification is made by taking 8 parts gum, 4 parts white sugar, 
2 parts gelatine, 20 parts water and. 12 parts glycerin. Dissolve “the 
gelatine first, then add the gum and sugar, and lastly, the glycerin. 
This mass never dries completely hard. but only to a tough, ‘leathery 
consistence. In all cases a little gum camphor, phenol, Clove oil, or 
thymol should be added to the completed mass to prevent fungoid 
growth. 

In the preparation of Farrant’s: medium on any formula, much time 
and annoyance may be saved by making the watery solution of gum, 
etc., much thinner than it is required to be, and after filtration evapo- 

rating it to the consistence desired and then adding the glycerin. I 
always add to the water in the beginning an ounce or so OF a weak 
solution of chloral hydrate, and add gum “thy mol to the finished mass, 
a piece the size of a large pin head will do for an ounce of medium. 

In mounting in any of these gum media, much trouble is saved by 
first macerating the object in some of the thin medium for a longer or 
shorter time according to its nature—longer for dense objects than for 
thin ones—and then arranging the object on the slip in some of the 
thin medium, allowing most of the water to evaporate (protected from 
dust), and en adding the thick medium and applying the cover, 
using a light spring clip to retain it in place. Air bubbles will not be 
included by this method. 

If a surplus of the medium was used so that much has escaped 
around the cover, this excess should be cleaned away within 24 hours 
after the cover was placed, while it is still softand tozz oh. Tf the cleaning 
is delayed until the mass outside the cover is hard, ‘the cover will often 
be moved or pulled out of position by the removal of the outer mass. 
As soon as the partially cleaned slide has become quite dry, the slip 
should be placed on a turntable, and the slide cleaned close up to the 
cover, using a knife blade or chisel-point to cut away the gum, and a 
moist rag or folded blotter to finish. Then add successive finishing 
rings of some resinous cement. Objects thus mounted will prove as 
durable as balsam mounts; there will be no shrinking or distortion of 
‘soft parts as often occurs with objects in glycerin; the most delicate 
and colorless of structural details are well shown, and the objects 
photograph extremely well. 

Air bubbles need not be included in the mount, but if unfortunately 
present they may be removed by placing the slide ina beaker or glass 
vessel in which it can lie flat, putting in distilled water to cover the 
slide, and after standing a few minutes place the vessel on a sand bath, 
when the bubbles will soon emerge from under the cover and rise to 
the surface of the water, the slide is then to be carefully removed, wiped, 
and some of the thick medium spun round outside the edge of the cover, 
which will, in drying, fill the space under the cover without admitting 
any air. This is much better than to remove the cover or to try to 
poke out the bubbles, as the removal or displacement of the cover is 
very liable to tangle up and destroy the object. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 151 


Short Notes in Practical Biology —Ameba. 
By VIDA A. LATHAM, BR Nien Se, 
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN. 

In this paper will be given a few short and concise hints to students 
who may be interested in this pleasant study, as the summer will afford 
a good time for material. I have often found that students who, if pos- 
sible, caz stay indoors will try to get out for a walk when some slight 
inducement be given them or “there j is an object to be found. Not only 
does this endee a walk pleasant, but it impr oves one’s health and spir its, 
and, what is more, it cultivates observation and patience. 

Definition. — Biology is the study of living things.  %:og=li 
doyos==science. Without pausing to discuss the exact meaning of the 
word ‘‘ life,” we agree that biology is the study of those forms “of mat- 
ter that are by common consent called livi ing. 

Plan of Work. —Nothing should be more strongly impressed upon 
the young student than the? necessity of system in his work. There 
should bel a place for every newly- -acquired fact, whether it be gained 
by reading, from a lecture, or from the observation of the student him- 
self. He should accustom himself to Say as each acquisition is made, 
‘* that fact belongs to such a division of my plan, fits in under such and 
such a head.” Mine adoption of such a plan aids in the following ways: 
(1) By fixing the fact more firmly in the mind, for the very ‘effort to 
think where ine fact is to be located concentrates attention more fully 
upon it and renders it more easily remembered; (2) by rendering the 
student more able to recall any special fact that may be required ; by 
enabling him in an examination to reproduce his knowledge with much 
greater readiness. Asked for the life-history of a hy dra, | he has not to 
rack his brain in frenzied fashion in order to collect a number of isolated 
facts, but goes steadily through his plan placing truths under their re- 
spective bends, and finds at fhie end that nothing of importance has been 
omitted. I use the following outline, onic may be altered to suit 
requirements : 

(a) Structure, (4) digestion, (c) absorption, (@) circulation, (e) 
respiration, (f/f) secretion, (g) nervous system, (/%) sense organs, (7) 
motor organs, (4) reproduction, (7) development, (7) classification. 

eecal Work.— Every plant or animal must be seen, examined, 
dissected, and drawn. 

Ameeba—a Protozoon (ay2:30=I change)—is an animal which con- 
sists of only one cell, the equivalent of a single cell of any of the tis- 
sues of a higher animal. 


@. STRUCTURE. 

I. Occurrence.—Ameeba may be found in sea water and in fresh, 
stagnant water, in mud, in damp earth. They can be obtained by ex- 
posing a piece of raw meat covered with a little water to the sunlight 
until all the water has nearly evaporated. They may then be found in 
the small quantity of water ‘left, or by mincing very ‘small portions of 
the surface of the meat with water. When a small quantity of the 
material containing Amcebe is introduced into a glass aquarium and 
some fresh water added a thin film usually appears on the surface of 
the water. This film is usually composed of small organisms, some 
of which are likely to be Ame@ba. Take witha pipette a small portion 
of the film, allow a drop to fall on a glass slide. Lay a narrow strip 


152 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 


of moistened writing paper near to the drop, apply a cover glass so 
that one edge rests on the paper. I have written may because Ameebz 
are very uncertain beings, and one may go for a long time without meet- 
ing with any, and at eke times have a rich supply. When these 
fail the student, the white blood corpuscles will do very well as a sub- 
stitute, and they can always be obtained without much difficulty. It is 
possible that some Ameebe at least are only stages in the life- history of 
other organisms. 

II. S¢ze.—This varies—the average diameter being 5 m.m. But it 
must be remembered that the different diameters of an Amceba are 
not always the same length. It may be at times much broader or longer 
in one direction than in Baebes 

Ill. General Structure.—It consists of an irregular mass of proto- 
plasm, but the protoplasm is to some extent differentiated, for nearer 
the centre of the Amceba it is more granular and fluid than near the 
circumference; hence, we cail the inner, more granular, more fluid 
part, the endosare (<dvyv=within, s4pi—flesh), the outer, less gran- 
ular and more solid part, the ectosare (<z7vy»=without). Yet. Amaeba 
is without a distinct wall or membrane. Its ectosarc is only a filmy, 
rather more condensed part of the protoplasm of which the Amaeba 
is made up. Within the endosarc is a more condensed part of the pro- 
toplasm, the nucleus or endoplast. At times within this the student 
may recognize a rounded granule, the nucleolus or endoplastule (ula=a 
diminutive ending). , 

IV. Forms of Amebe.— Some Amecebe have shell-like coverings. 
At times they become surrounded by a sac not unlike the gelatinous in- 
vestment seen in the still or zooglaa stage of bacteria. Then they are 
said to be encysted. Lastly, nerhen special form of this organism is 
occasionally seen, in which the distinction between ecto- and en- 
dosarc is but little marked, and the granular structure is not so evident 
(Amoeba radiosa). 

6. DIGESTION. 


The food of the Ameeba is mostly vegetable. Low, minute forms 
of alge, water plants low in the scale of vegetable life, are the staple 
pore scuble These are taken in by a Ponte aioe mechanism. If a 
particle of food is near an Amoeba, “that part of the body of the latter 
which is nearest to the former is protruded as a pseudopodium. This 
touches the food particle which adheres to it, and as the pseudopodium 
shortens and is withdrawn to the body of the Ameeba, once again the 
food goes with it, and is slowly drawn into the endosarc. There is no 
mouth. There is not even a defined region that is to serve always as 
the temporary mouth. Any part of tei body may be pushed out and 
may seize food. This latter, once within the endosarc. passes slowly 
through the body of protoplasm, growing smaller and smaller, and, 
after awhile, such portion of it as is OE geen by the Ameeba is aktenticd 
at an indefinite point on the general surface ‘of the body. It will be 
noticed that here is an advance on the ingestion of food by bacteria, for, 
in these last, all the surface is Honteen ade but in the Ameba only a 
part of the surface is concerned in the taking in of any special food 
piece. This part may be at any region. There is a clear advance in 
differentiation. Amba gets its organic food-stuff ready made. The 
tiny vegetable things it eats have beforehand fashioned out of mineral 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 153 


things an organic food-stuff, to be devoured in its turn by our Ameeba. 
Now the bacteria can make their protoplasm out of mineral matter. 
Whether we, therefore, consider the nature of the food, or the manner 
of taking it into the body, Amcebe present a very marked advance upon 
bacteria, 

Cc. ABSORPTION. 


Again, here is a slight advance. In bacteria this function is blended 
with that of digestion. But here, after the food has been digested, and 
whilst it is passing through the protoplasm, or endosarc of tie Ameeba, 
the endosarc that immediately surrounds the food particle as it goes on 
its way must absorb nutritious parts and transmit them to the distant 
regions of the protoplasm. Thus, even here, far down in the animal 
kingdom occurs a simple rudimentary but distinct act of absorption. 


€. RESPIRATION. 


All that applies as to the breathing of bacterium is found in Ameeba. 
The respiratory organs are the whole body surface. No special part is 
yet devoted to the aeaan of breathing. By the whole surface, O is 
taken in and C O, given out. And here it will be well to pause for a 
moment and call the attention of the student to a great principle. The 
lower we descend in our study of living things the more do we find 
every function performed indifferently by every part. Nothing is spe- 
cialized. The whole body of cells breathes, ‘reproduces. But as we 
ascend in our study, certain parts of the body take to themselves certain 
definite functions, and the higher wwe e ascend the 1ore complex is this 
** physiological division of labor.’ 

But whilst bacterium only breathes by its general surface Amceba has 
a special organ for respiration. If the Ameba be c carefully watched 
for awhile in the ectosarc region, a contraction and expansion occurring 
consecutively will be seen, as if a round window were opening and 
shutting in steady succession. Now there is a clear round space in the 
ectosarc, and now the space is lessening and lessening until it becomes 
a mere speck, and at last has disappeared altogether. Presently, at 
exactly the same spot, the mere speck will reappear and gradually en- 
large until it is a clear round space once more. This space contracting 
and expanding is called the conxtractzle vesicle. As it contracts, it 
would seem as if lines radiated from it into the surrounding sarcode or 
protoplasm. This much is certain. That which follows is not so as- 
sured. But probably this system of a central space and of canals pos- 
sibly radiating thence into the protoplasm around is full of water that 
has air dissolved in it; ; and probably the system communicates with the 
exterior so that the water can be changed. These probabilities are based 
on the knowledge of certain facts known in connection with kindred 
structures in higher animals. If, then, we have here a pulsating cent- 
ral vesicle with radiating spaces passing thence, and if the whole system 
contains water holding air in solution, it is possible that thus oxygen is 
given up to the living active protoplasm into the midst of which the 
water is pumped, and that the carbon dioxide, that is the chief product 
of its waste, is removed thence. It is on these grounds that the con- 
tractile vesicle is regarded as respiratory. Sometimes this structure 
appears to consist of two or more vesicles that contract as the canals 
radiating from them expand. 


Lis 


154 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 


Z. MOTOR ORGANS. 

Pseudopodia act as motor organs, for if one of them is protruded 
from some region of the body of the Ameeba, it may be fixed at its 
distal end, z. e., at the end remote from the Amaeban body, and then the 
whole of the rest of that body can be drawn up to the fixed part. 
Thus a crude sort of locomotion may be effected. The pseudopodia 
are at first wholly of ectosarc. After they have been extended for a 
little while the endosarc flows into the extension of the outer proto- 
plasm. It is from the numerous changes of form resulting from these 
extrusions and retractions that the Amoeba takes its name of ‘* Proteus 
Animalcule,” as Proteus was the shepherd of Neptune, and, much 
hunted, unfortunate that he was, found it necessary to assume manifold 
shapes for purposes of disguise. In some Amabe the pseudopodia 
are confined to one region of the body of the Amaeba. 

k&. REPRODUCTION. 

Only agamogenesis is known positively. The special form of a 
sexual reproduction that appears to be customary is fission or splitting. 
One Ameeba is divided into two or more small pieces. Sometimes 
this division is preceded by encystation, and the Ameeba first surrounds 
itself with a gelatinous envelope and then splits up. 


2, DEVELOPMENT. 
As this act produces at once a being of the same nature as the parent 
form nothing can be said under this head. 


m. CLASSIFICATION. 

As Amoeba feeds on organic things, it belongs to the kingdom 
ANIMALIA. As it is not made up of two or more cells, it belongs 
to the sub-kingdom PROTOZOA (zpwtos = first, fvov = animal). 
As it has pseudopodia, it is of the class RHIZOPODA (pita = root, 
zovs = foot). As its pseudopodium is broad, it is a member of the 


order LOBOSA. Genus Amedba. 


PRACTICAL WORK AND SUMMARY. 
A. Observe: 1. That the body consists of—(a@) A central mass of 
granular protoplasm (endosarc) which extends into some of the pseu- 
dopodia, and usually contains a nucleus, a contractile vacuole, and food 


particles. (6). A thin, almost transparent, outer film (ectosarc) 
which contains few granules. 2. The change in form, appearance and 


disappearance of pseudopodia, and the movements of the granules. 
Note that the pseudopodia seems at first to consist only of ectosare, but 
that as some of them increase in size the granular endosarc flows into 
them, and further that a pseudopodium may throw out new processes, 
and then advance, dragging, and ultimately completely absorbing the 
body and processes behind it. 

£&B. Draw an Ameeba at intervals of one or two minutes to show the 
changes of form, and indicate by arrows the directions of the currents 
of the granules. 

G. Heomines 1. The food particles, note they usually lie at first in 
a small quantity of water (food vacuole), and the food may consist of 
minute plants or animals, and that in addition to food there are often 
grains of sand and other substances. Study the process of ingestion 
of food particles and the expulsion of the non-nutritious particles, and 
note that they enter or escape from any part of surface. . The con- 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 155 


tractile vacuole, if visible, and watch its pulsations. 3. The nucleus 
which may be made more distinct by adding a drop of acetic acid (1%) 
to the preparation, or staining with magenta. The magenta stain is 
made by dissolving .6 grm. crystallized magenta (rosein) in 1 litre 


° 5 J 
water. Add 6 cc. absolute alcohol. 

D. Add to one of the drawings the nucleus, the contractile vacuole, 
also the food vacuoles, and any foreign substances which may be present. 

F. Look for encysted Amcebe and for the Amcbz in process of 
division by transverse fission. 

F. Feed with indigo or carmine, or other finely powdered pigment, 
and note that food is taken in at all parts of the surface. 

Staining Nuclei of Protozoa.—Fix on a slide by means of a drop 
of alcohol drawn under the cover. Then draw in water, then saturated 
solution of picro-carmine, and then, after a few minutes, glacial acetic 
acid. Glycerin being then added, a permanent mount is made. In- 
stead of alcohol, exposure for one minute to the vapor of a 1% solution 
of O, O, may be used for fixing; but the action of the picro-carmine 
must be prolonged. - I have seen and used it for steutor, kondylostoma, 
spirostomum, etc., also for protophyta, volveeina, fungi, etc. The par- 
ticular object is to demonstrate the nuclei. 

Staining with Methylen- Blue.—(Certes, /6¢d., 82, 2d seri., p. 464.) 
This stains living protoplasm. Place a drop of alcoholic solution ona 
slide and allow to evaporate. When evaporation is nearly complete, 
adda drop of the liquid containing the organisms. As soon as the 
staining is complete (which is very quick) the drop must be caused to 
flow away from the spot where the crystals are deposited, and may be 
covered and examined. 

Mounting Amebe.—l\ use a 2% solution of chromic acid, and allow 
it to act for 2 or 3 minutes, and follow by successive drops of water, 
70% alcohol, 90% alcohol, and water. Then stain preparation for 1} 
to 2 hours in a moist chamber with a drop of Weigert’s picro-carmine. 
Wash out with 70% alcohol, follow with 90%, then absolute alcohol, 
clove oil, and balsam. 

Bibliography.—Huxley & Martin’s Biology. Marshall & Hurst’s 


Practical Zodlogy. Sedgwick & Wilson’s Biology. McAlpine’s 
Biological Atlas. J. B. Howe’s Biological Atlas. Am. Monthly 


Micros. Fournal, vol. 9, p. 91. 


Ann ArzBor, MIcH., June 16, 1889. 


Portable Microscope.—Dr. Ludwig Klein, of Freburg, Germany, 
has devised a portable microscope for use in field collecting of alge or 
other microscopic material. Much good material is lost, and much 
poor material is saved, because of the difficulty of microscopic exami- 
nation on the spot; the laboratory microscopes being obviously unfit 
for field work. His instrument is a collar carrying a tube into which 
any objective can be screwed, a stage and a sub-stage mirror, all fastened 
through a device for clamping them to an ordinary walking stick. The 
stand without objective or oculars costs 25 marks, or about $5.00. 


Paste.—A good paste for paper on glass or metal is made by dis- 
solving 4 oz. of gum tragacanth and 2 ozs. of gum acacia in 4 ozs. of 
water, straining, and adding 2 ozs. of glycerin containing 7 grains of 
thymol as a preservative. Then make up to a pint with water.—H. 


156 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 


The American Society of Microscopists. 
By Dr. WM. J. LEWIS, PRESIDENT. 

The American Society of Microscopists will hold its twelfth annual 
meeting in Buffalo, N. Y., beginning Tuesday morning, August 20, 
1889, se continuing four days. From the correspondence received by 
the officers of the organization, a large attendance is already assured. 
The time set is the week preceding the meeting of the American Asso- 
ciation, which will be held in Toronto, Ontario. thereby giving those 
who are members of both organizations an opportunity to nena the 
meetings with no loss of ane. and at a minimum expense, Toronto 
being accessible by both rail and water and but a few hours distant 
Gon Buffalo. 

We are pleased to announce that all outstanding bills of the society 
have been paid, and it is hoped that the Treasurer’s report will soon 
show a credit cash balance. The Spencer- -Tolles fund, already amount- 
ing to over two hundred dollars, 1 is safely invested and yielding an in- 
come of seven per cent. It is hoped this memorial fund will be largely 
augmented at our next meeting. 

Special arrangements have been made for the display of instruments 
by dealers, and a large exhibition is guaranteed. This feature offers an 
opportunity to those members living at a distance from our large cities 
to become familiar with the comparative merits of European and 
American stands and the distinctive features of each. The regular 
sessions will be held in the Buffalo Library Building, which place has 
also been designated for headquarters. 

Those members of the society who expect to present papers, and have 
not yet notified the Secretary, are requested to communicate with him 
at once, sending the title, and if possible a brief abstract of their articles, 
in order that the programme may be arranged in advance. _ It is also 
asked that such papers be completed before the close of the meeting, 
together with drawings for illustration when necessary, that they may 
mee left with the Secretary i in order to facilitate the prompt publication 
of the next volume of proceedings. 

It is urgently requested that members bring their microscopes with 
them for use during the sessions and at the soirée. Arrangements 
have been made for the storage of instruments on the check system in 
the fire-proof Library Building, in charge of a competent person, where 
they may be obtained any Sie beaween the hours of 7 A. M. and 12 
Pew: 

The local committee on hotel accommodation announce that reduced 
rates will be given to members at the new fire-proof Hotel Iroquois. 
Rates at the Tifft House and the Genesee are from three to five dollars 
per day, according to location of room. Arrangements have also been 
made whereby members may be accommodated ina few large and well- 
conducted boarding-houses, where good board and pleasant rooms may 
be obtained for one dollar per day, with extra accommodations at a 
slightly advanced rate. Those w ishing to take advantage of the special 
terms offered are requested to Communica with the Secretary of the 
Hotel Committee, Dr. Louis A. Bull, care the Buffalo Library Build- 

ing, stating the price they are willing to pay. <A circular giving de- 
tailed arrangements will be shortly eared by the local committee. 

Hartrorp, Conn., june 27, 1889. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 157 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


Electric Light in Marine Collecting: —The Liverpool Marine 
Biology Committee, during the month of April last, repeated the experi- 
ments of last year, with some variations, to dete mine the effect of a 
powerful electric light upon the animals that are taken by various forms 
of collecting apparatus. After dark two arc lights of 2000 candle power 

each were suspended over the deck of the steamer used by the Com- 
mittee and incandescent lights of 50 candle power were fastened in the 
mouths of the nets that were to be used for collection below the surface. 

Both the surface and deeper collections showed a much larger propor- 
tion of crustaceans than in collections made in the same place the pre- 
vious day. Cumacea were particularly abundant in these collections, 
though almost entirely wanting in collections made during the day. 
The reports do not state slieinies or not collections were aaeals at similar 
times without the electric lights. 


gun 

Experiment Station Work.— The American Naturalist for 
March contains a summary of recent reports of the various experiment 
stations as regards botanical investigations. We give those of special 
interest to our readers, and the ctation and number of the bulletin in 
which they are found: 

*« The Structure of the Potato Tuber,” Indiana, No. 15 (Prof. J. C. 
Arthur). 

‘¢ A Popular Account of the Organs for the Fertilization of Plants, 
with Special Reference to the Artificial Pollination of Cultivated 
Plants,” Minnesota, July, 1888. 

‘¢ Fungi which Kill Insects,” Minnesota, No. 4 (Otto Lugger). 

‘*¢ Chinch-bug Diseases (Ampusa sp. and Micrococcus tnsectorum) ,” 
Iowa, November (C. P. Gillette). 

**Some Injurious Fungi” (Apple Blight, Potato Rot, Grape Rot, 
and Ergot), do. Te Crozier). 

‘‘Club Root,” from Worthington Smith’s ‘* Diseases of Field and 
Garden Crops,” and 

‘* Sorghum Blight” (Baczllus sorghz, Burrill), Kansas, December 
(Kulst). 

‘* Frosted and Rusted Wheat,” Minnesota, January (Otto I. Lugger). 

‘¢ Spotting of Peaches” ( Cladosporium car gece Thuem) and 
cucumbers ( Cladosporium cucumerinum, E. & A.), Indiana, January 


(Prof. J..C.-Arthur). 


fe) 

A Plea for Candor.—The discussions which are going on among 
medical practitioners, regarding the cause of contagious diseases, is even 
now interesting, and w iT, form one of the curious chapters in the history 
of the progress of biological knowledge, to which scientific men of the 
next fieeade will turn eth Laser: The spirit of the discussion 
even now has a savor of the past. Why should a new theory of the 
cause of any great evil or calamity be presented or rejected in a spirit 
of pugilism? If facts well known ‘and thoroughly established by num- 
erous and crucial experiments lead those men w ho are conversant with 
the rapid progress of biological knowledge to suppose that a much 


*This department is conducted by Prof. J. H. Pillsbury. 


158 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (July, 


broader and more general conclusions can be drawn relative to diseases 
not yet proved to be due to the same agents, why may we not expect 
their theories to be presented with moderation and due ‘respect for those 
who do not accept them? On the other hand, why should men who 
are, by their own unconscious confession, ignorant of the enormous 
strides that have been made in the knowledge of the cause of many 
contagious diseases, antagonize in a spirit of bitterness the conclusions 
of fone who have viewed these diseases from a different standpoint from 
theirown. This factis worthy of consideration, and by all who do not care 
to advertise themselves as either quacks or fogies is beyond controversy. 
A new era in the study of contagious diseases has dawned upon us. 
Active and impulsive minds ies facts mean more than truth war- 
rants, and conservative minds will adhere to notions long since ex- 
ploded. But in a case where so much is involved as in the knowledge 
and treatment of disease, and especially of such diseases as are liable to 
prove great calamities, the combined wisdom of all intelligent scientific 
men ought to conduce to results that shall bring blessing to aillicted men. 
o———— 

Asymmetry in the Human Embryo.—Mr. J. A. Ryder cites 
M. C. Phisalix* as having discovered that the human embryo in its 
very early stages lacks perfect symmetry, the left side being larger than 
the right, especially in the region of the cerebral vesicles, and asking if 
this is ; peculiar to man, and bos any relation to the functional pre bite 
inance of the right side over the left in the adult. 


oO 


Rusts.—Mr. H. L. Bolley contributes to the June number of the 
Botanical Gazette an article on the sub-epidermal rusts, Pacctma 
coronata, Cda., and P. rubigo-vera, D. C., and their behavior on 
different hosts. 


oO 


The Cause of Yellow Fever.—The March number of the Sazz- 
tartan copies from the Memphis Medical Monthly an article by E. 
H. Andrews, M. D., entitled ** Local Conditions and Yellow Fever,” 
in which he attempts to show from the discussion of the circumstances 
attending the outbreak of the fever at Canton, Grenada, Memphis, and 
Jackson, Miss., at periods from 1855 to 1888, that the disease must have 
been due to local conditions, and set to imported germs. These cir- 
cumstances are such as afford exceedingly fav orable conditions for the 
development of such germs if once introduced, and do not prove that 
they may not have Been introduced from without. 

The means of introduction of germs of bacteria, or even the bacteria 
themselves, in appreciable quantities are so numerous that it is absurd 
to suppose that every possibility is excluded, even when there seems to 
be not strong pro ability that such circumstances have occurred. 


oO 


Tuberculosis from Cows.—A committee of the Dominion Parlia- 
ment has concluded its labors and, having decided that infection is com- 
municated to man through the flesh and milk of cows, will recommend 
precautionary legislation. 


* Etude d’un embryo humain de 10 millimetres, 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 159 
MEDICAL MICROSCOPY.* 


The Azzals of Gynecology for June contains some excellent photo- 
micrographs of normal and diseased mucous membrane of the Fallopian 
tube. The formation of glandular pockets, penetrating into the mus- 
cular tissue in chronic salpingitis, is well shown. Other photographs 
are promised for July. Considering the importance now assigned to 
chronic salpingitis, anything that throws light upon its histology is 
welcome. 

—_O——— 

Development of the Crystalline Lens.—The Lrooklyn Medi- 
cal Journal for June contains a paper with the above title by Dr. Rich- 
mond Lennox. The various stages in the embryonic development of 
the lens are clearly described in ‘the text, and following are 34 figures 
illustrating sections (highly magnified) of the eye of the chick, “calf, 
and child from the time of formation of the medullary groove on the 
second day of incubation to the time of full development. We call 
this fine work. The merit of the paper is that it makes plain to the 
student of embryology the development of this organ, and the plates 
are really artistic. Incidentally the theory of the formation of congen- 
ital cataract is explained. 


O 


The same journal also contains a lecture by Dr. Sternberg on *+ Dis- 
infection,” and a paper by Geo. T. Kemp, Ph. D.., on ** Bacillus Tu- 
berculosis and Diathesis in Pulmonary Phthisis.” The latter is an 
answer to Dr. Hull’s article in the number for October, 1888, and in- 
sists upon the importance of diathesis and environment in the produc- 
tion of phthisis. Altogether the June number is very valuahle. 


O 


Motor Centre for the Larynx.—Dr. D. B. Delavan is still work- 
ing at the problem of a ‘+ Cortical Motor Centre for the Human 
Larynx.” In the WV. Y. Medical Fournal for June 22, 889, he re- 
ports an interesting case bearing upon this point. The patient had 
hemiplegia in 1877. All the symptoms of paralysis gradually disap- 
peared, except that the abductor laryngeal muscles of the left side re- 
mained paralyzed until death, w hich occurred from other disease in 
1888. <A careful post-mortem, with microscopic examination of brain’ 
and medulla, was made. The principal lesion discovered was a soft- 
ened tract in the left side of the medulla about the root strands of the 
vagus nerve, and involving the ventral vagus nucléus. The case, there- 
fore, seems to confirm the motor character of this nucleus, and to leave 
the question of a cortical motor centre for the larynx still open. A 
parallel case, with identical lesion, is referred to, reported in Archiv 
fiir Psychiatrie, 1888, p. 314. 


oO 


Scalp Diseases.—A frequent cause of the falling out of hair is the 
number of diseases of the hair and scalp which are positively known 
to be contagious, the germs from which they spring having been fully 
defined under the microscope. 


* This department is conducted by F. Blanchard, M. D. 


160 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 


Mercury, Cyanide, and Oxy-cyanide.— These two mercury salts 
bid fair to come into marked prominence now; and recent experiences 
point especially to the Oxy-cyanide as being destined to supplant the 
Corrosive Sublimate. According to Chibret, it is exhibited in solution 
of 1: 1500, and is tolerated far better than the bi-chloride. Also for 
the disinfection of surgical instruments it shows a superiority to the sub- 
limate, in not attacking the metal, when used in solutions of same 
strength as the sublimate. In the disinfection of bacterialized Peptone- 
fluid, it exhibited szx ¢t2mes the bacterictdal force of the Bi-chloride ; 
that is, a solution of Mercury Oxy-cyanide of 1 in 12,000 acted equally 
to one of Mercury Bi-cloride of 1 in 2,000._-Merck’s Bulletin. 

Pasteur Institute.—This building, in Paris, was commenced in 
May, 1887, and has cost $600,000. Dr. Roux directs the department 
of micro- aiges! In the immense work-room are seven tables with 
tops of enamelled lava. Each table is large enough for two students to 
occupy themselves with microscopical studies. 

Infected Books.—The circulating libraries of Dresden have ex- 
perimented upon the communication ‘of infectious diseases by books. 
Soiled leaves of books were rubbed first with dry fingers and then with 
wet ones and the result microscopically examined. Few or no microbes 
were found on the dry finger, but many on the wet finger. Those mi- 
crobes found were not infectious, but why might not infectious germs 
be transmitted in this manner? 

Microscopic Examination of Liver and Kidneys for the 
Germ of Yellow Fever.—Both smear-preparations and sections are 
marked by the presence of a most plentiful representation of an ovoid 
germ with distinct belted appearance and sharply-colored pole ends, 
the normal length being twice as long as wide. Some individuals are 
three or four times longer than wide, this increase in length being en- 
tirely due to an increased amount of the afore-mention uncolored sub- 
stance. In some instances two, three, or four of either of the above- 
described forms are to be seen attached together, forming short chains. 
Such a short chain is at other times composed of both these of forms 
united together, there being more of one and sometimes more of the other 
in the same. 

The organisms appeared, as this variety always does, in the sections 
of organs, some of them end on, when they looked like cocci; beside 
- these would be others lying horizontally, which presented their com- 
plete form, the colored pole- -end and clear centre being distinctly visi- 
ble; in many localities they were united in pairs, while many of the 
liver cells contained large numbers of them. Here and there one would 
find a capillary embolus made of nothing else; here they frequently 
grew in filaments of considerable let ith, large eins of such being 
present ; occasionally single filaments were to be seen in capillaries 
which the section had cut ern to their course, but in general, ex- 
cept in the embolisms, they were seen in pairs or groups of Taree mem- 
bers. Capillary embolisms were more frequent in the kidney than in 
the liver. 

No other micro-organisms were present, notwithstanding numerous 
sections of the same tissues were subjected to very many tinctions used 
in this work.— Frank S. Billings in The Times and Register, June 
IT, 1889. 


15389.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 161 
BACTERIOLOGY.* 


Staining Reagents.—Thestains employed in bacteriological studies, 
with, perhaps, a few exceptions, are the aniline dyes introduced by 
Weigert. Fliigge (‘* Handbuch der Hygiene,” Pt. I, Fermente und 
Microparasites, p- 287), on the authority of Ehrlich, classified the ani- 
line colors into two distinct groups, each of which has very distinct 
chemical and physiological characteristics, the acid and the basic dyes. 

In the first group the coloring matter acts as an acid in combining 
with bases to form salts, although it does not necessarily give an acid 
reaction, nor is it necessarily in the form of a free acid. Among the 
more important are eosin, picric acid, aniline black, and purpurin. 

To the second group, the basic dyes, belong by far the greater num- 
ber of those which are used in staining bacteria. ‘These are pr incipally 
fuchsin, methyl violet, methylene ple, Bismarck brown, and gentian 
violet. These basic colors are sold as le and not as free SRISS: whilst 
fuchsin, for example, may be obtained as an acid salt, as chloride, or 
acetate of rosaniline. 

With these nucleus and germ-tinting reagents both nuclei and bacteria 
can be stained red, brown, blue, or violet, according to the stain em- 
ployed, for, as a rule, micro-organisms react to staining fluids very 
much as do the nuclei of cells. This holds good in so far that most 
nuclear stains will impart a similar tint to the micro-organism as they 
do to the nuclei themselves. Beyond this, however, it is iain that the 
micro-organisms hold the coloring matter more tenaciously than do the 
cell nuclei, and that the nuclei may be decolorized by the use of certain 
reagents, such as acetic, nitric, or hydrochloric acid. 

The first experiments on staining germs were made with carmine and 
hematoxylin, and Koch and others were successful in staining not only 
the bodies of bacteria, but also, in certain cases, in demonstrating the 
flagella. These reagents are now, however, superseded by the aniline 
colors, principally the basic series. 

Weigert’s gentian violet and picro-carmine method demonstrates the 
affinity of the basic aniline colors. The sections of tissue containing 
bacteria are first placed in gentian violet (saturated alcoholic solution 
of gentian violet, 11 cc., aniline water, 100 cc., absolute alcohol, 10 cc.) 
for several minutes, then washed in alcohol, transferred to water, and 
afterwards to Weigert’s solution of picro-carmine for half an hour. 

They are further washed, first in water, then in alcohol, are clarified 
with clove oil and mounted in balsam. By this method the nuclei are 
stained red and the bacteria violet; the carmine has replaced the gen- 
tian violet in the nuclei, but has had no effect upon the violet taken up 
by the bacteria. Ina similar manner a solution of iodine and iodide 
of potassium does not remove the basic colors from certain micro-organ- 
isms, but it rapidly decolorizes nuclei and other tissues. It is upon this 
fact that Gram’s method is founded. 
oO 

Weigert’s Picro-carmine.j—Add aqua ammonia, 4 grams, to car- 
mine, 2 grams, and allow it to stand for twenty-four hours in a damp 
place, and then add 200 grams of picric acid. Allow the 1 whole to re- 


*Conducted by V. A. Moore. 
t Dolley ; Technology of Dacteria Investigation, p. 251. 


162 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 


main for twenty-four hours longer, until all is dissolved that will dissolve. 
Filter, and to the filtrate add a small quantity of acetic acid. until it 
becomes turbid. After twenty-four hours more there is a precipitate, 
and the filtered fluid also remains turbid. Now add ammonia, drop by 
drop, and allow the solution each time to remain for twenty-four hours, 
until at length, in the course of a few days, it remains entirely clear. 
If the nent solution stains too yellow, add a little acetic acid; if too 
red, a little ammonia. 


EDITORIAL. 


The American Society of Microscopists will meet this year at 
Buffalo, N. Y., holding a four days’ session, August 20-23 inclusive. 
In another eatonit will be found the President’s oneal announcement. 
We hope our friends will at once decide to go and make vacation ar- 
rangements accordingly. 


fe) 

Special Creation.—‘‘ If each of the half million of species of ani- 
mals and plants which now live, and each of the millions of kinds which 
have become extinct, has been the subject of a ‘ special creation,’ then 
special creation is but a name given in our ignorance to the law by which 
species are produced,” says Professor Jordan.* If the law is not cor- 
rectly expressed by the Darwinian theory, let the objector state it more 
correctly. But this criticism of special creation might be still more 
plainly put, somew hat as follows: 

A species exists only upon paper—not in nature. What does exist 
in nature is a group of forms nearly alike, and not differing from each 
other beyond a given amount, and which, merely for convenience, we 
describe on paper as one species. A group w hich one naturalist calls 
one species may be divided by another naturalist into two or more spe- 
cies. Certain forms are so like to two different species as to make it 
questionable to which of the two they belong. Varieties are therefore 
spoken of. The claim of ** special creation,” which cannot well apply 
to species, might more properly be claimed for varieties. But what has 
been alleged above of species applies in less degree to varieties. From 
this it Fallow s that individuals alone exist in nature with such fixedness 
as to permit the claim of special creation, and to them its claim would 
better be transferred. But the law of production of individuals is well 
understood, and if it suits anyone better to denominate that law 
‘* special creation” than to call it ** evolution,” good and well. A rose 
by any other name would smell as sweet. What's in a name? 

O- 

Mrs. Louisa Reed Stowell, who is so well known to all micros- 
copists, has been appointed as an assistant to the Botanist in the De- 
partment of Agriculture. This will add another to the group of 
working microscopists in Washington, and, we hope, to the friends of 
this Journ AL. We extend to her a cordial greeting and best wishes 
for success in her new field of labor. Our Washington Microscopical 
Society has never yet had a lady’s name on its rolls. Now is a good 
time to make the innovation. 


* Darwinism.—A brief account of the Darwini an Theory of the Origin of Species. By David Starr 
Jordan, Ph. D.,.M. D. A.B. Gehman & Co. Chicago, Ill., 1888. 


18389.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 163 


Our Artist.—We beg to introduce the young man who has made 
the drawings from which the frontispiece in the present number, as well 
as that in the April number, was photo-engraved—Mr. Robert W. 
Smiley—the son of the publisher. Mr. Robert, who is quite recently 
from school, takes much interest in our dincteations and promises some 
good work hereafter. He bas owned and used one of Crouch’s Histo- 
logical Microsccpes since he was 15 years old, and to those who fear 
to put a valuable instrument into a boy’ s hand we may say that it is 
still uninjured and practically as good as new. 


O 


Our Correspondence.—We are constantly getting letters that con- 
tain items of more than passing interest. The eenicrs do not prepare 
the letters with the view to their being published, but we trust that they 
will in no case object to our inviting the micr oscopical world to a par- 
ticipation in their good thoughts. The extracts to be found in this num- 
ber are a fair sample, and have been called to present the most matter 
in the smallest space. In future those who do not want their letters so 
treated can protect them by the heading ‘** Confidential.”” On the other 
hand, if something in your letter w hich 3 is as good as what we do print 
gets overlooked, do not —— slighted, because space is lacking at times 
and opportunity at others 

To those who do not aie ays get their replies to business letters by 
return mail, or each number on time, we ought to explain that this 
periodical has to be managed in such spare SNES as we can snatch 
from our regular and eines occupations by which latter we earn our 
daily bread. In other words, the JouRNAL does not pay such profits 
as to permit one to devote his life to it. When we go out of town its 
correspondence has to await our return, and we sometimes get an accu- 
mulation ahead that requires time to clear away, and we are going out 
of town in August, if possible. Patience then, friends, or a doubling 
of the subscription price for clerk-hire, whichever you prefer! The 
more the business grows the more are we taxed to keep up with it, and 
yet the happier are we. 


a=) 
Unreasonable Requests.—We are continually passing by requests 
of this sort with such replies as time will permit us to make. A dealer 


in microscopical goods, whose patience had become almost exhausted, 
recently showed us a letter which ran as follows : 

‘* You say the instrument magnifies roo diameters. You will send 
me a magnified representation of some very small object ; for instance, 
a small drop of blood, showing plainly the corpuscles, or a very fine 
hair. I send you one from my head, which I consider about as fine as 
Mother Nature makes.” 

The curious thing is that people who ask such favors cannot possibly 
be convinced that their requests are in any degree improper. 

oO 

The Army Medical Museum, at Washington, D. C., contains 141 
microscopes, 10,416 microscopical specimens illustrating almost every 
field of microscopical work. Many were made 20 years ago. Dr. 
Gray is in charge of this section. There are also many cultures of 
bacteria. 


164 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [July, 
EXTRACTS FROM CORRESPONDENCE. 


Whites Botanical Sections. By E. C. Hoyt, Detroit, Mich. 


FRIEND SMILEY: Although directly antagonistic to my advertise- 
ment and desire to dispose of a few surplus slides, I am too good a 
friend of the cause to refrain from saying that you have done more to 
make yourself popular in selling these prepared sections than you realize. 
They are simply grand, and anyone is foolish to buy prepared mounts 
in the botanical He at over 10 cents each. I have spent hours adver- 
tising these preparations for love of the cause. 


The Journal for June: Postal Club Reports. By S. Lockwood, 
Freehold; Ni. 


Permit me to say that the current number is admirable. I am glad 
that in the race of competition the JOURNAL shows such good wind. 
I hope the racy sketches on the Postal Club by Queen Mab will be 
kept up, and not the least interesting is the simple record you are in 
this way giving of the modest noianies who have gone to the w aiting 
land. 


4 


Instantaneous Changes of Ficld. By Wm. Lighton, Leavenworth, 
Kans. 


I have made quite a valuable discovery lately in connection with wide- 
angle homogeneous immersion lenses. By means ofa very simple piece 
of ‘apparatus instantaneous changes from dark field to light field and 
back again are obtained with oe largest numerical aperture possible, 
and works equally well with dry lenses of any power and aperture. 
The effects obtained with it are wonderful, and are obtained without 
altering any adjustment of the microscope. 

W ould you like a drawing and description of it for the JOURNAL? 
[ Yes !—Eprror. deltas quite likely Messrs. Watson & Sons, of Lon- 
don, will take it in hand. 


The H. R. Spencer Optical Company. By H. R. Spencer, Cleve- 
land, Ohio. 


We take pleasure in announcing that the firm of H. R. Spencer & 
Co. is dissolved by mutual consent, and the business is reincorporated 
as the ‘‘ H. R. Spencer Optical Company, of Cleveland, O.” It is in 
reality a material expansion of the business so long established. It is 
our intention to supply a most complete line of microscope objectives 
for general work, as well as those adapted to special lines of research, 
and any inquiry or application for advice relating thereto will be cheer- 
fully answered. Continuing the manufacture of the celebrated micro- 
scopic objectives, we would announce our greatly increased facilities 
for the manufacture of telescope objectives Gon the formule devised 
and worked out by the late C. A. Spencer and Herbert R. Spencer, 


the results of which have received such high commendation trom as- 
tronomers and opticians. 


Information for Scientists about to Visit the Paris Exposition. By 
J. W. Queen & Co., Philadelphia, Pa. 

We have representatives in Paris who have had the experience of many 

years in the selection and purchasing of scientific apparatus of every 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAE. 165 


description for college use. In consequence of this, it may be a conven- 
ience to microscopists when in Paris this summer to be supplied with 
letters of introduction. By means of such letters, those professors who 
intend purchasing instruments will have the assistance of competent 
persons, who are well acquainted with all the prominent makers, their 
apparatus, and prices. Thus much valuable time may be saved that 
might otherwise be spent in hunting up dealers and making bargains 
with them—a rather unsatisfactory operation, especially to those not 
thoroughly conversant with the French language. Furthermore, it is 
often a great inconvenience and annoyance, after apparatus may have 
been purchased satisfactorily, to attend to the details of shipping and 
passing through the U. S. custom house ‘‘ free of duty.” Messrs. 
Queen will relieve purchasers entirely of all this care, so that they need 
have nothing to do but select the apparatus. Another advantage of this 
arrangement is that there need be no expenditure on the part of col- 
leges at the time of ordering microscopes, etc., but, instead, they will send 
invoices when the goods are shipped from Philadelphia, adding to the 
maker’s prices only the cost of importation. Apparatus so ordered will 
be forwarded in weekly shipments as soon as a few pieces are ready, 
thus saving much time. More time is required to make some pieces 
than others, and when they are all held for one large shipment in order 
to reduce freight charges the delay is often very annoying. 


MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


Microscoricat SociETy oF WASHINGTON. D. C. 


May 14, 1889.— The fifth annual soirée was‘held at the High School 
building. Dr. G. N. Acker, the President of the Society, delivered 
the annual address, after which the members of the Society and their 
friends were entertained with the following exhibits : 

By Dr. G. N. Acker, with Zeiss and Hartnack; section of human 
lung, double injection, section of human skin. 

By Dr. E. A. Balloch, with Zentmayer’s Histological; Ova of 
Trichocephalus Dispar in liver of rat. 

By Dr. I. W. Blackburn, with Zentmayer ; Actinomycosis, and Ac- 
tinomyces in human pus, which is a disease of the lower animals 
communicable to man. Caused by the Ray fungus. 

By Prof. E. S. Burgess, with B. & L.’s models and specials; leaf 
of Saxifrange, Saxifrange virgintensts of Michaux (the different 
parts were shown successively under five instruments), epidermis of 
thin, flat cells with lace-like walls, Stomata or breathing pores (show- 
ing two elastic guard-cells to open or close the aperture), Palisade-cells 
filled with chlorophyll veins (which give the green color to the leaf), 
vein of the leaf (showing the fibrous. tissue and duct to convey air, 
strengthened by spiral fibres). protoplasm within an inner cell. 

By wr C. T. Caldwell, with B. & L.’s Universal and Student; 
Barbadoes Polycystina, book mite. 

By Mr. F. T. Chapman, with B. & L.’s Professional ; electric spark 
through metal filings. 

By Dr A. B: Coolidge, with B. & L.’s Universal (Binocular) ; bou- 
quet of butterfly scales. 


166 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [July, 
By Dr. H. A. Dobson, with B. & L.’s Student; honey bee (the 


various parts). 

By Mr. H. H. Doubleday, with Crouch Binocular, and Zentmayer ; 
So diatoms arranged, Salicine (polarized light). 

By Prof. R. (Rages with Crouch Binocular; circulation of blood in 
external gills of tadpole. 

ByaDr: BR, A. Foster; section of human brain. 

By Dr. E. A. Gibbs, with Beck’s Ideal and Acme No. 3; action 
of the heart in an embryo snake, transverse section of intestine (showing 
villi). 

By Prof. R. Hitchcock, with Schrauer and Bulloch’s Binocular ; 
microscopic pond life, eirculeiien of blood in young fish. 

By Dr. D. 8. ae with B. & L.’s Harvard ares Beck’s Economic ; 
embryo hand showing serial sections (one two-thousandth inch thick), 
the Lord’s Prayer, wnittee by Mr. Webb. 

ByiDrsji: M. Lamb, with B. & L.’s Universal; transverse section 
of spinal cord. Dr. Lamb also eee the method of cutting serial 
sections embedded in paraffin. 

By Mr. V. A. Moore, with Zentmayer’s Binocular; cultures of 
micro-organisms, colony of bacilli. 

By Dr. Collins Marshall, with Acme No. 3; type-plate of diatoms, 
being the siliceous coating of aquatic plants. 

By DES: J: Radcliffe, with Beck’s Popular Binocular; voluntary 
muscle (injected, showing the striz and distribution of the capillary 
system), stomach of frog (injected, showing the villi and glandular ap- 
paratus). 

By Dr. Robert Reyburn, with Queen’s Household and Beck’s Popu- 
lar ; iodo-sulphate of quinine by polarized light, ova of Lymneea Strog- 
nalis, eggs of water snail (showing internal organs and circulation of 
blood). 

By Dr. H. A. Robbins, with Reichert; Arytenoid cartilage, photo- 
micrograph (Uncle Tom and little Eva). 

By Dr. W. H. Seaman, with Zentmayer’s Large and Beck’s Large 
(best) ; Bryozoa (the calcareous shells of ‘small marine animals), * Roll- 
ing Stones” (quartz sand), with polariscope. 

By Mr. A. N. Skinner, with Zentmayer’s Histological ; circulation 
of blood in the web of frog’s foot. 

By Mr. C. W. Smiley, Sein Crouch’s Histological ; Hydrozoa. 

By Dr. Thomas Taylor , with Acme, Zeiss, anil Gundlach; stomata 
of tea leaf, crystals of ‘human fat by polarized light, transverse section 
of leg of mouse. Dr. Taylor exhibited also ae new freezing micro- 
tome, and demonstrated both section- cutting and photo- micrography. 

By Mr. Clinton Townsend, with B. and L.’s Physician ; Vorticellz or 
bell animalcules (a curious infusoria, which obtains its food by making 
whirlpool-like currents by means of vibrating cilia). 

By Dr. L. D. Wilson, with B. and L. ’s Phy sician ; section of kidney 
from cat. 

3y Mr. F. B. Wright, marine algz (in fruit). 

By Dr. G. B. Young, with B. and L.’s Universal; Foraminifera (ar- 
ranged). 

The yearly soirées which many microscopical societies are in the 
habit of giving for the benefit of the public cannot be too highly com- 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 167 


mended. That people generally are beginning to appreciate the im- 
portance of the microscope was fully demonstrated by the large attend- 
ance at this exhibition, and, although many people are most attracted 
by the popular displays and by specimens illuminated by polarized 
light, and though there are some of the guests who cannot refrain from 
fingering the apparatus, notwithstanding ‘the sign, ‘‘ Please do not touch 
the microscopes,” yet, after all, they perform a vast deal of good in 
helping to educate and elevate the public taste.—R. W. 5S. 


NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


Two Great Retreats. Grote and Ségur. 12°, 318 pp., two maps. 
Ginn & Co. Boston. (Price, 60 cents.) 


Designed for use in the school-room, as well as for general reading, 
and to present standard literature in a form both instructive and inter- 
esting to young readers, this well-known firm has, for the past few 
years, been issuing a series of books entitled ‘‘ Classics for Children.” 
The volume before us is one of these. 

Xenophon’s Anabasis, or the retreat of the Ten Thousand Greeks, as 
narrated by Grote in his history, is given entire with some slight changes, 
in order to better adapt the book for school use. The second great re- 
treat is that of Napoleon from Moscow, it being an abridgment of Count 
Ségur’s narrative 

Considering the motives which actuated both Cyrus and Napoleon, 
namely, a desire to acquire despotic rule, their invasions were failures ; 
yet, from a military standpoint, they were of intense interest, and will 
continue to attract notice because of the great suffering endured. 

No more thrilling recitals of soldierly effort and disaster could be 
selected. The character of Xenophon stands out in marked contrast to 
that of Napoleon when confronted with defeat. 

A short sketch of Cyrus the Younger, the originator of the attempt 
to overthrow the Persian Empire, is mmcluded. as is also a brief review 
of Napoleon’s career. 

Numerous notes are given at the bottom of many pages for the pur- 
pose of eliminating the obscurity from certain passages.—R. W. S. 


English, Past and Present. By Richard Chenevix Trench, D. D., 
Archbishop of Dublin. The Humboldt Pub. Co., 28 Lafayette 
Place, New York. 

This is another standard work added to the Humboldt Library Series 
—a work that has had a sale second only to ** The Study of W ords ” by 
the same distinguished author. Twenty editions of the latter and thir- 
teen of the former are the best evidences of the popularity of the works. 
The English language is spoken in almost every country of the globe, 
and seems destined to be the universal language of the next century. 
It was the language used at the late Comic rcnees in Berlin, supplanting 
French, until now the language of diplomacy. A most interesting 


study, therefore, is the history of the English language, past and present. 


Force and Energy; a Theory of Dynamics. By Grant Allen. 
Number 106, Humboldt Library of Science. Published by Hum- 
boldt Publishing Company, 24 East 4th street, New York. 

This is a work in two parts enclosed within one cover. The first 


168 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY (July. 


part advances a theory of transcendental dynamics, which, in the last 
part, is applied to the creation of the universe. The author defines 
force and energy as the two manifestations of power; the first. tending 
to initiate aggregative motion, finding its expression in gravitation, ad- 
hesion, SEES. affinity, and imper fectly comprehended electrical 
affinity, and the second showing its vitality in the separative pow ers. 
classified as molar, molecular, pheneale and electrical modes or mani- 
festations of motion. The illustrations of the operations of these antag- 
onistic powers in aggregating the universe into more or less solid globes 
on the one hand, and in hurling these globes through their orbits on the 
other, are very instructive; but it is not suggestive of comfort for some 
far distant posterity to know that Mr. Grant Allen believes that the ag- 
gregating forces are continually proving too strong for the separative 
energies, and that the satellites are being continually drawn into the 
planets, the planets into the suns, and the suns themselves into some 
invisible and unknown centre of the universe. 


Practical Microscopy. By Geo. E. Davis. London, 1889. 8°, pp. 
436, 310 figures, 1 plate. 

This is a revised edition of the author’s earlier work, and seeks to 
furnish full information about the instrument. its use, mounting, etc. 
The colored frontispiece shows double-stained sections of several kinds 
of wood—clematis, dog rose, eucalyptus, gout weed, black pepper. 


Virginia Summer Resorts on the Norfolk & Western R.R. Pub- 
fiched by the Company. 12 : 

This very neat pamphlet qesbebes and illustrates a large number 
of resorts. It is apparently for free distribution upon application to 
W. B. Bevill, General Passenger Agent, Norfolk, Va. Visitors to the 
Blue Ridge will find it useful. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


[These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof.] 


FOR EXCHANGE.~—Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 

WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 

WANTED.—A clean copy of Rev. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atlas of the 
Diatomacee. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous Earth from Utah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD, Salt Lake City, Utah. 
CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 


WANTED.—Specimens of rocks for slicing and grinding into sections ; also bones and teeth of differ- 
ent animals, diatoms 7 si#u on alge, diatomaceous and polycystinous earths, ocean soundings, etc., etc. 
Liberal exchange i in microscopic slides or cash. 

ARTHUR J. DOHERTY, 63 Burlington St., Manchester, Eng. 

TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of p: trified woud—Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand ‘* Burt’s Solar Compass’ : complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchans ge for new, or good second-hand, objectives, condensers, polarizers, stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. W. N. SHERM AN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 

OFFERED.—Zeiss’ New Catalogue (in German) forwarded for ro cents in stamps. 
F. J. EMMERICH & SONS, 43 Barclay St., New York City. 


WANTED.—Any works on Microscopy not already in my Library 
H. M. WHELPLEY, ¥. R. M. S., St. Louis, Mo. 
WANTED.—(In exchange for slides.) ‘‘ Microscopical Bulletin,’ Vol. I, No. 5, August, 1884, and 
Vol. II, No. 1, February, 1885. M.S. WIARD, New Brita , Conn. 


\ 


TS NN 


We IAN 


a 2 a Q ~ 
Yak Xv 
~ \ \ Ny: 


SPORES OF PLANT RUSTS. 


THE AMERICAN 
MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


Vor. X. AUGUST, 1889. No. 8. 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Ameri- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Fostal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs 
Tribner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, London, "accompanie ad by the yearly price of five shillings. 


The Heterecismal Puccini. 
By HENRY L. BOLLEY, 


LAFAYETTE, IND. 

Of the various orders of the fungi, the Uredinex, or what are com- 
monly known as the rust parasites, are of present interest to the scientist, 
in that, in their as yet comparatively unknown life-history, development, 
and relations to other life, many facts lie still unearthed, and to the 
agriculturist and horticulturist because the destructive capabilities of 
these pests are becoming more and more a matter of financial impor- 
tance. 

Upon passing through fields of ripening wheat or other of the small 
grains, one may often be not a little surprised to find that his clothes 
have become quite thickly besprinkled by a yellowish-brown dust which 
has fallen from the plants. This is an aggregation of the spores of one 
of the special forms of what the farmer “designates as rust. Whether 
he regards it as a distinct thing in itself, or as simply a diseased con- 
dition of the plant tissues arising from the evil effects of bad drainage, 

want of proper light, or what not, none feels to a greater extent than 
he its destructive effects upon the yield of the crop. T he rusts of the agri- 
culturists, however, are but representatives of a great order, embracing 
more than twelve hundred species,* of which it will be the province 
of this paper to give an outline of the structural development and life- 
history of but a few species belonging to the division of the Hetera- 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE. 


Fig. 1. Germinating teleutospore of Puccinia spongy parenchyma enclosed by mycelium; c, 
Bolleyana, Sacc., med., showing promycelium and hyphz protruding from stoma, bearing spermatia 
sporidia. Germinated April 15, 1889. X 600. on their sides ; e, epidermis of host ; _/, parenchy- 

Fig. 2. Teleutospores of ?. Bol/eyana: a, typi- matous cell containing disorganized protoplasm. 
cal form; 6, beginning of germination, showing X 240. 
erosion of cell-wall. x 600 Fig. 4. Sporidia of P. Bolleyana, showing va- 

Fig. 3. Vertical median section of a young fruit rious stages of germination. X 1360. 
of Aicidium Berberidis: a, spore bed or stroma, Fig. 5. Germinating spermé atia of AEcidium hep- 
just preceding the appearance of the basidia; 4, alicarum, grown Ie 18, IE X 1360. 


* Saccardo ,Sylloge fungorum, vol: vii, 1888. 


Copyright, 1889, by C. Ww. Smiley. 


170 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ August, 


cismal Puccinia. Because of their complete development, however, 
the general characteristics will be found to be closely common to those 
of the whole order. 

Biology and Classtfication.—The Uredinee comprise an order of 
parasitic fungi which infest the living tissues of the higher plants, being 
with few exceptions confined to the phanerogams, attacking the most 
succulent parts. All the species are highly parasitic, each growing 
upon host plants specially suited to its particular development, without 
which providers of nourishment they cannot exist. Wherever flowering 
plants are found some forms of the uredines may be found associated 
with them, the fruit forming definite spots upon the host, the parasite 
living upon but not destroying the underlying tissues. In this particu- 
lar these fungi show their high position in the scale of parasitism. Un- 
like the lower parasites, the semi- saprophytes, such as Cladosporium, 
which may live upon the decaying substratum, the death of the parasite 
invariably follows that of the host tissues. 

The plant body is composed of a variously branching, interlacing, and 
coalescing network of hyphe, ramifying and often fusing with dhe tis- 
sues of the supporting plant. The vegetative hyphz possess essen- 
tially the same form throughout all the different genera, but in the for- 
mation of the fruit the plants display a wide range of polymorphism, 
producing in certain species as many as four spore forms, in appearance 
and surroundings apparently wholly distinct. 

The sexuality of the fungi has been a study pursued with much dili- 
gence by my cologists, and in their attempt at the determination of rela- 
tionships the £cidiomycetes have in no manner been slighted. Yet, 
though De Bary * directed attention to the subject in regard to this or- 
der over thirty-five years ago, no one has successfully demoasealed the 
presence of a sexual process in the formation of any of the spore forms. 
But the weight of argument seems to be with De Bary in considering 
the ecidium the homologue of the sporocarp of the other Ascomycetes ;T 
and Geo. Massee,{ of England, affirms that in the case of A®cidium 
ranunculacearum he has actually witnessed the development of an 
oogonium and antheridium which immediately precedes the develop- 
ment of the zcidium. 

The production of exceedingly dissimilar spore forms under widely 
varying and unexpected conditions, the numerous inexplicable anoma- 
lies connected with the development of the individual species, such as 
the ability to perpetuate the species by means of only one spore form, 
as in the ‘Leptopuccinia, and the apparent absence of any sexual pro- 
cess, have given rise to complications which may in a manner explain 
our present meager knowledge of the proper relationship of the order. 

The accompanying phylogenetic diagram, as condensed from De 
Bary by Ward,§ is given here as representing the most probable situa- 
tion of the order in relation to the other fungi as fixed by our present 
knowledge : 


2 — 


* Die Brandpilze, 1853. 

t Morphology and Biology of Fungi, sec. Ixxix. 

t Annals of Botany, vol. ii, P- 47: 

§ “© On Sexuality of the Fungi,’ Quart. Four. Mic. Sci., new series, vol. xxiv, p. 294. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 171 


Uredinee. Peziza. 
i 
pas Pleospora. 
SS : Lichens. 
Claviceps. ~ Vis Pyronema. 
| s 
Xylaria. ~Melanospora. / 
| ji 
Polystigma. Ascobolus. 
] 
as v2 Erysiphee. 
— ! 
— Ustilaginee. 


De Podosphera. 


Zygomycetes. 


ar Aa eg iaiaallie® oa ON 
| Saprolegnie. 
Alge. 


The internal systematization of the order is based principally upon 
ist, structure of the teleutospores ; 2d, peculiarities of species or groups 
of species in regard to life-history. On the first depends the grouping 
of the genera, on the laiter that of the species. According to structure 
of teleutospores a genus may fall under one of four divisions : 

ist. Amerospore, Sacc. d& De Ton. Teleutospores unilocular, as 
in Uromyces. 

2d. Didymospore, Sacc. & De Toni. 'Teleutospores bilocular, as 
in Puccinia. 

3d. Phragmospore, Sacc. & De Tonz. Teleutospores 3-plurisep- 
tate, as in Phragmidium. 

4th. Dictyospore, Sacc. & De Toni. Teleutospores variously sep- 
tate, transversely, longitudinally, or obliquely, as in Triphragmium. 

Considering the teleutospore as the ultimatum of the spore series and 
its germination, the development of a promycelium and sporidia, as the 
beginning, these divisions are subdivided upon the basis of the num- 
ber, pelntine position, and nature of the intervening spore forms between 
the sporidium and the teleutospore. This gives rise in the Puccini to 
the following divisions, which are > subdivided according to various slight 
variations in the spore form of the species. 

1. Eupuccinia, Schreter : Spermogonia, ecidia, uredo- and teleuto- 
spores developed upon a living host plant, teleutospores germinating 
only after a period of rest. 

a. Autopuccinia, De Bary: Spermogonia, ecidia, uredo- and 
teleutospores formed upon the same host. 

6. Heteropuccinia, Schreter: Teleutospores and ngs ee 
upon one host; ecidia and spermogonia upon another of 
different genus. 

2. Brachypuccinia, Schreter: A®cidia wanting. 

3. Hemipuccinia, Bey raters Ecidia and spermogonia wanting. 

4. Pucciniopsis, Schreter: Uredo wanting. 


172 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ August, 


5. Micropuccinia, Schreter: Only teleutospores known ; germinat- 
ing after rest. 

6. Leptopuccinia, Schrater: Only teleutospores known; germinat- 
ing at once. 

In so far as they are co-extensive with Puccinia the other genera of 
the order are classified upon the same basis. 

Fletercecism.—The life-history of the Heteropucciniz, so far as au- 
thentically known, is by natural characteristics of development, conse- 
quent upon an alternation of generations, divided into three distinct 
periods, each one of which forms a complete fruiting stage, with spores 
which, upon germination, develop directly into the vegetative tissues of 
the fungus—z. e., into the mycelial filaments which penetrate the tis- 
sues of the supporting plant. These stages, considered in the order of 
their development from the teleutosporic sporidium, are known as 
the zcidium, the uredo, and the teleutospore forms of the fungus, the 
first two stages corresponding respectively to the genera “Zcidium and 
Uredo. These genera are still retained by systematists, and embrace 
such ecidia and uredo forms as have not as yet been identified with a 
teleutosporic form, which, when a full life-history has been determined, 

takes precedence of the other spore forms, according to most A nace 
giving the name to the species. 

Most species of the uredines complete their whole life-history upon one 
host, each spore-form as it germinates being able to send the resulting 
hyphez into the tissues of the host upon which the spores were first 
formed, as inthe Autopuccinia. Even if one or more of the spore-forms 
are absent, as in the Leptopuccinia, we may be moderately sure that 
the development is complete, for the sporidia which are abscised from 
the promycelium of the germinating teleutospores immediately develop 
the vegetative we within the tissues of the same host which bore the 
mother spores.* However, this is not the case in those species which 

attack the grasses and other glumaceous plants. In every case only the 
last two stages will be found upon these plants, while the ecidia. ‘With 
which are associated the spermogonia, when known, are always found 
upon some non-glumaceous host. This is hetercecism as applied to 
Uredinee. 

That such a change of host plants may occur during the development 
of a single species is no longer questioned. Since the affirmation of 
the same by De Bary in 1865, with regard to Puccinia graminis, the 
common wheat rust, his results obtained by means of artificial cultures 
have been confirmed time and again by experimental botanists until 
the Heteropucciniz of which the life-history for at least one series of 
hosts is accurately known to number over twenty species,f among which 
are included many species most destructive to the various cereals and 
grasses. The simple fact of the hetercecious nature of these parasites 
is not now of so great interest to the mycologist in itself as the question 
why it exists. Plowright} suggests that these species are hetercecious 
because the hosts upon which the uredo and teleutospores are devel- 
oped, the grasses and sedges, possess silicious cuticles, which the 
sporidia, perhaps, are not able to penetrate. Yet -it may be said, in 


* De Bary, Morphology and Biolosr of the Fungi, p. 284. 

T See comparative table of zcidia and teleutosporic species in Plowright’s ‘‘ British Uredinexw and 
Ustilaginez,”’ p. 56. 

a5 Le bey) sy a 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 173 


opposition to this idea, that at the time of the germination of the teleuto- 
spores, the stomata of the delicate spring growth of these plants present 
every facility for the entrance of the sporidia which are of much less 
diameter than those openings. It seems much more probable that the 
change of hosts is brought about by requirements of the fungus not 
dependent upon such slight mechanical hinderances, but upon inherent 
wants of the parasite not to be satisfied by one of its hosts alone. If 
ease of entrance into the host is all that determines hetercecism, there 
would be slight cause for the fungi quitting their ecidium hosts to attack 
the Graminez, for those plants as a rule are possessed of non-silicious 
cuticles. That the last stages appear upon the grasses is, we think, 
not so much a matter of choice as of necessity. 

Mycelium.—This term applies in common to the vegetative portion 
of all the spore forms. Usually it is essentially a network of anasto- 
mosing tubular filaments variously septated and branched, having a 
diameter of from 2 to 6». In the formation of the stroma or bed from 
which the spores arise, however, the hyphz often become closely united 
by fusion* so as to form what may fitly be termed a false tissue. The 
hyphal walls are hyaline and are quite delicate while young. As they 
grow older the walls thicken and the granular protoplasm with which 
they are at first filled disappears as the spores are formed. 

As in most uredines, the mycelium is localized, the results of one 
infection being confined to a quite limited area, as may be determined 
by single artificial infections on carefully isolated plants. In the case 
of the ecidium of Puccinia graminis on the leaf of barberry (fig. 6 @) 


Fre. 6.—Inferior side of barberry leaf, showing at (a) an 
zcidium spot arising from single infection. Natural size. 
Original. 


it will be found that the result of one infection affects but a slight area 
of the leaf. On the Graminez, however, the localization is en less 
marked. In these hosts the eee, shedaeee and often large portions of 
the haulm, may be ramified throughout, the fruiting pustules appearing 
over the whole diseased area. 

When a hypha, say one from a germinating uredospore, penetrates 
the tissues of the host, branches are given off in every direction, which 
continue to branch in a monopodial manner. The result is a complete 
ramification of the parenchymatous tissues of the host in the immediate 
region of infection, the hyphe being at first principally confined to the 
intercellular spaces. They apply shemiselves closely to the cell walls 
and create passage-ways through and around the cells by a process of 
solution. As the fungus dev elops the branching becomes more profuse, 
and, in the vicinity of forming fruit—z. e., pustules or sori—the host 


* See paper on “‘ Sub- epidermal Rusts,’’ Bot. Gaz., 1889, p. 139. 


174 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ August, 


tissues are gradually eaten away, so that only a fungal stroma remains, 
which is closely fused with the surrounding (eeues. In no case, ex- 
cept perhaps in that of the ecidium, is there any apparent disorgan- 
ization of the functions and arrangement of the sub-epidermal host 
tissues other than that which arises from a complete or partial appro- 
priation by the parasite. Parasitism is complete, the attachment of 
fungus to the host is that of living connection. This ability of fusing 
with the host tissues, and thus being able to draw direct nourishment 
therefrom, may perhaps in part account for the lack of true haustoria. 
Various authors* have spoken of and figured certain branch-like pro- 
tuberances, which penetrate the cells, as haustoria. In the species I 
have studied the young mycelia present many such appearances, but I 
take it that they are simply young hyphal branches which have pene- 
trated the cell-walls. During the earlier growth they may be found in 

various lengths and forms, buts in older stages the cells will be found to 
to be penetr rated by many not short branches (haustoria) , but continuous 
filaments, the former being apparently wholly absent. The ability of 
these parasites to eradually unite with and dispose of host tissues by 
solution is probably connected with a power of secreting an unorgan- 
ized ferment.| H. Marshall Ward} has succeeded in the: case of a spe- 
cies of Botrytis which attacks the lily in separating such a ferment, 
which is described as having a macerating effect upon plant tissues. He 
also ascribes the anastomosing of the hyphze with the consequent solu- 
tion of the adjoining walls to the same agency. ‘The same power evi- 
dently accompanies the growing hyphe of the uredines, yet to a 
perhaps less obvious degree. 

Spermogonia and <#ctdia.—In the spring, upon the germination 
of the teleutospores and the formation of sporidia, the yearly life-cycle 
begins by an infection of the non-glumaceous host by means of the 
sporidia. These are small protoplasmic bodies which are abscised 
from the promycelium of the germinating teleutospores (fig. 4). Though 
I have made successful cultures by placing the germinating sporidia of 
Puccinia graminis upon the leaves of the barberry, I Have: searched in 
vain to ascertain the method of entrance of the germ tube into the leaf 
tissues. De Bary,§ the only one who claims to have seen the process, 
has figured the same as piercing directly through the cuticle. How- 
ever, in another s species, the infection was nOteae as taking place by way 
of the stomata,|| and it is, I believe, not improbable that such would 
most often occur in this case. 

In the case of a barberry bush, upon which I experimented, that had 
been carefully isolated by being placed i in a green-house before it began 
to open its leaf buds, the Spermogonia appeared as yellow spots upon 
the upper sides of the infected leaves in fourteen days after the applica- 
tion of the sporidia. 

Vertical cross-sections of the leaf passing through these bodies show 
them to be pyriform structures, with their rounded ‘bases sunken slightly 
in the sub-epidermal tissues oF the host, and _ their apices protruding 
through the ruptured epidermis. This may, perhaps, be considered as 


* Bagnis, ‘‘ Obs. Vita et Morphol. Funghi Uredinei;’’ quoted from Bienen 2.6:, Daa 
+See Vines’ Plant Physiology, p. 191. 

t{ Annals of Botany, vol. ii, p. 319. 

§ Morphology and Biology of the Fungi, p. 280, fig. 128 c. 

| L. c., p. 284. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 175 


the characteristic situation of these bodies, but in some species, as 
/Ecidium hepaticarum, they are only sub-cuticular. The outer portions 
or periphery of the bodies are composed of many erect, closely-pressed, 
bristle-like filaments, paraphyses, which arise from the stroma or mass 
of miscellaneously tangled hy phe below. Inside this wall of para- 
physes and _ lining the cavity is what may be fitly termed a hymenial 
layer, from which arise filaments, short, thick sterigmata, W hich bear 
the spermatia. 

The most noticeable feature connected with the composition of these 
bodies is the variation in the hyphz as compared to the other spore- 
forms. While the ordinary hyphe from which the branches arise to 
form the body range from 3 to 6 » in diameter, the paraphyses seldom 
exceed 3 », and the sterigmata and the filaments which form the stroma 
are even smaller. The spermatia are abstricted in conidia, form series 
from the apices of the sterigmata, which stand at right angles to the 
hy menial layer, so that the centre or cavity of the flask- like spermogone 
is early filled with the small round or ov al bodies, which finally ooze 
out at the apex ina mucilaginous conglomerate. These bodies when 
placed ina weak solution of honey or sugar pass through a budding 
germination not unlike the multiplicative process to be seen in the yeast 
plant, Saccharomyces cerevisez (fig. 5). As to the true nature and 
purpose of these bodies in the economy of the fungus nothing is known. 
Some, reasoning by analogy, hold that they repr esent the male element 
in reproduction, while some are inclined to consider them as a simple 
conidial spore form, the complete life of which is not as yet known. 

Soon after the eaten of the spermogones the neighboring hyphe 
begin to form interlacing masses deeper down in the plant tissues, which 
are the beginnings of new fruit, the ecidia. By this time the diseased 
portion of | the lamina of the leaf has become much thickened, cushioned 
under the spermogones, due to some stimulating effect of the parasite 
causing an abnormal development of the mesophy a tissues. The hyphe 
have also become much closer branched, more septate, and a yellow 
oleaginous granular matter appears in considerable quantities in the 
protoplasm. This may also be seen in large quantities in the paraphyses 
of the spermogones, and seems finally to constitute a principal element 
in the contents of the zcidiospores. 

In Zcidium hepaticarum on Hepatica triloba, just previous to the 
appearance of the basidia from which the spores are abstricted, the 
zcidium, by sectioning, is found to be a solid ball of clearly interwoven 
and united filaments (fig. 7). When the sphere has enlarged until its 
most exterior surface is Ame in contact with the epidermis, the young 
basidia appear as small thick branches arising from a point in the ball 
slightly below the median line (fig. 7, @). “The outermost ones cor- 
respond in position to a row of paraphyses, and, uniting, form the en- 
closing wall of the fruit, the peridium, which upon the rupture of the 
epidermis turns back, forming a cup-like opening from which the spores, 
which have already been abstricted from the internally situated basidia, 
may escape. This course of development is essentially true for the 
zecidium of Puccinia graminis, excepting only that portion of the de- 
scription which applies to the formation of the ecidium just previous 
to the appearance of the basidia. In this case there is at first formed 
an aggregation of mycelia, which constitutes the stroma or spore-bed 
from which the basidia arise. On the sides this mass of filaments ex- 


176 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ August, 


tends towards the epidermis so as to enclose a mass of the newly-formed 
spongy host tissue (fig. 3). In either case, however, as the basidia ex- 


Y 


ae 
OPe 


wi 


oN, 


A 
ZED} 
We Sie ae \S 


> 
Ass 


Y, 


Ke x if 


‘ 
g 

Fic. 7.—Young ecidium fruit of A®cidium hepaticarum in vertical median section, showing 
the manner in which the basidia arise: (a) epidermis of host; (b) a vegetative hypha; (c) 
an isolated hypodermal cell; (d) a young basidium; (e) a portion of the hyphal net-work in 
solution. % 200, Original. 


tend, the tissues above them, fungus or host, are gradually dissolved 
away, so that when mature only the fruit remains within the peridium. 

Uredospores (Stylospores).—The next spore formation in the gen- 
eral order of development is that of uredo or summer spores, which 
develop upon the glumaceous hosts after an infection by the zcidiospores. 
The filaments collect in a circular, disk-like mat lying just beneath the 
epidermis from which the basidia arise at right angles to the substratum. 
The development of the spores is characteristic of conidia forms. The 
basidia become filled with the granular protoplasm common to the 
hyphe and the apices become swollen so as to form a somewhat rounded 
body, the young spore. For a time this is essentially hyaline, with the 
exception of a small protoplasmic collection in the central region, which 
now contains a quantity of yellow oleaginous matter, also to be found 
in the neighboring hyphe. This central body gradually enlarges 
until the whole cell finally becomes filled. By this time the spore 
is being abstricted from the pedicel, and a new wall, the endospore, forms 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 1G 


on the inside of the terminal part of the old expanded filament, which 
latter now becomes the exospore. In many species, as of Puccinia 
graminis, this outer layer of the double wall becomes minutely echinu- 
late, the markings being essentially of the same nature as those which 
occur upon many pollen grains and upon .the spores of some of the 
Ustilagineze. When the spores are mature they either fall off or are 
pushed off by other spores arising from the spore-bed below. They are 
now prepared under favorable circumstances to germinate immediately, 
and, as they may be blown about freely by the winds; this accounts for 
the rapid spread of the disease among the cereals at this red-rust stage 
in the development of the fungus. 

Teleutospores.—These constitute the last form of the spore series, 
and as a rule do not germinate until the spring following their forma- 
tion, hence they may be considered as the resting spores, the ones in- 
tended to propagate the new life-cycle which has its beginning in their 
germination. 

The manner in which they are formed from the vegetative hyphz 
does not essentially differ from that of the uredospores. Often they arise 
from one and the same spore-bed or stroma, as in Puccinia graminis, 
but appearing later in point of time. In those cases in which the teleu- 
tospores do not rupture the epidermis* they are developed upon new 
spore-beds. Puccinia coronata may be considered as typical of this 
class. For the want of fresh young material in others the development 
of the teleutospores was studied most closely in this species, which 
doubtless is essentially the same as that exhibited by other species. 

Just previous to the formation of a new sorus, or pustule, several or- 
dinary filaments meet and coalesce in an intercellular space lying just 
beneath the epidermis, and become densely protoplasmic. This is the 
beginning of the stroma or spore-bed. The spores first appear as very 
short, thick protuberances upon the hyphz which form the upper layer 
of the stroma. These gradually distend into thin-walled, sack-like 
bodies, pressing firmly against the surrounding tissues. The body of 
the spore is early cut off from the filament by across septum. From the 
first the young spores are well filled with a finely granular protoplasm, 
and contain near the central region a much denser body which I take to 
be a nucleus. When the young spore has attained nearly normal pro- 
portions, a horizontal septum is thrown across slightly below the mid- 
dle, dividing the mother cell. At the period of maturity the two simple 
cells have each acquired a thick reddish-brown wall apparently of two 
distinct layers, while the old wall of the mother cell which still envel- 
ops both has become apparently cutinized. 

In regard to the so-called germ pores, I think they are at least of 
doubtful existence. The process of germination, so far as I have been 
able to trace it in a number of species, consists not in the passing of the 
germ-tube through an already formed germinal canal,} but by the ero- 
sion (fig. 2, 6) of the wall from within. The protoplasmic contents 
still igelosed in the endosperm ¢ gradually dissolves or erodes a passage 
through the exospore, then expands to form the promycelium, into the 


* For further information regarding these sub-epidermal forms, the nature of the stroma, and a con- 
sideration of the effect of tension upon the spore form, see ‘‘Sub-epidermal Rusts,’’ Bot. Gaz., 1889, 


+ 039; 

fe Bary, Morphology and Biology of the Fungi, p. ror; Plowright, British Uredinez and Ustila 
ginez, p. 39. 

¢ Ward, Annals of Botany, vol. ii, p. 220. 


178 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [Augnst, 


distal end of which the contents of the cell finally collect. After several 
characteristic nutations the protoplasmic portion of the body becomes 
from two to four septate. From each of these cell divisions short ste- 
rigmata arise (fig. 1), into which the contents of the cells are emptied, 
and from each of which is abscised one or more sporidia, which are 
prepared to produce a germ-tube immediately after abstriction from the 
promycelium (fig. 4). 

Reproduction.—Present knowledge does not allow of a definite asser- 
tion regarding the presence or absence of a sexual process. Certainly 
no one has made a satisfactory demonstration of sexual organs in any 
of the Uredinew. Of the various spore forms the uredospores are of 
such an obvious conidial nature that none will account that stage as 
other than asexual. The formation of the teleutospores seems not to 
be different. although the fruit as a whole presents many points mor- 
phologically analogous to that of other Ascomycetes, so that a sexual 
process has been advocated for this point in the development ;* yet the 
whole unfolding, from the beginning of the young spore-bed to the per- 
fection of the fruit, shows nothing characteristic of a sexual process. 

Morphological appearance, development, connection with the sper- 
mogonia, and various other points have combined to place the sexual 
process, if any such exists, with the zcidium fruit, but fact is wanting. 
Mr. Geo. Massee, of England, has indeed figured the development of 
an oogonium and antheridium, which he affirms he witnessed in A®ci- 
dium ranunculacearum, but the indefiniteness of his paper and the 
diagrammatic nature of his principal drawings make the value of the 
whole somewhat doubtful. His figure 4,f at least, does not represent 
the manner in which the basidia first appear in most species. A longi- 
tudinal vertical median section of the body, which he represents in fig. 
4, would show the young basidia to arise from an arched base corres- 
ponding to the contour of the oogonium, so that the medially-situated 
basidia must arise from a higher point on the young spore-bed than the 
more externally situated ones. In other words, he shows that the young 
spore-bed is convex instead of concave, and that the basidia which are 
to abstrict the ecidiospores first arise, not from the individual hyphe of 
the bed, but froma globular body, a condition which I have been unable 
to verify. 

In those cases in which I have sectioned the young Ecidium fruit at 
a stage of development just previous to the appearance of the basidia, 
the stroma was found to consist not of a stalked body, as represented in 
his figure, but of a mass of interlaced hyphe consisting of branches and 
extensions of the ordinary hyphe (fig. 7). 

In both AEcidium berberidis and 4écidium hepaticarum, which I have 
studied carefully, the sphere of interwoven hyphe attain to nearly the 
normal proportions of the Aécidium before the basidia make their ap- 
pearance. Vertical longitudinal median sections of the young fruit at 
this time showed that each basidium arises as a bud-like branch from 
individual hyphz, which lie nearly on a horizontal line with the 
base of other basidia of the same fruit or cup (fig. 7,@). In regard 
to the order of development, the basidia do not differ from that displayed 
in the formation of the young teleutospores, the older growths being 


* Bessey, Text-book of Botany, pp. 314-317- 
+L. c., plate iv. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 179 


found in the centre of the bed. The zcidiospores are abstricted in the 
manner common to conidia, the basidia being septate almost as soon as 
microscopically visible. 

In many ecidia, “Xcidium berberidis especially, it is quite common 
to find apparently ordinary filaments (fig. 3, c) protruding from the 
stomata, which are situated above the «cidium fruit, as it for ms beneath 
the epidermis. Many spermatia may often be seen adhering closely to 
these bodies. If a sexual process is still to be sought these occurrences 
deserve close attention. There may, perhaps, be a general hyphal 
fecundation through these organs. I am inclined, however, to consider 
the extension of the hyphe through the stomatal openings as merely 
accidental. 

H. Marshall Ward, in his paper ‘‘ On the sexuality of the fungi,” 
makes the statement that ‘‘ it is probable that the sexu ality of the higher 
fungi has disappeared, because its purpose has been equally Ww ell or 
better attained otherwise than by means of Sexual organs ;”’ that is, for 
some reason they have become apogamous,* an asexual spore formation 
has displaced a sexual process while the fruit still retains in general a 
sexual form. This I think to be true of the uredines ; though the fruit 
may be morphologically analogous to the sexually-produced fruit of 
other Ascomycetes, the spores are asexually produced. 

So far as is known, the sexual process is chiefly one for re-invigora- 
tion, that the life of the species may be continued unimpaired. Ww hile 
in ihe great majority of plants this is accomplished by the formation of 
a new ‘plant body by the union of two more or less specialized masses 
of protoplasm, constituting the sexual process, it seems that some, be- 
cause of certain favored conditions. are able to do away with this special 
method, being able to draw sufficient nourishment from their more ex- 
cellent find supply. In the parasite the source of energy is the nour- 
ishment obtained from the host, and the better the connection between 
the parasite and its host the less liable is the protoplasm of the former 
to suffer vitiation for want of nutrient matter. 

In the Uredinez the union of the host and parasite is almost perfect, 
and in those species in which the whole development is upon one host 
it is probable that the wants of the fungus are adequately met. That 
some species are hetercecious upon particular but diverse host species 
is, we think, but indicative of the fact that the combination best com- 
plies with fie nutritive needs of the parasite not to be fulfilled by one 
host alone. 

Bibliography.—The full bibliography of the subject is much too ex- 
tensive to be listed here, but the following books and papers are men- 
tioned as having been specially valuable in pac preparation of this article : 

Burrill, Parasitic Fungi of Illinois. Azdl. 271. St. Ladb., ii, 1885, 
pp. 141-255. 

e Bary, Morphology and Biology of the Fungi, Mycetozoa and 
Bacteria, 1887. 

Dietel, Morphologie und Biologie der Uredineen. 

Farlow, Gymnosporangia or Cedar Apples of the United States, 188o. 

Massee, On the Presence of Sexual Organs in AEcidium. <Azzals 
of Botany, ii, 1888, pp. 47-51. 


* Vines, Plant EB ysolley,. P. 636; De Bary, Morphology and Biology of the Fungi, p. r2 
+ Sub- epidermal Rusts, 


180 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [August, 


Mueller, Die Rostpilze der Rosa und Rubusarten. Inaug. Diss., 1886. 

Parker, On the morphology of Ravenelia glanduleformis. Proc. 
Amer. Acad. Sci., xxii, 1886, pp. 205-219. 

Plowright, Hetereecism. Gard. Chron., xix, p. 824; British Ure- 
dinez and Ustilaginee, 1889. 

Saccardo, Sylloge Fungorum, vii, 1888. 

Sorauer, Pape euksankheicant ii, 2d ed., 1886. 

Von Thee: Melampsora salicina, der Weidenrost, 1879. 

Ward, On the Sexuality of the Fungi. Quart. Jour. Micr. Scz., 
Xxiv, n. ser., pp. 262-310. Life History of Hemileia vastatrix. (Jour. 
Linn. Soc., xix, 1882, pp. 299-335. 

Winter, Rabenhorst’s: Kyrptogamen Flora, Pilze, i, 1881-7, pp. 
131-270. 


PurbvuE University, Yume 1, 1889. 


Magnification in Photo-micrographs. 
By W. J. SIMMONS, 


CALCUTTA, INDIA. 


A friend of mine, Mr. Walter Osmond, who photographs a wba deal 
with the microscope, inquires how he should fix the magnification of 
his objects, as shown in his pictures. Using a 4-inch objective and an 
ocular, which together give 300 diameters, with the eye-glass at 1o 
inches from the paper, he gets a field as nearly as possible 6 inches in 
diameter. Employing the same eye-piece and objective in his camera, 
he gets a disc in his photos at 2.9 ‘inches. He fixes the magnification 
in the pore at 145 diameters by the following simple rule-of-three 
Sum: "6.270: =200> 145: Similarly, with a 2-inch objective and a pow- 
erful satis which together give 55 diameters at the standard height 
of to inches, he fixes the he ice of his photos at 263, thus: 
6:2°9::55:26°583. Is this correct? You will observe I distinguish 
in this note between the ‘‘ magnifying power” of an objective and 
‘* magnification,” implying by the latter term mere enlargement; and 
confining the former ‘* magnifying power” to that particular degree of 
enlargement which is obtained when an image is projected by any kind 
of microscopic camera, on a plane horizontal surface parallel to the 
body of the microscope, and distant exactly 10 inches from the centre 
of the eye-glass of the ocular. I would also add that such rough 
measurement as can be made by opening both eyes and comparing an 
object with a rule laid at the stage serves to show that Mr. Osmond’s 
method is correct. 


An Enterprising Druggist.—Mr. G. A. Waltenspoil, of Jackson, 
Cal., keeps a microscope in the store for examining drugs. Fr equently : 
when he mounts an interesting object, he places the microscope on the 
counter for anyone who comes in to examine. This practice tends to 
attract customers, turns attention to his store, and educates the public. 
He commenced with a lense magnifying only twenty-five diameters, but 
now uses one hundred and fifty diameters, and frequently makes exami- 
nations for physicians. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 181 


On the Gustatory Organs of Erethizow Dorsatus. 
By FREDERICK TUCKERMAN, 


AMHERST, MASS. 

Quite recently I received a fresh tongue of this species. I placed the 
organ for a few days in a mixture of Miiller’s fluid and alcohol, and 
afterwards transferred it to ordinary spirit, where the hardening was 
completed. 

General Description of the Tongue.—The tongue is 76 mm. long 
Ig mm. wide, and 16 mm. in thickness. It is free from the franum for 
32 mm. The fore part of the organ is compressed laterally, and ter- 
minates in a more or less pointed apex. The posterior dorsal region 
is somewhat roughened by verrucose elevations, and is impressed ante- 
riorly by a slight mesial groove from the gustatory area backwards. Near 
the base is a “median ridge with a shallow groove on either side. The 
fungiform papille are normal in structure, but few in number. There 
are a few large ones, disposed in lineal series, above the line of junc- 
tion of the upper surface and sides. At the posterior part of the papil- 
late surface are two circumvallate papille situated one on either side of 
the median line. The two papilla are 16 mm. from the base of the 
tongue, and equi-distant from its lateral margins and from each other. 
Placed between them are two small slit-like apertures, which may have 
at some period contained bulb-bearing ridges. The papillz folis ate lie 
well down on the sides of the tongue, their posterior limits being some 
4 mm. anterior to the circumvollate gustatory area. 

The Circumvollata Papille.—TVhese papille are about 1.45 mm. in 
breadth, and 0.60 in height. They bear on their upper part a great 
number of secondary papilla overlaying, which is a thin Seana of 
stratified pavement epithelium. Serous glands are plentiful both within 
the bodies of the papilla and around their base. Their ducts open into 
the trench, especially at its deeper part. The taste-bulbs, which are 
far from numerous, are disposed in a somewhat irregular belt around 
the base of the papilla. They average about 0.054 mm. in length, and 
0.024 mm. in breadth. 

The Papille Foliate.—The foliate papille are about 7 mm. in 
length. Each papilla consists of fifteen or sixteen fairly symmetrical 
folds, and each fold bears at its upper part two or more secondary 
papilla, the spaces between which are filled to a common level with 
epithelium. The furrows separating the folds or ridges are narrow, 
and 0.45 mm. in depth. Serous glands are abundant about the hace 
of the folds, and their ducts usually open at the bottom of the furrows 
The taste-bulbs are not numerous, and are very irregular in their dispo- 
sition. They average 0.045 mm. in length, and 0.027 mm. in breadth. 

In the fungi form papillz the taste- bulbs seem to be relatively more 
numerous than in the gustatory areas proper of the tongue. They are 
situated at the upper part of the papilla, and are usually placed ob- 
liquely to its long axis, with their apices directed upwards and out- 
wards. The basal end of the bulbs generally touches the mucosa. In 
transverse sections of these papilla the component cells of the bulbs 
could frequently be distinguished without difficulty, and in one bulb I 
counted twenty distinct cells. More than half of the cells were grouped 
about the axis of the bulb, and were doubtless sensory in function. 


182 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [August, 


Selecting a Microscope. 
By G. S. WOOLMAN, 


NEW YORK, 

There is a simple instrument which, with its three lenses combined, 
has a power of thirty-three diameters, which sells for $3.50. With it 
can be seen many of the larger animalcule in pond water, the scales 
from a butterfly’s wing, pollen- grains from plants, and thousands of 
other objects not visible to the naked eye. From $3.50 the prices for 
microscopes range up to $350 and $400. There are many different 
styles and grades, a very common mistake made by persons attempting 
to select a microscope is to judge of the excellence of an instrument by 
the amount of its magnifying power. No object should be viewed with 
a power greater than that required to show its structure, and if that 
can be done with thirty diameters it is, to say the least, unnecessary to 
use one hundred. ‘This is especially the case with low-priced instru- 
ments, where the apertures of the objectives are small and the connec- 
tions not so exact as in the higher grades, rendering them more liable 
to give false i impressions of objects. Moreover, it is absolutely impos- 
sible to view opaque objects satisfactorily by the reflected light ‘of cheap 
compound microscopes. For those who wish to dissect flowers and 
insects for examination a simple instrument is better. 

In selecting a microscope the essential points to be observed are that 
the lenses show objects clear and well-defined, that the stand be of good 
material and workmanship, and that there be no lateral movement in 
the adjustments of the focus. Further, that the focus be instantly 
changeable when desired, and that it have a joint for inclination. As 
to the different kinds of microscopes. The simplest, of course, is the 
single glass, such as is used by watchmakers and engravers, and the 
common pocket glass with from one to three lenses. The simplest 
microscope with a stand is the one mentioned above for $3.50; with 
its three lenses combined it has a magnifying power of 33 diameters. 
It packs in a box that acts as a base for the upright brass stem. With 
it comes an animalcule cage, a pair of brass forceps, a watch-glass, two 
plain glass slips, and a prepared object. The school microscope is 
similar, but works easier, and is better adapted for school purposes. 
Of the compound microscopes, one sells for $2.50, which is the simplest. 
It is of polished brass with one piece and one object-glass, magnifying, 
when combined, about 40 diameters (or 1,600 times), the power being 
calculated by squaring the diameter. 

A powerful instrument for household use, with its two object-glasses, 
magnifies from 30 to 100 diameters, and ranges in price according to 
size and quality from $5 to $12. For ordinary use, an amateur micros- 
copist can buy an instrument for from $23 to $30 which will answer 
his every purpose. Such a microscope will have a stage with adjust- 
able spring clips, a revolving diaphragm with four apertures beneath 
the stage, and a concave reflecting mirror for use under or above the 
stage. It can magnify 165 diameters s, and, with the addition of a one- 
fifth object-glass, this can be increased to 350 diameters. For students 
in histology. and vegetable anatomy there are instruments that range in 
price from $50 to $400, and when one of the cheapest is furnished with 
condenser, polariscope, camera lucida, spot lens, zoophy te trough, live 
box, and forceps, it is complete for almost any investigation, 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 183 


Methods of Mounting Infusoria. 
By Pror. C. W. HARGITT, 


OXFORD, OHIO. 


Of the many accomplishments of microscopy, its subjects and meth- 
ods, not the least of its value consists in the fact that a very large portion 
of the work may, by mountings and photography, be rendered as per- 
manent as the cabinet of the mineralogist. An exception is sometimes 
urged, however. concerning that large class of the utmost interest to 
the microscopist, viz., the Infusoria. This is especially true of the more 
delicate and perishable forms, such as the parameecia, vorticella, etc., 
some of which are rare and difficult to obtain. Specially is this true 
of the critical moment when they are most needed, as every teacher of 
zoology can testify. While the ‘peculiar beauty and interest which at 
taches to the observation of the /¢vézg forms may be wanting in them 
in the motionless state of the mounted specimen, yet a w pari of inter- 
est is exhibited in the silent form which cannot be aroused by any figure 
however well executed, and that simply in the fact that it is the thing 
itself. But, further, the motionless form on the slide is often far more 
instructive than the same form living. If properly killed, so that it re- 
tains the natural features, and properly stained, far more of its structure 
may be seen than is possible in life. 

There can be no doubt, therefore, that a successful method by which 
these results may be had will be welcomed by not only the teacher, to 
whom it is a very boon, but also by the curiosity hunter of microscop- 
ical gems. ‘That it is no easy problem g soes without saying. The very 
delicacy of many forms, and their extreme sensitiv eness fo stimuli of 
unfavorable sorts, anes their killing and preparation in any success- 
ful way very difficult. I have recently had some success in this line 
that has been a surprise to many besides myself, and a brief detail of 
the method may help others to similar results. I am aware that other 
methods have been proposed by other workers from time to time, and 
I do not presume that I am the first or only one by any means who has 
been able to secure reasonably good results in this line of work. That 
the method used by me is, ower er, a success when carefully followed, 
I can fully affirm. Neither am I disposed to claim originality for ‘tie 
method, except in some of the details of its application. It was first 
suggested to me by Dr. E. B. Wilson, though since modified to suit 
special cases. 

The first requisite is to ‘* catch the hare.” Assuming that the mate- 
rial to be experimented upon is possessed in abundance, whether of 
paramecia or vorticelle, or hydroids, or even Amabe, it is only 
necessary to expose in a shallcw dish or watch-glass some of the water, 
as free as possible from sediment or débris, preparatory to killing, which 
is a matter of the greatest importance. Before attempting this it is 
well to get rid of as much of the water as possible without endangering 
the normal activity of the animals. It is by some suggested to he hone 
by leaving to slow evaporation. I have found this parher risky, as many 
are likely to perish. My method has been to draw off the surface very 
gently with small pipette, and then further reduce the excess of water 
by a syphon of thread which draws it off by capillarity. Next comes 
the process of killing, which must be done absolutely instantaneously, 
and at the same time without i injury to the most delicate organism. The 


184 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [August, 


killing must be instantaneous in order to have the animal in an expanded 
state, without which it would be practically worthless. This may be 
done by any of several reagents, among the most successful of which, 
in my Own exper ience, Here been corrosive sublimate, saturated Solas 
tion in water ; Lang’s s fluid, which is essentially the same, with addition 
of small per cent of acetic Herile ; osmic acid; picricacid. I have named 
them in the order of my preference. In the second they must be left 
but a few moments, as the acid disorganizes the structure. The same 
may be said also of the latter two. After killing it is only necessary to 
harden the protoplasm by the ordinary method of alcohol of increasing 
strength, then to stain them with borax carmine, or other if preferred ; 
then complete the process by dehydration with absolute alcohol ; finally, 
to render transparent with oil of cloves or other appropriate reagent, 
and mount in balsam. 

It should be noted that great care is necessary in transferring from 
one medium to another that the specimens are not lost. This I have 
avoided by using the thread syphon and working with great patience. 
I have by this method secured beautifully stained Amoebe naturally 
expanded and exhibiting almost every phase of their life-history. I 
have also fine specimens Ni parameecia and hydroid meduse, etc. Vor- 
ticella I was notable to get fully expanded, though otherwise excellent. 

While the method is somewhat tedious, it is aes more so than kindred 
methods of preparing diatoms and such like organisms, and will in re- 
sults repay richly, I think, anyone who will take the pains to give a 
few trials. 

I should have noted also that the final mounting may be done with 
equal success in glycerin or glycerin jelly. Ina word, after the pro- 
cess of preparation “the mounting may be done by any of the ordinary 
methods. 

Miami University, Fuly 10, 89. 


The Bidwell Cabinet. 
By W. D. BIDWELL, M. D., 


LEAVENWORTH, KAN. 

During a recent attempt to provide for the storing of microscopic 
slides, | became convinced that none of the cabinets I had seen were as 
simple and convenient as could be made, and accordingly I devised the 

3idwell Cabinet. No attempt will be made to patent it, and I freely 

allow all persons to make them for their own use, if, indeed, they have 
not used them already. Prof. Lighton informs us, however, that he has 
seen every style yet made, but none like this. The drawers contain 12 
slides each, and are , made of a single piece of seasoned black walnut 
74 inches by 8 inches and 2 of an inch thick. 

The compartments are made with a one-inch chisel, making six cuts 
4 inch apart and } inch from the side on each side and then cuts corres- 
ponding to these three inches toward the middle of the drawer. Then 
a piece is easily chipped out between each pair of cuts, leaving 12 
drawers, which easily hold the slides, separated down the centre by a 
ridge 3 to 1 inch wide. ‘Taking a single cut with a gouge out of this 
ridge opposite each trough makes a convenient place to slip in the 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 185 


finger-nail to raise a slide. Then the drawers are complete, strong, 
and firm, and very easily and cheaply made. Cut a shoulder on each 
side of the drawer, make a plain box of walnut with each side grooved 
to fit the shoulder of the drawer, and a cabinet is made which will take 
less than half the time or expense to make of any other, and when done 
the slides are firmly held, each in its own compartment, and available 
for inspection or Femmewalls and no danger of removing the cover-glass 
or label by hasty removal or the motion incident to carrying. 


Publications of the Agricultural Experiment Stations. 
By Pror. C. H. FERNALD, 
AMHERST, MASS. 

Your editorial on ‘* Agricultural Experiment Stations,” in the May 
number, is so sensible and timely that I write to express my apprecia- 
tion of it. My own work in entomology has hitherto been of a tech- 
nical character, and has been read only by the scientific entomologists, 
who have given me my due share of praise, but what I publish in the 
bulletins of the experiment station here, 1am convinced, must be what 
the farmer can read and profit by. There will of course be many 
scientific facts discovered of too technical a character for the class of 
people for whom these stations were established. Shall we publish 
these technical things in the bulletins, and thus oblige the farmers to 
hunt through what to them would be chaff to find a few kernels of 
wheat? For my own part I incline to the impression that we ought to 
prepare the bulletins for the class they were designed for, and send our 
purely scientific discoveries to the appropriate scientific journals. 

If, however, any of this scientific work can be of profit to the farm- 
ers when popularized, this should be done, and the popular papers given 
to the farmers through the bulletin, while the technical paper should go 
to the scientific journal. 

The demand upon me thus far from the farmers in this State is mainly 
for information about insects so common and well known that it almost 
seems superfluous to write about them, yet this is the information they 
demand and most need just at present. The fact is, these stations to 
do the greatest good must be public educators, and I have no doubt but 
that many of the bulletins will, in answer to this demand, present much 
elementary work for some time to come. 


Report upon the Postal Club Boxes—VIIT. 
y QUEEN MAB. 

Box 66. The fascinations of truth surpass the interest of fiction, and 
objects, which, in the ordinary mind, excite only disgust, to the trained 
perceptions and keener vision of the microscopist, become invested 
with exceeding beauty. The life-history of even the lowest forms of 
life is more marvelous than any fairy tale. P opularly speaking nothing 
can be more unattractive than the tape-worm, yet in the last instalment 
of Cole Studies received, it is shown to be an object of great interest. 
Tania mediocannellata is one of the commonest tape-worms that in- 
fest the human intestines, and its form is that of a many-jointed flat 


186 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ August, 


band, sometimes attaining a length of 16 feet, a breadth of a quarter of 
an inch in its broadest part, and a thickness of nearly 4 of an inch. 
The so-called head of the parasite is circular, not exceeding ;'; of an 
inch in diameter, and is succeeded by a still narrower portion, the so- 
called neck, from which the body enlarges to its posterior extremity, 
which is its broadest part. Near the head, which is provided with 
suckers by which the tape-worm attaches itself to the interior of the 
intestines of its host, the joints or proglottides are short but gradually 
increase in length until at the posterior extremity they attain a length 
of 4 inch. Except as to its reproductive system the structure of this 
tape-worm is simple. A digestive cavity is not required, since its 
nourishment like that of some of the low vegetable parasites is derived 
by exterior absorption. 

Tenia mediocannellata is hermaphrodite and its reproductive sys- 
tem is complicated and highly developed. Every proglottis is the 
same as each of the other proglottides at the same age, for the youngest 
proglottis is that nearest the head, while the oldest is the posterior, 
the relative age of the intermediate ones being determined by their posi- 
tion in the series. Here as in many forms of vegetable life Nature 
prevents self-fertilization in that the male and female organs of a pro- 
glottis mature at different periods. In the mature proglottis the egg- 
cavity has developed to such an extent as almost to exclude all the 
other organs. This proglottis is practically a bag full of mature eggs 
waiting ‘to be detached and requiring only suitable conditions to de- 
velop. The detached proglottis passes from the body of its host with 
the faeces. In some species*the detached proglottis maintains an in- 
dependent life for some days, but in all it sooner or later decays, freeing 
the eggs. During the life of a tape-worm there is a continued dropping 
off of ripened segments and a formation of new ones by budding from 
the head. 

Should the tape-worm be called an individual, or, like the Bryozoa, 
a colony of individuals? Each proglottis is complete in itself and 
identical with all the others except asto age. Tenia mediocannellata 
contains about 1200 segments, each capable of developing 30,000 eggs. 
Seldom are more than "80 segments simultaneously filled with ripened 
eggs, but if the whole 1200 matured at once an aggregate of not less 
than 30,000,000 of eggs would be produced. The. discharged egg of 
the tape-worm contains in the interior of a capsule a little rounded 
embryo with three pairs of horny hooklets at one end. 

Like the fluke the tape-worm requires to pass the intermediate stages 
of its development in the body of some other animal than its final host. 
In this species that intermediate host is the ox, while in another species, 
T. solium, it isthe pig. With its filth-indulging propensities it is easy 
to see how the eggs of the tape-worm may enter the body of the pig 
with its food, but as regards the fastidious ox it is less apparent. In 
whatever mode the transference is accomplished into the alimentary 
canal of the ox, the egg-case is dissolved and the liberated embryo bores 
its way by means of its hooks through the tissues of its host and becomes 
encysted in the muscles. When this beef is eaten by a human being, 
the encysted embryo fixes itself by means of its suckers—already 
present—and becomes the head of a tape-worm, the chain of proglottides 
being produced by budding from its posterior end. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 187 
NOTES. 


In a Watch Factory.—Steel screws are made so minute that it 
takes 180,000 of them to weigh a pound, and although simply steel, 
they are worth many times their weight in gold. The naked eye will 
scarcely recognize them as screws at all; but under a lense they assume 
the perfect symmetry of little solid screws with rounded, slotted heads, 
and good, sharp, shapely threads. The jewels, too, are cut from the 
precious stones, generally garnets, and so small that one would hardly 
find it if dropped. Yet each piece must be as definitely shaped as if it 
weighed a pound. And not only so, but into the end of each a hole is 
bored to receive a moving journal or trunnion. On the accuracy of 
these largely depends the perfection of the watch, and here the thous- 
andth of an inch variation from correct dimensions would be like Mer- 
cutio’s wound. It might just as well be ‘‘so deep as a well, nor so 
wide as a church door,” if it is to vary at all. 


Ferns.—Willard A. Stoweil, 222 Second st., Trenton, N. J., has 
in preparation a catalogue of North American ferns, including Mexico, 
Central America, and the West Indies. There are many catalogues of 
ferns north of Miexice, but none include the whole continent of North 
America. He will esteem it a great favor to receive any notes or com- 
munications in regard to the feene of Mexico and Central America, and 
will be glad to exchange botanical specimens of the eastern United 
States for ferns of the southwest. 


Thin Sections of Timber.—Mr. R. B. Hough, of Lowville, N. Y., 
proposed at the Cleveland meeting of the A. A. A. S. a new method 
of exhibiting and studying the structure of timber. He employs frames 
made of card-board, holding three samples of the wood, each being 
about 2 inches wide and 5 inches long, and from 44-inch to 54,-inch 
thick. These exhibit the wood in three relations; one slice being 
transverse across the grain, another radially running from the aniige 
towards the heart, and a third is a tangential section. The first and 
second show both the sap-wood and the heart. They also reveal the 
grain and the structure of the wood in a most beautiful manner. These 
various frames are arranged in book form for the purpose of study and 
examination. They retain all the characteristics of the wood, and are 
easily recognized, while the effect of the light shining through them is 
to show fe peculiarities of the grain even more emphatically than 
would be the case if one were looking at a mass of the wood. 


The Microscope in the Cronin Mystery.—In the early morning 
of May 5th a trunk was found near Lake View, IIl., with one od 
thrust into a ditch. Captain Villiers and a detachment of officers 
leaped into the patrol-wagon and made a furious run to the lonely spot 
where the trunk stood. When they got there they found a large crowd 
of gaping men and boys who had tr: impled the grass in every inecuion: 
The trunk was taken to the station-house. Thet first thing Captain Vil- 
liers did was to make a careful investigation of the tr ie He found 
enough evidence to satisfy him that a grown person had been murdered, 
fhirust into the trunk, and then carted to the spot between the two cem- 
eteries. 

The trunk had been locked after the body had been placed in it, and 


188 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ August, 


the cotton had been packed about the wounds in order to stanch the flow 
of blood and thus insure greater safety in its transmission from place 
to place. 

Captain Villiers picked the cotton out and placed it upon his table. 
Captain Villiers used to be a doctor, and his examination of the cotton 
led him to believe that the murder must have been committed some time 
after midnight. Some of the absorbent material was still soft with 
blood, and there was a pool of fresh blood in one corner of the trunk. 

Careful examination of the cotton revealed other things to the officer. 
He found a lock of dark brown hair. which was almost as fine as a 
woman’s, but not so glossy. This was the only possible tangible clew 
as to the identity of the victim. The lock of hair was placed under a 
microscope. It was found to be filled with blood and particles of cot- 
ton. The lock looked as though it had been chopped off with a blunt 
instrument. It had not been pulled out of the scalp, but the hairs were 
all of uneven length, and looked as though they might have come off 
the cranium near the forehead. The inside of the cover was bespattered 
with blood. Some of the life fluid had trickled down the exterior of 
the trunk, presumably when the body was dragged out upon the ground. 
There were no marks on the trunk, and aside from the lock of hair 
there was absolutely nothing left for the officers to hold for identification. 


Investigating the effect of remedies by the Microscope.—A 
new method of research, says Dr. Schneidemtihl, has been proposed by 
Prof. Ellenberger and Dr. Baum who, by means of the microscope, 
study the effect of drugs on organs. The remedies or drugs were ad- 
ministered to animals, and these having been killed their livers were 
sectioned in order to find out if the liver cells showed the regular dark 
granulation of rest, or if on account of increased activity they showed 
only faint granulation at their periphery. The hepatic activity was 
found to be stimulated by pilocarpin, muscarin, aloes, salicylate of soda, 
benzoate of soda, while atropin, sulphate of magnesia, acetate of lead, 
hydro-chlorate of ammonia, and calomel were inhibitory.— Yourzal 
Rk. M. S., page 1060. 


Naphthol alpha.—-This drug is reported by Maximowitsch as an 
antiseptic of extraordinary efficiency in hindering the development of 
pathogenic micro-organisms. In solutions containing from 1 to 2$ 
parts of the drug in 10,000 of liquid, it intercepts the propagation of the 
Typhoid and the Tuberculose bacilli ; while it is reported to be 700 
2 aaa ere ee P ! 
times less active in specific physiological effect on the human organism 
than Mercury Bin-iodide. As to its anti-zymotic effect—1 part of 

: 2) ee 
alpha-naphthol to 10,000 of glucose-solution prevents the latter from 

Dane o cae a me ; 
passing into alcoholic fermentation.—MWerck’s Bulletin, vol. 7, p. §2. 


Miss Ella M. Drury, of Natick, Mass., has been in charge of the 
department of microscopy at the Martha’s Vineyard Summer Institute. 
She teaches the use of turn-table and cell-making; balsam, dry and 
fluid mounts ; caustic potash preparations, staining and double staining 
of ferns, sections, and animal tissues; section cutting of both vegetable 
and animal materials. Dishes, bottles, microscope, microtome, all 
media, reagents, and materials are furnished. The laboratory is open 
from 8 A. M. to6 P.M. The five-weeks’ term closes August toth. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 189 
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


San Francisco, Cat.—C. P. Bates, Secy. 


May 8, 7889.—Among the visitors present were A. W. Craig and 
W. E. Brainbridge. The latter gentleman gave a good description 
and exhibited samples of a remarkable find located by him in Ventura 
Sela near the head of the Sespe river. It consists of what is called 

‘gem sand,” which, when examined with a power of about fifty 
diameters, is seen to consist largely of garnets, zirconite, and what 
parties to whom the material was Nenormiceda in the Eastern States pro- 
nounced to be diamonds. The gems, to be sure, are small, appearing 
only the size of a rape seed when magnified fifty diameters, but the 
presence of such quantities of minute stones surely indicates the exist- 
ence of larger members of the same family. Mr. Brainbridge remarked 
that he had no doubt thrown away numbers of the larger Stee. think- 
ing them loose quartz crystals, as he was only panning out the sand to 
find gold or large garnets. 

Professor Hanks, who has made a close study of the gem, stated that 
the small stones said to be diamonds had all the characteristics of the 
California diamond. The metal platinum is also present in this sand, 
but whether in quantity sufficient to make it of commercial importance 
has not yet been ascertained. The zirconite occurs in square prisms 
with pyramidal terminations, and the stones are of a light-brown color 
and very transparent. Altogether, the discovery of Mr. Brainbridge 
is a remarkable one, and its future investigation ‘will be watched w ab 
great interest. It might be mentioned that the sand, of which samples 
were shown, extends over a space of one-half to three-quarters of a 
mile wide by several miles in length. 

Mr. Wickson exhibited’ a peculiar entomological phenomenon—the 
common aphis attacked by the ‘* Fly cholerae or, Empusa musce. 
The gentleman explained how the fungus spores lodge on or become 
attached to the body of a fly, immediately commence growing, and 
penetrate through the skin. “Once inside, the spore rapidly increases 
by self-division, in the manner of yeast cells. The first stages of the 
disease is indicated by the restlessness of the attacked flies ; they soon, 
however, become weak and slow in their motions. Having securely 
fastened themselves with their broad tongues to the object upon which 
they happened to be when attacked by the last stages of the disease, a 
succession of spasmodic tremors pass through their wings and legs 
and they stiffen themselves out to fly no more. The aneGaicn of the 
victim of this disease, previously already swollen, becomes more and 
more distended, and a fatty, whitish substance pushes through the softer 
membranes between the chitinous rings or segments. Soon after a 
whitish halo of spores is formed aroun the dead body, readily seen if 
the fly happens to have fastened to the glass of mirror or window-pane. 
These spores gradually cover the w Hale insect with a white dust, and 
they appear in ever-increasing numbers as the body of the victim dries 
up, until at last its whole interior is empty and only a shell remains. 
From an examination of the affected aphis there appeared no reason to 
doubt but what the fungus developed and ran its course the same as in 
the fly, their bodies being distended and surrounded with the white halo 


190 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [August, 


of filaments bearing ripe spores ready to be thrown off and carry on 
their work of inoculation: 

It was suggested that here might be found a remedy for these annoy- 
ing pests by “systematically inoculating Aphis colonies when existing 
epidemically, and Mr. Wickson erated that such a course had been 
spoken of, but could not say that it had ever been carried out. Unfor- 
tunately, the more destructive of the fruit and grain pests do not seem 
to be seriously attacked by this fungus, although the chinch bug has an 
inveterate enemy in an allied fungus termed “Entomophthora, which 
also carries off the larve of sae butterflies. 

The donations to the library were current numbers of the monthly 
journal of the Royal Microscopical Society, and a copy of the annual 
report of the Al umeda Board of Health, donated by Dr. Rhiel. Sam- 
ples of the Redondo beach diatomaceous earth have been forwarded to 
various kindred societies at home and abroad, and the Corresponding 
Secretary stated that a sample of the interesting gem sand would be 
sent to the Royal Microscopical Society. 

o-———— 


LEAVENWORTH MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 


June 4, 78389.—One of the great pleasures of the evening, at the 
residence of Prof. Lighton, was a visit to the Society by Dr. Theo. Ge 
Stanley, of Kansas City, Mo. 

This gentleman brought with him a complete series of slides of his 
own preparation, ices ating the growth and development of the tooth. 
Very many of the slides were w orth their weight in gold, and were 
described by Dr. Stanley in such a full and complete manner as to place 
the Society under great obligations to him. 

Prot: Lighton Beoited a fine collection of teeth of his own prepara- 
tion, containing several specimens of recent and fossil shark’s teeth, 
teeth of the sale tooth of the horse, and human teeth. One of the 
sections of human teeth was cut to a thickness of only one twenty- -four- 
hundredth of an inch thick, mounted tn styrax, exhibiting i in a highly 
interesting manner the union of enamel and dentine 

Dr. Bidwell exhibited some very fine sections of human teeth and 
some highly interesting vegetable sections. 

O 
San Francisco, Cat.—C. P. Bates, Secy. 


June 12, 1889.—The semi-monthly meeting was held at its rooms, 
President Payzantin the chair. <A. H. Breckenfeld, the Vice-President, 
was present for the first time since recovering from his severe illness, 
and exhibited some fine specimens of J/elacerta ringens,a tube-build- 
ing rotifer, belonging to the family of wheel vatmnale ules! This variety 
is Weonaidered the most beautiful of the species, and builds for its pro- 
tection an ingenious tube, which it forms of round pellets that are elabo- 

rated in the interior of the animalcule, and securely gummed together 
with a secretion derived from the same source. This rotifer, ee 
feeding, extends itself partly from its tube and by means of several rows 
of cilia produces a rapid rotary motion, one set of cilia drawi ing a 
current of water containing food to its mouth, while another row ejects 
the déérzs by a current produced in an opposite direction. The tube 
and occupant are highly transparent and viewed by dark-ground illum- 
ination never fails to excite astonishment and wonder at the sagacity 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 191 


displayed by nature in protecting these minute organisms from their 
enemies and furnishing them with such elaborate means for obtaining 
their subsistence. Mr. Breckenfeld also exhibited a slide of ~ De 
or ‘* cluster cup fungus,” found infesting the scanty vegetation on Sig- 
nal Peak, Yosemite Valley, some seven thousand feet above sea levell 

Dr. E. G. Clark exhibited some interesting slides of cinnabar ore 
in Chalcedony showing free mercury, a rare thing i in the natural state ; 
also a beautiful mounting of crystallized gold, displaying the peculiar 
fern-leafed disposition of the crystals produced by the galvanic current. 

The most notable feature of the ev ening was the exhibition by 
Charles C. Riedy of his collection of old and rare works of the early 
writers on microscopy. To the student and all interested in micro- 
graphical literature this was an opportunity seldom offered to examine 
many volumes published by the pioneers in this branch of science, that 
are now very scarce. Mr. Riedy is devoted tothe study of the Infusoria, 
and to facilitate his inquiries in that direction the present collection has 
been slowly accumulated, though not without great difficulty and per- 
severance, many of his orders ‘for special works having been several 
years in the hands of European book-dealers before they were obtained. 
The different volumes cover the entire field of microscopical research 
from its very beginning, and contain a complete 7észmeé of the evolution 
of optical science, together with the progress of mechanics as applied 
to the microscope. Many of the editions, in fact a majority of them, 
contain a high grade of illustrations, considering the date when they 
were eed: while some are embellished with fine-line copper-pl: ite 
engraving that would do credit to ourown day. The oldest publications, 
belonging to the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, are all bound in 
heavy parchment, and mostly written in the scholarly language of the 
time—Latin. The printing is remarkably good and legible, there 
being no perceptible fading of ink or paper. “The authors ‘represented 
were Adams, Baker, Baster, Bonanni, Descartes, Ellis, Eichhorn, 
Gleichen, Gétze, Grew, Hill, Hooke, Joblot, Ledermiiller, Leeuwen- 
hoek, MarGh: Neednam, Power, Redi, Schiffer, Glabber, Smith, 
Spallanzani, Schott, Swammerdam, Trembley. Notable among these 
are Descartes’ works, with numerous wood-cuts, small quarto, Amster- 
dam, 1650. This work contains an illustration of Descartes’ gigantic 
microscope, eight feet high. 

In the collection is Powers’ ‘* Experimental Philosophy, in Three 
Books, containing New Experiments, Microscopical, Mercurial, Mag- 
netical.”” London, 1664. This last work is the earliest volume on the 
microscope in the English language. 

Before adjourning a unanimous vote of thanks was tendered Mr. 
Riedy for his interesting exhibition of what is certainly the most unique 
collection of rare microscopical literature in the United States. 


NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


The Psychic Life of Micro-organisms. By Alfred Binet. Trans- 
lated from the French by Towne McCormack, with a preface by 
the author. Chicago, 1889. The Open Court Publishing Com- 
pany. (Price, 75 cents. ) 


M. Alfred Binet, the collaborator of Ribot and Féré, and one of the 


192 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [ August. 


most eminent representatives of the French School of Psychology, has 
presented in the above work the most important results of recent investi- 
gations into the world of micro-organisms. ‘The data of this depart- 
ment of natural science lie scattered for the most part in isolated reporis 
and publications, and no attempt has hitherto been made to collate and 
present them in a systematized form. Especial use has been made of 
the investigations of Balbéani, Claparéde and Lachmann, Maupas, 
Ribot, Engelmann, Pouchet, Weber, Pfeffer, Kent, Dujardin, 
Gruber, Nussbaum, Biitschlé, Lieberkiihn. ‘The cuts, eighteen in 
number, are illustrative of the movements, nutrition, digestion, nuclear 
phenomena, and fecundation of proto-organisms. The most interesting 
chapters are those on fecundation, which demonstrate the same instincts 
and vital powers to exist in spermatozoids as are found in animals of 
higher organization. 

M. Binet’ s researches and conclusions show ‘* that psychological 
phenomena begin among the very lowest classes of beings; they are 


oD 
met with in every form of life from the simplest cell to the most com- 
plicated organism.” ‘The author contests the theory of Romanes, who 


assigns the first appearance of the various psychical and mental facul- 
ties to different stages or periods in the scale of zodlogical development. 
To M. Binet there is an aggregate of properties which exclusively per- 
tain to living matter, the existence of which is seen in the lowest forms 
of life as <i as in the highest. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


{These notices will be given six insertions in tiiceoln column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof. ] 
FOR EXCHANGE. —Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 
WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 
WANTED.—A clean copy of Rey. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atlas of the 
Diatomacez. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous Earth from Utah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD, Salt Lake City, Utah. 


CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 


WANTED.—Specimens of rocks for slicing and grinding into sections; also bones and teeth of differ- 
ent animals, diatoms zx sztu on alge, diatomaceous and polycystinous earths, ocean soundings, etc., etc. 
Liberal exchange in microscopic slides or cash. 

ARTHUR J. DOHERTY, 63 Burlington St., Manchester, Eng. 


TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of petrified wood—Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand ‘‘ Burt’s Solar Compass’’ complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second-hand, objectives, condensers, polarizers, stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. W.N.SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 

OFFERED.—Zeiss’ New Catalogue (in German) forwarded for ro cents in stamps. 
F. J. EMMERICH & SONS, 43 Barclay St., New York City. 


WANTED.—Any works on Microscopy not already in my Library. 
H. M. WHELPLEY, Fr. R. M. S., St. Louis, Mo. 


WANTED.—(In exchange for slides.) ‘‘ Microscopical Bulletin,’’ Vol. I, No. 5, August, 1884, and 


Vol. II, No. 1, February, 1885. M.S. WIARD, New Britai , Conn. 
Labels in exchange for slides. : EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, II. 
First-class Histological Slides for other good mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 

shares. S. G. SHANKS, M. D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N. Y. 


WANTED.—A set of Proceedings of the American Society of Microscopists. State price of set or 
of single volumes, kind of binding, etc. Also, any other microscopical periodicals. 
13 


O. BOX 630, Washington, D. C. 


i 


\) 


Lol 


Ol inch. 


SECTION OF LIVER CONTAINING EGGS OF A WORM. 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 
MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


Mors xX. SEPTEMBER, 1889, Noe 9: 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Amert- 
can Monthly Microsc opical Journal, Box “630, W ashington, ID (Ce 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent'to Messrs. 
Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Fiill, London, or to Mr. W. P. ‘Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, ‘London, accompanied by the yearly price of five Vee 


Ova of Trichocephalus Dispar in the Liver of Rat. 
WITH ONE PLATE. 
By EDWARD A. BALLOCH, M. D., 


WASHINGTON, D. C. 


In calling attention to the subject indicated in the title of this paper, 
I have been guided by the idea that one slide carefully and exhaustively 
studied is often of more benefit than a more ambitious attempt to cover 
a larger field at the expense of thoroughness. Keeping this idea in 
view alee us now study the slide before us, which is one that has often 
afforded me pleasure and profit. I propose to take it up as if it were 
not labelled and as if we were studying it for the first time. 

First, then, as to the macroscopic appearances. Holding the slide to 
the light we see it to be a section about one-half inch long by one-eighth 
inch broad, with an outline like the Italian letter (65? “We Bisel see 
that it is Pye eeceted by numerous fissures and that different parts of the 
section have different colors. | Now, let us place it on the stage of the 
microscope and examine it, using first the lower powers. All the 
naked-eye details are now seen to fe intensified. 

The whole section is seen to be bounded by a limiting membrane, 
prolongations from which also line the numerous fissures. From this 
we argue that we have to do with a section of a complete organ or 
str iene But what organ or what structure is it? Let us try to de- 
termine. 

We see that the section is divided into a number of subdivisions of 
an irregular polygonal shape, some of which are quite distinct, while 
others seem to be fused with neighboring subdivisions. 

The one marked a (Fig. 1) seems to “be the most typical. Let us 
examine it. It is of a pentagonal outline and separated from contigu- 
ous subdivisions by well-marked fissures. In its centre is seen an open- 
ing and with care we are able to make out a delicate lining membrane. 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


194 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [September, 


The opening, therefore, is not adventitious. This opening is seen at 
6. At the junction of our subdivision with the neighboring ones we 
see another opening, c, with more distinct lining membrane. 

The contents of the subdivision seem, with a low power, to be of a 
granular nature, separated, or rather penetrated, by fine channels which 
converge from all parts of the lobule to meet at a common centre at 6. 

In one part of the field we see what seems to be a mass of black dots, 
in no way resembling the other parts of the structure and which have 
not taken the stain. 

We will now use the higher power and endeavor to make out more 
closely the nature of the structure we are studying. 

What, with the low power, seemed to be a mass of granular matter 
is now seen to be composed of pentagonal cells, with large nuclei 
and one or more nucleoli. (Fig. 2, @ and 6.) Each cell is separated 
from its neighbors by the fine channels before referred to. The fissures 
are seen to be composed of connective tissue. The opening at c (Fig. 
1) is seen to have a tunica adventitia of connective tissue and a lin- 
ing membrane composed apparently of a single layer of epithelial cells. 
It is clearly separable from the surrounding tissue. 

At 6 the lining membrane is very delicate and the epithelial cells 
crowd closely around it, making it appear that in some places the lin- 
ing membrane is merely the walls of the epithelial cells themselves. 
We are warranted, from these details, in pronouncing the opening at 6 
to be a vein and the one at ca duct. In other parts of the structure, 
in the connective tissue between the subdivisions, we see the well-known 
appearance of an artery cut across and accompanied by a vein and a 
duct, the artery being the smallest of the three. Let us now sum up. 

We have a whole organ, divided into irregular, generally pentagonal 
lobules, composed of polygonal epithelial cells, each with its nucleus 
and one or more nucleoli, the cells being separated from each other by 
fine inter-cellular channels. Each iepule has a central vein, and in the 
inter-lobular connective tissue are found artery, vein, and duct. 

This appearance is characteristic of but one organ, viz., that which 
we call the liver. 

We can safely say, then, that we have to do with the section of a liver, 
and since the section is that of a whole organ, the liver must be that of 
a small animal. 

A rough guess at the weight of this liver would put it at one-fourth 
of an ounce, and, assuming the proportion of the weight of the liver to 
that of the whole body as one to forty, we might infer that the weight 
of the animal from which this liver came was about ten ounces. If it 
be a fact, as Klein states (Elements of Histology), that in man, carniv- 
orous animals, and rodents the lobules of the liver are more confused 
and less distinct than in other animals, we should be justified in assum- 
ing this to be the liver of a small carnivorous animal or of a rodent. 
This brings us to the end of our facts concerning the main portion of 
our section. Deduction will carry us no further, I think. 

But there was another part of our slide which, under the low power, 
seemed a mass of black dots, and which has a different color from the 
remainder of the tissue. What of this? Let us apply the same methods 
of investigation to this as to the rest of the section and from the facts 
observed reach our conclusions. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 195 


We notice four distinct appearances : 

Ist. Oval bodies with an outer and an inner membrane, the inner be- 
ing the sharper and apparently the thicker. In the centre of this body 
is a mass of granular material, irregular in outline and of a shrunken 
appearance, occupying fully one-half the central cavity. The granular 
material has taken the stain; the rest of the body has not. (Fig. 3, @.) 

2d. Round bodies having the same diameter as those first noticed, 
the same outer and inner walls and the same central granular mass. 
(Fig. 3, 4.) 

Clearly these are the bodies first noticed, cut through their short di- 
ameter. 

3d. Opaque, black bodies, having the same size and shape as our 
first ones. An outer, but not an inner, membrane can be made out. 
They reflect light, but do not polarize. 

We are warranted, I think, in the assumption that we have to deal 
with the same bodies as before, but bodies which have undergone a de- 
generation, most probably the calcareous one. 

4th. In some of the bodies we notice on one end, and in some on 
both ends, short prolongations of the outer membrane which by focus- 
ing are seen to be tubular. With the power used I cannot say 
whether they do or do not communicate with the central cavity. (Fig. 
3, ¢.) Apparently they do. Iam also uncertain as to whether or not 
the inner membrane lines these prolongations. With the one-fifth I 
cannot see that it does, and as I do not propose to go further than the 
facts observed will warrant me, I shall leave this for future study with 
higher powers. 

‘Looking over these four groups we see that they are but variations 
of the same body. We also see that in this body there is no trace of 
circulatory or nervous systems, no breathing or digestive apparatus. 
It is evidently a cell, and it is equally evident that it is a parasite, as it 
differs entirely from what we have seen to be the normal structure of 
the liver. 

I am not aware of any vegetable parasite which possesses the power 
of living and developing in a like situation, and this cell evidently has 
lived and developed since it and its companions have replaced a con- 
siderable amount of liver-tissue. We may assume, then, that we are 
dealing with an animal cell. I will not stop here to enumerate the 
characteristic qualities of the ovum. They are known to youall. I 
will merely say that in shape and structure our unknown body fulfils 
the requirements of an ovum in that it is oval, has an outer and inner 
membrane, inclosing granular contents. We are dealing, therefore, 
with ova. We know that the ova most likely to be found in the liver 
are those of the intestinal worms. Let us, therefore, examine the in- 
testinal parasites and their ova and see if we can find anything answer- 
ing to what we have seen. And here we must leave our microscope 
and accept facts observed and noted by others. Any helminthologist 
would go at once to Leuckart and Cobbold. Let us follow his ex cample. 

Among the Nematode worms of the family Filaridz we find one, 77z- 
chocephalus dispar, the ova of which ns described as having a longi- 
tudinal diameter of from .1, inch to 4, inch and having at each end 
a protrusion in the form of a papilla. Embryos are scarcely or never 
seen. Some authors describe and figure the protuberance as composed 


196 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [September 


of the inner and others as composed of the outer membrane. So far 28 
I have observed in this specimen, the papilla is composed of the outer 
membrane, but I hope to investigate this point further and with higher 
powers. The ova develop slowly, and at the end of several months at 
the earliest and often not for a year and a half or more a worm-shaped 
embryo may be found. They have great power of resisting the influ- 
ence of external surroundings and may be dried or frozen without losing 
vitality, though their development may be arrested. They are probably 
introduced into the body by means of food or water. 

So far as the description of the ovum above given goes, it applies 
perfectly to our specimen, and as I can find no other ovum having this 
peculiar projection on each end, we may ascribe our ova to 7. déspar. 
Therefore from our study of this slide we.conclude that we have to do 
with the liver of some small carnivorous animal or rodent, several lo- 
bules of which have been replaced by the ova of 7rzchocephalus dis- 
par, a nematode worm of the family Frraripa. 

This completes our study. It has been my endeavor to show what 
may be done with a medium grade instrument, without extra appliances, 
and with ordinary powers (14 inch to + inch), and to show that any 
slide, carefully studied, will amply repay the time spent upon it. If I 
have succeeded in demonstrating this I am abundantly satisfied. 


DISCUSSION OF PAPER. 


At the meeting of the Washington Microscopical Society, when this 
paper was presented, Mr. Smiley said: I am pleased with the manner 
in which the subject has been treated. By taking one step at a time 
and giving reasons for each step a subject may be thoroughly explained. 
This is the method adopted by Dr. James, of St. Louis, in his work on 
Microscopy, by means of which a beginner may take up microscopy 
and find every step carefully and progressively explained. 

Dr. Acker said: This method is the one used by Virchow in his 
teaching. As to this worm I have seen it commonly in Germany, but 
I have searched for it carefully in every fost-mortem examination made 
by me at the Children’s Hospital in this city, but without success. It 
is commonly found in the calecum. 

Dr. Balloch said: I was led to treat this slide in this way by my own 
experience with text-books, which most commonly tell you that a thing 
is so, but do not say why it is so. 

Mr. Duff showed a fine photograph of 7rzchocephalus dispar, en- 
capsuled in the liver of a spitz mouse, which was made by Dr. Gray, 
of the Army Medical Museum, ‘The ova were magnified 350 diameters 
and showed the same structure and general appearance as those in Dr. 
Balloch’s specimen. 


Ginn & Co’s Catalogue and Announcements.—Under the various 
headings of Old and Middle, English Elementary and Higher English, 
Latin, Greek, Mathematics, Natural Science, Music, History, Philos- 
ophy, Modern Languages, Sanskrit and Avestan, Political Science, 
Geography, and Miscellaneous are given a large number of titles, brief 
statements relating to the main features and contents of the present 
editions and the price of all college and high-school books published 
by this firm. Students will find its pages worth a careful perusal. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 197 


Forensic Microscopy, or the Microscope in its Legal Relations.* 
By W. J. LEWIS, M. D., 


HARTFORD, CONN, 


The occasion which brings us together at this the Twelfth Annual 
Meeting of our National Organization is one of unusual interest. Ours 
is a society composed of persons representing every department of natu- 
ral science, diligent seekers after truths, penetrating more and more as 
the years roll on the innermost secrets of nature and lifting the shroud- 
ing veil of mystery from the dogmas of old; its members engaged in 
special pursuits, apparently widely separated, into which, partly from 
taste, partly from environment, we have as individuals been led, yet 
united in the one distinctive field of requiring the aid of that king of in- 
struments, the microscope, in our varied and multitudinous investiga- 
tions. 

Coming from widely-separated parts of a great country, we meet once 
a year to glean from one another the experiences of a twelvemonth ; 
to acquire in a few days, through such interchange of ideas and thought, 
a practical knowledge which might otherwise necessitate years of un- 
aided individual work to eneompass. It is surprising that the need of 
such an organization should ever have been questioned ; surprising, too, 
that its necessity was not sooner appreciated. 

No instrument yet devised by the ingenuity of man equals the micro- 
scope in its universal application to research in the broad domain of 
science, and this evening I purpose to call your attention, in a brief 

way. to some of its special relations to jurisprudence. 

Taking advantage of that subtle power of the human mind to ignore 
space, let us for a ‘moment glance into the past, that we may better ap- 
preciate the present status of science; briefly review some of its victo- 
ries over superstition and ignorance and recall to mind those who, hav- 
ing gone before, have laid much of the foundation for that edifice 
wherein rapidly-increasing knowledge is enlightening its devoted stu- 
dents. 

Medical jurisprudence, to which science the microscope, in its legal 
relations, is most closely allied, dates from the early part of the seven- 
teenth century, when the first treatise on forensic medicine appeared, a 
work written by Zacchias, then one of the Pope’s physicians. In it he 
devoted chapters to prophecy, miracle, sorcery, torture, and kindred 
subjects. Suffice it to say, this once able work by the father of legal 
medicine is no longer cited as anauthority. The new-born science, re- 
ceiving little encouragement in Italy, was soon transplanted to Ger- 
many, where it was ‘carefully nurtured under government protection 
until the favorable legislation of 1532 made it obligatory on courts to 
take the evidence of medical men in all cases involving medico-legal 
questions. From that time, aided by subsequent legislation, until the 
present Germany has held her supremacy in forensic medicine. The 
work of Zacchias was superseded as early as 1730 by the JESUNE -cele- 
brated productions of Albertus, Valentina, and Teichmeyer.’ 

France, in about 1600, enacted laws similar to those then in vogue 
in Germany, and made considerable progress in the science until 1692, 


* Annual address before the American Society of Microscopists, read at the Buffalo meeting, August 
24, 1889. 


198 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY _ [September, 


when medico-legal offices became hereditary and corrupt, and remained 
so until the French Revolution. Since 1803 France has required of her 
medical experts, who, by the way, are appointed by the court, and not 
as in this country retained by counsel, to be graduates i in medicine and 
also to pass a rigid examination on figsheail jurispr udence, in which 
study they are presumed to have had special training. 

No direct application of the microscope to questions of law or of legal 
medicine was made until about 1835, since which time it has been used 
repeatedly in convicting the guilty and acquitting the innocent. No 
longer are we obliged to resort to expedients taught by Albertus in 
1726, such as that ae victim’s wounds would open Pale bleed afresh in 
the presence of the murderer, or the time-honored custom of watching 
the effect upon a suspected criminal as he touched the dead body of his 
supposed victim—the latter test having been used until well into the 
present century. 

As the greatest advances made in placing medicine as a science on a 
proper Fonndation date from the application of the microscope to phys- 
iological investigations, it is not strange we should find it at the pres- 
ent time occupying a large and important field in medico-legal research. 

At first, the microscope in its legal relations was conaned to a few 
questions in criminal law. With the improvements in modern lenses, 
with the new and perfected means of determining minute measure- 
ments, with the adaptation of the spectroscope and other accessories, 
it has assumed such importance in both criminal and civil law as to 
justify the coining of the term, Forensic Microscopy. Although the 
microscope has for a number of years played an important part in many 
noted criminal cases, its proper relation to law, and especially to med- 
ical jurisprudence, is little understood. By many its powers are over- 
estimated, while others underrate its value, or even cast aside as worth- 
less all testimony relating to the results obtained through its use. 

Tt, “as. “an unfortanere’ though existing Conditions which permits 
a person to testify as an expert in branches where he has but little 
more knowledge than his hearers. Partly from this cause discredit has 
been thrown upon the whole field of expert testimony in this country. 
Physicians as a class are noted for never agreeing with one another, 
especially when called upon to testify as witnesses. It is proverbial that 
an equal number of medical experts may be obtained to express them- 
selves on opposing sides. This, however, relates purely to their 
opinions or their respective interpretation of facts. Such disagreement 
is not confined to the medical profession, but invades all branches of 
expert testimony. In cases involving questions of mechanics and 
physics it is of frequent occurrence for expert machinists, electricians, 
and others, to express exactly opposite opinions, and a notable example 
of this may be found in the voluminous testimony recently taken in the 
State of New York on the question of executing criminals by elec- 
tricity. 

Where, however, two or more persons, expert in the use of the 
microscope, are called upon to testify, there should be no disagreement 
as to the results of any examination they may make. Thus, for exam- 
ple, in the examination of a stain, if blood corpuscles are found, that 
should be determined equally well by each. If measured, their meas- 
urements should correspond exactly. There should be no difference on 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 199 


these matters of fact, though their opinions as to how the blood came 
there, how long it has been there, or like questions, may be honestly 
opposed. 

In the broad field of chemistry and toxicology the microscope is not 
only an important means by which to determine the composition of 
fluids and solids, but is frequently used to corroborate ordinary tests 
made in the chemical laboratory. 

It is not many years since that deaths from poisoning were sur- 
rounded by a fear and dread s scarcely appreciable at the present day. 
Then, the action of poisons and their means of detection were un- 
known. So great an atmosphere of suspicion and dread surrounded 
a sudden and inexplicable death that the grossest legal abuses pre- 

vailed. Severe punishments were inflicted upon persons suspected of 
having committed murder by poisoning, and those convicted in Eng- 
land were for a long period broiled alive, and in France, burned at the 
stake even so lateas 1791. With modern methods of investigation a 
knowledge of poisons has been obtained, and methods introduced for 
their detection have become so perfect as to render the fear of discovery 
greater than the fearful and indescribable dread once experienced of 
being the victim of a mysterious death. 

With a special form of the modern microscope made for chemical 
work so arranged that the objective is below the stage, where it is pro- 
tected from the corrosive action of reagents, qualitative chemical an- 
alysis of minute quantities may be conducted with ease and accuracy, 
the reactions and crystalline deposits of different chemical combina- 
tions being observed ‘through the instrument. Although the inverted 
microscope has been known for some years in the forms issued by M. 
Nachet, it has been used but little on account of its limited scope and 
unsatisfactory definition as compared with the usual upright model. 
Through the combined skill and ingenuity of one of the members of 
this Society, Mr. Edward Bausch, the instrument has been greatly 
modified and improved and introduced in the form of a combined in- 
verted and vertical microscope. The practical application of the pres- 
ent model extends the field it was intended to occupy, and renders easy 
micro-chemical investigations heretofore impossible, or requiring the 
most delicate and tedious manipulation. 

The greatest advance made in modern legal chemistry was through 
the brilliant achievements of Bunsen and Kirchhoff in 1859, by which 
we are enabled, through the means of the spectroscope, to identify with 
unerring accuracy not only the elementary forms of matter but many 
compounds, and in quantities so minute as to be beyond the reach of 
all other known methods of analysis. . With the gr eat activity charac- 
teristic of modern science, no sooner was the wonderful capacity of 
the spectroscope appreciated than efforts were made to devise a combi- 
nation whereby it could be utilized in microscopical research. Largely 
to the efforts of Mr. H. C. Sorby this was accomplished and the micro- 
spectroscope introduced, through which new and important discoveries 
have since been made, especially in the field of forensic microscopy. 
The first notable improvement in micro-spectroscopes was a modifica- 
tion by Zeiss, of Jena, who devised an arrangement whereby the direct 
vision prism may be turned one side, and ihe: slit opened, thus en: ibling 
the object under inspection to be accurately focused. 


200 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY _ [September, 


A variety of scales have been used for mapping out and measuring 
the absorption bands, the best being that in the Zeiss instrument re- 
ferred to, where the scale is ruled to read in wave lengths. In deter- 
mining the exact location of the absorption bands it is essential that 
the eye should be kept in a fixed position, as the least motion on the 
part of the observer alters the apparent relation of the bands to the 
bright lines of the scale, sufficient to confound, for example, a spectrum 
of blood with that of some other red fluid. Prof. Moses C. White, of 
Yale College, a member of this Society, who has had a long and varied 
experience in the use of the microscope in medico-legal cases, a few 
years since devised and perfected a micro- spectroscope which entirely 
overcomes the requirement of holding the eye steadily, and renders the 
practical ‘utility of this feature of the instrument equal to its theoretical 
value. 

All the best forms of modern micro-spectroscopes are provided with 
an arrangement whereby the spectrum of a known solution may be ex- 
amined in direct comparison with the one under observation. The 
great delicacy of this instrument, and the importance of its application 
in legal examinations, can hardly be overestimated. Mr. Sorby and 
others have claimed they were able to reveal the presence of a single 
blood corpuscle by its spectrum, and their observations are confirmed 
by Prof. Theodore G. Wormley, of the University of Pennsylvania. 
The delicacy of the test may be better understood when we remember 
that the estimated weight of a human-blood corpuscle is about one five- 
hundred-millionth of a grain. 

By the aid of these instruments, and through discoveries already made, 
the foundation has been laid for a branch of investigation in criminal 
cases which will at no distant day be better understood. I refer to the 
critical and systematic study of dyes and other substances used in the 
manufacture of textile fabrics. It frequently happens that wool, cotton, 
and other fibres are found on murderous weapons submitted to experts 
for examination. These often contain artificial coloring matter, which 
may or may not correspond to similar fibres. in the clothing worn by 
the victim or the accused. In an examination of a suspected blood 
stain, involving the question of crime, the micro-spectroscope may be 
used to corroborate other tests. While it enables us to discriminate be- 
tween the coloring principles of blood and other fluids, it does not as- 
sist in distinguishing between the blood of different animals. 

Considerable attention has been given of late to the microscopical ex- 
amination of handwriting, both in criminal and civil cases. Differing 
from the views of most writers on the subject, I consider the instrument 
of no aid in forming an opinion as to the author of a given specimen 
of penmanship, its value being confined to the determination of altera- 
tions and changes made in the original. The slightest derangement 
in the fibres on the finished surface of the paper cannot be restored by 
the most skilful forgers. It is impossible to make an erasure of either 
pencil, pen and ink, or printed lines, which the microscope will not 
detect. 

One of the commonest methods employed in imitating handwriting 
is to first take a pencil sketch or tracing, which is afterwards inked and 
the pencil marks erased. No matter how delicately this erasure is per- 
formed, under the proper lens the surface of the paper will disclose 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 201 


when this method has been employed. Not only can the abraded sur- 
face be easily distinguished, but particles of graphite are almost inva- 
riably found. hen the original has been obliterated by bleaching 
with chemicals sometimes used for that purpose, the consequent stain 
removed and other words substituted, the microscope furnishes a sure 
and ready means of detection. 

A material change in a legal instrument may sometimes be accom- 
plished by the addition of a strokes of the pen here and there, which 
would escape observation by the most critical eye, yet, when ied 
through a glass of adequate power their true character might be re- 
vealed. 

Prof. Albert McCalla, in his presidential address delivered before this 
Society at its Chicago meeting, says, ‘* The microscope is an unerring 
detective.” To illustrate the “tr uth Of this statement and to show he 
numerous and unexpected roads through which legal microscopy leads 
one, I would call attention to an interesting case coming under my ob- 
servation several years since. 

A burglary had been committed. Prior to the discovery of the crime 
two men were arrested by the police as suspicious characters. When 
the theft was reported, suspicion immediately fell upon the prisoners, 
though nothing could be found upon their persons to connect them with 
the deed. As a last resort their shoes were submitted, to ascertain if a 
microscopical examination could possibly reveal the desired clue. These 
shoes, though by no means microscopic themselves, furnished sufficient 
material for the most enthusiastic scientist. Those who have ever ex- 
amined similar articles, which have been occupied for months in collect- 
ing specimens, can appreciate the food for scientific thought thus accumu- 
eae Mingled with a vast assortment of debris, between the soles and 
uppers were found little patches of wheat flour. It was then learned 
that entrance had been effected through a pantry window, and the men 
in their operations had upset a pan ae flour standing on a shelf near by. 
Although when first charged with the offence they hid denied all knowl- 
edge of it, yet, when the result of the microscopical examination was 
made known, they confessed their guilt. 

Another instance in which a crime was detected and demonstrated 
solely by the aid of the microscope is worth citing : Two elderly maiden 
sisters lived in a small frame-house in a country village. One night 
their dwelling was discovered to be on fire. An alarm was imme- 
diately raised and neighbors collected, who used every effort to subdue 
the flames, but without avail. The entire house, with its contents, was 
consumed. A search among the ruins revealed the charred parts of all 
that remained of the former occupants. The origin of the fire was a 
mystery. An investigation was ordered to ascertain, if possible, not 
only its cause, but also to determine whether the sisters were burned to 
death, or whether murdered and the house burned to conceal the crime. 
Not enough remained of the bodies to throw any light upon the subject. 
Their hair, which was long and heavy, was found intact. This was 
embedded in a puttatious, brownish-colored mass, which I found upon 
microscopical examination to be composed entirely of blood, which had 
coagulated and been partially dried by the intense heat, yet had retained 
saficiont moisture to preserve the hair and pieces of clothing found in 
the same place. Of course, such an outpouring of blood must have 


202 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [September, 


occurred prior to death, and could not have been caused by the fire, the 
action of heat being to coagulate and stop its flow. Owing to the quantity 
of blood found aie the long hair of the head, the aon inference was 
that the larger vessels of the neck were cut, Aida the bodies afterwards 
burned. 

The attention of an expert, called to make a microscopical examina- 
tion in a case involving a question of crime, is generally directed to- 
wards determining the eahine and source of the material under obser- 
vation. This is frequently of animal origin. At the very outset we 
are met by the stubborn fact that no histological tissue is sufficiently 
characteristic of the particular animal from which it is derived to enable 
us to determine its absolute source in all cases, and this is not strange 
when we consider the theory of evolution generally accepted by scien- 
tists of the present day. Indeed, we could hardly expect to find a 
morphological tissue which has not its counterpart in microscopic ani- 
mal or vegetable life. One form naturally blends into another in the 
development of species, an absolute line of demarcation in histologi- 

cal elements being beyond the power of the microscope to detceaae 

with our present Nenowledee! Lawyers, ever mindful of their clients’ 
interests when the padlenras is against them, cling to this loop-hole with 
great tenacity. 

The examination of a supposed weapon should be conducted with 
the greatest care, and full notes taken of every process in the operation. 
The: weapon itself should be described, with the measurements and notes 
of all spots or marks which might in any way bear upon the case, and 
their relation one to another. It is also frequently advisable to ane 
photographs for record and future reference. A thorough search should 
be made for any hairs, fibres, or other substances, which, if found, 
should be carefully removed for further investigation, their exact position 
having been previously noted, and the specimens properly marked to 
prevent confusion and future complications. Careful investigation of 
filaments thus obtained, and which are unfortunately frequently over- 
looked, will oftentimes reveal valuable information otherwise escaping 
observation. 

Little of vaiue has been written on the subject of hair in its medico- 
legal relations. Although nearly all treatises upon medical jurisprudence, 
borne: in the English and foreign languages, mention the subject, they 
are largely copied one from fe ones and based upon comparatively 
little original research. While we may not be able to positively deter- 
mine the source of a given hair or fibre by examination alone, yet, when 
taken in connection with other information, doubt may sometimes be 
removed and conclusive evidence established. 

In a recent case occurring in Connecticut a man was found on his 
barn floor mortally wounded. He remained unconscious until his 
death. The injuries were a fracture of the skull and several lacer- 
ated wounds of the scaip, some extending beyond the hair-line well 
onto the forehead. A murder was suspected and a young man arrested 
for the crime. <A piece of scantling some three feet long, covered with 
blood at one end, was supposed to have been the instrument used by the 
assailant. On an examination of the weapon, I found, among other 
things, a number of minute downy hairs imbedded in the blood. Dur- 
ing the subsequent trial, the defence set up was that the man had fallen 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 203 


from a hay- ‘mow, striking his head upon the stick in question, thus pro- 
ducing the injuries. Distinct spots of blood indicative of blows were 
found on different sides of the club, and the defence, in trying to make 
this evidence conform to their theory, raised the question of the origin 
of these minute hairs. ‘The testimony was to the effect that they came 
from the forehead of the deceased. This opinion was not, however, 
based solely upon a microscopical examination of the hairs, but in con- 
nection with other testimony previously introduced, the query being 
substantially, what evidence was there to show that these minute hairs 
had any connection with the case, assuming the blood to have been from 
deceased. 

The examination showed the hairs to have been torn out by violence, 
inasmuch as many of them still retained the bulb and bits of lacerated 
tissue, and the cortex more or less torn. They were found fixed upon 
slivers of wood in locations some inches apart, and also on different 
faces of the scantling. There being no similar hairs on any portion of 
the scalp where the wounds pecared! except the forehead, where they 
are plentiful, it is obvious they must have come from the latter loca- 
tion. The hairs were embedded in groups too widely separated to con- 
form to the theory that they were produced by a fall or one blow, when 
considered together with the sur gical relation of the wounds. A strong 
effort was made to throw Gaaner on the value of this testimony and con- 
fuse the jury, on the ground that the hairs of some animals measured 
the same in diameter as these referred to, and that it was, therefore, im- 
possible to discriminate between them microscopically. On this account 
it was claimed that the hairs might easily have been from another source, 
the one on which the greatest stress was laid being the fine downy hairs 
from a mouse. Any person familiar with the microscopical appearance 
of hair from rodents will appreciate the absurdity of claiming a resem- 
blance between those and the huinan hair in question. 

In opinion-evidence relating to hair, and the same may be said of 
nearly all other animal tissue, the truth can often be better reached by 
exclusion than by an attempt to designate the particular animal or per- 
son from which it is derived. Microscopical differences between the 
hairs of various animals are, as a rule, far easier to determine than in 
the case of blood, the optical image being generally so characteristic as 
to sanction, at least, the exclusion of many sources without further in- 
vestigation. Micrometry is of little value in diagnosing a_ particular 
hair. so far as its diameter is concerned, though of aid in ascertaining 
the relative portions of medulla and cortex. 

The cortical substance of hair is constructed of large horny cells of 
varying thickness, which requires considerable force or pressure to 
damage. Hairs torn out by violence, especially with blunt instru- 
ments, are frequently found indented or lacerated. The bulb is also 
usually torn out with the shaft. The fact, however, that hair is found 
with its bulb intact is not conclusive proof that it was removed by 
violence, for numerous instances occur in which the hair falls out by 
natural process or disease. 

Of all legal problems submitted to the microscope for solution, none 
has Betted more interest, more painstaking original study, or more 
animated discussion than the determination and “differential diagnosis 
of blood in criminal cases. Much of the literature on the subject, writ- 


204 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY _ [September, 


ten but a score of years since, is now of little value, and tends to con- 
fuse rather than enlighten one seeking to obtain reliable information. 

Not many years ago it was claimed by some that human blood could 
be distinguished from that of all animals by hemin crystals, and ex- 
perts have so testified. This is now used only as a corroborative test 
in determining the substance to be blood. The physical appearance 
of a blood stain varies with its age and the material upon which it is 
found. Blood which has dried upon a polished or smooth surface, 
such as steel, glass, varnished wood, and such textile fabrics as silk or 
satins, rapidly assumes a dark brown color. When it happens that the 
stains are on mahogany or walnut furniture, they are sometimes very 
difficult to detect by daylight, though easily distinguished by the dim 
reflected light of a candle. On white pine and other soft woods it re- 
tains its bright red appearance for a considerable period. 

The first step in the examination of a suspected stain is to ascertain 
whether it is blood or not; and if blood, next to determine, if possible, 
its source. These two problems can best be solved by aid of the mi- 
croscope and micro-spectroscope. For the purpose of diagnosing the 
kind of blood, the microscope alone is available. The prevailing 
opinion among experts is that the finding of corpuscles is the only re- 
liable evidence which should be admitted in criminal cases. Blood 
corpuscles are not liable to be confounded with any other known ob- 
ject by a person familiar with their appearance, yet careless mistakes 
have occurred. In Ohio I was once called upon to make an examina- 
tion of a stain for the purpose of corroborating evidence already intro- 
duced to the effect that it was blood. All ordinary methods failed to 
reveal blood corpuscles, and other tests proved conclusively that it was 
another substance. On examining the slides prepared by the witness 
who had previously testified with ae own instrument, I was surprised 
to find that what he had mistaken for blood corpuscles were nothing 
but spots left from condensed moisture on the lower lens of his eye- 
piece, he never having had the object itself in focus during his investi- 
gation. Such a blunder could not happen to one familiar with micro- 
scopical manipulation, as a mere turning of the eye-piece, which is 
generally done from habit, would have exposed the error. 

The red corpuscle of enon blood is a small, circular, non-nucleated, 
biconcave disc. The same form and appearance exist in most of the 
mammalia, the only means of distinguishing between the two being 
ae difference in size. The red corpuscle in man averages about 
zz, Of an inch in diameter. Race, habit, and environment seem 
to have no effect on the size or appearance of these discs. The late 
Dr. J. G. Richardson, of Philadelphia, during the Centennial Exhibi- 
tion held in that city in 1876, examined sa measured one hundred 
corpuscles from each of feacen PERSONS of different nationalities, and 
found their average diameter to be 35'5; of an inch. Selected corpuscles 
may measure more and others less, and for this reason it is impossible 
to determine with absolute certainty human blood from that of some 
animals. 

Unfortunately, in the dog, one of our most common domestic pets, 
the corpuscles so closely resemble those of man that it is difficult to 
distinguish between them. Out of two hundred corpuscles from the 
blood of a man and an equal number from a dog, Dr. J. P. Treadwell 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 205 


found that of those measuring ;,!,, of an inch, os six were from the 
man and six from the dog; of those measuring 33',5 of an inch, thirty- 
seven ee from the man and seventeen from the dog; of those measur- 
ing 375, Of an inch, fourteen were from the man and twenty-three 
from the dog. It will thus be seen that, although the average human 
blood corpuscle is slightly larger than that of a dog, the variations in 
size overlap in measurement so as to make it unsafe to express a posi- 
tive opinion, where the question is confined to that of human or dog’s 
blood. The blood from the guinea pig is still more difficult to deter- 
mine in comparison with that of man. 

From careful measurements of the red corpuscles in a given speci- 
men, if found to average the same as those in man, a positive opinion 
may be expressed that the blood did not come from the sheep, ox, 
horse, pig, or goat; the corpuscles in these animals being so much 
smaller as to render the distinction easy. 

In the famous Hayden trial held in New Haven in 1879, the late 
Col. J. G. Woodward, M. D., when testifying on the question of blood 
stains, stated that in measuring twenty corpuscles from one dog, forty 
from another, and fifty from a third, he found their diameters greater 
than the recognized average in human blood. On cross-examination 
by the State he, however, admitted that he had selected only the largest 
corpuscles for measurement. Subsequently, Dr. Woodward continued 
his investigations and published the measurements made of red cor- 
puscles in dog’s blood, selecting, as in the Hayden trial, only the largest. 
This unfortunately renders his data valueless for reference as to averages. 

The blood corpuscles of all birds and reptiles are elliptical in shape 
and nucleated. This distinguishes them at once from the blood of a man 
without recourse to micrometry. 

Numerous cases have been recorded where blood stains have been 
found on clubs alleged to have been used in murderous assaults, where 
it was claimed as a defence that the stick had been used for killing 
pigeons or chickens, and where the microscope demonstrated beyond 
the question of a doubt that the blood could not have come from such 
source. 

An interesting case in my own experience is worth relating in this 
connection: Two winters ago in the far northwest, a merchant, prom- 
inent in the community in which he resided, left his home one evening 
for the ostensible purpose of visiting his store to transact some unfinished 
business. Not returning home when expected, his friends became 
alarmed and went to look for him. On reaching his store they were 
startled to see everything in confusion ; furniture broken and strewn 
about the office ; the safe door open ; money drawer on the floorandempty, 
save for a few Saal coin ; blood spattered here and there, and everything 
indicating a severe struggle, murder, and robbery. Spatters of blood 
were traced outside into the deep snow which covered the ground ; foot- 
steps were crowded here and there, and the trail bore indications of a 
bleeding body having been dragged to the river not far distant, and a 
hole large enough to admit it chopped through the ice to the swift cur- 
rent below. It would be hard to conceive a stronger case of circum- 
stantial evidence. 

The man had a large sum of insurance on his life, and a prompt in- 
vestigation by the insurance companies solved the mystery. A micro- 


206 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY _ [September, 


scopical examination of the blood showed that it could not have been 
that of a man, for the corpuscles were elliptical in shape. A few days 
later the supposed deceased was captured and arrested in a city about 
five hundred miles distant from the scene of his disappearance. He con- 
fessed to having concocted and carried out the plot unaided; that the 
blood was spattered about by cutting off the heads of two chickens, 
which were then tied to a board and dragged through the snow to the 
river, where they were pushed into the hole previously cut through 
the, ice. 

A witness is sometimes asked to give his opinion as to the probable 
age of a blood stain. It is generally easy to recognize a fresh specimen, 
though i in stains but a few days old the phy sical appearance is frequently 
the same as those of months or years standing. The question of solu- 
bility has been carefully investigated for the purpose of throwing addi- 
tional light on the subject. ine a stain which has been dried but a few 
hours the blood corpuscies are more easily restored to their original 
state than in an old one, but the information thus derived is not always 
to be depended upon. The most trustworthy information to be obtained 
on this subject is by ascertaining the chemical changes which have taken 
place in the coloring matter; z. e., whether it is in the form of hamo- 
globin, methemoglobin, or hematin. By this method one may be able 
to approximate the age of a given stain within certain limits, but the 
greatest possible caution should be used in expressing an unqualified 
opinion derived from any source within our present knowledge. 

One of the unfortunate conditions of present scientific literature is 
the different systems and unreliable standards which have been taken as 
a basis of measurement. Most of our modern scientists have adopted 
the decimal or French metric system, though a few still adhere to the 
English inch. In our country the English system is in common use 
by the masses. In the field of forensic microscopy it is necessary, there- 
fore, that all measurements should be taken and expressed i in fractions 
ore an mes. Although it is impossible for the av erage ies w ith Bis 


ain or aie Soe Ee cause aS i convey no idea of ie 
size thus expressed. 

A centimetre scale, ruled upon a polished metal surface by the United 
States Bureau of Weights and Measures for this Society, was adopted 
as its standard of microscopic measurements, after a long series of re- 
corded investigations, requiring months of careful observation to deter- 
mine its errors. Thus the Society has rendered available a standard of 
known value which may be used within certain restrictions by scientists 
throughout the country for the purpose of ascertaining, by comparison, 
the deviations of their own micrometers from the true measure. In 
making corrections of micrometers ruled in the fractions of an inch it 
is still necessary to compare them with one of the very few standards 
in this country, and these difficult of access, or to make the necessary 
mathematical deductions required in a comparison with the standard 
centimetre referred to. One of the most convenient and accurate meth- 
ods in recording microscopical observations, necessary not only in legal 
but in all other cases, is by photo-micrography. Though photogr aphic 
prints are rarely admitted in evidence, they may Se etnnes be used ad- 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 207 


vantageously for the purpose of illustration and explanation. Occa- 
sionally, original negatives are accepted in evidence, apparently under 
the general but mistaken belief that they could not be materially altered 
without more or less marring of the plate in such a manner as would 
render the change obvious to a casual observer. 

Of late years much has been said in favor of cheap and simple mi- 
croscopes, and the large complicated instruments have been severely 
condemned. One of the strong points in favor of the continental in- 
struments is their simplicity. Nevertheless, the fact remains that the 
fewer accessories with which a microscope is provided, and therefore 
the simpler its construction, the more limited is its field of usefulness. 
Certainly in the department of legal microscopy the most perfect in- 
struments and appliances known are a necessity if the work is to be 
properly executed. 

The microscope itself, where only one is employed, should have all 
the requisite scales, and a mechanical stage provided with index for 
finding objects is a necessity. The cobweb eye-piece micrometer 
should be provided not only with the usual index and lines for measur- 
ing but also a graduated scale for determining the angles of crystals. 
Polarizing apparatus with selenites is frequently required. A spectro- 
scopie attachment is also essential. Where possible, it is more conve- 
nient to use different instruments for certain processes of an examina- 
tion. Such, for example, as the inverted microscope used in the chemi- 
cal analyses already referred to. Not only should a complete photo- 
micrographic apparatus be accessible, but also cameras and lenses for 
ordinary photographing and copying, together with a fully-equipped 
dark room for the development and treatment of plates. 

Thus equipped, and with the requisite skill, the modern microsco- 
pist may become a true amcus curzeé in the best sense of that much- 
abused term. It is true that an industrious and exhaustive search by 
all the means at our command may sometimes produce only negative 
results, yet, in other instances, there will be revelations which shall 
change the whole theory of a plea in civil actions, while, in criminal 
causes, they may become a terror to the guilty or a joy to the innocent. 
Much is illusive in all methods of scientific research, yet it has been 
found that microscopy can sometimes 

** Hold the eel of science by the tail” 
when every other method of investigation has wholly failed. Especially 
is this true of forensic microscopy, and the time has fully come when 
counsel and client, courts and juries, must and will give heed to its dis- 
closures. 


Slides Received. 
We return thanks to the donor for the following interesting slide : 
Native silver, from ** Queen Bee” mine, opaque. This is a beau- 
tiful slide both in object and finish. A #? or 1-inch objective and a two- 
inch ocular shows it best. Prepared by W. N. Sherman, M. D., 
Kingman, Ariz. 


Mr. C. L. Whittle is preparing an account of the results of micro- 
scopic observation on the contact phenomena of trap and sandstone near 
Meriden, Conn. The Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Cambridge 
has published a bulletin on the geological aspect of the faults in the 
triasic formation at that point. 


208 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY _ [September, 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


Mildew upon Cucumbers.—Prof. B. D. Halsted reports in the 
Botanical Gazette finding a species of Peronospora upon the leaves of 
cucumber vines bearing fruit. The species is not the same as that 
found upon another species of cucurbitacee. He suggests the import- 
ance of being on the lookout for this destructive disease. Should it be 
found to attack squashes and melons as well, the danger would be more 
serious. It may be hoped that since this species is not the same as is 
found on Sicyos angulatus the new species may not attack the other 
cultivated cucurbitacez. 


O 


Peculiar conjugation of Spirogyra.—Mr. C. B. Atwell, of Evans- 
ton, Ill., in the same number, reports a peculiar phase of conjugation 
of SAcrogyra longata in which the protoplasm of one cell conjugates 
with two adjacent cells of another filament, resulting in what he calls a 
‘‘ phase of polygamy.” The zy gospores tbus formed are of unequal 
size. The two cases of such conjugation figured are from two adjacent 
cells of one filament with long cells to four “adjacent cells of a filament 
with much shorter cells. The conjugating processes from the two pairs 
of short cells are in contiguous ends of cells. It is known that some 
species of spirogyra occasionally show the conjugation of two adjacent 
cells in the same filament. May not this be an instance bearing rela- 
tion to ordinary moneecious and the normal mode of conjugation? If 
the two processes from adjacent cells had touched one another they 
would perhaps have formed moneecious union. This suggests the in- 
teresting question which, so far as we know, has not yet been answered, 
What deter mines the location of the conjugating cells? It is ver y rare 
that a process does not find a mate to meet it. Such an instance as this 
may indicate the fortuity of this meeting. 


O 


Water Analysis.—Dr. Charles Smart, U.S. A., contributes to the 
Santtartan a valuable paper upon this subject, in which he treats in 
his careful and able style the various problems which enter into any 
really valuable test of ‘water that is to be used for drinking purposes. 
The discussion of the methods of deter mining the presence ohalbumenand 
matter, and particularly the determination of urea, is made practical 
by the citation of instances in which the reliability of the results is 
proved in subsequent revelations of sewer contamination. The methods 
of microscopical examination are also well represented and emphasized, 
and the bearing of the presence of various forms of organic matter upon 
the purity of the water is discussed. It seems to us, however, that Dr. 
Smart has not stated the importance of this part of the analysis with 
sufficient emphasis for the instruction of those who suppose that the 
chemical tests are the more critical and important. For all questions 
of general purity and ordinary contamination of drinking water we must 
of course rely upon chemical analysis, but there are certainly instances 
in which these tests reveal such slight impurities that the chemist would 
not be warranted in pronouncing the water even dangerous when the 
presence of small numbers of disease germs, which only a careful ex- 


* This Department is conducted by Prof. J. H. Pritspury. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 209 


amination with the microscope by an expert would discover, renders its 
use terribly hazardous. While employed by the Board of Health of 
the city of Springfield, Mass., some years since, to examine samples of 
water which were considered suspicious, a quantity of water, of which 
we knew nothing at the time save the sample number, was examined, 
and revealed so small an amount of impurities when subjected to chemi- 

cal tests that we should not have condemned it for use. On examining 
it with the microscope, however, we found a small quantity of sedi- 
mentary particles of organic matter, about which swarms of suspicious 
bacteria were moving. As this was before the introduction of culture 
tests in connection with water examination, we carried the examination 
no further, but reported the water as suspicious. and advised the pro- 
hibition of its use. A few days later we learned from the Health Office 
that five cases of typhoid fever had occurred among those using the 
water. The use of the water was discontinued, and all trouble ceased. 
Other cases of a similar but less marked nature came to our notice, indi- 
cating with clearness the importance of critical microscopic examina- 
tion of all waters presented for analysis. 

The presence of even small quantities of nitrogenous material, and 
especially of urea, indicating the presence of sewage even in small pro- 
portions, reveals the possibility of sudden and unannounced hazard, and 
so reckless is the use of well-water not only in country villages, but 
even in small cities, that only the most rigid restrictions can avoid the 
most terrible results.. We have only to recall the wells that any one 
who has lived in a village or small city can remember in order to realize 
how little hard sense and what a fearful amount of ignorance and in- 
difference prevails. What seems to us a marvel is tha it so few cases of 
serious disease occur when so many are utterly reckless in the use of 
water from wells which must inevitably catch large amounts of surface 
drainage, if not of more serious drainage from cess-pools. 


MEDICAL MICROSCOPY.* 


A Cure for Elephantiasis.—It is now generally held that elephan- 
tiasis has for its exciting cause, in many cases at least, a parasite, Filaria 
sanguinis homints. ove Thomas, of Ceylon, thinks he has found its 
proper parasiticide in sulphide of calcium administered internally. 
For elephantiasis in the adult he gives a grain of the drug twice a day 
after eating for a month, then increases ine dose to a grain anda half, 
and if the drug is well borne, to two grains twice daily. . No bad symp- 
toms ensued. — Cases of less than six months’ standing were cured in one 
or two months. 


en (jee 


How to Look for Tubercle Bacilli in Sputum.+—Enhrlich’s 
method, somewhat modified, is as follows: 

Press a little of the suspected sputum between two cover-glasses so 
as to get a very thin layer. Dry the cover-glasses separately, either by 


* This Department is conducted by F. BLancHARD, M. D. 
+ Tranlated from Kunze’s Grundiss der Praktischen Medicin. Appendix to Von Ziemssen on ‘‘ Pul- 
monary ‘Luberculosis.”’ 


210 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [September 


moving them through the air or holding over a flame, or by passing a 
few times through ‘the flame. This fee and dries the preparation. 
Place some drops of aniline oil in a reagent glass half filled with water, 
shake and filter into a watch-glass. Add Several drops of an alcoholic 
solution of fuchsin or methyl violet to the contents of the watch-glass till 
they are markedly colored. Warm this mixture till it begins to steam. 
Place the cover-glass with the dried sputum face downwards on the 
warm liquid and let it float from three to five minutes. Remove and 
rinse in alcohol, acidulated with nitric or hy drochloric acid, until very 
slight traces of color remain; then rinse in ordinary alcohol (70 or 80 
per cent.) Dry the cover-glass as before by holding above a flame, 
clean it where necessary, add a little pure glycerine, and set under the 
microscope. An enlargement of 4oo diameters will show the bacilli 


if present.— College and Clinical Record, Fuly, 1889. 


O 


Early Diagnosis of Morbid Growths.—lIt is often desirable to 
make a microscopic examination of a tumor before its removal. For 
excising a portion of the tumor sufficient for this purpose, Dr. J. Col- 
lins Warren uses a small canula (diameter 2 to 5 millimetres) sharpened 
at one end. The instrument is used by gently rotating it between the 
fingers. When it has penetrated the tumor to the desired depth, it is 
withdrawn a short distance and then entered obliquely, so as to cut off 
the column of tissue. The instrument has been used satisfactorily in 
over one hundred cases. 


oO 


The ‘‘ Corn-stalk Disease’’ in Cattle.—In the August number of 
the Buffalo Med. and Surg. Jour., Dr. Frank S. Billings continues 
his record of observations upon the micro-organisms found in cattle af- 
fected with this disease. 

Drawings of this disease germ, in its different stages of development, 
are given. It is described as ‘* intermediate between micrococci and 
bacilli,” belonging in the same group with the germ of the swine- -plague 
and the Southern cattle-plague. Another paper will appear in the 
Sept. number, when, perhaps, a fuller notice will be given. 


Oo-—— 


The Relation of the Tubercle Bacillus to the Early Diag- 
nosis and Prognosis of Phthisis.—For sound common sense we 
commend Dr. J. W. Roosevelt’s paper on this topic (Jour. Am. Med. 
Assn.) 

His conclusions are as follows: 

1. The bacillus tuberculosis is of great positive, but little negative, 
value in diagnosis. 

. In prognosis the bacillus is of little value. 
Finding the bacillus sometimes renders a diagnosis certain which 
ona Bieew isc be doubtful. 

He protests against the so-called antiseptic treatment of phthisis since 
no safe specific bacillary poison has yet been discovered, and it is much 
easier to kill the complex body-cell than the more simply organized 
bacillus. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 211 
BACTERIOLOGY.* 


The Basic Aniline Colors.t—These colors are soluble in water, 
and for the most part in one or all of the decolorizing agents. In use, 
a weak, watery solution colors at first the intercellular substance and 
the cell body, while the nuclei remain unstained. Through the subse- 
quent treatment with alcohol, glycerine, or acetic acid, an inversion of 
the staining takes place, by which the elements previously colored be- 
come colorless while the previously colorless nuclei are stained. In the 
use of the stronger solutions the staining follows (without any discern- 
ible inversion) directly and quickly ; and, in general, its intensity is in 
proportion to the concentration of the solution. In a quite concen- 
trated watery solution overstaining may occur, which can be reduced 
to the proper degree by subsequent decolorization. 

If the dyes are dissolved in the decolorizing agents—such as absolute 
alcohol, acetic acid, or thick glycerine—they stain slightly or not at all. 
Instead of using some decolorizing agent subsequently to reduce the 
intensity of the staining to a proper degree in preparations which have 
been overstained in watery solutions, in many cases a solution of the 
dye-stuff in a mixture of water with alcohol (Herrmann), glycerine 
(Schaefer), or acetic acid (Ehrlich), may be used. 

The basic aniline-dyes are used in the following solutions : 

1. Concentrated watery solutions. These are either used directly or 
after dilution to the desired degree with distilled water. The solutions 
are prepared with distilled water (which has been previously boiled), 
so that an excess of the coloring-matter remains undissolved. They 
must always be filtered before using. Only a small quantity of these 
watery solutions should be made at a time. 

2. Concentrated alcoholic solutions. The solution of an excess of 
the coloring material is brought about in the best way by absolute al- 
cohol, or, in want of this, by the officinal go per cent. spirit of the 
Pharmacopeeia. 

In general, one can calculate about 20 to 25 grammes of the dye-stuft 
to 100 grammes of the spirit or alcohol. These solutions are kept pre- 
pared, and are not used directly for staining, but are mixed with a cer- 
tain amount of distilled or aniline water. In place of concentrated 
watery solutions the alcoholic solutions can be used if five or six drops 
are added to a small watch-glass of distilled water. This mixture is 
often designated as the dilute alcoholic solution. 

From the watery or alcoholic solutions of the basic aniline colors the 
various staining fluids are prepared. The preparations that are more 
commonly employed i in staining bacteria are Aoch-Fhrlich’s solution 
of methyl-violet or fuchsin (described in the April number of this 
journal), and the alkaline methylene blue solution. 


o—_e—- 


Alkaline Methylene Blue.—The alkaline preparation of methy- 
lene blue is undoubtedly the staining fluid most universally employed in 
staining micro-organisms. With jebacena are very satisfactorily stained 
either in cover-glass Bre panations made directly ‘from anim: UT tissues, 


* Conducted by V. A. Moore. 
t+ Hueppe. Die Methoden der Bakterien-Forschung, p. 52. 


212 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [September, 


cultures, or other germ containing material, or in sections of animal 
tissues that have previously been hardened in alcohol. 

There are two preparations, the weak (Koch’s) and the strong (Loff- 
ler’s). The weak solution is prepared as follows: Concentrated alco- 
holic solution of methylene blue, 1 c.cm., 10% solution of potassium 
hydrate, 2 c.cm., distilled water, 200 c.cm. 

The strong solution is the one to which special reference is made. 
It is prepared by taking concentrated alcoholic solution of methylene 
blue, 30 c.cm., 1% solution of potassium hydrate, 1 c.cm., distilled 
water, 99 C.cm. : 

Cover-glass preparations are sufficiently stained in this solution in 
from 1 to 5 minutes, and sections in from 3 to 20 minutes, according to 
the tissue. Epithelial cells, nuclei, granules of granular corpuscles and 
white blood corpuscles are stained as readily as the germs themselves, 
while connective tissue fibres are very slightly stained, and the red blood 
corpuscles are not stained at all with this agent; thus, in a section of 
stomach or intestine stained with it the mucous membrane, together 
with the bacteria, will be stained a deep blue color, while the sub- 
mucosa and muscular coat will be very feebly tinted. 

If the preparations should, at any time, be overstained, they can be 
readily decolorized by a momentary immersion in a weak (4 of 1%) 
solution of acetic acid. Methylene blue is much less liable to overstain 
preparations than other basic aniline dyes, and it is consequently to be 
used if, for any reason, decolorizing agents should not be employed. 

hie technique i in the use of this stain is very simple, and differs in no 
way from that of ordinary staining fluids. After staining, sections 
should be washed in weak alcohol, then transferred to stronger, and, 
finally, cleared in turpentine, xylol, or cedar oil, and mounted in bal- 
sam. Cover-glass preparations are washed in water, and allowed to 
dry in the air until completely desiccated, when they are also ready for 
mounting. 


oO 


Gram’s Method of Staining.—Among the different staining meth- 
ods employed in studying micro-organisms the one introduced by Dr. 
Gram is very useful. In his method the bacteria are stained a deep 
blue while the surrounding tissue is colorless. The technique of the 
method is, according to Friedlander,* as follows: 

The stain employed is Ehrlich’s solution of gentian or methyl-violet 
in aniline water. This is prepared by shaking pulverized gentian or 
methyl-violet with aniline water and allowing it to stand for 24 hours, 
when it is filtered and the clear filtrate is then ready for use. The same 
result will be obtained if 5 cc. of a saturated alcoholic solution of the 
stain be added to 100 c.cm. of aniline water. 

The sections, previously hardened in alcohol, are placed ina watch- 
glass containing 2 to 3 c.cm. of the staining fluid and allowed to remain 
in it for from 3 to 5 minutes. They are then transferred, by means of 
a section lifter, , to a second watch-glass containing a solution of iodine 
in iodide of potassium (iodine, 1 gram, iodide of 1 potassium, 2 grams, 
distilled water, 300 c.cm. The iodide of potassium is dissolved in the 

water and the iodine added.) They are allowed to remain in this for 


* Microscopische Technik, p. 49. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 213 


about 5 minutes when the sections will have a dark brown, almost black 
color. The sections are now transferred to a third watch-glass contain- 
ing absolute alcohol, which will dissolve out the coloring matter from 
the tissues of the section. The time required for the discolorization 
varies from a few minutes to several hours, according to the thickness 
of the section and the intensity of the stain. The time may be shortened 
by transferring the sections to fresh alcohol when that in which it is 
becomes highly colored. When the sections become colorless, or very 
nearly so, they are to be cleared in turpentine, cedar oil, or xylol, and 
mounted in balsam. 

A very satisfactory double stain may be ahiained by staining the sec- 
tions in an aqueous solution of Bismarck brown after they have been 
decolorized in the alcohol. In this case it is better to transfer them 
from the absolute to 95 per cent. and then to 70 per cent. alcohol before 
transferring them to the staining solution. After the sections are 
stained in this solution they should be washed in weak alcohol, dehy- 
drated in stronger spirits, and finally cleared and mounted as in the 
first case. By fine method the bacteria will remain a dark blue, almost 
black color, while the surrounding tissue will be stained a yellowish- 
brown Bese. By this method one is able to determine whether the 
micro-organisms are within or without the cell nuclei; in fact, to de- 
termine their location within the tissue. 

There are many bacteria that will not retain the blue stain when 
treated by this method. This fact renders the method of value in dif- 
ferentiating between certain micro-organisms. 

Cover-glass preparations can be treated in the same manner as sec- 
tions with equally as good results. 


EDITORIAL. 


Exchanges.—We have no idea of letting people use our columns 
for advertising, for subscribers’ notices, nor for any other purpose, unless 
they deal squarely by their correspondents. Once in a great while 
some one says he has had correspondence about exchanges, has done 
his part and has failed to receive the slides agreed upon. Whenever 
any subscriber feels that he is being maltreated in this way, let him 
first state his grievance in a regzstered letter to the offending party. If 
that person receipts for the letter and fails to give satisfaction, then refer 
the correspondence and all facts to us. W hen the person offering to 
exchange 1 is proven to us to be using our columns in order to get ‘and 
not give slides, etc., we shall dhe him up to the world just as any 
other microscopic object needs to be treated, and make him pay dearly 
for his slides obtained under false representations. To simply drop 
his advertisement or notice is too tame. The microscopist is bound to 
use the scalpel, sunlight, and Abbe condenser on extremely minute 
specimens. Verdum sap. 


fe) 

Corrections.—Some rather annoying errors crept into the August 
number. On the cover, in the contents, correct folicle to follicle. On 
page 180 and page 187 correct lense to lens. On page 181 correct title 
of Prof. Tuckerman’s article to Hrethizon dorsatus, the common por- 
cupine. On the same page circumvallate is mispelled twice. On page 
190 change Melacerta to Melicerta. 


214 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY _— [September, 
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


Vermont Microscopical AssociATION.—C. SmitH Boynton, 
WED Seay 

June 21, 1889.—The tremendous strides which microscopical science 
has taken the past few years has resulted in discoveries of the greatest 
possible good to the public. The truth of the germ theory—that dis- 
ease and death are caused by micro-organisms—is dependent wholly 
upon microscopic investigation, and the best minds in the land are con- 
stantly working upon this great subject. 

To encourage these workers and stimulate new discoveries a prize of 
$250 for each discovery of a new disease germ will be given by the 
Wells & Richardson Co., the well-known chemists, and will be paid 
to the first discoverer of a new disease germ. The wonderful discovery 
by Prof. Koch of the cholera germ, as the cause of cholera, stimulated 
great research throughout the Saal. and it is believed this liberal prize, 
offered by a house Ge such standing, will greatly assist in the detection 
of micro-organisms that are the direct cause of disease and death. All 
who are interested in the subject and the conditions of this prize should 
write to the secretary of the Association at Burlington, Vt. 
fe) 

SAN Francisco, Cat.—C. P. Bates, Secy. 

June 26, 7889.—President Payzant occupied the chair, with a large 
attendance of members. Frank L. James, M. D., and Prof. H. M. 
Whelpley, of St. Louis, were present as visitors; also, M. R. Roberts, 
of San Francisco, and L. M. King, of Santa Rosa. The President 
announced the death of F. L. Howard. 

Dr. James gave an interesting account of a phenomenal class of 
crystals produced from salicine by the extreme cold method as dis- 
covered by him several years ago, and exhibited with the polariscope 
a series of slides which were pronounced by all to be most beautiful. 
The process depends on bringing a saturated solution of salicine made 
with distilled water in contact with cold below the freezing point, and 
the explanation is, that the rapid congelation of the water interferes 
with the usual arrangement of the crystals, producing the wonderful 
series before alluded to, which are entirely unlike any forms resulting 
from crystallization at the ordinary temperature. The proper manner 
of making white zinc cement and permanent oxydized enamels for 
ringing slides formed a portion of his interesting address. 

H. M. Whelpley, of the St. Louis Microscopical Club, addressed 
the Society on the subject of the microscope in its relation to pharmacy, 
pointing out the rapid progress being made in the detection of adultera- 
tions, and the interest manifested generally among pharmaceutists in 
studying the character and acquiring a correct know ledge of the crude 
constituents of the materta medica. 

Pond life was illustrated by numerous specimens of Ceratiéum longi- 
cornts, and the beautiful little organism, Artemia salina, or brine 
shrimp. Entomology was represented by prepared slides of the larva 
of several varieties of the Papilio family. 

Professor Hanks presented for examination a venerable edition of a 
work on Pharmaceutics, published by Robert Lowell in 1661. Mr. 
Riedy donated a copy of Trembley’s work on fresh water Polypes, an 
exceedingly rare and valuable book, published in 1744. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 215 
NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


The Psychology of Attention. By Th. Ribot. Humboldt Publish- 
ing Co., 28 Lafayette Place. Paper, price 15 cents. 


The same distinguished author has already enriched the literature of 
psychology with three very remarkable works on ‘* The Diseases of the 
Will,” ‘‘The Diseases of the Memory,” and ‘** The Diseases of Per- 
sonality.” Like them, the present work is a study of very recondite 
problems of psychology—the nature and workings of the mind of man 
—presented in language understandable by every intelligent reader. In 
the series to which it belongs are found illustrations of abnormal psychic 


states more striking than ie ‘*¢ double personality ” portrayed in ‘* Dr. 
Jekyll and Mr. Hyde. 3 


Chemical lecture notes taken from Prof. C. O. Curtman’s lectures 
at the St. Louts College of Pharmacy. By H. M. Whelpley, 
Professor of Microscopy, etc. St. Louis, 1888. 12°, pp. 211. 


This is a second edition in which are added notes on the metals, in- 
creasing the size about 70 pages. These notes were published prima- 
rily for pharmaceutical and medical students, but are very useful for 
reference to those who want an epitome of present knowledge on this 
subject. Like a dictionary, they contain an immense array of facts 
and would be about equally dry reading for a winter evening. The 
table of chemical elements is very valuable, the number of elements 
reported being 77, of which Germanium, discovered in 1886, is the 
latest. The illustrations are by Dr. Whelpley, the printing and bind- 
ing accurate and neat. This hand-book makes a very desirable refer- 
ence book for a druggist’s laboratory. Dr. Whelpley is one of our 
leading authorities in microscopy. 


Plato's Protagoras. By James A. Towle. 12°, 179 pp. Ginn & 
o-, Boston... (Price, $1.25.) 

The Protagoras is perhaps the liveliest of Plato’s dialogues. In but 
few dialogues is the dramatic form so skilfully maintained without be- 
ing overborne by the philosophical development. Throughoutthe entire 
dialogue the pictures of real life are vivaciously drawn. ‘In the frequent 
changing of the scenes, and the repeated participation of the bystanders, 
the variety in the treatment of the theme is very marked. 

Noticeable, too, is the number of vividly elaborated characters; the 
ever genial Socrates, eager for a contest, in which he readily downs his 
opponents, always holding the respect and admiration of the disdainful 
Protagoras. Prodicus, ov ‘eploaded with synonymic wisdom. Hippias, 
imposing and pretentious. The tranquil Critias and the impetuous 
Alcibiades. An introduction containing the life of Protagoras and 
topics of special interest to the student are also included. At the back 
of the book an appendix, together with Greek and English indexes, 
is given. The lines of the text are numbered for easy teference, and 
at the foot of the text, occupying nearly half of the page, full and com- 
plete notes are given. 

This volume “belongs to the ** College Series of Greek Authors,” 
In appearance it makes a very neat and attractive book, 


216 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. — [September. 


The Urine, The Common Poisons, and the Milk. By J. W. Hol- 
land, M.D. 3ded. 84 pp. 33 figures. P. Blackiston, Son & 
Co., Philadelphia. (Price, $1.) 

We are glad to note that the syllabus is rapidly gaining ground in 
nearly all well-established schools and colleges. It has long been held 
by the best authorities on Biology, Chemistry, and Physics that the way 
to gain the greatest knowledge of any of these subjects is not by learn- 
ing bookish theories but by practical analysis in the laboratory. 

The text of the present syllabus is brief, and at the same time it con- 
tains all that is really necessary for the mastery of urinary analysis. 
There are three main divisions of study mapped out, namely: The Ex- 
amination of Morbid Urine, the Examination for Common Poisons, and 
the Examination and Study of Milk. Each of these comprehends a 
score or more of topics. The plan of study is progressive, but at the 
same time the subjects are treated in a manner which enables the stu- 
dent to begin with either of the main divisions. The illustrations, 
many of which are of microscopic views, are a good feature of the 
book. Leaves are left blank for calculations, memoranda, and addi- 
tional notes which the student may wish to preserve. The text is 
printed in two sizes of type; the more important matter is in larger 
type, for the convenience of those whose course of study is limited 
by lack of time, while for those students who wish to gain a more 
thorough knowledge, many explanations and quantitative processes are 
given in the smaller type. Every physician should find this a very 
useful compendium.—R. W. S. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


[These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof. 
FOR EXCHANGE. —Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 


WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 

WANTED.—A clean copy of Rev. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atlas of the 
Diatomacez. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous Earth from Utah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD, Salt Lake City, Utah. 
CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 


TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of petrified wood—Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand ‘‘ Burt’s Solar Compass’’ complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second-hand, objectives, condensers, polarizers, stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. W.N.SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 


OFFERED.—Zeiss’ New Catalogue (in German) forwarded for 10 cents in stamps. 
F. J. EMMERICH & SONS, 43 Barclay St., New York City. 
WANTED.—Any works on Microscopy not already in my Library. 
H. M. WHELPLEY, F. R. M.S., St. Louis, Mo. 
WAN TED.—(In exchange for slides.) ‘‘ Microscopical Bulletin,” Vol. I, No. 5, August, 1884. 
M.S. WIARD, New Britain, Conn. 


Labels in exchange for slides. EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, Ill. 
First-class Histological Slides for other good mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 
shares. S. G. SHANKS, M. D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N.Y. 


OFFERED.—Griffith & Henfry Micrographic Dictionary to be sold; also Hogas Microscope. 
J. P. WINTINGHAM, 36 Pine St., N. Y. 


WANTED.—A clean copy of Wolle’s Fresh-Water Algee of the United States (2 vols.) ; also good 
second-hand Grunow Camera-Lucida, and a self-centering Turn-table. 


JOS. P. THOMPSON, P. O. Box 1383, Portland, Me. 


z { 
. 
2 
t ' 
- ! 
gO Nae re , 
a a 
ae a 
: . 
7 3 
s* . . 
ey cast 
ry . ' 
4 a 4 
£) i" Sf, 
“+t 6 
Ri Reece nie ci. - Rit. 
at od oe oy m 
a ’ ' “1 Mow 
Ly 
4 
3 \ 
at 
—< ‘ 


te 
' j 
ie 
. Sethe) 
f 
ae 
o~ om 
Ps 
sd 
. ~ 
i 
‘ Z 
< / 
sy 
7 = 
ee 5 
re) 
5 
; } 
, 
re 
. 
“’\ 
: 
“ 
4 i, 
, R 
a + 
F = ‘ 
. 
/ 7 
: 


(HORS) 
S 


) 


alee 
LO} 
QSte— 
SB 
© 
Gi 


Oo) a - 
S Pee 


S15 


O68 
ome) 
6 
® 
(es 


APPARATUS FOR EXAMINING 


Qe 


BLOOD. 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 
MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


Vou. X. "OCTOBER, 1889, Nos 0: 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Ameri- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Fostal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Fill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, London, accompanied by the yearly price of five shillings. 


Histological Technique of the Blood. 
By GEORGE C. FREEBORN, M. D., 


INSTRUCTOR IN NORMAL HISTOLOGY IN THE COLLEGE OF PHYSICIANS AND SURGEONS, N. Y. 

Fresh Blood.—To obtain human blood for examination, the finger 
is Wrapped around in a spiral manner with a piece of string from its 
proximal to its distal end. This produces a congestion of the finger- 
tip, and on making a slight puncture with a needle at the edge of the 
nail a drop of blood sill flow out. This is wiped off and. the new 
drop that appears is to beused. This is transferred quickly to the cen- 
tre of a slide covered with a cover-glass and the edge of the cover 
painted around with a ring of vaseline or oil to prevent evaporation. 

In animals (dog, cat, rabbit, etc.) the blood can be Cee from a 
slight puncture made in one of the veins of the ear; in the frog by 
cutting off the tip of one of the toes, or by opening up ‘the thorax and 
cutting off the apex of the heart. The blood in the first method is 
always mixed with more or less lymph. 

For studying the changes in the red cells, due to the concentration 
of the plasma by ev aporation, the ring of vaseline or oil around the 
cover-glass is omitted. Then, on examination near the edge of the 
cover, the changes in the red cells will soon be seen. 

The application of fluid reagents is best made by the method of irri- 
gation. A bit of filter-paper is brought in contact with one edge of 
the cover-glass and a drop of the reagent with the edge on the opposite 
side. As the fluid is sucked up by the filter-paper the reagent runs in 
on the opposite side. Volatile reagents are applied in ihe following 
manner: Place a drop of the reagent in the bottom ofa cell on a slide 
and invert a cover-glass containing a thin layer of blood over the cell. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE. 


Fic. 1. Stricker’s hot stage and gas chamber. Fic. 3. Malassez’s blood-cell counter. 
Fic, 2, Potain’s mixer. Fic. 4. Field of Malassez’s blood-cell counter, 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


218 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 


For the application of gases a gas-chamber must be employed. Such 
a piece of apparatus is shown in Fig. 1. This is known as Stricker’s 
hot-stage and gas-chamber. It consists of a rectangular piece of ebon- 
ite, e e, fixed to a brass plate that rests on the stage of the microscope. 
On the upper surface of the ebonite is a brass plate, P, with an open- 
ing in its centre, c, leading into a brass tube closed below with a piece 
of glass. A cover-glass, upon which a thin layer of blood has been 
spread, is inverted over the opening, c. The tube, a, is connected with 
the gas generator by a rubber tube, upon which a spring clip is placed 
for regulating the flow of the gas. The gas enters the chamber, c, 
through this tube and escapes through the tube, a. 

In using this apparatus as a warm-stage, the copper wire, B, is placed 
on the tube, a’. Heat is applied to the wire by means of a Bunsen’s 
burner or alcohol lamp. The temperature of plate P, upon which the 
slide is placed, is regulated by the distance of the flame from the stage. 
The thermometer, ¢, indicates the temperature. 

The white cells can be studied in the fresh condition in the same 
manner as described above for the red cells. In studying the amceboid 
movements of the white cells of the mammalia it is necessary that the 
temperature of the preparation should be kept at the body temperature 
of the animal [37 C.], while in the cold-blooded animals the movements 
take place at the ordinary room temperature. In order to keep the 
preparation of the mammalian blood at the proper temperature, the 
warm-stage, Fig. 1, is used. The preparation is made in the same 
manner as for studying fresh blood. As the movements of the cells is 
very slow it is difficult to perceive the changes in form, but if an active 
cell is selected and sketches made of it at interv als of two minutes, one 
will soon see that its form as well as its position has changed. 

Blood Placques.— Various solutions are recommended for studying 
the blood placques in the fresh state. Bizzozero uses a 2% solution of 
sodium chloride, to which one part of methyl-violet is added for every 
5,000 parts of salt solution; Hayem uses his modification of Pacini’s 
fluid; Zimmermann, a solution of sodium sulphate ; Afanassiew, nor- 
mal salt solution to which 0.5% of dried pepsin and r to 1,000 of methyl- 
violet are added, with a few drops of carbolic acid to prevent decompo- 
sition ; Osler, Pacini’s fluid or a 1% solution of osmic acid. In all cases 
the blood must pass directly into the preserving fluid. 

The method of examination is as follows: A drop of the fluid is 
placed upon the finger tip, and the latter pricked with a clean needle, 
so that a drop of blood passes into the fluid, which is then placed on a 
slide and covered. The drop of blood must be small, and must be 
quickly disseminated through the fluid with the point of the needle. 
The preparation is to be examined with a power of about 500. 

For studying the placques in the circulation, the mesentery or omen- 
tum of a small animal—young rabbit, white rat, or guinea pig—may 
be used. On account of the rapidity of the circulation in the larger 
vessels, it is difficult to make out the placques; but if a small trans- 
parent vessel, in which the current is moderately slow, be selected, 
then the placques will be seen in the still layer mingled with the white 
cells. Ifthe current becomes very slow, the placques have a tendency 
to collect along the periphery with the white cells. 

The placques may also be studied in the vessels of a recently-killed 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 219 


animal. A new-born rat is killed by breaking up the medulla, and 
thin pieces of the mucoid connective tissue are removed and spread out 
in a thin layer on a slide, a few drops of normal salt solution added, 
and then covered. 

Permanent preparations of the placques may be made as follows: 
A thin layer of blood is spread quickly on a cover-glass, which is then 
dropped in a one per cent. solution of osmic acid. Kemp places a drop 
of blood on a cover-glass, moves it about rapidly, and then washes off 
the blood with salt solution. The placques adhere to the cover, the 
cells being washed away. The cover is then placed in a 1% solution 
of osmic acid. After the covers have been removed from the osmic 
acid they are allowed to dry in the air, and then mounted by inverting 
them on a drop of balsam ona slide. For staining the placques, dilute 
solutions of methyl-violet, gentian-violet, or fuchsin may be used. On 
a cover-glass preparation are placed a few drops of the staining solu- 
tion, which is allowed to remain for 2 to 5 minutes, then it is gently 
washed off with distilled water. The cover is then dried and mounted 
as above. The placques, as well as the white cells, are stained. 

Fibrin.—A large drop of blood is placed on a slide and covered. It 
is then placed under a bell-jar with a dish of water, thus forming a moist 
chamber. At the end of an hour the slide is removed and placed in a 
dish of water; the cover-glass is carefully removed under water, taking 
care not to disturb the film of blood. The slide is allowed to remain 
in the water for several minutes until the coloring matter is dissolved 
out. Then remove the slide, absorb the surplus water with filter-paper, 
taking care not to disturb the film of fibrin. Then add a few drops of 
fuschin [sat. alcoholic sol. of fuschin 1 part, alcohol 3 parts, water 10 
parts], and put on a cover-glass. This fluid stains red the filaments 
of fibrin and the nuclei of any of the white cells that may remain in the 
clot, at the same time rendering any of the red cells colorless. This 
preparation cannot be preserved permanently. 

Blood Crystals.—Hemoglobin crystallizes very slowly from human 
blood, while in some of the lower animals, especially the rodents, the 
crystals form rapidly. 

Hoppe-Seyler recommends the following process for obtaining 
hemoglobin crystals from blood: Defibrinated blood is mixed with to 
volumes of a 10 per cent. solution of sodium chloride and allowed to 
stand two days. Then the upper layer of fluid is drawn off with a 
pipette and the thick layer of cells washed by decantation. They are 
then shaken up with an equal volume. of ether, which dissolves the 
cells. The ether is then removed and the lake-colored fluid filtered. 
The filtrate is shaken up with 4 its volume of alcohol at 0° C., and the 
mixture allowed to stand two to three days in the cold, when numerous 
crystals of haemoglobin will have separated ; these are filtered out, dried 
between filter-paper, and mounted in thick balsam. 

Von Stein places a thin layer of defibrinated blood on a slide, and 
when it begins to dry at the edges covers it with a drop of thick balsam. 
As long as the odor of balsam remains the preparation remains uncoy- 
ered ; when this has disappeared the balsam is removed with a knife, 
wet with ether, turpentine, or oil of cloves; a cover-glass is then put 
on, and a ring of balsam or asphalt painted around its edge. Von 
Stein has kept slides prepared in this manner for ten years. 


220 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 


Crystals of hemin are prepared from dried blood. A small bit of 
dried blood is placed on a slide, two or three drops of hydric acetate and 
a few crystals of sodium chloride added and the slide heated over a flame 
until bubbles of gas are given off. Allow the slide to cool, when the 
crystal of hamin will form. The excess of the fluid is then carefully 
absorbed with filter-paper, a drop of glycerine added and a cover-glass 
put on and cemented with asphalt. 

Hematoidin crystals are found in old blood extravasations. <A bit of 
an old apopletic clot, an extravasation in the subcutaneous tissue, or the 
clot from the corpus luteum is teased up ina drop of glycerine, covered 
and cemented. 

Permanent Preparations.—The two principal reagents that are 
now used for the permanent preservation of blood cells are mercuric 
chloride and osmic acid. The action of these reagents is not absolutely 
perfect ; more or less of the red cells show slight changes. 

Mercuric chloride is used in the form of Pacini’s* or Hayem’s7 solu- 
tions. A drop of the solution is placed on the finger-tip and the latter 
pricked through ; the drop of fluid and the drop of blood that flows out 
is disseminated through the preservative with the point of the needle, 
transferred to a slide, covered, and the cover immediately cemented. 
Or 1 to 3 drops of blood are allowed to drop into a small glass cylinder 
containing from 10 to 15 c.c. of the preservative. The cylinder is then 
shaken so as to disseminate the cells through the fluid, and then allowed 
to stand for 12 hours to allow the cells to settle. The cells are then re- 
moved with a pipette and mounted in a drop of the preserving fluid. 
The latter method is best for the blood of animals. 

Osmic acid is used in the strength of 1%. The method of procedure 
is the same as the second method described above. After the cells have 
been fixed with the osmic acid [after remaining in the acid for 12 hours | 
the osmic acid solution is poured off and the cells washed several times 
with distilled water, and then hardened in 80% alcohol. They can be 
preserved in this for any length of time, a few being taken up with a 
pipette and mounted in glycerine. 

Gage’s Method for Amphibian Blood.—Three to four drops of fresh 
blood are allowed to fall into 10 c.c. of normal salt solution, contained 
in a tall glass cylinder. Agitate thoroughly, and mix with 100 c.c of 
a saturated aqueous solution of picric acid with constant stirring. Al- 
low the blood cells to settle, and pour off as much of the supernatent 
fluid as possible, add an equal amount of normal salt solution, continue 
this until the salt solution is only slightly tinged yellow. Then add ro 
c.c. of a mixture of 5 parts of carmine and 95 parts of picro-carmine for 
staining. This will require about 15 hours. Then pour off as much 
of the staining fluid as possible, and add to c.c. of acid glycerine [gly- 
cerine 100 c.c., hydric acetate or formic acid 1 c.c.] The cells may 
be kept in this mixture indefinitely. For mounting, remove a drop 
with a pipette, place it on a slide cover, and cement the cover imme- 
diately. 


* Pacini’s Fluids. A. Mercuric chloride, 1 gm., sodium chloride, 4 gms., distilled water, 200 c.c. 
B, Mercuric chloride, 1 gm., sodium chloride, 2 gms., distilled water, 200 c.c. The solution A is for 
the blood of warm-blooded animals, B for the cold-blooded. 

+ Hayem’s Fluids. A. Distilled water, 200 c.c., sodium chloride, 1 gm., sodium sulphate, 5 gms., 
mercuric chloride, 0.5 gms. B. Distilled water, 200 c c., sodium chloride, 1 gm., sodium sulphate, 5 
gms., mercuric chloride, o.5 gms., glycerine [28 B.], ro gms. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 221 


Biondi’s Method.—I have already described this method in vol. ix 
p- 112, of this Fournal. 

Giier glass Preparations.—The blood should be spread on a cover- 
glass in as thin a layer as possible. To do this, place a clean cover- 
class on a piece of filter- -paper on the table, then put a small drop of 
Bigad on the cover near one edge. Then bring the edge of a slide in 
contact with the drop of blood. and with slight pressure draw the 
slide quickly across the cover-glass. By this means the blood is 
spread out in such a thin layer nee it dries before the cells change 
their form. Preparations made in this manner, as soon as they are 
thoroughly dry, may be mounted in balsam by inverting the cover- 
glass on a drop of the same placed in the centre of a slide. and allow- 
ing the cover to settle by its own weight. 

If the above preparations are to be submitted to the action of any 
aqueous reagent, they must be fixed or the film will be washed off by 
the subsequent manipulations. The fixing coagulates the albumen and 
makes the film very adherent. The fixing is done by submitting the 
cover-glass preparation to the action of osmic acid. It is immersed in 
ain% Salution: and allowed to remain for 5 to 10 minutes, or it may be 
inverted over the mouth of a bottle Boasting a solution of osmic acid. 
The preparations are then washed well in water and dried in the air. 
In place of osmic acid, dilute solutions of chromic acid, mercuric chlo- 
ride, or alcohol may be used. 

Staining.—Cover-glass preparations that have been fixed may be 
stained with any of fhe usual staining reagents used in dilute solutions. 
A few drops of the stain are placed on the prepared side of the cover 
and allowed to act for about one quarter of an hour. The stain is then 
washed off with water, the cover-glass allowed to dry in the air, and 
then it is mounted in balsam. 

For the white cells and nucleated red cells, double staining gives 
beautiful pictures. The cover-glass preparation is first stained with a 
nuclei stain and then with a contrast stain. 

Blood-cell Counting. —To collect the blood for counting, a punc- 
ture is made in the end of the finger and the required amount of blood 
sucked up into the mixer (Fig, 2). The mixer is so constructed that 
the capillary tube is exactly one one-hundredth the capacity of the bulb. 
Before counting the blood is always diluted in a known proportion. 
The dilutions used are generally 1 to 100 or 1 to 200. For diluting the 
blood a 2% solution of sodium chloride is used by Thoma; Malassez uses 
a mixture of 1 part of a solution of gum arabic, of the sp. gr. 1,020, 
and 2 parts of a solution of sodium sulphate and sodium chloride, in 
equal parts, and having a sp. gr. of 1.020. The method of dilution 
is as follows: The blood is sucked up into the mixer to a fixed mark. 
The point of the mixer is then wiped, and it is then filled to the mark 
(101) with the dilutant. The end of the mixer is then closed with the 
finger and the mixer carefully shaken, the glass bead in the bulb aiding 
in distributing the cells. The fluid in the capillary tube is allowed to 
run out and only that portion of the mixture contained in the bulb is 
used for the counting. 

If the mixer has been filled to the mark 1 with blood and then after- 
wards the dilutant added until the contents reach the mark ror, the 
bulb will then contain a mixture of 1 part blood to 99 parts of the dilu- 


299 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [October, 


tant; the contents of the capillary tube up to the mark 1 do not enter 
the mixture. In this case the proportion of the blood to the dilu- 
tant will be 1: 100; if the mixer be only filled to the mark 2 with blood 
then the proportion will be r:200. After use the mixer is washed out 
with caustic potash, then well with water, and finally dried by draw- 
ing a current of air through it. 

For counting the cells various instruments have been devised. Two 
of the latest forms, those of Thoma and Malassez, give very exact re- 
sults. Malassez’s counter, Fig. 3, consists of a thick nickel slide, in 
the centre of which is a circular groove enclosing a glass cylinder 1 
cm. in diameter. On the outside of the groove, equidtstaute from each 
other, are three pointed screws, which project exactly + of a millimetre 
above the surface of the slide. In the centre of the slide limited by the 
groove are drawn the squares i which the blood cells are counted 
(Fig. 4). These have a side of 4; of a millimetre, and are arranged 
in groups of twenty, each group having a length of + of a maillae 
metre and a width of 1 of a millimetre, aa an area, Hie retore. of i x4 
= ,!, of a square millimetre. Each group is separated from the adjoin- 
ing groups by double lines. The cover-glass, which is ground per- 
fectly flat, is attached, by moistening the edges slightly sail saliva, to 
a frame fixed to the sides of the slide (Hig 2). The frame is then low- 
ered until it comes in contact with the screw points, thus spreading out 
the drop of blood, previously Bice on the surface of the glass cylin- 
der, ina perfectly horizontal layer + of a millimetre in ere tasss. To 
prevent evaporation a drop of water is allowed to run under the cover- 
glass and fill the vacant space between its edge and the groove in the 
Bares of the slide. The slide is now placed on the microscope, and 
with a power of 200 the red cells lying within a group of twenty squares 
are counted. As these squares have an area a gy of a square millime- 
tre, and the thickness of the layer of fluid is + of a millimetre, there 
fore ine quantity covering the group of twenty squares will equal 5! ay X 
t= 1, of a cubic millimetre. The number of cells counted, there- 
fore, has to be multiplied by roo, and then again by the number repre- 
senting the dilution, and the product will be the number of cells ina 
cubic millimetre of undiluted blood. For example, the nacht used 
has a dilution of 1 to 200, and the number of cells found in ;1, of a cu- 
bic millimetre equals 250; then 250 X 100 X 200 = 5,000,000. Thus, 
to the number of cells counted add oooo, if the dilution be 1 to 100; if 
the dilution be greater, multiply the number of cells counted by the 
figure representing the dilution before adding the oooo. 

For counting the white cells the number found in ten of the rectan- 
gles of tw enty squares must be taken. If in a dilution of 1 to roo the 
Somalis of cells contee be, . for example 30; then as the volume 
of the mixture equals 545 X + X 10= 5 of a cubic millimetre, there- 
fore the number of white cells counted must be multiplied by 10 and 
then by 100, and the product will be the number of cells in a cubic 
millimetre of undiluted blood. 
. [Zo be contintee sl 

Dr. P. I. Leonard lectures once a week upon pathology and micros- 
copy in the Ensworth Medical College, St. Joseph, Mo. He pays es- 
pecial attention to the technique of microscopical work upon normal 
and morbid tissues. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 223 


The 12th Annual Meeting of the American Society of Microscopists. 
By ROBERT W. SMILEY, 


WASHINGTON, D. C. 


Buffalo, the beautiful ‘* Queen City of the Lakes,” has for the second 
time extended its hospitality to this Society. Owing to the efforts of 
Doctors Lee H. Smith, George E. Fell, Lucien Howe, and other mem- 
bers of the local committee, arrangements had been made to extend to 
the visiting microscopists a most hearty welcome. On Monday evening, 
August 19, the Executive Committee met with the local committee, 
when the latter announced that an excursion would be given at such 
time as might be agreed upon, several feasible trips being submitted. 
The Hotel Iroquois, because of its convenient location, was selected as 
the headquarters. 

TUESDAY MORNING. 


The opening session was held at the lecture room of the Society of 
Natural Sciences in the Buffalo Library Building, Tuesday, August 20, 
at 10.30 A.M. Dr. Lee H. Smith, president of the Buffalo Micro- 
scopical Society, after calling the meeting to order, introduced the Rt. 
Rey. A. Cleveland Coxe, who delivered an invocation. 

Hon. David F. Day, president of the Society of Natural Sciences of 
Buffalo, was then called upon to deliver an address of welcome on be- 
half of ihe local microscopical club and the citizens generally. Presi- 
dent Day dwelt upon the advantages of Buffalo as a meeting place, upon 
the hospitality of the people, and in the following words welcomed the 
visitors on behalf of the various societies : 

** There are in the Microscopical Club of Buffalo some whose repu- 
tation as men of science has extended beyond the seas, and whom you 
will remember as among those who have heretofore taken an ample and 
honorable part in the labors which have distinguished your Society. 
They have looked forward to your coming again to this city with the 
greatest pleasure ; and they early resolved that during your sojourn here 
nothing essential to your happiness and within their power to provide 
should be wanting. They now place at your disposal their apartments 
in this temple, dedicated to science, letters, history, and the fine arts ; 
and they invite you, most cordially invite you, to make use of all the 
property of the Club as shall best contribute to the purposes which have 
brought you here. 

** More than this: at their request the Buffalo Society of Natural 
Sciences to-day throws open wide its doors, and bids you enter and 
possess whatever is here which will minister in any degree to your 
pleasure or convenience during your stay among us. 

** At the like request, the Buffalo Library offers to your use, while you 
are here, its rooms for study and discussion, its library of 60,000 vol- 
umes and the priceless treasures which belong to it, and in which your 
cultivated and zsthetic taste may find enjoyment. Our Historical So- 
ciety, another one of the occupants of this majestic building, gladly 
responding to the same call, asks you to make whatever use you can, 
while you are our guests, of their books, papers, and collections, ‘ rich 
with the spoils of time.’ The Buffalo ‘Academy of Fine Arts, also a 
tenant of this edifice, not to be excelled in liberality by its sister socie- 
ties, asks you to give such attention as may be within your power to its 


294 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [October, 


collection of paintings and objects of art. In the name, then, of all these 
associations, distinct in organization, but one in the exalted purpose of 
elevating the minds of men, I bid you a most cordial welcome here.” 

Dr: W m. J. Lewis, president of the American Society of Micros- 
copists, made an appropriate response, in which he said that ten years 
ago the Societv—then an infant—first met in Buffalo. He spoke of 
the encouraging progress made since that time, and concluded by thank- 
ing the citizens for their kind welcome. 

A recess was then taken, after which the Executive Committee re- 
ported favorably upon the following applicants, and they were elected 
members: Dr. W. C. Krauss, Dr. “EF. W. Brayton, F.S. Marsh, Ph. 
G., H. L. Gifford, F. A. Perry, and George Bahrenburg. The min- 
utes of the previous meeting were adopted. 

Dr. Smith announced that arrangements had been made for dealers 
and manufacturers of microscopes to exhibit their goods. The excur- 
sion for the Convention on Friday, he said, would be a trip on the lake 
and around Grand Island. 

The first paper was then read by Prof. T. J. Burrill, of Champaign, 
Ill., on ** A Microscopic Stand.” Prof. Burrill said that one using a 
special instrument would naturally have definite ideas about it; that 
one could note the general form and qualities of a microscope in a few 
minutes, but to determine its advantages he must work with it. He 
then proceeded to give what, in his view, were the desirable features 
for a microscope stand. A good instrument should be had to begin 
with; that an excellent microscope need not be expensive, although he 
insisted that expense should not be a consideration. If anybody was 
to have a good instrument, let it be the student, by all means. Discus- 
sion followed, in which Professors Hyatt, Rogers, Kellicott, and Dr. 
Fell participated. 

TUESDAY AFTERNOON. 


The first paper was by Prof. W. A. Rogers, on ‘* A New Method of 
Determining Temperature from the Reading of Thermometers.” The 
following abstract shows the technicality and principal points of the 
professor’s theme: 

‘¢ The justification of a paper on the measurement of temperature as 
a microscopic communication does not need to be made before those 
who have had occasion to make use of a standard measure of length in 
scientific investigations. In the hands of the physician the thermome- 
ter is quite as much an instrument of precision as the microscope. In 
fact, the one is a necessary supplement to the other. The numberless 
ways in which the thermometer plays an important part in connection 
with microscopic studies amply justify every sincere attempt to discover 
just how far the mercurial thermometer may be relied upon in the 
measurement of temperature. 

‘¢ Tt has long been known that the mercurial range of a thermometer 
is subject to pulsator y movements, but I am not aware that the nature 
of these pulsations has ever been investigated. Thus far they have 
been supposed to be small in amount and irregular in character. It is 
the purpose of this paper to show that these pulsations are always to 
be found in thermometers ; that they are of sufficient magnitude to de- 
mand attention; that they occur at fixed and regular intervals in the 
same thermometers ; that the cycle of changes indicated by a mercurial 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 225 


column during one of these pulsatory movements may be represented 
by a curve, whose amplitude is constant for all temperatures with which 
we have ordinarily to deal; that the form and amplitude of this curve 
are the same, whether the cycle of changes is completed within a few 
minutes or im several hours; and, finally, , that in accordance with the 
facts of observation here pointed out, the uncertainty in the indications 
of a mercurial thermometer is much greater in the case of slow changes 
of temperature than in moderately 1 apid changes. 

** Referring only to the particular thermometers under investigation, 
it is safe to say that random readings of a thermometer are in no case 
reliable indications of the real temperature ; but if continuous readings 
are taken at short and equal intervals of time until a cycle of changes 
has been completed, the.mean of the indications will indicate a Glace 
approximation to the real temperature. This constitutes what I have 
called a new method of obtaining the temperature from the readings of 
mercurial thermometers. Briefly, it may be called the method of read- 
ing by cycles. 

** The systematic character of the deviations of one thermometer from 
another is best shown by the comparison of the difference between the 
readings at equal and regular intervals of time. 

‘¢ The advantages of the new method are obvious. If we wish to 
determine the relation between a given thermometer and a_ standard 
whose errors are known, we have only to make continuous compari- 
sons under a moderately rapid change of temperature at various inter- 

vals of time, and then take the mean of the differences for each com- 
pleted cycle. In the case of my own standard, in which the period of 
the cycle is ;7{; of a degree, there would be in a rise or fall of 10 de- 
grees, occupying perhaps three hours, over 40 well-determined points 
at which the relation between the two thermometers could be estab- 
lished ; a result which would require several weeks of random observa- 
tions made in the usual manner.” 

In the discussion which followed Dr. Taylor said that while in Ger- 
many he had noted cases where the glass of thermometers had been 
left seven years to allow shrinking before the instrument was completed. 
Other remarks were made suggesting that the variation of tne glass had 
much to do with the difference of degrees. 

Professor Rogers, in answering odimenscion pointed out the liability 
to err in comparing ther momieter readings. Professor Kellicott, Doc- 
tors Lewis and Fell, and Mr. J. A. Miller, also discussed the theme. 

The next paper was by Professor 8. A. and Mrs. Susannah Gage, on 
‘¢ Staining and Permanent Preservation of Histological Elements, iso- 
lated by means of Nitric Acid or Caustic Potash.” 

The third paper of the afternoon was on ‘* Microscopic Growth of 
the Normal and Diseased Eye,” by Dr. Lucien Howe, of Buffalo. The 
‘doctor, who is one of the best authorities on all questions relating to 
the eye, said that the outer coating of the eye was a common resting 
place for bacteria, many of which are injurious and others that are harm- 
less. He exhibited cultures, and also a patient suffering from eye 
trouble. 

In the discussion which followed Dr. Taylor said it would be well to 
appoint a committee to make investigations to ascertain whether or not 
the bacillus in the human eye is similar to the bacillus in cases of pink- 


226 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 


eye and other diseases of the eye in the lower animals. Dr. Howe 
stated that this was unnecessary, as the views advanced were not origi- 
nal, but were well known to oculists. 

The last paper of the afternoon was by Professor D. S. Kellicott, on 
‘CA New Rotifer— Cephalosiphon furcella,” which he had discov ered 
in a creek near Columbus, Ohio. 

This paper evoking no discussion, Dr. Fell remarked that the exhi- 
bition to be given Thursday evening would be by invitation. 

Dr. Park invited all members interested in Biology to visit his private 
collection. 


TUESDAY EVENING 


The evening session was very brief and consisted only in the reading 
of the Presidential address by Dr. Wm. J. Lewis, on ‘*‘ Forensic Mi- 
croscopy ;or, The Microscope in its Legal Relations.” (This paper was 
published in full in the Jowrnal for September. ) 

WEDNESDAY MORNING. 


Professor Kellicott officiated as secretary in the absence of Professor 
Burrill. Three applicants were elected to membership. 

An amendment to the By-Laws was adopted providing that delin- 
quent members in arrears for three years be dropped from the rolls, 
with the privilege of reinstatement upon payment of all back dues. 

The first paper was by Professor Rogers, on ‘‘A Practical Method 
of securing copies of the Standard Centimetre, designated Scale A,” 
in which he urged that the original plate be given into the custody of 
the Buffalo Society for safe keeping. The plate, now in the care of the 
American Society, has been in the course of preparation nearly ten 
years and has eee the subject of much careful study. The matter was 
referred to the Executive Committee. 

Dr. R. H. Ward moved that the Committee on Micrometry be au- 
thorized to accept Prof. Ewell’s offer of standard plates for the use of 
local societies. An amendment was offered by Prof. Seaman to the 
effect that the committee secure from Prof. Ewell and Mr. Fasoldt a 
dozen plates each, have them compared and issued to local societies. 
This was adopted. Dr. Fell spoke favorably of this motion, saying 
that the microscopists had been a long time trying to get standard mi- 
crometers, and that if this matter was settled the Society had every rea- 
son to be satisfied with the results of the present Convention. 

The second paper was by Dr. Geo. E. Fell, on ‘*‘A Simple and 
Efficient Deposit Glass.” 

The paper by Dr. Frank L. James, of St. Louis, on ‘‘ The Behavior 
and Appearance of Tempered Steel under Honing,” was read only by 
title. 

Before adjourning, the discussion of Prof. Burrill’s paper was taken 
up. Mr. G.S. Woolman said that the beginner could not afford to 
buy Prof. Burrill’s ideal microscope; that, personally, he favored mak- 
ing the microscope as small and complete as possible. | Furthermore, 
he proceeded to say, the American manufacturers are trying to improve 
the students’ microscopes, and that he remembered when a good micro- 
scope cost $75, while now one could be had for $25. 

Dr. Taylor endorsed Mr. Woolman’s remarks. Dr. L. D. McIntosh 
said that, by making a cheap stand, complicated apparatus could readily 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 227 


be added when required. Prof. Seaman was of the opinion that the 
largest demand on the microscope was for professional use. He said 
that the introduction of bacteriology required sub-stage accessories, and 
that a stage so low that it could not take an Abbe condenser was unsuit- 
able for higher original investigation. If the student has a stand with 
facilities for taking accessories he has a stand which will last him 
throughout his whole career of advanced work. 

Dr. Taylor declared that Prof. Seaman was not practical; it was best 
for young students to buy small instruments, and then, as they become 
more expert, to cast aside the cheap for the more expensive ones. 


WEDNESDAY AFTERNOON. 


‘¢' The Brown-Sequard Method of Treatment,” by Dr. Geo. E. Fell, 
was the first paper of the afternoon session. The point which Dr. Fell 
endeavored most to impress upon his hearers was the great care neces- 
sary in preparing the Elixir. While of the opinion that death could be 
caused by injecting impure fluid, and that when left for several hours it be- 
came dangerous, he also said that when fresh the material was not more 
harmful than pure water. The doctor cited several cases where patients 
suffering from consumption, rheumatism, etc., had been temporarily 
benefited. He was of the opinion that these cases were not represent- 
ative because of the abnormal conditions, which were not advantageous. 
Brown-Sequard had claimed that the fluid was for such as were in old 
age, not in disease. Dr. Fell said he had injected from 1 to 2 drams, 
and found that the patients (with the exception of one who died through 
natural causes) were in about the same condition that they were pre- 
vious to the treatment; from which fact he concluded that his injec- 
tions were in too small quantities to cause permanent good. He stated 
that he had examined the fluid two hours after preparation, but as the 
liquid had been kept under antiseptic conditions he found no bacteria. 

Dr. Howe agreed with Dr. Fell, that in handling Brown-Sequard’s 
fluid, as in the 3 investigation of bacteriological disease, great care should 
be eine He also thought that the mental condition of the patient 
should be carefully considered. 

Dr. James said if any other man than Brown-Sequard had fathered 
this thing, it would have been dismissed as an evidence of second child- 
‘hood. After the first mysterious reports, it was learned that Dr. Brown- 
Sequard did not claim to have found an elixir of life, but the means of 
introducing into the aged a living principle which would partially stop 
the advance of decrepitude. The matter had a gain demonstrated the 
gullibility of human nature. 

Dr. Smith said that the gentlemen who had investigated the treatment 
of the elixir should be thanked for the study they had made to determine 
the benefit, if any. 

An invitation was received from the Convention of Florists, also in 
session at Buffalo, to attend the Floral Exhibition at Music Hall. 

An interesting paper by Dr. Thomas Taylor, on ‘* Detection of Adul- 
teration in Tea,” was then read. The doctor treated of the various 
methods of adulterating the materials and color in tea. In making his 
preliminary inv estigations in tea-leaf dissections, Dr. Taylor discovered 
peculiarly formed isolated cells, polarizing bodies, seemingly having no 
connection whatever with the general str ucture of the leaf. The pres- 
ence of ‘‘ stone” cells in tea leaves formed an important factor to start 


228 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 


from. Many of the adulterants are so easily detected and the punish- 
ment of the offender so certain that the question seems to have resolved 
simply into the consideration of relative cost. It is to prevent this organ- 
ized system of robbery on the part of irresponsible persons that Congress 
has devised means to protect the buyer of food stuffs. Most of the teas 
shipped from Japan to the United States are now artificially colored. 
Formerly this was not the case. Japan teas, which are naturally of a 
blackish-green color, are now made to resemble the bluish-gray of teas 
shipped from China as ** green teas.” The materials used to produce 
these unnatural shades are not very pernicious, being nothing worse 
than indigo and gypsum. They certainly add nothing to the value of 
tea leaves for drinking purposes, while they do add considerably to their 
cost. There is nothing to be said in favor of the practice except that 
dealers in America prefer teas of that description. Their doing so is 
probably explained by the fact that in teas so colored coarse leaves may 
pass without detection. The adulteration will continue as long as con- 
sumers in America buy tea only in accordance with the appearance of 
the leaf, regardless of its drawing qualities. To the Japanese the col- 
ored article isan abomination. The American demand for the uncolored 
teas known as ‘‘ basket fired” has latterly increased, and it would be 
as advantageous to the consumer in the United States as it would gratify 
most shippers in Japan if this inclination to return to honest uncolored 
teas were to become general, for it would certainly result in greater dis- 
crimination in the picking and preparation of the leaf in Japan. It 
would afford customers better teas at lower prices, would restrict the 
supply to good teas only, and revive the favor which Japan teas formerly 
enjoyed in the American market, as compared with the highly-colored 
teas of China. 

The paper was accompanied by a series of beautiful plates of Dr. 
Taylor’s own preparation, as follows: 


Plate I.—1. Epidermal cells and Stomata. 2 and 3. Columnar or 
Palisade cells and chlorophyll cells. 4. A ‘* Stone” cell. 5. 
Loose cells. 6. Vascular bundles. 7. Stomata. 

Plate II. Cell structure of tea leaf between the epidermal layers. 

Plate III. Sclerenchyma or ‘* Stone” cells of the tea leaf. 

Plate IV. 1. Cross section of camellia leaf. 2. Cross section of tea 
leaf. 3. Stomata in leaf of the Camellia japonica. 

Plate V. Tea leaf, black currant. 

Plate VI. Distinguishing serrations of leaves, sometimes mixed with 
tea leaves, e. g., willow, hawthorn, sloe, etc. 

Plate VII. Distinguishing serrations of the leaves, sometimes mixed 
with tea leaves, e. g., black currants, ash, beech, etc. 

Plate VIII. Leaves mixed with tea to adulterate. 1, willow leaf; 
2, Ilex or Paraguay tea; 3, ash; 4, black currant; 5, camellia; 
6, sloe; 7, beech. 


Mr. W. Drescher exhibited a new biological microscope, by Bausch 
& Lomb, which followed Hartnack’s model. 

Mr. M. S. Wiard read a paper on ‘* The Busy Man’s Amateur Mi- 
croscopical Laboratory.” 

Dr. Lewis said he had received some beautiful diatomaceous earth 
and petrified wood, which he would distribute at the working session. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 229 


WEDNESDAY EVENING. 


The members were entertained in the evening at the elegant residence 
of Dr. Lucien Howe, on Delaware avenue. The most social spirit 
prevailed. About nine o’clock the guests were requested to pass into 
the dining-hall, where they remained until a late hour indulging them- 
selves to their hearts’ content with the luxuries so kindly furnished by 
their genial host. When felicity was at the height the gentlemen were 
suddenly surprised by the entrance of the lady members, who, it seems, 
though not caring for the cigars, could not resist the chance to see how 
the sterner members were enjoying themselves. The following toasts 
were offered : 

By Dr. Lewis, on the American Society. 

Dr. James, although past thirty, still a hopeless bachelor, was ac- 
knowledged as the only fit person to propose the health of the ladies; 
reluctantly he complied to this request in language both soulful and 
pathetic. 

By Prof. Kellicott, on the Past of the Society. 

By Dr. Seaman, on the Future of the Society. 

The most noteworthy feature of the evening was the kind remem- 
brance of members who were unable to be present. 

Dr. Howe spoke feelingly of his relations with Dr. Bernard Persh, a 
man who, like Goldsmith’s village preacher, was dear to all who knew 
him; one more skilled to help those struggling to aid mankind than to 
step in and claim the honors himself. 

Dr. Taylor related his own dealings with Dr. Persh, whose death he 
mourned as a brother’s. 

Rey. Francis Wolle, who has done more in the study of Fresh-water 
Algz and the Desmids of the United States, and that without the aid 
of the Government, than any other living man, was also kindly re- 
membered. 

Dr. Louis Bull mustered a quartette, which rendered excellent mu- 
sic. Toasts were also offered by Dr. Howe, Prof. Ward, and others. 

Dr. Howe’s ‘‘ Commers” was one of the many pleasing features 
which will make the visiting scientists long remember their stay in 


Buffalo. 
THURSDAY MORNING. 


At the opening of the session Doctors Fell and Smith made announce- 
ments relating to the soirée and the excursion. 

Dr. Lewis said that the time had arrived for electing a committee to 
ballot for president. He appointed Dr. Blackham to act as teller. 

The following gentlemen were elected as a nominating committee, 
to report nominations for officers: Prof. T. J. Burrill, Dr. Frank L. 
James, Prof. D. S. Kellicott, C. C. Mellor, Dr. R. H. Ward, William 
H. Walmsley, and W. A. E. Drescher. 

Upon the recommendation of the Executive Committee, Dr. F. W. 
Ross, Mrs. C. B. Lewis, and Messrs. F. Selleck, E. D. Hall, A. J. 
Gawne, and H. S. Brode were elected members. 

The first paper read was on ‘* The Best Technique for Photo-micros- 
copy with High Powers,” by George W. Rafter, and a very animated 
discussion followed, Dr. Detmers, Prof. Burrill, Dr. Taylor, Dr. Mer- 
cer, and Dr. Blackham participating. 


230 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 


Prof. Kellicott briefly described a new collecting net, designed by 
Prof. C. S. Fellows, of Minneapolis. 

The third paper, by Dr. H. N. Lyon, on ‘* Notes of the Histology 
of Attacuscecropia,” was read by title only. 

Dr. George E. Blackham presented a paper on ‘‘ Measurements of 
the Amplifying Power of Objectives and Oculars in the Compound 
Microscope,” and with its discussion the forenoon session closed. 


THURSDAY AFTERNOON.—WORKING SESSION. 


The afternoon session was devoted to the demonstration of practical 
microscopic work, as follows: 

By L. D. McIntosh, M. D.: Use of Solar Microscope and Stereopti- 
con Combination. Among the objects projected on the screen were 
histological sections from cat, including the intestine, brain, liver, and 
kidney, larva of mosquito, section of human tooth showing dentine 
and bone, section of human embryo foot showing ossification, Rinn- 
bock’s slides of arranged diatoms (published in the November number 
of this Journal, vol. ix, 1888, facing page 199), lightning flashes, blood 
corpuscles, bacteria, etc. 

By R. H. Ward, M. D., F. R. M. $.: Methods of Micrometry. 

By George W. Rafter: Use of Professional Photo- -micrographic 
Camera, and an improved method of making a microscopical examin- 
ation of water. 

By A. M. Ewing, M. D.: The Working of a New Ether-freezing 
Microtome, showing the freezing of a section of cancer. The micro- 
tome exhibited by Mr. Ewing is a modification of that invented by 
Mr. Wingrave, of London. By its comparative simplicity and cheap- 
ness it possesses many advantages over the more expensive freezing 
microtomes. 

By A. C. Chester, M. D.: Working of a Machine for Making Tin 
Cells used in exhibitor’s method of dry mounting. 

By George A. Bausch: General Construction of the Microscope. 

By Prof. J. D. Hyatt: Methods of Cutting Rock Sections. 

By Povk; Lansing, MSDE s and: REN: Lansing , M. D.: Paraffine 
Method of Imbedding ; Section Cutting and } Mounting ; Mounting 
Bacillus tuber Bye in balsam. 

By George E. Blackham, M. D.,F. R. M.S.: Determination of the 
angular aperture and working distance of objectives. 

By Edward S. Nott: Method of cleaning and mounting diatoms. 

By Roswell Park, M. D., and W. H. Bergtold, M. D.: Preparation 
of culture media; cultivation of bacteria ; making Esmarch’s tubes. 
Their exhibit of 72 tubes, cultures of bacillus of anthrax, Asiatic 
cholera, scarlet fever, swine plague, bacillus typhoid fever, chicken 
cholera, and many other well known diseases of man, the lower ani- 
mals, and plants, was one of the principal features of the working 
session. A glass jar was shown which contained the bacillus of water, 
yeast, etc., growing on sterilized pieces of potato, bread, etc. Speci- 
mens of a black. violet, etc., from water were also shown. The 
method of photographing microscopic objects by electric light proved 
highly interesting, a miniature incandescent light being used. 

By Lucien Howe, M. D.: Preparation of nutrient gelatine for bac- 
teria; culture of bacteria taken from the eye; staining of bacteria. 
The doctor described the various stages of preparing gelatine for the 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 231 


cultivation of bacteria, which was as follows: 1, boiling of ingredients ; 
2, filtration; 3, sterilization by moist air; 4, ieee ion by heated 
air. 

By S. Y. Howell, M. D., and A. L. Benedict, M. D.: Staining of 
Beetllas peer euloses.: Thoma and Zeiss’ apparatus for counting blood 
corpuscles. 

By W. J. Kent: Process of placing gold fish under the microscope 
for observing the circulation of the blood. 

By C. L. Pond and C. A. Svensson: Microtome. 

By R.N. Reynolds, M. D.: Histological preparations under micro- 
scope. 

By H. S. Brode: Making paper boxes for imbedding paraffine. 

Specimens of a fresh-water sponge found by Mr. Mills in “ 18- mile 
Creek” in October, 1882, and also in St. John’s River, Fla., in 1885, 
were also exhibited. 

The working session, which proved to be a valuable feature of the 
Buffalo meeting, was under the direction of Stephen Y. Howell, M. 
D., who, by his close attention and ardent labors, insured the most suc- 
cessful one yet held by the Society. 


THURSDAY EVENING.—THE SOIREE. 


The notable feature of the meeting of the microscopists was the mi- 
croscopic exhibit given for the benefit of the general public. In pre- 
vious years these exhibitions have usually been held in large halls, de- 
sirable because of their facilities for the easy handling of crowds, but 
this time it was deemed proper to hold it in the Library building, where 
the various handsome rooms and scientific and art ile iene would 
substantially add to its attractiveness. The Library Association gener- 
ously gave the use of the entire structure, the other organizations inter- 
ested consenting. So that as well as seeing the microscopic display the 
visitors might examine the treasures of fer Art Gallery, the Society of 
Natural Be eacen. and the Historical Society. Furthermore, citizens 
owning microscopes were asked to contribute them for the occasion, 
and the response was such that when evening came nearly 250 instru- 
ments were ready for use. 

At 8 o’clock the microscopical soirée was in successful progress. 
The illuminated building presented a fine appearance from without. 
Inside it was filled with light and life. The tables supporting micro- 
scopes were in the main room in the basement, in the Library rooms, 
and the rooms of the Historical Society. Inthe Art Gallery, Dr. Lee 
H. Smith entertained the visitors with his talking and w histling phono- 
graph. On the library floor music was furnished throughout the 
evening. 

Most of the objects chosen for exhibition were those which would 
best serve to engage and please the average visitor’s attention rather 
than those of the most particular scientific interest. Among them were 
exquisite crystals of precious stones and metals, alloys, disease growths, 
animal tissues, forms of vegetable and shell life, hair, the parasites of 
various creatures, anatomical and physiological specimens, bacteria, 
trichine, micro-photographs, etc. 

Dr. George E. Fell, chairman of the Exhibition Committee, and other 
members of that committee, have every reason to congratulate them- 


232 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 


selves upon the soirée of 1889, which was in every particular all that 
could have been desired. 

A. few of the principal exhibits were as follows: 

By C. E. Alling, F. R.M.S., with B. & L.’s Concentric: Section of 
toe-nail of elephant from Jumbo, stained. 

By Miss Mary A. Booth, with Griffith Club: Hairs of larve of 7yro- 
goderma ornata. 

By Mr. G. R. Bausch, with B. & L.’s Concentric : Cornea of eye of 
water vous 

By Mr. 8. W. Baker, with Collins’ (Binocular): Transverse section 
of Pinus str ROS (Pine Needle), double stained. 

By Dr. Geo. E. Blackham, with Folles-Blackham: 7Zrichina spi- 
ralis (encysted). 

By Dr. L. A. Bull, with Schraner: Czmex lecticularis. 

By Bausch & Lomb, with their own microscopes : Trichina spiralis 
in human muscle, diatoms, circulation of blood in tail of fish, diamond 
beetle, proboscis of butterfly, rolling stones, butterfly scales arranged 
in form of bouquet, and platino cyanide of magnesium. 

By Prof. Albert H. Chester, with Schraner (Binocular): Green gar- 
net. 

By Mr. E. L. Cheeseman: Crystal alloy of gold and silver. 

By Dr. Lucien Howe, with Beck’s (Binocular): Vegetable growth 
from human ear and eye. 

Br. Mr. J. D. Hyatt, with Zentmayer: Multiple images in compound 

eye of beetle. 

By DuGeo. he bells with B. & L.’s Concentric: Pond life. 

By Dr. S. Y. Howell, with Zentmayer: Malarial pigmentation of 
brain tissue, diphtheritic inoculation of cornea of guinea pig, Baczllus 
megatertum, Actinomycosts bovis, sea-weed, Stem of an endogen, 
route eye, and foot of fly, tongue and sting of bee, spider, foot of 
spider, flea, wing of butterfly. 

By Dr: Jackson, with Zeiss: Insect in human skin: with Zent- 
mayer, bacillus of typhoid fever. 

By Dr. F. L. James, with B. & L.’s Universal: Crystalized sala- 
cine. 

By Prof. D. S. Kellicott, with Zentmayer: Floscules from the Ni- 
agara. 

By Mr. F. W. Kuhne: Pond life. 

By Dr. W. J. Lewis: Insect eggs on leaf. 

By Mr. C. G. Milnor, with Universal (Binocular): Lung of Pitts- 
burg iron-worker. 

By Dr. L. D. McIntosh: Tooth of dog, lip and lung of cat, oxyhy- 
drogen microscope, section human tooth, human skin (injected), hu- 
man lung, human liver (injected), sciatic nerve, aézes exce/sa, antenna 
of moth, saw fly, wood ant, larve of mosquito. 

By Mr. °C. C. Mellor, with Acme and B. & L.’s models: Crystals 
sulphate oe EpOrp EIAs leg of diamond bee, adontophore of octous. 

By MzE. S. Nott, with Crouch (Binocular): Arranged diatoms. 

By Dr. nee H. Smith, with B. & L.’s microscopes: Hamburg canal 
water, Niagara river water, Park Lake water, circulation of blood in 
salamander. 

By Dr. Thomas Taylor, with Acme: Stone cells of the tea leaf. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 233 


By Dr. R. H. Ward: Section of grain of Indian corn showing em- 
bryo plant. 

By Dr. E. Wende, with B. & L.’s microscopes: Flea, earth mite, 
parasite of sand martin, parasite of mole, and a species of Actznocy- 
clus, Heliopelta, Cyperus, Lycopodium, and Dendrobium. 

By Mr. G. 8. Woolman, with Beck, Acme, and Zeiss: Section of 
young squirrel, head of mosquito, salacine, proboscis of blow-fly, hair 
formation in scalp. 

It had been intended to send out invitations, but by an oversight the 
proper direction of some 1,200 of these was neglected, so all comers 
were admitted. . Had it been thoroughly known that the admission 
would thus be entirely free to everybody, the throng undoubtedly would 
have been large beyond all possibility of comfort. As it was, a great 
number of people were present during the evening. 


FRIDAY MORNING. 


Dr. James presented the report of the Auditing Committee, stating 
that all bills against the Society had been paid, and there was yet in the 
treasury $26.63, not including the receipts of the present meeting. 

Dr. Ward presented the reports of the Committee on Standard Mi- 
crometry and on the Fasoldt plate. 

Dr. Seaman presented the report of the Committee on Periodicals 
and Publications. 

An individual report from Dr. Detmers created some discussion, in 
which Dr. Fell, Dr. Blackham, and others participated. Eventually a 
motion to discharge the committee was carried. 

Dr. Blackham, from the Committee on Constitution and By-Laws, 
reported progress. Somebody remarked that this committee should be 
discharged, because they had reported nothing more than progress for 
years. The committee was continued. 

The Committee on Poisonous Meats and Dairy Products was dis- 
charged. 

Dr. Mosgrove tendered his resignation as Treasurer, which was ac- 
cepted, and C. C. Mellor was elected Treasurer for the remainder of 
the unexpired term—one year. 

The Nominating Committee presented the names of the following 
gentlemen for officers of the American Society, and they were duly 
elected: President, Dr. George E. Fell, Buffalo, N. Y.; Vice-Presi- 
dents, Prof. W. H. Seaman, Washington, D. C.; F. W. Kuhne, Fort 
Wayne, Ind.; Executive Committee, W. P. Manton, Detroit, Mich. ; 
Dr. F. L. James, St. Louis, Mo. ; W.H. Walmsley, Philadelphia, Pa., 
Prof. Burrill holding over as Secretary. 

Dr. Howe offered as a motion that the exact name of every object to 
be exhibited at any soirée of the Society be first submitted to a suitable 
committee before exhibition. This motion was referred to the Execu- 
tive Committee. 

A paper by Dr. Fell on *‘ Examination of Legal Documents by the 
Microscope” was read by title only. 

Dr. C. Q. Jackson read an interesting paper on ‘‘ Bacteria in Ice.” 
He said it might, like water, appear clear, and yet swarm with bacteria. 
There was almost, though not quite, as much danger as before freezing. 
He set forth that although numbers of bacteria were killed by freezing, 


234 _ THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [October, 


many others were unaffected by the low temperature. As in other 
spheres of animal life, the struggle for existence went on, with the sur- 
vival of the fittest. Ice sometimes contained the bacilli of typhoid 
fever. It might be nothing short of a congealed emulsion of bacteria 
with which we could inoculate ourselves. He urged the necessity of 
safeguards against the pollution of the water by sewage, etc. This 
was a duty in which everybody was interested. Snow ice generally 
contained a great deal of bacteria. Any ice not entirely clear should 
not be allowed to come into contact with food. Absolute safety could 
only be obtained by making ice by the artificial freezing process. Dr. 
Jackson said he did not wish to be understood as wishing to introduce 
anything sensational, or to make a crusade against the ice companies. 
A paper by Dr. Fell on ‘*‘ The Value of the Microscope in the Diag- 
nosis of Tuberculosis” was read by title, after which the Society ad- 
journed for dinner and an excursion down the river. 


MANUFACTURERS’ EXHIBITION. 


Fine exhibits of microscopes, objectives, accessories, microtomes, 
mounting instruments and materials, lenses of all descriptions, cabinets 
for slides. microscopical literature, and mounted objects were made by 
the following well-known dealers in microscopic supplies : 

By J/r. G.S.U ‘oolman, of New York: 7 microscopes, object boxes, 
and many slides illustrating nearly all branches of microscopical mount- 
ing, many of which were of a rare character. Noteworthy among them 
were the histological and dental, many of which were beautifully stained ; 
others that required polarized light. The sections of rocks attracted 
attention, particularly the slides of characteristic eruptive rocks. In 
speaking of Mr. Woolman’s collection of slides a prominent member 
of the Society said that some of them were the finest he had ever seen. 

By Messrs. Bausch &: Lomb, of Rochester : Microscopes of their own 
make, together with all microscopical supplies, objectives, microtomes, 
hooks: Ke. 

By J@ss M. A. Booth, of Longmeadow, Mass., with Griffith stand : 
250 slides of recent and fossil diatoms, foraminifera, seeds, opaque ob- 
JECESetee 

By Messrs. F. W. Queen & Co., of Philadelphia: Microscopes 
(Acme)—calling especial attention to the easy movement of the coarse 
adjustment. Slides of anatomical sections and of general interest, books 
and accessories. One slide of Lepédocyrtus curvicollis, showing the 
projections on the surface, was exhibited. 

BycD7. Le 2. Me lutosh. of Chicago : 5 microscopes, microscopic at- 
tachment for use with solar or artificial light for projecting or photo- 
graphing objects, solar stereopticons, slides, etc. 

By The Educational Supply Co., of Boston: Zeiss’ microscopes, 
accessories, Thomas’ and Minot’s microtomes, mounting instruments 
and materials. 


FRIDAY AFTERNOON.—THE EXCURSION. 


At 2.30 o’clock the ‘‘ Huntress” steamed out of Buffalo river with 
the microscopic party, including many ladies. 

First the boat made a circuit of the new Government breakwater, that 
the visitors might see Buffalo’s big outer harbor. Then heading down 


the river a call was made at Ferry street, where many of the Sennen 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 235 


stopping in that vicinity came on board. After that no other stop was 
made until 5 o’clock, when the steamer was made fast at the dock in front 
of the McComb Hotel, where refreshments were to be served. 

While lunch was still in progress speeches were made oy Hon. David 
F. Day, President Lewis, Dr. Lee H. Smith, Dr. Geo. E. Blackham, 
Prof. W. H. Seaman, and Dr. W. C. Barrett. 

Dr. Lewis then called upon Dr. Geo. E. Fell, the new president of 
the American Society of Microscopists. Dr. Fell told how he first be- 
came interested in microscopic work, and made some statements rela- 
tive to the history of the organization. Having studied with the late 
Peter Emslie, he followed the profession of civil engineering for some 
years, then devoting his attention to medicine, in nies he had always 
had a deep interest. 

At the conclusion of Dr. Fell’s remarks the Society was declared ad- 
journed szze dze. The time and place for next year’s meeting will be 
determined by the Executive Committee and hereafter feounced: 

On the return trip up the rivera meeting of the Executive Committee 
was held, at which it was voted to accept with pleasure the offer of the 
Buffalo Society of Microscopists to take charge of the American Soci- 
ety’s collection of plates and other property, and issue them to local 
societies on the order of proper authorities. 

The members who attended the Buffalo gathering united in pro- 
nouncing the meeting one of the best it has ever held. 

The list of members registered during the Convention is as follows: 
William J. Lewis, Hartford, Conn. C. G. Milnor, Pittsburg, Pa. 


T. J. Burrill, Champaign, III. 
Frank L. James, St. Louis, Mo. 
Lee H. Smith, Buffalo, N. Y. 
Louis A. Bull, Buffalo, N. Y. 

S. Y. Howell, Buffalo, N. Y. 

S. M. Mosgrove, Urbana, Ohio. 
Roydeyward, Droy, N. Y. 

J. D. Hyatt, New York, N. Y. 
William A. Rogers, Waterville, Me. 
D. S. Kellicott, Columbus, Ohio. 
George E. Fell, Buffalo, N. Y. 
Charles C. Mellor, Pittsburg, Pa. 
G. S. Woolman, New York, N. Y. 
Mary A. Booth, Longmeadow, Mass 
Thomas Taylor, Washington, D. C. 
L. D. McIntosh, Chicago, Ill. 

Ada M. Kenyon, Buffalo, N. Y. 
Edward S. Nott, Hamburg, N. Y. 
Wsj-eerentice; Allecsheny City, Pa. 
Frank F. Colwell, Urbana, Ohio. 
J. J. B. Hatfield, Indianapolis, Ind. 
Charles Weil, Buffalo, N. Y. 

F. W. Kuhne, Fort Wayne, Ind. 

H. S. Brode, Champaign, III. 
Roswell Park, Buffalo, N. Y. 

H. Bausch, Rochester, N. Y. 
Lucien Howe, Buffalo, N. Y. 

A. M. Hayward, Susquehanna, Pa. 
Frederick G. Perry, Boston, Mass. 
W. Drescher, Rochester, N. Y. 
Edward Pennock, Philadelphia, Pa. 
W. H. Walmsley, Philadelphia, Pa. 


Mrs. F. S. Pease, Buffalo, N. Y. 

George W. Rafter, Rochester, N. Y. 

Samuel Calvin, Iowa City, Iowa. 

J. J. Garretson, Buffalo, N. Y. 

H. J. Detmers, Columbus, Ohio. 

Miss F. Detmers, Columbus, Ohio. 

Martin S. Wiard, New Britain, Conn. 

Albert H. Chester, Hamilton College, 
IN-SYe 

R. N. Reynolds, Detroit, Mich. 

C. D. Zimmerman, Buffalo, N. Y. 

George F. Danforth, Jamestown, N. Y. 

Wm. H. Seaman, Washington, D. C. 

Mrs. J. C. Eddy, Clev eland, Ohio. 

John A. Miller, Buffalo, N. Y. 

Biaky Cheesemant Knowlesville, N. Y. 

Fred. S. Marsh, Jamestown, N. Y. 

Herman L. Gifford, Jamestown, N. Y. 

M. Francis, College Station, Texas. 

Dr. Mary A. Sprink, Indianapolis, Ind. 

H. H. Turner, Rochester, N. Y. 

George E. Biielcham: Dunkirk, N. Y. 

Dr. A. Waterhouse, Jamestown, N. Y. 

S. W. Baker, Jamestown, N. Y. 

Willis R. Whitney, Jamestown, N. Y. 

J. T. Waid, Ridgway, Pa. 

Charles E. West, Brooklyn, NERY 

William Schnur, Warren, Pa. 

Frank W. Ross, ‘Blmir a, N. YY: 

J. E. Line, Rochester, N. Y. 

AST: Gawne, Sandusky, N. Y. 

M. A. Veeder, Lyons, N. Y. 


236 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 
NOTES ON TECHNIQUE. 


Detection of Blood-Stains.—Since Professor G. G. Stokes and 
others first called attention to the peculiar absorption spectrum yielded 
by blood, the spectroscope has been often employed to detect blood- 
stvins. The latest essays in this direction are alluded to in Dr. Cran- 
stoun Charles’ excellent Anznzuwal Report on Medical Chemistry. He 
tells us Linossier finds that the most sensitive spectroscopic reaction of 
blood is that given by reduced hematin. 

The blood-stain is dissolved in water and examined for the spectrum 
of oxyhemoglobin. A drop of freshly prepared hyposulphite of soda 
is now added, when the spectrum of hemoglobin appears at once; fin- 
ally, a couple of drops of a concentrated ‘solution of soda are added, 
which decomposes the hemoglobin into globulin and reduced hematin, 
the spectrum of the latter consisting of hav absorption bands situated 
between D and 4, the left one lying midway between D and E, and 
being well marked; indeed, this intense band is the only one to be 
distinctly observed in dilute solutions, and it ought to disappear if the 
solution is heated to 50° C., without stirring or agitation, and reappear 
on cooling; it ought further to disappear when shaken in the air, and 
reappear on the Bodinion of a drop of hyposulphite of soda. This test 
applies even to putrid blood. Should the blood-stain have become 
insoluble in water, we are directed to dissolve it in ammonia, and 
reduce by adding one or two drops of a solution of ferrous sulphate 
and tartaric acid.— The Dosimetric Medical Review, July, 1889. 

—_——_ 0 ——_ 

American Objectives.—Dr. Pelletan, editor of the journal de 
Micrographie, says: ** Doctor Detmers reaffirms that the best German 
objectives are in no way superior to the best efforts of the American 
opticians. I have said in a former article how thoroughly tenable I 
hold this assertion to be, and declared that I agreed in it completely. 
I believe that I was first to declare (a long time ago) that poor Robert 
B. Tolles, so unhappy in his too short career, so long misunderstood in 
his own country and ignored abroad, was the greatest optician in the 
world, and I am prepared now to prove that he has never yet been sur- 
passed. I therefore desire to associate myself with Dr. Detmers in the 
words in which he closes his communication.” 

To the above Dr. W. J. Lewis adds his views: 

‘* Strong words these, but while agreeing with Dr. Pelletan (and Dr. 
Detmers) in all that he can say concerning the excellence of the work 
of Tolles, I believe that the elder Spencer, who soon followed his friend 
Tolles to the Silent Land, was as good as Tolles. I believe further 
that his son Herbert Spencer i iS ceca? to no living optician; that Gund- 
lach has produced and is producing objectives the excellencies of which 
cannot be duplicated in Europe to-day, and that for certain grades of 
objectives those of Bausch & Lomb are absolutely incomparable. 
American opticians have absolutely nothing to fear in competitive con- 
tests so far as excellence of work goes with any in the world. I have 
no patience, therefore, with Americans who are sending abroad for 
microscopes and eblecg ves: They can get better at home for the same 
expenditure of money.”—.S¢. Louts Medicak and Surgical Journal, 


July, 1889. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 237 
EDITORIAL. 


The American Society of Microscopists.—We are glad to see 
that this Society, after having had very small meetings for a period of 
years, has at length experienced a very successful meeting. This, how- 
ever, was due to the indomitable energy of Dr. Lewis, and of the 
Buffalo people, headed by Dr. Geo. E. Fell and Dr. Lee H. Smith. 
The present advantage will be utilized or not according to the arrange- 
ments made for the future meetings. The leading members of this 
Society are, to a considerable extent, members also of the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science. Of course it is well 
known that some of them constituted, at one time, an important part 
of the Microscopical section of that Association. 

It came to be felt, and was doubtless true, that a national society of 
Microscopists could command more influence than the section of a gen- 
eral Association. Our volumes of Proceedings are much superior to 
what such a section could present, and being “published separately are 
more available to microscopists the world! over. and they ought at 
least to appear more promptly. The officers of our Society daubidess 
secure greater prominence than officers of a section. Our soirées and 
working sections have become very useful. At least 250 microscopes 
were used at Buffalo. There are people who join our Society from an 
interest in microscopy who would not pay the higher dues of the 
American Association and to whom that Association “might not like to 
accord the rank of fellowship, which is a qualification to holding office. 

On the other hand, it has been noticed, at least in the past two years, 
that, with the organizations meeting in different cities, there has come 
a loss of time to those wishing to attend both. The Buffalo meeting 
closed four days before the Toronto meeting began, thus producing a 
waste of time to those who had come from a distance. This, in turn, 
caused some of them to cut short the Toronto meeting. But the Co- 
lumbus meeting overlapped the Cleveland meeting so as to deprive us 
from attending both on Tuesday, and several hours travel had to in- 
tervene. 

We think that the Microscopical Society should either hold its meet- 
ings at entirely different times and places from the American Associa- 
tion, and thus avoid even the appearance of parasitism, or else it should 
boldly assemble at the same place with the American Association, and 
make its meetings come as close upon the other as possible without much 
detriment to either. ‘The American Association always closes on Tues- 
day, with an important evening session, but its morning and afternoon 
sessions of Tuesday are usually rather unimportant. Without dis- 
courtesy, the microscopists could meet Tuesday morning or afternoon, 
and continue during Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday. 

A good many auxiliary clubs and societies are springing up about the 
Association. The Entomological and Botanical Clubs are within the 
Association. The Agricultural a and Geological Societies are inde- 
pendent. An independent chemical society is about being organized. 

The American Association of Scientists is, perhaps, destined to be- 
come a confederation of societies, and the microscopists should certainly 
stand in as close relations as the geologists, the chemists, the agricul- 
turists, and the botanists. 


238 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ October, 


A seemingly disintegrating tendency has been felt by the American 
Association caused by the pronounced advantages securable in separate 
organizations, but these advantages we believe may be secured without 
serious injury to the parent association, if wise counsels prevail. 

Let, then, the American Society of Microscopists arrange to begin its 
next meeting at Indianapolis on the Tuesday in August which marks 
the close of the American Association, and if this proves impracticable 


then come as near to it as possible, both in time and place. 


EXTRACTS FROM CORRESPONDENCE. 


Modified Crystals of Cupric, Sulphate. By Wm. N. Hastings, 
Rochester, N. H. 

The following method has proved quite successful in producing, among 
other beautiful forms, the vortical rosettes figured by Carpenter in 
‘¢ The Microscope and its Revelations.” 

A drop of saturated aqueous solution of sulphate of copper is placed 
upon the slide and rubbed with the finger until a thin but perfect film 
adheres to the surface. Evaporate over the lamp. No crystals should 
then be visible. Allow it to cool and breathe upon it. Examine with 
low power. Further breathing will further modify the crystals. The 
amount of moisture and thickness of the film will determine the forms 
produced. 

Dissolving Apparatus. By Dr. H. P. Nottage, Boston, Mass. 

I have invented an efficient and simple apparatus for producing a 
dissolving view with a single lantern, and am making application for 
letters-patent. This machine produces an entirely new and novel effect, 
and dissolves a picture just as efficiently as an expensive double lantern 
dissolving apparatus. In all previous inventions for use with a single 
lantern the screen is left in darkness while the picture is being changed, 
but with this apparatus it is covered with light all the time. 


Sections for Practice in Staining. By W.G. Crosby, Canandaigua, 
INFSCY 

I would suggest that a series of vegetable and wood sections be pre- 
pared by some one suitable for the delightful pastime of double and 
single staining by amateurs who have no microtome, and whose time 
does not permit them to seek out and prepare the material. I am con- 
fident such preparations would meet a ready sale. Perhaps such sec- 
tions may even now be procured, but I do not know where. If so, my 
pupils and the members of our society would like the information. 


MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


St. Louis CLius oF MicroscopistTs. 
Tuesday evening, August 6.—The name of C. C. Faris was pro- 
posed for membership. 
J. B. Whinery made a report on the examination of powdered acacia. 
Out of seven samples, one was found with starch. He will do further 
work on the same subject. A member said that rice starch has been 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 239 


reported as an adulterant of powdered acacia, and that, owing to the 
minuteness of the grains of this starch, it would not be noticed with 
low powers. 

H. M. Whelpley exhibited specimens of both white and yellow dex- 
trin, mounted in balsam and in glycerine. He dwelt on the fact that 
the starch grains in dextrin are not all destroyed, as many suppose, and 
that they can be readily detected in a powder adulterated with dextrin. 
However, the microscope would show it as starch and not as dextrin. 
Another point was that the white dextrin is made from potato starch, 
while the yellow grade comes from corn starch. The same member 
had a specimen of powdered senega which had been mixed with starch. 

Frank Davis reported that all the senega he had examined was free 
from starch. He pointed out the similarity existing between powdered 
senega and powdered fenugreek seed. 

Beaks ate oe 


LEAVENWORTH MIcROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 


Aug. 7, 1889.—Prof. Lighton exhibited his apparatus for combining 
oblique with direct illumination, and some fine effects were obtained in 
the examination of diatoms and bugs. Dr. Bidwell showed a Czmex 
lectularius and Phthirtus pubis. The nits of tke latter were also 
shown, and one of them was mounted with the hair to which it was 
clinging. A one-eighth-inch dry objective of Miiller’s, Germany, a re- 
cent acquisition of Dr. Bidwell’s, was also exhibited and compared 
with other objectives. 


NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


flypnotism: Its History and Development. By Fredrik Bjorn- 
strom, M. D. The Humboldt Publishing Co., New York. 8°, pp- 
126. Paper, 30c. 


Last August over one hundred and fifty ‘* Savants of incontestable au- 
thority” met in Paris to discuss the progress and development of the 
mysterious agency known as ‘* Hypnorism,” and as a result of their 
deliberations the subject has entered the domain of study, and evidently 
has come to stay. The author of the present work is well qualified to 
write on the subject, and has covered its history, effects, morality, uses, 
abuses, and bibliography. 


Hlomer’s liad, Books I-11Tl, with V ‘ocabulary. By Thomas D. Sey- 
mour. 12°. Ginn & Co., Boston. Price, $i35% 


Students of a classics who are seeking an introduction to the [liad 
will not fail to find in Prof. Seymour’ einen of Homer a very inter- 
esting and profitable medium. The ae here given is that of Homert 
vie edidit Gulielmus Dindorf: edttio guinta correcttor quam 
curavit C. Hentze. Leipzig, 1884. 

An introduction, simplified and enlarged from ‘+ Zztroduction to the 
Language and Verse of Homer,” by the same editor, is included, 
treating of the various Homeric peculiarities of poetry and dialect. 
The story of the Iliad is also given, being a condensation of the twenty- 
four books. A commentary, adapted to the use of schools, occupies 


240 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [ October, 


138 pages and is full of interesting material, which adds greatly to the 
usefulness of the volume. 

A feature to be highly commended is the vocabulary, which covers 
over a hundred pages and contains numerous illustrations. 

It needs only to be added that mechanically this book follows the plan 
of Allen & Greenough’s Latin Classics, being both neat and durable. 


Practical Latin Composition. By Wm. C. Collar, A. M. 12°, 
268 pp. Ginn & Co., Boston. Price, $1.10. 

This is a new departure in Latin composition. It contains fifty pages 
of extracts from Nepos, Cesar, and Cicero, which the student is sup- 
posed to make himself thorough with before attempting Latin composi- 
tion. By means of a series BE annotated exercises he reproduces the 
story, but in slightly varied Latin sentences, which successively illus- 
trate the various grammatical constructions. The Latin text is so 
closely reproduced that no English-Latin vocabulary is necessary. I 


should think that the new ened would be very successful. 


Microscope Catalogue. By Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., Rochester. 
Sepp alae. 

This is their twelfth and best edition. Among the new features are 

a new biological microscope, the biological objectives which have been 

constructed for the short tube, and intended principally for histological 


work, and various new accessories, such as condenser, mounts, etc. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


[These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof. 


FOR EXCHANGE.—Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 

WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 

WANTED.—A clean copy of Rey. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atlas of the 
Diatomacez. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.— Diatomaceous Earth from Utah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD, Salt Lake City, Utah. 
CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 


TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of pétrified wood—Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand “ Burt’s Solar Compass ” complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second-hand, objectives, condensers, polarizers, stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. W.N. SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 

OFFERED.—Zeiss’ New Catalogue (in German) forwarded for 10 cents in stamps. 

F. J. EMMERICH & SONS, 43 Barclay St., New York City. 


WANTED.—Any works on Microscopy not already in my Library. 
H. M. WHELPLEY, F. R. M. S., St. Louis, Mo. 
WAN TED.—(In excnange for slides.) ‘‘ Microscopical Bulletin,’ Vol. I, No. 5, August, 1884. 
M.S. WIARD, New Britain, Conn. 


Labels in exchange for slides. EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, Ill. 
First-class Histological Slides for other ere mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 
shares. Aes: SHANKS, M. D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N. Y. 


OFFERED.—Griffith & Henfry Micrographic Dictionary to be sold; also Hogas Microscope. 
ene. WINTINGHAM, 36 Pine St., N. Y. 


WANTED.—A clean copy of Wolle’s Fresh-Water Alge of the United States (2 vols.) ; also good 
second-hand Grunow Camera-Lucida, and a self-centering Turn-table. 
JOS. P. THOMPSON, P. O. Box 1383, Portland, Me. 


>, 


Fic. 


6. 


Fic. 


APPARATUS FOR EXAMINING BLOOD. 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


Vou. X. NOVEMBER, 1889. No galle 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Ameri- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanied 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London, or to Mr. W. P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, agen. accompanied by the yearly price of five shillings. 


Histological Technique of the Blood. 
By GEORGE C. FREEBORN, M. D., 


INSTRUCTOR IN NORMAL HISTOLOGY IN THE COLLEGE OF PHYSICIANS AND SURGEONS, N. Y. 
| Continued from page 222. | 


Thoma’s blood-cell counter, Fig. 5, consists of a glass slide on the 
centre of which is cemented a square glass plate, P, having a circular 
opening 11 millimetres in diameter. In the centre of this chamber a 
circular glass plate, c, is cemented to the slide. This plate has a diam- 
eter of 5 millimetres, and on its free surface is engraved a grating 1 
millimetre square, which is divided into 4oo equal squares, Fig. 6. 
These squares are, by an additional system of double lines, div ided into 
25 groups of 16 squares each. The ‘surface of the plate, P, is ground 
down so that the distance between the upper surface of c and ne under 
surface of a cover-glass placed on P shall be exactly 1-10th of a milli- 
metre. The cover- ~glass should be ground perfectly flat, and should be 
about 0.35 mm. thick. 

A small drop of the diluted blood from the mixer is placed in the 
middle of the plate, c, (Fig. 6), and quickly covered. The drop 
should be of such a size that after being.covered its edges will come to 
the edge of the central plate. The edge of the cover-glass is leaned 
against the chamber wall and slowly low ered until it comes in contact 
with the drop of blood, then it is allowed to drop quickly and is 
pressed gently on the walls of the chamber. The cover-glass is only 
to be handled with forceps. The preparation is now allowed to rest 
for a few moments so that the blood-cells can settle, and is then placed 
on the microscope and examined with a power of 30 to 70 to see— 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE. 


Fic. 5. Thoma’s blood-cell counter. Fic. 7. Thoma’s Frog-plates. 
Fic. 6. Field of Thoma’s blood-cell counter. Fic. 8. Inflation canulz, 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


242 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY | November, 


1. That the cells are evenly distributed through the film. 

That no air-bubbles or foreign matter is enclosed in the film. 

If these conditions are fulfilled, the counting is to be made with a 
power of two hundred. The counting is to be made in a systematic 
manner. 

The surface of one of the squares equals 1-400 of a square millimetre ; 
the thickness of the film of blood is 1-10 of a millimetre; therefore, the 
cubic contents of one of the squares is 1-400 & I-10 = I-4000 of a cubic 
millimetre. If the dilution of the blood be represented by the propor- 
tion 1: a, and if in z squares there be found z cells, then, as the cubic 
contents of a square equals 009 of a cubic millimetre, the cubic con- 


tents of 2 squares equals ——__ of a cubic millimetre; one cubic milli- 
oa 


; , . 4000Z - an 
metre of diluted blood will contain 42° cells, and a cubic millimetre 
n 


of undiluted blood eeee cells. 

Having found in a dilution of blood of 1 to 200, 1215 cells in 150 
4000 X 200 X 1215 
150 

millimetre of undiluted blood. 

For counting the white cells a dilution of the blood in the proportion 
of 1:10 is used, and a 3% solution of hydric acetate employed for dilut- 
ing in place of the 3% solution of sodium chloride. This solution de- 
str oys the red cells, leaving the white cells unaltered. The method of 
counting is the same as for the red cells. 

Circulation of the Blood.—For studying the circulation of the 
blood the frog is the animal most commonly ecu In order that the 
animal shall ie perfectly quiet during the observation it is paraly zed 
with curara. A slight nick is made in the skin over the posterior por- 
tion of the head with a pair of scissors, and two or three drops of an 
aqueous solution of curara, I to 1200, are then injected into the dorsal 
lymph sac by means of a slender glass pipette introduced through the 
above nick. The exact amount of the solution to be used depends upon 
the quality of the curara and the size of the frog, and can only be de- 
termined by experiment. As a general rule, it is better to administer 
small doses at intervals of an hour until the animal becomes paralyzed. 
The action of the curara is to suspend all voluntary motion, while the 
vegetative functions continue, the necessary amount of oxygen being 
supplied by the cutaneous respiration. 

On account of the thickness of the web of the frog’s foot and of the 
presence of numerous pigmented connective tissue-cells, this portion of 
the animal has been abandoned for viewing the circulation, and in its 
place we make use of the thin mesentery, bladder, or lung. 

An improvement has also been made on the old-fashioned frog plates. 
The most convenient forms now in use are those devised by Prof. Thoma 
of Dorpat, which are shown in Fig. 7. The centre plate is for the tongue ; 
that on the left for the mesentery ; ; that on the right for the bladder 
and lung. These plates consist of a bed- -plate, @, of sheet brass, covered 
with a thin sheet of hard rubber. At B is an opening, which in the 
tongue-plate is rectangular, in the others, circular. These openings 
are covered with pieces of thick white glass, on which the organ to be 


squares we have = 6,480,000 red cells in a cubic 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 243 


examined is placed. At a short distance from this glass plate runs the 
brass rim, c, c, c, seven millimetres high, which, by a proper inclina- 
tion, conveys the irrigating fluid as it Alone off the organ to the tubes, 
ad, a to which are atiached rubber tubes leading to a Feel for receiv- 
ing he waste fluid. The supports, ¢, are faa holding the irrigating 
canule, ¢ g. They are pivoted to the plate. and move around a perpen- 
dicular axis. To the upper end is attached a short brass tube, split 
along its upper surface, which is tightened by a small thumb-screw. 
This: is connected with the support by a hinged joint, allowing it to 
move on a horizontal axis. In this tube is placed the irrigating Sale 
g. One end of these canule is drawn out into capillary Pipes and 
various curves given them in order to meet the requirements of the vari- 
ous organs used. The tongue and mesentery plates are provided with 
two of the above- eccrine supports. This is to allow of the use of 
two canule, one for irrigating the under and the other the upper sur- 
face of the organ. Ateisa ‘perpendicular rod for supporting the ring 
for holding the cover-glass. At each side of the plates [in the tongue- 
plate it is at the end] is a notched support, £, for holding the rubber 
tube attached to the canulz introduced into the various organs for infla- 
tion, etc. Between the rim, c, c, c, and the glass plate, B, bits of cork 
are wedged for pinning out the organs. 

For examining the circulation in the mesentery, male frogs are to be 
used so that the examiner may not be embarrassed with the ovaries. 
An incision is made through the skin on the side of the animal, from 
the pelvis nearly to the axilla. After all hemorrhage has ceased, the 
abdominal cavity is opened into by an incision fone 10 to 20 muliiaaes 
tres in length. The animal is then placed on the frog-plate, and a coil 
of intestine is carefully drawn out with a pair of forceps over the glass 
plate so that it will fall upon the bits of cork, to which it is pinned, leay- 
ing the mesentery spread out on the glass plate. 

The bladder requires care in its preparation on account of the thin- 
ness of its wall. <A glass canula, B, Fig. 8, is filled with a 3% solution 
of sodium chloride, and the rubber tube attached to the straight end 
is closed by inserting a bit of glass rod. The canula is now inserted 
into the cloaca, and the curved ‘end directed forward into the bladder ; 
it is held in place by a thread passed through the skin over the sacrum 
and tied around the canula. An incision, similar to that for the mes- 
entery, is made in the side of the animal. The glass rod is removed 
from the end of the rubber tube, the latter raised slightly, so as the 
fluid will flow into the bladder, distending it. The animal is now 
placed on the frog-plate, and by gentle manipulation with the handle 
of a scalpel the bladder is brought upon the glass plate and further 
distended if necessary; the glass ‘tod is now replaced i in the end of the 
rubber tube and the latter fixed in the support, &, Fig. 7. 

The lung is prepared for examination by inserting the canula, A, 
Fig. 8, into the glottis of the frog. It is held in position by a thread 
passed through fhe skin of the nose and tied around the constriction 
of the corse An incision carried well into the axilla is made through 
the skin on the side of the animal, care being taken not to wound any 
of the large vessels. The thoracic cavity is then opened by an incision 
carried well down the side of the animal. The animal is now placed 
on the frog-plate and the lung distended by gently blowing through the 


244 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ November, 


rubber tube and the inserting a bit of grass rod into its end to prevent 
the escape of the air. Then ‘by gentle manipulation the distended lung 
is brought upon the plate, B, Fig. Te. ive nine: containing a cover- 
glass is- ‘then carefully lowered on ‘the lung so as to produce a flat sur- 
face 
The frog-plate containing the animal prepared by one of the above 
methods is then placed 
on the stage of the mi- 
croscope. Sometimes 
itis found upon exami- 
nation that a stasis has 
occurred in the blood 
current. This may be 
due to the shock of the 
operation or it may be 
caused by the abdomi- 
nal walls compressing 
the organ. If this trou- 
ble be due to the first 
cause the circulation 
will soon be 1enewed ; 
if to the latter, which 
may be determined 
after a lapse of a few 
minutes, it must be re- 
moved by enlarging 
the abdominal wound 
so as to relieve the 
pressure. 
If the time of the 
observation is to be 
Fic. 9.—Frog-plate and Irrigating Apparatus. short, fifteen to twenty 
minutes, it will only 
be necessary to wet the exposed organ, from time to time, with 
normal salt solution. If this time is exceeded, then the animal is 
to be covered with a piece of filter-paper wet with the salt solution 
and the organ is irrigated with the same solution. The apparatus for 
irrigation is shown in Fig. 9. It consists of a litre bottle attached to a 
ring-stand, the bottle being about half filled with normal salt solution 
inne its mouth closed with a rubber cork through which two glass tubes 
pass. To the curved tube is attached a long piece of aul nee tubing, 
which is connected with the irrigating weeatlen ipo ig ype ie wsuie aight 
tube is for regulating the pressure in “the bottle, which m: iy be \ aried 
by raising or lowering the tube. The flow of the irrigating fluid from 
the end of the canula hone be by drops at short antece alee and is reg- 
ulated by the pressure in the bottle, the size of the opening in the points 
of the canula, and if necess: ry by a screw clip placed on the rubber 
supply tube, the screw clip allowing the lumen of the tube to be reg- 
ulated at will. By the use of this apparatus observations may be con- 
tinued for hours if the animal is kept paralyzed by the administration 
of fresh doses of the curara. 


Prof. Thoma has also devised a piece of apparatus for studying the 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 245 


circulation in the mesentery of warm-blooded animals. This apparatus 
is shown in Fig. to. It consists of a stout iron stand, with a wooden 
top 10 194 inches, which forms the stage. The standard of the micro- 
scope is fitted to the frame and is pels by a pin which enables one to 
remove it when necessary. On the wooden base- plate is a section of 
wood of the same size as the lower one. It is unattached. and can be 
moved about as desired. To maintain an approximate equilibrium, a 
cord and weight are attached to the front corners, the cords passing 


Fic, 10.—Thoma’s Apparatus for Studying the Circulation in the Mesentery of 
Warm-blooded Animals. 


over pullies fastened to the lower plate. The lower plate has a horse- 
shoe opening and the upper a circular opening just below the body 
tube of the microscope. Over the ESTE in the upper plate is fixed the 
hot stage. This is a brass box 44x24 X1 inches with a circular open- 
ing for ‘illumination, closed at the top and bottom by glass plates. Water 
at nthe proper temperature is conveyed into the poe by the tube on the 
left, the waste being conveyed away by the tube on the right. A small 
50k on the right OF the box allows the escz ape of air bubbles. The ir- 
rigating canula is supported by rod and clamp so arranged that the 
stre eam “of fluid can be directed on the object. The stage having an in- 
clination of 20° the waste fluid flows to the back of he stage and is 
directed toward the two ‘‘ sewer tubes” by the raised ledge. ior heat- 
ing the water supply to the hot-stage the apparatus descr ibed by Schafer 
may be used. 


King’s Cements.—These cements and finishes are having an ex- 
tensive sale, and are universally acceptable because they honestly answer 
all the purposes for which microscopical cements are needed. The red 


246 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY __ [November, 


‘¢ Lac. Cell and Finish” is especially adapted to deep cells, and the 
Transparent Cements and Zinc White to thin ones, as well as to finish- 
ing. It is no objection to them that they make very neat and hand- 
some work. Dr. King will be glad to send sample bottles post free on 
receipt of advertised prices. 


The Examination of Nostoe. 
By H. N. CONSER, 


NEW BERLIN, PA. 


With the pond ooze collected in the search for desmids, one fre- 
quently, and almost certainly at this season, finds small, bright green 
gelatinous masses of a millimetre or less in diameter. This is a ‘plant 
which is worthy of examination. Placing one of these on a slide and 
examining with low power, it appears to be a capsule of jelly filled 
with enone green threads. This capsule is relatively thick and of con- 
siderable firmness. so that it needs to be picked apart ‘with needles before 
the mass can be spread out for examination with higher power. This 
done, the threads which lie in curved and twisted forms resolve into 
beaded filaments. The cells composing these little rosaries will, on 
closer examination, be found filled with numerous fine grains, and 
many of them in a state of division. The larger cells at intervals are 
of a different kind. The protoplasm in these is homogeneous, nor are 
they capable of multiplication. These are the heterocy sts or terminal 
cells, so called hecause the filament is usually ter minated by such. It 
will be seen, too, that these heterocysts differ from the other cells in hav- 
ing thicker walls and being of yellowish brown color. Now run a 
little picric acid solution in under the cover-glass. The protoplasm 
will be fixed, and the granules become more distinct. Notice further 
the little hook on each ide of the heterocyst where it joins the line of 
vegetative cells. Having washed out the picric acid well, apply methyl- 
green, which is so useful in detecting the nuclei of vegetable cells, and 
see that all except the heterocysts are distinctly and evenly colored by it. 
A nucleus cannot here be spoken of. The nuclear substance is, how- 
ever, present, but in fine grains, evenly distributed. The division of the 
cells is such as found in other plants of like structure of cell—by con- 
striction of the cell-wall, which latter, growing as a partition between 
the two halves, separates them into two united though functionally sepa- 
rate individuals. 

The plant just considered is Moctus cintflonum, belonging, with Os- 
cillaria, to the few Schizophytes with other than bolories protoplasm. 
In this case the protoplasm is a bluish green, which gives to the order 
the name Cyanophycee. The nostocs are not without interest. This 
one often appears in great masses by sandy roadsides or garden walks 
in late autumn after a rain. Many people believe it to fall from the sky, 
being otherwise unable to account for its sudden appearance. In dry 
weather it shrinks to a brown film, but retaining its vitality expands 
with the next shower to begin anew its rapid multiplication. Other 
nostocs are interesting for their symbiotic relation to higher plants, con- 
stantly occurring in Blasia. one of the liverworts, in the Azolla coro- 
lintana, and many others. 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 247 


How to Draw Microscopic Objects. 
By W. J. SIMMONS. 


CALCUTTA, INDIA. 


Objects may be viewed under the microscope in two ways. They 
may be looked at as one looks at the colored patterns formed in a kaleid- 
oscope, or they may be observed scientifically. From an educational 
and_ practical point of view, perhaps, the surest w ay to learn how to 
observe an object as distinguished from merely ‘‘ looking ab. et. 15-10 
sit down and draw it. If this view of the matter be correct, it is ob- 
vious that the subjects dealt with in this paper lie at the very thresh- 
old of every real microscopist’s training. 

The subject of micrometric measuring should be dealt with by itself; 
the need for a knowledge of the method of ascertaining the size of min- 
ute objects—knowledge only to be acquired by actual and continued 
practice —is constantly cropping up in study and in work. Kent’s 
Manual; Leidy’s Monograph on Rhizopods ; Pritchard’s Infusoria 
(which iachades Desmids, Diatoms, and Rotifers) ; Crookshank’s Bac- 
teriology ; Wolle’s book on Algz; the Micrographic Dictionary, in- 
deed, every standard work, constantly refers to size as a special feature 
in micro-organisms. ~ Huxley’s Practical Biology repeatedly requires 
the observer to draw and measure the organisms to which his attention 
is directed. In all these facts I find justification or specially dealing 
with what, to those who are familiar with them, and know their scien- 
tific value, may seem very elementary matters, to be safely relegated to 
the private study and perseverance of individuals. 

Two or three who have discussed the point with me appear to hold 
that itis better to photograph objects than to draw them ; and undoubtedly 
for certain purposes photography is invaluable. Perhaps it will avoid 
misconceptions later on if I at once say that for myself I agree with the 
learned President of the Asiatic Society in regarding photography as 
‘+ the recording pencil of science in all its branches.” You will, how- 
ever, admit that it is indiscriminately faithful ; it perpetuates details, 
such as dirt and extraneous matters, which may well be left out of 
drawing accurate enough for all practical purposes. Photography does 
not compel you to look into and study your object, as distinguished 
from its picture, so thoroughly as you must do when you sit to draw it. 
Experience proves that, by drawing an object, one acquires a clearer 
and more lasting i impression of its details than is likely to be obtained 
by photographing it. Again, photography involves the expenditure of 
more time and more money than many can spare. You will find, too, 
as a fact, that owing to the great simplicity of the adjustments required 
for drawing, a man is far more likely to utilize his skill as a draughts- 
man than he is to employ his skill as a photographer The materials 
required for drawing occupy less space, are far less numerous, and re- 
quire less provision to be made for them than the empedimenta of the 
photo- micrographic artist; and therefore, though I do not overlook the 
advantages in these respects of the dry-plate process, the ability to draw 
your objects is a handier accomplishment when trav elling than the 
ability to photograph them. You must not infer from all. this that I 
depreciate photo-micrography ; far from it, but I consider it should run 
in double harness with drawing. It is useful to enable you or your 


248 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ November, 


engraver to correct the inaccuracies of your drawings, and to complete 
them in respect to their details; but as a discipline ‘for accurate obser- 

vation, which is the first qualification of a microscopist, photo-micro- 
eraphy is inferior to drawing, and cannot be regarded as a substitute 
for it. I would therefore urge you to endeavor. to draw as many ob- 
jects as you conveniently can, the records you will thus secure are of 
far more practical value than many wordy descriptions. 

In order to draw and measure microscopic objects, and to determine 
the magnifying power of a microscope, you need the following acces- 
sories : 

(1) A camera lucida or some form of beers T use Beale’s. 
(2) A stage micrometer, ruled to ;jjths and ;ygoths of an inch. 
Many prefer the millimetre scale divided into tooths and roooths ; and 
there is much to commend this standard, which is meeting with in- 
creasing favor amongst microscopists, and indeed generally in all 
branches of science. (3) A foot rule with a scale divided into tenths 
of an inch; (4) and a pair of fine-pointed compasses. 

The form of camera selected is not of much moment, and to some 
extent will depend on the nature of the work to be done. Objects, e. &., 
in fluids which have to be drawn with the stage in the horizontal posi- 
tion will need a vertical camera, z. e., a special form which can be 
used with the microscope in a perfectly upright position. The opti- 
cians offer several forms of this accessory. Mounted objects, however, 
and indeed many in fluids, with ordinary ¢ care and patience, are usually 
drawn with the body of the microscope laid in the horizontal. Which- 
ever form of camera you select, be prepared to persevere in its use. 
Beale’s neutral-tinted glass, which costs six or eight shillings, is a small 
disc of glass fitted in a light frame in which it is fixed at an angle of 
45 to the axis of the microscope. The principle of its constr uction is 
a simple application of the law of reflection—that the angle of inci- 
dence is equal to the angle of reflection. 

The micrometer is a slip of glass with a scale ruled on it, giving 
divisions sufficiently fine to be alate for ascertaining the very ae 
dimensions of microscopic objects. Micrometers ruled to the milli- 
metre scale are procurable. It will be sufficient if we confine ourselves 
to the English scale for rooths and 1oooths of an inch. The microm- 
eter may be laid on the stage like an ordinary object-slide, or it may 
be applied to the eye- piece, which, in the latter case, has to be specially 
adapted for its reception. I shall deal exclusively with the simpler 
stage-micrometer, which involves no alterations, and only costs 4s. 6d. 
If you know how to use this, with Beale’s neutral-tinted glass, you can 
accurately measure all the objects you see, and you can Sree: diffi- 
culty extend your accomplishments to the eye-piece micrometer and 
more expensive cameras later on. The foot rule and compasses need 
no special description. 

The method of using the accessories I have just referred to will be 
most easily learned if I put a microscope in position for drawing. The 
instrument is placed horizontally, the objective focussed, and the light 
adjusted, the latter being an operation the best results of which can 
only be acquired by practice, and in daylight; the reflector is now 
substituted for the cap, and so turned as to admit of the im: age formed 
in it being projected, if I may so term it, on the table. If the light has 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 249 


been properly adjusted you will see both the image and the point of 
your pencil, and you will have no difficulty in following the outlines of 
the object. You will find the whole process of drawing an object 
under the microscope becomes as simple as the tracing of a picture on 
a child’s transparent slate. The shading and details can be re eadily 
filled in after you have sketched all the outlines. A curious reversal] of 
the image takes place with Beale’s reflector which is shown in Sczexce- 
Gossip for 1883, p. 265. The effect of this for low powers can be 
corrected by turning the slide over on the stage. For high powers, the 
thickness of glass slides is too great, and the working distance of the 
lens too short, to admit of this device being resorted to, but by the 
time you have got to draw under high powers, you will have made 
sufficient advancement to be able to disregard the reversal of image 
which is inseparable from Beale’s camera, and which is no doubt con- 
fusing to beginners. 

Tt is scarcely necessary to say that these devices merely enable you to 
sketch rapidly, and with perfect accuracy, the relative proportions of 
an object, and to draw it to scale. A man who can draw will always 
turn out better finished sketches than a man who can’t; but however 
much individual skill and tastes may differ, the great aim in micros- 
copical drawing is, after all, simple accuracy, and this must be the 
chief study. *‘ I take it,” says a writer on the subject, ‘* that the first 
requisite of a microscopic: al drawing is exactness and truth. Beauty is 
a secondary thing.” (Sczexce- Gossth, 1884, p. 18.) ** No other branch 
of art,” says another writer, ‘‘ can be approached with a keener or 
deeper : sense of the absolute necessity of close and conscientious obser- 
vation. The fact must never be ignored that a few rapid lines from 
direct observation produced on the spur of the moment possess an in- 
terest of a most appreciable character. This acquirement is not beyond 
the capability of the meanest tyro, soon discovered and realized when 
he cultivates the habit of having a drawing block, pen, and pencil as 
adjuncts to his instrument.” (Sc Zence- Gossip, 1883, p. 266.) I would 
only add that your proficiency as a draughtsman will entirely depend 
on your own perseverance, and on continued practice. There is no 
“ royal road” to the acquirement of the art whose claims I urge on 
your attention; you must make your minds up to mount to success on 
failures beaten under foot. 

Passing on now to micrometry—the measuring of microscopic ob- 
jects—let me tell you Leeuwenhoek, the father of microscopical re research, 
worked in this branch of our subject—a proof of the early recognition 
of its importance. His micrometric scales were grains of glass-grind- 
ers’ sand, and hair from his own beard. He speaks of animalcules which 
were some thousand degrees less than a grain of such sand as he used. 
He also tells us that he had a plate of copper, with many lines engraved 
on it, dividing it into a number of small equal parts. Determining how 
many of gnese parts were covered by the diameter of a hair, he next com- 
pared the hair with the minute vessels, probably trachee, which he 
measured with the result, so he says, that the diameter of a hair was 450 
times greater than that of the vessels measured by him. Such meas- 
urements are vague ; but though our own precise methods are vastly 
in advance of Leeuwenhoek’s, we must never forget that he did a great 
deal of really good work with the inferior appliances at his disposal— 


250 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY __ [November, 


an encouragement, I take it, to all who may be in earnest, but who for 
some reason are unfavorably situated. Let us now see how work is 
done with the appliances that the development of science which has 
occurred sincé Leeuwenhoek’s age, has placed at our own disposal. 

Retaining your microscope in the horizontal position used in draw- 
ing, substitute your micrometer for the object on the stage. Focus 
your microscope till the lines on the scale show clear and sharp, and 
then project them on the paper as you would any ordinary object. If 
your sketch is on the table, you can at once determine the exact size 
of the various parts of the object delineated by projecting the magnified 
scale on the drawing. Or you may reverse the process—and it is con- 
venient to do so—by very Cc carefully drawing the divisions of the mag- 
nified scale on an ink-ruled straight line on a card, which card you 
keep, noting on it the objective and eye-piece used, and the exact tube- 
length employed, in the delineation of your magnified scale. Using 
the § same eye-piece and objective, and the same tube- length, you project 
the object itself on the card, and youcan thus measure off the dimensions 
of its various parts with perfect accuracy on your ink-drawn scale. Ir 
your micrometer is ruled with a diagonal j you can measure fractional 
parts, though this can always be deter mined with accuracy without a 
diagonal, e. g., if the diameter of a diatom is one-half of the 1.oooth 
of an inch it is equal to 1-2,000,” and so on. 

These remarks lead appropriately to the consideration of the third 
branch of my subject—how to ascertain the magnifying power of your 
microscope, for you must do this for yourself, cl not “accept off hand 
the tables os magnification given in the catalogues. To set about it, 
sketch the ;1; inch, or take your compasses and measure its image as 
you see it projected on paper, and then lay off the space so eed 
on a foot rule divided to a scale of ¢ezths of an inch. If you find the 
qiy thus magnified is exactly = 1 inch, you microscope is obviously 
magnifying 100 diameters, because the <7, of an inch is contained 100 
times in one inch; if it is equal to 2 inches your microscope is magni- 
fying 200 diameters ; if to ;8,” it is magnifying So diameters ; if to z GiE 
is magnifying 60 diameters. Briefly, ine faunioee of times the fraction 
of an Rach or metre, goes into the greatest diameter of the magnified 
image is equal to the number of Giemnerer the microscope magnifies. If 
you Saga to determine the power of your objective alone, I would refer 
you to the formula given in the last edition of Davis’s Practical Mt- 
CYOSCOpy. 

The distance at which you place your eye-piece from the paper when 
ascertaining the magnifying power ‘ofa microscope, or in drawing ob- 
jects, is sufficiently important to warrant a detailed notice. Three or 
four who have spoken to me on this subject have maintained that the 
distance should be a variable one, some urging that (1) the paper should 
be as far from the eye-piece as the eye-piece is from the stage; while 
others consider it should be (2) at such a distance as will secure. the 
projection of a field exactly equal to the visual field, or (3) of an image 
exactly equal in apparent size to the image of the object as seen w hen 
looked at thr ough the microscope. To fHiose who adopt the first view, 
which is practically identical with the third, I would point out that the 
distance between the eye-glass and the stage varies with every change 
in the eye-piece or in the tube- length ; that it is not identical in the case 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 251 


of any two microscopes, and that it is a factor to which others have no 
reference. Moreover, all who wear spectacles for ‘** long sight’? know 
that the focus, and, therefore, the distance between the eye-glass and 
the stage, depends slightly on whether the observer wears or dispenses 
with his spectacles. And I would remind those who attach special im- 
portance to the diameter of the field that this feature is dependent not 
on tube length, nor on the power of the objective, nor of the combina- 
tion of eye- -piece and objective, but simply on one particular lens in the 
ocular, vzz., on the field glass, so called because it determines the dimen- 
sions of the field. As to the apparent size of the object, I shall show 
directly on what this depends; that it is a constant for a given combi- 
nation (of eye- piece and objective) and a given tube- length ; and that 
the apparent s7ze itself bears no relation fo the distance of projection, 
z. e., to the space between eye-giass and paper. 

The desirability of having a eed rather than a varying distance as a 
standard is obvious : though the magnification of the sketch of object may 
be increased in propor fon to its distance from the eye-piece, the mag- 
nifying power of the microscope will not vary. The apparent size of 
the image depends not on the nearness or remoteness of the paper ; but, 
as in ordinary vision, it has to be measured by the angle which the 
thing seen, or image, subtends at the eye, and this angle remains con- 
stant whatever may be the distance of the paper. To give a concrete 
example. Using an Economic $-inch on my ‘* Star” stand, the Ce 
tube closed, and the A eye-piece at three feet from the table, the ;1, 
inch is projected by Beale’s reflector to an extent which measures so 
nearly 3” that we may fix it at 3”; at 2 feet it occupies a space of 2 
at 1 foot of 1’; at 10 of a trifle over ;8,’; at 6” of half an inch; at 3” of 
one-quarter of an inch. You will already see a law underlying these 
measurements with which we need not trouble ourselves in a practical 
paper; though I shall show you directly how to apply it for enlarging 
and reducing, ewan. At the surface of the reflector itself, the pro- 
jected image of ;}, ”— indeed every object viewed—as may be shown by 
diagram, almost occupies the immeasurable space of a mere vanishing 
point, be the power of the objective what it may. During all these 
variations of distance the apparent size of the magnified vk remains 
the same. Why? Because the angle it eFuende, at the eye does not 
vary, though you may vary the distance of projection. It is obvious 
from this that it is necessary to fix on a standard distance, which will 
be of practical value to observers all the world over; it is equally ob- 
vious that the varying standards we have discussed in the preceding 
paragraph may safely be rejected. The question is, what standard 
should be substituted for them? Ten inches has been adopted in pref- 
erence to any more arbitrary distance, by analogy to the average focal 
length of the human eye, which is ten inches. This standard of Aietance 
is preferable in practical microscopy to any variable standard dependent 
on the sight of the individual observer; or the distance at a given time 
of the eye-glass of a given ocular, from the stage of a given micro- 
scope; or the field-determining power of a given field-glass. 

If, however, you desire for any reason to use varying standards of 
height, then you ought in every case to draw a micrometric scale along- 
side of each object 1 you sketch, projecting that scale carefully for ae 


252 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ November, 


observation. It is sometimes desirable to use a long standard distance, 
e. g., in drawing objects under the microscope for “illustrating a paper 
or a lecture. Another instance in which you may with advantage 
place your ocular about two feet above the table is in measuring mi- 
nute objects, such as blood corpuscles, or the cells of the yeast-plant, 
with a 1-6” objective, or one of Zeiss’s bD’s. Here, by projecting a large 
image, you can obtain more reliable average measurements than if the 
sandr of 10” were adhered to. You may, on the other hand, wish to 
have your sketch on a smaller scale than is to be secured by drawings 
at the standard distance of ro inches. Small sketches are Seta: 
desirable in publishing illustrations. All you have to do is to bring 
your eye-piece nearer to your paper until you attain the required 
dimensions. You can in this way apply the law I referred to, and 
make your sketches exactly double or treble, or exactly half or a quar- 
ter of the size secured at the standard distance. An engraver can, of 
course, enlarge or reduce a drawing, but by adopting ihe methods I 
describe, you ‘aol all errors in proportion of parts which might be in- 
troduced in an enlarged or reduced sketch, for you draw diene from 
the object itself. The inconvenience of being always able to secure 
the precise distance of 10” is easily disposed of by getting a stand, 
which will cost you only a few annas, and last forever. Cut a cube 
of teak, or other heav y wood, toa height which, added to the distance of 
the centre of your eye-glass from the table when the tube is placed in 
the horizontal position “used in drawing, will give a total of ten inches 
from eye-piece to paper. It would be a move in the right direction if 
microscope makers put their instruments up in cases ine could be 
utilized as stands for securing the 1o-inch distance in drawing and 
micrometry. You will find the block I have described come in handily 
for many purposes when you have it made; one that I have, ObmA 
special pattern, does duty for a drawing stand, a dissecting microscope, 
and an apparatus for hardening balsam in balsam mounts. Moreover, 
by always having such a block beside you, you will make more 
measurements and draw more of your objects than you would if you 
had to find the standard height for each sitting. 

You will find it Speer to make a Mole giving the magnifying 
power of each of your objectives with each ocular. “and for different 
fixed tube-lengths. You are thus enabled, without constantly referring 
to the micrometer, to specify (as you always should) the magnifying 
power employed in your different sketches; it should be noted beside 
the sketch thus, X 150, which means that the sketch has been drawn 
with a power of 150 diameters. In this connection I may tell you that 
in noting or speaking of the magnifying power of a microscope you 
should ale ays refer to the zumber of diameters it magnifies. More 
meaning is conveyed when you say a microscope magnifies 100 diame- 
ters whore when you vaguely say it magnifies 10,000 times. You can- 
not expect people to w ork out sums in square root whenever you tell 
them your microscope magnifies so many times. 

Again, there are two terms in microscopy which should be carefully 
dean in our own minds, and which should be carefully employed : T 
refer to the terms magnification, or amplification, and magnifying 
power. By magnification, or amplification, is meant the relation be- 
tween the real size of an object and of its image when projected by any 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 253 


form of camera, placed at any distance from the table. By magnzfy- 
ing power is meant that special degree of magnification, and no other, 
mich i is secured when the camera is placed at the standard distance of 
ten inches from the paper. If the term ‘* magnifyi ing power ” be thus 
restricted in its use there can be no doubt as to what is meant when it 
is employed, and therefore no room for discussion on the subject. 

Let me urge you to draw all your objects, at any rate all those whose 
beauty or novelty may strike you. T he illustrations thus made often 
help you to identify an object long after it is drawn, and to keep a re- 
liable record of your work. You will find it useful to make a short 
note of the locality and date from and on which your object was ob- 
tained. ‘There is a freshness and accuracy in such memoranda which 
compensate for the little additional trouble incidental to making them. 
_ As an auxiliary to work I am convinced that ‘‘the pencil is being un- 
wisely neglected ;” and when the relative advantages of drawing vs. 
photograph are dispassionately compared, every microscopist will ad- 
mit that, for the busy worker, the sketch on paper is, after all, in the 
present state of development of photo-micrography, the more conven- 
ient and the more economical of the two. Moreover, the most service- 
able field for photography lies at the extremes of the table of amplifica- 
tion, with very low (20 to 70 diam.) and with very high powers (500 to 
1,500 diam.), and the field for general work except on special subjects, 
lies in powers ranging from, say, 100 to 450, diameters. 

As the references to the subjects treated in this paper are widely 
scattered, I subjoin a list of a few articles culled from the journals to 
which I fone had access, and from which I have derived assistance, as 
well in actual work as in the preparation of this paper. I omit such 
treatises as Sea on The AMficroscope, Beale’s How to work with 
the Microscope, Davis’ Practical Microscopy, Hogg’s popular book, 
etc., because, though they all contain valuable infor mation on the sub- 
ject, they are re eadily available to most of us. 

(1) American Monthly Microscopical Journal : Vol. 11,75, 17 
Mizsei 8 Vi, 21, 207; VIII, 215; 1X, 103, 106. 

(2) Sczence Gossip: V7 Ole Tp. Lis Vi Opa Wi, 220 nl Es 
Boe lotsa; XVIII, 1, 29, 49, 74,97, 230; XIX, 66, 193, 265 ; 
Por At. KNIT, 163. 


On 


Uses of the Microscope in .Medicine.* 
By W. D. BIDWELL, M. D., 


LEAVENWORTH, KANSAS. 

It is only within the past few years that the microscope has formed a 
part of a physician’s armamentarium, and even now a large proportion 
are without it and unaware of the many purposes for which it may be 
employed. We may therefore run over briefly what may be accom- 
plished over and above the results of former microscopic work by the 
use of the instrument. To give methods of preparation of the various 
substances here mentioned, or even to describe their appearances, would 
occupy too much space in this article. 

With the microscope we are able to count the number of corpuscles 
in a given quantity of blood, and determine the proportion: of red to 


* Read before the Leavenworth Microscopical Society, Aug. 20, 1889. 


254 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ November, 


white, and while the value of such information is not fully determined, 
yet it is generally conceded that the red globules are in excess where 
the circulation is retarded, whereas their number is decreased in pro- 
longed fevers, in cachectic conditions generally, and after hemorrhages. 
Their size, also, is subject to ene variation, being increased in 
chlorosis while in cancer it is diminished. The white corpuscles are 
relatively increased in number after hemorrhages and in diseased pro- 
cesses of the lymph glands. 

The parasites of the blood are not often sought for in general prac- 
tice, but in certain cases the bacilli of anthrax, and of malaria, the 
filaria sanguinis hominis, and the spirillum of relapsing fever may be 
observed. 

Cften it is only by the microscope revealing bone-cells in pus that it 
is possible to decide whether an abscess is connected with bone or not. 
Glycerine or a weak solution of potash will clear up the pus for such 
examination. Epithelial cells from the kidneys or urinary passages 
may indicate the source of pus from a sinus, or the connection of a fis- 
tulous opening with the stomach or intestine may be shown by the 
character of the cells or by food mixed with pus. Echinococcus cysts 
may be diagnosed from the presence of hooklets, suckers, or other por- 
tions of the parasite mixed with pus. 

Actinomycosis is detected by discovering portions of the fungus in 
scrapings from the surface of a suspected growth. 

Differential diagnoses as to the nature of abscesses can also be made, 
the micrococcus pyogenes tenuis indicating benign abscesses, and the 
streptococcus pyogenes indicating slow inflammatory processes affect- 
ing the lymphatics, while in cases of rapid suppuration the staphylo- 
coccus predominates. It has been hoped that microscopic examination 
would detect a micro-organism peculiar to diphtheria, but so far the 
appearance of croupous and diphtheritic patches is identical. 

From the examination of sputum assistance is obtained in the diag- 
nosis of tuberculosis, catarrhal, or suppurative conditions of the lungs, 
thrush (oidicum albicans), actinomycosis, and other diseases. Hemor- 
rhages of the stomach, cancer of this organ, and dyspepsia, also exhibit 
their individual Sincere ies to the microscopist. 

In the faeces we may find almost any animal or vegetable substance, 
and it is only by a preponderance of one over others that much informa- 
tion can be derived from this source. The presence of mucus in the 
discharges suggests a diseased condition, but does not help in differen- 
tiating tales & it occurs with blood, as in dysentery, or in casts of the 
intestines, as in pseudo- -membranous enteritis. Ova of the various 
parasites inhabiting the intestines are frequently found in passages from 
the bowels. 

In the substance of the muscles may be found the trichine spirales, 
while on the surface of the skin the microscope enables us to study the 
acarus scabiei or itch insect, showing that the itching is due to the young 
parasites, often numbering as high as forty in a single burrow, as they 
follow the crevices in pe skin, till finally they perforate it. Herpes 
tonsurans is shown to be due to a fungus growth, as is also sycosis and 
favus. 

But it is when we come to urinary examination that we approach the 
most frequent use of the microscope in clinical medicine. The pres- 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 255 


ence of epithelium, blood, casts, and crystals of varying shape and 
composition, enables us to decide between a healthy condition of the 
kidneys, bladder, and urethra, and the various forms of imflammation 
to which they are subject. It would be tedious and a useless repetition 
to mention here the character of urinary sediments in acute and chronic 
Bright’s disease. in cystitis, gonorrhea, calculus, spermatorrha@a, and 
the like, but the value attaching to these examinations is made evident 
by the requirement of all first- -class insurance companies that micro- 
scopical examination be made of the urine in every application for in- 
surance for a large amount or where there is any reason for suspecting 
disease of the urinary or generative organs. 

With all the uses to which the microscope is now put, we are but in 
the infancy of its employment. The thousands of experiments that are 
being made relative to cholera, yellow fever, typhoid fever, and many 
other diseases, will necessarily result in better means of diagnosis and 
treatment, aa the microscope, the great instrument of precision, will 
eventually be more valuable to and more universally employ ed by the 
medical profession than any other instrument in his equipment. 


MEDICAL MICROSCOPY.* 


Bacteria and Disease.—The following provisional table is intended 
to show the present status of bacteriological investigation with reference 
to the causation of some of the more important diseases. 

1. Diseases whose bacterial cause ts determined with comparative 
certainty : 

Anthrax, caused by Bacillus anthracis. 

Aphtha, caused by Oidium albicans. 

Cholera, caused by Comma bacillus. 

Erysipelas, caused by Streptococcus erysipelatosus. 

Gonorrhea, caused by the Gonococcus. 

Leprosy, caused by the Lepra bacillus. 

Malarial fever, caused by Bacillus malariz. 

Meningitis (Epidemic cerebro-spinal), caused by Diplococcus lan- 
ceolatus. 

Pertussis, caused by a Bacillus. 

Pneumonia, caused by Diplococcus pneumoniz. 

Purpura, caused by Monas hemorrhagica. 

Pyamia, caused by Streptococcus pyogenes. 

Relapsing fever, caused by a Spirilla. 

Tetanus, caused by a ** pin-head” Bacillus. 

Tuberculosis, caused by the tubercle Bacillus. 

Typhoid fever, caused by Bacillus typhosus. 

Typhus fever, caused by a Bacillus. 

Diseases probably bacterial, but whose exciting cause has not 
been certainly determined: 

Carcinoma, Dengue, Diphtheria, Dysentery, Gangrene, Glanders, 
Measles, Parotitis, Rabies, Rheumatism, R6theln, Scarlatina, Syphilis, 
Yellow Fever. 


* This department is conducted by F. Blanchard, M. D. 


256 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ November, 


It is probable that all catarrhal diseases, such as Bronchitis, Conjunc- 
tivitis, Diarrhaea, etc., are of bacterial origin, and that various bacteria 
are engaged as causative factors in different varieties of these several 
diseases. These have been isolated with varying degrees of certainty. 

With regard to Diphtheria, it is probable that two or more diseases 
are included under this name, and that more than one bacterium is ca- 
pable of inducing the formation of pseudo-membrane. 

oO 

A Hitherto Undescribed Disease of the Ovary.—The leading 
article in the Mew York Medical Journal for September 28, 188g, is 
from the pen of Dr. Mary A. Dixon Jones, of Brooklyn. Therein she 
describes a disease of the ovary, thus far unrecognized by morbid his- 
tologists. This disease, or tumour, can hardly be said to have an 
established name. In the title of the paper it is spoken of as ** En- 
dothelioma, changing to Angeioma and Hematoma.” 

The name Kirsoma has been proposed on account of the peculiar 
convolutions that are manifested. She gives the clinical history of 
twelve cases in which she removed the ovaries on account of this dis- 
ease, the diagnosis having been confirmed by subsequent microscopic 
examination. These cases all were operated upon, mainly at the 
Woman’s Hospital, in Brooklyn, during 1887 and 1888. It would 
seem, therefore, that the disease is not wae dene: but has hitherto 
been called by other names—alveolar sarcoma, for example. 

The sy mptoms of the disease are :—a special Ad characteristic pain in 
the region of the ovaries, at times severe, sharp, and lancinating; a 
peculiar pale or cachectic look, like the pallor of the consumptive ; and 
marked emaciation. The symptoms are so marked that a diagnosis 
can usually be made with confidence. 

Ster ility is an almost invariable result, from the fact that the neoplasm 
usually encroaches upon and destroys the ova, and, indeed, in time the 
whole normal structure of the ovary. 

The cachexia developed is compared to that of carcinoma, and the 
author suggests that the growth may be malignant. 

Microscopical sections of an ovary affected with this disease, sub- 
mitted to Prudden, of New York, and to Waldeyer, of Berlin, were 
pronounced carcinoma. 

But the author asserts that the growth is ‘* a xew formation of blood- 
vessels and blood-corpuscles.” 

If we understand rightly her theory of the morbid change, it is as 
follows :—beginning in the walls of menstrual follicles, there is a retro- 
grade metamor phosis of connective tissue elements whereby they take on 
aiein embryonal condition, causing the reappearance of medullary 
corpuscles—the bodies described by Theodore Schwann, in 1839, as 
blood cells, and by C. Heitzman, in 1872, as hematoblasts. These 
corpuscles rapidly proliferate, and may destroy and occupy the place 
of all the normal structures of the ovary, the medullary corpuscles be- 
coming blood- -corpuscles, and these, by fusion of their hamatoblastic 
substance, forming the walls of new blood-vessels. 

There is no apparent augmentation of the volume of the diseased 
ovary. Sometimes it is really diminished in size. 

The paper is illustrated by ten well-drawn cuts showing sections of 
‘* endotheliomata ” at various stages, magnified < 25, 100, 300, and 
600. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 257 
BIOLOGICAL NOTES.* 


The Bacillus of Glanders is destroyed by an exposure for five 
minutes to a five per cent. solution of carbolic acid or a + per cent. 
solution of corrosive sublimate. Every article used around horses hay- 
ing the disease should be disinfected with one of these germicides or 
exposed to boiling water or steam at a temperature of 212° F. for halt 
an hour. 

Home Health.—While the death of thousands all over the land 
from typhoid fever is fresh in the minds of those who are spared, why 
not take measures to abolish the closets and filth-pools around our 
country and village homes, substituting for them hygienic earth-closets 
and disinfected cesspools, which can he made by any one ‘** handy with 
tools” at a trifling expense, and thus save the lives of thousands an- 
other summer. 

Typhus bacilli in water.— Several cases of typhoid fever have re- 
cently occurred in a town in the province of Baden, Germany, and it 
came to light that three of the patients first affected procured their 
drinking water from the same well. The water was then examined, 
the strictest precautions being used to prevent infection from other 
sources. In three days the cultures were found to have developed, on 
an average, one hundred and forty thousand colonies to the cubic cen- 
timetre. Ten tests had been made, but only in one of these was there 
found a single colony of typhoid bacilli. 

Purity of Wells.—Dr. Carl Fronikel has undertaken to test the 
comparative purity of tube-wells and the ordinary or open wells. He 
reports in Zeztschrift fiir Higtene, as the result of his experiments, 
that tube-wells are almost entirely free from such organisms as come 
from surface impurities, but that certain micro-organisms are found to 
grow upon the surface of the tubes. The destruction of these organ- 
isms can be secured by brushing the inside of the tubes and immedi- 
ately pumping out the disturbed water or by use of a concentrated so- 
lution of carbolic acid and sulphuric acid for a day or two, followed by 
a thorough pumping of the well before the water is used. The ordi- 
nary well is much more liable to contamination from sources of impu- 
rity, and disinfection is impossible. This shows the great advantage 
of tube-wells over the ordinary sort for purposes of drink supply. 

Dr. Brown-Sequard’s new discovery.—The newspaper reports 
of the interesting and important discovery of Dir. Brown-Sequard are 
at once amusing and exasperating. One would suppose that he had 
‘discovered a substance which he has called and believes to be a veri- 
table ‘* elixir of life,’ whereas this is not the case, this name and idea 
both being the fictions of the reporters. What he claims to have dis- 
covered is that when the fluid expressed from certain glands of young 
animals is injected into the blood of men who have become worn out 
from age or other causes they had their vigor suddenly and greatly in- 
creased, These results have been confirmed also by M. Variot. And 
now some ignoramus tries the experiment in a crude way upon some 
crank who is foolish enough to ask it. Death is the result, and Dr. 
Brown-Sequard is berated for it all. Notwithstanding the crimi- 
nal dabbling on the part of tyros, this promises to be one of the most 
interesting biological discoveries of this marvellous age. 


* This department is conducted by Prof. J]. H. Pillsbury. 


258 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ November, 


English Approval.— Nature, for July 18, has a very complimen- 
tary notice of the organization and work of the Marine Biological 
Laboratory at Woods Holl, in which American biologists are cordially 
congratulated upon the inauguration of so ideal a scheme as this is con- 
sidered to be. 

Nucleus Division.—Mr. Douglas H. Campbell contributes to the 
Botanical Gazette for Augusta brief article describing an easy method 
of observing this interesting process in the pollen mother cells of Ad/zwm 
canadenseand Podophyllum peltatum. ** Young buds must be used, in 
Allium about 2 mm. inlength; in Podophyllum, buds were gathered as 
soon as the plants appeared above ground. In the former case the young 
anthers were crushed carefully in a drop of acetic acid and water (3 acetic 
acid and 34 distilled water). With Podophyllum, cross-sections of the 
whole bud were made, and the sections of the anthers teased out in the 
same solution as in the case of the Allium. The pollen mother cells 
are at once recognizable by their thick colorless walls, and it is easy to 
tell with a low power whether or not the desired division stages are 
present. If this is the case they may be stained with acetic methyl- 
green, or, better, gentian-violet. In preparing the latter the best results 
were had by first mixing two parts of distilled water and one of acetic 
acid. To this mixture a sufficient quantity of saturated alcoholic solu- 
tion of gentian-violet is added to give it adeep violet color. Ifa small 
drop of this mixture is now added to the preparation containing the 
pollen cells, the nuclei will be almost instantly colored a deep blue- 
purple, while the protoplasm remains colorless and uncontracted. The 
coloring fluid may now be carefully removed with blotting-paper, 
* * * and the preparation mounted in dilute glycerine, which must 
be added very gradually to prevent contraction of the protoplasm.” 

A New Yeast.—Dr. W. Zopf, of Berlin, is reported to have dis- 
covered a new species of Saccharomyces, to which he has given the 
specific name azsenzz, in honor of the distinguished botanist, Dr. 
Hansen, of the Erlangen Botanical Institute. This yeast differs from 
the common yeast S. cerevés¢e@ in that it produces oxalic acid instead 
of alcohol from the sugars of fruits, vegetables, and milk. It is said 
to produce ascospores similar to S. cerevis¢e@ but in smaller numbers. 

Artificial Silk.—Visitors at the Paris Exposition report an exhibit 
of rare interest illustrating the progressive spirit of modern invention 
and the value of scientific discovery to practical industry. This is 
nothing less than the process of making artificial silk. The process 
consists in reducing ordinary cellulose, as wood fibre or cotton, to py- 
roxyline by treating it with sulphuric and nitric acids. This product, 
dissolved in a mixture of alcohol and ether, is familiarly known as col- 
lodion. The process of manufacture of the fibre consists in forcing 
this liquid solution through very fine tubes into water, which hardens 
it at once, forming a flexible fibre. In order to render this uninflam- 
able, it is treated by a secret process, after which it is colored any color 
desired and woven into fabric. This silk is said to compare favorably 
with natural silk both in brilliancy and durability. The numerous 
diseases which have rendered silk culture so difficult will greatly in- 
crease the importance of this enterprise if it should prove practicable. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 259 
BACTERIOLOGY.* 


Kuhne’s Methylene-Blue Method of Staining Bacteria.— 
This method is especially recommended for staining bacteria in sec- 
tions of animal tissues, although it is equally applicable to cover-glass 
preparations made from fresh tissues. The usual differences in the 
method of staining cover-glass preparations and sections are to be 
observed. 

The advantages to be derived from this method are found in its be- 
ing applicable to all known forms of bacteria. It eliminates the use of 
special stains for certain micro-organisms where only their presence is 
to be demonstrated. It possesses superior powers of differentiations 
between bacteria and the tissue elements. The method as given by 
Dr. Kiihnef is essentially as follows: 

The sections which have been cut by the ordinary method (although 
Dr. Kiihne recommends the freezing microtome for this purpose) are 
transferred directly from alcohol to a watch-glass containing carbol- 
methylene-blue (1). The sections should remain in this staining fluid 
for about one-half hour. Some bacteria, such as the bacillus of leprosy, 
requiring a longer time, one to two hours. If the sections remain in 
the staining fluid for a much longer period the differentiation between 
the germs and tissue elements becomes more difficult. 

After staining for the desired length of time, the exact period of 
which will have to be determined by test experiments for the different 
germs and tissues, the sections are rinsed in clear water and then 
placed in acidulated water (2) until they become a pale blue. They 
are then washed in a weak, watery solution of carbonate of lithium 
(3) and again placed in clear water. This part of the procedure is 
very important, and to insure good results should be performed with 
much care. The time that the sections should remain in the decolor- 
izing agents varies with their thickness, histological structure, and the 
intensity of the stain, making it impossible to give any definite rule to 
be followed. The degree of decolorization can be very nearly determined 
at any moment by moving the sections about in the fluid by means of 
a glass rod. Ifthe section is very thin or if there are other reasons 
why it should take up very little of the stain a momentary immersion 
in the acidulated water is sufficient. In all cases where the staining 
process is completed the sections should have a pale blue color, for if 
darker the over-stained corpuscles and cell nuclei of the tissue would 
obscure the bacteria. In cases where it is feared that too much color 
has been removed in the acid a drop of a saturated watery solution of 
methylene-blue should be added to the lithium water. 

After the sections have remained in the water for some minutes they 
are dehydrated in absolute alcohol in which, in difficult cases, a little 
methylene-blue may be dissolved, and then transferred to a watch-glass 
containing methylene-blue aniline oil (4). The sections can be 
dehydrated in the alchohol without injury to the stained bacteria. The 
sections are now transferred to pure aniline oil, in which they are 
rinsed, and then placed in some essential oil, as turpentine, where they 


* This Department is conducted by V. A. Moore. 
+ Kiithne, Praktische Anleitung zum mikroskopischen Nachweis der Bakterien im tierischen 
Gewebe, p. 15. 


260 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY | November, 


should remain for two minutes. In order that the sections should be 
perfectly cleared they are transferred from the turpentine to xylol, from 
which they are mounted in balsam. It is recommended that the sec- 
tions should pass successively through two xylol baths in order to 
secure absolute elimination of the aniline oil. The xylol may be used 
for a considerable number of sections. 

Dr. Kiihne employs a glass rod for transferring the sections from one 
solution to another instead of the ordinary spatula or section lifter. 
The end of a small glass rod is immersed in the fluid containing the 
section, which is allowed to fold itself over the rod, and in this position 
it is lifted from the fluid. The end of the rod is then gently immersed 
in the second liquid, where the section unfolds itself from the rod and 
floats upon the surface. In this way the danger of tearing them is 
diminished and the time required for their transfer from solution to 
solution is much shortened. This is an important consideration where 
a large number of sections are to be stained. 

(7) Carbol-methylene-blue.—This is prepared by grinding in a 
mortar 1.5 grams of methylene-blue with 10 c.c. of absolute alcohol 
until disolved ; 100 c.c. of 5% carbolic acid is gradually added 
and thoroughly mixed with the alcoholic solution. The resulting 
liquid is preserved in a well-stoppered bottle until used. When 
only a small quantity is to be employed it is better to prepare 
only a half, or a quarter even, of the above quantity, as its staining 
power is diminished by long standing. It should always be /f/tered 
before using. 

(2) Weak actdulated water.—TYo 500 c.c. of distilled water add 
10 drops of nitric acid. 

(3) Lithium water.—To toc.c. of distilled water add from 6 to 
8 drops of a saturated watery solution of carbonate of lithium. The 
saturated solution may be used as a decolorizing agent in sections with 
over-stained nuclei. 

(4) Methylene-blue aniline otl.—About one-half gram of methy- 
lene-blue is ees in a mortar with toc.c. of pure e aniline oil. When 
the oil is saturated with the coloring matter the entire mass is poured 
unfiltered into a vial, where the undissolved coloring matter will settle, 
leaving the saturated supernatant oil clear. To a watch-glass of pure 
aniline oil add a few drops of the saturated methylene-blue oil until 
the degree of colorization desired is obtained. 
oS 

Kuhne’s Modification of the Koch-Ehrlich Method of Stain- 
ing Tubercle Bacilli.*—The sections of tissue containing the bacilli 
are stained for ten minutes in carbol-fuchsin (5) decolorized in a 30% 
solution of nitric acid and then washed in 60% alcohol until they have 
a rose color. From the alcohol they are transferred to a glass contain- 
ing a considerable quantity of water to remove any of the acid that 
might have remained in the section. The sections are now dehydrated 
in Pabeolute alcohol for three minutes, then placed in a solution of 
methyl-green aniline oil (6), diluted one-half with pure aniline oil, 
and allowed to remain in it for from five to ten minutes. From this 
they are placed for two minutes in some essential oil, from which they 


* Tbtd., p. 30. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 261 


are carried successively through two baths of xylol and mounted in 
balsam. The tissue elements are stained in the “‘methyl-green aniline 
oil, but the intensity of the stain cannot be determined Gael after the 
sections have passed through the essential oil and xylol. If the tissues 
are then found to be too feebly stained, they may be transferred back 
to the methyl-green aniline oil for some minutes until the desired in- 
tensity is obtained. 

By ‘this method the tissue elements are clearly differentiated from the 
sharply and delicately stained bacilli. If an after stain of methylene- 
blue is desired the sections may be transferred from the alcohol to a 
weak solution of alkaline methy lene-blue. After staining in this for - 
from five to ten minutes they are rinsed in weak, dehydrated in strong 
alcohol, cleared, and mounted in the usual way. 

(5) a echsin” 1 gram, absolute alcohol 10 c.c., 
5% solution of carbolic acid 100 c 

(6) Methylene-green aniline vil —This is prepared in the same 
manner as the methylene-blue aniline oil by substituting the methyl- 
green for the methy lene-blue. 


EDITORIAL. 


The Microscope.—Our esteemed contemporary, which, being 
nearly as old as this periodical, is doubtless known to all our readers. 
after being ably conducted for a number of years by Dr. Manton and 
others, of Detroit, has migrated to the East in search of wise men. It 
was not necessary to find but one to take charge of its columns, when 
such a manas Dr. Alfred C. Stokes is at hand. He, too, needs 
no introduction to any microscopist in the United States or Europe. 
Many times he has favored us with his contributions, and if he does not 
continue to do so we may, per haps, extract some of his writings from 
his new journal. The Doctor’s ‘* Microscopy for Beginners,” which 
was published two years ago, has had a large sale and is on our shelves 
for constant reference. The transactions ae the Trenton Natural His- 
tory Society have been greatly enriched by the Doctor’s contributions. 
He has an easy flow of language, is not disposed to conceal his knowl- 
edge from common people, and has a large sympathy for amateurs 
We welcome him most heartily and sincerely to the editorial ranks, and 
bespeak for him that kindness which the microscopical readers have 
always shown to ourselves. 

——o 

Two Energetic Microscopists.—There are two men who are 
prominent in our branch of science whose career we watch with much 
interest. Their names are Dr. W. J. Lewis, of Hartford, Conn., and 
Dr. Frank L. James, of St. Louis, ‘Mo. The former Soe been presi- 
dent of the American Society, and the latter deserves to be made presi- 
dent next year. It is rare that so young men attain such prominence, 
and it argues in this instance many years of contribution to this science, 
if their eee are spared, as we hope will be the case. 

Perhaps the above is a sufficient apology for the remarkable error we 
made in the October number, page 236 (14th line from bottom), where 
some able remarks are credited to the former, whereas they should have 
been reported as by the latter, viz: by Dr. James. Will our readers 
please note the correction? 


262 THE AMERICAN: MONTHLY | November, 
OBITUARY NOTICES. 


F. S. Newcomer, M. D., of Indianapolis, Ind., died September 
13, at Lake Bluff, Ill. Dr. Newcomer was a noble man, loved and 
respected most by those who knew him best. He was a charter mem- 
ber of the American Society of Microscopists, and also a member of 
the Roy al Microscopical Society of London. Many valuable and beau- 
tiful specimens of his handiwork have been contributed to the cause 
of science. He leaves a wife and three children. 

Benjamin Braman, of New York, died January 20, 1889, after a 
long illness. In 1879 he became a member of the New York Micro- 
scopical Society, and during 1883 and 1884 served as its president. In 
1854 and 1885 he edited its Journal. Prof. Braman paid especial at- 
tention to mental philosophy and the science of perspective, ancient 
literature, and botanical physiology, and, although performing no origi- 
nal work, he was instrumental in disseminating much valuable knowl- 
edge through the medium of his lectures. His life was pure and un- 
selfish, child-like in its reverence for matters of faith and religion, and 
presented an example which was as effective in the promotion of good 
among his fellows as were his intellectual labors successful in impart- 
ing knowledge. The Yournalof the New York Microscopical Soctety 
for July, 1889, contains an excellent likeness of Prof. Benjamin Braman. 


NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


Myers’ General History. By P. V. N. Myers, President of Belmont 
College. Ginn & Co., Boston. 8°, pp. 759. 


This book is based upon the author’s Azcéent History and Medieval 
and Modern Fit story. The difficult task which the author set for him- 
self, of compressing the fourteen hundred or more pages comprising 
the two text-books mentioned into a single volume of about seven hun- 
dred pages has been accomplished without serious impairment either 
of the interest or of the easy flow of the narration. The greatest care 
has been taken to verify every statement and to give the latest results 
of discovery and criticism. 

Most general historians have based their opening chapters upon what 
they could find in Genesis. This author has shown his ability to write 
ancient history froma scholar’s standpoint, and hence does not come to 
the Hebrews until page 63. He frankly says we do not know when 
man came into possession of the earth. The same good sense is dis- 
played all through. 

The book is designed simply for class-room use and presupposes a 
knowledge of Neg estican History. Hence the history of our own and 
sister aah ears of the western hemisphere i is omitted. The book is con- 
sequently a history of European and Eastern nations from the earliest 
to the present time. That ground is well covered, and we take no ex- 
ception to the limitation in a text-book prepared for the use above indi- 

cated. But we think the title, ‘‘ General History,” better be reserved 
for a resumé of the history of the whole world, including the Western 
continent. We hardly want to concede that a History of European 
and Eastern Nations is a ‘*‘ General History.” 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 263 


The book is provided with thirty colored maps, nearly two hundred 
sketch-maps, and woodcuts, drawn from the most authentic sources. 
The illustrations are extremely valuable. 


Elements of Histology. By E. Klein, M.D. 12mo0, 368 pp. 194 
illustrations. Lea Brothers & Co., Phila. 


During the present year a new and enlarged edition of this standard 
work has been issued, making it by far the best hand-book of histology 
extant. The constant advance in our knowledge of this science has 
permitted important additions to the volume. Some of these relate to 
the division of the nucleus, the termination of nerves in the epithelium 
and epidermis, as well as the absorption of chyle by the mucus mem- 
brane of the small intestine. Rollett’s views on the structure of striped 
muscular tissues are adopted. Nearly all the organs of the body have 
received attention, and their structure not only described but figured. 

The illustrations alone in this volume should awaken the highest en- 
thusiasm in microscopical circles. Every one of the one hundred and 
ninety-four figures is clear, distinct, properly described, and artistically 
drawn. But especial mention must be made of the new photo-micro- 
graphs taken by Mr. Andrew Pringle, and illustrative of the following 
topics: Section of the adipose layer of the skin showing fat cells (xX 
40) ; intermediate cartilage of femur of a feetus; section of medulla ob- 
longata (X 150) ; section of tooth of a guinea-pig (XxX 150); early de- 
velopment of a tooth; the tongue of a cat with blood vessels injected ; 
papilla foliata of a rabbit, showing taste buds (X 40); section through 
taste organ ; section through trachea of a foetus (X 40); net-work of 
capillary blood-vessels surrounding the alveoli of lung. 

The type is new and clean, the paper of good quality, the binding in 
a red cloth to correspond with the stained and polished edges. A good 
index closes the volume. 


Annual of the Universal Medical Sciences. Edited by Charles E. 
Sajous. F. A. Davis, publisher, Philadelphia, New York, and 
London. Five vols. S8vo. 1889. $15. 


This is the second issue of the Azzza/, the first having been pub- 
lished for the year 1888. It is essentially a report of yearly progress 
in all matters relating to medicine or sanitation throughout the world. 
The subject-matter is divided into nearly seventy departments, e each 
with its editors, corresponding editors, and collaborators. 

The work is a success. It evinces great energy and executive ability 
on the part of its projectors, and, although much might have been 
omitted, the details are fairly well worked ‘out, and the live physician 
can hardly afford to do without it, unless he already has a full list of 
medical journals. 

Under the head of Etiology of Disease, bacteriological notes, of 
course, occupy much space, the article by Ernst, of Boston, on this 
subject, being clear, rational, and valuable. He attributes recent rapid 
advancement of bacteriological- knowledge to the general use of (1) 
aniline dyes, (2) homogeneous immersion lenses and substage illumi- 
nation, and (3) solid culture media. Methods are given for preparing 
culture media, and for photographing test-tube cultures. He protests 
against the rapid methods of staining the bacillus of tuberculosis, and 


264 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. — [November. 


has a word for those who sneer at the limited ‘‘ practical” results of 
bacteriological studies. The whole essay is conservatively progressive. 

The article on Histology is by Dr. Manton, of Detroit. Some fine 
plates are reproduced from Mertsching’s Histology of the Hair and 
from Poljakoff’s ‘*‘ New Fat-forming Medium ” ; also three excellent 
drawings from Kultschitzky’s researches upon the smooth muscular 
fibres in the mucosa of small intestine. 

The chief defect in the Azzwaal, viz., the disjointed character of the 
various articles, is hardly avoidable in a compilation from so many 
sources, the reference list containing the names of 1234 periodicals, 
pamphlets, monographs, etc. The triple index is, by itself, an im- 
mense labor, occupying toi pages of the fifth volume. 


Catalogue of Microscopes and Accessories. By James W. Queen & 
Co. , Philadelphia, 8°, pp. roS8. 


This is the seventy-first edition of Catalogue B, and is well illustrated. 
The most important features are the additional kinds of Acme micro- 
scopes. There appear also many accessories of late origin, together 
with cuts of slides, unmounted objects, books, etc. It is worth a care- 
ful perusal. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


{These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof. 
FOR EXCHANGE. —Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 


WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 


WANTED.—A clean copy of Rey. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atlas of the 
Diatomacez. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous Earth from Ucah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD, Salt Lake City, Utah. 


CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 

TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of p=trified wood—Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand “ Burt’s Solar Compass” complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second- hand, ra condensers, pola: stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. N. SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 


OFFERED.—Zciss’ New Catalogue (in German) forwarded for 10 cents in stamps. 
F. J. EMMERICH & SONS, 43 Barclay St., New York City. 


WANTED.—Any works on Microscopy not already in my Library 

H. M. WHELPLEY, F. R. M. S., St. Louis, Mo. 
WANTED.—(In excnange for slides.) ‘‘ Microscopical Bulletin,’? Vol. I. No. 5, August, 1884. 
M.S. WIARD, New Britain, Conn. 


Labels in exchange for slides. EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, Ill. 
First-class Histological Slides for other good mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 
shares. S. G. SHANKS, M.D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N. Y. 


OFFERED .—Griffith & Henfry Micrographic Dictionary to be sold; also Hoggs Microscope. 
J. P. WINTINGHAM, 36 Pine St., N. Y. 


WAN lED.—A clean copy of Wolle’s Fresh-Water Algee of the United States (2 vols.) ; also good 
second-hand Grunow Camera-Lucida, and a self-centering Turn-table. 


JOS. P. THOMPSON, P. O. Box 1383, Portland, Me. 


LIGHTON’S DARK-FIELD STOP. 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY 


MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


Mio rasX:: DECEMBER, 1889. No. 12. 


All communications for this Journal, whether relating to business or to editorial 
matters, and all books, pamphlets, exchanges, etc., should be addressed to Amert- 
can Monthly Microscopical Journal, Box 630, Washington, D. C. 

European subscriptions may be sent directly to the above address accompanica 
by International Postal Order for $1.15 per annum, or they may be sent to Messrs. 
Tribner & Co., 57 Ludgate Fill, London, or to Mr. W: P. Collins, 157 Great 
Portland street, London, accompanied by the yearly price of five shillings. 


A Dark-Field Stop. 
By WILLIAM LIGHTON., 
LEAVENWORTH, KAN. 


[WITH FRONTISPIECE. | 


Dark-field illumination, when using lenses of high power, and espec- 
ially homogeneous immersion lenses, has been long desired and is at 
last accomplished. | 

After arranging the mirror so as to obtain central light and removing 
the eye-piece, on looking down the tube the mirror appears a bright 
figure in the centre of the back lens of the objective (see Fig. 1, B). 
Let the large circles (Figs. 1 to 6) represent the back lens of an oil 
immersion or dry objective of large aperture. On swinging the mirror 
from right to left its image in the lens will pass from left to right, as 
indicated in figures 2 and 3. Light from the mirror in this position is 
known as oblique light. If, when using a dry objective, the mirror is 
swung so far to the left that its image cannot be taken up by the objec- 
tive, dark-field illumination is obtained (see Fig. 4, E). 

When homogeneous-immersion objectives of large numerical aper- 
ture are used dark-field illumination by the mirror alone is impossible, 
because such lenses receive light from all points beneath the stage. 

The following method produces a dark field with the mirror in any 
position from central to extremely oblique: 

A metal frame is-used as a carrier for the dark-field stop H (Fig. 7). 
which is also of metal, and which is joined to the carrier by a fine steel 
wire, K. The carrier slides in a square nose-piece, L (Fig. 8), be- 
tween the objective and the body tube of the microscope, as shown at 
the double-dotted line N (Fig. 8). The nose-piece should have a re- 
volving fitting, as shown in the sectional view. The handle of sliding 
carrier is at I (Figs. 7 and 8). The stop H (Fig. 7) must be of the 


Copyright, 1889, by C. W. Smiley. 


266 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ December, 


same size as the tmage of the mirror tn the objective used, and is for 
the purpose of intercepting this image in the objective. M is the ob- 
jective and O is the standard screw for body-tube (Fig. 8). 

It will easily he seen that by moving the stop the image of the mirror 
can be intercepted at any point from ide centre to the extreme edge of 
the objective. The des¢ effects are obtained when the stop is placed a 
little beyond the centre, as at C (Fig. 2). 

The motions indicated can all be reversed by means of the revolving 
fitting of the nose-piece. Changes from dark field to bright, and the 
reverse, can be instantly made by sliding the carrier in its fittings. 

The effects obtained by the use of this piece of apparatus with hom- 
ogeneous-immersion lenses are very remarkable. The internal organs 
of infusoria are shown with a precision and beauty never equalled. 
Bacteria in fluids are seen as brilliant points of light. Vast numbers 
that are above and below the focus, and which could not be seen ina 
bright field, are brought into view. The trachea of mosquito larve can 
easily be traced as beautiful thread-like lines throughout their entire 
length. 

In examining statned human muscle containing trichina, and using a 
' dry objective with bright field, great care is required to see the para- 
site in its cyst, but on a "ber field produced by the use of the stop the 
worm will be seen as a brilliant coil and can be plainly traced from tip 
to tip. 


Carmine Staining for Nervous ‘Tissues. 
By GEORGE A. PIERSOL, M. D., 


PHILADE!PHIA. 


Present methods of imbedding and sectioning render staining en 
masse desirable in all cases where practicable, to which end borax- 
carmine, alum-carmine, and Delafield’s haematoxylin are our most 
reliable and valuable reagents; of these, borax-carmine is undoubtedly 
the most widely employed, and, owing to its great power of penetra- 
tion, certainty, stability, and uniformity of action, this preference is 
well deserved. Notwithstanding the admirable differentiation and 
crisp pictures obtainable by properly used borax-carmine, which for 
many cases leave little to be desired, the exhibition of the ganglion 
cells of the central nervous system is usually far from satisfactory, lit- 
tle more than the nucleus, or at best the bodies of the cells, being well 
brought out; a conspicuous example of this short-coming of ‘he ordi- 
nary carmine or haematoxylin stains is seen in the large g ganglion cells of 
the cerebellum. Any method of offering a ready means of securing 
the satisfactory display of these Slenente while staining en masse, 
must be of interest to the histologist. Now more than a year ago, my 
friend, Dr. O. Schultze, of Wirzburg, Germany, called my aticntion to 
the results of some experiments Shas he had made with sodium car- 
minate ; the beauty with which the nerve cells of all parts of the central 
nervous system were shown at once aroused my interest in the method, 
which during the past year I have further tested in the Histological 
Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania with very oratifying 
results. 


1889. ] | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 267 


Sodium carminate (carminsaures Natron) appears to have been 
introduced in the dry powdered form, in 1882, by Maschke*, of Bres- 
lau; formerly the salt was obtainable only in that city, but later it 
fanned its place on the list of Dr. G. Griibler, of Leipzig, from whom 
my recent supplies were obtained. 

The peculiarity of the method followed by Dr. Schultze consisted 
not in the employment of this particular carmine salt (for Gierke had 
used it quite extensively in his experiments), but in the avoidance of 
all washing or soaking in water or weak alcohol before staining by 
transferring the tissue dzrect/y from Miilier’s fluid into the stain, 
where it remained until sufficiently colored, when it was washed out in 
alcohol of gradually increasing strength. The uncertainty of satisfac- 
tory results, which attended Schultze’s first trials, disappeared with 
the precaution of leaving the tissue at least two months in the Miller 
before staining, a prolonged stay in the fluid doing no harm, providing 
care be taken to renew it on the appearance of turbidity. 

My own experience teaches that tissues preserved in and transferred 
directly from Erlicki’s fluid, or from ammonium bichromate, stain 
equally as well as those from the Miiller—probably any of the bichro- 
mate solutions will answer. The block of tissue to be stained is placed 
in say 20 to 25 cc. of a freshly prepared one per cent. aqueous solution 
of the sodium carbonate, and allowed to remain until deeply colored 
throughout, which, with the strength of stain indicated, and with 1 cu. 
cm. blocks of tissue, usually requires 48 hours; as the solution tends 
to decompose after a few days, the addition of a crystal of thymol is 
desirable. After staining, the tissue is washed in 70 alcohol until all 
excess of color has been discharged (18 to 24 hours), after which it is 
ready for the stronger alcohols necessary for imbedding. 

The excellent Pesuilts obtained by this use of the aan carminate 
naturally suggested the trial of the closely allied ammonia carmine 
under Sailor Reeniditions - : the latter substance Schultze found to work 
very well with Miiller’s fluid, the staining being brilliant and well 
differentiated. My use of the ammonia carmine has been, likewise, 
highly satisfactory, and additional tissues from Erlicki’s fluid are found 
to stain especially well. The solution employed is composed of car- 
mine, 2 grm.; strong aqua ammonia, 5 grm.; distilled water, 50 cc. 
The solution should be lightly covered and allowed to stand until all 
the ammonia has escaped ; ; for use it is diluted with an equal volume 
of water. The tissues are transferred directly from either the Miller 
or Erlicki into this quite strong solution, and are thoroughly stained in 
twenty-four hours; borax-carmine and alum-carmine gave failures 
under similar conditions; likewise, the results here described are not 
to be obtained when the tissue has been subjected to the prolonged 
action of water or alcohol. 

Comparison of these carmine stains shows that in general their re- 
sults are about equal; the ammonia salt stains, however, rather more 
rapidly, with better penetration, and yields the more brilliant tint. but 
gives a less crisp differentiation of axis-cylinders and cell processes than 
is seen in successful stainings with the sodium carminate. The pre- 
cipitation which sometimes takes place with the latter solution I have 
never seen with the ammonia stain. 


* Gierke: Fiirberei zu mikroskopischen Zwecken; Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaft. Mikroskopie, Bd. I 
1884. 


268 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ December, 


The noteworthy features, then, of these carmine stains for nervous 
tissues are the surpassing beauty and clearness with which the nerve 
cells—especially their processes—and axis-cylinders are shown, in ad- 
dition to which the neuroglia cells and fibres are often deeply colored. 
The merits of these stains are illustrated nowhere more strikingly than 
in sections of successfully prepared cerebellum, in which the cells of 
Purkinje with their splendid branched processes form a picture in 
telling contrast with the exhibition of these elements as usually seen in 
carmine or hematoxylin preparations. The cells of the cerebral cor- 
tex form another instance of the value of the method, the long delicate 
processes being traceable to their finest ramifications as deeply stained 
red lines on a colorless ground. 

While sections of spinal cord so stained are very beautiful, the excel- 
lence of the results obtainable by alum-hematoxylin and other dyes 
.enders the preparations by the method described less conspicuous ; the 
white matter in such specimens, however, is often especially well 
shown. The nuclei of the neuroglia cells in the cords of young sub- 
jects are especially prominent. The value of the sodium carminate 
stain in demonstrating the areas of degeneration has been established. 

Another, and by no means unimportant. merit of these stains lies in 
their especial adaptation to photography ; employed in connection with 
the green glass ray-filter described in a former number of this journal*, 
they possess that degree of actinic contrast most favorable to secure 
crisp and vigorous negatives. What the Weigert’s stain accomplishes 
for the medullated nerve fibres these carmine stainings do for the pro- 
cesses of the nerve cells and axis-cylinders; the advantages of a ready 
process of double staining uniting the merits of both are evident. The 
recently published acid- hematoxylin method of Kultschitzkyt appar- 
ently offers the means of securing such double stains, but so far my at- 
tempts to unite the two, while producing beautiful pictures, have failed 
to furnish preparations in which the features of the Weigert method 
were sufficiently pronounced ; however. subsequent experiments may 
prove more satisfactory. 

UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, Sept. 2, 1889 


Cuccati’s Soluble Carmine.— Dr. Grovarini Cuccati describes, in 
the Zectschrift fur Wissenschaftliche Mikroskopie, acarmine solu- 
tion which he usesin connection with a cold saturated solution of ammo- 
nium picrate in staining microscopical preparations. The carmine solu- 
tion is prepared by dissolvi ing 20 grains of sodium carbonate in 100 cubic 
centimetres of water, adding thereto 5 grains of Griibler’s pulverized 
carmine, mixing well, and bri inging toa boil. When ebullition has been 
effected the capule i is removed from the fire and 30 grams of absolute 
alcohol added. After cooling, the solution is filter eal and immediately 
mixed with 300 grains of w ater previously acidulated with § cubic cen- 
timetres of acetic acid, and, finally, 2 grains of chloral hydrate are 
added and dissolved in the mixture. The ammonium picrate solution 
is made by first moistening picric acid with sufficient ammonia to 
make a thin paste, and adding sufficient cold distilled water to nearly, 


but not quite, dissolve the mixture. In staining, equal parts of the two 
solutions are used.— National Dr uggist— 


=Vol. V TI, July, 1886. 
iKultschitzky U eber eine neue Methode der Hematoxylin Firbung ; Anatomisch. Anzeiger, Bd. 
T, No. 7, 1889. 


‘> 


1889. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 269 


On the Microscopical Examination of Urinary Sediment.* 
By WILLIAM BUCKINGHAM CANFIELD, M. D. 


LECTURER ON NORMAL HISTOLCGY, UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND. 


Physicians now generally recognize the fact that an examination of 
the urine forms an important part in making the diagnosis of any dis- 
ease. In many cases negative results may satisfy, as excluding certain 
diseases. It is a matter oe common occurrence that one physician not 
being successful in the treatment of a case, a consultant or another 
physician i is tried, who, carefully examining the urine, a thing which 
the first adviser fad failed to do, finds enough to throw seme ilye(ele 
light on the malady and its treatment. In urinary analy sis, an exam- 
ination both chemical and microscopical should be made in all doubtful 
cases. The former is a matter not difficult for the majority of physi- 
cians, and there are few physicians who cannot make the ordinary tests 
for albumen, sugar, etc. The microscopical examination, however, i is 
a matter not so simple. There are plenty of practitioners who cannot 
make a microscopical examination of the urinary sediment in a manner 
satisfactory to themselves. This part of the subject, although old and 
often discussed, may be repeated with advantage, even at he risk of 
uttering remarks w ell known and trite to many. 

Be as to the technique. The patient or “attendant should be im- 
pressed every time with the importance of saving clean specimens of 
urine. The bottles and vessels in which the urine is collected and pre- 
served should be scrupulously cleansed and dried. The urine obtained 
should be passed in the morning on rising and in the afternoon, so that 
two different samples may be Wexamined. This is necessary, among 
other reasons, because the urine may be free from albumen in the morn- 
ing and loaded in the afternoon. These specimens should be examined 
as soon as possible after receiving them, and in case of keeping them, 
they should be preserved in a cool place, and some such substance as 
salicylic acid may be added, which will not affect the examination. 

Difficulties present Prericclace when the urine contains very much 
or very little sediment. When very little, it is the general custom to 
let it stand for twenty-four hours in a cool place i in a conical glass, so 
that the sediment may drop to the bottom of the vessel. Sie when 
not abundant may remain suspended for a longer time in the urine, 
and owing to their lightness they may stick to the sloping sides of 
the glass and thus escape detection. Sometimes better results may be 
obtained by letting the urine stand in a cylindrical glass for twenty -four 
hours and then drawing up the bottom layer of fluid with a pipette and 
examining it. I have ‘turned the bottle upside down for one day and 
then examined the sediment which had collected on the cork, but this 
is not usually satisfactory. For the microscope it is well to have a 
thick slide with a concavity ground in it. 

When there is much sediment it is not easy to separate the import- 
ant from the unimportant matters. In this case it is better to let the 
urine stand in a cool place in a conical glass for six or twelve hours, 
and then pipette off the supernatant fluid and let that stand in a second 
glass. Casts will be found in the second glass, and in the first, pus, 
blood, epithelium, and inorganic matter. 


* Report of Section on Microscopy, Micro-Chemistry, and Spectral Analysis. 


270 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ December, 


There is a great difference between the urine of the male and female 
as regards sediment. Urine from the female generally contains large 
flakes of epithelium from the vagina, blood corpuscles, etc. This ex- 
cess of sediment may be excluded by having the urine drawn off with 
a clean catheter, or by directing the patient | to syringe out the vagina 
and genitals with warm water before urinating. 

Red blood corpuscles are of no clinical significance unless present in 
large numbers. They may occasionally be mistaken for air or oil 
elobules. Stray leucocytes are rarely absent, and are only to be con- 
sidered when they are present in large numbers, as from a cystitis or 
rupture of some abscess in the genito- urinary-renal tract. Bladder 
epithelium, and in the female, vaginal epithelium, is always present. 
Some of the bladder and vaginal Celis so strongly resemble each other 
that they at times cannot be distinguished, and indeed vaginal epithelial 
cells have been described as being present in the male urine occasion- 
ally. Again, some cells from Ape bladder so much resemble epithelium 
from the ureter or renal pelvis that I always have trouble in distinguish- 
ing them. Renal epithelium, when it has not undergone fatty or other 
degeneration, i is not difficult to recognize. 

The principal object of the microscopical examination of the urine 
is to see if casts are present or absent. Although they are found in 
some of the acute diseases, and at times without sufficient explanation, 
still their continued presence cannot fail to be alarming. They should 
be looked for whether albumen be present or not. Albumen is often 
absent at the time of the micoscropical examination, it having appeared 
at an earlier stage of the disease. Albuminuria without casts is said 
to be more common than it really is, and the majority of investigators 
agree in believing that they were present but could not be found. This 
was deduced from autopsies. In an interesting case * of cyclic or physi- 
ological albuminaria, I have never been Abies to find casts although I 
look at intervals. 

I generally draw off a little of the sediment with a pipette, and 
drop it on a hollow slide, and examine it with alow power. The 
sediment may be then seen floating about. Most books warn against 
taking up too much fluid on the slide; I find this an advantage. I 
take up a large drop on an ordinary slide, and as the fluid runs along 
the slide, an opportunity is offered to review the sediment as it passes 
by, taking care, of course, that it does not get on the stage of the 
microscope. If casts are found, then another drop may be taken, and, 
before putting on a cover-class, a small bit of broken cover-glass or a 
hair is put by the preparation and then covered. This prevents the 
casts from being crushed. I generally prefer to examine first without 
a cover-glass, because it is rarely necessary to use such a high power 
that the “objective c comes near the preparation. Some writers suggest 
that when there is much sediment to roll the cover glass backward and 
forward with two fingers. I have done that several times and suc- 
ceeded in making casts when there were none there. When a cover- 
glass is used, as ‘little liquid as possible should be taken up, and < 
this lessens the chance of finding them if few are present, it is cet 
always advisable. Staining is generally selene but if desirable, 


* See author’s article on ‘‘ Cyclic ee oe ’ in the Philadelphia Medical News, Lae 30, 1887. 


1889. | MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 271 


it is better to drop a little staining fluid in the urine, as staining under 
the cover-glass causes the sediment to fly across the field at an alarm- 
ing rate of speed and settle on the outside of the glass. This may be 
prevented by allowing the casts to dry on the ane and then staining ; 
but this is apt to change their appearance and is not advisable. The 
best way is to stain fee before the cover-glass is put on. 

‘¢ Tube casts, or urinary cylinders, forme by far the most important 
pathological constituent of urinary sediment. They are so called be- 
cause they are supposed to be moulds of the uriniferous tubules of the 
kidney. After being thus moulded, they shrink and are carried out 
with the urine. They are supposed to be formed by a coagulable sub- 
stance in the blood, or by some morbid change of the renal “epithelium. 
According to their appearance and composition, casts have received 
different names. If the mould of coagulated fibrin pass out with the 
urine without blood or cell, it is called a hyaline or waxy cast. Ac- 
cording as epithelium, blood, fat drops, or granular matter [the two 
last from degenerated epitheliu m] are adherent to the moulds of fibri in, 
the casts are called respectively SPS HEl blood, fat, or granular casts. 
These casts vary in diameter |from ,;4,5 to 4, of an inch] according 
to the part of the tubule from which they come. MHyaline casts are 
generally smaller than those to which epithelium, blood, etc., are at- 
tached. Mucous casts have also been described. Amorphous sedi- 
ment and small crystals may adhere to casts, and they also sometimes 
arrange themselves in a cylindrical form and deceive the inexperienced. 
Casts of the urates and of bacteria may be mentioned. In cleaning 
slides and cover-glasses, bits of linen threads are often left on the glass 
and may be mistaken for hyaline casts.” (Practical Notes on Urinar y 
Analysis.) Occasionally bladder or vaginal epithelium becomes rolled 
up and looks very much like casts. Tt is almost superfluous to say 
that, as the finding of casts is generally of grave significance, a deci- 
sion should not be reached by one examination, but many slides should 
be prepared. The laity soon knows the gravity of casts in the urine, 
and let a man once be rejected by a life insurance company, itisa 
serious shock to him. Therefore not without careful examination and 
consideration should a decision be made in this most important subject. 


Cement for Glass.—A thin coat of ‘* diamond cement” laid on 
each surface of the glass, pressed together and left for two days, an- 
‘ swers admirably. Melt the cement by immersing bottle in hot water, 
and put very little on—the less the better _—English Mechanic, Octo- 
ber 25, 1889. Oo 

Close Shaving.—Through a microscope, a face which has been 
treated to this process resembles a piece of raw beef. To make the 
face perfectly smooth requires not only the removal of the hair, but 
also a portion of the cuticle; and a close shave means the removal of 
a layer of skin all around. The blood-vessels thus exposed are not 
visible to the unaided eye, but under the microscope each little quiver- 
ing mouth holding a minute blood drop protests against such treat- 
ment. The nerve tips are also uncovered and the pores are left 
unprotected, which makes the skin tender and unhealthy. This sud- 
den exposure of the inner layer of the skin renders a person liable to 
have colds, hoarseness, and sore throat.—Wedical Classics 


272 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ December, 


Griffith’s Fine Adjustment. 
By E. H. GRIFFITH, 


FAIRPORT, N. Y. 


In Fig. 1 Nos. (1) (2) (3) represent the milled head, pinion-axis, 
and pinion of the ener es of coarse adjustment. The milled 
head (1) is countersunk on its inner side, and the small wheel (4) is 
made . exactly fit the countersunk space, the inner surface of (1) and 
of the wheel (4) being perfectly smooth and flat. Attached to (4) is 
the socket and pinion (7). all of which are perfectly fitted over the pin- 
ion-axis (2) between the pinion (7) and milled head (1}. A leather 
washer (5) is made to rest closely against the inner surfaces of (1) and 
(4). It is held in position by another washer of metal (6) which, by 
means of two screws passing through it and (5) is made fast to the 
milled head. A small tension wheel (10) has a screw passing through 
both washers, also binding them to (1), and when desired, locking the 
coarse-adjustment by making the whole combination practically, one 


BiGez: 


wheel. When the coarse-adjustment is used, the spindle (8) holds (7). 
(6), (5), (4), so that they cannot revolve with the pinion. When the 
micrometer adjustment is required the friction of the leather washer 
makes the whole combination practically one wheel, which is turned 
by means of the milled head (8), giving the entire range of the coarse- 
adjustment for the fine adjustment. Both adjustments are always ready 
for use when the tension wheel is properly set, except when the coarse- 
adjustment is purposely locked to prevent accidents. All wear is taken 
up by the spring. Fig. 2 shows the entire combination in position. 

In this combination of the two adjustments into one, but one groove 
is required, greatly lessening the danger of lateral motion as in other 
microscopes where two or more grooves are needed. The one groove 
being close to the tube is another safeguard. 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 273 


The long range of the fine adjustment is of great v alue, and the same 
is claimed ‘for the locking device. The meena is so simple that it 
cannot well get out of order, and should any accident happen, any jew- 
eller could easily repair it. 


Staining and Mounting Zoosperms.* 
By R. N. REYNOLDS, 


DETROIT, MICH. 


In mounting this material it is necessary first to cause the containing 
fluid to mix with water. A weak aqueous solution of bichromate of 
potash is the only drug which, without destroying the objects, will 
cause the fresh specimens to do this; but when the fresh material is 
subjected to the action of potash solution, the objects die with their 
tails coiled. To prevent this coiling let the specimen die at the ordi- 
nary temperature of the atmosphere, which will usually take about 
thirty-five hours, though the weaker ones die in five or six hours. 
When dead the specimens will be found swarming with bacteria, to 
avoid which keep them at a temperature something below that of the 
human body. Cold water preserves them while moderately hot water 
kills the greater part of them. 

When mixed with water they may be stained any desirable color; 
or by using red first, followed by green, the bodies appear red and the 
tails green. When the stains have taken effect a plug of absorbent 
cotton may be placed in the neck of a funnel, and the specimens fil- 
tered through it. If the plug be tight enough, so that the water will 
not stream but only drop, thausands of the objects will pass through, 
but tens of thousands remain in the cotton. This plug is then taken 
out and the water squeezed from it. Place a slide on the turn-table. 
dip an artist’s small brush into the fluid squeezed from the plug, and 
while the turn-table is in motion bring the point of the brush to the 
centre of the slide. A small round deposit will be left, which should 
be dried. Next with white zinc cement, make a ring about half an 
inch in diameter on the slide, allow this to dry for a “couple of days 
and then slightly moisten the ring with the same cement, lay on a 
cover-glass, and you have a permanent mount. 


Ventilating and Albino Bees.—Detection of Adulterated Honey. 
JOHN ASPINWALL, 


BARRYTOWN-ON-HUDSON, N. Y. 


Ventilating Bees.—Referring to the April number of this periodi- 
cal, page 8g, under heading, ‘+ Biological Notes,” it may be stated 
positively that bees do ventilate in every hive in America on a hot day. 
This is an old-established fact, and this is the proof: They stand near 
and in the entrance of the hive fanning, violently, and always headed 
one way, viz., inwards. ‘The hotter it. is, the more bees participate in 
_this work. They never head outward. This fanning causes quite a 
perceptible current. 


* Abstracted from The Microscope, 1886, pp. 196-7, by request. 


274 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ December, 


Detection of Adulterated Honey.—The amount of pollen contained 
and the presence of crystals is not a sure test for adulteration. Pure 
granulated honey is made up more than half of crystals. I send youa 
slide of honey not yet granulated, in which little pollen is seen but 
many crystals. This is “absolutely genuine honey, taken from the comb 
ten minutes before mounting. 

Albino Bees.—The so-called Albino hive bee has four very light- 
colored segments of abdomen, but the rest of the body is black, or a 
very dark brown, as in the ordinary Italian bee. The first queen of 
this variety was a ‘*‘ sport” from the pure Italian, and was bred by the 


Rev. H. A. King in Ohio over fifteen years ago. 
NOVEMBER 2, 1889. 


Microscopic Examination of Paper.—Mr. Herzberg, who has 
charge of the examinations of paper at Charlottenburg, has just pub- 
lished a very exhaustive work upon the subject, with numerous repro- 
ductions of microscopic preparations. He brings especially into promi- 
nence the peculiarities of certain fibres for rendering them easily dis- 
tinguished. 

The author uses a solution of iodine for recognizing the various fibres, 
which, according to their origin, assume various colors: (1) Wood- 
wool and jute are colored yellow : (2) straw, ‘* cellulose,” and alfa do 
not change; (3) cotton, flax, and hemp are colored brown. 

For disintegrating the paper Mr. Herzberg does not employ the 
processes in common use. Mechanical appliances, either needles or a 
mortar, do not remove the size, starch, and weighing substances which 
in part conceal the structure of the fibres and render the examination 
of them difficult. He recommends that a small quantity of the paper 
to be examined be submitted to ebullition for a quarter of an hour ina 
1 to 2 per cent. solution of soda. In this way the foreign substances 
are got rid of and the fibres set free. The presence of wood-wool will 
be ascertained, during the boiling, by the paper becoming yellow. 

After this treatment the whole is poured upon a brass strainer with 
fine meshes and is washed with pure water. The washed residuum is 
reduced to a homogeneous paste in a porcelain mortar. 

In the case of colored paper the coloring matter must be removed if 
the boiling does not effect the removal. To this end. hydrochloric acid, 
chloride ae lime, etc, is used according to the chemical nature of the 
coloring matter. When the paper is ‘not sized nothing but water is 
used for the boiling. If the presence of wool in the paper is suspected 
an alcoholic solution, instead of an alkaline one, is used, as the latter 
would dissolve the wool. 

The solution of iodine in iodide of potassium may be more or less 
concentrated. The color produced varies in depth according to the 
concentration. The author generally uses the following formula : 


Iodine, ; ; i : : 18 grains. 
Iodide of potassium, : f : . 30 grains. 
Water, i 5 drichiee: 


For spreading the paste upon the object- holder of ce microscope he 
employs two platinum needles. The object-holder is placed upon a 
white ground, so that the fibres will stand in relief more prominently. 
The paste is covered with a glass, and the excess of water is removed 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 275 


with blotting-paper. For the determination of the fibres a magnifying 
power of 300 diameters is best adapted, but, for ascertaining ne rela- 
tive proportion of the fibres, one of 120 diameters, that permits of tak- 
ing in a wider surface, is preferable.—- Gutenberg Fournal. 


BIOLOGICAL NOTES. 
By Prof. J. H. P1IrusBury. 
NORTHAMPTON, MASS. 

Strength of Wood.—Certain tests made at the car-shops of the 
Northern Pacific Railroad at Tacoma, Wash., show that a bar of wood 
2 x 4 inches and four feet long, resting on supports three.feet nine inches 
apart, broke under the following strains, viz. , yellow fir, six years ex- 
posed to the weather, 3,062 pounds : > new soft yellow fir of fine grain, 
3,062 pounds ; old and hard yellow fir with coarse grain, 4,320 pounds ; 
new fir from the butt of the trees, and of coarse grain, 3,635 pounds ; 
Michigan oak, 2,428 pounds. Is not this contrary to the usual repu- 
tation ‘of oak wood ? 

——o 

Annual Rings of Trees.—Prof. Hartwig is quoted as authority for 
the statement that trees cut three or four feet from the ground often 
show a larger number of rings of annual growth than when cut at the 
usual distance from the ground, the deposit of tissue failing to be made 
in the latter region. 


=== 


Grape-Vine Diseases.—The culture of the grape in Algeria, ac- 
cording to the report of the consul-general to the foreign office of the 
British government. is beset with great difficulties. Beside the phyl- 
loxera, the alise, and such parasites as oidium, anthrachosis, pereon- 
ospora, and chlorosis have caused a loss of nearly one-third of the crop. 
) 

Autumn Colors.—In addition to the chlorophyll of plants, there is 
generally present in their cells a small quantity of certain other color- 
ing matters as xanthophyll, erythrophyll (yellow and red coloring mat- 
ter), both of which are derived from chlorophyll by the chemical “forces 
of the plant, but which are in so small proportions as to be more or 
less completely covered up by the presence of the chlorophyll. If for 
any cause these are increased in quantity they give their peculiar color 
to the leaves, as is the case with foliage plants. In the normal growth 
of the plant, especially of perennial plants like our forest trees, the early 
summer is the period of rapid growth. Later in the season the cells 
formed in the early summer become hardened into wood and active 
growth ceases. At this time the portion of the chlorophyll is changed 
to xanthophyll and erythrophyll and a portion withdrawn to other parts 
of the plant. This leaves the bright colors in sole possession of the cells 
and gives the peculiar tints to the autumnal leaves. These changes are 
affected by the variations of the season. When the season is very dry 
the nutrition of the plant is interfered with and the growth ceases at an 
abnormally early date, and the colors make their appearance earlier than 
usual, but are less brilliant. Early frosts destroy the life of the leaf and 


276 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ December, 


prevent the brilliancy of the colors. A great degree of moisture seems 
also to produce ear ly changes. During the past very wet season in New 
England the leaves of maples in wet ‘rounds showed bright colors as 

early as the middle of August. A ape amount of moisture and late 
frost seem to be favorable to the greatest brilliancy of the leaves. The 
colors of flowers and fruits are due to similar changes in which other 
coloring matter of a slightly different chemical composition is produced. 
The chlorophyll of ive green flower or fruit is changed into a special 
coloring matter. This in the case of vellow flower is anthoxanthin ; 
of w nite flowers, antholeucin ; of blue flowers, anthocyanin, etc. These 
changes are produced as the fait matures or the flow er opens. Violet 
and purple tints are probably due to the action of acids in the cells upon 
their coloring matters. 

The fall of the leaves is due to the peculiar structure of the leaf pet- 
iole. A layer of rather large cells at the union of the petiole with the 
stem of the plant is deprived of some of its nourishment whereby its 
walls remain thin, and the protoplasm becomes at length dried or killed 
by frost when the cells shrivel and break, and the leaf having nothing 
to support it falls from the stem. 


Micro-photographs. 


Definition.—Micro-photographs are pictures produced by photo- 
graphing large objects or views down to size so small as to require to 
be examined under the microscope. Photo-micrographs, on the con- 
trary, are pictures of very small objects made by magnification through 
the microscope, and w hen thus enlarged may be examined with the 
naked eye. Micro-photographs are small photographs—smaller than 
the objects. Photo-micrographs are large photographs—larger than the 
objects. 

Illustration.—It is quite common to see at soirées the Lord’s Prayer 
under the microscope. The micro-photograph is mounted on a slide 
for this purpose. At the recent inauguration of President Harrison 
boys sold thousands of watch-charms consisting of micro-photographs 
of Harrison, Morton, and the White House, mounted in little iv ory 
telescopes. The deception was so fine that an intelligent friend—a col- 
lege graduate—hunted the side of a room carefully over to find the pic- 
tures on the wall towards which he had pointed the watch-charm, little 
believing that they were contained in the ;, inch aperture through which 
the light had reached his eye. 

Process.—The operations of micro-photography are thus described in 
a recent number of the Ezglish Mechanic: 

The process is simple, but it requires much practice to get good 
effects. All you have to do is either to substitute a microscope (minus 
the eye-piece) for the lens in the camera, or to make a little camera to 
suit 4-plates, divided into four, as recommended by Dr. Maddox Brown, 
and fix on a microscope instead of the eye-piece. The first method is 
most commonly adopted. The camera is fixed on a kitchen-table, the 
microscope is turned down to a horizontal position, the joining of the 
eye-piece end of the microscope to the camera must be perfectly light- 
tight. Use a large condenser to throw the light of a paraffin lamp ata 
proper angle through the object to be photographed, and through the 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 277 


object-glass of the microscope on to the focusing screw (and subse- 
quently the dry-plate) in the camera. For high- -power work a sub- 
stage condenser will be required, but at first a r- “inch objective will be 
high enough while experience is being acquired by the beginner. 


EDITORIAL. 


A New Piece of Apparatus.—Dr. Lighton has for some time been 
experimenting upon dark-field illumination, and has realized his highest 
expectations in the piece of apparatus described in this number. With 
characteristic liberality he at once makes his invention public and gives 
its use to the fraternity. He explains his method of getting such illum- 
ination when using lenses of high power and wide aperture. He also 
has drawn the sketches from which the frontispiece is worked up. Dr. 
Lighton is one of the most enthusiastic microscopists in the West. 


Royston-Pigott, M. D., the eminent microscopist, died on Sep- 
tember 14th, at Eastbourne. It will be remembered that he did much 
work in the improvement of microscopic objectives. It was in recog- 
nition of this that in 1873 he was elected Fellow of the Royal Mic- 
roscopical Society. 

Slides Received:—We return thanks to the donor for the following 
interesting slide: 

Ffloney (genuine), showing crystals. Mounted shortly after the ma- 
terial was taken from the hive. P repared by John Aspinwall, Barry- 
town, N. Y. 


NOTES. 

A Simple Formula for Finding the Magnifying Power of a 
Compound Microscope.—Let M = magnifying power, A = the 
equivalent focus of the eye-piece, B = the equivalent focus of the ob- 
jective, O = the optical tube length (measured from the anterior prin- 
cipal focus of the eye-piece to ‘the posterior principal focus of the 
DO 
AUB’ 


objective) and D the distance for distinct vision; then M = 


Edward M. Nelson, in English Mechanic, Oct. 25, 1889. 


Amplification Required to Show Tubercle Bacilli.imWhen 
properly stained and prepared, the bacillus tuberculi can be readily 
recognized with a good ‘‘ one-fifth ” objective and a ** two-inch” eye- 
piece, normal tube length, or, roughly speaking, an amplification of 
250 diameters. We do not think that it could be done much below this 
amplification, though the sharpness of vision of the observer, his ac- 
quaintance with the object, and the excellence of his objective would 
be important factors in settling the question. A one-quarter objective 
with a two-inch eye-piece, normai tube length, gives an approximate 
amplification of 200 diameters. 

To be seen and diagnosed for certain, the bacillus tuberculi, in urine 
or water, must be prepared for examination by following the well-known 


278 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY | December, 


technique in such cases (fixing, staining, bleaching, and mounting). 
No person who has any regard for his reputation as a microscopist 
would undertake to diagnose for certain bacilli of tubercle from other 
similar forms existing in water, urine, or any other medium whatever, 
whether with a m agnification of 200 or 2,000 diameters. The property 
of taking certain Sailing stains, and retaining them so firmly that 
even nitric acid diluted with only three volumes of water or alcohol 
will not bleach them, is one peculiar to the tubercle bacillus, and shared, 
as far as we know, by the bacillus of leprosy only. This test, along 
with isolation and pure culture, alone makes the recognition of bacil- 
lus tuberculi certain. 

For search of tubercle bacilli and study of the same, we have found 
a one-tenth homogeneous immersion objective with a two-inch eye- 
piece (approximately 500 diameters) the most satisfactory and least 
tiring to the eye. A good one-eighth, however, with the same eye-piece, 
should be quite sufficient.—Vatzonal Me ee 


QUERIES. 


Putting the Maker’s Name on Objectives. 

In reply to the question of a subscriber as to the custom both at 
home and abroad with reference to putting maker’s names on objec- 
tives, we have the following statements from several of our leading 
dealers: 

1. By the Bausch & Lomb Optical Company. 

All reputable makers of objectives both in this country and abroad 
have their names engraved on objectives, which is a guarantee for the 
quality of the lens. There are some microscope objectives made in Eng- 
land and France which are sold with the cheap imported microscopes 
brought into this market by importers of optical instruments which 
bear no inscription as to who the maker is. 

2; By: Wi H.-Bulloch, Chicago; it. 

I do not know of any maker of first or second-class objectives in 
this country or abroad, ‘who does not put his name either on the ob- 
jectives or box. Any person who makes any pretention to microscopy 
will not usually purchase an objective unless the maker’s name is on it. 
It is said that a workman is known by his tools; and so far as I have 
had any experience with those who use the microscope, if they cannot 
give the maker’s name of the objectives or instrument, they are unwor- 
thy of being known as microscopists. 

3. DY. G: S. Woolman, New York City. 

The custom in the United States is to put the maker’s name either 
on the objective itself or on the box. Occasionally on the low-priced 
lenses the name is omitted. The French objectives quite often reach 
this country without name. The German custom is the same as the 
United States. A buyer can rely upon obtaining the make required if 
he orders from any reliable house here. The English first-class makers 
do the same as the United States. There are, however, a number of 
very fair English objectives made that do not have names upon them. 

4. By James W. Queen & Co., Philadelphia. 

Custom varies very much among the different makers. The princi- 
pal makers in this.country generally place their names upon the ob- 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 279 


jectives. Some of the foreign makers also do this, but it appears to be 
the more general custom abroad to place the name only upon the box, 
although this is by no means the invariable rule. The continental 
makers ueeally engrave the number only (which is an arbitrary one, 
as No. 3, No. 5, ete. ), upon the objective in the case of the cheaper 
lenses ; but in the case of higher priced lenses, as oil-immersion lenses, 
adjustable water immersions, etc., the maker’s name may also, perhaps 
now does most generally, appear. 

5. By Fr. J. Emmerich, Sr., New York City. 

Most of the makers in Europe, as far as our experience goes, do not 
put their names on their make, as we have had quite a number of Har- 
taack’s, Gundlach’s, Varick’s, and other makers, and never found their 
names on their objectives. It may be, however, that on particular oc- 

casions, or upon requests, these makers would not refuse to have their 
names put on, and we think, in the interest of buyers and investigators, 
it would be Besiable to have them do it, as we would have more con- 
fidence in a lens bearing the name of its maker than in one without it, 
because the latter would not dare to put his name on a bad or objec- 
tionable article if he cares for his reputation. I am of opinion that all 
makers should follow the example of Mr. Carl Zeiss, of Jena, whose 
name is distinctly engraved on every one of the objectives he produces, 
as from the way they are manufactured under the supervision of Pro- 
fessor Abbé, there cannot possibly be an inferior article produced or 
delivered from his workshop. I may, however, add that every buyer 
should look out that he gets really the genuine eis ee and would cau- 
tion him to beware of counterfeits. 


MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES. 


MicROSCOPICAL SociETY OF WASHINGTON, D. C.—L. M. Mooers, 
Sec’y. 

October 8, 1889.—The annual election of officers was as follows :— 
President, Dr. E. A. Balloch; Vice-President, Dr. A. N. Skinner; 
Copemecy., Or. ji. M. Lamb; Rec. Secy., Mr. L. M. Mooers; Trea- 
surer, Mr. Jieausls Y znaga ; Guten Dr. W. H. Seaman. 

Dr. Seaman gave an account of the twelfth annual meeting of the 
American Society of Microscopists at Buffalo; also a description of 
some of the methods of lens- making employed by the Bausch & Lomb 
Optical Company. 

October 22, 1889.—A paper was read by Dr. Thos. Taylor on ‘+ Tea, 
and its Adulterations.” The paper was finely illustrated with photo- 
graphs and colored camera-lucida drawings. Prof. Hitchcock gave an 
interesting description of native cultivation and preparation of tea. The 
President announced the following committees :—Essays, Mr. V. A. 
Moore, Dr. Seaman, and Dr. Lamb; Membership, Doctors Reyburn 
and Gibbs, and Mr. Doubleday. 


Oo -——_ 
TorRREY BoTANICAL CLUB. 


Wednesday, October 23.— Professor Schrenk exhibited microscop- 
ical preparations of cross sections of the leaves of the Witch Hazei. 


280 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [ December, 


Hamamelis Virginica, showing peculiar structures called ‘‘ osteo- 
selereid cells,’ found at the extremities of the fibro-vascular bundles. 
and situated vertically to the leaf-surfaces, after reaching to the epi- 
dermis. He concluded that they are functionally strengthening ele- 
ments. They are very abundant in the leaves growing in the shade, 
and wanting in those of firmer texture exposed to the sun light. 


<7 O 


BrRooKLYN MerpicAt Microscopical SOcIETY. 


Sepiember 4, 1889.—The twenty-fifth meeting was held at the 
Hoagland Laboratory. The President, Dr. C. Heitzmann, read a paper 
on ** The Intimate Structure of the Derma of the Skin.” Dr. J. H. 
Mennen read a paper on ‘** Silver Images in Inflamed Cornea.” 

Dr. Heitzmann said that, in reviewing the literature of this topic, 
the essayist comes to the conclusion that a thorough knowledge of the 
structure of the derma is as yet lacking. This tissue becomes intelli- 
gible only through the knowledge of tendon, in which the bundles run 
in a strictly parallel course, whereas in the derma, as in aponeuroses, 
the bundles are interlacing. Transverse sections of the bundles show 
interstices filled with medullary and delicate fibrous connective tissue; 
they are rich in blood-vessels and nerves, and may be termed inter- 
stices of the first order. Smaller groups of bundles are separated from 
one another by groups of the second order, likewise holding smaller 
blood-vessels. Between the larger bundles we find protoplasmic forma- 
tions, all interconnected, and thus producing a network, strikingly 
similar to that of a myxomatous connective tissue. These are the in- 
terstices of the third order. The bundles themselves are split up, 
though incompletely, into smaller ones by interstices of the fourth 
order, holding thin layers of nucleated protoplasm, or elastic fibres. 
The reticulum of protoplasm is continuous throughout the derma. In 
longitudinal sections of bundles only the protoplasmic bodies, but no 
lateral offshoots and no net-like arrangement thereof, can be seen. Dr. 
Heitzmann then described the papillary layer of the derma, which 
shows difference in structure according to age. In the new-born the 
papilla are mainly protoplasmic in nature; made up of delicate fibres 
in the middle aged; and in old age of a coarse fibrous tissue, freely in- 
termixed with hydropic protoplasmic bodies, thus causing the appear- 
ance of a myxo-fibrous structure. All the bundles are traversed by an 
extremely delicate reticulum of living matter, that can be brought to 
view by treatment with alcohol, or by treatment with solutions of gold 
chloride. The same reticulum is visible in specimens hardened 1 
solutions of chromic acid, immediately after mounting in glycerine. 
As soon as the glycerine soaks into the tissue the reticulum disappears. 
These details can only be studied in specimens mounted in glycerine, 
not in Canada balsam. 

October 2, 1889.—Dr. G. T. Kemp was elected a member, and Dr. 
A. R. Robertson was proposed. A publication committee to decide 
on the suitability of papers for ee rate was appointed, consisting 
of the president, the secretary, and of Dr. Van Cott. 

After the transaction of the regular business, an address was given 
by the president on the ‘+ History of the Development of Enamel,’ 
which was discussed by Drs. Eccles, Van Cott, and Heitzmann. 
(From Brooklyn Medical Journal, Nov., 1889.) 


15389. ] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 281 
NOTICES OF BOOKS. 


Christianity and Agnosticism. Papers by Henry Wace, D.D., Prof- 
Thomas H. Huxley, the Bishop of Peterborough, IW EL “Maal. 
lock, and Mrs. Humphrey Ward. The Humboldt Publishing Co., 
28 Lafayette Place, N. Y. 

The series of papers comprised in this work have been contributed 
mainly to the Wzxeteenth Century. Both sides write with vigor, and 
the adherents of each will prob: ably think their champions have the bet- 
ter of the discussion. The book will probably have quite a sale. Price, 
thirty cents. 

Plant Organization: structure and morphology of plants by the 
written method. By R. H. Ward, M.D., Troy, N. Y. 8° (wide), 

p- 24. 

The well-known manager of the Postal Microscopical Club and our 
much-esteemed friend, om Ward, has devised a scheme to extend the 
study of plants to a grade of teaching not heretofore attempted, and 
after some trial of it by successful teachers with their classes, he ven- 
tures to submit it to the public. The writer once contemplated much 
the same system of botanical study. 

He proposes a thorough and exhaustive study of a few plants rather 
than hasty identification of many. In this plan, of course, the micro- 
scope plays its part, magnified sketches of hairs, glands, pollen, epider- 
mis, etc., being called for. Outline drawing constitutes another part 
of the course. 

In two pages of illustrations are combined about 250 cuts, illustrating 
all kinds of roots, stems, leaves, flowers, and fruits. Into 16 pages are 
condensed a synopsis of plant organization in which are included all 
necessary descriptive terms with the definition of each. 

Upon ‘this subject the doctor speaks w isely and boldly, but may not 
secure universal approval, because there are those who still seem to 
desire to surround: scientific knowledge with mysticism. Doctor Ward 
has no such nonsence about him. Hid the preface he says: 

The commonly accepted classification and phr aseology have been 
revised, and important changes made throughout, always in the direc- 
tion, as far as seemed practicable at present, of discarding the artificial 
and Pncchanical theories of the past, and the erroneous and misleading 
terms and descriptions based upon them, and of the substitution of ex- 
planations and terms treating the plant as a living being, not dzz/¢t but 
grown. Surely the time has come to cease teaching students to say 
that organs are ‘‘ zzserted”’ where they have faemcets es grown; or 
that they are ‘* waztzzge.” when really absent because not w ranted. 

Without disparaging the usefulness of technical terms as a means 
of precision to thorough students of a science, it has long seemed evi- 
dent to the author that the memorizing, by whatever method, of the very 
numerous unfamiliar terms used by botanical authors, was a serious’ 
waste of time to that very large class of short-course students who 
neither expect nor desire’ to become botanists. For the benefit of such 
persons the words italicized, as believed to be suitable for their pur- 
poses, are either common English words, or those of obvious meaning 
on account of their familiar roots, or the very few technicalities w hich 
seem absolutely essential and which, from their fewness and the associ- 


282 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. — [December. 


ations by which they are introduced, may easily become familiar. On 
the other hand, the usual technical terms are added [in square brackets ] 
for glossarial purposes, for the assistance of classical scholars, or for the 
use of such other students as may feel the need of them, or be advised 
by their teachers to employ them. 


Oo 

The National Magazine is a new publication devoted to corres- 
pondence teaching and University extension, and is the organ of the 
new National University of Chicago. The first number contains arti- 
cles entitled ‘* Correspondence Teaching ; Its Advantages,” by Rev. J. 
C. Quinn, A. M., Ph. D.; ‘* Hints on Collecting and Preserving 
Specimens of Natural History,” by Prof. G. H. French, A. M.; 
‘¢ Lectures on English Literature,” ‘* The Reading Circle,” and the 
Announcement of the University, giving a list of thirty-five non-resi- 
dent, professors representing, among others, such institutions as the 
University of Virginia, Tulane, Boston, Madison and Lehigh Univer- 
sities, who agree to teach pupils at home by correspondence and grant 
them the usual degrees on examination. 


SUBSCRIBERS’ NOTICES. 


[These notices will be given six insertions in this column at 25 cents per line or fraction thereof. 
FOR EXCHANGE. —Slides of selected diatoms. D. B. WARD, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 


WANTED.—Unmounted microscopical material, also micrographic dictionary. Will exchange or 
buy. CHARLES VON EIFF, 124 Clinton Place, New York City. 


WANTED.—A clean copy of Rev. William Smith’s British Diatoms, and Schmidt’s Atlas of the 
Diatomacez. JAMES B. SHEARER, Bay City, Mich. 


OFFERED.—Diatomaceous Earth from Utah (Desert) for Histological Mounts. 
PROF. ORSON HOWARD, Salt Lake City, Utah. 


CORRESPONDENCE invited with a view to the exchange of either mounted or unmounted Oribatida 
(British) for American species. E. BOSTOCK, Stone, Staffordshire. 

TO EXCHANGE.— Native gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, and other beautiful cabinet specimens, 
polished ornaments and sections of p®trified wood—Chalcedony—and native turquoise, agate, amethyst, 
rubies, etc.; also Indian ornaments, curios, arrows, blankets, pottery, etc.; pelts of wild animals, species 
of native cactus, and a good second-hand “‘ Burt’s Solar Compass’? complete. Any or all of the above 
are offered in exchange for new, or good second-hand, objectives, condensers, polarizers, stand, or other 
microscopical apparatus. W.N.SHERMAN, M. D., Kingman, Arizona. 


WAN'TED.—Any works on Microscopy not already in my Library. 
H. M. WHELPLEY, F. R. M. S., St. Louis, Mo. 
WANTED.—(In exchange for slides.) ‘‘ Microscopical Bulletin,’ Vol. I. No. 5, August, 1884. 
M.S. WIARD, New Britain, Conn. 


Labels in exchange for slides. EUGENE PINCKNEY, Dixon, IIl. 


First-class Histological Slides for other good mounts; Histological and Pathological material cut on 
shares, S. G. SHANKS, M. D., 547 Clinton Ave., Albany, N. Y. 
OFFERED.—Griffith & Henfry Micrographic Dictionary to be sold; also Hoggs Microscope. 
J. P. WINTINGHAM, 36 Pine St., N. Y. 
WANTED.—A clean copy of Wolle’s Fresh-Water Algze of the United States (2 vols.) ; also good 
second-hand Grunow Camera-Lucida, and a self-centering Turn-table. 


JOS. P. THOMPSON, P. O. Box 1383, Portland, Me. 


FOR SALE CHEAP.—New Gundlach }, homogeneous-immersion objective, for 34; glycerine or 
water objective. 


J. M. ADAMS, Watertown, N. Y. 


THE AMERICAN 


MONTHLY MICKOSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 


LN DEX. 


PAGE PAGE. 

ANISISTS: COMUNE 6° 5 GeO NaNO: OOM NOMONE 55 | Bidwell, W. D., land titlesettled ... 60 

Actinomycosis, C. T. Caldwell IOI MICLOSCopeiny medicine .: . 5 . 253 

NOS Menian Cimiitihiesiimer.: «0. . 272° || Binding « 4.5% 3s she es ales see 17 

Agricultural Experiment Stations, | Biological notes . . 11, 16, 39, 67, 89, 113, 

: D4 iy, LO5 | 133, 157, 208, 257, 275 

ANTE, GIEETMORATEG Gina ia to aoe 113 | Biology, practical, V. A. Latham .. 151 
Alterations in manuscripts. ..... 126) | Blacktrotiofithe srapers.« caso sere 


American Society of Microscopists, 


Blanchard, F., notes... 


DEO, 162, 223.237" | 209, 255 
AmncsbaeverAcwiiatham ss ss TSI Bloodvcmeulation of... orain le oe Ae 
Amphibian eggs, to treat....... II | CinyStalllSiem ureter <i citaaesiee tunel ye see 219 
PANTIMINMETCOLORS Neleie 's s  s 211 HSS Oy aG.6 HET ON ON atte te one pnnee 217 
Animals, contagious diseases in. . yf) |} <== jC ono. ova. de 6 Sok SS od ous 218 
AUIS OMMEMMN Ment ie 2 es) | 2 se But | Staumsrdetected emt. ements 236 
Ammnuaisninesiofitrees 2.5... .. 275 hee technique of, G. C. Freeborn, 
Wpocinamatietest. .\ . 5... 12 217, 241 
Apochromatics, Romyn Hitchcock. . 49 | Blood-cell counting .......... 22 
/NOPLVAUUIS, MET 5 6 6 6 0 Ono oO ONOECRe Z277)\ Bolley, be Ju.> POccinizes sti 2) on 169 
=== [VOUS OW 5 > 5 Ooh OuOee (ONDRONCEEED 321 |e Bolton eB. Me bacterial aa.c<e oe ce 5 
Army Medical Museum......... 163 | OPC OIOEAIN G5, 6 680 Be Eno 105 
Aspinwall, J., ventilating bees . . . . 273 | Bone, making sections ........ ite) 
Asymmetry in humanembryo... . 158 | Botanical laboratories....... 8g, 114 
/dfiayglliia IE GE Seca Oe Deco 31 | preparations of Walter White. . 110 
PAMECOLOGSIa need cle 6 2 2 8 ees 275 We Brainan oem] AMMit = can erate sy cree en 2 Oz 
AROS 5 2 3's 6) dogkolOe ED EOmeEES 20132) |b rassspolushimiew spe. came cnecieamcean sie 49 
Bacillus lepre, growth of. ...... 135 | Brown-Sequard’s discovery ...... 257 
PMOCYANEUS «052. se ws 13 ENE ALMENts) Gre Bie tiell enya en its 227 
—— tuberculosis on potato, cultiva- Bud sectioning, Henry Shimer . 30 
UID OP Gc 6 6 ona so oto ORBanmOaomCEe 7) | MB TOUN OA NE AN ieadalss ak ovo. oeawan ome Ss 278 
Bacteriasanegciseaser, 7... 2... » Rca Cabinet, dene sBid welll. emcee teens 184 
— and tobaceosmoke........ 132 | Caldwell, C. T., Actinomycosis ... 101 
—— cultivation of, R. A. Foster. 12 Cancer em perois meen nen ed one 14 
—— character of, B. M. Bolton... 5 GIgISMOSIE (Ole, sates, cee ae 143 
—— disease producing ........ TOO |) Candor. ay pleafor paren se sierey aura 157 
—— influence upon digestion. . 70 | Canfield, W. B., urinary sediment . . 269 
——=imice, ©. Qi. Jackson... ... 233 | Carbolic acid, F. T. Chapman. . 127 
——— felation to fever 2... .... . 117 | Carmine stains for nerve tissue a Mee 
=== HP MTINE, Beebe woes so enoeSCnONS 259 | Carter, F. B.,desmids ....... 35,73 
Bacteriolopy . .. 1. . 3. < fO,40, Or, 135,.1| Cell-wall, relationsO8 ae. .) < .\. go 
16%, 200,259) | Cementfor slass Pie c-oc ss oye 3 271 
—— value of, B.M. Bolton...... 105 IRQS. 6 5-6 io inns GES. ROR 245 
Balloch, E. A., trichocephalus dispar . 193 | Cestodes in marine fishes ...... 89 
BAUSGDECHIEOMID I. 66. ke 8 278 | Chaney, Jr., L. W., the cray-fish ... 86 
iBGES, Geno. 6 6 Oi sseecrooEC 143, 273 | Chapman, F. T., carbolic acid . . . . 127 
———"WEMGMatine . : 0. 1 ss 3 3 89, 273 | Chlorophyll-bearing cells ...... spi 
BED ZO NANEMMOMe see + see tt 80 | Cholera and drinking water ..... 114 
ell och 2S 6 Oy Sue een ere Gori Chiysophenimirara iia sc: iss) ite. ences 80 
BENZOPUNPUGIM ss vs 6. s+ 7 oe VGn OG. w GIOVE GUE Gs Pomel as. <0, ay < "a area gun II 
pos tap hives 2 2 6s 17,23, 47 | Cockroach, new organin....... 89 
Bidwellsevw.i)-),,cabimet........ . 184 | Codfish, red,C. W. Smiley . 128 


284 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY [| December, 
PAGE PAGE, 
Color of flowers and fruits ...... Tr I Giliy.cerine mlOTunLs iene tan lenent y= 65 
Condenser, substage Gig. || (Groyssyey Iehoulllit(ey Inleyayrye A 5 oo ols 2 
Congo, red. . ab ao oudnols 31 | Government publications... 43 
Conser, H. N., nostoc ....... . 246 | Gram’s method of staining ..... . 212 
Consumption dag 8 6 Oo Bee c 67, | Grapevine) Giseasese-n-ct- aie Memicmerewes 275 
Contagious diseases, ‘James Law . 97 | Griffith, E. H., fine adjustment . ony 2 
Corn-stalk disease . : 210 | Haplodiscus piger, W eldonvse-neee re 12 
@orrections: .. . Jee. 4 so) ee eee |S HlancitiCs Weriinitsontag ae 183 
Correspondence . . 163 | Hetercecismal pucciniz, Bolley. ... 169 
Cover glasses . 65 | Hickory, sectioning, Henry Shimer, 
Cray-fish, H. L. Osborn 25, 147 104, 136 
I. We Chaney. y)itae-we) eta 86 | Histological sections 5c Bye 10 
Cronin mystery .-; , 187 | ——‘studies, Osborn... -). 332 255 047 
Crystal ponceau . ea 32 | —— Technique, Freeborn... . 217, 241 
violet . + 30 31,3 22) tlistology.melements  Ots-ien a 6mm On 
Crystalline lens : 159 | Hitchcock, Romyn, apochromatics . 49 
Cuccatis, solublecarmine....... 268 | ——athome.... EOP OF oho; 44 
Cucumbers, mildewupon....... 208 | ~— on Zeiss apparatus . Joo on 6 LZ 
Cupric sulphate .......... .. 238 | Hoagland laboratory 5 cok aet 
Cyanide .. Fe p B iGo) |i laWoyanvenerIN to 5 Soc oo Oa se Ss BET 
Dark-Field stop, W. ‘Lighton. jens ee 205 | Honey, Aspinwall a. seu. : 2772 
Deltapurpurin ; 804) = —"Penuines a5. - +s «) - eon 8S 


Dentine, structure of 


Epis omepe lsh 
Desmids, collecting... 5 acs wre 7e7 
——-- life history, F. B. Carter ye Soa 

preserving and mounting .... 7 


Detmers, H. J., microscopes 53 
Diatoms, W. A. Terry SI 
Diphtheria, bacillus of 14 
—— etiology of 112 


Disease; bacteriaand ....... BRM 
= Ol thie OVARY 17 uke selee tart taae 256 
of swine. ; 5 

Dissolving apparatus j 
Dodder, common 
Drawing objects, 


Oe Of tof ORO oO 


W.J.s Simmons Be 247 


Druggist, enterprising 180 
Drury, Ella M. : 188 
Editorial : 16, 43, 70, 117, 162, 

213, 237. 261, 277 
Bers of anieel, EF. Mathers. cyetceceoue its 
Electric light . ‘ 5) (us? caeerepan LIST, 
Elephantiasis, a cure for ee doaie e 209 
Emmerich ior. rs Jie eS) 
Erethizon dorsatus, F: Tucker man... 181 
Exchanges > 2AN T2218 
Experiment station ‘work Sia 6 Gy 
Extracts from correspondence . . 164, 238 
Farrant’s medium, C. M.: Vorce - 149 
HeliiGeon.,,Onielixitssaeme ye emcee 227 
Fernald, C. H., experiment stations . 185 


INE EMS cL tsuie etyonss lo caihe|s le <aee memes 
LEVI|Syetia Gc DMOOL Oona ma OMOuELEr Gis. o.oo. DiC) 
Finger-prints . . oe 
Forensic microscopy, Ww. i Lewis af Oy 


Foster, R. A., study of bacteria 12 
Freeborn, G. ce the blood 217, 241 
= DEWeaMenhods®. . 2. 5 0; 30;166570 
Fungi, British 33 
Gelatine, nutritive . Al 
Germs, yellow fever . Tran aries | 216) 
Ginn & Co. . : 143, 196 
Girdling a tree . 113 
Glanders, bacillus of 257 
spores of 42 


Hydrophobia: 225... mia c 67 
Infected books. . ee 160 
Information for scientists . 164 
Infusoria, mounting, Hargitt . 183 
Instantaneous change of field . 164 
Jackson, C. Q., bacteria. . 228 
James, F. L., mounting . 61 


Kissing the Bible Fae poe ot 
Kulhne’s methylene-blucys --n nc mese 
—— staining tubercle bacilli. ... . 260 


Larynx, motor center . 159 
Latham, V. A ,amceba . I51 
Law, J., contagious diseases . 97 
weonard? Dir Po: 222 
We prosy.) bacillussote-w-uenems 135 
Wewis, Vv - J. COnVen toni ay. mem meme 156 
—-— forensic microscopy . 197 
Libriform tissue . . Il 
Lichens and their hosts’. (2.9. wae go 
Lighton, W., dark-field stop 265 
Lustig, Dirt : 146 
Macrospores, dev elopment Ae. 113 
Magnifying power, finding . 277 
Manual of ‘vertebrates... .. 94 
Manuscript alterations 126 
Marine laboratory . . Reo E as |e 134 
Mather ph. cclcSo Sica, fem cme 15 


Te 17, 69, TT 2 
159, 209, 255 
Medicine, microscope in, Bidwell . . 253 


Medical microscopy . 


Menstrual organ... . 69 
IEROGIA A. a6 6 abo a -c-0.o © 160 
Mesozoic mammalia . Bie S 12 
Metanul yellows -me-e-n enn 205 3raGe 
Methods, new, Freeborn . . 9, 30, 66, 79 
Meth yereene ce tment => fatima eee 
-—-applicationof ..... 9 
Methylene blite gu <maennsi. 211, 259 
Microbes jintluence) fier) annie 69 
—— inthe stomach....... 133 
—— in snow c 134 
Micrococcus tetragonus ‘ies sha eS 


Micro-organisms, ‘psychic life of . 


1889.] MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL. 285 
PAGE. | PAGE. 
Micro-organisms, staining ...... 84 | Notices or Booxs—| Continued. ] 
Micio-photostaphs <5 2). .) 2. 2 4 276 Fomersof shakespearemeiaic) oo 22 
Microscope, American, Detmer’s 53 Tote Selita dete terneme nano at eee it |< 239 
= IGUSCOMELYMOLe 7/0" 50. ee ee © | © 143 lo mieiss Ody SSey arian. Me mcmn- tik 2O 
—— examining paper by 143, 274 Le ONOKOLISINd Md Gen ae: B Ol noe “oL De 239 
—— inthe Cronin mystery ..... wee Manual of Vertebrates ....... 94 
=a AL AMGMbItlE eT e 60 Werelssplind sean cin mater ee caren 94 
—— investigating the effect of reme- iIMneroscope’ Catalogues syne. seni 240 
GHES Oy 0.5 OU6 \o ce cadiggmch oF ULORE ROME 188 MiyensiGeneraleEM stony, lier cos. ace 262 
—— inmedicine, Bidwell. ..... ee PianiOneanizapion™ sci ¥-s-- sh. ut 281 
=== (domicile: Soa sioecmoMo et: Daearne 155 PlatolseerOtae Oras sare iis es sh 215 
—— selecting, Woolman....... 182 Practical Latin Composition . . . . 240 
sa INS 6 5 4620: onto one es 261 iIPractical’Mgeroscopy =o. sai. : 168 
Microscopic objects, drawing, Sim- Preferable Climate for Phthisis I41 
TINONUGM MEME Tota neiicnt sche se 6) c, « @ ss 247 Proceedings of the American Soci- 
Microscopical notes, Whelpley 65 byte aii fines serce us) lemon 47 
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETIES : Psychic Life of Micro: -organisms . . IgI 
Brooklyn Medical ate) sees Nash (2 SO, Psychology of Attention ...... 215 
LOSS ese (CEES GS Sa rr 18, 45, 93 | Rhetorical Ena yslSesr Seman toss ye I41 
WMGIMOTSE State ie.) - . Ss paces (Oe ADE Be\bCRNToy rp eg. BMOkd An OMENS Oe 96 
Innes (Cilliivs TERS’ oi gmas ce Sup eee eer 19, 71 Mraite de Microscopie.) «16...  « 140 
Leavenworth, Kans..... 46, 190, 239 diwor Great Netreatse-ntu ae. eh oes 167 
Manchester, England..... 6 Fp Wiltimateeanance ns vigvawen it owie 96 
INGA ACO Serio) Cag uentcne eer 93 LUD ROT Se aeehereas ab Rati een Gt uc i eae, 216 
EaEoloeical @ltbni ss 9... 4)... a7 Virginia Summer Resorts ..... 168 
Sits Lous (Clic. Gee vo naeoeeompe ee 238 Vocabulary to Homer’s Iliad. . 141 
SAME MTaneIscom 45, /71,,139, 189, t90, 214 | Nucina, anew stain .:...:... . 66 
Torrey Botanical Club ..... 202708)| Nucleus divistony. 4 5.0). 6 Ds 
PichyROCISMEIIC ws eo... oS ofa  Obituanynotice: eieans ten es ws ne 262 
\ViSIHAMOINIE ote SUS BOO ee 21 Ay Ob ECHIVES; PA MICKICA a. eels set eis 236 
Washington 21,46 119, 165, 279 PUttinemNamMesiOmiy jy lae ce ye 278 
IMMIGTOSCOpiIsts, Energetic . 1... .. 201 |! (Osborn sie nesvcray-Wsiht J. ss) 25, 147 
Microscopy, forensic, W. J. Lewis . . 197 | examination of mould ..... I 
——competitionin.......... a0) Oscillariay motions: of, Merry ~~: 81 
MUGOLOMMe tne yIMOe. 5 ose ss. $30) (Ovary, diseasesvoficn.)c. 00). cs): 256 
MInUSH el leninvarwtel se so. ss is | 88 | Oxy-cyanide raters Dabhccnemt Marcie ¢ 160 
NODLeMVEeO nn EAT Gt,. 025 1Ol, 211,259 | Paper, examigationof.... 2... . 274 
NMomdm rie Osbortls. 9.7)... P| SPSS n+ fon ogou ob Ene wb ubieD co4e ACEO. le 155 
Mountincww ee Chapman.. .-.'. . 127 | Peaster slnstitutersc «+ se si ese 160 
—— infusoria, C. W. Hargitt..... dey || NetsvavConl lai cos Qe neeeou amon a 5. Ovaoeol ane I 
TEC Maen amv Es WIOEGE « ss ss TAG gl PERU UOUS Hep acy 2 cer eens tomes en eete re e s 1302) 
—— philosophy of, F. L. James... 61 | Photo-micrographic apparatus . Selea 
TOG DTORSHOWENS st ple cw es 210 | Photo- -micrographs, Weel ions 2 180. 
Mosquito, OGSAMISION Me ae. Sw 11 | Picro-carmine, Weigert’s so a ion 
INIGBSa BL TENG 6 “oe Gy Shoo) ROCnECON CORE go | Piersol, G. A., carmine staining . . . 266 
Motions of diatoms, W. A. Terry S1,| Pillsbury, J. He, notes... <-15, 39,67, So, 
WNaphtholfalipihtais . cs. 3... .%.:. 188 ULL T5751 200, 257,275 
Nationalimacazine’ a. ... . . +. 282 | Podophrya, W. J. Simmons 145 
Natural History Society Povouo- ce taashyy, letoileray Tanvouloer Cellisns sae s Geo uc 133 
Wervousaninencooncelllife. . . .... 143 |Postal club boxes . . . . 7, 33, 63, 85, 115, 
INVER CORNET JES Sh | Reon ane 262 131, 164, 185 
INOStOCH IN. COMSeG 2.5 5.1. « 246i MEMIZACTESSAY Grimey anercs live) cic, ass) tes 14 
INI@USS 4p ota lola Was Gliaocaeiar L435 IS 277 || nOlosue tothe yearrsso.. . 9. a =. 16 
Notices OF Books: PUTby OL WellSepemsmaren es, «os 257 
Annual of Medical Sciences ... . 263 | Queen Mab Tes A3y O55 115, 130, 005 
Catalogue of Queen & Co...... Zone @ireen! Va Conearwene ree. ih...) 84. 279 
@hemuicallecture motes... -.... eyUy a) (OMENS 62s Sos 4 oa0 5 118, 278 
Chmsnaniijyandacnosticism. .*. . 281 | Rabbit pesh 2.52.5... ... 5.4. 134 
CGallese Botany — o.oo es nae | kana, blastoporerom . =... .... . . 12 
Wissecnomof the Dos . = 2... . 22) | INESPILAGMIORMHGHe te =. + sels 2) es 67 
Blements of Histology ....... 263) | Reynolds,.R. N., staining ...... 2773 
Pnglish Pastacd Present. ..... 1G) ||) DRONES HOYOS oot Sato Opens. oe 114 
Biologyiot Diphtheria ..... .; . 4 OM Ew OGaminmmenoier ss) .2- is, <<) s svcteodeelte So 
HorcemndEnergsy....... 142, 167 | Rogers, W. A., determining tempera- 
(Goal cing eis ola a GleeanencsoESeonc 142 HENTE! 56s 2, eos tee 5S Sie 224 


286 THE AMERICAN MONTHLY. [ December. 
PAGE. | PAGE, 

Rotifera ws) orocke. hey ae eine eric 133,.| ‘Taylor, Thomas, teatce- . seer eee 
Royston-Pigott, M.D. ........ 277 | Yea, adulteration of -. {5.2 eens 
RSTIGEGIS s 4 (+ (s: aigeh ch eRe Ry eter 158. | Techniques.)-); see. a ia), «sa, a ag goats 
Gilaraintine ug eG oa) dieolors Goh ded © 20,32) | slecth; sectioning aa nO 
Sealpidiseasesy. «a> . sebeln'- eee 159 | Temperature, W. A: Rogers (ga oon 
Scientific publications ........- 43 | Terry on diatomsand ocillaria.... 8: 
Sections for staining ......-. of50288 | DrachOmat on ashcnsi sis .2 eee oO 
Soyer tpnia we gad oo Go 4 6. c Toy | (richinosts swear. ik sp apicaiaeee 13, 69 
Shaving close ie cueu-ke. cliente eee 277 || Lrichocephalus dispar... ..- 3c neene 193 
Shimer, Henry, sectioning 104,136 Tubercle bacilli, amplification... . 277 
Silke aictiticiale ty cals c) eeiemes) tone me eae 258 | ——Inisputum'.ys |...) ois, oe - 209 
Simmons, W. J., how to draw ... . 247 | —— in phthisis ie OM On aan i TS, 
—— photo-micrographs ....... 180 | ——-staining..... <j) sack here 260 
==—— POGOphyna wove = beayees ces em 145 Tuberculosis from cows. ", om eae 158 
Slidesmeccivedn..-e-measemeu 143,207, 277. | —— transmissionof.... . 2 Jutxe coon 
Smiley, C. W., botanical sections . . 110 | Tuckerman, F., gustatory organs. . . 181 
Mall ++ TOsd3,, 117, 162, 2135227) | doy phold ste viene mame meme Be 2 39 

261, 277 | Lyphus bacillinninwaterm .-s-s8 eee 257 

—— = iwetsltcovolft nen Be choo Solo odie 128  Umbellifere, North American 133 
Smiley; Rebert Wee os) sar, se uo eee 163 | Universal medical sciences ...... 263 
—— convention of microscopists 22 Unreasonable requests. ........ 163 
Soda. CarmiInatevOl —iclis uber on ste 31 | Urinary sediment, W. B. Canfield . . 269 
SPeCiall CnSAtLOM con cl tote sbasresiirl ae 162 | Vorce, C. M., Farrant’s medium... 149 
Spencer Optical Co... . 1... 4... 164. |\9\Watch factory. = cy = sea ee ee 187 
Spirogyra, conjugation of ...... ZOOS) Wrateraniaghy sis). otc n-usiome ne 208 
Staining zodsperms, Reynolds... . 273 SAS 6 Goa aos ao = go, 114 
SOU ara es tee ees ace) fo iouL oe ZEQ Al dVWatsen Cells gee keke) vouroy hae net ee 136 

—— with turpentine ......... 29, | Welserts pilero-Catmine sa. -u lee 161 
———carmine, G: Av Piersol 2)2 - <x. 266 | Whelpley, H. M., laboratory notes .. 65 
—— cover glass preparations 221 | White, Walter, sections by . . . . 110, 164 
=e TT TOW ceieilo ie fouls eas) en chasis AG) j) JWibittle, \C: oo aoe onsen ess, 
===> (Cimin BI oo Bice ho Boo Oc 292) |\ Wood, strength oes -. enone 
== IMIGKOSCOPICAl, fa.) 6a «te se ys 20) ||) WoolmanssiG=o te n-ial- se ee 278 
=——— FE-ACENES Hokey 7s cei) ys) oo es 161 | —— selecting microscopes -.- = = < 182 
—— tubercle bacilli. ....... gl, 260 | Wounds; healinetoiy. gen eee 40 
=== ooo oS Nees Blend o-oo. 8 Sac 30 | WYeastwa m@w so... te eee 258 
Stowellle Mins tile cic. wom uci) acre tne L620) WellOw stevie hime men caen ieee 39, 133 
Subscribers’ notices . . 96, 120, 144, 168, | GAUSEIOR casey oc! sul see eae ee 158 
192, 216; 240, 264, 282 \| ———_ sermsSiof) .e. eeeteast) ee eine 40, 160 

SUDSELIPLIONS) <a cis) sleet ols, satel: yf | PASSS SC Oris S56 Bod oo Se 84 
DWAMGNGISCASES1OLimmcn ia Ain ieee teats 114 | photo- micrographic apparatus . I21 
“ARE A Kay cal ae Barcel ac sce cs O tombe aSeok ia cut LIS) "ZOOSperms,jstalnin See 273 


QH The American monthly 

201 microscopical journal 
A35 

WoO 


Biological 
& Medical 


Serials 


PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE 
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET 


UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY 


ries FAI 5 , 
ate ee 
fect 
Prateeg? sb 
aitait 
vey eu bie Nibipe pene (Lem P 
Rani Rites 
Ha ied tna 
ni + 


yale 
He 
it 


intent 
javey - 
panies 
Asan 


ia 
el 
i Bi 
ainte 
a ip 


tats 
uit i 
aan 


Ss 
Peaks e— 
a Se oa 
Sas = 
aces 
225, 
te 


= 
+: 


shay 
i 


ay 


= = 


Fee anes 


os 


—s 
~ — eesS 


ie ee Seige 

— eS: = Ste 
Bee eee ae ot Saree 
a ae = = 
Tao tae: 

~~. we : . 


aaa 


ores 


EGS 


+ 


Z eer - <= T= 
Gee = = errors 
mee oe = eee To 


se 
<= 


eS 


So 
Se 


se 


= = 
eee 


SS 


fi 


ae 
co 


ee ees 


4 


Hera Wh ht a 
Aaitieatent 
hee! hate 


ieee 
ttt 
MiMi 


' tee 
ce = HAY a is SLAs ( y 
Nabe = G8 ly ii atv i 
att agers a a a\e ae | 
hs ne hamaenanat 


ab ihin nha Aen sy 


ed